JP6802573B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that plays a game using a gaming ball (for example, a “pachinko ball”) as a gaming medium.

A game machine (pachinko machine) using a game ball as a game medium includes, for example, a door frame (“front frame 2” in Patent Document 1) located in the foreground and the door frame, as described in Patent Document 1. A main body frame (same as "mechanical plate 60") located behind, a game board (same as "game board 30") detachably attached to the main body frame, and a ball tank provided above the main body frame (same as above). "Tama tank 65"), a payout device provided on the side of the main body frame (the same "ball payout device 92"), and a payout ball passage portion that is bent in an substantially inverted L shape connecting the ball tank and the payout device. And have. The payout ball passage section is a horizontal tank rail that guides the game ball of the ball tank downstream (the upstream part of the "ball alignment rail 69" and the "curve gutter 74") and a vertical direction that leads to the payout device. It is composed of a guide passage (downstream part of the "curve gutter 74" and "prize ball passages 86a, 86b"), and the ball tank and tank rail of the payout ball passage part are the tank unit mounting part of the main body frame (the same "upper base"). It is attached to the unit 61 ").
Further, in the game machine, when the ball stopper (“ball stopper 71”) that can open and close the flow path of the payout ball passage (specifically, the tank rail) comes into contact with the game ball flowing through the tank rail. It has a ball rectifying member (the same "ball leveling member 70") that can swing while applying an appropriate load to the game ball, and also has an electric wire connection terminal for wiring above the tank rail (the same "terminal board 78"). ") Is equipped.

In addition, troublesome foreign substances such as metal powder generated by rubbing between game balls and resin powder generated by rubbing between game balls and cleaning pellets enter the payout ball passage of the game machine. On the bottom wall of the passage mainly of the tank rail of the payout ball passage portion, as described in Patent Document 2, for example, a drop port for dropping the foreign matter and discharging it to the outside (“Dust flow down hole” in Patent Document 2). 232a1 to 232a4 ...) Are provided.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 08-10413 (page 6, FIG. 4) JP-A-2002-66051

In recent years, in a game board, a back unit such as an image display device has become large in size, and the amount of protrusion to the rear has increased.
In addition, as the size of the back unit of the game board has increased, the amount of protrusion to the rear of the main frame surrounding it has also increased, but since the installation space for the island equipment in the game hall is limited, the back side of the game machine The design of is also difficult.

The present invention has been made in view of the above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of alleviating problems that may occur due to the concentration of components in a limited space on the back side of the machine located in the island facility. There is.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention is as described in claim 1.
The main body frame that can be opened and closed on the outer frame,
A game board that is detachably attached to the main body frame, has a game area portion on the front side through which a game ball can flow down, and has a box-shaped back box portion on the back side.
A spherical tank for storing the game ball, a tank unit that having a, a tank rail portion for guiding downstream the game ball of the spherical tank,
A tank unit mounting member for attaching portion for attaching the tank unit a top of the body frame is formed,
In a game machine equipped with
The said tank unit mounting member, a first opening portion in which the tank unit faces are formed,
Provided is a game machine in which a second opening that does not overlap with the first opening in the vertical direction is formed on the upper part of the back box portion of the game board while the game board is mounted on the main body frame. To do.
According to the gaming machine, since the partition between the tank unit and the back unit by providing the first opening to the tank unit mounting member is eliminated partially, space tank unit for accommodating the back unit of the game board space for installing the or tank unit the side is substantially extended to the back unit side, added by providing the second opening in the back box portion of the game board, the back box portion inside the tank unit mounting member partition between the order eliminated partially, the capacity of the back unit is substantially extended to the tank unit mounting portion material. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the back unit increases.
Also, the first opening faces the tank unit, moreover air heated in the back box portion of the game board is, toward the outside from the gap between the tank unit through the first opening from the second opening Therefore, there is almost no possibility that dust, foreign matter, etc. will invade through the first opening .
Furthermore, the opening can be a cause of strength reduction is dispersed into the back box portion and the tank unit mounting member, the strength reduction of the tank unit mounting member and back box portion hardly occur (e.g., paragraph 0669～ See paragraph 0684, FIGS. 98A-101, etc.).

In the gaming machine according to claim 1, the attachment portion opening notch may be formed so as to correspond to a front wall and a bottom wall located on the side of the ball tank closer to the player.
By doing so, it is possible to provide a larger storage space connected in an L shape toward the front wall side and the bottom wall side of the ball tank.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of alleviating problems that may occur due to the concentration of components in a limited space on the back side of the machine located in the island facility.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from behind. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front when the pressing operation part of a production operation unit was in an ascending position. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the outer frame. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the assembly under the outer frame of the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the hinge assembly on the outer frame of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower side. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) viewed from the rear front, and (c) is a cylinder in a conventional pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the lock from the front, and (d) is the perspective view which looked at the cylinder lock of (a) from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) disassembled and viewed from the rear. is there. (A) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) from the front, and (b) is a cylinder lock shown in a state of being rotated 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of (a). (C) is an explanatory view of a cylinder lock shown in a state of being rotated 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of (a). (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. (A) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the handle cover unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the handle cover unit and looked at from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the handle unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the handle unit and looked at from the back. It is sectional drawing cut along the E line in FIG. 41 (a). It is sectional drawing which cut | cut by the aer line in FIG. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit from the back. (A) is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the door frame by cutting horizontally at the part of the lower plate ball supply port, and (b) is a cross-sectional view showing the main part by cutting the same part as (a) in the conventional door frame. It is sectional drawing which shows. It is a top view which shows the part of the ball lending operation unit in the dish unit of a door frame enlarged. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front with the effect operation button directed upward, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit of (a) viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the lower front. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating unsprung holding member is in the position of the upward moving end, and (b) is the effect operation unit from the state of (a). It is sectional drawing of the effect operation unit in the state which is moved to the ascending position. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the effect operating unit in a state where the effect operating unit is in the lowered position and the elevating unsprung holding member is in the position of the downward moving end. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of the effect operation part outer peripheral decorative board, the button outer decorative board, and the button inner decorative board in the plan view which saw the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of a pressing operation part. (A) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, and (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the effect operation unit is in the raised position. It is a top view of the effect operation unit unit which shows the example in which a plurality of contact detectors are provided in the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit. (A) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detectors are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, and (b) is an explanatory diagram of the contact detection sensor main body and the plurality of contact detectors in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the example which provided the switching part between, and (c) is the effect operation unit which allows the plate left decoration unit, the plate right decoration unit, the effect operation unit, etc. of the plate unit to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the contact detection body on the front side and the rear side of the above. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a contact detector having decorativeness, and (b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another embodiment of the effect operation unit. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 62 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the woo line. (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front. (D) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 66 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AE. FIG. 66 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the OO line. (A) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing a state in which the outer layer of the two-color molding is opaque in the door frame, and (b) is a transparent outer layer in (a) while leaving the inner layer as it is. It is the right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in this state. It is a front view which shows each decorative substrate of a door frame. It is a top view which shows the decorative substrate of the part of the effect operation unit of a door frame. It is a rear view which shows each decorative substrate provided around the door window of a door frame. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is a perspective view of the main body frame seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. It is a rear sectional view which cut the payout device of a payout unit at the center in the front-rear direction of a payout blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade when the ball-extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). .. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and the lower full tank path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back lower part. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the substrate unit for each main structure and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the board unit for each main structure and looked at from the back. It is an enlarged side sectional view which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine which cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. It is a top view of the main body frame. It is sectional drawing which cut at the B1-B1 line in FIG. 98A. It is sectional drawing which cut at the B2-B2 line in FIG. 98A. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B3-B3 in FIG. 98A. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper part of the main body frame from the back. It is a rear side perspective view of the upper part of the main body frame which shows the state which disassembled the tank unit and further arranged the game board for mounting in front. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where a tank rail or the like is assembled on a ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side of (a). It is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 100 (a) including the sectional view of the main part of FIG. 100 (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the area where the game ball overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame is distributed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view which shows the vicinity of a tank rail enlarged in the perspective view which saw the main body frame from the back on the hinge side. It is a perspective view which enlarges and shows the part of the tank rail when the pachinko machine provided with the tank rail of another embodiment is seen from the rear. (A) is a plan view showing the tank rail and the like of FIG. 106 assembled together with the ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of (a) seen from the front, and (c) is (c). It is a perspective view which looked at the tank rail etc. of a) from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail or the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail or the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 107 (a) is a cross-sectional view of a tank rail or the like cut along a marker line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the tank rail of FIG. 107 in cross section. (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views showing another form in which the protective wall of FIG. 109 is provided on the gutter front wall and the gutter rear wall of the tank rail. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of a tank rail or the like of another form corresponding to the cross section of the cake line of FIG. 107 (a). FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of a tank rail or the like of another form corresponding to the cross section of the B3-B3 line of FIG. 98A. It is a perspective view of the ball stop member of another form. It is a vertical cross-sectional view of another form of a tank rail or the like in which the vicinity of a bent portion is cut. It is a vertical cross-sectional view of another form of a tank rail or the like which shows the state which moved the ball stop member of FIG. 115 in a retracted position to a protruding position. (A) is a sectional view taken along line Z1-Z1 of FIG. 115, and (b) is a sectional view taken along line Z2-Z2 of FIG. 115. (A) is a front view of the substrate unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) viewed from the front right, and (c) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) from the front left. It is a seen perspective view. (A) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 118 (a) viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 118 (a) viewed from the lower right rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 118 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 118 (a) disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is a cross-sectional view cut along the key line in FIG. 118 (a), (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Ku Ku line in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view in (a). It is sectional drawing cut by the Kake line. FIG. 11 is a bottom view showing a portion rearward of the door frame in the pachinko machine provided with the substrate unit of FIG. 118 (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the guide piece in the out ball discharge port of the out ball passage. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out sensor is detachable, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out sensor is removed in (a). It is a front view of a game board in which a center accessory and the like are made opaque in a pachinko machine. FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 126 as viewed from the front right. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 126 from the left front. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back. It is a schematic explanatory drawing of the wiring route from a function display unit in a main control board. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the center accessory and the like are made transparent. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 126. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 126. It is a front view of the game board which shows the inside of the game area where a game ball circulates, and the obstacle nail by cutting the table unit parallel to the surface of a game panel. (A) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the starting port unit, the side unit, the upper left side unit, and the attacker unit in the front unit, and (b) is the starting port unit, the side unit, the upper left side unit, and the upper left unit in the front unit. It is a perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the center accessory in the front unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory in the front unit as viewed from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the center accessory and the opening of a game panel. (A) is a perspective view showing the relationship between the center accessory, the game panel, and the back left decorative body of the back unit, and (b) is a front view of (a). (A) is a plan view of the third distribution device in the center accessory, and (b) is a perspective view of the third distribution device in the center accessory as viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the 3rd distribution device of a center accessory and looked at from the front upper part. It is an exploded perspective view of the third distribution device of the center accessory as seen from the front and bottom by disassembling. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the 3rd distribution device in the center accessory. (A) is an explanatory view showing the action of the protrusions provided on the second V winning opening and the third losing opening in the third sorting device of the center accessory, and (b) is the second V winning opening and the first 3 It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the game ball when the protrusion is not provided in the loss opening. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow path of the game ball on the right side in the table unit. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game balls circulating in the first guide passage in the guide passage group, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game balls circulating in the second guide passage in the guide passage group. is there. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball received in the accessory winning opening, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the part of the third sorting device in (a) from a plane, and (c). Is an explanatory view showing a part of the second sorting device in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation timing of the accessory winning opening, the 1st distribution device and the 2nd distribution device according to the type of "small hit". (A) is an explanatory view showing the flow of a game ball in an attacker unit, and is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in (a). (A) to (d) are explanatory views which show embodiment of the guide passage group different from FIG. 136. (E) and (f) are explanatory views which show the embodiment of the further different guide passage group. It is a front view of the back unit in a game board. It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit of a game board from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit of a game board from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the light guide plate effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the light guide plate effect unit as viewed from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the light guide plate and a pattern substrate in a light guide plate effect unit from the front. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the first pattern of the light guide plate is made to emit light, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the second pattern of the light guide plate is made to emit light. It is a front view which shows the arrangement of each decorative substrate of the back front production unit in a back unit. (A) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the back right decorative substrate of the back front effect unit in the back unit, the sub state indicator, and the right part of the center accessory by the left side cross section, and (b) is (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the back right decorative board of the back front production unit in a back unit, a sub-state indicator, and the right part of a center accessory from the front. It is a wiring diagram which shows the wiring of a part of LED for sub-state in the back right decorative board. (A) is a front view of the out ball detection unit in the back unit, (b) is a right side view of the out ball detection unit, (c) is a rear view of the out ball detection unit, and (d) is a rear view. It is a perspective view of the out ball detection unit seen from the front, (e) is a perspective view of the out ball detection unit seen from the back, and (f) is a perspective view of the out ball detection unit and the position near the lower right front. FIG. 6 (g) is a perspective view of the out-ball detection unit as viewed from the lower right rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the out-sphere detection unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the out-sphere detection unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is a perspective view showing the relationship between the game panel and the out-ball detection unit, and (b) is a perspective view showing a state in which the out-ball detection unit is in contact with the game panel. It is an enlarged cross-sectional view seen from the right side by assembling it on the game board and cutting it up and down at the center of the right sensor of the out port. It is a perspective view which shows the vicinity of the out opening from the front in the state of being assembled on the game board. Light guide plate of the back unit It is a front view of the game board which shows the light guide plate of the production unit in a state where the second pattern is light-emitting decoration. Light guide plate of the back unit It is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the first pattern is luminescent and decorated on the light guide plate of the effect unit. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine schematicly. It is explanatory drawing which shows the connection structure of each board, a motor, etc. in a game board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the main control side of FIG. 175. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of error display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting value confirmation display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a payout control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the payout control unit of FIG. 181. It is the flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the payout control unit following FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the payout control part timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passage processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the pre-determination process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd start port passage processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the hit determination process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. (A) is a hit determination table used for the lottery process for big hits, (B) is a big hit symbol determination table used for lottery processing for the types of big hits, and (C) is a type of small hits. It is a small hit symbol determination table used for the lottery process of. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st variation pattern setting process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot control processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit control process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit start processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit middle processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. This is an example of an error notification mode. It is a timing diagram which shows the timing of volume adjustment and sound output suppression of a predetermined frequency band. It is a timing diagram which shows the timing of volume adjustment and sound output suppression of a predetermined frequency band. It is a timing diagram which shows the timing of volume adjustment and sound output suppression of a predetermined frequency band. It is a table showing the winning probability and the like according to the set value of the game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the procedure of changing a setting value. It is a fluctuation pattern table used for determining the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the embodiment which the right detection sensor is provided in the 1st guide passage. This is a concrete example of the effect when the warning effect using the right detection sensor is executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the embodiment in which the detection sensor is provided in the 1st guide passage and the 2nd guide passage. This is a specific example of the effect when the warning effect using the right detection sensor and the left detection sensor is executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the embodiment in which the ball clogging clearing hole is provided in the 1st guide passage and the 2nd guide passage. It is explanatory drawing which shows the embodiment in which the ball clogging clearing hole is provided in the 1st guide passage and the 2nd guide passage. It is explanatory drawing which shows the embodiment in which the 2nd outlet is provided near the entrance of the 1st guide passage and the 2nd guide passage. It is explanatory drawing which shows the embodiment in which the 2nd outlet is provided near the exit inside the 1st guide passage. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution state of the operation when an abnormality occurs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution state of the operation when an abnormality occurs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the embodiment in which the 2nd out port and the 3rd out port are provided separately from the out port. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution state of the calculation in the case where the 2nd out port and the 3rd out port are provided separately from the out port. It is an emission color pattern table in which an emission color pattern of a light guide plate is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the embodiment in which a plurality of decorative bodies are provided around the display area of an effect display device. This is a specific example of the effect of the light guide plate and a plurality of decorative bodies when the light emission effect is executed. It is a pattern displayed on the light guide plate and the effect display device at the time of executing the imitation effect. This is a concrete example of the effect of the light guide plate and the effect display device when the imitation effect is executed. This is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. This is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. This is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the setting information determination process executed by the main control MPU. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the setting value hold suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the image data which combined the display mode of the hold notice effect and the display mode of a set value hold suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the setting value continuous suggestion effect. It is a table showing the winning probability and the like according to the set value of the game machine. It is a table showing the winning probability and the like according to the set value of the game machine. It is a time chart which shows the monitoring state of fraudulent activity while changing the setting of a set value. It is a time chart which shows the monitoring state of fraudulent activity when the fraudulent activity is not monitored during the confirmation display of the set value. It is a time chart which shows the monitoring state of fraudulent activity when the fraudulent activity is partially monitored during the confirmation display of the set value. It is a time chart which shows the monitoring state of fraudulent activity when the fraudulent activity is partially monitored while the setting value is changed. It is a front view of the game board of a modification. This is an example of a table used in the lottery process. This is a modified example of the setting value suggestion effect. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for each main structure and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back. It is a schematic explanatory drawing of the wiring route from a function display unit in a main control board. It is a perspective view of the main control unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the main control unit. It is a perspective view of the main control unit of another form. It is an exploded perspective view of the main control unit of another form. It is a vertical sectional view of the main part of the main control unit of another form. It is a vertical sectional view of the main part which shows the rotation operation state by the setting key of the main control unit of another form. It is an exploded perspective view of the main control unit of another form. It is a vertical sectional view of the main part of the main control unit of another form. It is a vertical sectional view of the main part which shows the rotation operation state by the setting key of the main control unit of another form. It is a vertical sectional view of the main part which shows the rotation operation state by the setting key of the main control unit of another form. It is a perspective view of the main control unit. It is a perspective view of the main control unit. It is a front view of the main part enlarged part of a main control unit. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line ZZ of FIG. 263. FIG. 263 is an enlarged front view of a main part of the main control unit showing a state in which the change suppressing means has changed to the second state. It is an exploded perspective view of the main control unit. It is an enlarged sectional view of the main part of a main control unit. It is an enlarged sectional view of the main part of a main control unit. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine schematicly.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position as viewed from the front right. is there. Further, FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind by disassembling into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and can be seen from the player side through the door frame 3 It includes a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which the game ball B (see FIG. 89) is hit.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 make up the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body of the main body frame 4. The hinge assembly 520 under the frame is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side in the front view as the center.

Further, in the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. Is formed, and the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated to the front, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 195 operated by a player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 195, and the player operates the effect operation unit 301 when the player participation type effect is executed. The player can participate in the production, and the player can be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301 in addition to the game by the game ball B.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. A hinge member 510 on the main body frame and a hinge assembly 520 on the lower side of the main body frame for attaching the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 for reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500. A ball launching device 540 for driving a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. A board unit 620 having a payout control board 633 in addition to a payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side and a power supply board 630 including a power supply switch 630a capable of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1. A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. I have.

The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is played by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which the game ball B is played by the operation of the player, a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and a front component 1000. It is attached to the rear surface of a plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side and divides the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the lower part of the rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200. On the rear side of the main control unit 1300 having the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311, the function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the game panel 1100. Attached to the front of the peripheral control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12), the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the game panel 1100. The front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are provided. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emitting effect according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N that are in contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege for the player by accepting or passing the game ball B. It is provided with a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005 for granting (for example, paying out a predetermined number of game balls B). The obstacle nail N is planted in front of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005 are provided in the table unit 2000.

The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the player operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. As described above, it is possible to entertain the player with the driving operation of the handle 195.

Further, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state that changes by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, or displays the light guide plate effect unit 3100 on the back front. It is possible to entertain the player by causing the light emitting effect to be performed by the effect unit 3200 or the like.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall. The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided. ing.

In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. At the same time, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2, the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame can detachably support the hinge member 510 on the main body frame of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically, respectively, and are arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially and rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. This is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, in the outer frame left assembly 10, the outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and the upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy mold material. The outer frame left member 11 has a recess 11a that is flatly recessed to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a portion on the right side surface that is opposite to the recess 11a to the right. It includes a bulging portion 11b that bulges toward the direction and a cavity portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame left member 11 are increased by the recess 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced by the cavity 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed in a symmetrical shape with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20, which will be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a are provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 12, the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is inserted into the cavity portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. Further, in the upper left connecting member 12, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the notch 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a and a flat plate-shaped upper side extending upward from the left side of the horizontally extending portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixed portion 13b, the flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portion 13c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion 13a on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b, and the upper lateral fixing portion 13b from the rear side to the right. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d extending shortly toward the direction. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower left connecting member 13, the rear surface of the contact portion 13d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and the left surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b is in contact with the right surface of the outer frame left member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 to remove the outer frame. It is attached to the frame left member 11. Further, in the lower left connecting member 13, the horizontal fixing portion 13a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the notch 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 has an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hook member 24 attached to the upper part of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. It includes a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy mold material. The outer frame right member 21 has a concave portion 21a that is flatly recessed to the left in the rear portion of the right side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a portion on the left side surface that is opposite to the concave portion 21a to the left. It includes a bulging portion 21b that bulges toward the direction and a cavity portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are increased by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper right connecting member 22, the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the upper right connecting member 22, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-shaped upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. From the lateral fixing portion 23b, the flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portion 23c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion 23a on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b, and the rear side of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d extending shortly to the left. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower right connecting member 23, the rear surface of the contact portion 23d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b is brought into contact with the left surface of the outer frame right member 21. By abutting and aligning the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the lower right connecting member 23, the horizontal fixing portion 23a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking the outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends to the left from the front side of the flat plate-shaped mounting portion 24a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and the mounting portion 24a. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped hook piece portion 24b on which the hook 653 for the outer frame on the upper side of the cage is hooked.

The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and has a flat plate-shaped mounting portion 25a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extending from the front side of the mounting portion 25a to the left. Insertion that allows the lower outer frame hook 653 to be inserted through the flat plate-shaped hook piece portion 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked and the hook piece portion 25b. It has a mouth 25c and.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right. The width of the outer frame upper member 30 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with a notch 30a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the notches 30a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end portion. A hinge assembly 50 on an outer frame, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment step portion 30b.

[2-3. Assembly under the outer frame]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly as viewed from the front by disassembling. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 includes an outer frame lower member 41 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right and extends to the left and right, and the outer frame lower assembly 40. A box-shaped front curtain plate member 42 that is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends to the left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and is open at the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front curtain plate member 42. A box-shaped rear curtain plate member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear curtain plate member 43. It includes a mechanism 44 and.

The width of the outer frame lower member 41 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame upper member 30.

The outer frame lower member 41 includes a notch 41a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutout portions 41a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively. As a result, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and includes a recess 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends to the left and right, and is pulled out from a position closer to the rear in the center in the front-rear direction toward the front end side. The recess 41b makes the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 as large as possible.

The curtain plate front member 42 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape in which the length in the left-right direction extends to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41 and the depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 is closed on the open rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the curtain plate front member 42 becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the curtain plate rear member 43. The space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 includes an elongated hole-shaped opening 42a that penetrates back and forth and extends left and right on the front surface near the right end.

The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than that of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the curtain plate front member 42 to the front surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate front member 42 to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a tubular connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends left and right and projects upward at the central portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so as to be positioned upward from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, toward the rear. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The length of the connecting cylinder portion 43a in the left-right direction is formed to be about 1/3 of the length of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also formed slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a. It communicates with the internal space of the 620a and forms the enclosure 624.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is such that the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. This is to prevent the pinching.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and has a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that the hinge member 60 under the outer frame, which will be described later, is highlighted, and a mounting portion. A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a and a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a are mounted. A vertical wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placement portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion protruding forward from the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d and being inclined so that the upper surface is positioned upward as the upper surface is directed backward. A part 44e and a part 44e are provided.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a and are open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. The standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of an illegal tool comes into contact with the standing wall portion 44d and bends upward, it comes into contact with the forward protruding upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d, and further intrusion. Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the hinge member 60 under the outer frame.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B that has fallen on the mounting portion 44a for some reason when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 is the standing wall portion. Since the movement of the outer frame 2 to the rear is prevented by the 44d, the game ball B is likely to stay on the mounting portion 44a. If the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a is first referred to as the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45 arranged apart from each other on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-shaped grill member 46 and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth, which are attached to the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 sandwiched between them. A frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 is provided.

The pair of guide members 45 are such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low friction material having low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 has a strip-like shape extending in the left-right direction, and has a plurality of blade portions 46b provided at intervals in the up-down direction. The blade portion 46b is provided in an inclined state so that the front end side is higher than the rear end side (see FIG. 47). The grill member 46 allows the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 (curtain plate internal space 40a) and the outside to be ventilated through a gap between the blade portions 46b.

The port member 47 communicates between the curtain plate internal space 40a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 through a gap between the blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (inside the enclosure 624) by the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Therefore, rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass.

When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the seal member 48 is sandwiched between the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 and compressed. This is to prevent the sound in the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 from leaking from between the connection cylinder portion 43a and the connection portion 621c.

According to the grill member 46 of the present embodiment, the air vibration emitted from the curtain plate internal space 40a to the outside by the main body frame speaker 622 is slanted upward and forward by the plurality of inclined blade portions 46b. It can be directed into the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 in which the handle unit 180 is housed through the notch opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295. As a result, when the player thrusts his / her finger into the inside of the handle cover 295 (the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (the driving device of the game ball B), the main body frame. By vibrating the speaker 622 and sending wind into the front cylinder portion 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented effect can be performed.

Further, since the port member 47 is opened forward, a part of the sound pressure emitted from the port member 47 through the plurality of blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 is discharged forward. Therefore, it is also released from the port member 47 to the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and other players wandering in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The pachinko machine 1 can be heard, and the player's attention can be attracted by the directing sound, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player can be provided.

Further, since the port member 47 is provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 with respect to the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the main body frame 4, the volume of the enclosure 624 is increased. Therefore, it is possible to output a deeper bass effect sound, entertain the player, and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 21 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the hinge assembly on the outer frame of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 21 (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower surface. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated. Is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is provided, and a mounting screw 53 for attaching the lock member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame is provided.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has a horizontally extending flat plate shape and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the left and right center of the front extending portion 51b and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of the 51a, and extending downward from the edge of the front extending portion 51b from the left side to the front side and the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The hinge member 51 on the outer frame is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 described later of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a strip-shaped lock body 52a extending forward and backward, an operation piece 52b protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It is provided with an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending diagonally to the left front and a mounting hole 52d penetrating up and down near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame by the attachment screw 53.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right surface near the front end is the end of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51e of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space is formed in the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock main body 52a so that the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame can be accommodated.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Hinge member under the outer frame]
The hinge member 60 below the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a and a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b rising upward from a portion rearward of the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a. A hinge pin 60c under the outer frame that protrudes upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d that penetrates the horizontal portion 60a up and down and allows only one game ball B to pass through. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 60b and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

In the state where the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled on the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and a screw (not shown) is provided. It is fixed to the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. Further, the rising portion 60b is attached to a portion on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. As a result, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is moved between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the distance from 4 is gradually narrowed, the vehicle rolls to the rear side where the distance is wide, and the battery can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, since the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame can be easily prevented from rolling. The game ball B can be made difficult to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a quadrangle extending vertically in front view, and the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side via the main body frame 4. Has been done. The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 195 operated by a player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 is a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape extends vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 which is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and is attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visibly closes the game area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and a door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front surface, the handle cover unit 290 covering the outer periphery of the handle unit 180, the dish unit 200 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper side of the dish unit 200. The door frame left side unit 420 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side unit 430 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit. It is provided with a door frame top unit 450 attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a which is formed in a square shape (rectangular shape) whose outer shape extends vertically and penetrates back and forth, and a rear side of the door frame base 101. The speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner of the rear view, the door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end of the rear view at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, and the back surface of the door frame main relay board 104. The door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the view, the rear relay board 106 after the handle mounted to the left side of the rear view of the door frame sub-relay board 105, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay. A door frame relay board cover 107 that covers a part of the board 105 from the rear side, a handle rear relay board cover 108 that covers the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the relay board 106 after the handle. And the foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that was launched by the ball launcher 540 and did not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is discharged from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 195 that can be rotated by a player, and the handle unit 180 launches a game ball B in the upper plate 201 by operating a handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer circumference of the handle unit 180. The device 540 is used to perform a game of driving into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached so that the left side of the front view can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed, and the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 is closed. The game area 5a of the above is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a square and flat door frame base 101 having an outer shape extending vertically, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the lower right corner of the rear view. ..

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end of the rear view at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view of the board 104, and the rear handle relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame relay board cover 107, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. The rear relay board cover 108, which is attached to the rear side and covers the rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and the cable cover 109, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable, are attached. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the relay board 106 after the handle. And the foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 and a handle cover unit 290 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 in the lower front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 420 in the left outer front surface of the door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the right outer front surface of the door window 101a, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

Further, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. ..

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 penetrates back and forth, and includes a door window 101a formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 in the direction. As described above, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door windows 101a penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 has a handle mounting seat surface 101b (see FIG. 42, etc.) formed in the lower right corner of the front view and inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes forward from the right end side, and the handle mounting. Cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted between the seat surface 101b and the door window 101a, and the left side of the front view of the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b. It is provided with a ball feeding opening 101e for facing forward the entrance 141a and the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140.

Further, the door frame base 101 is to the left of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, so that the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 faces forward. The passage port 101f, the upper plate ball passage port 101g that penetrates the front and rear so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end of the front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to the front, and the door. A glass unit mounting portion 101h, which is recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted, is provided.

Further, the door frame base 101 is formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage port 101 g), and is provided with a plurality of vertically long slits 101i penetrating the front and rear. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, in the plurality of slits 101i, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the main body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located in the rear. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later is penetrated. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. In the speaker duct 103, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the tubular portion is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, the pachinko machine 1 can be satisfactorily guided to the front (player side).

Further, the speaker duct 103 is provided with a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the lower rear surface of the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged on the left side of the door frame relay board cover 107 when viewed from the front, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1c. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, rear relay board after handle]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105, and the rear-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the relay board 106 after the handle and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 82). And a part of (see FIG. 83) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which the quadrangles extending to the left and right are combined on the right side of the front view of the upper part of the quadrangles extending vertically, and the door frame is formed in an inverted L shape. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 when viewed from the rear. The door frame sub-relay board 105 includes a handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and a door frame left side lower decorative board of the door frame left side unit 420. 423, the door frame right side unit 430 door frame right side upper decorative board 432, door frame right side lower decorative board 433, door frame top unit 450 door frame top relay board, etc., and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. It is for relaying the connection, and the rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals project rearward. In the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105, when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts extending vertically of the door frame sub-relay board 105 are doors. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining portion of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The rear handle relay board 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is mounted on the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear-handle relay board 106 is connected to the door frame main relay board 104, the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single-shot button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106 is covered with the rear-handle relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1d. Door frame relay board cover / rear relay board cover / cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear relay board cover 108 after the handle, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 (a part extending vertically in an inverted L shape). It covers the rear side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front side and the left side when viewed from the front open. In the state of being assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and are open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

The rear-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and provides a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball rental operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and openings for passing wiring cables are formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1e. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is provided on the left and right sides connecting the left and right reinforcing frames 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112, which are arranged apart from each other on the left and right, and the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. The extended upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 having the left end side attached at a position upward from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending to the right to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A cylinder mounting frame 115 connecting the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of mounted cylinder mounting frames 115 vertically separated from each other on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112, and a hook 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 is hooked. The hook member 116 is provided.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically at substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are separated in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends to the left and right in the vertical direction with a width wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a that is squarely cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The notch 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper plate ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetrating portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and has a pair of rear piece portions formed in a quadrangular flat plate shape extending vertically in a front view, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It includes a pair of side pieces extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front, and a flat plate-shaped front piece portion connecting the front end sides of the pair of front extending portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. The left rear piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

The hook member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating the front and rear. The door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is hooked on these hook members 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are punched metal plates by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled so as to be along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is assembled. , It is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). In the state where the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passage port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. At the same time, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 101d of the door frame base 101.

[3-1f. Hinge assembly on door frame]
The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the front upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so that the hinge can be rotated. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It includes a member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a having a quadrangular front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. In the hinge bracket 121, the mounting piece 121a is mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is a columnar metal rod bent into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a portion extending vertically penetrates from below near the front end of the pair of projecting pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. A portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the pair of projecting pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is placed around a portion extending vertically on the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame upward via the collar member 123.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is in a state of being urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower protruding piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 moves the door frame upper hinge pin 122 as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 may be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, or may be pulled out downward. it can. As a result, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view is hinged with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 extending vertically is located coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1 g. Hinge member under the door frame]
The hinge member 125 under the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the front left lower corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so that the hinge can be rotated.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a quadrangular front view flat plate-shaped mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) projecting downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b is provided.

The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the hinge member 125 under the door frame are formed by bending a metal plate. The hinge pin 126 under the door frame is a columnar metal rod having a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end portion. When the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the hinge pin 126 is located coaxially with the portion extending vertically of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the protruding piece 125b. It is installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 makes the door frame 3 hingeable with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame lower hinge hole 522a of the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. Can be supported.

[3-1h. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. FIG. 34 (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame viewed from the front, FIG. 34 (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) viewed from the rear front, and FIG. 34 (c) is a conventional pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) seen from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) seen from the back. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) disassembled and viewed from behind. It is a figure. 36 (a) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) shows a state of being rotated 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of (a). It is explanatory drawing of the cylinder lock, and (c) is the explanatory view of the cylinder lock which shows the state which was rotated 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of (a).

The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body. It is used for opening / closing and locking with the frame 4. The cylinder lock 130 is a regular columnar cylinder body 131 extending forward and backward, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a regular keyhole 132 provided behind the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the keyhole 132. It includes a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates with the rotation of the key.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece portion of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear, and the rear end is attached to the front piece portion. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces forward from the rear end to positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the rotation is rotated by inserting the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 into the pair of notches. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

More specifically, the cylinder lock 130 includes a first cam member 134 provided on the rear end side of the cylinder body 131 and rotating together with the rotation of a regular key inserted in the key hole 132, and a cylinder mounting frame 115. The second cam member 135, which is rotatably attached around the axis in the front-rear direction at a portion below the cylinder body 131, and the upper end side rotates at a portion to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134. A strip-shaped first arm 136 that is rotatably attached and the lower end side is rotatably attached to a portion to the right of the center of rotation of the second cam member 135, and the upper end side is rotation of the first cam member 134. It is provided with a strip-shaped second arm 137 that is rotatably attached at a portion below the center and rotatably attached at a portion below the center of rotation of the second cam member 135 on the lower end side. ing.

Further, the cylinder lock 130 has a cylinder mounting frame so as to cover the cylinder body 131, the first cam member 134, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 from the rear except for the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133). The rear cover 138 attached to the 115 and the upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are rotatably attached to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. It has 139 and.

In the first cam member 134, the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the rear surface side, and the upper end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front surface side. The second cam member 135 is rotatably attached from the rear side by the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the rotation transmission member 133 is integrally rotatably attached to the rear side sandwiching the front surface of the cylinder mounting frame 115. The lower end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the front side of the second cam member 135, and the lower end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front side in front of the first arm 136.

In the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion to which the first arm 136 is attached and the portion to which the second arm 137 is attached are separated from each other at an angle of 90 degrees about their respective rotation axes. doing. Further, each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 is provided at a position where the first arm 136 is attached at a position farther from the rotation center than the portion where the second arm 137 is attached. ..

The rear cover 138 has a screw whose upper end side is not shown in a state where the shaft portion 138a projecting outward from the lower ends of both left and right side surfaces in a columnar shape is locked in the L-shaped locking slit 115b of the cylinder mounting frame 115. Therefore, it is detachably attached to the cylinder attachment frame 115.

In this cylinder lock 130, the cylinder mounting frame 115, the cylinder body 131, the rotation transmission member 133, the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 are made of metal. ..

The cylinder lock 130 is in a state in which the front end of the cylinder body 131 substantially coincides with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 440b of the door frame right side unit 430 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

Here, the conventional cylinder lock 130A will be described. In the conventional cylinder lock 130A, as shown in FIGS. 34 (c) and 34 (d), the cylinder body 131 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115A from the rear and the rear end is mounted on the front piece. There is. The cylinder lock 130A is provided with a rotation transmission member 133 on the axis of the cylinder body 131.

Subsequently, the operation of the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIGS. 34 (c) and 34 (d), the conventional cylinder lock 130 is provided with the rotation transmission member 133 on the axis of the cylinder body 131, whereas the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment is provided. As shown in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b), the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position separated downward from the axis of the cylinder body 131.

In a normal state, as shown in FIG. 36A, the upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 of the cylinder lock 130 are centered on rotation of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. The upper and lower ends of the second arm 137 are attached to the right portion, and the upper and lower ends of the second arm 137 are attached to the portions below the respective rotation centers of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. The cylinder body 131 can be rotated at an angle of 90 degrees from the normal state in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction by using a regular key.

In this state, when the first cam member 134 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 by the key inserted into the keyhole 132, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 move upward. It will be. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right side of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, the first arm 136 will rotate the second cam member 135 in the counterclockwise direction. On the other hand, in the second arm 137, the upper end side is attached below the rotation center of the first cam member 134, so that the second cam member 135 is counterclockwise from the second arm 137. There is almost no force to rotate it in the clockwise direction.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state, the force is mainly transmitted via the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 rotates counterclockwise. It rotates in the direction, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force acting upward by rotating the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction is the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the first cam member. It is proportional to the distance in the left-right direction from the center of rotation of 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state, the force acting upward on the first arm 136 becomes smaller, whereas the force acting upward on the second arm 137 acts upward. The power to do becomes greater.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction exceeds 45 degrees from the normal state, the force acting upward on the second arm 137 becomes larger than that on the first arm 136. The second cam member 135 rotates in the counterclockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated from the normal state to an angle of 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction (see FIG. 36 (b)).

When the key is used to rotate the key 90 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state to 90 degrees clockwise to return to the normal state, the action opposite to the above is applied. It will work.

On the other hand, when the first cam member 134 is rotated in the clockwise direction via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 by the key inserted into the keyhole 132 from the normal state, the upper end side is to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134. The first arm 136 attached to the side moves downward, and the second arm 137 attached to the upper end side below the rotation center of the first cam member 134 moves upward. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right side of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, the first arm 136 attempts to rotate the second cam member 135 in the clockwise direction. In contrast to the large force acting on the second arm 137, since the upper end side of the second arm 137 is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135 is rotated clockwise from the second arm 137. There is almost no force to rotate in the direction of.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates in the clockwise direction from the normal state, the force is transmitted mainly through the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 moves in the clockwise direction. It rotates, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force that transmits the rotation of the first cam member 134 by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the second cam member 135 is the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134. And the distance in the left-right direction between the rotation center of the first cam member 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates in the clockwise direction from the normal state, the force for rotating the second cam member 135 in the first arm 136 becomes smaller, whereas the force for rotating the second cam member 135 becomes smaller. In the arm 137, the force for rotating the second cam member 135 becomes large.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the clockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the second arm 137 will rotate the second cam member 135 more than the first arm 136. The force is increased, and the second cam member 135 is rotated in the clockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated from the normal state to an angle of 90 degrees in the clockwise direction (see FIG. 36 (c)).

When the key is used to rotate the key 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state to 90 degrees clockwise to return to the normal state, the operation is the opposite of the above. Will be done.

As described above, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 attached to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 so as to be in phase with each other at an angle of 90 degrees. Since the first cam member 134 (the key inserted in the key hole 132) is in any rotation position, at least one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 is connected by The second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133) can be rotated by transmitting the rotation, and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 can be locked and unlocked well.

Further, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the rotation is transmitted by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 as the rotation transmission mechanism, so that the rotation transmission member 133 ( Since the axis of the transmission cylinder 654) of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 can be provided at different positions, the position of the cylinder main body 131 in the door frame 3 can be set to an arbitrary position without changing the locking unit 650. The cylinder body 131 (keyhole 132) can be provided at a portion that does not interfere with the decoration of the door frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 with high decorativeness of the door frame 3 can be provided.

Further, as described above, even if the position of the cylinder main body 131 is changed in the door frame 3, it is not necessary to change the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, so that the locking unit 650 can be diverted, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the machine.

By the way, in the conventional cylinder lock 130A, since the rotation transmission member 133 is provided behind the cylinder body 131, a fraudster who knows the configuration inserts a tool from the front to the rear of the cylinder body 131. By illegally rotating the rotation transmission member 133 with the tool, there is a risk of opening the door frame 3 and performing an illegal act. On the other hand, since the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment is provided with the rotation transmission member 133 at a position away from the axis (rear) of the cylinder body 131, a tool is inserted behind the cylinder body 131. Even if an attempt is made to rotate the rotation transmission member 133, the rotation transmission member 133 cannot be rotated because the rotation transmission member 133 does not exist at the relevant portion, and a fraudulent act of opening the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 or the like. Can be prevented from being done.

Further, in the cylinder lock 130, since the second arm 137 is connected to the first arm 136 and the portions of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 which are separated from each other at a rotation angle of 90 degrees, the second arm 137 is the first. A straight line in which a portion attached to one of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 of one arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. Even if it is located above, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the parts farthest from the straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. It will be in a state of being. Therefore, when either the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 is located at the dead point of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the rotation from the first cam member 134 is transferred to the second cam member 135. Even if it cannot be transmitted, the rotation from the first cam member 134 can be transmitted to the second cam member 135 by the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137, so that the first cam member 134 can be transmitted. There is no great resistance to rotation, the key inserted in the keyhole 132 can be rotated smoothly, unlocking and locking can be done easily, and the key inserted in the keyhole can be forcibly rotated. It is possible to prevent the key from being damaged and prevent the key from being damaged.

Further, since the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at the eccentric position by the two arms of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, for some reason. Therefore, even if one arm is damaged, the rotation can be transmitted by the other arm, and the pachinko machine 1 having a highly reliable cylinder lock 130 can be provided.

Further, the smooth rod-shaped (strip plate-shaped) first arm 136 and second arm 137 transmit the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at the eccentric position. Therefore, when the rotation is transmitted by the gear, the gear may be rotated by hooking the tip of the tool on the teeth of the gear, and the rotation transmission member 133 may be rotated. Since the arm 136 and the second arm 137 have a smooth rod shape, the tip of the tool can be made difficult to be caught by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, and the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are moved. This makes it possible to prevent the rotation transmission member 133 from being rotated, and reliably prevents the locking unit 650 from being illegally operated to unlock the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. be able to.

In the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are used as the rotation transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. , Not limited to this, for example, a rotation transmission mechanism using a plurality of gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using gears and rack gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using a sprocket and a chain, a rotation transmission mechanism using a pulley and a belt. , Etc. may be used.

[3-1i. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37A is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 37B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 38A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 38B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with an open front cover and a box-shaped front cover with the rear end of the front cover 141 closed and the front open, and a game ball entered from the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The front cover is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 having a ball hitting supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, the rear cover 142, and the front cover 141. The rear cover 142 one by one a ball pulling member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a game ball B on the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143. The ball feeding member 144, which is rotatably supported around the axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. It is provided with a ball feeding solenoid 145.

As shown in the figure, in the ball feeding unit 140, the ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a, and the ball feeding member 143 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144, respectively.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b when viewed from the front. From 141c, the operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removing unit 240 The portion of the ball-extracting taxiway 241c that is open to the rear on the upstream end side is closed from the rear side.

The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a and a partition portion 143a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 144 by partitioning between the entrance entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b below the entrance 141a. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from the middle of the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A rotating paddle portion 143b that is rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a rotating rod portion 143b below the operating rod 143c. It is provided with a weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. The working paddle 143c of the ball pulling member 143 is formed so as to project forward through the arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 37 (a)). The operation paddle 143c is the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 that moves downward by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Contact with the upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 is after the blocking portion 144a and the blocking portion 144a having a fan-shaped plan view centered on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the partition portion 143a of the entrance / exit 141a and the ball pulling member 143. It is provided with a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of rotation axis, and a rod-shaped paddle portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotating shaft core by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the paddle portion 144c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotating shaft core in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hit ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a. It is designed to rotate with and from the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 and enters the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (striking ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction of the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the paddle portion 144c side closes the ball hitting supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip swinging in the vertical direction in the ball feeding operating rod 146. It is provided with a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates a ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operation paddle 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation paddle 146 extends to the left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is rotatably attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 around the axis extending back and forth. Has been done. In the ball feeding operation paddle 146, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is pulled toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feeding is centered on the right end portion. The left end side near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side close to the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. It rotates in this way and returns to the initial state. As a result, in the ball feeding operation paddle 146, the left end portion (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 swings in the vertical direction by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction so as to be able to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b, which is arranged on the opposite side to the side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and a shaft portion 147b extending upward. The ball feeding member 144 includes a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped paddle portion 144c (see FIG. 38 (b)) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation.

The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating paddle 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating paddle 146. It can be rotated around an axis that extends back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operation paddle 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in a state of being positioned at the feeding position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is sucked by the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. Rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in the ball feed unit 140 is controlled by the launch control unit 633b (see FIG. 173) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 542.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is adapted to apply a moment such that it is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the ball pulling member 143 or the weight portion 143d which are rotatably supported by the shaft. However, the operating rod 143c projecting forward of the ball removing member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 that operates by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is positioned and partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b under the normal state, and the ball pulling port 141b side. The game ball B does not invade.

Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 downward, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmission unit 242b to move the operation transmission unit 242b downward. Along with this, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 242b, the ball pulling member 143 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b. The partition is released. As a result, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball extraction port 141b side, and is discharged from the ball extraction port 141b to the ball extraction guide path 241c of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 in the plate unit 200. It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

Since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 in which the working transmission portion 242b with which the working paddle 143c of the ball pulling member 143 abuts is formed is urged upward by the spring, the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if it is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by a spring via the operating rod 143c, it is possible to prevent the ball pulling member 143 and the like from being damaged, and the game ball B is formed by the partition portion 143a. It can prevent it from bouncing back.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 38B and the like) that is recessed forward to the upper right in the rear view of the ball hitting port 142a in the rear cover 142. The fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape with the outer shape of the front view extending to the left and right, and the upper piece portion 148a and the upper piece portion 148a which are separated vertically at substantially the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. It includes a lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C chamfer shape on the tip end side (right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other. .. The upper piece 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent so that the right end in the front view projects rearward with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same surface as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. As a result, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b form a V-shaped groove that expands toward the right.

The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b communicates with the inside of the ball striking supply port 142a. Become.

According to the fraud prevention member 148, the fraudulent game ball B to which the string is attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140 and attached to the fraudulent game ball B. When a fraudulent act such as manipulating the string to move the fraudulent game ball B in and out of the first starting port 2002 or the like is performed, the fraudulent game ball B launched (struck) by the ball launcher 540 A string attached to the illegal game ball B is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b by the momentum, and then a V-shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed portion of the shape, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using the fraudulent game ball B to which the string is attached.

[3-1j. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. 39 (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 39 (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 40 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side in the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which is launched by the ball launcher 540 and does not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202 and is discharged from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and an open front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. It is equipped with 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and penetrates the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit 200. A full tank receiver that opens rearward on the lower right side of the ball passage 150a and the through ball passage 150a when viewed from the front and can communicate with the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4. It has a mouth 150b.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 opens upward on the right side of the front view of the full tank ball receiving port 150b, and does not reach the game area 5a even though it is fired by the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul ball receiving port 150c that receives the game ball B (foul ball), and the game ball B that is open forward near the lower right corner of the front view and is received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c. The ball discharge port 150d is provided so as to discharge the ball forward and communicate with the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit 200.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharging port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. It is provided with a storage passage 150e having a possible size.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed so as to straddle both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed on the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 and a movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. It is provided with a full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that urges the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

In this foul cover unit 150, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the storage passage 150e is filled to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full with the game ball B. Therefore, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower plate 202 is full, the payout of the game ball B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, the staff of the game hall, and the like to that effect, and urge the player to eliminate the fullness of the lower plate 202.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the penetrating ball passage 150a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 described later in the main body frame 4. The door opening / closing contact portion 150f to which the working protrusion 613a of the 613 can come into contact is provided (see FIG. 90). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface moves downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated to rotate the lower end of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear and is detachably attached so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front), and also makes the game visible. It closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the glass frame 161 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 to attach the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. It includes a mounting member 163.

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position lower than the upper left and right corners in the front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 161b and. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 96). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 96).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 163b and the like. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably mounted on the outer side of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. As a result, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When the glass unit 160 is removed from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by the reverse procedure of the above. As a result, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base portion 163a, the protruding portion 163b restricts the movement of the glass frame 161 to the rear. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally lifted, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally disengaged from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged separately from the left and right sides of the flat plate-shaped main body 171 having a predetermined outer circumference and the flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body 171 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end thereof projects downward from the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. The rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (the game ball B launched by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). As a result, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 172 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to come into contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit and handle cover unit]
The handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 41 to 47 and the like. FIG. 41 (a) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and FIG. 41 (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line E in FIG. 41 (a). FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in FIG. Note that FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view of only the door frame 3 in which the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are omitted.

The handle unit 180 of the present embodiment is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the plate unit 200 together with the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer circumference, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be operated by the player. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

First, the handle unit 180 will be described. The handle unit 180 is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 whose rear end is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle cover base 291 of the handle cover unit 290, which will be described later, and to the front end of the handle base 181. A disc-shaped handle 195, a plurality of handle guides 196 attached to the rear side of the handle 195 and guided by a handle cover base 291 described later, and a disk-shaped handle base 181 attached to the handle base 181 so as to cover the center of the front end side of the handle 195. The cover pedestal 183, the handle decorative board 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface, and the handle attached to the cover pedestal 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decorative board 184. It is equipped with a front lens 185.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 195, a handle 195 attached to the front end, and rotatably attached to the outer periphery by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. The handle base 181 and the inner have a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. It includes a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

Further, the handle unit 180 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end side is attached to the handle 195 to return the handle 195 to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). The steering wheel return spring 190 and the one end side are attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is viewed clockwise through the transmission gear 188. It is equipped with an auxiliary spring 191 that is urged in the direction.

Further, the handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a tip side protruding outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button that detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193 and is attached to the handle base 181. It is equipped with an operation sensor 194.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, the disc-shaped front end 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base 181a, and the cylindrical base 181a. It also has three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear cylinder portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 291d of the handle cover base 291 which will be described later. Therefore, with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three ridges 291d, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the rear cylinder portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 and the ridges 291d are inserted into the three groove portions 181c, respectively. Is inserted so that the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the handle cover base 291.

The handle 195 includes a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of (here, three) spoke portions 195b extending outward at intervals in the circumferential direction from the central hub portion 195a, and a plurality of spokes. An annular outer ring portion 195c that connects the tips of the portions 195b, and two that extend in an arc shape around the rotation axis (shaft member 187) and penetrate the central hub portion 195a in the front-rear direction. It includes a slit 195d and a locking projection 195e that protrudes rearward from a position inside the rotation center of the slit 195d and locks the other end side of the handle return spring 190. The outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the general outer peripheral surface of the handle of a conventional pachinko machine.

The three spoke portions 195b of the handle 195 are clockwise and clockwise with respect to one spoke portion 195b extending horizontally to the left from the central hub portion 195a in a state where the handle 195 is free (not rotated). Two spoke portions 195b extend from a portion having an angle of 120 degrees in each counterclockwise direction. The three spoke portions 195b extend with a length such that a gap into which a player's finger can be inserted is formed between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c.

The outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is provided coaxially with the center of the central hub portion 195a. The outer ring portion 195c is formed in an annular shape with a constant cross-sectional shape with the rounded side of the U-shape facing forward.

The handle 195 is formed so as to have translucency as a whole, and is partially plated with an electrically continuous plating portion from the central hub portion 195a to the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. As a result, the touch of the handle 195 can be detected by the handle touch sensor 192 even when only the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is touched. Therefore, the game ball B can be driven even by turning the outer ring portion 195c.

The handle guide 196 has a U-shaped guide portion 196a that is open toward the center side of the handle 195, and a flat plate-shaped mounting stay 196b that extends from the front end of the guide portion 196a toward the center side. There is. In the three handle guides 196, the mounting stay 196b is mounted behind the spokes 195b of the handle 195 so that the guide portion 196a is located behind the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195. The handle guide 196 is restricted from moving in the front-rear direction by inserting the guide piece 291 g of the handle cover base 291 described later into the inside of the guide portion 196a.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape having a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and includes three mounting bosses 183a protruding rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 195d of the handle 195 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the cover pedestal 183 penetrates the slit 195d of the handle 195, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 195d, and the rotation angle of the handle 195 is restricted. In this example, the handle 195 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

There are a total of 10 handle decorative substrates 184, one in the center, three on the middle circumference with a certain interval in the circumferential direction, and six with a certain interval in the circumferential direction along the outer circumference. Three LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) are mounted in a triple concentric pattern. These LEDs 184a are divided into five groups: one in the center, three in the middle, two in the upper left of the outer circumference, two in the upper right of the outer circumference, and two in the lower part of the outer circumference. (See FIG. 72). A 24-bit LED driver 184b having a unique address for causing each LED 184a to emit light is mounted on the handle decorative substrate 184. This LED driver 184b can control up to 24 systems, and controls 10 LEDs 184a divided into 5 groups with a total of 15 systems of 3 systems for each set so that each LED 184a can emit light in full color. I am doing it.

Although not shown, the handle decorative substrate 184 has two power lines (one is a ground wire) for supplying power for driving the LED 184a and the LED driver 184b, and commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires is connected, which is one control signal line for receiving signals such as, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 184b with the peripheral control board 1510. .. Then, in the LED driver 184b of the handle decorative board 184, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, the LED driver 184b is divided into five groups according to the command. The 10 LEDs 184a can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

As described above, since the handle decorative substrate 184 has the LED driver 184b, the number of light emission of the LEDs 184a is larger than the number of electric wires constituting the wiring cable to be connected individually (here, the set). Since it can be controlled every), the number of electric wires can be reduced, and the configuration of electrical wiring can be simplified.

The front surface of the steering wheel front lens 185 bulges forward in a round shape and has translucency. The front handle lens 185 is provided with a lens member three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member inside. The steering wheel front lens 185 is light-emitting decorated by appropriately emitting an LED on the front surface of the steering wheel decorative substrate 184.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 195 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a. Therefore, when the handle 195 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launching device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance, and the rotation of the handle 195 The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the angle.

The steering wheel touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the steering wheel unit 180, and when the player comes into contact with the steering wheel 195, it detects static electricity acting on the steering wheel 195 and makes contact with the steering wheel 195 of the player. To detect. Then, when the handle 195 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be driven.

Therefore, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 195 in some way without touching the handle 195, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be driven. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 195 by a method different from the original one to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

The single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193 by the player. When the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 stops the drive of the launch solenoid 542. Therefore, if the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 195, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 195, and the single-shot button can be temporarily stopped. By releasing the pressing operation of 193, the game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength before operating the single-shot button 193.

Next, the handle cover unit 290 will be described. The handle cover unit 290 covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180 on the rear side of the handle 195, and covers the outer periphery of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover base 291 whose rear end is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. An inner 292 whose rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200, and an annular handle cover decorative board 293 which is provided on the front side of the inner 292 and has a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on the front surface. It includes an annular substrate cover 294 that covers the handle cover decorative substrate 293 from the front, and a handle cover 295 that covers the outer periphery of the inner 292 and has a rear end attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200.

The handle cover base 291 has a tubular front tubular portion 291a that has substantially the same inner diameter as the inner diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 and extends forward and backward, and the inner diameter decreases from the rear end of the front tubular portion 291a toward the front. 291b of the inner wall portion extending to the inside, a tubular rear cylinder portion 291c extending forward and backward with an inner diameter capable of inserting the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 through the middle wall portion 291b, and the inner circumference of the rear cylinder portion 291c. It is provided with a plurality of (three in this case) ridges 291d which are projected inward and extend back and forth in the circumferential direction and are provided at positions corresponding to the groove 181c of the handle base 181 in the circumferential direction.

Further, the handle cover base 291 has a flange portion 291e extending outward from a portion rearward from the front end of the outer periphery of the front cylinder portion 291a, and the same position as the front end of the front cylinder portion 291a from the middle of the flange portion 291e. At the portion between the cylindrical outer cylinder portion 291f projecting forward and the front end of the front cylinder portion 291a and the flange portion 291e, the guide piece 291g projecting outward from the front cylinder portion 291a and the front cylinder. It includes an opening 291h that penetrates the lower part of the portion 291a.

The inner wall portion 291b of the handle cover base 291 extends in an arc shape whose cross section bulges outward from the rear end of the front cylinder portion 291a to the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction. The rear end of the rear cylinder portion 291c is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The rear cylinder portion 291c is formed to have the same length as the base portion 181a of the handle base 181, and the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is inserted therein. The three ridges 291d correspond to the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 and can be inserted into the groove portion 181c to make the handle base 181 relatively non-rotatable. The outer cylinder portion 291f extends forward from a position outside the center of the flange portion 291e in the radial direction. In this handle cover base 291, a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction so as to connect the front surface of the flange portion 291e and the outer peripheral surface of the outer cylinder portion 291f.

The guide piece 291g projects from the outer circumference of the front cylinder portion 291a from the center between the outer circumference of the front cylinder portion 291a and the inner circumference of the outer cylinder portion 291f to a position closer to the front cylinder portion 291a. The guide pieces 291 g extend in the circumferential direction with a length in the range of about 110 degrees, and are provided in three directions in the circumferential direction at intervals of 10 degrees. A U-shaped guide portion is formed by inserting the rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 in the handle unit 180 behind the guide pieces 291 g and rotating the handle 195 through the guide pieces 291 g. The guide piece 291g can be positioned in the 196a to restrict the movement of the guide portion 196a (handle 195) in the front-rear direction.

The opening 291h has a length in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front cylinder portion 291a to the vicinity of the flange portion 291e, and has a size in a range of an angle of about 90 degrees in the circumferential direction, and penetrates the front cylinder portion 291a. ..

The inner 292 has an annular base 292a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter larger than the flange portion 291e, and the inner 292 extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the base 292a. It has a leg portion 292b and a plurality of (here, four) notches 292c which are notched from the rear end of the leg portion 292b to the vicinity of the base portion 292a and are provided apart from each other in the circumferential direction. The base portion 292a is located behind the flange portion 291e into which the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 is inserted from the front. The legs 292b extend in a curved shape so as to bulge outward, and the rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200. The notch 292c is provided at the upper and lower portions and the left and right portions of the leg portion 292b, respectively.

The handle cover decorative substrate 293 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the same outer diameter as the flange portion 291e. The handle cover decorative substrate 293 is mounted with 12 LEDs 293a and an LED driver 293b having a unique address for causing each LED 293a to emit light. The 12 LEDs 293a (full-color LEDs) are provided in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are divided into 6 sets, 2 on the lower left from the center, 2 on the left, 2 on the upper left, 2 on the upper right, 2 on the right, and 2 on the lower right. It is divided (see FIG. 72). The LED driver 293b can control up to 24 systems, and control 10 LEDs 293a divided into 6 groups with a total of 18 systems of 3 systems for each set so that they can emit light in full color. I have to.

Although not shown, the handle cover decorative substrate 293 includes two power lines (one is a ground wire) for supplying power for driving the LED 293a and the LED driver 293b, and commands and commands from the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires is connected, one control signal line for receiving a signal such as an address and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 293b with the peripheral control board 1510. There is. Then, in the LED driver 293b of the handle cover decorative board 293, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, the LED driver is divided into 6 groups according to the command. The 12 LEDs 293a can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

The board cover 294 has an annular front plate portion 294a and a front plate portion 294a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and substantially the same outer diameter as the outer diameter of the base portion 292a of the inner 292. It has a tubular side plate portion 294b whose outer peripheral edge extends rearward for a short time. In the substrate cover 294, the front plate portion 294a is located between the flange portion 291e of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover decorative substrate 293, and the side plate portion 294b extends to the base portion 292a of the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 has a front hole 295a having the same inner diameter as the outer diameter of the outer cylinder portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 at the front end, and is a spindle type (kamakura type or bowl type) that bulges toward the rear. , Etc.), and a plurality (here, four) notch openings 295b notched from the rear end to the front are provided in the circumferential direction. The handle cover 295 is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the inner 292, and the plurality of notch openings 295b are formed so as to coincide with the notch 292c. The rear end of the handle cover 295 is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200 via the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 is molded in two colors using synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, the handle cover 295 is molded in two colors with two types of resins, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface. , Circular or radial patterns are formed. That is, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the handle cover 295 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71 (a)). When molding the handle cover 295, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

As shown in FIG. 46 and the like, the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment are assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and inside the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 with the handle 195 in the handle unit 180. A portion on the rear side of the steering wheel is inserted, and a steering wheel 195, a front lens of the steering wheel 185, and the like are located on the front side of the steering wheel cover unit 290. The rear end of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 sandwiches the portion of the handle cover unit 290 that closes the rear end of the rear cylinder portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 and the handle mounting seat surface of the door frame base 101. It is attached to 101b.

In the handle 195 of the handle unit 180, the central hub portion 195a at the center is rotatably supported by the handle base 181. Further, in the handle 195, the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the central hub portion 195a is rotatably supported by the handle cover unit 290 by the handle guide 196 attached to the rear side. In the handle guide 196, the rear end side of the guide portion 196a is inserted (locked) between the front cylinder portion 291a and the outer cylinder portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 and between the flange portion 291e and the guide piece 291g. ), And it is rotatably supported in a state where movement in the front-back direction (axial direction) is restricted.

The handle 195, the handle cover base 291 and the inner 292, the board cover 294, and the handle cover 295 in the handle cover unit 290 are formed so as to have translucency, and the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative board 293 is made to emit light. In addition to being able to illuminate the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the inside of the handle cover base 291 (front cylinder portion 291a), the handle cover 295, and the like can also be luminescently decorated.

Since the handle cover unit 290 has a notch opening 295b and a notch 292c that coincide with each other in the handle cover 295 and the inner 292, the handle cover base 291 is provided on both the left and right sides and the lower side when viewed from the outside. It can be made to appear as if there is a hole communicating with the inside of the front cylinder portion 291a. As a result, the player is relieved of the mental anxiety of thrusting a hand (finger) into the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through between the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. Can be done.

The notch opening 295b on the upper side of the handle cover 295 (the notch 292c on the upper side of the inner 292) is closed by the dish right decoration unit 275 and the door frame right side unit 430.

In the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the inside of the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 into which the rear side of the handle unit 180 is inserted is below the inner 292 and the handle cover 295 through the opening 291h. It communicates with the notch 292c and the notch opening 295b (see FIG. 47). As a result, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B or the like enters the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the lower side It can be discharged below the handle cover unit 290 through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b.

Further, when a liquid or a game ball B enters the notch openings 295b on both the left and right sides of the handle cover 295, the lower side passes through the gap between the front cylinder portion 291a and the leg portion 292b of the inner 292. It can be discharged downward from the notch opening 295b.

Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, the notch opening 292c on the lower side of the inner 292, and the notch opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295 are assembled under the outer frame of the outer frame 2. It is provided on an extension line in the inclination direction of the blade portion 46b of the grill member 46 in the solid 40. As a result, the wind (wind pressure) emitted diagonally upward and forward from the grill member 46 via the blade portion 46b due to the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 is passed through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b to the front cylinder. It can be made to enter the portion 291a. Therefore, when the player thrusts his / her finger into the inside of the handle cover 295 (the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (the driving device of the game ball B), the main body frame speaker. By vibrating the 622 and sending the wind into the front cylinder portion 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented effect can be performed.

Further, since the handle cover 295 has a notch opening 295b, when opening the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, the notch opening 295b on the right side can be pulled with a finger, and the door frame 3 or the like can be pulled. It can be used as a handle when opening.

Further, since the handle 195 is plated up to the outer ring portion 195c, the handle touch sensor 192 can detect the touch of the handle 195, and even when only the outer ring portion 195c is touched, the game ball B Can be typed in.

Further, since the handle cover 295 has a notch opening 295b, the rotation position of the handle 195 can be easily positioned by hooking a finger on the outer ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b of the handle 195. It can be fixed, and the game ball B can be continuously driven into the game area 5a with a constant strength without continuing to twist the hand. As described above, since the game ball B can be driven by rotating the handle 195 by various methods, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of selecting the driving operation suitable for the player.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291). The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located behind the left end side in a plan view and faces the outside (open side). Therefore, the handle cover base 291 is used. The handle unit 180 attached via the handle unit 180 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 and perform the rotation operation without any discomfort.

As described above, the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment are provided so as to be openable and closable with the left side as the axis, and the game area 5a of the game board 5 is visibly closed from the front. In the lower right corner of the door frame 3, a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of spoke portions 195b radially protruding from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer circumference connecting the tips of the plurality of spoke portions 195b. Since a handle 195 having a ring portion 195c and a handle 195 having a ring portion 195c and a tubular handle cover unit 290 extending rearward from the outer peripheral ring portion 195c are provided, a handle in a conventional pachinko machine is provided. The handle 195 and the handle cover unit 290, which have never been seen before, can be seen in the area where they are, which can have a strong impact on the player and strongly attract the interest of the player. At the same time, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game with the pachinko machine 1, and the game is played against the player who is wandering in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be used.

Further, since the player's finger can be inserted into the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the player can insert the player's finger. When the handle 195 is operated to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a, when the player grabs the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, the player's finger is inserted into the handle cover unit 290. Therefore, the operation of the handle 195 can be given to the player a feeling different from that of the handle of the conventional pachinko machine, and the player can be entertained by the new sense of driving the game ball B. It is possible to suppress the decrease of.

Then, when the player is operating the handle 195, when the effect sound is output from the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the speaker unit 620a in the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4, the speaker is caused by the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622. The air in the enclosure 624 by the box 623 vibrates, and the vibration of the air in the enclosure 624 through the curtain plate internal space 40a and the port member 47 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the outer frame 2 communicating with the enclosure 624 is sound pressure. It is emitted forward as (sound wind). At this time, the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 is transferred to the notch opening 295b of the handle cover 295 and the handle cover by the plurality of blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 provided at the front end of the port member 47. It can be guided into the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the opening 291h of the base 291 and into the handle cover unit 290 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c. A sound pressure stimulus can be applied to the finger of the player who is operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted. Therefore, the sound pressure from the port member 47 is supplied to the player's fingers inserted in the handle cover unit 290 through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h according to the game state in the game area 5a. , It is possible to surprise the player, foresee the arrival of an opportunity, change the amount of operation of the steering wheel, entertain the player, and make it difficult for the player to get bored. , It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, since the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 can be supplied into the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h, the handle cover By cooling the inside of the unit 290 and making the environment around the fingers of the player operating the handle 195 comfortable, it is possible to alleviate the stress on the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game. it can.

Further, as described above, with respect to the finger of the player who is operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the handle 195 or The sound pressure (sound wind) emitted forward from the port member 47 provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 different from the door frame 3 provided with the handle cover unit 290 is applied to the grill member 46. Since the stimulus is given by guiding by a plurality of blades 46b, various sensors (handle rotation detection sensor) provided on the handle 195 are compared with the case where the handle 195 is provided with a vibration device. 189, handle touch sensor 192, single-shot button operation sensor 194, etc.) and the bearing mechanism are not damaged, making it possible to make the handle unit 180 less likely to be damaged, and the damage to the handle unit 180 is not suitable for the player. It is possible to avoid giving a pleasant sensation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, a spoke portion 195b, and an outer ring portion 195c, the handle 195 looks like a steering wheel of an automobile. Therefore, the handle of a conventional pachinko machine Even if the appearance is significantly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible for the player to intuitively recognize that the operation of the handle 195 is the same as that of the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, even a player who sees the pachinko machine 1 for the first time can operate the handle 195 of the pachinko machine 1 without any confusion, and the pachinko machine can be used as a pachinko machine to play without hesitating the player. It is possible to make it easier to select the machine 1.

Further, a notch opening 295b and an opening 291h are formed in a portion facing the lower side of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 into which a player's finger can be inserted through between the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. When the inside of the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) is viewed from the front, the lower part of the handle cover unit 290 is lower than the handle cover unit 290 through the opening 291h and the lower notch opening 295b. Since it becomes visible and a feeling of openness can be given to the tubular handle cover unit 290, it is possible to reduce the player's anxiety about inserting a finger into the handle cover unit 290, and the player can be seen. The handle 195 can be operated without hesitation.

Further, a notch opening 295b and an opening 291h that penetrate the handle cover unit 290 are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 facing downward, and a port of the outer frame 2 (outer frame lower assembly 40) is provided. Since the member 47 is opened forward, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B or the like enters the handle cover unit 290, it is discharged downward from the lower notch opening 295b and the opening 291h. At the same time, it is possible to make it difficult for the liquid or the like discharged downward from the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h to enter the port member 47.

Further, the handle 195 is provided with the central hub portion 195a, the spoke portions 195b, and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, and the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 having the same diameter as the outer peripheral ring portion 195c has a plurality of front ends. Since the notch opening 295b is provided, the central hub portion 195a can be gripped and operated in the same way as the handle of a conventional pachinko machine, the spoke portion 195b can be operated only with a finger, and the outer ring. The steering wheel of an automobile can be operated by the portion 195c, the outer ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b can be gripped by a finger, or the handle cover unit can be straddled by the outer ring portion 195c. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of performing operations such as picking the inside and outside of the 290 with a finger, and capable of driving a variety of game balls B (handle operation). Therefore, the game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a by a method that is easy for the player to operate according to the game state, the state of the player, and the like, so that the player is less likely to get bored and the player. It is possible to entertain the driving operation of the game ball B and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b of the handle 195 may be gripped by a finger, or the inner and outer sides of the handle cover unit 290 may be pinched by a finger so as to straddle the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. By doing so, it becomes possible to fix the operation position of the handle 195. Therefore, in addition to the same handle operation as the handle of the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to perform the handle operation that cannot be achieved by the conventional pachinko machine, so that it is possible to provide the player with various handle operations. , It is possible to entertain the steering wheel operation and make it difficult for the player to get bored.

Further, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the handle cover unit 290 is in a form extending rearward from the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, and the handle cover unit. The appearance of the 290 as being integrated with the handle 195 can be made, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look good and attract the attention of the player.

Further, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, it is possible to prevent the vertical dimension of the handle cover unit 290 from becoming larger than necessary, and the handle cover unit 290. By suppressing the pressing of the game area 5a (door window 101a) upward, it is possible to prevent the game area 5a from becoming narrower, and the game area 5a can be relatively enlarged. The large gaming area 5a makes it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 stand out, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that strongly attracts the attention of the player.

Further, by appropriately emitting light of the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative substrate 293, the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover 295) and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be light-emitting and decorated. Therefore, even if the player operates the handle 195, the light emitting decoration of the handle cover 295 and the outer ring portion 195c is not blocked by the player's hand, and the handle cover 295 and the outer ring portion 195c are made to stand out. It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can attract the attention of the player.

Further, a handle 195 is provided in the lower right corner of the door frame 3 opposite to the hinge side, and a notch opening 295b is provided in a portion of the handle cover unit 290 facing the right side of the outer peripheral surface. Therefore, the notch opening 295b can be used as a handle when opening and closing the door frame 3. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the door frame 3 with a handle that makes the door frame look unattractive, and the appearance of the door frame 3 can be improved.

Further, the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291) supports the outer peripheral ring portion 195c (handle guide 196) of the handle 195 so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction, and the flange portion 291e and the flange portion 291e that restrict the movement in the front-rear direction. The guide piece 291 g is provided, and even if the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is pulled forward, the movement of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c forward can be restricted by the guide piece 291 g or the like. The 195c and the spoke portion 195b connecting the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and the central hub portion 195a are not deformed, and the handle 195 can be prevented from being damaged.

Further, since the handle touch sensor 192 detects that the player is touching the handle 195 and then accepts the operation of the handle 195 to drive the game ball B, only the spoke portion 195b and the outer ring portion 195c are used. The game ball B can be driven even if the handle 195 is operated while touching the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used for various driving operations (handle operation) as described above. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being driven in a state where the handle 195 is not touched, and it is possible to prevent the handle from being operated using a tool and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the dish unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame, and FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from behind. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the front surface of the door frame base 101 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 for storing a game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged below the upper plate 201 and supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. It is provided with a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower plate 202 is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210. It is provided with a plate decoration unit 250 having a plate decoration unit 250, and an effect operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operated by a player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending to the left and right, an upper plate main body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201, and the right side of the upper plate main body 212. A mounting base (not shown) that is mounted on and projects forward, a dish unit relay board (not shown) that is mounted to the right of the mounting base, and a ball that is mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base. The rental operation unit 220, the upper plate ball removal unit (not shown) mounted below the mounting base, and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 mounted behind the upper plate ball removal unit. It has.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate body 251 having the lower plate 202 and the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The dish unit main body 252, the lower dish ball pulling unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251 and the dish left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit main body 252, respectively. It is equipped with a plate right decoration unit 275.

The effect operation unit 300 includes a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by the player and a press operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit cover unit 310 having a spherical outer surface, an operation unit base 315 housed inside the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, and an operation unit base 315. An annular effect operation part outer peripheral decorative board 320 attached to the upper surface, an outer peripheral board cover 325 covering the upper part of the effect operation part outer peripheral decorative board 320, and an operation attached to the rear side of the operation part base 315. A unit relay board unit 330 is provided.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit 350 provided with the effect operation unit 301 and the effect operation unit base 315, which can protrude upward from the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and is attached to the effect operation unit base 315. It is provided with an effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360 that supports the unit 350 so as to be able to move up and down, and a projecting output adjusting mechanism 380 that adjusts the upward projecting output of the effect operating unit 350 by the effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360. There is.

The entire dish unit 200 bulges forward, and the effect operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. The upper plate 201 has a ball lending operation unit 220 arranged on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and the lower plate 202 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the effect operation unit 300.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 48 and 49. The upper plate 201 is formed by the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate main body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side side bulges forward more than the center on the left and right sides of the front view and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212), a portion of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges most forward. The front end of the upper plate 201 recedes backward from the most bulging portion toward the right in the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Guidance passage portion 201a (FIG. 73). See). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the front view right end side of the guide passage portion 201a is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.

When the upper plate 201 is assembled in the plate unit 200, the bottom surface thereof is from a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port (not shown). On the other hand, it is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper plate ball feeding port.

The guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting that is electrically grounded in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B comes into contact with (rolls), the game ball B It is possible to remove the static electricity charged in the machine.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 50 and the like. FIG. 50A is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the door frame cut horizontally at the portion of the lower plate ball supply port, and FIG. 50B is a cross-sectional view showing the main portion of the door frame by cutting the same portion as in (a). It is sectional drawing which shows the main part. The lower plate 202 is arranged below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game ball B, and is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically through the bottom wall and is capable of discharging the game ball B. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is closed openable and closable by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265 of the lower plate ball extraction unit 260.

The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangle shape in a plan view extending to the left and right, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction projects forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom surface of the lower plate 202 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is located below the effect operation unit 300 on the left side with respect to the front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state of being assembled in the plate unit 200.

The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and opens the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The game ball B stored in the plate unit 200 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is open, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate ball supply port 211c is forward. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown in FIG. 50B, the lower plate ball supply port 211j of the plate unit base 211 in the plate base unit 210 communicating with the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. On the other hand, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202b of the lower plate 202 is provided in front of the central axis. Then, the lower plate ball supply port 211j is formed in a tubular shape that extends straight forward so that the game ball B discharged forward from the ball discharge port 150d goes straight to the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211j can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b by moving the shortest distance.

By the way, when the game ball B is guided straight toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b by the lower plate ball supply port 211j, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265. Since the plate ball extraction hole 202b and the lower plate ball supply port 211j are provided near the right end of the lower plate 202, there is a risk that the storage of the game ball B will be concentrated in the area on the right side of the center of the lower plate 202. There is. Then, when the game ball B concentrated in the area on the right side of the lower plate 202 blocks the front of the lower plate ball supply port 211j, the game ball B moves from the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 to the lower plate 202 side. There is a risk that the full tank detection sensor 154 will operate and the lower plate 202 will be determined to be full even though there is still room on the left side of the lower plate 202. There is.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50A, the left side wall of the lower plate ball supply port 211c is inclined so as to extend diagonally to the left front. More specifically, at least one game ball B can be distributed with a distance between the left side wall of the lower plate ball supply port 211c and the front surface of the plate unit base 211 at a portion directly behind the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. It is tilted diagonally to the left and forward so that it is a distance.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is to the left of the central axis (line indicated by the alternate long and short dash line) of the rear end (ball discharge port 150d) of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. I'm moving to.

As a result, by moving the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a to the left, the lowest portion of the lower plate 202 (the portion of the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a) is moved to the left, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is moved to the left. With the 202a closed, it is possible to reduce the concentration of the game ball B on the right side in the lower plate 202. Then, even if a plurality of game balls B are stored in the lower plate 202 from the portion of the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower plate 202 (front surface of the plate unit base 211), the lower plate ball is supplied. Since the side wall on the left side of the mouth 211c extends diagonally to form a gap through which the game ball B can flow from the rear end of the lower plate 202, the foul cover unit 150 (ball discharge port 150d) and the upper plate ball The game ball B discharged from the unit 240 (ball removal guide path 241c) to the lower plate ball supply port 211c side is guided to the left side in the lower plate 202 along the diagonally extending left side wall and released. This allows the game ball B to be properly stored in the entire lower plate 202.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the full tank detection sensor 154 from operating to notify the full tank even though a sufficient area for storing the game ball B remains in the lower plate 202.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The plate base unit 210 has a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201. The main body 212 and the dish unit relay board 214 attached to the rear surface of the dish unit base 211 near the lower right corner are provided.

Further, the plate base unit 210 is a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211, and an upper plate ball attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 below the ball lending operation unit 220. It includes a pre-pulling unit (not shown) and a post-pulling unit 240 attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 211 behind the pre-pulling unit.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and has a flat plate shape extending to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (shallow with the rear open. It is formed in a box shape).

The plate unit base 211 penetrates back and forth near the upper left corner of the front view and also penetrates back and forth below the upper plate ball supply port 211a and the upper plate ball supply port 211a extending rearward in a tubular shape. A speaker port 211b with a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c that penetrates back and forth at the lower part on the left side of the center of the left and right sides of the front view, and extends rearward in a tubular shape, and a lower plate. A notch 211d that is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right wall of a portion that extends cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear on the upper right side of the front view of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is provided with an upper plate ball feeding port (not shown) whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is assembled in the door frame 3, the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the tubular rear end passes through the upper plate ball of the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

The lower plate ball supply port 211c has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a tubular rear end having a lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 is connected to the notch portion 211d formed in the tubular portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 can be operated by operating the upper plate ball ejection port 222, the upper plate ball feeding port, the entrance 141a and the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, and the upper plate. After the ball is removed, the unit 240 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the lower plate 202 via the ball feeding guide path 241b, the ball removal guide path 241c, and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball feeding port is located in front of the ball receiving port (not shown) of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in the state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is inside the upper plate 201. The game ball B is supplied to the ball feeding guide path 241b from the ball receiving port of the unit 240 after the upper plate ball is pulled out.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the upper plate 201. The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The upper plate main body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side is larger and bulges forward than the center of the left and right in the front view. The front end of the upper plate main body 212 recedes rearward from the most forward bulging portion toward the right side of the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate main body 212 is closed above the right end.

In the state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, the upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion where the upper part is closed near the right end is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, in the upper plate main body 212, an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a is formed in an intermediate portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Dish unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 relays the connection between the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish left decorative board 273, the dish right decorative board 278, and the operation unit relay board 332. Is for. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached near the lower right corner on the rear surface of the dish unit base 211. The rear surface of the dish unit relay board 214 faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211 when it is attached to the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-4. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is an enlarged plan view showing a portion of the ball lending operation unit in the dish unit of the door frame. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or cashes the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. After inserting a prepaid card or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B can be rented into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine can be displayed, or the ball lending machine can be used. The purpose is to deduct the amount of the rented game ball B and return the cash or prepaid card inserted in the machine, adjust the volume, or adjust the amount of light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 is provided on a base portion 221 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211, an upper plate ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221 and an upper surface of the base portion 221. A disk-shaped ball lending operation base 223 that is arranged on the right side of the upper plate ball lending button 222 and has translucency, and a ball lending button 224 that is arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223. The return button 225 located on the front right side of the ball lending operation base 223, the ball lending display unit 226 located below the rear part of the ball lending operation base 223, and the ball lending button 224 outside the base unit 221. It includes a volume control button 227 arranged in front and a light amount control button 228 arranged on the left side of the volume control button 227.

The upper plate ball pulling button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221 and can be moved downward by a pressing operation by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape and has the letters "ball" on its upper surface. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit 226 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs and one cannonball type LED, and can be satisfactorily visually recognized from the player side through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light emitting state.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card having cash or a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and then the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the lent game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display unit 226 displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards inserted in the ball lending machine. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display unit 226 when the ball lending machine breaks down.

The volume control button 227 sets the volume of the sound for directing the music, sound, sound effect, etc. output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4. It is for adjusting. The volume control button 227 is formed in a bicircular gourd shape that looks like a combination of two circles. The volume control button 227 has a "+" character in the center of one (upper) circle and a "-" character in the center of the other (lower) circle, and between the two circles. The part of is decorated with a pattern that makes the sound come from the speaker. The volume control button 227 is formed so that the diameter of the circle on the "+" side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. When the "+" side of the volume control button 227 is pressed, the volume is increased, and when the "-" side is pressed, the volume is decreased.

The light amount adjusting button 228 is for adjusting the light amount of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 and the brightness of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. The light amount adjustment button 228 is formed in a bicircular gourd shape that looks like a combination of two circles. The light intensity adjustment button 228 has a "+" character in the center of one (upper) circle and a "-" character in the center of the other (lower) circle, and between the two circles. A light bulb pattern is applied to the part of. The light amount adjustment button 228 is formed so that the diameter of the circle on the “+” side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the “−” side. The light amount adjustment button 228 becomes bright when the "+" side is pressed, and becomes dark when the "-" side is pressed.

The volume control button 227 and the light amount control button 228 are colored differently from each other (for example, the volume control button 227 is white and the light amount control button 228 is black) so that the player cannot make a mistake.

By the way, when the volume and the amount of light are adjusted by using the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301, the player participation type effect that requires the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is not executed. Occasionally, the effect operation unit 301 is appropriately operated to display a setting menu for adjusting the volume, the amount of light, etc. on the effect display device 1600, and after selecting an item to be adjusted, the contact operation unit 302 is operated. Since the loudness of the volume and the brightness of the amount of light are changed, it takes time and effort to adjust the volume and the amount of light. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the volume and the amount of light can be directly adjusted by operating the volume control button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228, and it takes time and effort to adjust the volume and the amount of light. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of simplifying the above and adjusting in a short time.

[3-5c-5. Unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit before removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 49. The upper plate ball removal unit 240 cooperates with the ball feeding unit 140 when the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, and the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 This is for discharging B to the lower plate 202.

The unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball is slidably attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 and the front surface of the rear base 241 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port from the rear. The upper plate ball removal slider 242, a spring for urging the upper plate ball removal slider 242 upward (not shown), and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241 are provided. ing.

The rear base 241 has a ball receiving port (not shown) through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball, which protrudes upward from the part where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward. A ball feeding taxiway 241b that guides the game ball B received in the socket downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and a ball feeding taxiway 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241 below the ball feeding taxiway 241b. It is provided with a ball-extracting taxiway 241c that guides the game ball B downward from the position and then guides the game ball B to the right in the rear view.

The ball receiving port opens forward through the upper plate ball feeding port of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in the front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201 in a state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210. It is formed at the position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The portion extending to the left and right of the ball-extracting taxiway 241c protrudes to the right in the rear view from the portion in which the upper plate ball-extracting slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in the rear view is lower. It opens on the right side of the rear view. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the ball-extracting taxiway 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. In the state where the ball feeding guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion extending vertically below the ball feeding guiding path 241b is located in front of the ball feeding port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending to the left and right is formed so as to be connected to the notch 211d of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in the plate unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the lower plate 202 via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball pulling slider 242 has a square shape when viewed from the front, and has an actuating receiving portion (not shown) protruding forward from the upper left corner and a rear surface to the rear side of the actuating receiving portion. It is provided with a protruding operation transmission unit 242b. The upper surface of the actuating receiving portion is formed to be flat. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward toward the rear, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled on the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion penetrates the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the upper plate ball pulling portion is pulled out on the upper surface of the operating receiving portion. The lower end of the button 222 is in contact. Further, in the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled on the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242b projects rearward of the rear base 241 and the ball feeding unit 140 operates on the ball pulling member 143 on the upper surface. The paddle 143c is in contact.

The upper end of the spring is attached to the rear base 241 and the lower end is attached to the upper plate ball removal slider 242 to urge the upper plate ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is located at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring, and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring.

In the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 passes through the operation receiving portion of the upper plate ball removal slider 242. The pull-out button 222 is located at the upward moving end. Further, since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring, the downward movement of the working paddle 143c in contact with the upper surface of the working transmission portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port. The game ball B can be sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the advance entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves downward and hits the upper surface of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 in contact can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143, and the partition portion 143a moves to the entrance 141a and the ball pulling. Retreat from between the mouth 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. The Rukoto. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball ejection port 141b is guided from the notch portion 211d into the lower plate ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lower from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the plate 202, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the lower plate 202.

When the downward pressure of the upper plate ball removal button 222 is released, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the urging force of the spring, the upper plate ball removal button 222 rises, and comes into contact with the operation transmission unit 242b. The ball pulling member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to return to the original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be fed to the ball launching device 540 side or discharged to the lower plate 202 side by the upper plate ball removal unit 240 via the ball feeding unit 140. can do.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 48 and the like. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211, and the plate unit base so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The plate unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of 211, the lower plate ball pulling unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and the plates attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit main body 252, respectively. It includes a left decoration unit 270 and a plate right decoration unit 275.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 50. The lower plate main body 251 cooperates with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 to form the lower plate 202. The lower plate main body 251 extends to the left and right, and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate body 251 is attached to a portion on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower plate body 251 is formed with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end at the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower plate main body 251 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265 of the lower plate ball extraction unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate main body 251 is in a state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252. Further, in the state where the lower plate body is assembled in the plate unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49 and the like. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 in the plate base unit 210 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction and extends downward and is separated from each other, and a left side from the center in the left-right direction at the lower part. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251.

A dish left decoration unit 270 and a dish right decoration unit 275 are attached to the front surfaces of the left and right upper side bulging portions 252a.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d that penetrates back and forth between the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side.

Further, although not shown, the dish unit main body 252 is formed between a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a centered in the left-right direction, and includes an effect operation unit mounting portion to which the effect operation unit 300 is attached. .. The effect operation unit mounting portion is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width in the left-right direction of the dish unit main body 252.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the plate base unit 210 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. ..

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removing unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 27 and 50. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and opens and closes the lower plate ball removing hole 202a to store the game ball B in the lower plate 202 and discharge the game ball B from the lower plate 202. It is for letting you do it.

The lower plate ball removal unit 260 includes a lower plate ball removal button 263 and a lower plate ball removal lid 265 that opens and closes a through hole by operating the lower plate ball removal button 263.

When the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal button 263 coincides with the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b in the plate unit main body 252, and the lower plate ball removal lid 265 closes the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. In this normal state, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

In the normal state, when the lower plate ball removal button 263 is pressed backward, the lower plate ball removal lid 265 moves to open the lower plate ball removal hole 202a, and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is passed through the lower plate 202. The game ball B can be discharged below the plate unit 200.

When the lower plate ball removal lid 265 is moved by pressing the lower plate ball removal button 263, the lower plate ball removal lid 265 remains in the moved state, and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is maintained in the open state. Then, the game ball B in the lower plate 202 can be continuously discharged downward.

To close the lower plate ball removal hole 202a from this state, press the lower plate ball removal button 263, which is recessed from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, backward, and then release the pressure to release the lower plate ball removal lid 265. Returns to the normal state position, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed. As a result, the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate left decoration unit and plate right decoration unit]
The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 48 and the like. The dish left decoration unit 270 and the dish right decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 at the upper part of the plate unit 200.

The dish left decoration unit 270 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has translucency, and a dish left decoration that penetrates the dish left decoration 271 and has translucency. It includes a lens 272 and a dish left decorative substrate 273 provided on the rear side of the dish left decorative lens 272 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface.

The dish left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish left decorative body 271 has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and the central axis extends diagonally to the upper left at the left end, and the central axis extends to the left and right at the right end, giving the shape that the semi-cylinder is twisted. It is formed. The dish left decorative body 271 is formed in a milky white color.

The dish left decorative lens 272 extends in the longitudinal direction in a state of being aligned with the front surface of the dish left decorative body 271. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish left decorative substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and the dish left decorative body 271 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light.

The left end of the plate left decoration unit 270 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 420 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. Since the dish left decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish left decoration 271 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish left decoration substrate 273 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish left decoration 271 is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish right decoration unit 275 is a semi-cylindrical dish right decorative body 276 that extends to the left and right and has transparency, and a dish right decoration that penetrates the dish right decoration body 276 and has transparency. It includes a lens 277 and a dish right decorative substrate 278 provided on the rear side of the dish right decorative lens 277 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface.

The dish right decoration body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the upper right side bulge 252a. The dish right decorative body 276 has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and the central axis extends diagonally to the upper right at the right end, and the central axis extends to the left and right at the left end, giving the shape that the semi-cylinder is twisted. It is formed. The dish right ornament 276 is formed in a milky white color.

The dish right decorative lens 277 extends in the longitudinal direction so as to coincide with the front surface of the dish right decorative body 276. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish right decorative substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and the dish right decorative body 276 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light.

The plate right decoration unit 275 is assembled on the door frame 3 and its right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 430. Since the dish right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish right decorative body 276 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish right decorative substrate 278 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish right decorative body 276 is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

A part of the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 is projected upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a in the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 in a state of being assembled on the door frame 3. , A step can be formed between the upper side bulging portion 252a and the dish left decorative unit 270 and the dish right decorative unit 275 side. As a result, the player can hook his / her finger on the step between the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is leveled. It can be used as a finger hook when operating the effect operation unit 301, which will be described later. Further, the step between the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 52 to 56 and the like. FIG. 52 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front with the effect operation button directed upward, and FIG. 52 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit of (a) viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front lower side. is there. FIG. 55 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating unsprung holding member is in the position of the upward moving end. It is sectional drawing of the effect operation unit in the state which the part unit moved to an ascending position. FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating unsprung holding member is in the position of the downward moving end.

The effect operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed. It is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a contact operation unit 302 that allows the player to perform a contact operation and a press operation unit 303 that allows the player to perform a press operation, and accepts the player's operation and moves the effect operation unit 301. It can be (vibrated) so that the player can participate not only in the driving operation of the game ball B but also in the production during the game. In the effect operation unit 301, the contact operation unit 302 is provided above the pressing operation unit 303. In the effect operation unit 301, the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are formed in a circular shape having a diameter of about 5/8 with respect to the outer diameter of the effect operation unit 300.

The effect operation unit 300 is provided on the front surface in the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200, and has a spherical effect operation unit cover unit 310 and an effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the outside on the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250. The operation unit base 315 to be attached and the effect operation unit provided on the upper surface of the operation unit base 315 and equipped with a plurality of LEDs 320a for illuminating and decorating the upper part of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 (unit top cover 312). The outer peripheral decorative board 320, the outer peripheral board cover 325 attached to the operation unit base 315 so as to cover the outer peripheral decorative board 320 of the effect operation unit from above, and the operation unit relay board unit attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 315. It is equipped with 330.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 adjusts the effect operation unit 350 having the effect operation unit 301, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 for raising and lowering the effect operation unit 350, and the projecting output of the effect operation unit 350. It is provided with a sudden output adjusting mechanism 380. The effect operation unit unit 350 is provided so as to be able to advance and retreat upward from the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360.

[3-5e-1. Production operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 via the operation unit base 315. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 decorates the outer periphery of the effect operation unit 300 (around the effect operation unit 350) at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is an annular shape having a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 opened upward and rearward and an insertion port 312a provided above the unit lower cover 311 through which the effect operation unit 301 is inserted. It is provided with a unit top cover 312. The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape so as to cover the front and the lower side of the operation unit base 315. The unit upper cover 312 is formed so as to be continuous with the outer surface of the unit lower cover 311. That is, the outer surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed to be substantially spherical. Incidentally, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the present embodiment has a spherical shape with a diameter of 216 mm.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis of the annular unit upper cover 312 is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is tilted at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line.

The front end of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is the front end of the door frame 3 in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is the door frame. The distance is about 1/2 of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

At least the upper cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 has translucency, and the effect operation unit cover unit 310 can be light-emitting decorated by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs of the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320, which will be described later.

The front end of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is greatly projected forward from the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is connected so that the plate left decorative body 271 and the plate right decorative body 276 extend outward from both the left and right sides of the unit lower cover 311. As a result, the production operation unit 300 is made to stand out, and the appearance is improved by the integrated decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 315 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The rear side of the operation unit base 315 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a of the upper plate main body 212 in the plate base unit 210. The front and lower parts of the operation unit base 315 are covered by the unit lower cover 311 and the upper part is covered by the unit upper cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301. The operation unit base 315 is formed in the shape of a container with an open upper part.

The operation unit base 315 includes a substantially cubic box-shaped main body portion 315a having an open upper portion, and a flange portion 315b extending outward from the upper end of the main body portion and having a circular outer circumference. ing. The effect operation unit 350 is housed inside the main body 315a. Further, the main body 315a has a pair of guide shafts 362 and a lower end of the central shaft 366 of the effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360 in the effect operation unit 350 described later attached to the bottom wall. Further, the main body portion 315a rotatably supports the lower end side of the adjusting screw 384 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 on the upper surface of the bottom wall. Further, the board base 331 of the operation unit relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the main body 315a.

On the upper surface of the flange portion 315b, the effect operation portion outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 is placed. Further, an annular outer peripheral substrate cover 325 is attached to the flange portion 315b so as to sandwich the effect operation portion outer peripheral decorative substrate 320. The unit upper cover 312 is attached to the outer peripheral board cover 325.

When the operation unit base 315 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 315b is located on substantially the same surface as the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311.

[3-5e-3. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The operation unit relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 315. The operation unit relay board unit 330 covers the substrate base 331 attached to the rear surface of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315, the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 331, and the operation unit relay board 332 from the rear. A board cover 333, which is attached to the board base 331 as described above, is provided.

The operation unit relay board 332 includes an effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 (front decorative substrate 321 and rear decorative substrate 322), a button outer decorative substrate 355, a vibration motor 356, a contact detection sensor main body 358, a button inner decorative substrate 364, and an operation button. The connection between the lift drive motor 367, the push detection sensor 373, the lift detection sensor 374, the protrusion output detection sensor 375, and the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381, and the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 is relayed.

[3-5e-4. Production operation unit]
The effect operation unit 350 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The effect operation unit 350 is provided so as to face outward from the insertion port 312a of the unit upper cover 312 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and can function as a contact operation unit 302 or a pressing operation unit 303. Is.

The effect operation unit 350 includes a bottomed cylindrical button body 351 whose upper end side is closed, a disk-shaped contact detector 352 attached to the upper part of the button body 351 and a button body 351 from below. The cylindrical button sleeve 353 that is inserted, the disk-shaped button base 354 that is attached to the lower end of the button sleeve 353 and is supported by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, and is arranged above the button base 354. It is provided with an annular button outer decorative substrate 355 on which a plurality of LEDs 355a are mounted on the upper surface thereof.

Further, the effect operation unit 350 includes a vibration motor 356 arranged between the button body 351 and the button sleeve 353, a motor cover 357 in which the vibration motor 356 is attached to the button sleeve 353, and a contact detector 352. It is provided with a contact detection sensor main body 358 that is connected and attached to the outer periphery of the button sleeve 353.

The button body 351 is entirely transparent. The button body 351 is composed of a disk-shaped upper surface portion 351a that is curved so as to bulge upward, a tubular tubular portion 351b that extends downward from the outer circumference of the upper surface portion 351a, and a tubular portion 351b. It has a locking portion 351c that protrudes downward from the lower end. The upper surface portion 351a is formed in a shape forming a part of a spherical surface having the same diameter as the spherical surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310. The upper surface portion 351a is provided with a circular decoration formed to a diameter of about 1/2 of the outer diameter. The outer diameter (diameter) of the upper surface portion 351a (cylindrical portion 351b) is about 5/8 of the diameter of the effect operation unit cover unit 310. The length (height) of the tubular portion 351b is about 5/8 of the diameter of the upper surface portion 351a. Four locking portions 351c are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 351b. The locking portion 351c is locked to the button base 354. Incidentally, the button body 351 of the present embodiment has a diameter of about 127 mm.

The contact detector 352 has a circular outer circumference, and is formed in a dish shape in which the inner side having a certain width from the outer circumference bulges upward. The contact detection body 352 is a portion below the circular decoration on the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 and bulges diagonally upward, and the inside thereof is formed flat. As a result, the contact detector 352 looks like a part of the decoration of the button body 351. The contact detector 352 has a flat plate-shaped downward extending piece 352a extending downward from the left and right ends of the outer peripheral edge and the rear end. The contact detector 352 is attached to the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. The contact detector 352 is formed of punching metal. In the contact detector 352, the capacitance with respect to the entire area is suppressed by the plurality of holes of the punching metal, and erroneous detection is prevented. Further, since the contact detector 352 is made of punching metal, the light from the LED 364a of the decorative substrate 364 provided below can be transmitted upward, and the central portion of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 is good. It can be luminescent and decorated in a state of being.

The contact detector 352 is connected to the external electrode terminal of the connector in the contact detection sensor main body 358. As a result, the contact detector 352 can function as a sensor electrode for detecting the capacitance, and detects contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the upper surface or side surface of the button body 351. Can be done. That is, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can make the button main body 351 function as the contact operation unit 302.

The button sleeve 353 has a tubular sleeve body 353a extending vertically and an annular flange portion 353b extending outward from the lower end of the sleeve body 353a. The button sleeve 353 is entirely transparent. The outer diameter of the sleeve body 353a is about 4/7 of the inner diameter of the button body 351 and the length is substantially the same as the length of the tubular portion 351b of the button body 351. The button sleeve 353 can transmit light from the plurality of LEDs 355a of the button outer decorative substrate 355 upward through the flange portion 353b.

The button base 354 has a disk shape having substantially the same diameter as the outer diameter of the button body 351 and is attached to the lower end of the button body 351 so as to close the open lower end side of the button body 351. The button base 354 has a pair of guide holes 354a that penetrate vertically at a portion symmetrical with respect to the center, a central hole 354b that penetrates vertically at the center, and projects from the inner surface of the central hole toward the center. It is provided with a pair of guide pins 354c and the like. The guide shafts 362 of the effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360 are slidably inserted into the pair of guide holes 354a, respectively. The central hole 354b is formed to have an inner diameter large enough to allow the elevating cam member 371 to pass through. The pair of guide pins 354c face each other on the same shaft core and are rotatably attached around the shaft core.

The button base 354 extends downward, and further has a flat plate-shaped detection piece 354d detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. In the button base 354, the locking portion 351c of the button body 351 is locked to the outer peripheral surface. The button base 354 is guided so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 354a. Further, the button base 354 is moved in the vertical direction by a pair of guide pins 354c being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. The upper ends of the pair of elevating springs 365 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 are in contact with the lower surface of the button base 354, and the button base 354 is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365.

A plurality of LEDs 355a are mounted on the upper surface of the button outer decorative substrate 355. The plurality of LEDs 355a are arranged in a row on the double circumference of concentric circles. More specifically, the plurality of LEDs 355a are provided at a portion slightly outside the sleeve body 353a of the button sleeve 353 and a portion near the center of the width of the flange portion 353b. By appropriately emitting light of the LED 355a of the button outer decorative substrate 355, the portion of the upper surface of the button main body 351 outside the contact detector 352 and the side surface (peripheral surface) of the button main body 351 can be light-emitting and decorated.

The vibration motor 356 has an eccentric weight attached to the rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight. The vibration motor 356 is arranged so that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction. In other words, the vibration motor 356 is arranged so that the rotation axis extends in a direction orthogonal to the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operating unit 301. Further, the vibration motor 356 is provided at a portion on a straight line passing through a pair of guide shafts 362 that guide the effect operation unit 301 (effect operation unit unit 350) in the vertical direction. As a result, the vibration from the vibration motor 356 can be satisfactorily transmitted to the effect operation unit 301. Further, the influence of the vibration by the vibration motor 356 on the pair of guide holes 354a (pair of guide shafts 362) can be reduced.

The contact detection sensor main body 358 is a capacitance sensor. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the contact detection sensor main body 358 supplies power to a sensor IC having a surge protection circuit, a transmission circuit, a detection smoothing circuit, a comparison circuit, and the like, an output circuit, and the sensor IC and the output circuit. It has a constant voltage circuit, a sensor electrode, and a connection connector. The contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the capacitance of the sensor electrode contained therein. Further, the connector of the contact detection sensor main body 358 has an external electrode terminal connected to the sensor electrode, and the external electrode terminal is connected to the contact detector 352. That is, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can make the contact detection body 352 function as an external sensor electrode. The contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the capacitance with the sensor electrode and outputs an ON signal when the capacitance exceeds a predetermined capacitance set by the external resistance. In the present embodiment, the ON signal is output when the predetermined capacitance is exceeded, but a plurality of stages of signals may be output depending on the magnitude of the capacitance.

The effect operation unit 350 of the present embodiment is provided with a contact detector 352 that functions as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance by the contact detection sensor body 358 on the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. Therefore, it is possible to detect the contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the upper surface of the button body 351 via the contact detection body 352. Further, since the contact detection body 352 of the effect operation unit 350 has a plurality of downward extension pieces 352a extending downward, the button main body is in a state where the effect operation unit 350 is projected upward. It is possible to detect the contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the side surface of the 351. Therefore, the effect operation unit 350 can make the button body 351 function as the contact operation unit 302 by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358.

The effect operation unit unit 350 is supported by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction. In the state where the effect operation unit 350 is moved most downward (normal state), the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 coincides with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the effect operation is performed. The unit 300 can be seen as one sphere. When the effect operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. By pressing downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, it can function as the pressing operation unit 303.

More specifically, in the state where the effect operation unit 350 is moved to the most downward position (normal state), the effect operation unit 350 does not move further downward even when pressed, and the pressing operation cannot be performed. .. In this normal state, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Then, when the effect operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is separated from the press detection sensor 373 and becomes a non-detection state. .. Then, when the upper surface of the effect operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the effect operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower moving end against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 detects the pressure. It is detected by the sensor 373. As a result, the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is detected.

Further, since the effect operation unit 350 covers the upper part of the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal with the button body 351, it touches the upper surface of the smooth spherical button body 351 when operating the contact operation unit 302. As a result, the player does not directly touch the surface of the punching metal having irregularities due to the plurality of holes, and the player can smoothly operate the contact operation unit 302. Further, since the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351, fine irregularities and a plurality of streaks are formed on the surface (upper surface) of the button body 351 to give an arbitrary tactile sensation to the contact operation unit 302. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided, the degree of freedom in designing the contact operation unit 302 can be increased, and the player can be more entertained.

In the above description, the button body 351 is transparent, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button body 351 may be opaque or translucent so that the lower side is difficult to see through the button body 351. As a result, the contact detector 352 made of punching metal becomes difficult to see through the button body 351, so that the appearance of the effect operation unit 350 can be improved. Further, when the button body 351 is opaque, it is desirable to have translucency. As a result, the button body 351 can be light-lit and decorated by the light from the LED 355a of the button outer decorative board 355 and the LED 364a of the button inner decorative board 364 provided below, and the player can emit light by the light emitting effect of the button body 351. Can be entertained.

[3-5e-5. Production operation unit elevating mechanism]
The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operation unit base 315, and can elevate the effect operation unit unit 350. The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is mounted in the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 below the effect operation unit unit 350, and has a substantially circular elevating mechanism base 361 and a central axis of the elevating mechanism base 361. A pair of cylindrical columns that are arranged symmetrically and have the lower end attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation base 315 and the upper end penetrating the operation base 315 and the button base 354 and extending upward. A disk-shaped upper base 363 that connects the upper ends of the guide shaft 362 and the pair of guide shafts 362 and whose outer circumference is smaller than the inner diameter of the button sleeve 353, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363 to emit light upward. It includes a decorative substrate 364 in a button on which a plurality of irradiable LEDs 364a are mounted.

Further, in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted respectively, and a pair of elevating springs 365 for urging the button base 354 upward, and a center of the elevating mechanism base 361 and the button base 354. It includes a central shaft 366 that penetrates vertically and has a lower end attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a and an upper end attached to the upper base 363.

Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operation button elevating drive motor 367 attached to the lower surface of the elevating mechanism base 361 so that the rotating shaft projects upward, and to the rotating shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367. The spur gear-shaped elevating drive gear 368, which is engaged with the elevating drive gear 368 and rotatably attached to the upper side of the elevating mechanism base 361, is rotated by the spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 and the driven gear 369. The elevating cam drive gear member 370, through which the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached, is provided.

Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is rotatably attached with the central shaft 366 inserted and the lower end is connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370, and the elevating cam that moves the button base 354 up and down by rotating. It includes a member 371, a lifting drive gear 368, a driven gear 369, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361 so as to cover the lifting cam drive gear member 370 from above.

Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361 to detect the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and the elevating cam drive gear member 370 attached to the elevating mechanism base 361. An elevating detection sensor 374 that detects the elevating and lowering of the effect operation unit 350 by detecting the rotational position of the (elevating cam member 371), and an elevating spring lower holding member of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 that is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361. It is equipped with a sudden output detection sensor 375 that detects the sudden output of the effect operation unit 350 by detecting the ascent and descent of the 385.

The elevating mechanism base 361 includes an elevating spring together with a base body 361a formed in a disk shape, a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a, and a pair of guide shafts 362 penetrating the base body 361a. It is provided with a pair of through holes 361c through which 365 can pass. The base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 315a in the operation portion base 315. A driven gear 369, an elevating cam drive gear member 370, a gear cover 372, a pressure detection sensor 373, and a sudden output detection sensor 375 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a. Further, on the base main body 361a, an operation button elevating drive motor 367, an elevating detection sensor 374, and a sudden output adjusting drive motor 381 are attached to the lower surface. The lower end of the leg portion 361b of the elevating mechanism base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315. As a result, a space in which the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is arranged is formed between the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361. The pair of through holes 361c are provided in the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 from the center to the front and rear at a distance of half the diameter of the base main body 361a, respectively.

The pair of guide shafts 362 penetrate the pair of through holes 361c provided in the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 from the center to the front and the rear at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a. .. The central shaft 366 penetrates the center of the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361. The lower end of each of the pair of guide shafts 362 and the center shaft 366 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315, and the upper end of each is attached to the upper base 363. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal rods.

The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361. The upper base 363 has a lower protrusion that projects downward. The upper base 363 can form a space capable of accommodating the elevating cam member 371 between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361 by bringing the lower projecting portion into contact with the upper projecting portion of the gear cover 372. it can.

A plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the upper surface of the decorative substrate 364 in the button are full-color LEDs. The decorative substrate 364 in the button can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 364a.

The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and guide shafts 362 are inserted in each of the pair of elevating springs 365. The lower end of the pair of elevating springs 365 is in contact with the elevating unsprung holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, and the upper end is in contact with the button base 354.

The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and connects the lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. It is provided with an elevating detection piece 370c, which protrudes downward from the top in a tubular shape and has two notches facing each other and is detected by the elevating detection sensor 374. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is formed in a columnar shape, and is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center. The elevating cam member 371 penetrates the gear cover 372 and is provided between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are separated by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the columnar column and project outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 354c of the button base 354.

The cam portion 371a is one of a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the shaft core, and a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d. (See FIG. 55 and the like). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated from each other by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 is provided with a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d of the cam portion 371a is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view of the elevating cam member 371. Is formed in. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 can be guided by the cam portion 371a, and the button base 354 (directing operation unit 350) urged upward by the elevating spring 365. Can be raised and lowered.

The gear cover 372 has a through hole through which the elevating spring 365 and the elevating cam member 371 can pass. Further, the gear cover 372 has an upper protrusion portion protruding upward at a portion facing the lower protrusion portion of the upper base 363. The gear cover 372 forms a space capable of accommodating the elevating cam member 371 between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361 by bringing the upper projecting portion into contact with the lower end of the lower projecting portion of the upper base 363. be able to.

The pressing detection sensor 373 detects the pressing operation of the effect operating unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) by detecting the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the effect operating unit 350. The pressure detection sensor 373 constantly detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the state where the effect operation unit 350 is moved to the most downward position (normal state). When the effect operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state because the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is separated. Then, when the upper surface of the effect operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the effect operation unit 350 lowers the effect detection sensor 373 to the lower moving end against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the button base 354 354d of the detection piece can be detected, and the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) can be detected.

The elevating detection sensor 374 detects the elevating detection piece 370c of the elevating cam drive gear member 370, and thereby, the elevating cam member 371 via the connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370. The rotation position of is detected.

The sudden output detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d of the elevating unsprung holding member 385 in the unexpected output adjusting mechanism 380.

The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 can support the effect operation unit 350 so as to be able to move up and down via the button base 354 by a pair of guide shafts 362 arranged in the front and rear, and the button base 354 is supported by a pair of elevating springs 365. The effect operation unit 350 can be urged upward through the method. Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 raises and lowers the effect operation unit 350 (effect operation unit 301) with respect to the effect operation unit cover unit 310 by rotating the elevating cam member 371 by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. Can be made to. Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 can appropriately illuminate the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by appropriately emitting light of a plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the decorative substrate 364 in the button.

In the normal state of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked to the locking portion 371c provided on the lower end side of the elevating cam member 371 (FIG. 55A). See). In this normal state, the effect operation unit 350 is located at the downward moving end via the button base 354, and even if the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is pressed downward, the effect operation is performed. The unit 350 does not move downward. Therefore, in the normal state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected. Further, in a normal state, the surface (upper surface) of the unit upper cover 312 in the effect operation unit cover 310 and the upper surface of the button body 351 in the effect operation unit 350 are in agreement with each other, and the effect operation unit cover 310 And the button body 351 form one sphere.

When the elevating drive gear 368 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367 in a normal state (the effect operation unit 350 is in the descending position), it meshes with the elevating drive gear 368. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view via the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 55 (a) moves to the right, and the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked. The button base 354 rolls from the 371c to the left portion of the locking portion 371c in the first cam 371b, and the button base 354 moves slightly downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

Then, when the guide pin 354c that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is located from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, the second cam Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c is moved upward along the second cam 371d by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the guide pin 354c and the guide pin 354c are moved upward. At the same time, the button base 354 is raised, and the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position. In this state, since the detection piece 354d is separated from the pressure detection sensor 373, the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state.

The elevating unsprung holding member 385 of the elevating output adjusting mechanism 380 with which the lower end of the elevating spring 365 is in contact can be moved to various positions in the vertical direction by the projecting output adjusting drive motor 381, although details will be described later. it can. Then, since the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 can be changed according to the position of the elevating unsprung holding member 385 in the vertical direction, the effect operating unit 350 is raised by the protruding output according to the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365. It can be projected to a position.

In the state where the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is the third of the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in contact with the cam 371e. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

When the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the button base 354 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and the movement of the button base 354 further upward is restricted. Further, when the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the entire effect operation unit 350 (effect operation unit 301) is moving upward, and the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 is located above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. Also protrudes upward.

In this raised position, when the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) of the effect operation unit 350 is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the effect operation unit 350 pushes the elevating spring 365. It moves downward against the urging force of the button base 354 and comes into contact with the gear cover 372. When the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the button base 354 is in the lowered position, and the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is also in the lowered position together with the button base 354.

In this way, when the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the detection piece 354d protruding downward from the button base 354 is in a state of being detected by the pressure detection sensor 373, and the button body 351 of the effect operation unit unit ( The pressing of the pressing operation unit 303) is detected.

In order to return the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) from the ascending position to the descending position, the elevating cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. In (b), the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354, moves to the right (direction of the guide pin 354c), so that the guide pin 354c is moved by the third cam 371e. Is pressed downward, and the button base 354 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

When returning the effect operation unit 350 to the descending position, the projecting output adjusting drive motor 381 of the projecting output adjusting mechanism 380 moved the elevating unsprung holding member 385 downward to reduce the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365. The state (see FIG. 56). As a result, the urging force of the elevating spring 365 that urges the effect operation unit 350 upward becomes weak, so that the force acting on the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371 via the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 also increases. It becomes weak and the load applied to the operation button elevating drive motor 367 that rotates the elevating cam member 371 can be reduced, and the damage (failure) of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 can be reduced. Further, as the operation button elevating drive motor 367, an inexpensive motor having a low torque can be used.

Then, when the guide pin 354c moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the downward movement of the button base 354 stops and the guide pin 354c moves to the first cam. It rolls along 371b. After that, when the guide pin 354c reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 by the button elevating drive motor 367, the effect operation unit 350 is returned to the original descending position.

In the above, in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the elevating cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, so that the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is moved to the first cam 371b ( An example of moving the button base 354 (button body 351) from the locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d and projecting the button base 354 (button body 351) from the descending position to the ascending position at once has been described, but the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is an elevating cam member. In a normal state in which the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) is locked to the locking portion 371c of 371 and the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) is moved to the lower position, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 makes the elevating cam member 371 watch in a plan view. It may be rotated in the clockwise direction. Incidentally, the elevating distance of the button main body 351 (effect operation unit 350) by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in the present embodiment is about 40 mm.

When the elevating cam member 371 is rotated clockwise in a normal state, the guide pin 354c moves from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the guide pin 354c is moved by the urging force of the elevating spring 365 to the third cam 371e. Will move upward along. When the guide pin 354c is in the middle position of the third cam 371e and the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is stopped, the button body 351 is projected upward at an arbitrary position between the descending position and the ascending position. It can be stopped. Then, by projecting the button body 351 to a position above the lowering position, the button body 351 can be pressed downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the button body 351 is pressed by the pressing operation unit 303. Can function as.

When the button body 351 is projected upward by the third cam 371e, the elevating unsprung holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the urging force of the elevating spring 365. Is desirable. As a result, the load applied to the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 (operation button elevating drive motor 367) can be reduced, and the operation feeling of the pressing operation of the button main body 351 can be lightened.

In this way, since the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) can be changed according to the rotation position of the elevating cam member 371, the protrusion amount can be changed according to the gaming state (for example, the first start port 2002 or the like. By making the amount of protrusion of the button main body 351 different (according to the result of the special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second starting port 2004), the player can be made to suggest the degree of expectation for the game.

In addition, at least one shallow recess in which the guide pin 354c can be locked may be provided in the middle of the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371. As a result, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) can be stably projected to the position of the same protrusion amount, and the variation in the protrusion amount can be prevented. Further, when a recess is provided in at least one place in the middle of the third cam 371e, the guide pin 354c is locked in the recess, so that the operation button elevating drive motor 367 stops the rotation of the elevating cam member 371. It is not necessary to continue, and the load applied to the operation button elevating drive motor 367 can be reduced.

[3-5e-6. Sudden output adjustment mechanism]
The sudden output adjusting mechanism 380 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The sudden output adjusting mechanism 380 changes the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 that urges the effect operation unit 350 upward, so that the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) protrudes upward. It is possible to change the sudden output). The protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is provided between the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361.

The sudden output adjusting mechanism 380 includes a sudden output adjusting drive motor 381 attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 and a spur gear-shaped pinion gear attached to the rotating shaft of the protruding output adjusting drive motor 381. From the transmission gear 383 that meshes with the pinion gear 382 and is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a, the spur gear-shaped gear portion 384a that meshes with the transmission gear 383, and the gear portion 384a. An adjusting screw 384 that has a screw portion 384b that extends downward in a columnar shape and has a spiral groove formed on the outer circumference, and is rotatably supported by inserting a central shaft 366, and an adjusting screw. It is provided with a lifting spring lower holding member 385 that meshes with the screw portion 384b of the 384, penetrates the pair of guide shafts 362, and is in contact with the lower ends of the pair of lifting springs 365.

The sudden output adjustment drive motor 381 is attached to the lower surface of the base main body 361a so that a gap is formed between the elevating mechanism base 361 and the lower surface of the base main body 361a. The sudden output adjusting drive motor 381 has a rotation shaft protruding from the gap between the motor and the base body 361a.

The upper and lower parts of the adjusting screw 384 are formed to have a length extending from the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operating base 315 to the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361. The screw portion 384b of the adjusting screw 384 is formed in a columnar shape having a diameter larger than that of the gear portion 384a.

The elevating unsprung holding member 385 has a main body portion 385a extending back and forth, a screw hole 385b penetrating up and down at the center of the main body portion 385a and screwing with the screw portion 384b, and front and rear of the main body portion 385a. It has a spring holding recess 385c that is provided at both ends and is recessed downward to accommodate the lower end of the elevating spring 365, and a flat plate-shaped detection piece 385d that extends upward from the front end of the main body 385a. .. The elevating unsprung holding member 385 has a guide shaft 362 penetrating the center of the pair of spring holding recesses 385c. The detection piece 385d is detected by the sudden output detection sensor 375 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360.

When the pinion gear 382 is rotated by the protrusion adjustment drive motor 381, the protrusion adjustment mechanism 380 can rotate the adjustment screw 384 around the central shaft 366 via the transmission gear 383 and the gear portion 384a. Then, the sudden output adjusting mechanism 380 moves the elevating unsprung holding member 385 in the vertical direction by the screw hole 385b meshing with the screw portion 384b by rotating the adjusting screw 384 by the protruding output adjusting drive motor 381. be able to.

In the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, when the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is moved upward, the lower end of the elevating spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c is moved upward, and the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 is large. Become. On the other hand, when the elevating unsprung holding member 385 is moved downward, the lower end of the elevating spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c is moved downward, and the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 becomes small (FIG. 56). reference). That is, when the elevating unsprung holding member 385 is moved upward, the urging force for urging the effect operating unit 350 upward by the elevating spring 365 can be increased, and the elevating unsprung holding member 385 is moved downward. And, the urging force for urging the effect operation unit 350 upward by the elevating spring 365 can be reduced. As a result, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 can adjust the protrusion output upward of the effect operation unit 350.

The detection piece 385d of the elevating unsprung holding member 385 is detected by the protrusion output detection sensor 375 when the elevating unsprung holding member 385 is raised most. That is, when the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 is the largest, the detection piece 385d is detected by the sudden output detection sensor 375. As a result, when the sudden output detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d while the elevating unsprung holding member 385 is being moved upward by the sudden output adjusting drive motor 381, the elevating unsprung holding member 381 by the protruding output adjusting drive motor 381 By stopping the upward movement of the 385, further compression of the elevating spring 365 can be prevented, and damage to the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 can be prevented.

Further, as described above, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 can appropriately adjust the protrusion output of the effect operation unit 350, so that the button body is operated by the contact detector 352 while the effect operation unit 350 is in the lowered position. The contact or approach of the object to be detected (for example, the player's finger, etc.) to the 351 is detected, and the effect operation unit unit 350 is projected by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 to come into contact with the object to be detected. Occasionally, the position of the lifting unsprung holding member 385 in the vertical direction may be appropriately selected so that the protruding output of the button body 351 is different. As a result, when the button body 351 protrudes upward, the strength applied to the player's fingers or the like can be made different. Therefore, if the button body 351 strongly abuts, there may be something good for the player. It is possible to make the player think that it is, and it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the game. Therefore, according to the sudden output adjusting mechanism 380, the button is selected according to the gaming state (for example, according to the special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004). By increasing or decreasing the sudden output of the main body 351, it is possible to make the player suggest the degree of expectation for the game.

By the way, as a method of changing the urging force of the spring, it is conceivable to change the urging force by applying a twist to the spring. However, it is necessary to use a compressed spring (compression coil spring) in order to project the effect operation unit 350, and if the compression coil spring is twisted to change the urging force, it is impossible to use it differently from the original use. Stress acts on the compression coil spring, and the internal structure may deteriorate and break at an early stage. On the other hand, in the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 of the present embodiment, the protrusion output of the effect operation unit 350 is changed by changing the compression amount of the lift spring 365 by moving the lifting spring lower holding member 385 in the vertical direction. Since the urging force) is adjusted, excessive stress does not act on the elevating spring 365, and it is possible to reduce the early deterioration of the elevating spring 365. It can be stably projected over a long period of time.

[3-5e-7. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. 57 is an explanatory view showing the positional relationship between the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate, the button outer decorative substrate, and the button inner decorative substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 58 (a) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, and FIG. 58 (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the effect operation unit is in the raised position. The effect operation unit 300 is formed in a spherical shape as a whole, and has an effect operation unit 301 on the upper surface that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by touching or approaching the player's hand or the like, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can perform a pressing operation. The contact operation unit 302 is provided above the pressing operation unit 303 (button body 351).

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled in the dish unit 200 in a state in which the projecting direction of the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit unit 350) capable of projecting upward is inclined so that the upper side is positioned forward with respect to the vertical direction. ing. That is, the center of the effect operation unit 301 is located in front of the apex of the spherical effect operation unit 300. As a result, the effect operation unit 301 can be easily seen by the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1.

In the normal state of the effect operation unit 300, the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit 350) is in the lowered position, and the curved upper surface of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350 is the effect. It coincides with the spherical surface of the operation unit cover unit 310. Further, in the normal state, even if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed downward, the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit 350) does not move downward. Therefore, in a normal state, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the effect operation unit 300 looks like a mere spherical decorative body and can be operated.

As shown in FIG. 57, in the effect operation unit 300, the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 is arranged below the unit upper cover 312 that surrounds the outer periphery of the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit unit 350). An annular button outer decorative substrate 355 is arranged inside the pressing operation unit 303 near the outer edge, and a button inner decorative substrate 364 is further arranged inside the annular button outer decorative substrate 355. The effect operation unit 300 is arranged outward in the order of the button outer decorative board 355 and the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, centering on the button inner decorative board 364. The LED 355a inside the decorative substrate 364 inside the button and the decorative substrate 355 outside the button is arranged below the contact detector 352, but the contact detector 352 is formed of punching metal to provide translucency. Since it has, the light from them can be satisfactorily transmitted upward (player side).

The effect operation unit 300 can illuminate and decorate the annular unit upper cover 312 by the LED 320a of the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320. Further, the LED 355a of the button outer decorative substrate 355 can illuminate and decorate the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the upper surface of the button body 351 and the outer peripheral surface. Further, the LED 364a of the decorative substrate 364 in the button can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351.

Since the plurality of LEDs 320a of the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit, the plurality of LEDs 355a of the decorative substrate 355 outside the button, and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the decorative substrate 364 inside the button are arranged in a row on the circumference, in the circumferential direction. By sequentially emitting light, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which the light rotates around the center of the pressing operation unit 303. Further, since the plurality of LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, and LEDs 363a are arranged concentrically, a light emitting effect that the light spreads from the center of the pressing operation unit 303 to the outside and the light from the outside to the center of the pressing operation unit 303 are emitted. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect that converges.

In a normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a lowered position where the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit 350) has its upper surface aligned with the surface of the unit upper cover 312, as shown in FIG. 58 (a). It is in a state. In this state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is impossible. On the other hand, the contact operation unit 302 can enable the contact operation according to the player participation type effect to be executed.

As an effect (player participation type effect) in a normal state in which the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit 350) is not projected, for example, an effect image prompting the user to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed. It displays on the device 1600 and outputs voice, sound effects, and the like. Then, when the contact detector 352 detects the contact (or approach) with the button body 351, the process proceeds to the next production stage. When the contact is detected, the button body 351 is light-emitting and decorated by the light emission of the LED 355a of the button outer decorative board 355 and the button inner decorative board 364, thereby recognizing that the contact operation is accepted by the player. It may be possible to give a feeling of operation to the contact operation unit 302. At this time, the degree of expectation for the game (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous, such as a "big hit" game) is given to the player by the emission color, emission brightness, emission pattern, etc. of the button body 351. It may be suggested.

Alternatively, when the contact detector 352 detects contact (or approach) with the button body 351, the button body 351 may be vibrated by driving the vibration motor 356. As a result, it is possible to give an operation feeling to the contact operation unit 302, and it is possible to make the player strongly recognize that the contact operation has been accepted. At this time, even if the vibration motor 356 is given a strong vibration, a weak vibration, or a vibration having a predetermined rhythm, the player is made to suggest the degree of expectation for the game. good.

Further, as an effect in a normal state (player participation type effect), an effect image prompting the user to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, or a sound, a sound effect, or the like is output. After that, when the contact detector 352 detects the contact of the player (hand or finger) with respect to the upper surface of the button body 351, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 raises or lowers the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350). It is projected upward (pop-up) by the urging force of the spring 365. More specifically, in a normal state, when the elevating cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 becomes the cam portion 371a (first cam). Departing from 371b), the effecting operation unit 350 (button body 351 and pressing operation unit 303) vigorously protrudes upward together with the button base 354 due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365 (FIG. 371b). 55 (b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the button body 351 is located above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the button body 351 projects upward. Then, as described above, when the button body 351 protrudes upward, the fingers touching the button body 351 are pushed upward together with the button body 351. Therefore, the player can be greatly surprised. It can be of great interest.

After that, the process shifts to the effect of pressing the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) to entertain the player with the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303. More specifically, when the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is in the raised position and the button body 351 is pressed downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) is pressed. Moving downward, the upper surface of the button body 351 is flush with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the pressure detection sensor 373. As a result, the pressing operation of the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is detected, and the effect can be changed with the pressing operation as a trigger to entertain the player with the player participation type effect.

In addition, at the time of the above-mentioned production, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is used to increase or decrease the protrusion output (momentum) that causes the button body 351 to protrude, so that the player can determine the degree of expectation for the game depending on the strength of the protrusion output. May be suggested to. Further, the button body 351 may be vibrated by the vibration motor 356 when the button body 351 pops up or is pressed.

In the effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, when the contact detector 352 detects that the player's fingers or the like approach the moving range (within the projecting range) of the button body 351 projecting upward, the button is displayed. The main body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be projected upward. As a result, the button body 351 comes into contact with the player's fingers and the like to give an impact, so that the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Even in this case, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 may be used to increase or decrease the protrusion output of the button body 351 so that the player can suggest the degree of expectation for the game depending on the strength of the protrusion output.

Further, in the effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, the contact detector 352 allows the player's fingers and the like to be outside the projecting range of the button body 351 protruding upward and within a predetermined distance from the protruding button body 351. The button main body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be projected upward when it is detected that the button body is approaching. As a result, the wind pressure generated by the protrusion of the button body 351 can be applied to the player's fingers and the like, so that the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Even in this case, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 makes the protrusion output of the button body 351 stronger or weaker, and makes the player suggest the degree of expectation for the game by the strength of the wind pressure that hits the player's fingers or the like. You may do so.

Further, as an effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be projected upward regardless of the detection of the player's fingers or the like by the contact detector 352. At this time, if the button body 351 is projected with a strong projectile output by the projecting output adjusting mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes vigorously to generate a sound (protruding sound), which surprises the player with the projecting sound. Can be done. Further, when the button body 351 is projected with a weak protrusion by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes quietly, so that it is difficult for the player to notice the protrusion of the button body 351. The button body 351 protrudes before you know it, which can surprise the player.

As an effect after the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) is projected, the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is generally used by weakening the urging force of the elevating spring 365 by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380. It is also possible to perform an effect that causes the same pressing operation as the pressing button. Alternatively, the bump output adjusting mechanism 380 may be used to increase the urging force of the elevating spring 365 to cause the player to press the button body 351 with a strong force.

Further, as the effect after the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) is projected, an effect of contacting the protruding button body 351 may be executed. At this time, since the contact detection body 352 has the downward extending piece 352a extending downward, the side surface of the button main body 351 may be contact-operated. Further, at this time, it is desirable that the urging force of the elevating spring 365 is strengthened by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, whereby the protruding button body 351 can be made difficult to move, and the button body 351 (contact operation). The contact operation of the unit 302) can be easily performed.

As an effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, the button base 354 is described above by rotating the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction by the operation button elevating drive motor 367 in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. The guide pin 354c of the above is moved from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d, and the button base 354 (button body 351) is projected from the descending position to the ascending position at once. It is not limited to this.

For example, in a normal state where the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked to the locking portion 371c of the elevating cam member 371 and the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) is moved to the descending position, the operation button elevates and lowers. By rotating the elevating cam member 371 in the clockwise direction in a plan view by the drive motor 367, the guide pin 354c is moved from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the elevating cam member 371 is in the middle of the third cam 371e. The rotation of the button body 351 may be stopped to stop the upward protrusion of the button body 351 at a position between the descending position and the ascending position. At this time, the elevating unsprung holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the urging force of the elevating spring 365.

In this way, even when the button body 351 is halfway projected by the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371, the button body 351 can be pressed and the button body 351 functions as the pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with the player participation type production. In this case, since the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 can be made different according to the rotation position of the elevating cam member 371, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the game according to the amount of protrusion of the button body 351. , Can entertain the player.

Further, as an effect of pressing the projected effect operation unit 350 (button body 351), after the effect operation unit 350 is projected, the elevating unsprung holding member 385 is moved downward to compress the elevating spring 365. To the minimum state. As a result, since the urging force of the elevating spring 365 is in the weakest state, the effect operation unit 350 can be pressed with a light (weak) force, and the operability of the pressing operation is enhanced to perform the pressing operation. Can be entertained. Further, as an effect of pressing the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351), the elevating unsprung holding member 385 is set to an appropriate position in the vertical direction according to the result of the special lottery, and the urging force of the elevating spring 365. May be any strength from the strongest to the weakest. As a result, the player can be forced to push the effect operation unit 350 strongly or weakly, so that the player can be entertained by the difference in the operation force of the effect operation unit 350, and more versatile. It is possible to present the production, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored.

Further, as an effect using the effect operation unit 300, a contact detector can detect the contact of the player's fingers or the like with the contact operation unit 302 (button body 351) in a plurality of contact stages (approach stages). A plurality of steps of threshold values may be set according to the capacitance of 352, and the effect may be changed according to each step. That is, paying attention to the fact that the capacitance of the contact detector 352 increases as the player's fingers and the like approach the button body 351 (contact detector 352), a plurality of threshold values are set for the magnitude of the capacitance. It may be possible to detect in multiple stages and utilize it for the production by providing. Specifically, for example, a stage where the player's fingers and the like are separated from the button body 351 by a predetermined distance or more, a stage where the player's fingers and the like are not in contact with the button body 351 within a predetermined distance from the button body 351 and the game. By dividing the stage where a person's fingers or the like are in contact with the button body 351 and changing the effect according to each stage, a variety of effects can be presented to the player even with one contact detection sensor body 358. This makes it difficult for the player to get bored and suppresses the decline in interest.

In the above embodiment, as a normal state of the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) is set to the lower position and the elevating unsprung holding member is set. Although the state in which the 385 is moved upward is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 56A, the effect operation unit 350 is set to the lowering position and the elevating unsprung holding member 385 is moved. It may be in a state of being moved downward. As a result, since the elevating spring 365 is not strongly compressed under the normal state, it is possible to prevent the elevating spring 365 from deteriorating (fatigue) at an early stage. Further, the strongly compressed urging force of the elevating spring 365 can prevent the button base 354 and the elevating unsprung holding member 385 from being deteriorated (fatigue) at an early stage.

As described above, according to the effect operation unit 300 of the present embodiment, since it can be used for the player participation type effect of various patterns, it is possible to entertain the player with various effects and make the player bored. It is possible to make it difficult and suppress the decline in interest.

By the way, in the effect operation unit 300, an annular (combined two arcs) effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 is provided on the upper part of the spherical effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the outer periphery of the effect operation unit is provided. A contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided on the effect operation unit 350 that moves up and down inside the decorative substrate 320. Further, inside the button sleeve 353 of the effect operation unit 350, a button interior decorative substrate 364 whose position is fixed is provided. Since the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided with a sensor electrode for detecting the capacitance, when the effect operation unit 350 is moved from the lower position to the upper position, the contact detection sensor main body 358 (sensor electrode) is provided. ) Will approach the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit and the decorative substrate 364 in the button, and the capacitance of the sensor electrode will change due to the approach of the decorative substrate 320 in the outer periphery of the effect operation unit and the decorative substrate 364 in the button, and the contact detection sensor There is a risk that the main body 358 will erroneously detect.

Therefore, a conductive shield connected to the ground (GND) between the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and between the decorative substrate 364 in the button and the contact detection sensor main body 358. (For example, punching metal, metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, metal foil, etc.) may be provided. As a result, by moving the effect operation unit 350 up and down, even if the distance between the contact detection sensor body 358 and the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 and the button inner decorative board 364 changes, the contact detection sensor body 358 And the shield connected to the ground (GND) where the distance from the contact detection sensor main body 358 does not change between the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 and the button inner decorative board 364, the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 and The influence of the change in capacitance due to the approach of the decorative substrate 364 in the button can be reduced, and erroneous detection in the contact detection sensor main body 358 can be prevented.

[3-5f. Another embodiment of the dish unit]
Subsequently, the dish unit 200 of the embodiment different from the above will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61 and the like. FIG. 59 is a plan view of the effect operation unit unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact detectors are provided in the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit. FIG. 60A is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detectors are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, and FIG. 60B is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which the contact detection sensor main body and the plurality of contact detectors are connected in FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the example which provided the switching part between, and (c) is the effect that the plate left decoration unit, the plate right decoration unit, the effect operation unit, etc. of the plate unit can move forward and backward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the contact detection body on the front side and the rear side of an operation unit and the like. FIG. 61A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a contact detector having decorativeness, and FIG. 61B is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another embodiment of the effect operation unit. In addition, in FIGS. 59 to 61, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as described above.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 59, the contact detection body 352 is divided into left and right of the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R on the lower side of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350. The contact detection sensor main body left 391L and the contact detection sensor main body right 391R are connected to each of the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R, respectively. According to this embodiment, on the upper surface of the button body 351, for example, when the player moves the fingers or the like from the left side to the right side, first, when the player's fingers or the like are located on the left side of the button body 351. The capacitance of the contact detector left 390L changes and the contact detection sensor body left 391L becomes detection, and the capacitance of the contact detector right 390R does not change, and the contact detection sensor body right 391R remains undetected. It becomes. Then, when the player's fingers or the like move to the center of the button body 351, the capacitances of both the contact detector left 390L and the contact detector right 390R change, so that the contact detection sensor body left 391L and the contact detection sensor body Both of the right 391R are detected. Further, when the player's finger or the like moves to the right side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the contact detector left 390L returns to the original state, the contact detection sensor body left 391L becomes non-detection, and the contact detector right 390R is electrostatically charged. The capacitance is changing and the contact detection sensor body right 391R remains detected.

In this way, the movement of the player's fingers and the like due to the combination of detection / non-detection of the contact detection sensor main body left 391L and the contact detection sensor main body right 391R by the contact detector left 390L and the contact detector right 390R and the pattern of the change. Can be detected. As a result, it is possible to detect a contact operation with a wider variety of movements, and to present to the player a player-participatory effect capable of causing the contact operation unit 302 to perform a variety of contact operations. , The player participation type effect of operating the contact operation unit 302 can be further enjoyed. If a contact detector is added, more complicated operations can be detected.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 60A is an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are connected to one contact detection sensor main body 392. According to this embodiment, in a state where a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are provided at a plurality of different locations, one contact detection sensor main body 392 detects contact with a human body or the like by any of the contact detection bodies 393. can do.

For example, by arranging a plurality of contact detectors 393 distributed inside (lower side) of the button body 351 so that the player's fingers or the like come into contact with any part of the surface of the button body 351. The contact can be detected by the contact detection body 393, and the detection accuracy for contact with the contact operation unit 302 can be improved.

In addition, the plurality of contact detectors 393 may cause trouble to a part of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to touch (for example, a part where the player may be injured, or another player). It may be provided in a certain part, a part where a fraudulent act may be performed, etc.), and when a human body or the like is detected by any of the contact detectors 393, cautions, warnings, etc. may be notified.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 60 (b), switching between one contact detection sensor main body 392 and a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 in which only one of the contact detection bodies 393 is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. This is an example in which the portion 394 is provided. According to this embodiment, by switching the connection to any one of the plurality of contact detection bodies 352 by the switching unit 394, it is possible to detect the contact of the human body or the like only in the desired portion (contact detection body 352). .. The switching unit 394 includes "switching by a switching circuit using a relay or a transistor", "switching by another electronic circuit", and "movable member (for example, a movable dish left decoration as shown in FIG. 60 (c)". The unit 270, the dish right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300) are switched as the unit moves. ”

For example, in the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302), a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are distributed and arranged, and a player participation type effect is executed such that the parts detected by each contact detection body 393 are touched in order. Occasionally, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is switched in the order of being touched by the switching unit 394, and the contact detection body 393 detects whether or not the player's fingers or the like have touched. good. As a result, it is possible to present the player with a highly game-like player-participation-type effect by the plurality of contact detectors 393, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60 (c), when the plate left decoration unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300 can be moved forward and backward, the first is on the front side of the effect operation unit 300. When the contact detector 393a is provided and the second contact detector 393b is provided behind the dish left decoration unit 270, the dish right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300 to project the effect operation unit 300 and the like forward. When the first contact detection body 393a and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching unit 394 and the effect operation unit 300 or the like is retracted, the second contact detection body 393b and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching unit 394. You may switch to do so.

As a result, when the effect operation unit 300 or the like is projected (moved) forward, the first contact detector 393a detects the contact or approach of the player and stops the effect operation unit 300 or the like from moving forward. To. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 300 and the like from unnecessarily pressing the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and to prevent the player from being uncomfortable. be able to.

On the other hand, when the effect operation unit 300 or the like is projected forward, a gap may be formed on the rear side of the effect operation unit 300 or the like, and the effect is produced with the player's fingers or the like inserted in the gap. If the operation unit 300 or the like is retracted to the initial position, the player's fingers or the like may be pinched and injured. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the effect operation unit 300 or the like moved forward is moved backward, the switching unit 394 switches the second contact detector 393b so as to be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. Then, when the second contact detection body 393b detects the player's fingers or the like, the movement of the effect operation unit 300 or the like to the rear is stopped, and the fingers or the like are separated from the rear side of the effect operation unit 300 or the like. The guidance of the above is notified to the player, and the effect operation unit 300 or the like is moved rearward only when the second contact detector 393b is not detected to return to the initial state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured by the gap on the rear side of the effect operation unit 300 or the like, and it is possible to enhance the safety of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 61 (a), the outer shape of the contact detector 395 that detects the contact of the player's fingers or the like is shaped like a star and has decorativeness (design). The shape of the decorative contact detector 395 is not limited to a star shape, but is a circular shape, a polygonal shape, a geometric pattern shape, a shape imitating a predetermined character, and a predetermined item. It may have a shape, a shape imitating a predetermined logo, a frame-like shape, or the like. As a result, since the contact detector 395 that can be seen through the transparent button body 351 has decorativeness (design), the contact detector 395 itself can improve the appearance of the button body 351 and thus the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to a player.

Further, in the above embodiment, the contact detector 352 formed of punching metal is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the contact detector can be a metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, plating, or the like. It may be formed by metal vapor deposition, foil stamping, or the like, and the same effect as described above can be obtained. It is desirable that the contact detector is provided on the back surface side of the transparent surface member so that the player's fingers or the like do not come into direct contact with the contact detector. It can be smooth.

Further, in the above embodiment, the one in which the decorative substrate 364 (LED364a) in the button is provided below the contact detector 352 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the present invention is shown. A contact detector 397 may be provided below the transparent surface member 396, and a decorative body 398 may be provided below the contact detector 397. As a result, the decorative body 398 can be seen through the surface member 396 and the contact detector 397, so that the decorativeness of the effect operation unit provided with the surface member 396 can be enhanced, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. it can.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 61B, the contact detector 397 is formed by metal deposition so that the decorative body 398 provided below cannot be visually recognized due to the metallic luster of the contact detector 397 under normal conditions. By illuminating the decorative body 398 with an LED provided below the contact detector 397 by detecting contact with the surface member 396, the decorative body 398 can be visually recognized through the surface member 396 and the contact detector 397. good.

Further, the contact detector 352 may be formed so as not to be recognized by the player. Here, examples of the unrecognizable contact detector include "a body formed of a transparent member", "a body formed so as to be integrally visible with the decoration of a surface member such as a button body", and the like. As a result, the effect operation unit 301 provided with the contact detection body 352 cannot recognize the contact detection body 352, and therefore does not detect or perform a contact operation with the player such as a finger. For example, when a predetermined player participation type effect is executed and the player's fingers or the like come into contact with or approach the button body 351, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 raises the button body 351. By projecting to, the player becomes aware of the existence of the contact detector 352 (contact operation unit 302) for the first time, which can greatly surprise the player, entertain the player, and suppress the decline in interest. Can be done.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 420 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65 and the like. 62 (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view taken along the woo line in FIG. 62 (a). The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame left side base 421 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame left side base 421. It is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side base 421 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a are mounted on the front surface at regular intervals. It covers the front side of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 and the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted on the front surface at regular intervals. The left side upper reflector 424 attached to the door frame left side base 421 and the left side lower reflector 425 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423. The door frame left side decorative body 426 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the left side upper reflector 424 and the left side lower reflector 425 is provided.

Further, the door frame left side unit 420 includes a left side upper light guide member 427 that guides the light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 forward, and the upper and lower decorative boards 423 of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423. From the left side middle light guide member 428 that guides the light from the first LED 423a above the center of the direction forward, and from the first LED 423a below the center in the vertical direction in the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423. It is provided with a left side lower light guide member 429 that guides the light of the light forward.

The door frame left side base 421 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open forward. The door frame left side base 421 is molded in two colors using synthetic resins having different colors and light transmittance (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame left side base 421 is molded in two colors with two types of resins, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, like the handle cover 295 described above, and a part of the inner layer 3a is outer. By penetrating the layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface, a circular or radial pattern is formed. That is, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame left side base 421 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71 (a)). ). When molding the door frame left side base 421, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 422a are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 422a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 422a. LED 422b is mounted. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 422c having a unique address for causing the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b to emit light is mounted on the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame.

On the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, a total of 12 full-color LEDs, 4 for the first LED 422a and 8 for the second LED 422b, are mounted. Further, the first LED 422a provided with the second LEDs 422b on both the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 422b. Further, at least the second LED 422b is a wide-angle top-view type LED capable of irradiating light within a range of an angle of 130 degrees about the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

In the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the four first LEDs 422a are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 422b are divided into three sets: the upper two, the third to the fifth from the top, and the third to the eighth from the top. It is divided. The LED driver 422c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit four first LEDs 422a divided into two sets and eight second LEDs 422b divided into three sets in full color, respectively. As described above, a total of 15 systems of 3 systems are controlled for one set.

Although not shown, the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame has two power lines (one is a ground wire) that supplies power for driving the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the LED driver 422c. And one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 422c with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of the electric wires of is connected. Then, in the LED driver 422c of the decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, two sets are received according to the command. The four first LEDs 422a divided into three sets and the eight second LEDs 422 b divided into three sets can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

The decorative substrate 423 below the left side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and the right side is formed unevenly. A plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 423a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 423a. LED423b is mounted. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 423c having a unique address for causing the first LED 423a and the second LED 423b to emit light is mounted on the decorative substrate 423 below the left side of the door frame.

In the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, a total of 18 full-color LEDs, 6 for the first LED 423a and 12 for the second LED 423b, are mounted. Further, the first LED 423a provided with the second LED 423b on both the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 423b. Further, at least the second LED 423b is a wide-angle top-view type LED capable of irradiating light within a range of an angle of 130 degrees about the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

In the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets in order of two from the top. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 423b are 3 from the 1st to the 3rd from the top, 3 from the 4th to the 6th from the top, and 7th to the 9th from the top. It is divided into 4 groups: 3 pieces from the top and 3 pieces from the 10th to the 12th pieces from the top. The LED driver 423c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit six first LEDs 423a divided into three sets and twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four sets in full color, respectively. As described above, a total of 21 systems of 3 systems are controlled for one set.

Although not shown, the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame has two power lines (one is a ground wire) that supplies power for driving the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b, and the LED driver 423c. And one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 423c with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of the electric wires of is connected. Then, in the LED driver 423c of the decorative board 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, three sets are received according to the command. The six first LEDs 423a divided into four groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The left side upper reflector 424 is formed with a through hole 424a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 422b mounted on the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, and corresponds to the first LED 422a. A tubular holding cylinder 424b extending back and forth at the position is formed. The left side upper reflector 424 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 424a abuts on the front surface of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, and the circumference of the front side of the through hole 424a faces forward. It is formed in a dish shape that spreads out. As a result, the light from the second LED 422b can be widely diffused forward.

The holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 holds the light guide shaft portion 427 straight in the front-rear direction by inserting the cylindrical light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 described later. Is. The holding cylinder 424b is provided in the center between the through holes 424a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 that penetrates the holding cylinder 424b and protrudes forward, the second of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 facing the through holes 424a on both the upper and lower sides thereof. The light from the LED 422b is irradiated to the light guide shaft portion 427a from both the upper and lower sides with an equal amount of light, so that the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a is prevented from being reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426. be able to.

Further, in the left side upper reflector 424, a mounting hole for mounting on the door frame left side base 421 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 424a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The lower left side reflector 425 has a through hole 425a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 423b mounted on the lower left side decorative substrate 423 of the door frame, and corresponds to the first LED 423a. A tubular holding cylinder 425b extending back and forth is formed at the position. The left side lower reflector 425 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 425a abuts on the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the circumference of the front side of the through hole 425a faces forward. It is formed in a dish shape that spreads out. As a result, the light from the second LED 423b can be widely diffused forward.

In the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425, the cylindrical light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the columnar light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 are inserted. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a are held straight in the front-rear direction. The holding cylinder 425b is provided in the center between the through holes 425a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 that penetrate the holding cylinder 425b and project forward, the through holes 425a on both the upper and lower sides thereof. The light from the second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame facing the door frame is irradiated to the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a from both the upper and lower sides with an equal amount of light. It is possible to prevent the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a from being reflected on the back side of the side decoration body 426.

Further, in the left side lower reflector 425, a mounting hole for mounting on the door frame left side base 421 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 425a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The left side decorative body 426 of the door frame is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a form in which a semicircle bulging forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. The door frame left side decorative body 426 has a plurality of openings 426a penetrating back and forth at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the left-right direction. The plurality of openings 426a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 and the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. In these openings 426a, the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429, The tips of each are inserted from the rear. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame left side base 421. Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 further has a decorative portion 426b which has a constant shape recessed in an arc shape and extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to avoid a plurality of openings 426a. doing.

The left side upper light guide member 427 has four light guide shafts 427a extending in the front-rear direction in a columnar shape and a runner portion 427b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shafts 427a. , Formed of transparent material. The four light guide shafts 427a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 424b of the left side upper reflector 424. Further, the light guide shaft portion 427a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 424b. Each light guide shaft portion 427a penetrates the holding cylinder 424b of the reflector 424 on the left side from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, and the tip surface is on the left side of the door frame. It is in a state of matching the surface of the side decoration body 426. The light guide member 427 on the left side can guide the light from the first LED 422a of the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a and irradiate the light from the tip to the outside. The opening 426a of the decorative body 426 on the left side of the door frame can be made to emit bright light.

The left side middle light guide member 428 has three light guide shaft portions 428a extending in the front-rear direction in a columnar shape, and a runner portion 428b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 428a. , Formed of transparent material. The three light guide shafts 428a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the three upper holding cylinders 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. Further, the light guide shaft portion 428a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 428a penetrates the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, and the tip surface is on the left side of the door frame. It is in a state of matching the surface of the side decoration body 426. The light guide member 428 on the left side can guide the light from the first LED 423a of the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft portion 428a and irradiate the light from the tip to the outside. The opening 426a of the decorative body 426 on the left side of the door frame can be made to emit bright light.

The lower left side light guide member 429 has three light guide shaft portions 429a extending in a columnar shape in the front-rear direction and a runner portion 429b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 429a. , Formed of transparent material. The three light guide shaft portions 429a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the three holding cylinders 425b on the lower side of the left side lower reflector 425. Further, the light guide shaft portion 429a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 429a penetrates the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, and the tip surface is on the left side of the door frame. It is in a state of matching the surface of the side decoration 426. The light guide shaft member 429 on the lower left side can guide the light from the first LED 423a of the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft portion 429a and irradiate the light from the tip to the outside. The opening 426a of the decorative body 426 on the left side of the door frame can be made to emit bright light.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the color of the circular or radial pattern portion on the door frame left side base 421 is formed to be the same color as the color of the circular or radial pattern portion on the handle cover 295. At the same time, the color of the outer part of the circular or radial pattern on the left side base 421 of the door frame is formed to be the same color as the color of the outer part of the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the portion above the center in the vertical direction slightly protrudes forward from the portion below the center, and the vicinity of the lower end is gently curved to the right. The upper end of the door frame left side unit 420 is located above the door window 101a and below the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, and the lower end is below the door window 101a and is the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210. It is located above the speaker port 211b in the above. Further, the upper portion of the door frame left side unit 420 is located on the left outer side of the door frame top unit 450. The door frame left side unit 420 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and makes it appear that a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

According to the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 are located at a position to some extent rearward from the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. Since the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b mounted on them is sufficiently spread, the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426 is irradiated with the door frame. The left side decorative body 426 can be uniformly luminescently decorated.

Further, the light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 provided at a position separated from the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. Is guided forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429. Light) can be used to make the portion of the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 emit light in a point-like manner brighter than the other portions.

Further, the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, and the left side middle light guide member 428. The light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 are provided at the center between the two adjacent second LEDs 422b and the second LED 423b. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are irradiated with light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b on both sides with an equal amount of light. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are projected onto the left side decoration body 426 from the rear, the shadows become difficult to see, and the door frame left side decoration body 426 is evenly projected. It can be luminescent and decorated in a planar shape.

Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is provided with a decorative portion 426b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 426a to each other. As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are projected on the door frame left side decorative body 426 by the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b. Since the decorative portion 426b is provided at the portion where the shadow is projected, the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a can be made difficult to understand, and the left side of the door frame. The appearance of the side decoration body 426 in the light emitting decoration can be improved.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
Next, the door frame right side unit 430 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70 and the like. FIG. 66A is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, FIG. 66B is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and FIG. 66C is a front view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view, and FIG. 3D is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A in FIG. 66 (a). FIG. 70 is a cross-sectional view taken along the OO line in FIG. 66 (a). The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame right side base 431 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame right side base 431. It is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side base 431 on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface at regular intervals. The door frame right side lower decorative board 433 and the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower are mounted on the front surface with a plurality of first LEDs 433a installed at regular intervals. The right side reflector 434 attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the decorative substrate 433, and the door frame right attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the right side reflector 434. It includes a side decoration body 435 and.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a right side upper light guide member 436 that guides light from the first LED 423a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 forward, and a door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433. It includes a right side lower light guide member 437 that guides the light from the LED 433a forward.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 is mounted so as to cover the left side surface of the door frame right side base 431, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a penetrating left and right in a predetermined shape on the right side of the door frame. It is provided between the left side decorative body 438, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and the door frame right side base 431 so as to close the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. A plurality of translucent right side left lenses 439 having a decorative portion 439a to be fitted and a plurality of door frame right side bases 431 that are covered and attached so as to cover the right side surface and penetrate left and right in a predetermined shape. It is provided between the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 having the decorative hole 440a, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, and the door frame right side base 431, and is provided between the door frame right side right side right side. It comprises a translucent right side right lens 441 having a decorative portion 441a fitted so as to close the decorative hole 440a of the decorative body 440.

The left and right sides of the door frame right side base 431 extend vertically with a substantially constant width. Further, the rear end side of the door frame right side base 431 extends vertically over the entire height, and when the front end side extends substantially straight downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction, the door frame is curved to the rear side. After extending diagonally backward, it curves vertically near the bottom and extends vertically to the bottom.

The door frame right side base 431 has a decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and a decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 (decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the right side right lens). At a height portion where the decorative portion 441a) of 441 is provided, there are a plurality of reflector portions 431a that are recessed from the left and right side surface sides and extend forward to the front end. The rear end side of the reflector portion 431a, which is the inside of the decorative portion 439a and the decorative portion 441a, is inclined toward the side surface side, and the bottom surface is curved.

Further, the door frame right side base 431 is provided with decorative holes 438a and decorative holes 440a provided on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction in the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The reflector portion 431a corresponding to (the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441) has a front portion excluding a portion inside the decorative portion 439a and the decorative portion 441a. , Penetrating in the left-right direction (recessed from the left and right sides and connected to each other).

The reflector portion 431a of the door frame right side base 431 transmits light radiated rearward from the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, which will be described later. It reflects in the direction to illuminate the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 (see FIG. 70 and the like).

The decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 432a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 432a. LED432b is mounted. Further, a plurality of third LEDs 432c are mounted on the rear surface of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 432d having a unique address for causing the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, and the third LED 432c to emit light is mounted on the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame.

In the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame, a total of 16 full-color LEDs are mounted, that is, four first LEDs 432a, eight second LEDs 432b, and four third LEDs 432c. Further, the first LED 432a provided with the second LED 432b on both the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 432b. Further, at least the second LED 432b and the third LED 432c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs capable of irradiating light within a range of an angle of 130 degrees about the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

In the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three sets: the upper two, the three from the top three to the fifth, and the three from the top six to the eighth. It is divided. Further, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two.

The decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame is divided into two sets of the first LED 432a, three sets of the second LED 432b, and two sets of the third LED 432c. Therefore, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b, respectively. In order to make the third LED 432c emit light in full color, there are a total of 21 systems of 3 systems for each set. On the other hand, since the LED driver 432d of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame can control up to 24 systems, in addition to the above 21 systems, the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame will be described later. A total of 24 systems, which are 3 systems for 1 group on the upper side of the 3rd LED 433c divided into 2 groups, are controlled.

Although not shown, the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame has a first LED 432a, a second LED 432b, a third LED 432c, two third LEDs 433c on the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, and LEDs. Two power lines (one is a ground line) that supplies power to drive the driver 432d, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and an LED. A wiring cable composed of one clock line for synchronizing the driver 432d with the peripheral control board 1510 and four electric wires is connected. Then, in the LED driver 432d of the decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, two sets are received according to the command. In the four first LEDs 432a divided into three, the eight second LEDs 432b divided into three sets, the four third LEDs 432c divided into two sets, and the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, 2 The two third LEDs 433c of the upper group of the groups can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 433a are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 433a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 433a. LED433b is mounted. Further, a plurality of third LEDs 433c are mounted on the rear surface of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame at intervals at the top and bottom. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 433d having a unique address for causing the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c to emit light is mounted on the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame.

In the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, a total of 22 full-color LEDs, 6 first LEDs 433a, 12 second LEDs 433b, and 4 third LEDs 433c, are mounted. Further, the first LED 433a provided with the second LED 433b on both the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 433b. Further, at least the second LED 433b and the third LED 433c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs capable of irradiating light within a range of an angle of 130 degrees about the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

In the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets in order of two from the top. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 433b are three from the first to the third from the top, three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, and seven to the ninth from the top. It is divided into 4 groups: 3 pieces from the top and 3 pieces from the 10th to the 12th pieces from the top. Further, the four third LEDs 433c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two.

The decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame is divided into three sets of the first LED 433a, four sets of the second LED 433b, and two sets of the third LED 433c. Therefore, the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b, respectively. In order to make the third LED 433c emit light in full color, there are a total of 27 systems of 3 systems for each set. On the other hand, since the LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 can control only up to 24 systems, the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is divided into two sets of the third LED 433c. Of these, 3 systems for one set on the upper side are controlled by the LED driver 432d of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the remaining 24 systems (all of the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b on the front side and the third LED 433c on the rear side). The lower two) are controlled by the LED driver 433d of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the number of LED drivers.

Although not shown, the lower right side decorative substrate 433 of the door frame is provided with power for driving the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, the lower two third LEDs 433c, and the LED driver 433d. Power line (one is the ground wire), one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and 1 for synchronizing the LED driver 433d with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of a book clock line and four electric wires is connected. Then, in the LED driver 433d of the decorative board 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, three sets are received according to the command. Each set consists of 6 first LEDs 433a divided into 4 sets, 12 second LEDs 433b divided into 4 sets, and 2 third LEDs 433c in the lower set divided into 2 sets. It is possible to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each.

The right side reflector 434 is formed with through holes 434a penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the second LED 432b of the upper decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame and the second LED 433b of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame. At the same time, a tubular holding cylinder 434b extending back and forth is formed at a position corresponding to the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. The right side reflector 434 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 434a abuts on the front surface of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, and the front surface of the through hole 434a. The circumference of the side is formed in a dish shape that spreads forward. As a result, the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b can be widely diffused forward.

The holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 is inserted with the columnar light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the cylindrical light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437, which will be described later. The light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are held straight in the front-rear direction. The holding cylinder 434b is provided in the center between the through holes 434a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a that penetrate the holding cylinder 434b and project forward, the second LED 432b of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame facing the through holes 434a on both the upper and lower sides thereof and the like. The light from the second LED 433b of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame is irradiated to the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a from both the upper and lower sides with an equal amount of light. It is possible to prevent the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a from being reflected on the back side of the 435.

Further, in the right side reflector 434, a mounting hole for mounting on the door frame right side base 431 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 434a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

The decorative body 435 on the right side of the door frame is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a form in which a semicircle bulging forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. The door frame right side decorative body 435 has a plurality of openings 435a penetrating back and forth at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the left-right direction. The plurality of openings 435a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434. The tips of the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are inserted into these openings 435a from the rear. The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The door frame right side decorative body 435 has the same light transmittance as the door frame left side decorative body 426. Further, the door frame right side decorative body 435 further has a decorative portion 435b which has a constant shape recessed in an arc shape and extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to avoid a plurality of openings 435a. doing.

The light guide member 436 on the right side has four light guide shafts 436a extending in a columnar shape in the front-rear direction and a runner portion 436b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shafts 436a. , Formed of transparent material. The four light guide shaft portions 436a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 434b from above the right side reflector 434. Further, the light guide shaft portion 436a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 436a penetrates the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the front end surface is the door frame right side. It is in a state of matching the surface of the decorative body 435. The light guide member 436 on the right side can guide the light from the first LED 432a of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft portion 436a and irradiate the light from the tip to the outside. The opening 435a of the decorative body 435 on the right side of the door frame can be made to emit bright light.

The lower right side light guide member 437 has six light guide shafts 437a extending back and forth in a columnar shape, and a runner portion 437b connecting the lower ends of the six light guide shafts 437a. , Formed of transparent material. The six light guide shafts 437a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the six holding cylinders 434b from the bottom of the right side reflector 434. Further, the light guide shaft portion 437a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 437a penetrates the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the front end surface is the door frame right side. It is in a state of matching the surface of the decorative body 435. The light guide shaft member 437 on the lower right side can guide the light from the first LED 433a of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft portion 437a and irradiate the light from the tip to the outside. The opening 435a of the decorative body 435 on the right side of the door frame can be made to emit bright light.

The left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a penetrating in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape) in the left-right direction. The front end side of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The decorative body 438 on the right side and left side of the door frame is molded in two colors with synthetic resins having different colors and light transmittance (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is molded in two colors with two types of resins, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, similarly to the handle cover 295 and the door frame left side base 421. A part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface to form a circular or radial pattern. That is, a part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the right side left side decorative body 438 of the door frame is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (FIG. 71 (a)). When molding the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The right side left lens 439 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and protrudes to the left to decorate the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. It has a decorative portion 439a that fits into the hole 438a from the inside (right side). The surface of the decorative portion 439a is aligned with the outer (left side) surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 in a state of being fitted into the decorative hole 438a (see FIG. 70). The right side left lens 439 is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. The decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 is located to the left of the reflector portion 431a in the door frame right side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration. The light emitted from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433 can be used for light emission decoration.

Further, the right side left lens 439 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a in the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 439a facing from the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 has a radial pattern formed in two colors on the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. It looks the same as the part, and it is difficult to distinguish it from the part of the decorative portion 439a which is light-emitting and decorated by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decorative holes 440a penetrating in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape) in the left-right direction. Further, the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame has a cylinder insertion port 440b into which a cylindrical portion having a keyhole 132 at the front end of the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted. The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is formed in the vertical direction substantially the same as the total height of the door frame 3. Further, the front end side of the door frame right side decorative body 440 from the upper end to the cylinder insertion port 440b is formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is molded in two colors with synthetic resins having different colors and light transmittance (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 includes the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, similarly to the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. The two types of resins are molded in two colors, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface to form a circular or radial pattern. That is, a part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (FIG. 71 (a)). When molding the right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The right side right lens 441 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface above the cylinder insertion port 440b of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, and protrudes to the right to the right of the door frame. It has a decorative portion 441a that fits into the decorative hole 440a of the side right side decorative body 440 from the inside (left side). The surface of the decorative portion 441a is aligned with the outer (right side) surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 in a state of being fitted into the decorative hole 440a (see FIG. 70). The right side right lens 441 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 is located to the right of the reflector portion 431a in the door frame right side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration. The light emitted from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433 can be used for light emission decoration.

Further, the right side right lens 441 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a in the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 441a facing from the decorative hole 440a of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame has a radial pattern formed in two colors on the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame. It looks the same as the part, and it is difficult to distinguish it from the part of the decorative portion 441a which is luminescently decorated by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the color of the circular or radial pattern portion of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is the handle cover 295 or the door frame left. It is formed in the same color as the part of the circular or radial pattern on the side base 421, and the outside of the circular or radial pattern on the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440. The color of the portion is the same as the color of the outer portion of the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295 and the door frame left side base 421.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the portion above the center in the vertical direction protrudes forward more than the portion at the same height in the door frame left side unit 420 on the opposite side. The door frame right side unit 430 is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end to the lower end of the door frame 3. The upper part of the door frame right side unit 430 is located on the right outer side of the door frame top unit 450.

The door frame right side unit 430 decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the part of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded.

The door frame right side unit 430 has a large protrusion from the top to a portion at a height of about half a portion, and forms a tsuitate. As a result, in the island equipment of the game hall, it is difficult for the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine provided adjacent to the right side to visually recognize the inside of the door window 101a (game area 5a). Therefore, since the door frame right side unit 430 is formed in a tsuitate shape, the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity can be blocked, making it difficult for other players to see the entire game area 5a. It is possible to make it difficult for other players to feel as if they are being seen by other players, so that other players can play the game without hesitation.

According to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are located at some positions behind the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435. Because the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b mounted on them is sufficiently spread, the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is irradiated with the door frame. The right side decorative body 435 can be uniformly luminescently decorated.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate provided at positions separated from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The light from the first LED 433a of the 433 is guided (guided) forward by the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437, and the door frame. The portion of the opening 435a of the right side decoration 435 can be made to emit light in a point-like manner brighter than the other portions.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 emits light of the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, thereby causing the reflector portion of the door frame right side base 431. It is fitted into the decorative hole 438a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, which are fitted into the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 via 431a. The decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 can be light-emitting decorated. Further, since a part of the left and right side surfaces (parts of the decorative portion 439a and the decorative portion 441a) of the right side unit 430 of the counter-shaped door frame can be luminescently decorated, the pachinko machine 1 can be used for other players. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be made to stand out and has a high appeal to the player.

Further, according to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b on the front side of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the front side first of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433. The one LED 433a and the second LED 433b are used to illuminate the door frame right side decorative body 435 on the front end side, and the third LED 432c on the rear surface side of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side. With the third LED 433c on the rear surface side of the lower decorative substrate 433, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 on the rear side of the door frame right side decorative body 435 are luminescently decorated. Therefore, due to the presence of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame and the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, the light from the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b is emitted from the rear door. The right side decoration body 438 on the right side of the frame and the right side decoration body 440 on the right side of the door frame are irradiated to illuminate the decoration, or the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c illuminates the right side decoration body 435 on the front side door frame. It is possible to prevent the door from being luminescent and decorated. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 435, the rear side door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be completely independent and luminescent. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of presenting a light emitting effect having a higher effect to a player.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, and the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436. The light guide shaft portion 437a of the lower right side light guide member 437 is provided at the center between the two adjacent second LEDs 432b and the second LED 433b. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are irradiated with light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b on both sides with an equal amount of light, so that the door frame right side decorative body 435 is subjected to light. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are projected from the rear, the shadows are difficult to see, and the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be uniformly luminescent and decorated.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 has a door frame right side decorative body 435 having a decorative portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 435a to each other. .. As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are projected on the door frame right side decorative body 435 by the light from the second LED 432b or the second LED 433b, the shadows are projected. Since the decorative portion 435b is provided in the portion to be used, the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a can be made difficult to see, and the appearance of the light emitting decoration of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is improved. be able to.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be sandwiched between the upper parts of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430.

The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door window 101a, the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. The top top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top base 451. It is equipped with a door frame top bottom plate (not shown) that connects to the lower end of the door frame.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, and has a door frame top central decorative board 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and a door. Door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a door A door frame top right decorative board 457, which is attached to the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. (See FIG. 72).

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a pair of top center speakers (not shown) provided on the front surface of the door frame top base 451 and a pair of tops provided on both the left and right outer sides of the pair of top center speakers. The side speaker (not shown), the top lower cover 465 attached to the lower side of the door frame top decorative body 453 so as to cover the front of the top center speaker and the top side speaker, and the front surface of the door frame top base 451. A door frame top relay board (not shown) attached near the right end and a door frame top top plate 468 attached to the top top cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451 are provided. There is.

The door frame top base 451 extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the distance between the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430. The top top cover 452 projects forward in a semicircular shape in a plan view, and has an opening 452a that is largely notched from the rear end to the front. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame top decorative body 453 extends to the left and right in a semicircular shape along the front end of the top top cover 452 in a plan view. Further, the front surface of the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semicircular shape so that the center in the vertical direction projects forward. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. A plurality of LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 455a.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip shape extending to the left and right. A plurality of LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 456a.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. A plurality of LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can illuminate and decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 457a.

The pair of top center speakers are provided apart from each other on the left and right. The pair of top center speakers are full-range speakers, and output sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band. The pair of top-side speakers are tweeters, and output high frequencies of sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. Through the top lower cover 465, the sound output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker is radiated forward and downward.

The door frame top relay board includes a door frame top central decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker, and a top side speaker, and a door frame sub of the door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the relay board 105.

The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, the front end is locked to the top top cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 is assembled on the door frame 3 and decorates the upper and outer surfaces of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The door frame top unit 450 is connected so that the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 sink from the front into a portion behind the upper part of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. Has been done. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side by a pair of top center speakers and a pair of top side speakers.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
Next, the decoration (exterior) of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 28, 71 and the like. FIG. 71 (a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing a state in which the outer layer of the two-color molding is opaque in the door frame, and FIG. 71 (b) is the outer layer with the inner layer as it is in (a). Is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in a transparent state. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially quadrangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes a dish left decorative body 271 of the dish unit 200, a dish right decorative body 276, a unit top cover 312 and a button body 351 of the production operation unit 300, and a door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

The dish left decorative body 271, the dish right decorative body 276, the door frame left side decorative body 426, the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the door frame top decorative body 453 that surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a have a semi-tube shape. Since it is formed, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, the dish left decorative body 271, the dish right decorative body 276, the unit top cover 312, the door frame left side decorative body 426, the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the door frame surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind or below the top decorative body 453, the dish left decorative board 273, the dish right decorative board 278, the production operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame. Since the right side upper decorative substrate 432, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, these decorative substrates By appropriately emitting light from the LED, it is possible to decorate the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a with light emission, or to show the player a light emission effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, a spherical effect operation unit 300 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is attached to the center in the left-right direction. As a result, in the dish unit 200, since the large spherical effect operation unit 300 is located at the center, the visual impact can be enhanced, and the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302 and pressing) of the effect operation unit 300 can be enhanced. The operation unit 303) can be made to stand out.

Further, in a normal state, the upper surface of the button body 351 as the effect operation unit 301 coincides with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 so as to form one sphere, so that the player It is possible to make it difficult for the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) to be recognized as being operable, and the effect operation unit 300 made of a huge sphere allows the player to see other things at first glance. It is possible to recognize that it is a pachinko machine 1 different from the pachinko machine, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and it is possible to enhance the appeal to the player, and this pachinko machine can be used as a pachinko machine to play. It is possible to make it easier to select the machine 1.

Further, in the dish unit 200, since the center (center) of the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is positioned in front of the apex of the spherical effect operation unit 300, the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302) The upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303) faces the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the entire effect of the effect operation unit 301 can be easily seen by the player who recognizes that the huge sphere provided in the center of the plate unit 200 is the effect operation unit 301. You can make it look bigger. In addition, it is possible to strongly make the player want to operate the huge spherical effect operation unit 301, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the execution of the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301. At the same time, when the player participation type production is executed, the player can actively operate the production operation unit 301, and the operation of the production operation unit 301 is to entertain the player participation type production. The decrease can be suppressed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 2 to 5, the exterior of the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of circular or radial patterns on its outer surface. In FIG. 71, the door frame right side unit 430 is shown as an example as a part of the exterior of the door frame 3.

More specifically, as the exterior of the door frame 3, the plurality of circular and radial patterns on the outer surface are colored in two colors using two types of synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). It is formed by molding. The patterned exterior portion of the door frame 3 is molded in two colors with two types of resins, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b. By appearing on the outer surface, a circular or radial pattern is formed.

For example, demonstrating the door frame right side unit 430 as an example, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), when the inner layer 3a is provided with a honeycomb-like pattern and the outer layer 3b is made opaque, the circular pattern portion is inside. The honeycomb-like pattern of the layer 3a can be seen, and the opaque outer layer 3b can be seen in the portion other than the pattern, and the exterior has an appearance in which the circular or radial pattern is emphasized.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), when the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the honeycomb-like pattern applied to the inner layer 3a can be seen through the outer layer 3b, and is relatively circular. The radial pattern is hard to see. That is, the exterior has an appearance in which the honeycomb-like pattern applied to the inner layer 3a is emphasized.

In FIG. 71, in the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 molded in two colors as a part of the exterior, the decorative portion 441a fitted in the decorative hole 440a is used as a part of the right side right lens 441. Since it is a separate member different from the decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, the pattern of the decorative hole 440a (decorative portion 441a) does not change even if the outer layer 3b is transparent.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the main members constituting the exterior of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding, the materials used for the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b (synthesis). By appropriately selecting and combining the color of the resin), the light transmittance, and the like, the appearance can be significantly different even if the shape remains the same.

Therefore, for example, at the time of a minor change or the like, by making the outer layer 3b transparent so that the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen, the exterior of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed at no cost.

Alternatively, the colors of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are changed for each production lot, and the pachinko machines 1 of different lots are shipped to the same game hall and installed in the island facility to make the player feel colorful. It is possible to increase the appealing power to.

In the above embodiment, two-color molding is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multi-color molding such as three-color molding or four-color molding may be used. Specifically, in the above embodiment, the exterior is constructed by combining the right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame molded in two colors with the right lens 441 on the right side, but the door is molded in three colors. The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the frame and the right lens 441 on the right side may be integrally formed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the one in which a circular or radial pattern is formed is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and patterns of various shapes may be formed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side provided on the outside of the door window 101a in which the game area 5a in the door frame 3 faces forward. The decorative body such as the surface decorative body 438 and the right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame are molded in two colors (multicolor molding) with two synthetic resins having different light transmission rates, and the decoration with a polka dot pattern is formed by the two color molding. Since the decorative body is formed into a desired shape at the same time, the desired decoration is applied to the decorative body. Therefore, the desired shape is obtained like the decorative body of a conventional pachinko machine. It is not necessary to apply the desired decoration by painting or the like after forming the door, and the labor required for the decoration can be omitted and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, since the decoration of the decorative body is formed by two-color molding, the appearance (appearance) of the decorative body can be easily changed by changing the color of the synthetic resin used. More specifically, when the polka dot decoration is formed by two-color molding, the inner layer 3a forming the inside of the polka dot circle and the outer layer 3b forming the outside of the circle are each transmitted. When they are formed in the same color with different rates, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b have the same color, so that the polka-dotted circles are difficult to see, and the appearance is such that the polka-dotted decoration is not applied. On the other hand, when the inner layer 3a forming the inside of the polka-dotted circle is white and the outer layer 3b forming the outside of the circle is pink, due to the difference in color between the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b. The polka-dotted circles are clearly visible, giving the appearance a pink background with white polka-dotted decoration. In this way, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin to be used when forming the decorative body, and the appearance is changed. The cost can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin to be used when forming the decorative body. If the combination of synthetic resins used for each lot is changed and different lots of this pachinko machine 1 are shipped to the same game hall and installed in a row at the island equipment, the island equipment will look colorful. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player who is migrating in the game hall, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power that can attract the player.

Further, a handle cover 295 and a door frame left side base having a decoration molded in two colors by a plurality of synthetic resins having different light transmission rates on a portion outside the door window 101a in which the game area 5a of the door frame 3 faces forward. Since decorative bodies such as 421, the right side left side decorative body 438 of the door frame, and the right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame are provided, the outside of the door window 101a should be decorated with the decorative body to improve the appearance. Can be done.

Further, since the outer layer 3b of the decorative body molded in two colors is formed of a synthetic resin having a lower light transmittance than the remaining inner layer 3a, it is possible to make the inner layer 3a difficult to see through the outer layer 3b. Therefore, the boundary of the decoration (polka dot pattern) composed of the inner layer 3a can be seen clearly, and the decoration can be clearly seen.

Further, since the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b is lower than that of the remaining inner layer 3a, the inner layer 3a can be made difficult to see through the outer layer 3b. Therefore, in the initial model, the outer layer 3b is transmitted through the light. As a low rate, the inner layer 3a is prevented from being seen through from the outside, and at the time of model change, a synthetic resin having high light transmittance is used for the outer layer 3b so that the inner layer 3a can be seen through. As a result, the way of looking at the decoration of the decorative body can be greatly changed, and the appearance (decoration) can be easily changed without changing the shape of the decorative body.

Further, as described above, since the inner layer 3a can be made difficult to see by the outer layer 3b having a low light transmittance, a pattern (pattern by shape, painting, printing, sticking of a seal, etc.) on the surface of the inner layer 3a, etc. In the initial model, the opaque outer layer 3b with low light transmittance prevents the pattern of the inner layer 3a from being seen through the outer layer 3b, and is transparent to the outer layer 3b at the time of model change. Since the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen through by using a synthetic resin, the appearance (decoration) of the decorative body can be significantly changed without changing the shape of the decorative body. , It is possible to suppress the increase in the cost of model change.

Further, inside the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board that can irradiate light Since the third LED 433c of 433 is provided and the inner layer 3a is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the others, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body When the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c provided inside the 440 are made to emit light, the inside of the decorations formed on the surfaces of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The part of the layer 3a (the part of the polka dots) can be brightly decorated with light emission, and the outside of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a can be decorated with light emission to improve the appearance and to the player on the right side of the door frame. The light emitting decoration of the side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be enjoyed, and the deterioration of the player's interest can be suppressed.

Further, depending on the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b, the outer layer 3b can also be light-emitting and decorated by the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c irradiated to the outer layer 3b through the inner layer 3a, so that the door frame is right. The entire side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be light-emitting decorated, and the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be beautifully displayed for the game. It can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of the person.

Further, as described above, the decoration of the decorative body such as the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is molded in two colors of a plurality of synthetic resins having different light transmittances (multicolor). Since it is formed by molding), LEDs (light emitting means) such as the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c are made to emit light depending on the number of layers to the surface and the difference in the light transmittance of the synthetic resin used. The decoration that can be seen when there is no light and the decoration that can be seen when the LED is lit can be made different, and the change in the decoration can strongly attract the interest of the player. More specifically, for example, when two-color molding is described as multi-color molding as an example, when a hole having a predetermined shape is formed in a portion of the inner layer 3a covered by the outer layer 3b, the LED is made to emit light. In the absence, only the surface-exposed portion of the inner layer 3a is visible. On the other hand, when the LED is made to emit light, the light from the LED is directly irradiated to the outer layer 3b without passing through the inner layer 3a at the portion where the hole is formed in the inner layer 3a, so that the surface of the outer layer 3b is inside. The shape of the hole in the layer 3a can be seen, and the portion of the inner layer 3a exposed on the surface and the portion of the hole can be seen, and the decoration different from that when the LED is not emitted can be seen. Alternatively, for example, when the inner layer 3a is yellow and the outer layer 3b is blue, when the LED is made to emit yellow light, only the portion of the inner layer 3a in the surface decoration is luminescently decorated. On the other hand, when the LED emits green light (or white), both the inner layer 3a portion and the outer layer 3b portion on the surface are luminescently decorated. Therefore, the luminescent decoration in the decorative body depends on the color of the light emitted by the LED. The part to be decorated can be changed, and the decoration to be luminescent can be changed. As described above, since the decoration of the decorative body can be changed by the light emission of the LED, the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the player can be entertained. In addition, by making the LED emit light according to the game state, the change in the decoration of the decorative body causes the player to have a chance or change the driving operation (for example, "right-handed"). It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be suggested and can produce various effects.

Further, since the amount of protrusion in the front-rear direction of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 provided on both the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a (gaming area 5a) is different. Since the impression (appearance) when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front left and the front right can be different, the pachinko machine 1 is wandering around in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Even if the player once passes in front of the pachinko machine 1, when the player approaches the pachinko machine 1 from the opposite side, the appearance is different from that at the time of the previous round trip, which attracts interest in the pachinko machine 1. It can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can be attached and can attract a player who is wandering in the game hall to select the pachinko machine 1 to be played. ..

[3-10. LED layout and system in the door frame]
Next, the arrangement and control system of each LED provided on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. 72 is a front view showing each decorative substrate of the door frame, and FIG. 73 is a plan view showing the decorative substrate of the portion of the effect operation unit of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 72, the door frame 3 is provided with a handle 195 in the lower right corner in the front view, in which the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by a rotation operation by the player. The handle 195 includes a central hub portion 195a, three spoke portions 195b in which the central hub portion 195a extends outward, and an annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the spoke portions 195b to each other. It has an appearance similar to that of the steering wheel of an automobile.

In the handle 195, the front side of the central hub portion 195a is covered with the handle front lens 185, and a handle decorative substrate 184 on which a plurality of LEDs 184a are mounted on the front surface is provided between the handle front lens 185 and the central hub portion 195a. It is provided. Further, behind the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, a handle cover decorative substrate 293 on which a plurality of LEDs 293a are mounted is provided on the front surface.

There are a total of 10 handle decorative substrates 184, one in the center, three on the middle circumference with a certain interval in the circumferential direction, and six with a certain interval in the circumferential direction along the outer circumference. Three LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) are mounted in a triple concentric pattern. These LEDs 184a are one in the center, three in the middle connected by a broken line in FIG. 72, two in the upper left of the outer circumference and two in the upper right of the outer circumference, each of which is connected by a broken line. It is divided into 5 groups, 2 on the lower side of the outer circumference. The LEDs 184a divided into these five sets are controlled by 15 systems by the LED driver 184b, and each set of LEDs 184a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the other hand, 12 LEDs 293a are provided in a row on the handle cover decorative substrate 293 at intervals in the circumferential direction. As shown by the broken lines in FIG. 72, these 12 LEDs 293a are composed of two from the center on the lower left, two on the left, two on the upper left, two on the upper right, and two on the right. It is divided into 6 groups, 2 at the bottom right. The LEDs 293a divided into these 6 sets are controlled by 18 systems by the LED driver 293b, and each set of LEDs 293a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

In this way, since the handle 195 is provided with the handle decorative substrate 184 and the handle cover decorative substrate 293, a light emitting effect such that the light rotates around the handle 195 and toward the center of the handle 195 can be produced. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which the light is concentrated and a light emitting effect in which the light spreads toward the outside of the handle 195. Further, the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative substrate 293 can illuminate the outside and the inside of the handle cover 295.

Further, as shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially quadrangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 is a dish left decorative body 271 of the dish unit 200, a dish right decorative body 276, a production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, and a door frame of the door frame right side unit 430. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the right side decorative body 435 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

The dish left decorative body 271, the dish right decorative body 276, the door frame left side decorative body 426, the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the door frame top decorative body 453 that surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a have a semi-tube shape. Since it is formed, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which substantially the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, as shown in FIG. 72, the dish left decorative substrate 273 behind the dish left decorative body 271 and the dish right decorative substrate 278 behind the dish right decorative body 276 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Door frame left side decorative board 426 rear door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and door frame left side lower decorative board 423, door frame right side decorative body 435 rear door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and door frame right The lower side decorative substrate 433, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are provided facing forward.

More specifically, the dish left decorative substrate 273 has four LEDs 273a mounted in a row in the left-right direction on the front surface, and an LED driver for emitting the LED 273a and the LED 273a of the dish right decorative substrate 278 described later. (The illustration is omitted). These four LEDs 273a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a broken line in FIG. 72. The LEDs 273a divided into these two sets are controlled by an LED driver in six systems, and each set of LEDs 273a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The dish right decorative substrate 278 is provided with four LEDs 278a mounted on the front surface in a row in the left-right direction. These four LEDs 278a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a broken line in FIG. 72. The LEDs 278a divided into these two sets are controlled by the LED driver of the dish left decorative substrate 273 in six systems, and each set of LEDs 278a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, four first LEDs 422a mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction and two mounted vertically side by side between the first LEDs 422a. It includes eight second LEDs 422b and an LED driver 422c for emitting a total of twelve first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b. The first LED 422a and the second LED 422b are mounted on the front surface. The four first LEDs 422a of the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. Further, the eight second LEDs 422b are the upper two, the third to the fifth from the top, and the sixth to the eighth from the top, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. It is divided into 3 groups, 3 pieces up to the first piece. The four first LEDs 422a divided into two sets and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three sets are controlled by the LED driver 422c in 15 systems, and the first LED 422a and the second of each set are controlled. The LED 422b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, six first LEDs 423a mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction and two mounted vertically side by side between the first LEDs 423a. It includes 12 second LEDs 423b and an LED driver 423c for emitting a total of 18 first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b. The first LED 423a and the second LED 423b are mounted on the front surface. The six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets in order of two from the top, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. Further, the twelve second LEDs 423b are three from the first to the third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, as connected by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. It is divided into 4 groups, 3 from the 7th to the 9th from the top and 3 from the 10th to the 12th from the top. The six first LEDs 423a divided into three sets and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four sets are controlled by the LED driver 423c in 21 systems, and the first LED 423a and the second LED of each set are controlled. The LED 423b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame, four first LEDs 432a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction and two first LEDs 432a arranged vertically side by side between the first LEDs 432a are placed on the front surface. It includes eight mounted second LEDs 432b and four third LEDs 432c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame causes a total of 16 first LEDs 432a, second LED 432b, and third LED 432c, and two third LEDs 433c of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame to emit light. LED driver 432d is provided. The four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. Further, the eight second LEDs 432b are the upper two, the third to the fifth from the top, and the sixth to the eighth from the top, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. It is divided into 3 groups, 3 pieces up to the first piece. Further, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. The first LED 432a divided into two sets, the second LED 432b divided into three sets, the third LED 432c divided into two sets, and the third LED 432c divided into two sets in the lower right side decorative substrate 433 of the door frame. The upper set of the third LED 433c of the LED 433c is controlled by the LED driver 432d in 24 systems, and the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the third LED 432c, and the third LED 433c of each set are appropriately colored. It can emit light in full color.

On the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame, six first LEDs 433a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction and two first LEDs 433a arranged vertically side by side between the first LEDs 433a are placed on the front surface. Twelve second LEDs 433b mounted, four third LEDs 433c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction, first LED 433a, second LED 433b, and two lower third LEDs 433c. It is equipped with an LED driver 433d for emitting light. The six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets in order of two from the top, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. Further, the twelve second LEDs 433b are three from the first to the third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, as connected by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. It is divided into 4 groups, 3 from the 7th to the 9th from the top and 3 from the 10th to the 12th from the top. Further, the four third LEDs 433c on the rear side are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as shown by the broken lines in FIG. 72. What are the 6 first LEDs 433a divided into 3 sets, the 12 second LEDs 433b divided into 4 sets, and the lower 1 set of 2 3rd LEDs 433c divided into 2 sets? , The LED driver 433d controls 24 systems, and each set of the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c can emit light in full color as appropriate.

In the present embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 provided on the left side of the door window 101a, and the door frame right side upper decoration provided on the right side of the door window 101a. The substrate 432 and the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame are formed in a left-right asymmetrical shape with the center of the door window 101a in the left-right direction as a boundary. Further, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 and the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are also different in shape in the front-rear direction. ..

The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are mounted on their respective front surfaces. The number of one LED 422a, second LED 422b, first LED 423a, second LED 423b and the first LED 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, second LED 433b are the same as each other, and the arrangement and system (one point in FIG. 72). (Systems connected by chain lines and two-dot chain lines) are provided symmetrically. As a result, it is possible to easily create the data of the LED lighting pattern for performing the light emission effect.

The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 has six LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface at intervals in the left-right direction, LEDs 455a, LED 456a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457. It is equipped with an LED driver (not shown) for emitting light. The six LEDs 455a are divided into three sets of two from the left, as shown by the broken lines in FIG. 72. The six LEDs 455a divided into three sets are controlled by nine systems by the LED driver, and each set of LEDs 455a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is provided with four LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface, which are opened in the left-right direction. The four LEDs 456a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by a broken line in FIG. 72. The four LEDs 456a divided into two sets are controlled by six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, and each set of LEDs 456a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The decorative substrate 457 on the right side of the door frame top is provided with four LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface, which are opened in the left-right direction. The four LEDs 457a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by a broken line in FIG. 72. The four LEDs 457a divided into two sets are controlled by six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, and each set of LEDs 457a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

According to the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, And the light from the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 is the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the left side lower guide. The opening of the door frame left side decorative body 426 by the light guide shaft portion 429a of the optical member 429, the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436, and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437. It is guided to 426a and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and is irradiated outward (forward). As a result, on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect that emits bright light in a dot shape, which is a dot shape that has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines. The luminescence effect that shines in the spot can make the player "haha".

Further, in the door frame 3, the LED 273a of the dish left decorative board 273 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the LED 278a of the dish right decorative board 278, the second LED 422b of the decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, and the lower left side of the door frame The second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423, the second LED 432b of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame, the second LED 433b of the decorative substrate 433 below the right side of the door frame, the LED 455a of the central decorative substrate 455 on the door frame top, the left decorative substrate on the door frame top. By appropriately causing the LED 456a of the 456 and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 to emit light, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a is light-emitting and decorated, or the light is emitted so as to move along the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Can be shown to the player.

That is, in the door frame 3, the LED system connected by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72 executes a spot emission effect on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect in which the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 emit light in a planar manner (surface emission) by the LED system connected by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. Can be done.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is directed by the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide. The shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a guide the light to the front end inserted into the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and forward from there. Since the light is radiated to the door frame, the portions of the opening 426a and the opening 435a can be spot-emitting brightly and brightly as compared with the general surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. .. At this time, since the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are arranged outside the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 a. And even if the portion of the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is made to emit spot light with high brightness, the inside of the game area 5a facing from the door window 101a is not difficult to see due to the glare, and the game is played through the door window 101a. The game ball B, the effect image, the decorative body, and the like in the area 5a can be visually recognized in a good state.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are projected forward from the door window 101a (game area 5a), and spot light is emitted with high brightness. The opening 426a and the opening 435a are connected to the front ends of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 that project forward (the front ends that project forward in an arc shape in a plan view). However, since it is provided on the line in the vertical direction), the spot emission light is not emitted to the rear side (door window 101a side). Therefore, the spot emission light from the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 is reflected toward the player by the glass plate 162 provided on the door window 101a, and is behind the door window 101a. The inside of the game area 5a is not difficult to see, and the spot light emission with high brightness can direct the interest of other players to the pachinko machine 1.

Further, according to the door frame 3, spot light emitting portions are provided on the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 that protrude forward from the door window 101a in the door frame 3. Therefore, the spot light emitting portion is located at substantially the same position as the vicinity of the outer periphery of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, even if the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the spot-emitting portion is located outside the player, so that the player does not block the spot-emitting light. As a result, when the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame and the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame emit spot light, high-intensity spot light can be seen by other players who are not seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the existence of this pachinko machine 1 can be appealed to other players, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine to be played can be selected in the game hall. It can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of attracting a player who is wandering around to the pachinko machine 1.

It should be noted that both sides of the spot LED (first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a) for making the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 emit spot light. It is desirable that the surface LEDs (second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b) belong to the same system. As a result, both sides of the light guide pin (light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft portion 436a, and light guide shaft portion 437a) that guide the light of the spot LED are sandwiched. Since the surface LEDs of the above are in the same lighting mode, the same amount of light is emitted from both sides of the light guide pin at the same timing, and the light is guided by the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. The shadow of the optical pin can be made even more difficult to see.

Further, as shown in FIG. 73, the door frame 3 is provided below the contact operation unit 302 in the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300, and has an annular shape in which 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the upper surface. The outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit is provided. The outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit includes two LED drivers for causing 31 LEDs 320a to emit light. The outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit is divided into two, a front decorative substrate 321 and a rear decorative substrate 322.

Eighteen of the 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the front decorative substrate 321 of the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit. Six of the 18 LEDs 320a of the front decorative substrate 321 are provided at intervals on the circumference close to the inner circumference, and three are provided at intervals on the circumference between the inner circumference and the outer circumference. The remaining nine are provided at intervals on the circumference near the outer circumference.

The remaining 13 LEDs 320a are mounted on the rear decorative substrate 322 of the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit. The 13 LEDs 320a of the rear decorative substrate 322 are provided with two at intervals near both ends of the arc on the circumference close to the inner circumference, and three are provided between the inner circumference and the outer circumference. The remaining six are provided at intervals on the circumference, and the remaining six are provided at intervals near both ends of the arc on the circumference near the outer circumference.

As shown in FIG. 73, the 18 LEDs 320a of the front decorative substrate 321 are connected by a chain line at one point, and the six on the inner circumference are three sets of two in the circumferential direction, and the three on the middle circumference. Is divided into 3 sets of 1 each, and 9 sets on the outer circumference are divided into 3 sets of 3 sets in the circumferential direction, for a total of 9 sets. Further, as shown in FIG. 73, the 18 LEDs 320a of the rear decorative substrate 322 are connected by a chain line at one point, so that four on the inner circumference are two sets of two near both ends, and on the middle circumference. There are a total of 7 sets, 3 sets of 3 each, and 2 sets of 9 on the outer circumference, 3 sets near both ends. That is, in the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320, 31 LEDs 320a are divided into 16 sets. The LEDs 320a divided into these 16 sets are controlled by 48 systems by two LED drivers, and each set of LEDs 320a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

According to the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320, by appropriately emitting light from 31 or 48 systems of LEDs 320a, a light emission effect in which the light is rotated in the effect operation unit 301 or light emission in which the light is concentrated in the center is emitted. It is possible to show the player a production or a light emission production in which the light spreads outward.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the door frame 5a extends vertically along the door window 101a to the outside of one side and the other side of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a so that the amount of protrusion in the front-rear direction is different from each other. The door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 are provided, and the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body are provided. Door frame left side upper decorative board 422 on which a plurality of first LED 422a and second LED 422b are mounted behind each of 435, and door frame left side lower decoration on which a plurality of first LED 423a and second LED 423b are mounted. The board 423 and the decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame on which the plurality of first LEDs 432a and the second LED 432b are mounted, and the decorative board 433 on the lower right side of the door frame on which the plurality of first LEDs 433a and the second LED 433b are mounted. Is provided, and the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is guided to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 to move forward. The light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 to be irradiated, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429, and the right side upper light guide member. Since the light guide shaft portion 436a of the 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the lower right side light guide member 437 are provided, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the door frame right side The second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b of the upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 emit light to make the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. It is possible to make a surface-like light emitting decoration (surface emission), and the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. When the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a are made to emit light, the light emitted forward causes the columnar light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide shaft. After being guided to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 by the portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the door is radiated forward from their front end (front end surface). Guidance in the frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 The parts corresponding to the tips of the optical axis portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a can be lightly decorated (spot-emitting) in a dot shape. ..

Therefore, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a By appropriately emitting light of the second LED 423b, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b, and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b, a door frame left side decoration body provided outside the game area 5a (door window 101a). The entire 426 and the right side decoration of the door frame 435 are luminescent and decorated in a plane shape, and a part of the left side decoration 426 of the door frame and the right side decoration 435 of the door frame is luminescently decorated in dots, or the left side of the door frame. Since the entire side decoration 426 and the right side decoration 435 of the door frame can be luminescent and decorated in a dot shape, a variety of luminescent effects can be shown to the player. It is possible to make the player less bored and entertain, and to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

At this time, the system in which the plurality of first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a, and the second LED 423b of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 are separated and the door frame right The systems in which the plurality of first LEDs 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b of the side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right lower decorative substrate 433 are separated are symmetrical with each other, and in each case, Since the plurality of first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a and the plurality of second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b are different systems from each other, the left side of the door frame. Lighting pattern of the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a, and the second LED 423b on the decoration body 426 side, and the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b on the door frame right side decoration body 435 side. When creating the data of, for example, the data for the door frame left side decorative body 426 side can be diverted to the data for the door frame right side decorative body 435 side, or the door frame left side decorative body 426 side and the door frame. Since it is possible to create data with the same flow as that of the right side decorative body 435 side, it is possible to easily create the lighting pattern data (with the same creation time). ) It becomes easier to construct data of more complicated lighting patterns, and it is possible to show the player a variety of lighting effects of the lighting pattern, and also to show the player a variety of lighting effects with a high effect. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of exerting a sufficient effect on the light emission effect of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 on both the left and right outer sides of the 101a.

Further, since the two second LEDs 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b provided between the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a have the same system. , First LED422a, first LED423a, first LED432a, first LED433a (light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft portion 436a, light guide shaft portion 437a). Since the two second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b provided in the above are always turned on at the same time, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a, By irradiating light from both sides of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the light guide shaft portion 427a and the guide by the light from the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b, respectively. The shadows of the optical axis portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a are thinned so as to cancel out, and are projected onto the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. The shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a can be made difficult to see, and the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame can be made difficult to see. The right side decorative body 435 can be uniformly luminescent and decorated in a plane shape.

Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 that emit light and decorate in a plane shape by the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b are the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, and the first LED 423a. (1) The LED 432a and the first LED 433a are used to decorate the parts corresponding to the front ends of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a in a dot-like manner. Because of this, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect that could not be seen with conventional pachinko machines, such as light-emitting in a plane and partially in dots, and emits bright dots in dots. The light-emitting effect can strongly attract the player's interest, and the light-emitting effect that emits spot-like lights that are not found in conventional pachinko machines can make the player "haha". It can be a pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player.

Further, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 on one side (left side) in the left-right direction, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower on the other side (right side). Since the decorative substrate 433 has a shape that is asymmetrical to each other, at first glance, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, and the door frame right Since the lower side decorative board 433 can be distinguished, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame to be assembled in the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 can be identified. It is possible to prevent the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side from being mistaken, improve the workability of assembly, and suppress the increase in cost.

[3-11. Identification of decorative board]
Subsequently, the identification of various decorative substrates on which LEDs are mounted in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 74 and the like, using the door frame 3 as an example. FIG. 74 is a rear view showing each decorative substrate provided around the door window of the door frame. Here, the dish left decorative board 273, the dish right decorative board 278, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and the door frame right provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3. The side upper decorative substrate 432, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 will be described in detail as examples.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a white substrate is used as the decorative substrate on which the LED is mounted, and a non-white LED driver, a connector, or the like attached to the decorative substrate is attached to the rear surface side of the substrate. I am doing it. As a result, the light from the LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate is reflected to the front side so that the decorative body and the like in the front can be luminescent and decorated more brightly, and the front (player side). Therefore, the decorative board is made inconspicuous.

The white decorative substrate may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material), or the substrate plate material itself may be white.

Since the pachinko machine 1 has many decorative substrates, different identification portions 7 are provided on the rear surface of each decorative substrate so that each decorative substrate can be easily identified (see FIG. 74). ). The identification unit 7 is a character identification unit 7a with characters such as Chinese characters, kana, alphabets, symbols, numbers, model numbers, etc., and a color identification unit 7b with different colors (indicated by shading in different shades in FIG. 74). And have.

More specifically, as the character identification unit 7a, the characters "lower left" on the plate left decorative substrate 273, the characters "lower right" on the plate right decorative substrate 278, and "upper left" on the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422. Is the character "lower left" on the door frame left lower side decorative board 423, "upper right" on the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and "lower right" on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. The characters are "upper middle" on the door frame top center decorative board 455, "upper left" on the door frame top left decorative board 456, and "upper right" on the door frame top right decorative board 457. , Each is given.

Further, the color identification unit 7b has a different color for each decorative substrate, and is applied over substantially the front surface of the rear surface. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the color identification unit 7b is not provided on the entire surface of the rear surface but partially so as not to interfere with the soldering of the LED or the like mounted on the decorative substrate. ..

The identification unit 7 is applied to the decorative substrate by printing (silk printing), sticking a sticker, applying paint, or the like.

In the above description, the decorative substrate provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 has been described as an example, but various types provided in the handle unit 180, the effect operation unit 300, the game board 5, and the like have been described. The decorative substrate may also be provided with an identification unit 7 such as a character identification unit 7a and a color identification unit 7b.

Further, in the above embodiment, the identification unit 7 is provided with both the character identification unit 7a and the color identification unit 7b, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only the character identification unit 7a may be used. However, only the color identification unit 7b may be used.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the decorative substrate on which the LED is mounted is provided with the identification unit 7 (character identification unit 7a and color identification unit 7b), a decorative substrate having a similar shape can be easily formed. It is possible to prevent the wrong decorative substrate from being assembled during the assembly work, and it is possible to improve the workability of the assembly.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the identification unit 7 is provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, the front side of the decorative substrate can be made as white as possible, and the LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate can be used. The light can be reflected forward on the front side of the decorative substrate to make the front decorative body or the like brighter and luminescent, and the decorative substrate can be made inconspicuous from the front (player side) to improve the appearance. Can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color identification unit 7b as the identification unit 7 is applied over substantially the entire decorative substrate, it is desired (desired color) only by looking at a part of the decorative substrate. ) Can be recognized as a decorative substrate. Therefore, even when a plurality of types of decorative boards are overlapped during assembly or the like, if a part of the decorative boards can be seen, the desired decorative board can be easily found, and the labor required for the assembly work. Can be simplified.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color of the color identification unit 7b is different for each decorative substrate, the color of the same color is used when preparing the decorative substrate required for one pachinko machine 1 at the time of assembly. When there is a decorative substrate provided with the identification unit 7b, it can be easily recognized that the same decorative substrate is prepared in duplicate. Alternatively, when the color identification unit 7b of the prepared decorative substrate is insufficient in color, it can be easily recognized that there is a decorative substrate that is not prepared. Therefore, when preparing the decorative board necessary for assembling the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to easily recognize that an extra decorative board is prepared or the prepared decorative board is insufficient. Therefore, the decorative substrate can be surely prepared as much as necessary, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily set up at the time of assembly. Therefore, the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 can be smoothly performed, the time required for assembly can be shortened, and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the character identification unit 7a as the identification unit 7 for distinguishing from other substrates is provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, the operator reads the characters of the character identification unit 7a. As a result, it is possible to easily know which part the decorative substrate belongs to, and it is possible to obtain the same effects as described above.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the front surface and the rear surface of each decorative substrate are white and the identification portion 7 is provided on the rear surface, the transparency of the decorative body provided in front of the decorative substrate is high. However, the decorative substrate can be made inconspicuous from the front (player side), the appearance of the decorative body can be improved, and the light from the LED is reflected forward by the white front surface of the decorative substrate. It is possible to make the decorative body brighter and light-emitting, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest by the light-emitting effect having a high effect.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, functional parts such as an LED driver are provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate so that the functional parts cannot be seen from the front (player side), so that the functional parts can be seen through the decorative body. It is possible to prevent the appearance from being deteriorated by seeing it, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the decorative body (game machine). In addition, since the functional parts are hidden on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, it is not necessary to color the functional parts in white (or yellow) so as to be inconspicuous, and the functional parts can be used as they are. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the increase in cost of the pachinko machine 1 by omitting the trouble of coloring the functional parts.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. FIG. 75 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. 77 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is played by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed.

The main body frame 4 is an aggregate of the following units and the like, and the frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 having a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and that can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. And, it is attached to the upper end on the left side of the front view of the main body frame base unit 500 and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. The hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge member under the outer frame 60 of the outer frame 2 are rotatably attached to the lower end of the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view, and the hinge member 125 under the door frame of the door frame 3. The hinge assembly 520 under the main body frame is rotatably attached to the door.

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view, and is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game is played in the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launcher 540 for driving the ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is openable and closable and attached to the main body frame base 501, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 that are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. A locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is provided.

The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member that guides the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape in which the front view extends vertically, and the connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. It includes a 502 and a game board lock member 505 for holding the game board 5 detachably.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right. The 552, the tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending to the left in a groove shape open upward, the first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the first rail cover 554. The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 separated from the rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and the tank rail 555 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. It includes a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 to be paid out one by one, the upper full tank path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full tank path unit 600 are placed on the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, it is provided with a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the substrate unit to the 620 side.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. It includes a 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and project rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It includes a lock spring 655 that is urging and urging the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 83 and the like. FIG. 82 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame, and FIG. 82 (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front, and holds the outer circumference of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape in which the front view extends vertically, and the lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and guides the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502 to be connected, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth to hold the game board 5 detachably. ing.

[4-1a. Body frame base (1)]
The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a in which the shape of the front view is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly lower than the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board that penetrates back and forth within the height range of the game board 5 and forms the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and the game board insertion port 501b on which the game board 5 is placed. It is provided with a mounting portion 501c and a game board regulating section 501d that projects upward from the center of the game board mounting section 501c in the left-right direction and regulates the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rearward.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and the launcher mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launcher 540 and the launcher mounting portion 501e are mounted. The board unit penetrates back and forth on the right side of the front view of the part 501e and penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the front view of the cylinder insertion port 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted and the game board mounting portion 501c. The circular speaker opening 501g and the main frame base 501 of the speaker unit 620a in the 620 facing the front of the main body frame speaker 622 are recessed rearward and extend to the left and right below the speaker opening 501g. It includes a cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable insertion port 501i that penetrates back and forth at the upper right end of the cable mounting recess 501h in the front view.

Further, the main body frame base 501 extends from the right side of the game board insertion port 501b in the base main body 501a to the rear in a plate shape, and the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 640 is attached to the rear end. A rear extension portion 501j that is rotatably attached and a rear extending portion 501j are formed near the upper and lower ends of the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the base main body 501a to attach the hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 below the main body frame. It includes an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is a door for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion port 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted in the front surface of the base main body 501a. A frame release switch is installed. When the door frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch is released from the pressure and can detect the opening of the door frame 3. The detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Further, the main body frame base 501 is provided with a main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface of the base main body 501a below the position where the door frame opening switch is attached. There is. When the main body frame 4 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame release switch is released from the pressure and can detect the opening of the main body frame 4. The detection signal from the main body frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633.

The game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position on the right side of the speaker opening 501 g below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and around an axis extending back and forth. The game board lock member 505 makes it possible to restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b can be attached and detached.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted on the right side of the speaker opening 501g. .. The cable mounting recess 501h is formed in a size capable of accommodating the connecting cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connecting cable guide member 502 can be rotatably mounted around an vertically extending axis.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the flat guide main body 502a extending to the left and right and the guide main body 502a, and extends to the right of the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are exposed, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a that penetrate back and forth and are left and right. It is provided with a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. It is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is rotatably mounted around a shaft whose mounting shaft 502c extends vertically near the right end in the cable mounting recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of the door frame 3 is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub. It is connected to the relay board 105.

Subsequently, the action and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is hinge-rotatably attached in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably attached around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. The left and right directions of the plurality of through holes 502d formed on both the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide main body 502a by being tightened together with the guide main body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. Behind the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3. (See FIG. 83 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends to the left from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l and passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 to cover the door frame relay board. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinged to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3. The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the rightmost mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 83 (b)).

The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 increases as the opening angle α increases when the door frame 3 is opened, but the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes like this. In the present embodiment, the maximum opening angle β is set to be less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main body frame base 501, so that the connection cable guide member 502 By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When the open door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the connection cable 503 presses the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 rearward. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connecting cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connecting cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent problems from occurring in the door.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded back at the folded portion. You can make a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connecting cable 503 that is folded 180 degrees is changed to open, a force that tries to close the connecting cable 503 due to the folding habit acts. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the bending habit, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) is closed. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is placed closer to the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a causes the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 to be held by the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis core) side of the hinge pin 126 under the door frame.

Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, is centered on the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame, and is more door than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. The angle at which the tangent line in contact with the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis core) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame intersects with the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby pressing the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503 in the closing direction. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is used when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on the main body frame]
The hinge member 510 on the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the above is rotatably attached.

The upper hinge body 510 of the main body frame has an upper hinge main body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate material is bent downward in an L shape, and the upper hinge main body 511 projects upward in a columnar shape from the front end. The hinge pin 512 on the main body frame, which is pivotally supported by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame, is provided. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extended portion, and provides a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for axially supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

In the main body frame upper hinge member 510, a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The hinge pin 122 on the door frame of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 from below.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 can cooperate with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated, and the door frame to the main body frame 4. 3 can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-3. Hinge assembly under the main body frame]
The hinge assembly 520 under the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge member 125 under the door frame is rotatably attached.

The lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate material is bent upward in an L shape. It is provided with a lower hinge second main body 522 in which the rear portion of a flat plate-like plate extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. In the lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame, a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is arranged at an upward interval from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521, and a lower portion is arranged. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first main body 521.

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restricting piece 522b that extends upward from a position rearward of the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion and regulates the rotation range of the door frame 3. , Is equipped. The lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame is formed coaxially with the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 can cooperate with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated, and the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. Can be mounted so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view formed in a U-shape with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of an extruded metal material.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending from the front end to the right. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove portion 530a that is open to the right and extends vertically on the front side that is formed in a U shape with the right side open in a plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the groove portion 530a is inserted with the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 becomes meandering in a plan view, and an illegal tool is used from the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1. Can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 84 and the like. FIG. 84A is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 84B is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the rear. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the game area 5a of 5. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 540 is attached to the flat launch base 541 attached to the launcher mounting portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 541 when viewed from the front, and rotates. From the launch solenoid 542, which consists of a rotary solenoid whose shaft penetrates the launch base 541 and extends forward, the ball hammer 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the launch solenoid 542, and the vicinity of the tip of the ball mallet 543. It is equipped with a launch rail 544 that is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

In the ball launching device 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 195 is rotated while the handle 195 is in the state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hitting mallet 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is driven into the game area 5a.

If the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B or the like, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) are used. From between, it falls into the foul ball receiving port 150c of the lower foul cover unit 150, passes through the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-6. Payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85A is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 85B is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

[4-6a. Payout base]
The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500.
The payout base 551 is entirely made of transparent synthetic resin, and has a top plate portion 551a whose front-rear direction extends to the left and right with a substantially constant width, and a top plate portion 551a whose width in the front-rear direction from the left side in the front-rear direction is the top plate. The left plate portion 551b, which has substantially the same width as the portion and extends downward long, and the right plate portion, which has a width in the front-rear direction from the front view right side of the top plate portion 551a, which extends substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a and extends downward. 551c, the upper part of the back plate 551d extending downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the right. The left side plate portion 551e extending to the vicinity of the lower end with a certain width, the inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of the left side portion 551e of the back plate portion to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b, and the left side plate portion. A connecting plate that connects the bottom plate portion 551g extending from the front portion of the lower side of the lower side of 551b to the right to substantially the same position as the right side of the left side portion 551e of the back plate, and the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. A section 551h and the like are provided. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape in front view, and is formed in a box shape open to the front and inward of the L shape.

In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the width in the left-right direction of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and the left plate portion 551b extends above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends up and down with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the payout base 551, the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f, and the payout base 551 is provided in the portion. The unit 560 is mounted. Further, the payout base 551 projects to the right at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f in the front view, and has a back cover mounting portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is mounted.

The payout base unit 550 has a box-shaped ball tank 552 attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and a groove-shaped ball tank 552 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending to the left in an upwardly open groove shape. It is equipped with a tank unit consisting of a tank rail 553 and a tank rail. Therefore, the top plate portion 551a, the right side plate portion 551c, and the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 are formed on the main body frame 4 for mounting the tank unit including the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553. Make up the part.

Further, the payout base unit 550 is separated from the first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the upper end of the tank rail 535 in the left-right direction and the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 535. A ball rectifying member that is attached to the upper edge of the tank rail 555 at a position between the second rail cover 555 that is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 555 and the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. 556 and a ball stop member 557 attached near the left end of the front view at the lower end of the flow of the tank rail 555 are provided.

[4-6b. Ball tank (1)]
The ball tank 552 constituting the tank unit is made of an opaque black synthetic resin having conductivity, and is formed in the left-right direction to be approximately half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. At the same time, the length in the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a.
The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is low. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.
In the embodiment, the broken line in FIG. 98A (plan view) and the portion of the top plate portion 551a constituting the tank unit mounting portion overlap with the tank unit as shown in FIGS. 98C (cross-sectional view) and 99B (perspective view). A through-hole-shaped mounting portion opening notch 551ah is formed in a part of the above, and the mounting portion opening notch 551ah is covered with a tank unit.
The mounting portion opening notch 551ah of the embodiment is a total of 2 in each of a part of the portion overlapping the tank rail 553 of the tank unit and a part of the portion overlapping the connection portion between the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 of the tank unit. Is formed.
In the portion where the mounting portion opening notch 551ah is provided, the partition between the tank unit and the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 is partially eliminated, so that the mounting portion opening notch 551ah corresponding to the connection portion of the tank unit is partially eliminated. Then, the space for accommodating the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 is substantially expanded toward the tank unit side, while the space for installing the tank rail 553 in the mounting portion opening notch 551ah corresponding to the tank rail 553. That is, the space in the vertical direction for providing a head in the flow of the game ball is substantially expanded to the back unit 3000 side.

Further, the mounting portion opening notch 551ah on the side corresponding to the connection portion of the tank unit is used as a substantial expansion means of the space for accommodating the back unit 3000 as described above, and is also a space for installing the tank unit. It can also be used as a substantial extension means of.
That is, in the tank unit formed by connecting the separately molded ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553, as shown in FIGS. 98B, the enlarged view of FIG. 100 (b), and the enlarged view of FIG. 101, the tank rail 553 A projecting piece 553d for a joint that supports and supports the bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is projected from the right end of the ball tank 552 toward the ball tank 552. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball tank 552 from settling by itself due to the ball pressure and to prevent a step from being generated at the joint with the tank rail 553. However, on the other hand, when such a protrusion 553d makes a protrusion for a joint on the flat bottom surface of the tank unit, and such a protrusion abuts on the top plate portion 551a constituting the tank unit mounting portion, the ball tank Since the load of the game ball filled with 552 is concentrated on the protruding portion (projection piece 553d), the stress may cause a crack or damage to the tank unit mounting portion.
On the other hand, in the embodiment, since the through-hole-shaped mounting portion opening notch 551ah is formed in a part of the portion overlapping the connecting portion between the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553, even if the tank unit side has a projecting piece 553d. Even if there is a protrusion for the joint, contact can be avoided. Therefore, the load of the game ball applied to the tank unit is applied to the bottom surface of the tank unit and the top surface of the tank unit mounting portion (top plate portion 551a) in the surface direction. Can be dispersed in.

As shown in FIGS. 98C and 99B, the tank unit mounting portion (top plate portion 551a) of the embodiment continuously intersects the edge of the mounting portion opening cutout portion 551ah in a T-shape. The stepped rib 551ar is formed. The stepped rib 551ar can increase the rigidity of the edges of the tank unit mounting portion and the mounting portion opening notch 551ah. Further, since the ribs are stepped instead of the general convex stripes, the high surface side (top plate portion 551a) of the stepped ribs 551ar and the bottom surface of the ball tank 552 of the tank unit can come into surface contact with each other. The load of the game ball accumulated in 552 can be dispersed. Furthermore, the gap formed between the low portion side of the stepped rib 551ar and the bottom surface of the tank unit can be an exhaust (exhaust heat) passage connecting the mounting portion opening 551ah and the outside.
The stepped rib 551ar of the embodiment is formed linearly in the left-right direction of the main body frame 4, but may be formed linearly in the front-rear direction of the main body frame 4. In this case, the upstream side is the high position side of the stepped rib 551ar and the downstream side is the low point side of the stepped rib 551ar with respect to the flow direction of the game ball in the ball tank 552.

By the way, although transparent synthetic resin is generally considered to be more expensive than opaque resin, even when the entire payout base 551 is not made of transparent synthetic resin and is formed of opaque synthetic resin, the game board 5 The space for accommodating the back unit 3000 is substantially expanded, and the effect of increasing the degree of freedom in designing the back unit 3000 can be obtained as well. It is good to form. For example, when the tank rail 553 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, in addition to the above effect, the state of the game ball rolling in the tank rail 553 via the mounting portion opening notch 551ah is confirmed from the front of the game machine. be able to.
Further, when the ball tank 552 is configured so as to be seen from the attachment portion opening notch 551ah, it is preferable to form the ball tank 552 with a conductive resin and electrically ground it. The game balls that flow into the ball tank generally store high-voltage static electricity, but in that respect, if the ball tank is grounded with a conductive resin, the static electricity will always be removed and the ball will be discharged. It is possible to prevent the electromagnetic noise caused by the resin from being emitted as much as possible. That is, the influence on the electronic circuit provided in the game board 5 can be suppressed.
Not limited to the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553 may be made of a conductive resin. Of course, both of them are made of a conductive resin regardless of whether they are integrated or separate, and a part of them is from the mounting portion opening notch 551ah. You just have to look into it.

Here, it will be described that the back box opening cutout portion 3010h is also formed in the back box 3010 described later of the back unit 3000 in relation to the mounting portion opening cutout portion 551ah provided in the tank unit mounting portion.
That is, as shown in FIG. 99B, a transparent box-shaped back box 3010 that covers the rear surface of the game panel 1100 is attached to the back unit 3000, and the back box 3010 is provided with an effect display device or a mechanical movable effect. A production device equipped with a unit 3600 or the like is assembled.
In this back box 3010, the rear wall 3010f faces the back cover 640 on the rear surface of the main body frame 4 at a close distance in the state of the imaginary line shown in FIG. 98C in which the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, and the top wall 3010 g on the upper surface Is substantially in contact with the inner surface of the tank unit mounting portion, and a part of the top wall 3010 g is notched at the mounting portion opening of the tank unit mounting portion as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 98C. The capacity is expanded by protruding into 551ah.
Therefore, the capacity of the back box 3010 is set to almost the maximum, but in the embodiment, in order to further expand the actual capacity of the back box 3010, the mounting portion is along the trailing edge of the top wall 3010 g. A through-hole-shaped back box opening notch 3010h is formed at a position that does not overlap with the opening notch 551ah in the vertical direction. Using this back box opening notch 3010h, for example, the movable effect unit 3600 in the back box 3010 can be moved. Secure a large area.
Further, in the back box opening notch 3010h, as shown in FIGS. 98C and 99B, the movable effect unit 3600 in the back box 3010 is located in the opening region in a plan view, that is, a part thereof is exposed. It is visible from above, and therefore, for the game board 5 that is not attached to the main body frame 4 (removed from the main body frame), the movable part of the movable production unit 3600 (movable part of the movable production unit 3600 from the back box opening notch 3010h) 3600g of (links, gears, etc.) can be cleaned, maintenance such as lubrication, and operation check can be performed. In particular, 3600g of movable parts corresponding to the back box opening notch 3010h can be used for transmission system parts (drive source (gear) and intermediate gears). ), The movable part 3600g of the transmission system can be directly accessed to check the operation, and the movable effect unit 3600 is temporarily fixed when the game board 5 is transported (prevention of damage at the transportation stage). ) Can also be done.

[4-6c. Tank rail (1)]
The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction.
Further, the tank rail 553 is provided with a shooter-like step that suddenly descends from the ball tank 552 side toward the tank rail 553 side at the joint portion with the ball tank 552 by using the mounting portion opening notch 551ah. Further, from the joint portion, the flow path is changed diagonally rearward at the first corner portion, and the flow path is formed in a plan view crank shape so as to be directed in the left-right direction at the second corner portion.
Further, as shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 98D, the tank rail 553 has a gutter shape in which the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y are raised before and after the passage bottom wall 553z, and is on the front side of the passage bottom wall 553z. An arcuate portion 553r having an inner radius shape is formed on the upstream side of the ball stop member 557 at the corner portion, and a corner portion 553t having a substantially right angled valley fold shape is formed at the rear corner portion of the passage bottom wall 553z. A plurality of (three in the embodiment) drop ports 553h capable of discharging foreign matter are formed on the rear side of the bottom wall 553z in a state of being extended to the lower edge of the gutter rear wall 553y.

It should be noted that the number of such drop ports 553h formed in either the front or rear corner can be freely set. For example, all of the drop ports 553h are formed in the rear corners, or a plurality of drop ports 553h are alternately formed in the rear and front corners, or the drop ports 553h provided in the front corners are the most. Although it is formed downstream, at least the drop port 553h located at the uppermost stream is preferably formed at the corner portion 553t facing the arcuate portion 553r.
This is because even if there is a foreign substance in the arc-shaped portion 553r of the tank rail 553, the air is hard to stagnate on the rounded surface, so that it is easy to move on the air flow accompanying the flow of the ball, and the arc-shaped portion due to the vibration caused by the movement of the game ball. Since it is easy to move to the corner portion 553t side facing the corner portion 553t along the rounded surface of the portion 553r, the foreign matter eventually collects at the rear corner portion 553t and is efficiently discharged from the drop port 553h. Therefore, the foreign matter that has entered the tank rail 553 moves from the arc-shaped portion 553r formed in the upstream portion to the corner portion 553t, and the foreign matter is quickly discharged from the drop port 553h located at the uppermost stream provided in the corner portion 553t. Therefore, the residence time of foreign matter in the tank rail 553 can be shortened as much as possible. Moreover, at the joint between the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553, a shooter-shaped step 553u (FIG. 98A, FIG. 98A, which rapidly descends from the ball tank 552 side toward the tank rail 553 side in order to increase the flow velocity in the tank rail 553. (See FIG. 98B) is provided, and vibration is likely to occur at the step 553u. Therefore, the vibration further promotes the fall of foreign matter from the drop port 553h.
Further, the drop port 553h of the tank rail 553 is preferably formed at the corner portion of the crank (preferably the out-course side where the moving foreign matter makes a large turn due to inertia) as shown in FIG. 98A. By doing so, the foreign matter moving in the tank rail 553 tends to move in the direction of going straight through the corner portion of the crank of the tank rail 553 due to inertia, and is efficiently discharged from the drop port 553h provided there. ..

The shape of the tank rail 553 in a plan view is diagonal to the left and rear from the right end connected to the ball tank 552, and the width in the front-rear direction is about one depth from the depth of several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After being extended as described above, the width in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape extending straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B.
The tank rail 553 is inclined so that the passage bottom wall 553z is lowered toward the left side, and a square vertical short cylinder portion 553s is extended to the left end, and a rail outlet 553p is provided at the lower end of the short cylinder portion 553s. Is open, and the rail outlet 553p communicates with the guidance inlet 570p that opens at the upper end of the guidance passage 570a in the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

Further, in the tank rail 553, the heights of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y of the portion extending straight to the left are 4 to 5 of the diameter of the game ball B from the passage bottom wall 553z on the ball tank 552 side. On the left end (lower end of the flow) side, the diameter of the game ball B is about twice as large, and the left end side is inclined so as to be lower at a steeper angle than the passage bottom wall 553z.
Further, in the tank rail 553, a portion extending straight to the left is attached to a passage seat portion 551z (see FIG. 98D) having a substantially L-shaped cross section formed on the top plate portion 551a in a aligned state.
Further, the tank rail 553 has a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, and a ball rectifying member 556 on the upper surfaces of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y at a portion extending straight to the left. It is attached, and a ball stopper 557 is attached to the lower surface on the left end side.

[4-6d. Technical means]
The embodiments here correspond to the following technical means A to C.

[4-6d-1. Technical means A1]
A game board having a game panel having a game area on the front surface and a box-shaped back box covering the rear surface of the game panel.
A tank unit consisting of a ball tank for storing game balls, a tank rail for guiding the game balls of the ball tank downstream, and a tank unit.
In a game machine having a tank unit mounting portion located above the back box of the game board and mounting the tank unit on the upper part of the main body frame.
A through-hole-shaped mounting portion opening notch is formed in a part of the tank unit mounting portion that overlaps with the tank unit, and the mounting portion of the tank unit mounting portion that is above the back box of the game board. A gaming machine characterized in that a through-hole-shaped back box opening notch is formed at a position where it does not overlap with the opening notch in the vertical direction.
According to such a game machine, since the partition between the tank unit and the back unit is partially eliminated by providing the mounting portion opening notch in the tank unit mounting portion, the space for accommodating the back unit of the game board is the tank unit. The space for installing the tank unit on the side or on the back unit side has been substantially expanded, and in addition, the back box of the game board has a back box opening notch, so that the inside of the back box and the tank unit mounting part Since the partition between them is partially eliminated, the capacity of the back unit is substantially expanded into the tank unit mounting portion. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the back unit increases.
Further, the mounting portion opening notch is provided so as to be hidden in a plan view from the portion overlapping the tank unit, and the air heated in the back box of the game board allows the mounting portion opening notch to pass through the back box opening notch. Since it is discharged to the outside through the gap with the tank unit, there is almost no risk of dust or foreign matter entering from the opening of the mounting part, and in addition, the back is positioned so that it does not overlap with the opening of the mounting part in the vertical direction. By forming the box opening notch, there is almost no possibility that the foreign matter invades into the back box where important parts are densely packed.
Furthermore, since the openings that can cause a decrease in strength are dispersed in the tank unit mounting portion and the back box, the strength of the tank unit mounting portion and the back box is unlikely to decrease while having a wide opening in total.
The attachment portion opening notch may be formed so as to correspond to the front wall and the bottom wall located on the side closer to the player of the ball tank.
By doing so, it is possible to provide a larger storage space connected in an L shape toward the front wall side and the bottom wall side of the ball tank.

[4-6d-2. Technical means A2]
An effect device provided with a mechanical movable effect unit is provided in the back box of the game board, and at least a part of the movable effect unit is located in a plan view in the opening region of the back box opening notch. The gaming machine according to the technical means A1.
According to such a game machine, it is possible to perform maintenance of the movable effect unit or temporarily fix the effect device during transportation from the back box opening opening portion of the back box of the game board.

[4-6d-3. Technical means B1]
A tank unit formed by connecting a tank rail that guides the game balls of the ball tank to the downstream of the ball tank that stores the game balls.
In a game machine having a tank unit mounting portion for mounting the tank unit on the upper part of the main body frame.
A through-hole-shaped mounting portion opening notch is formed in a part of the tank unit mounting portion that overlaps the connection portion between the ball tank and the tank rail, and the entire mounting portion opening notch is used as the tank. A game machine characterized by being covered with a unit.
Generally, in a tank unit in which a ball tank and a tank rail are separately molded and connected, a protrusion for a joint may occur at the connecting portion. When such a protrusion comes into contact with the tank unit mounting portion, the load of the game ball filled in the tank unit acts on the protruding portion in a concentrated manner, so that the tank unit mounting portion may be cracked or damaged. There is.
On the other hand, in the game machine of the present invention, since a through-hole-shaped mounting portion opening notch is formed in a part of the portion overlapping the connection portion between the ball tank and the tank rail, the tank unit can be mounted even if there is a protrusion for the joint. Therefore, the load of the game ball applied to the tank unit can be widely distributed between the bottom surface of the tank unit and the top surface of the tank unit mounting portion.
On the other hand, the mounting portion opening notch opened in the tank unit mounting portion is entirely covered with the tank unit, and the air heated by the back unit from the mounting portion opening notch passes through the mounting portion opening notch to the tank. Since it is discharged to the outside through the gap with the unit, it is difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dirt to enter.

[4-6d-4. Technical means B2]
The technical means B1 is characterized in that a linearly continuous stepped rib is formed in the tank unit mounting portion, and the stepped rib and the edge of the mounting portion opening notch are intersected with each other. Game machine.
According to such a game machine, the rigidity of the edge between the tank unit mounting portion and the mounting portion opening notch can be increased by the stepped rib. Further, since the ribs are stepped instead of the general convex stripes, the height side of the stepped ribs and the tank unit come into contact with each other, so that the load of the game ball accumulated in the ball tank can be dispersed. .. Furthermore, it is also possible to form a gap between the low part side of the stepped rib and the bottom surface of the tank unit to form an exhaust (exhaust heat) passage connecting the opening of the mounting portion and the outside.

[4-6d-5. Technical means C1]
In a game machine with a detachable game board
The game board
A game panel with a game area on the front,
A box-shaped back box that covers the rear surface of the game panel,
The back box or a mechanical movable effect unit provided in the area surrounded by the back box is provided.
A through-hole-shaped back box opening notch is formed in the upper part of the back box, and at least a part of the movable effect unit is positioned in a plan view in the opening region of the back box opening notch. A game machine featuring.
According to such a game machine, it is possible to perform maintenance of the movable effect unit from the back box opening opening portion of the back box of the game board.

[4-6d-6. Technical means C2]
The gaming machine according to the technical means C1, wherein a part of the movable effect unit located in the opening region of the back box opening opening portion in a plan view is a movable portion of a transmission system connected to a drive source. ..
According to such a game machine, the movable part of the transmission system can be directly accessed from the back box opening notch to check the operation, and further, the movable effect unit is temporarily fixed (at the transportation stage) when the game board is transported. Damage prevention) can also be performed.

[4-6e. 1st rail cover and 2nd rail cover]
The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached in a lid shape to the upper ends of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y at the portions of the tank rail 553 extending straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are fixed to the upper ends of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y of the tank rail 553, and the depth (width) of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y is determined. Prevents the game ball B from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553, and further prevents the game ball from popping out from the tank rail 553 and invades the tank rail 553 from the outside. Also prevent.

[4-6f. Sphere rectifier member]
The ball rectifying member 556 is located on the upper end of the tank rail 535 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, on the side of the first rail cover 554 as shown in a partially enlarged view of FIG. The swing shaft 556b is supported on the upper edges of the front wall 553x and the rear wall 553y of the hi, which correspond to the ends, or can be swung by extending from the first rail cover 554 in a cantilever shape (not shown). It is installed. The ball rectifying member 556 is provided with a fin-shaped rectifying piece 556a projecting into the tank rail 553 on its lower surface. When the game ball B on the upper stage side of the game ball B flowing in the tank rail 553 in two upper and lower stages abuts on the lower surface of the rectifying piece 556a, an appropriate load (resistance) due to its own weight is applied to the game ball B. In addition to the above, it swings upward (see the enlarged view imaginary line in FIG. 91), which delays the flow so that the upper game balls B easily fall (merge) between the lower game balls B. Then, it is rectified in a row in a row to prevent ball clogging. If ball clogging occurs in the upper and lower two-stage state, the ball rectifying member 556 is pushed down with a fingertip to pressurize the game ball B on the upper stage side with the rectifying piece 556a, thereby losing the balance between the balls. It is also possible to eliminate the ball clogging.

[4-6 g. Ball stop member]
The ball stop member 557 is slidably attached to the lower surface of the downstream end of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction, and by sliding it to the left as shown by an imaginary line in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 101, the tank rail The flow path leading to the rail outlet 553p of the rail 553 and the guidance inlet 570p of the guidance passage 570a can be closed to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream. By doing so, maintenance such as cleaning, replacement, and repair of the guide passage 570a on the downstream side and the payout device 580 can be easily performed.

Specifically, the ball stop member 557 is a sliding base portion that is slidably supported by passing a support cylinder 553 m vertically installed on the outside of the lower surface of the passage bottom wall 553z of the tank rail 553 through its own elongated hole 557b. The 557c, the ball stop piece 557d having a substantially beak shape in front view protruding from the left end of the sliding base portion 557c toward the left, and the sliding base portion 557c protruding from the right end toward the right. It is composed of the operated knob portion 557e and the cantilever leaf spring-shaped elastic lock piece 557f formed inside the operation knob portion 557e.
The elastic lock piece 557f is formed by engaging a mountain-shaped anchor portion 557 g with the left and right side slopes of the inverted bulging portion 553q projecting from the lower surface of the passage bottom wall 553z of the tank rail 553 to stop the ball. Is moored at a protruding position and a retracting position, which will be described later, thereby preventing blind movement of the ball stop member 557.

The protrusion position and the retracted position of the ball stop member 557 can be switched by putting a finger on the operation knob portion 557e and sliding the ball stop member 557 in the left-right direction. At this time, the elastic lock piece 557f Like a cam follower that comes into contact with a linear motion cam, the anchor portion 557g is brought into contact with the inverted bulging portion 553q while flexing and sliding in a bow shape, and when the anchor portion 557g reaches the side slope of the movement destination, it is engaged by its own elasticity. It fits. By engaging and disengaging the anchor portion 557 g of the elastic lock piece 557f to the side slope of the inverted bulging portion 553q, a sense of moderation of "click" and "click" is given to the switching operation of the ball stop member 557.

The ball stop member 557 starts from the bent portion K of the tank rail 553 and is located on the upstream side of the passage bottom wall 553z (ball tank 552 side) and on the downstream side of the passage side wall 553w constituting the short cylinder portion 553s (rail outlet 553p side). ), And a ball stop piece 557d, which is almost beak-shaped in front view, is moved in and out of the short tube portion 553s of the tank rail 553 through a ball stop slit 553v opened in an L shape that is almost upside down in front view. The rush position (see the imaginary line in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 101) in which the ball stop piece 557d is rushed into the short tube portion 553s from the ball stop slit 553v to close the flow path of the game ball B and the short The ball stop piece 557d is retracted from the inside of the tubular portion 553s to open the flow path of the game ball B (see the solid line in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 101), and the operation knob portion 557e and the elastic lock piece 557f are selected. Can be switched in one go.
In the embodiment, the ball stop member 557 is supported by the tank rail 553, but it may be supported by, for example, the payout base 551 of the main body frame 4.

[4-6h. External terminal board (1)]
Further, the payout base unit 550 includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front on the upper surface of a portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal plate 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion port 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. FIG. 86A is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 86B is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 87 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 is a ball guidance unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guidance unit 570 and is guided by the ball guidance unit 570. The payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, the upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the upper full tank path unit. It includes a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

The ball guidance unit 570 supplies the game balls B arranged in a row by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guidance unit 570 can be distributed, and a ball removal passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a. , The game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full tank path unit 600 side based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated from the ball pulling passage 580b to the upper full tank path unit. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B discharged from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full tank path unit 600, and is discharged from the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the substrate unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guidance unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. The ball guidance unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper part of the rear surface of the left portion 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

The ball guidance unit 570 has a box-shaped guidance unit base 571 that is open forward and has a guidance passage 570a extending in the vertical direction in which the game ball B meanders and descends, and the front side of the guidance unit base 571. The movable piece member 573 that is movable by the flat plate-shaped guide passage front lid 572 that closes the guide passage, the game ball B that circulates in the guide passage 570a, and the movable piece member 573 in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is provided with a ball-cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of the game ball B (see FIG. 91).

The ball guidance unit 570 has a front view shape of the guidance unit base 571 and the guidance passage front lid 572 formed in a quadrangle extending vertically. The guidance passage 570a has a guidance inlet 570p opened near the left end of the upper surface of the guidance unit base 571 and opens upward, and extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the height direction of the guidance unit base 571. , It bends to the right and extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly folding back between the widths of the induction unit base 571 in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the induction unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a has a depth on the front-back right side and a width in the left-right direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B is distributed. It can be guided in a row.

In the ball guidance unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached in the vicinity of the upper portion so that the movable piece member 573 can move forward and backward into the guidance passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached around an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outer side of the guide passage 570a in front view, and a part of its lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the game ball B abuts on the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a, so that the protruding portion is pushed by the game ball B and retracts from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. It becomes.

The ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the guide passage 570a. When it is not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is in the detection state when the game ball B is present in the guidance passage 570a, and is in the non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guidance passage 570a.

In the state where the ball guidance unit 570 is assembled in the main body frame 4, the guidance inlet 570p at the upstream end of the guidance passage 570a communicates with the rail outlet 553p at the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guidance passage 570a is connected. It communicates with the upstream end of the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580. In the ball guidance unit 570, since the guidance passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering shape, the guidance passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guidance unit 570, and many games are played in the guidance passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

As is clear from the explanations so far, the guide passage 570a and the tank rail 553 constitute a payout ball passage portion that bends in an upside-down L shape as a whole, and the payout ball passage portion is above the main body frame 4. The ball tank 552 provided in the above and the payout device 580 provided on the side of the main body frame 4 are connected. Therefore, although the bent portion K of the payout ball passage portion is located on the tank rail 553 in the embodiment, it may be located on the guide passage 570a side. In that case, the downstream end of the tank rail 553 extends to the front of the bent portion K, while the guide passage 570a has a shape such as a periscope in which the upper portion is bent at the bent portion K, and the ball stop slit 553v or the like. The ball stop member 557 is provided on the guide passage 570a side.

[4-7b. Payout device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89 and the like. FIG. 88 is a rear sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade. FIG. 89 (a) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center of the payout blade in the front-rear direction when the ball-extracting movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 89 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). Is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guidance unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear.

The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a open to the rear and a ball ejection passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can be distributed, and a payout device main body 581. A flat plate-shaped payout device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped payout device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the payout device main body 581 and is open to the rear. ing.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581, and the rotary shaft is projected on the payout motor 584 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 that is attached, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device front lid 583. , The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and the second transmission gear 587. It has a spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a, and is rotatably attached between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588, the payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and project into the payout passage 580a, and the payout blade 589. It is equipped with a blade rotation detection sensor 590 which is attached to the rear side of the apparatus main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, and a payout device main body 581 and after the payout device. A ball-extracting movable piece 592 attached so that the ball-extracting passage 580b can be opened and closed at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a by the lid 582, and a ball-extracting movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball-extracting passage 580b is closed. It is provided with a ball pulling lever 593 that is slidably attached in the vertical direction by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582.

The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangle whose plan view shape extends vertically. The width of the payout device 580 in the left-right direction is formed to be larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guidance unit 570.

As shown in FIG. 88, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opening upward from the center in the left-right direction to the left and a downstream end near the right end in the left-right direction. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top to a height of about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move to the left from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B is provided between the payout blade 589 and the outer circumference. It extends downward in an arc shape concentric with the payout blade 589 so as to form, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the payout blade 589.

In the payout passage 580a, the payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball-extracting passage 580b branches at a portion of the payout passage 580a that extends diagonally downward from the upstream end and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side of the rear view, in the rear view of the bottom surface. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball pulling passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the game ball B is opposed to each other. The main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to project rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball ejection passage 580b, respectively. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a is provided. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are rear view of the portion extending to the right side of the rear view at a height of about 1/3 from the top branching from the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout passage 580a. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed diagonally upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to form a side wall of the ball pulling passage 580b. The ball pulling movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right side of the rear view of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are arranged in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The payout blade 589 is arranged between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is narrowed between the side wall of the payout passage and the side wall of the game ball B at a portion of the payout passage 580a that extends from above toward the rotation axis and then extends to the right in the rear view. In addition, it protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b recessed between the three blade pieces 589a by an arc having a radius younger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can be restricted from moving the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view. As a result, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially and integrally rotatably attached by the payout device rear lid 582 and the payout device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout blade 589.

The ball pulling movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is bent in a dogleg shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the payout passage 580a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Through the gap between them, it is possible to project into the ball-extracting passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball-extracting passage 580b.

The ball pulling lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the left side of the rear view near the upper end of the ball pulling movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 penetrates the rear lid 582 of the payout device and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the descending end, the lower part can come into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball pulling movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball pulling passage 580b can be closed by the ball pulling movable piece 592. Further, by locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the rising end, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened (FIG. FIG. See 89).

When the ball pulling lever 593 is raised to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which is in a state like a string of beads on the upstream side of the ball pulling movable piece 592, becomes a ball pulling movable piece 592. It will flow down to the ball ejection passage 580b side beyond the above. At this time, since the ball ejection passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball ejection passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down soon.

In this way, in the state where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball pulling passage 580b at a high speed, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 projecting into the ball pulling passage 580b. The game ball B vigorously abuts on the lower end side of the ball, but the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear lid 582. Since the ball pulling passage 580b can be moved to the outside of the inner surface, the ball pulling movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b due to the contact force, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 is a ball. It is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the drawing passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the ball can be pulled out by the collision of the game ball B. It is possible to suppress a decrease in durability and damage of the piece 592.

For this reason, the movable ball-extracting piece 592 can be made less likely to be damaged, and more game balls B can be discharged to the island facility side on the downstream side of the ball-extracting passage 580b more quickly. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the ball pulling movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a at a narrower interval than the game ball B, and the ball pulling passage 580b. In order to move to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, the game ball B comes into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592 protruding into the ball pulling passage 580b, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball pulling movable piece 592 when moving outward through the space, the space is larger than that of the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward due to the narrow space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball. Since the movement of the pulling movable piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the ball pulling movable piece 592, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be made hard to be damaged, and the main body side guide. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball pulling passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably distributed to the downstream side of the ball pulling passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the lower side of the payout device 580 at the lower part of the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full tank path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B downwardly discharged from the payout device 580 to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full tank path unit 600 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends vertically.

The upper full tank path unit 600 has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 attached to the payout base 551 and the rear side is open, and a box shape attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and the front side is open. The upper full tank cover 602 and the payout device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the payout device 580 upward are provided. The upper full tank base 601 projects from the right side in the front view to the right, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover 640.

Further, the upper full tank path unit 600 is open upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position of about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends to the right of the front view by about 3/4 of the total width and extends downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. The upper sphere storage passage 600b, the upper normal payout passage 600c extending downward from the left side in the front view from the center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the lower surface, and the upper normal payout passage 600c adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. The upper full tank payout passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the front view and opening downward on the lower surface of the ball storage passage 600b from the center in the left-right direction, and the upper full tank payout passage 600d opening upward near the right end of the front view on the upper surface and substantially vertical downward. It is provided with an upper ball-extracting passage 600e, which is open downward near the right end of the lower surface after extending to (see FIG. 91).

On the lower surface of the upper full tank path unit 600, the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e are opened downward in order from the left side in front view. In the state where the upper full tank path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened just below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and the upper ball is pulled out. The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout device 580. As a result, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. It is emitted downward from any of the above. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball pulling passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. The lower full tank path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551 g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full tank path unit 600. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full tank path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lowered, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, and is a lower full tank base that extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, the lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower normal payout passage 610a which are rotatably attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 around an axis extending back and forth. A payout passage opening / closing door 613 that can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a payout passage opening / closing door 613 in the direction of closing the downstream end opening of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are attached. It is equipped with a rushing closing spring 614.

In the lower full tank path unit 610, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c are arranged in this order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end. In the state, each upstream end opens upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state of being arranged side by side, and then open forward at the front end of the lower full tank ball path unit 610. The lower full tank payout passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal payout passage 610a. The lower ball pulling passage 610c extends forward along the front right side surface of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and opens to the right in the middle of the front-rear direction.

The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is urged in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by a closing spring 614. Under normal conditions, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are provided. The opening) is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is provided with an actuating protrusion 613a projecting forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a front view shape in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and as the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is tilted so that it protrudes forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

The lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the payout unit 560, and the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are each upper full. It is located directly below the downstream end of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tongue path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates in the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank payout passage 600d circulates in the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The game ball B discharged downward from the upper ball pulling passage 600e will circulate in the lower ball pulling passage 610c.

Further, in the state where the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front end (downstream end) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b penetrates the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball pulling guide portion 627 which is opened to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

In the normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the lower full tank path unit 610 has the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 in contact with the door opening / closing contact of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front against the urging force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are open, and communicate with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the full tank receiver 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613 Is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from their respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game ball B in the payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball in the main body frame. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled on the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is located at the descending end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full tank path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in the open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number is set based on the detection of the ball out by the ball out of ball detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, for example, from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 in a state of being arranged in a row by the tank rail 553. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay on the upstream side of the payout blade 589. It becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. From this, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout blade 589 is rotated in the rear view clockwise direction by the payout motor 584, the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the rear view clockwise direction, and the payout blade in the payout passage 580a is moved. It is released to the downstream side of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 is arranged directly under the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down into the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. Is discharged from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 into the upper plate 201.

When a large number of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a, so that the payout device The game ball B paid out from the 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full tank path unit 600 that communicates. Then, when the game ball B is further discharged while the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game ball B, the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610, and the full tank receiver 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3 Can be received by. After that, the game ball B received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. As a result, when the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are further paid out, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

When the lower plate 202 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate B is further paid out. The game ball B is retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is notified by voice (for example, "Please pull out the ball!") That the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is in a state where the full tank detection sensor 154 is not detected. Temporarily stop until.

When the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the lowering end. Slide it to the position of the rising end. After that, the lower end side of the ball pulling movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the ball pulling movable piece 592 becomes the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is in a state of being pushed out to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b through the space. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

At this time, at the portion of the ball pulling movable piece 592, the flowing game ball B comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball pulling movable piece 592, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 Is hard to break.

Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball pulling passage 600e of the upper full tank path unit 600 and the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c to the ball ejection guiding portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the ejection ball receiving portion 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hole). It is discharged to the island facility side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96 and the like. FIG. 92A is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 92B is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 93 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from below. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 96 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b mounted on the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. It includes an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a is directed forward by the speaker cover 621 mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and near the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. It is provided with a main body frame speaker 622 attached to the main body frame speaker 622 and a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. ..

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates back and forth near the left end of the front view, and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed by a plurality of slits extending vertically, and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b, which is recessed from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b, which protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the left-right direction, diagonally downward and backward. It includes an open connection portion 621c.

The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. .. The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass.

The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and the portion on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward, and as it goes to the right in the front view, it steps backward in a stepped manner. It is formed so that the protrusion of the speaker is small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the center of the front view of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a is formed by a speaker cover 621 and a speaker box 623 as a part of an enclosure 624 for containing the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. In this enclosure 624, since the front recess 621b for space that bulges forward to the right of the front view of the speaker mounting portion 621a is formed in the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623 projects rearward as it goes to the right. Even if the speaker is formed in a stepped shape so that the amount is small, the space to the right of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently widened.

When the main body frame 4 of the speaker unit 620a is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43a so as to sandwich the seal member 48, and is behind the main body frame speaker 622. And the space 40a inside the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication with each other. Therefore, an enclosure 624 in a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43 on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, and behind the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side of the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and the connection portion 621c and the speaker unit 620a are extended. Since the sound is communicated to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side via the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 does not particularly attenuate the bass range in the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. It can be transmitted to the side, and the transmitted bass range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state where the phase is inverted, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and is a dish unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 is resonated so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, a large sound with deep bass can be output.

That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 This makes it possible for the player to hear a sound having rich bass.

Further, in the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through-hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recess 621b for space, and the speaker box 623. In addition, a through cylinder 623a that communicates with the through port 621d and extends in a tubular shape and penetrates back and forth is formed. In the state of being assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a communicate with each other and become independent from the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 has a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. It is equipped with a rear base 626 to which the 620c is mounted.

Further, the base unit 620b is formed by the front base 625 and the rear base 626 in cooperation with each other, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball ejection guidance unit 627 that guides the ball to the right, and a discharge ball receiving portion that is open upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball extraction guidance unit 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. It includes a 628, a ball ejection port 629 that ejects the game ball B that has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the ejection ball receiving portion 628 downward.

The ball pulling-out guide portion 627 has an upstream end opening to the upper part of the left side surface toward the left in front view, and a downstream end opening to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball pulling guide portion 627 faces the opening at the upstream end so as to coincide with the opening at the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 has a left end in front view continuous with the bottom surface of the ball ejection guiding portion 627, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B pulled out from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball pulling guide unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then the ball. Since the space is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear the sound having richer bass than the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 is a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. It is equipped with 631 and.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (FIG. 96) and. The payout control board 633 sets the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to the pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 and the payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5. It is for controlling and paying out the instructed number of game balls B to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so as to leave a trace of opening and closing. As a result, it is possible to detect unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, and enhance the deterrent against fraudulent activities.

The interface unit 620e covers the substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and the rear side of the interface substrate 635. It includes an interface board cover 636 that is attached to the board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most rearward, which is behind the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end of the connection cable 503 (main body frame 4 side). The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is also connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in the front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 is rotatably attached to the rear end where the right side in front view extends vertically of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and around the axis extending vertically, and the left side is the payout base 551. It is attached to the back cover mounting portion 551i of the above and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in a shape in which the right side side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 is formed in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. It is formed so as to be located on substantially the same surface as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 that penetrate the front and rear and extend vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.
As shown in FIG. 98D, the upper edge of the back cover 640 covers the lower edge of the rear surface of the tank unit mounting portion (upper portion 551d of the back plate of the payout base 551) of the main body frame 4. On the other hand, a ridge 551t that can cover the upper edge of the back cover 640 like an eave is formed on the lower edge of the rear surface of the tank unit mounting portion.
As a result, foreign matter discharged from the drop port 553h at the rear corner 553t of the tank rail 553 hits the ridge 551t and falls, or collects on the ridge 551t, so that the upper edge of the back cover 640 and the tank unit Almost no foreign matter enters the inside of the main body frame 4 from the overlapping portion of the mounting portion. By the way, since the foreign matter contains metal powder as described above, it is not preferable because it may adversely affect the operation of the electronic parts inside the main body frame 4.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97A is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 97B is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of lock units 651 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3. Door frame hook 652, multiple outer frame hooks 653 protruding rearward from the unit base 651 and lockable to the outer frame 2, and door frame protruding forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 depending on the direction of rotation. It is provided with a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame in the vertical direction.

Further, the locking unit 650 is more than a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and an outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. It is provided with an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

In the state where the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, transmission cylinder 654, and outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 projects forward through the cylinder insertion port 501f of the main body frame base 501, and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. It engages with the transmission member 133, and the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotates.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hook member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and the outside of the plurality (two). The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

When the lock unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of lock units 650 are inserted via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved downward. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip side of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 is inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are replaced with the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the 24 and the lower hook member 25, the door is locked by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame]
Further details of the configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 described above will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 98A to 105.
98A is a plan view of the main body frame, FIG. 98B is a sectional view taken along line B1-B1 in FIG. 98A, FIG. 98C is a sectional view taken along line B2-B2 in FIG. 98A, and FIG. 98D is FIG. 98A. It is sectional drawing cut along the line B3-B3 in. FIG. 99A is a perspective view of the upper part of the main body frame as viewed from behind, and FIG. 99B is a rear side perspective view of the upper part of the main body frame showing a state in which the tank unit is disassembled and the game board for mounting is further arranged in the front surface. .. FIG. 100 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where a tank rail or the like is assembled on a ball tank, and FIG. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 100 (a) including a cross-sectional view of a main part of FIG. 100 (a). FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing a region in the upper part of the main body frame where game balls overflowing from the ball tank circulate. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball overflowing from the ball tank at the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in an enlarged perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind on the hinge side.

As described above, the main body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and is removable and hinged to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped main frame base 501 that is rotatably attached to support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped base that is attached along the upper side and the left side of the front view on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. The payout base 551, the ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape (container shape) extending to the left and right, and the ball tank 552 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. The tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, the first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper edge of the front wall 553x and the rear wall 553y of the tank rail 553, and the first rail cover 554. Between the second rail cover 555 and the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 attached to the upper edges of the front wall 553x and the rear wall 553y of the tank rail 553, separated from the left side of the front view. At the position of, the ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper edge of the hi front wall 553x and the hi rear wall 553y of the tank rail 553, the ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the payout base. It is attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the 551 and includes a payout device 580 for paying out the game ball B to the player side.

[4-11a. Ball tank (2)]
The ball tank 552 is formed in a quadrangle having a plan view extending in the left-right direction, and is inclined from the bottom wall 552a so that the left side is lowered in the front view, and from the front side and the rear side of the bottom wall 552a. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, respectively, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both the left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, in a container shape in which the upper side is open. It is formed. The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from island facilities such as a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is notched from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper end edge. The overflow portion 552f has a length of about 3/4 of the lateral length of the front wall 552b from the end side of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the end on the opposite side (right side wall 552e side). It is formed over the length.

[4-11b. Tank rail (2)]
The right end side (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552. ..
The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can be distributed in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game ball B. Have. The main guide portion 553a is inclined so as to be lowered toward the left side of the front view. Further, as shown in FIG. 98A, the main guide portion 553a extends from the right end side to the position of about 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end side in a plan view. After extending, it extended diagonally from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward toward the left, and then extended to the left end parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction. It is formed in a crank shape.
In the tank rail 553, a portion of the main guide portion 553a extending parallel to the axis extending from the left end to the right in the left-right direction extends to the upper end with the same width, and the first rail extends to the upper end of this portion. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game ball B is formed at the downstream end. Is formed at a height at which only one can be distributed (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

Further, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the main game balls B are arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and narrows in the width direction from the upstream end to the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. There is. With this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B toward the downstream side. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B circulating in the bulging portion 553b so that the width directions are aligned in the downstream side and the downward side.

The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has the center of curvature arranged on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is arranged above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 is slightly at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the bulging portion 553b that abuts. It changes in various directions, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball shavings in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed into a shape that extends constantly, a reaction force always acts in a constant direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B circulating in the bulging portion 553b. Since the reaction force is difficult to disperse, the internal game ball B is always pushed in a certain direction, so that the game ball B is difficult to escape and ball clogging (ball shaving) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. By dispersing the pushing directions of the plurality of game balls B, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball shavings) can be less likely to occur.

Further, the tank rail 553 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the rear outside of the main body frame 4. As a result, even if a ball clogging (ball gummy) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the place where the ball is clogged can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly cleared, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game. The decrease can be suppressed.
Further, since the tank rail 553 and the tank unit mounting portion (payout base 551) to which the tank rail 553 is attached are made transparent, the rear of the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 through the tank rail 553 from the rear outside of the main body frame 4. Since the side (back unit 3000) can be visually recognized, when a movable problem occurs in the movable production unit of the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, the game board 5 is still attached to the main body frame 4. The status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, the gear, and the belt can be confirmed, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.
Further, in the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98D, the boundary between the gutter front wall 553x of the tank rail 553 and the passage bottom wall 553z is chamfered, and the outside of the arcuate portion 553r is also rounded. The structure is such that the tank unit mounting portion can be seen from the front side as shown by the arrow in the figure in a state where the game board 5 is further removed from the front surface of the main body frame 4.
Therefore, when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 and replaced, foreign matter in the tank rail 553 and the state of the game ball can be visually confirmed from the front side of the main body frame 4 through the tank unit mounting portion, so that maintenance can be performed. Easy to do. In particular, since the boundary between the gutter front wall 553x of the tank rail 553 and the passage bottom wall 553z is chamfered, the inside can be clearly seen, so that the accuracy of the visual check is improved. When the tank unit mounting portion is made of opaque synthetic resin, a window hole may be provided in the corresponding portion.

As shown in FIGS. 98A, 99A, and 99B, the main body frame 4 includes an overflow surface portion 501 m along the front side of the ball tank 552, while the ball tank 552 has an overflow surface portion 501 m on the left side wall 552 d. It is equipped with a detour passage 552g that communicates.

[4-11c. Overflow surface of the main body frame]
The overflow surface portion 501 m extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (left side in front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction extends outward (left side) from the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game ball B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined so as to be the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side to be higher.
Further, the overflow surface portion 501 m is formed on the main body frame base 501 as shown in FIG. 81. The overflow surface portion 501 m has a flat plate shape from a position lower than the outer diameter of the game ball B by a distance of 2 to 4 times from the upper side on the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape with a front view extending vertically. It extends to. The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in the front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The height of the overflow surface portion 501 m from the front end to the rear end is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the game ball B. In the overflow surface portion 501 m, a gap having a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. ..

[4-11d. Detour passage of ball tank (1)]
The detour passage 552g extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side becomes lower. A part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m is inclined so that the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 is lowered in the left-right direction. It is guided to the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553.

Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on both outer sides of the detour passage 552 g in the left-right direction, and the distance in the left-right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball B and the bottom surface. Is provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501 m on the opposite side of the detour passage 552 g between the discharge portion 551j and the discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open. It covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear and the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558), and the upper surface overflows. It is provided with a terminal cover 551k that extends horizontally at a position higher than the surface portion 501m.

[4-11e. Body frame base (2)]
The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501 m, and has a flat plate-shaped left step portion 501n and a right step portion 501o extending substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501 m. The upper ends of the left-stage portion 501n and the right-stage portion 501o are higher than those of the left-stage portion 501n and the right-stage portion 501o on both lateral sides in the left-right direction, and extend in the front-rear direction in a strip shape. It has a plurality of ribs 501p, which are arranged in rows at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined so that the right corner at the rear end is slightly lower than the horizontal plane in the front view. The right-stage portion 501o is formed to have a longer length in the left-right direction than a length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined so that the left corner at the rear end is slightly lower than the horizontal plane in the front view.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is formed. The gap between the two is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501 m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction in the front view, and the overflow surface portion 501 m. The left end of the detour passage 552g coincides with the left end in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right end wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

[4-11f. Detour passage of ball tank (2)]
The detour passage 552 g is integrally formed with the ball tank 552. In the following, the container-shaped region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as a ball tank 552. The detour passage 552g extends from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left in a flat plate shape, and the front end is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is inclined so as to be low. And a weir portion 552i extending upward from the end side of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. Regarding the rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g, the left end side (weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 in front view, and the left end side thereof. It extends diagonally so as to move forward toward the right end side. The passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be inclined in the left-right direction horizontally.

The detour passage 552g is assembled on the main body frame 4 so that the rear end of the tank rail 553 extending in a crank shape in the left-right direction is along the front end side of the portion extending diagonally in the left-right direction. It is extending. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552 g extends diagonally in the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour passage 552 g changes so that its distribution direction is perpendicular to the oblique rear end from the oblique rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the distribution direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is discharged from the rear end of the detour passage 552 g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the distribution direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the detour passage 552 g is discharged at a wide portion of the tank rail 553. You can receive the game ball B from. Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the detour passage 552 g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the detour passage 552 g. It is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging in 553 to occur.

Since the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends diagonally in the left-right direction so as to move backward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553 as shown in FIGS. 98A and 104, the detour passage 552g When the game ball B is discharged from the tank rail 553 side, the width of the game ball B is wider than that of the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrowed due to the rear end extending diagonally. It can be discharged to the upstream side, and by discharging to a wide portion, it is possible to suppress the generation of ball shavings in the tank rail 553.

Further, the portion for guiding the game ball B by the detour passage 552 g corresponds to the rear portion of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the front left portion of the rear wall 552c in the tank rail 553. A game ball B that goes under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) is distributed from the inside of the ball tank 552 to this portion. For this reason, at the portion of the tank rail 553 behind the detour passage 552 g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552 k (the wall of the tank rail 553). Height) will not be exceeded. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552 g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward, so that the detour passage 552 g The game ball B guided to the rear can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f on the left side wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. It has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. Further, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end side in the front view from a position of about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end. Approximately 1/9 of the total length extends diagonally backward from the front wall 552b to a position near about 1/2 of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d, and then extends parallel to the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c. From there, it is formed in a shape parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction and extending from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position of about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c.

In the ball tank 552, in a plan view, a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above shape, the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side, and the end on the rear wall 552c side. The region surrounded by and has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 is a flat plate-shaped flange extending laterally outwardly and vertically on the same surface as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the detour passage 552 g, respectively. It has a portion 552 liters. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper end edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edge of the two flange portions 552l is the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (main body frame base 501). It is formed higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o).

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled from each other, the upstream end (right end in the front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. Further, in a plan view, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side thereof are located behind (protruding) the ball tank 552. )doing. The rear end side of the detour passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The discharge portion 551j is in the ball tank 552 so as to be stepped backward from a height lower than the detour passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 in a state of being assembled in the main body frame 4. After extending backward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side of the front view to the tank rail 553, a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 to the left along the tank rail 553 (center in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555). It extends to a nearby position) and then extends backward.

[4-11 g. External terminal board (2)]
The external terminal plate 558 is attached with a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a arranged side by side in the left-right direction on the rear surface. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the grip portion can be opened by operating the lever to grip the tip of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of the portion closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 on the upper side of the tank rail 553 in the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. .. The terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

[4-11h. Flow of game balls at the top of the main frame]
Next, the flow of the game ball mainly on the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are arranged so that the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lower on the rear end side as shown by the white arrows in FIG. The left step portion 501n is inclined so that the rear end right corner is lowered, and the right step portion 501o is inclined so that the rear end left corner is lowered. Further, the bottom wall 552a and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) of the ball tank 552 are inclined so that the left end side is lower in the front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lower.

Then, when the amount of the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 increases due to the supply from the island facility, first of all, the overflow portion 552f, which is the lowest of the uppermost edges of the outer circumference, is exceeded. It can flow out to the outside (front) of the ball tank 552, and the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can escape to the overflow surface portion 501 m, and also flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501 m. The game ball B can be returned to the ball tank 552 by tilting the overflow surface portion 501 m (see FIG. 103). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game balls B from further increasing in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the strong pressing of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure). , It is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball shavings) due to the engagement of the game balls B in the ball tank 552.

Further, since the detour passage 552 g is provided, as shown in FIG. 104, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552 g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501 m from exerting a strong backward pressing force on the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is clogged. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552 g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501 m can be prevented from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem that the game ball B spilled on the outside of the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552 g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) of the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552 g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being clogged by suppressing the strong pressing of the game balls B against each other in the tank rail 553.

Further, since the height of the remaining upper end edge other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than that of the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper end edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501 m. As a result, the game ball B, which overflows from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m beyond the overflow portion 552 f and is distributed from the overflow surface portion 501 m to the detour passage 552 g, is on the left side of one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the ball from returning from the detour passage 552 g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552 g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

Further, as described above, the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h in which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). It is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the detour passage 552 g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501 m. As a result, the inflow of the game ball B from the side (ball tank 552) to the detour passage 552 g can be prevented, so that the flow of the game ball B in the detour passage 552 g is rearward from the overflow surface portion 501 m on the front end side. The flow can be in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the detour passage 552 g to the tank rail 553 can be in a fixed direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pushed against each other and being bitten by the different directions of the pressure applied to the game balls B, and the game balls B are clogged. Can be prevented.

Further, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a in a row in the left-right direction. Since the game balls B are arranged side by side, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. Further, since the tank rail 553 is provided with a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be lined up in a portion where the upper side is open, the game released from the rear end of the detour passage 552 g. The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be reliably achieved.

Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is extended from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction is narrowed from the upstream end to the downstream side to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. Since the game balls are changed so as to coincide with each other, as the plurality of game balls B move toward the downstream side in the bulge portion 553b, they can be aligned so as to be aligned with respect to the width direction. Further, since the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (ball tank 552 side). By distributing a plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction to the downstream side through a portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced in a row. Can be aligned with. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide a plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row.

Further, since the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulge portion 553 b. Therefore, since the volume inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

Further, an external terminal plate 558 provided with a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a on the opposite side of the ball tank 552 with the detour passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j in between. Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the electric wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be separated from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501 m, it can be difficult to reach (contact) the electric wire connection terminal 558a or the like. , There is no problem such as short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring due to the contact of the game ball B.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is the ball tank 552. Even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501 m, it can be made difficult to get on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B gets on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501 m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (right direction in FIG. 103) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game ball B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented.

Further, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501 m, and rides on the left stage portion 501n and the right stage portion 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501 m. However, as shown in FIG. 103, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g by their inclination, and the game ball B spills on the outside of the main body frame 4, causing a problem. Can be prevented.

Further, since the game ball B is configured to pass under the guide surface portion 552j when the game ball B is distributed from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game balls stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 552 by the guide surface portion 552j The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) of the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552 g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) on which the game balls B can be stacked upward. , The game ball B guided by the detour passage 552 g can be reliably received.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k The game ball B is not accepted by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[4-12. Another embodiment, such as a tank rail]
Subsequently, another embodiment of the tank rail 553, the ball stop member 557, the payout ball passage portion, and the like in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 117 and the like. FIG. 106 is a perspective view showing an enlarged portion of the tank rail when viewed from behind the pachinko machine provided with the tank rail or the like of another embodiment. FIG. 107A is a plan view showing the tank rail and the like of FIG. 106 assembled together with the ball tank, and FIG. 107B is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 106 as viewed from the front. Is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like in (a) as viewed from behind. FIG. 108A is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 108B is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of a tank rail or the like cut along a marker line in FIG. 107 (a). FIG. 110 is an explanatory view showing a cross-sectional view of the flow of the game ball in the tank rail of FIG. 107. 111 (a) and 111 (b) are cross-sectional views showing another form in which the protective wall of FIG. 109 is provided on the gutter front wall and the gutter rear wall of the tank rail. FIG. 112 is a cross-sectional view of a tank rail or the like of another form corresponding to the cross section of the cake line of FIG. 107 (a). FIG. 113 is a cross-sectional view of a tank rail or the like of another form corresponding to the cross section of the B3-B3 line of FIG. 98A. FIG. 114 is a perspective view of a ball stop member having another form. FIG. 115 is a vertical cross-sectional view of a tank rail or the like of another form in which the vicinity of the bent portion is cut. FIG. 116 is a vertical cross-sectional view of a tank rail or the like of another form showing a state in which the ball stop member of FIG. 115 in the retracted position is moved to the protruding position. 117 (a) is a sectional view taken along line Z1-Z1 of FIG. 115, and FIG. 117 (b) is a sectional view taken along line Z2-Z2 of FIG. 115. Is.
In addition to the tank rail 553A, the tank rail 555A and the like of the embodiment different from the above include the first rail cover 554A, the second rail cover 555A, the ball rectifying member 556A, and the ball stopping member 557A. The tank rail 555, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are different from each other, but the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations and the description thereof is omitted. There is also.

[4-12a. Another form of tank rail (meandering part and protective wall)]
The tank rail 553A of another form rectifies the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 and delivers it to the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560. The tank rail 553A includes a first rail cover 554A so as to block the upper ends of the hi front wall 553x and the hi rear wall 553y, and a second rail cover 555A provided on the left side of the front view of the first rail cover 554A. A ball rectifying member 556A provided on the upper side of the second rail cover 555A is attached, and a ball stopping member 557A capable of blocking the flow of the game ball B is attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553A. ing.

As shown in FIG. 107A and the like, the tank rail 553A has a meandering portion 553c meandering in the front-rear direction on the downstream side of the bulging portion 553b. The meandering portion 553c can suppress the circulation speed of the game ball B. The first rail cover 554A is attached to the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) of the meandering portion 553c.

The second rail cover 555A extends in the left-right direction from the first rail cover 554A to the downstream end (left end in the front view) including the meandering portion 553c on the open upper end side of the tank rail 555A. The second rail cover 555A includes a plate-shaped cover portion 555a that closes the upper end of the tank rail 555A, and a pair of protective walls extending upward in a fence shape from both front and rear ends on the upstream side of the cover portion 555a in the left-right direction. It has an opening 555c that penetrates the cover portion 555a between the pair of protective walls 555b and the 555b. The pair of protective walls 555b are formed in a meandering shape following the meandering portion 553c at the portion of the tank rail 553A where the meandering portion 553c is provided. The rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A, which will be described later, is inserted into the opening 555c so as to penetrate from above.

The ball rectifying member 556A is attached so as to be swingable in the vertical direction by a swing shaft 556b projecting from the upstream end side toward the front and back. The ball rectifying member 556A is provided above the cover portion 555a of the second rail cover 555A and between the pair of protective walls 555b, penetrates the opening 555c of the second rail cover 555A, and protrudes into the tank rail 555A. It has a fin-shaped rectifying piece 556a. The ball rectifying member 556A abuts on the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the tank rail 553A from above, and swings while applying an appropriate load to the game balls B, thereby causing the game balls B to swing. The steps are broken to make it easier to align in a row, and the upper game ball B is prevented from moving rapidly to the downstream side to prevent ball biting from occurring on the downstream side of the tank rail 553A. There is.

According to this alternative form of tank rail 555A, in the assembled state, the ball rectifying member 556A is located between the pair of protective walls 555b in the second rail cover 555A and below the upper end of the protective wall 555b. There is. Specifically, the protective wall 555b is the electric wire Y connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal plate 558 provided above the portion of the tank rail 555A to which the ball rectifying member 556A is attached (FIG. 106). Is set to a height that does not enter the swing region of the ball rectifying member 556A), and therefore it is possible to prevent the electric wire Y from coming into contact with the electric wire Y from above.
If the electric wire Y connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a comes into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A from above, the ball rectifying even if the game ball B abuts on the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A due to the weight of the electric wire Y. There is a possibility that the member 556A cannot swing upward, and the rectifying action of the game ball B by the ball rectifying member 556A may not be sufficiently exerted.
On the other hand, in the present alternative embodiment, the pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the ball rectifying member 556A from coming into contact with the electric wire Y connected to the electric wire connecting terminal 558a. Therefore, when the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the sphere rectifying member 556A, the sphere rectifying member 556A can swing upward, and the rectifying action is sufficiently exerted in the tank rail 553A. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball biting and ball clogging.

Further, since the tank rail 553A is provided with the meandering portion 553c, the circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed. If, in the tank rail 553A whose height becomes narrower toward the downstream side, among the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages, the upper game ball B is affected by the ball pressure from the upstream side and the lower game ball B is used. If the game ball B is first moved to the downstream side so as to get over the ball, for example, the game ball B is sandwiched between the inner surface of the second rail cover 555A and the game ball B below, and ball biting is likely to occur. On the other hand, in the present alternative mode, as described above, the meandering portion 553c can suppress the circulation speed of the game ball B, so that the upper game ball B is prevented from moving to the downstream side first. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of ball biting.

Further, as described above, since the protective wall 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the electric wire Y from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A and prevent the occurrence of ball clogging, many tank rails 553A are used. The terminal plate or control board to which many electric wires Y are connected can be arranged near the terminal plate (for example, external terminal plate 558) or control board to which the electric wire Y is connected, or the terminal plate or control board to which many electric wires Y are connected can be arranged near the tank rail 553A. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high degree of freedom in arranging the tank rail 553A (ball tank 552), the terminal plate, and the like.

The protective wall 555b is provided on the second rail cover 555A of the tank rail 555A, but as shown in FIG. 111A, the upper edge of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y of the tank rail 553A. May be formed by extending upward, or may be provided on the main body frame 4 (specifically, the payout base 551) as shown by an imaginary line in FIG. 112.
Further, the width of the front and rear of the protective wall 555b of another form is almost the same as the distance between the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y of the tank rail 553A, but as shown in FIG. 111 (b). The protective wall 555b corresponding to the gutter rear wall 553y side may be provided so as to be displaced to the rear side from the gutter rear wall 553y. The same applies when the protective wall 555b is provided on the second rail cover 555A instead of the gutter rear wall 555y.
According to this configuration, the space above the ball rectifying member 556A expands in the width direction (front-back direction) by the amount that the protective wall 555b is displaced to the rear side, so that the ball rectifying member 556A is a game ball in a ball-biting state. Even if the vehicle rides on B and stops, a reset operation such as pushing it back with a fingertip can be performed without any inconvenience.
Further, in the above alternative form, two protective walls 555b are provided at the same height in front of and behind the sphere rectifying member 556A, but the protective wall 555b is not shown but has a height difference between the two (one is a sphere rectifying member). (Make the same level as 556A and make the other higher), or as shown in FIG. 111 (b), it may be provided on only one of the gutter rear wall 553y or the gutter front wall 553x (not shown). Good. Even in such a case, the desired effect can be achieved by appropriately setting the height and shape.

[4-12b. Another form of tank rail (mounting structure)]
In the tank rail 553 of the above item [4-6c] and the embodiment mainly described with reference to FIG. 98D, a portion extending straight to the left is formed on the top plate portion 551a and has a substantially L-shaped cross section. It is installed in a consistent state at 551z.
On the other hand, in the tank rail 553A of another form, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 112, the main body frame 4 (specifically, the passage seat portion 551z of the payout base 551) and the tank rail 553A face each other. A gap SS is provided.
The mounting structure of the tank rail 553A can exert the following effects in comparison with the tank rail 553 having no gap SS.

First, in recent years, in the game board 5, the back unit 3000 such as an image display device has become larger, and the amount of protrusion to the rear has increased.
Then, as the amount of overhang of the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 increases, the amount of overhang of the main body frame 4 surrounding it also increases to the rear, and as a result, the tank unit mounting portion on the upper part of the main body frame 4 also increases to the rear. It extends and protrudes below the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553. Therefore, the overlapping portion between the main body frame 4 and the ball tank 552 or the tank rail 553 increases.
Needless to say, the back unit 3000 of the current game board 5 is an assembly of electric parts such as an image display device and a motor, and generates heat when operated. Therefore, it is necessary to dissipate heat from the inside of the main body frame 4 to the outside, but the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are polymerized on the upper surface of the tank unit mounting portion of the main body frame 4 as in the above embodiment. Since heat tends to be trapped, the inside of the main body frame 4 may become hot.
On the other hand, as in the tank rail 553A of another form, by providing the gap SS on the surface facing the main body frame 4, the heat released from the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 to the inside of the main body frame 4 is generated. Since it is discharged to the outside through the gap SS, it is difficult to be trapped inside the main body frame 4. Further, by providing the gap SS on the facing surface between the tank rail 553A and the main body frame 4, even if the tank rail 553A is distorted, rattling does not occur as long as it is within the range that can be absorbed by the gap SS. This also has the effect of loosening the molding accuracy of the tank rail 553A.
The gap SS is preferably provided on all the surfaces of the tank rail 553A facing the main body frame 4, but for example, the heat dissipation performance can be provided only on a part of the surface of the gutter front wall 553x facing the main body frame 4. It is effective in improving.

[4-12c. Another form of payout ball passage (foreign matter discharge bypass passage)]
As shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 98D, the tank rail 553 of the embodiment described in the above item [4-6c] and mainly by FIG. 98A has a plurality of tank rails 553 capable of discharging foreign matter to the rear side of the passage bottom wall 553z (in the embodiment). Three) drop ports 553h are formed.
However, if the drop port 553h for dropping foreign matter faces the outside, a part of the electric wire Y wired on the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 may enter the inside of the tank rail 553 from the drop port 553h. Depending on the degree of entry, the flow of the game ball may be hindered.
On the other hand, another form of the tank rail 553A is provided on the rear wall 553y of the gutter by providing the drop port 553h on the front side of the passage bottom wall 553z and receiving the foreign matter falling from the drop port 553h, as shown in FIG. 113. A foreign matter discharge bypass passage portion 5531 that can be discharged to the outside from the discharge port 5530 that opens rearward is provided.
According to the tank rail 553A, the drop port 553h does not directly face the outside on the rear surface side, and a lateral foreign matter discharge bypass passage portion 5531 is interposed between the drop port 553h and the outside on the rear surface side. Even if a part of the electric wire Y of the pachinko machine 1 enters the discharge port 5530 of the foreign matter discharge bypass passage portion 553, it passes through the drop port 553h at the back of the foreign matter discharge bypass passage portion 553 to the inside of the tank rail 553A. It rarely reaches. Therefore, there is almost no possibility that the flow of the game ball of the tank rail 553A will be hindered by the erroneous intrusion of the electric wire Y or the like.
The foreign matter discharge bypass passage portion 5531 can also be applied to the guide passage 570a constituting the discharge ball passage portion, in which case the discharge port 5530 is a payout base 551 or the like located on the rear surface side of the guide passage portion 570a. It may be configured by.
That is, in FIG. 113, the gutter front wall 553x is not extended downward from the drop port 553h, and instead, the space of the foreign matter discharge detour passage 5531 is left, and the passage seat portion 551z which is a part of the payout base 551 is discharged. Foreign matter may be guided to the exit 5530. Alternatively, a member located below the bottom surface corresponding portion of the foreign matter discharge bypass passage portion 5531 formed by the gutter front wall 553x, for example, the back cover member 640 may be formed so as to extend to the passage seat portion 551z. , In addition, the top surface of the case member of the device located below may be used.

[4-12d. Another form of ball stop member]
The ball stop member 557 of the above item [4-6g] and the embodiment mainly described with reference to FIG. 101 passes a support cylinder 553m vertically installed on the outside of the lower surface of the passage bottom wall 553z of the tank rail 553 through its own elongated hole 557b. A sliding base portion 557c that is slidably supported, a ball stop piece 557d that is substantially beak-shaped in front view and is projected from the left end of the sliding base portion 557c toward the left, and a sliding base portion. The tank rail 553 is composed of an operation knob portion 557e projecting from the right end to the right side of the 557c and a cantilever leaf spring-shaped elastic lock piece 557f formed inside the operation knob portion 557e. The ball stop piece 557d is moved in and out of the short tube portion 553s of the tank rail 553 from the ball stop slit 553v opened in an approximately upside-down L-shape starting from the bent portion K to open and close the flow path of the game ball. It is a thing.
On the other hand, the ball stop member 557A of another form shown in FIG. 114 is provided at the rear end of the ball stop piece 557d and the passage bottom wall 553z of the tank rail 553A in the state of being in the entry position shown in FIG. 116. A flow-out space portion 557h through which foreign matter can fall is formed between the ball-stopping slit 553v and the starting end portion, and specifically, as shown in FIGS. 114 to 117. By providing a crank-shaped bypass portion 557i between the ball stop piece 557d and the sliding base portion 557c, the flow-out space portion 557h is formed.
Since the detour portion 557i shown in the figure is not provided with a bottom, the flow-through space portion 557h has a bottomless form that penetrates the ball stop member 557A in the vertical direction, but the rear bottom portion of the ball stop piece 557d ( Even if a flat plate-shaped receiving bottom portion (not shown) is provided between the ball stop piece 557d and the sliding base portion 557c to form the flow-through space portion 557h in a bottomed form so that foreign matter can collect there. Good.

The ball-stopping member 557A of another form can exert the following effects in comparison with the ball-stopping member 557 of the embodiment that does not have the flow-through space portion 557h.
First, in the tank rail 553, there are foreign substances such as metal powder generated by the rubbing of the game balls and the resin powder generated by the rubbing of the game balls and the cleaning pellets, and most of them fall. Although it falls from the mouth 553h and is discharged, some foreign matter may reach the edge of the starting end portion of the ball stopper slit 553v.
Then, when such a foreign substance is present at the starting end of the ball-stopping slit 553v even in a small amount, the ball-stopping member 557 is switched from the retracted position of the solid line in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 101 to the protruding position of the imaginary line of the same figure. The force vibrates the surroundings, and the vibration causes a foreign substance that has stopped at the edge of the starting end of the ball stop slit 553v to fall into the ball stop slit 553v, which travels along the upper surface of the ball stop piece 557d. There is a risk of falling near the center of the short tube portion 553s.
On the other hand, in the ball stop member 557A of another form, the ball stop member 557A is in the retracted position of FIG. 115, and the foreign matter stopped at the edge of the start end portion of the ball stop slit 553v causes the ball stop member 557A of FIG. When the position is switched to the protruding position as described above, even if the ball falls into the ball stop slit 553v due to the vibration, there is a flow-out space between the rear end of the ball stop piece 557d and the start end of the ball stop slit 553v. Since 557h is facing, it comes out downward without being placed on the ball stop piece 557d. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk that foreign matter on the edge of the start end portion of the ball stopper slit 553v enters the vicinity of the center of the short cylinder portion 553s of the tank rail 553A.
When the flow-through space portion 557h of the ball stop member 557A is made into a bottomless form, foreign matter passes through the flow-off space portion 557h and is discharged to the outside, and is hardly accumulated in the ball stop member 557A for a long period of time. The ball stop member 557A is hard to get dirty even by using.
On the other hand, when the flow-through space portion 557h of the ball stop member 557A has a bottomed form, for example, the density of parts below the tank rail 553A is high, and it is tentatively disturbed by the intrusion / adhesion of foreign matter like a control board. Even if there is no choice but to place electronic components directly under the flow-through space portion 557h, foreign matter will collect on the bottom of the ball stop member 557A and will not be discharged to the outside, so it will be from above. It is possible to make holes for heat dissipation in the board box that houses the board without worrying about the intrusion of foreign matter.

[4-13. Technical Thought Included in the Embodiment and Another Embodiment]
The above-described embodiment and the above-mentioned another embodiment include the following problems and the following technical ideas as means for solving the problems.

[4-13-1a. Challenge ... Discharge of foreign matter]
It has been conventionally known that foreign matter such as metal powder or resin powder enters the payout ball passage, and as a countermeasure, there are multiple intervals for foreign matter drop on the bottom wall of the tank rail passage mainly in the payout ball passage. It was provided open (see Patent Document 2).
However, the conventional tank rail has a problem that both front and rear corners of the bottom wall of the passage are formed at substantially right angles in a valley fold shape, and it is difficult to smoothly discharge foreign matter.
That is, it is considered that an air flow is generated inside the tank rail due to the movement of the game ball, and foreign matter that is not attached to the game ball also moves naturally due to the generation of small vibrations. Since air tends to stagnate at both front and rear corners of the bottom wall, foreign matter that has entered such corners tends to stay.
Therefore, it becomes difficult for foreign matter to be discharged smoothly, and the accumulated foreign matter adheres to the inner surface of the tank rail and is easily soiled. Moreover, the right-angled corners are not easy to clean, so that there is a problem that dirt is accumulated. ..
The following technical idea was made in view of the above, and the purpose is to provide a game machine in which foreign matter that has entered the payout ball passage can be easily discharged.

[4-13-1b. Technical idea ... Discharge of foreign matter]
"Door frame and
The main body frame located behind the door frame and
A payout ball passage portion that bends in an substantially inverted L shape and connects a ball tank provided above the main body frame and a payout device provided on the side of the main body frame.
In a game machine provided with a plurality of drop ports capable of discharging foreign matter, which are provided at the corners of the bottom wall of the passage of the payout ball passage portion.
The payout ball passage portion forms an inner radius-shaped arc-shaped portion at least in at least a part of the front corner portion of the passage bottom wall when the side close to the door frame is the front and the opposite side is the rear. A valley-folded corner is formed at the rear corner corresponding to the arc-shaped portion, and at least a part of the plurality of drop ports of the passage bottom wall is arranged at the rear corner. A game machine to play. "
In the above, the "ball tank provided above the main body frame" includes a case where the ball tank is attached above the rear surface of the main body frame and a case where the ball tank is attached to the upper surface of the main body frame. In any case, the payout device is attached to the side of the rear surface of the main body frame in the "payout device provided on the side of the main body frame". It includes both the case where it is attached, the case where it is attached to the side surface of the main body frame, and the case where it is attached so as to straddle both of them.
Further, the ball tank and the payout ball passage portion may be integrated or separate.
According to such a game machine, even if a foreign substance enters the arcuate portion on the front side of the payout ball passage portion, the air does not easily stagnate in the arcuate portion, so that the foreign matter easily flows in the air flow, and the foreign matter easily flows along with the flow of the game ball. Due to the vibration, the foreign matter easily moves to the rear corner side along the inner radius shape of the arc-shaped portion, so that the foreign matter is efficiently discharged from the drop port of the corner portion. Further, as described above, foreign matter is unlikely to remain in the arcuate portion on the front side of the payout ball passage portion, and the inner surface of the arcuate portion having an inner radius shape is easy to clean, so that it is easy to maintain a clean state. There are effects such as.

In addition, in the game machine described in the previous paragraph,
The payout ball passage portion includes a substantially horizontal tank rail connected to the ball tank and a substantially vertical guide passage leading to the payout device.
The arcuate portion is formed at least upstream of the ball tank side of the tank rail.
Further, at least one of the drop ports provided at the corners may be located at the uppermost stream of all the drop ports.
This is because the joint between the ball tank and the tank rail is provided with a shooter-like step that suddenly descends from the ball tank side toward the tank rail side in order to increase the flow velocity in the tank rail, and the step vibrates. Is more likely to occur, and the vibration promotes the fall of foreign matter from the drop port, and the foreign matter is efficiently discharged from the drop port located at the uppermost stream and diffused throughout the tank rail. This is because it becomes difficult.

In addition, in the game machine described in the previous paragraph,
It is preferable to form the upstream side of the tank rail in a plan view crank shape and to form the drop port at the corner portion (preferably the out-course side of the corner portion) of the crank.
In such a case, the foreign matter moving in the tank rail tends to move in the direction of going straight through the corner portion of the crank of the tank rail due to inertia, so that the foreign matter is efficiently discharged from the drop port provided there.
The technical idea of providing a drop port at the corner of the crank of the tank rail can also be applied to a normal tank rail in which the arcuate portion and the corner portion are not mixed.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the preceding paragraph or the preceding paragraph,
One of the drop ports may be provided in the front corner on the downstream side of the tank rail.
By doing so, the foreign matter that has flowed down along the arcuate portion on the front side of the tank rail and remains without being discharged can be reliably discharged here.

In addition, in the game machine described in any one of the paragraphs from the previous paragraph to the paragraph before the previous paragraph,
The main body frame is provided with a tank unit mounting portion for mounting the ball tank and the tank rail on the upper portion thereof.
The tank rail is formed transparently and the outside of the arc-shaped portion is also formed in a rounded shape.
Further, by forming a window hole in at least a portion of the tank unit mounting portion corresponding to the arcuate portion of the tank rail or forming at least the corresponding portion transparently, the tank unit can be mounted from the front side of the main body frame. The inside of the tank rail may be visible through the portion.
According to such a game machine, when the game board is removed from the main body frame and replaced, foreign matter and game balls in the tank rail can be visually confirmed from the front side of the main body frame through the tank unit mounting portion, so that maintenance is easy. In particular, the inside and outside of the front side of the tank rail have a rounded shape, which further improves visibility.

Further, in the game machine described in any one of the paragraphs from the previous paragraph to the paragraph before and after.
The main body frame has a back cover that can be opened and closed on its rear surface, and the upper edge of the back cover covers the lower edge of the rear surface of the tank unit mounting portion.
On the other hand, an eaves-shaped ridge may be formed on the lower edge of the rear surface of the tank unit mounting portion at a position along the upper edge of the back cover.
According to such a game machine, foreign matter discharged from the drop port at the rear corner of the tank rail hits the eaves-shaped ridge and falls, or collects on the ridge, so that the foreign matter is collected on the upper edge of the back cover. There is almost no risk of foreign matter entering the inside of the main body frame from the joint of the main body frame. By the way, since the foreign matter contains metal powder as described above, it is not preferable because it may adversely affect the operation of the electronic parts inside the main body frame.
According to the above technical idea, it is possible to provide a game machine in which foreign matter that has entered the payout ball passage portion can be easily discharged.

[4-13-2a. Challenge ... Accidental entry into the fall port]
It has been conventionally known that foreign matter such as metal powder or resin powder enters the payout ball passage, and as a countermeasure, a drop port for dropping foreign matter has been provided on the bottom wall of the payout ball passage (Patent Document). 2).
However, when the drop port for dropping foreign matter in the payout ball passage portion faces the outside, a part of a large number of electric wires wired on the rear surface of the game machine enters the inside of the payout ball passage portion from the drop port. There is a possibility, and depending on the degree, there is a risk of interfering with the flow of the game ball.
The following technical idea was made in view of the above, and the purpose thereof is to provide a game machine provided with a payout ball passage portion capable of keeping the flow of the game ball smooth.

[4-13-2b. Technical idea ... Prevention of accidental entry into the fall port]
"Door frame and
The main body frame located behind the door frame and
In a game machine including a ball tank provided above the main body frame and a payout ball passage portion bent in an substantially inverted L shape connecting the payout device provided on the side of the main body frame.
The payout ball passage portion has a drop port for foreign matter provided downward on the bottom wall of the passage and a drop port for foreign matter.
A gaming machine characterized by having a lateral foreign matter discharge bypass passage portion that can receive foreign matter falling from the drop port and open rearwardly from its own discharge port to the outside on the rear surface side. "
According to such a game machine, the drop port of the payout ball passage portion does not directly face the outside on the rear surface side, and a lateral foreign matter discharge bypass passage portion is interposed between the drop port and the discharge port that opens backward. Therefore, even if a part of the electric wire of the game machine enters the discharge port of the foreign matter discharge bypass passage portion, it hardly reaches the inside of the discharge ball passage portion through the drop port from there. Therefore, there is almost no possibility that the flow of the game ball in the payout ball passage portion will be hindered by the erroneous intrusion of electric wires.

In addition, in the game machine described in the previous paragraph,
The drop port for foreign matter may be provided on the edge of the bottom wall of the passage on the side far from the discharge port.
By doing so, a distance is created between the drop port and the discharge port, so that the end of the electric wire or the like is hard to reach by the drop port, and foreign matter dropped from the drop port is temporarily stored in the foreign matter discharge bypass passage. Therefore, for example, an electronic component or the like that may be damaged by the intrusion or adhesion of foreign matter can be arranged below the drop port without any trouble.
According to the above technical idea, it is possible to provide a game machine provided with a payout ball passage portion capable of keeping the flow of the game ball smooth.

[4-13-3a. Problem ... Dysfunction of ball rectifying member]
As described above, the conventional game machine is provided with a ball rectifying member that can swing while applying an appropriate load to the game ball when the game ball flowing on the tank rail comes into contact with the ball, so that the ball is clogged in the tank rail. It's hard to get up.
On the other hand, the gaming machine may be provided with an electric wire connection terminal for wiring (“terminal board 78” in Patent Document 1) above the tank rail, specifically, on the side of the ball tank of the main body frame. Yes, some of the wires connected to the wire connection terminal cross the ball rectifying member in the vertical direction.
Therefore, ball clogging can occur even in a tank rail provided with a ball rectifying member. It is considered that there are multiple causes, but one of them is that when the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal crosses the ball rectifying member, a part of the electric wire invades the swing region of the ball rectifying member and swings. It turned out that it can inhibit. As a result, the ball rectifying member does not operate normally, so that ball clogging is likely to occur.
The following technical idea was made in view of the above, and the purpose thereof is to provide a game machine capable of keeping the flow of the game ball in the tank rail smooth.

[4-13-3b. Technical idea: Securing the swing area of the ball rectifying member]
"Door frame and
The main body frame located behind the door frame and
A ball tank for storing game balls provided at a high place in the main body frame,
A tank rail that guides the game ball of the ball tank downstream, and
A ball rectifying member that can swing while applying an appropriate load to the game ball when the game ball flowing on the tank rail comes into contact with the ball rectifying member.
Wire connection terminals for wiring arranged above the tank rail,
In a game machine having an electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal,
A gaming machine having a fence-shaped protective wall capable of preventing the electric wire from entering the swing region of the ball rectifying member. "
Here, when the ball rectifying member swings, one end side is rotatably attached to the shaft and the other end side swings up and down, and of course, the free end side moves up and down due to the elasticity of the plate in a cantilever shape. Including the case of swinging.
According to such a game machine, even if the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal crosses the ball rectifying member, the protective wall prevents the ball rectifying member from entering the swing region, so that the ball rectifying member is obstructed by the electric wire. Can swing normally without. Therefore, the flow of the game ball in the tank rail can be kept smooth.

In addition, in the game machine described in the previous paragraph,
The tank rail includes a passage bottom wall, and a gutter front wall and a gutter rear wall erected in front of and behind the passage bottom wall.
The protective wall may be formed at least on the gutter rear wall of the tank rail.
According to such a game machine, a protective wall can be easily formed only by extending at least the rear wall of the gutter of the tank rail upward.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the preceding paragraph or the preceding paragraph, the protective wall may be provided at a position displaced rearward from the rear wall of the gutter at the portion of the tank rail where the ball rectifying member is located. Good.
According to such a game machine, the space above the ball rectifying member expands in the width direction by the amount that the protective wall is displaced to the rear side, so even if the ball rectifying member rides on the game ball in the ball biting state and stops. , Reset operation such as pushing back with your fingertip can be performed without any inconvenience.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the paragraph before the previous paragraph, the protective wall may be formed on the main body frame.
According to such a game machine, not only the formation of the tank rail but also the assembly of the ball rectifying member can be simplified because the protective wall is not formed on the tank rail side.
According to the above technical idea, the flow of the game ball in the tank rail can be kept smooth.

[4-13-4a. Challenge ... High temperature inside the main frame]
In recent years, in a game board, a back unit such as an image display device has become large in size, and the amount of protrusion to the rear has increased.
In addition, as the amount of overhang of the back unit of the game board increases, the amount of overhang of the main body frame surrounding it also increases backward, and as a result, the tank unit mounting part at the top of the main body frame also extends backward and the ball tank. And the tank rail will be overhanging. Therefore, the overlapping portion between the tank unit mounting portion and the ball tank or the tank rail increases.
Needless to say, the back unit of the current game board is an assembly of electric parts, and generates heat when operated. Therefore, it is necessary to dissipate heat from the inside of the main body frame to the outside, but as described above, the ball tank and the tank rail are polymerized on the upper surface of the tank unit mounting portion of the main body frame, so that heat is easily trapped. Therefore, the inside of the main body frame may become hot.
The following technical idea was made in view of the above, and the purpose is to provide a game machine in which heat does not easily accumulate inside the main body frame.

[4-13-4b. Technical concept: Improvement of heat dissipation performance of the main body frame]
"Door frame and
The main body frame located behind the door frame and
A ball tank for storing game balls provided above the main body frame,
In a game machine having a tank rail arranged above the main body frame for guiding the game ball of the ball tank downstream.
A gaming machine characterized in that a gap is provided on a surface facing the main body frame and the tank rail. "
According to such a game machine, the heat released from the back unit of the game board to the inside of the main body frame is released to the outside through the gap provided on the facing surface between the main body frame and the tank rail. It is difficult for heat to accumulate inside.
In such a game machine, the gap may be provided in a part of the facing surface between the main body frame and the tank rail. This makes it possible to achieve both stability and heat dissipation of the tank rail.
Further, in such a game machine or the game machine described immediately before, the gap may be formed at least in the vertical direction so that the upper end is opened to the outside. As a result, the gap functions like a chimney, and heat can be efficiently dissipated to the outside.
According to the above technical idea, since the heat generated inside the main body frame can be released to the outside, there is an effect that the heat is less likely to be trapped.

[4-13-5a. Challenge ... Discharge of foreign matter]
The ball stop member for opening and closing the flow path of the payout ball passage portion of Patent Document 1 is provided on the upper side of the tank rail constituting the payout ball passage portion, but when it is positioned to interfere with other parts. Is placed on the lower side of the tank rail at the bent portion of the payout ball passage where the flow of the game ball changes from sideways to downward, and the ball stop piece is moved in and out of the payout ball passage to open and close the flow path. You may do so.
However, on the other hand, in order to allow the ball stop piece of the ball stop member to be taken in and out of the bent portion of the payout ball passage portion, it is necessary to open a slit for ball stopper in the bent portion. There is a possibility that the existing foreign matter may fall from the ball-stopping slit into the flow path that flows downward from the ball-stopping member through the ball-stopping piece of the ball-stopping member due to the vibration when the ball-stopping member is operated.
The following technical idea was made in view of the above, and the purpose thereof is to provide a game machine that is less susceptible to the influence of foreign matter entering the payout ball passage portion.

[4-13-5b. Technical idea ... Discharge of foreign matter]
"Door frame and
The main body frame located behind the door frame and
A payout ball passage portion that bends in an substantially inverted L shape and connects a ball tank provided above the main body frame and a payout device provided on the side of the main body frame.
In a game machine having a ball stop member capable of opening and closing the flow path of the payout ball passage portion.
A ball-stopping slit opened toward the bottom wall of the passage on the upstream side and the side wall of the passage on the downstream side starting from the bent portion that bends in an substantially inverted L shape of the payout ball passage portion.
A ball stop piece is rushed into the inside of the payout ball passage portion from the ball stop slit to close the flow path of the game ball, and the ball stop piece is retracted from the inside of the payout ball passage portion to retract the game ball. It is equipped with a retracted position that opens the flow path of the above and a ball stop member that is slidably provided so that it can be switched to.
The ball stop member is capable of dropping foreign matter between the rear end portion of the ball stop piece and the start end portion of the ball stop slit provided on the bottom wall of the passage on the upstream side in the state of being in the entry position. A game machine characterized in that a flow-through space is formed. "
In the above, the "ball tank provided above the main body frame" includes a case where the ball tank is attached above the rear surface of the main body frame and a case where the ball tank is attached to the upper surface of the main body frame. In any case, the payout device is attached to the side of the rear surface of the main body frame in the "payout device provided on the side of the main body frame". It includes both the case where it is attached, the case where it is attached to the side surface of the main body frame, and the case where it is attached so as to straddle both of them.
According to such a game machine, even if a foreign substance that has been stopped at the edge of the starting end of the ball-stopping slit falls into the slit due to vibration when the ball-stopping member is switched from the retracted position to the rushing position, the ball Since the flow-out space portion faces between the rear end portion of the stop piece and the start end portion of the ball stopper slit, there is no risk of the ball stopping piece being placed on the ball stopper piece. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk that the foreign matter on the edge of the start end portion of the ball stop slit travels through the ball stop piece of the ball stop member and enters the payout ball passage portion. In particular, the ball stop member may be given a constant load (a feeling of "click" or "click" moderation at the time of switching) by engaging an elastic lock piece or the like to prevent blindness. In this case, the surroundings vibrate more strongly each time the switching operation is performed, so that it is highly useful.
Further, in the game machine, the flow-through space portion may have a bottomless form that penetrates the ball stop member in the vertical direction.
In such a case, the foreign matter passes through the flow-through space and is discharged to the outside and hardly accumulates on the ball stop member, so that the ball stop member is not easily soiled even after long-term use.
Further, in the game machine, the flow-through space portion may have a bottomed form having a receiving bottom portion projecting from the rear bottom portion of the ball stop piece of the ball stop member.
In such a case, for example, if the density of parts under the tank rail is high and electronic parts such as a control board that may cause damage due to the intrusion or adhesion of foreign matter are placed directly under the flow-out space. However, since the foreign matter collects on the bottom of the ball stopper and is not discharged to the outside, it is possible to make a hole for heat dissipation in the board box for storing the board without worrying about the intrusion of the foreign matter from above.

[4-14. Another Embodiment of the Substrate Unit]
Subsequently, the substrate unit 620A of the embodiment different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 123 and the like. FIG. 118 (a) is a front view of the substrate unit of another embodiment, FIG. 118 (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) viewed from the front right, and FIG. 118 (c) shows the substrate unit of (a). It is a perspective view seen from the left front. 119 (a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 118 (a) viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 119 (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 118 (a) viewed from the lower right rear. FIG. 120 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 118 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 118 (a) disassembled and viewed from the rear. 122 (a) is a cross-sectional view cut along the key line in FIG. 118 (a), FIG. 122 (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the coffee line in (a), and (c) is (a). ) Is a cross-sectional view cut along the Keke line. FIG. 123 is a bottom view showing a portion of the pachinko machine provided with the substrate unit of FIG. 118 (a) behind the door frame.

The board unit 620A of the present embodiment is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in place of the above board unit 620. In the substrate unit 620A of the present embodiment, the configuration of the base unit 660 is significantly different from the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 described above. Here, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the above-mentioned substrate unit 620, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The board unit 620A includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 660 mounted on the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 660, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. It includes an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The base unit 660 has a front base 661 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the front base 661. A game that is provided between the rear base 662, the front base 661, and the rear base 662, and distributes the out-ball passage 663 and the out-ball passage 663 through which the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5 is distributed. An out sensor 664 that detects the balls B one by one, and a ball pulling guidance unit 627 that receives the game ball B released from the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and guides it to the right in the front view. The game ball B guided by the ball ejection guidance unit 627 circulates, and closes the ball ejection discharge passage 665 provided behind the out ball passage 663 in the rear base 662 and the rear side of the ball ejection discharge passage 665. The passage wall member 666, which is attached to the rear base 662 as described above, is provided.

The front base 661 is formed in the shape of a long box on the left and right that is open forward. The rear base 662 has a flat plate-shaped partition wall portion 662a extending to the left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction, and an out-ball passage 663 and a ball ejection guidance portion 627 are formed on the front side of the partition wall portion 662a. At the same time, a ball ejection discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a. The rear base 662 is formed in a box shape in which the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a is open to the rear.

In the base unit 660, the front base 661, the rear base 662, and the passage wall member 666 are formed of transparent members. Therefore, the ball ejection guide portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball ejection discharge passage 665 are also transparently formed. Therefore, the inside of the ball ejection guide portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball ejection discharge passage 665 can be clearly seen from the upper side or the lower side of the base unit 660, and it becomes easier to confirm ball clogging or the like. There is.

The out-ball passage 663 is formed on the front side of the flat plate-shaped partition wall portion 662a extending to the left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction in the rear base 662 with the front open, and is open. The front end is closed by the front base 661.

The out ball passage 663 is a ball discharge receiving portion 663a that is open upward and extends to the left and right at a position substantially central in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1, and a game ball B received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. At the lower end of the out-ball rectifying unit 663b that rectifies in a row while meandering in the left-right direction, the downward guiding unit 663c that guides the game ball B rectified in a row by the out-ball rectifying unit 663b downward, and the downward guiding unit 663c It is open downward and has an out-ball discharge port 663d for discharging the game ball B downward from the lower surface of the base unit 660. The out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 is provided behind the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 123).

The ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is about 2.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. The ball discharge receiving portion 663a is inclined at a gentle angle so that the right end side is lowered.

The out-ball rectifying unit 663b is inclined at a gentle angle from a position to the right of the right end of the ball discharge receiving unit 663a toward the lower side of the ball discharging receiving unit 663a so that the left end side becomes lower. Further, the depth of the out-ball rectifying unit 663b becomes narrower in the front-rear direction toward the downstream side (left side), and is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B in the vicinity of the downstream end below the ball discharging receiving unit 663a. It is the depth. Further, the portion of the out-ball rectifying section 663b on the left side of the right end of the ball discharge receiving section 663a becomes lower in vertical height toward the downstream side (left side), and in the vicinity of the downstream end, the game ball B The height is slightly larger than the diameter. As a result, the game balls B can be aligned in a row in the out-ball rectifying unit 663b.

The lower guide portion 663c extends downward from the downstream end of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b below the ball discharge receiving portion 663a, and the front wall is flush with the rear wall (partition wall portion) in the middle of the vertical direction. It bends backward in a curved shape like a small crank. As a result, the downstream end (out ball discharge port 663d) of the downward guidance portion 663c is located behind the front surface of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. An out sensor 664 is provided on the upstream side of the cranked portion of the downward guidance portion 663c. Since the downward guiding portion 663c is formed in a curved shape so that the portion bent in a crank shape does not have a portion extending in the horizontal direction, the downward guide portion 663c passes through the out sensor 664 and is bent in a crank shape. Even if the game ball B comes into contact with the existing portion, it does not jump up to the upper out sensor 664 side, and it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected twice by the out sensor 664.

Since the game ball B frequently passes through the out sensor 664, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch having high durability and long life is used.

The ball pulling guide portion 627 is provided to the left of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a in the out ball passage 663. The ball pulling guide portion 627 has an upstream end that opens to the upper part of the left side surface toward the left in front view, and the downstream side bends backward and extends to the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. , It is connected to the upstream end of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 (see FIG. 122 (a) and the like).

The ball ejection discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a in the rear base 662. The ball ejection discharge passage 665 is formed in the rear base 662 in a state of being open to the rear, and the rear end side is closed by the passage wall member 666. The rear end of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 is located in front of the rear end of the rear base 662 by about one outer diameter of the game ball B. That is, a gap of one game ball B or more is formed between the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662.

The upstream end (left end) of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 is connected to the downstream end of the ball ejection guidance portion 627, and has the same inclination as the ball ejection receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 and is larger than the ball ejection receiving portion 663a. The lateral guide portion 665a extending to the right, the vertical guide portion 665b extending vertically downward from the downstream end (right end) of the lateral guide portion 665a to the lower surface of the rear base 662, and the downstream end (lower end) of the vertical guide portion 665b. ) Has a ball ejection port 665c that opens downward. The ball ejection port 665c is provided slightly behind the out ball ejection port 663d of the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 123).

Further, the ball ejection discharge passage 665 has a plurality of protrusions 665d that alternately project inward at regular intervals in the vertical direction on the left and right inner walls of the vertical guide portion 665b. In the ball ejection discharge passage 665, the game ball B flowing through the vertically extending vertical guide portion 665b alternately abuts on the plurality of protrusions 665d, so that the game ball B flows down in a zigzag shape and is distributed. The increase in speed can be suppressed, and the speed of the game ball B discharged downward from the ball ejection port 665c can be suppressed.

Since the ball removal discharge passage 665 is a simple L-shaped passage by the horizontal guide portion 665a and the vertical guidance portion 665b, when the ball removal lever 593 is operated to discharge the game ball B in the ball tank 552. , Many game balls B can be smoothly guided and discharged.

According to the substrate unit 620A of this embodiment, the game ball B that is driven into the game area 5a and discharged from the game board 5 is received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663, and then the out sensor 664. It is detected by the sensor and discharged to the island facility side of the game hall. On the other hand, in order to discharge (pull out) the game ball B in the ball tank 552 or the like, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is operated to remove the game ball B discharged to the ball pulling passage 580b side from the out ball passage 663. The ball is discharged to the island facility side of the game hall through the ball pulling guidance unit 627 and the ball pulling discharge passage 665, which are separate and independent from the above. As a result, only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected by the out sensor 664 provided in the out ball passage 663, so that only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be accurately detected. Can be counted. Therefore, the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted by the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580 and the number of game balls B (out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 are used to obtain an accurate game ball B. It can be a pachinko machine 1 capable of calculating a payout rate (ball payout rate).

The number of game balls B (the number of out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 is driven into the game area 5a, and the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, The number of game balls B that are accepted and discharged from the game board 5 by the winning openings such as the large winning opening 2005 and the accessory winning opening 2006, and which winning opening is accepted after being driven into the game area 5a. It is the sum of the number of game balls B that were received in the out port 1008 and discharged from the game board 5, and the number of game balls B (the number of shot balls) that were driven into the game area 5a. That is.

Since the payout rate (ball payout rate) changes according to the game state, the payout rate within a predetermined period (for example, per unit time, per predetermined time, per day, etc.) is set to "Payout within a predetermined period". Calculate as "number ÷ number of out balls within a predetermined period = payout rate within a predetermined period".

Further, according to the present embodiment, the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is detachably attached is provided with an out ball passage 663 through which the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 is distributed, and an out ball is provided. The game ball B circulating in the passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected. Therefore, the game board 5 detects the “out ball”. It is not necessary to provide the out-ball detection unit 3030, and the configuration of the game board 5 can be simplified to reduce the cost.

Further, according to the present embodiment, there is a gap larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B between the rear end of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662. The out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection discharge passage 665 are moved away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., and the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection discharge passage 665 are used for many game balls B. It is possible to reduce the influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc. due to electrical noise caused by static electricity, induced current, etc. generated by the distribution of the game ball B, and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the distribution of the game ball B. Can be.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the game ball B whose flow speed is suppressed by the out ball rectifying unit 663b of the out ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, the game ball B is distributed. Since the impact applied to the out sensor 664 can be weakened, it is possible to reduce the premature wear and damage of the out sensor 664.

Further, when the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so that the player can visually recognize the game. Since a person wants to pay out a lot of game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is large, it is possible to immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has a high possibility that many game balls B will be paid out. It is possible to make it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 to be played. In addition, when the payout rate is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, if a fraudulent act such that a large number of game balls B are paid out is performed, the displayed payout rate becomes larger than usual. , Other players and the staff of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily notice the fraudulent activity, so that the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against the fraudulent activity can be hesitated. Can be.

In addition, when the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed at a position invisible from the player side, the staff of the game hall can see the same reason as above. Can detect fraudulent activity. Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, obstacle nail N, main control board 1310, payout control board 633, relay). Since there is a possibility of a defect in the board, connector, wiring cable, various sensors, etc.), it is possible to respond to the defect at an early stage and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, since the out sensor 664 is provided in the out ball passage 663 in which the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 is distributed, a configuration for detecting the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 (for example, It is not necessary to provide an out-ball detection unit 3030), the cost for the game board 5 can be reduced, and a space is secured in the game board 5 for the configuration for detecting the discharged game ball B. By providing the effect device in the secured space, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) more entertaining to the player.

Further, since the ball ejection discharge passage 665 has a vertical guide portion 665b in which a plurality of protrusions 665d are alternately projected, the game ball B circulates through the vertical guide portion 665 b to distribute the game ball B. Since the speed can be suppressed, damage in the ball ejection discharge passage 665 due to the impact of the circulating game ball B, damage on the island facility side of the game hall that receives the game ball B ejected from the ball ejection discharge passage 665, Etc. can be prevented.

Further, the out-ball rectifying section 663b meandering in the out-ball passage 663 is provided, and the vertical guiding section 665b in which a plurality of protrusions 665d are projected is provided in the ball-extracting discharge passage 665, whereby the gaming ball B is provided. Since it is possible to suppress the circulation speed of the ball, it is possible to reduce the electrical noise emitted from the game ball B circulating in the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection discharge passage 665, so that the ball is provided nearby. The influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, and the like can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the distribution of the game ball B can be obtained.

Further, since the out-ball discharge port 663d and the ball-extracting discharge port 665c of the out-ball passage 663 and the ball-extracting discharge passage 665 are opened downward, the out-ball passage 663 and the ball-extracting discharge passage are opened. Since the game ball B is discharged downward from 665, it becomes difficult for the game ball B to collide with another pachinko machine, a wall, or the like provided behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, and the other pachinko machines. It is possible to prevent the machine, walls, etc. from being damaged. Further, since the game ball B is discharged downward from the out ball passage 663 and the ball removal discharge passage 665, the discharged game ball B is less likely to scatter, and the discharged game ball B is less likely to scatter from the out ball passage 663 and the ball removal discharge passage 665 on the island facility side. It is possible to easily collect the discharged game ball B.

Further, since the base unit 660 in which the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 are formed is provided below the portion of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is attached, the game board 5 is provided with a game. Since the game ball B driven into the area 5a can be delivered to the out ball passage 663 of the base unit 660 simply by discharging it downward, the configuration related to the discharge of the game ball B in the game board 5 is configured. The configuration can be simple (simple), and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced.

Further, since the ball ejection port 665c of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the out ball ejection port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the out ball ejection passage 663 Since it is possible to prevent the discharged game ball B from colliding with the outer frame 2, the game ball B vigorously circulating in the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 collides with the outer frame 2. It is possible to prevent the outer frame 2 from being damaged, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which is not easily damaged.

Further, since the ball ejection port 665c of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the out ball ejection port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, a portion for collecting the game ball B on the island facility side ( It is not necessary to advance the out receiving portion, the bucket, etc.) to a position where it overlaps with the outer frame 2, and it is possible to reduce the trouble of installing the pachinko machine 1 and the trouble of moving the pachinko machine 1.

[4-14a. Another Embodiment of Ball Discharge in a Substrate Unit]
Next, another embodiment of ball ejection in the substrate unit 620A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 124 and 125 and the like. FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out ball discharge port of the out ball passage. FIG. 125 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out sensor is detachable, and FIG. 125 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out sensor is removed in (a).

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 124, a guide piece 667 that guides the game ball B to the rear side is provided at a portion of the out ball discharge port 663d at the downstream end of the out ball passage 663 in the base unit 660. More specifically, in this embodiment, a merging portion 663e that joins the ball ejection / discharging passage 665 is provided in the vicinity of the downstream end of the out ball passage 663. The merging portion 663e is open downward, and the open end thereof is an out ball discharge port 663d (ball ejection port 665c). Then, the guide piece 667 projects shortly backward from the front wall at the out ball discharge port 663d.

According to the embodiment of FIG. 124, the game ball B discharged downward from the out ball discharge port 663d comes into contact with the guide piece 667, so that the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed diagonally backward and downward. .. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) for collecting the game ball B provided on the rear side (inside the island equipment) of the island equipment. Etc.) It is possible to easily release the game ball B to the side, and the game ball B can be reliably collected on the island equipment side.

Further, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 124, since the release direction of the game ball B can be directed diagonally backward and downward by the guide piece 667, the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 is provided in the main body frame 4. Even if the game board 5 is provided at a position close to directly below the game area 5a of the attached game board 5 (a position close to the front side in the island facility), the game ball B can be reliably received by a bucket or the like in the island facility. Therefore, since the out-ball passage 663 (out-ball discharge port 663d) can be arranged in the front portion as much as possible, the space behind the out-ball passage 663 in the main body frame 4 can be widened. Therefore, when the out-ball passage 663 is moved away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., the out-ball passage 663 is caused by electrical noise due to static electricity, induced current, etc. generated by the circulation of many game balls B. The influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, and the like can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the distribution of the game ball B can be obtained.

Subsequently, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, the out sensor 664 can be attached to and detached from below at the portion of the out ball discharge port 663d in the out ball passage 663. In this embodiment, a sensor mounting recess 663f formed at the downstream end of the downward guide portion 663c in the out ball passage 663 and open downward so as to accommodate the out sensor 664, and an out sensor housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f. It is equipped with a sensor cover 668 that regulates the downward movement of the 664.

The sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the lower end of the lower guidance portion 663c connected to the downstream end of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b in the out-ball passage 663 of the base unit 660. Also in this embodiment, the base unit 660 is formed of a transparent member, and the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from the upper side or the lower side of the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 detects the main body portion 668a which extends longer than the sensor mounting recess 663f and whose base end side is rotatably mounted on the base unit 660, and the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f in the main body portion 668a. A through hole 668b through which the game ball B can pass through at a portion corresponding to the hole, and a locking claw portion 668c provided on the main body portion 668a opposite to the proximal end side and elastically deformable. Have.

The sensor cover 668 is rotatably mounted on the outer side of the base unit 660 with respect to the sensor mounting recess 663f, opposite to the out-sphere rectifying section 663b. The locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is locked to the locking portion 663g provided on the outer side of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b side with respect to the sensor mounting recess 663f in the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 has the locking claw portion 668c moved upward in a state where the out sensor 664 is housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f so that the detection hole of the out sensor 664 coincides with the out ball passage 663. By rotating and locking the locking claw portion 668c to the locking portion 663g and closing it, the main body portion 668a abuts on the lower surface of the out sensor 664, restricting the downward movement of the out sensor 664, and out. The sensor 664 can be attached to the base unit 660 (see FIG. 125 (a)). In this state, the through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 coincides with the detection hole of the out sensor 664, and after the game ball B circulating through the out ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, the through hole 668b is inserted. It is discharged downward through it. The through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 also serves as the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663.

When the out sensor 664 is replaced (removed), the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is operated to elastically deform the locking claw portion 668c to release the locking with the locking portion 663g. Then, by rotating and opening the sensor cover 668 around the base end side of the main body 668a so that the locking claw portion 668c moves downward, the main body 668a of the sensor cover 668 is opened under the out sensor 664. The out-sensor 664 can be removed from the sensor mounting recess 663f (see FIG. 125 (b)).

As shown in FIG. 125 (b), in the present embodiment, with the sensor cover 668 rotated and opened, the lower end of the sensor cover 668 and the upper end of the dangerous contact object (for example, the outer frame 2) shown by the alternate long and short dash line. There is a certain amount of gap between the upper end surface of the outer frame lower assembly 40, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43, etc.) or the lower end of the main body frame 4. ing. As a result, even if the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 does not come into contact with a dangerous object and the sensor cover 668 is prevented from being damaged. be able to.

According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, since the out sensor 664 detects all the game balls B driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5, many game balls B are distributed. As a result, the out sensor 664 may be worn out and damaged at an early stage, but as described above, the out sensor 664 can be attached and detached from below by opening the sensor cover 668, so that the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced. it can.

Further, according to this embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 comes into contact with a contact-risk object such as the outer frame 2. It is possible to prevent the sensor cover 668 from being damaged. More specifically, the sensor cover 668 supports the out sensor 664 from below, but since many game balls B come into contact with the out sensor 664 from above, many game balls B come into contact with each other. There is a risk that the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 will come off due to the vibration caused by the sensor cover 668, and the sensor cover 668 will open. When the sensor cover 668 is opened and the out sensor 664 is dropped downward during the game, the game ball B is detected by the out sensor 664 even though the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a. Therefore, the occurrence of an abnormality is notified by the main control board 1310 or the like. Upon notification of the occurrence of this abnormality, the staff of the game hall or the like opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to confirm the abnormality, but the lower end of the open sensor cover 668 and the outer frame 2 Since there is a gap between the sensor cover 668 and the sensor cover, the main body frame 4 can be opened without the sensor cover 668 coming into contact with the contact risk, and the sensor cover 668 can be prevented from being damaged.

Further, according to the embodiment of FIG. 125, the base end side of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 at an outer portion of the sensor mounting recess 663f opposite to the out-sphere rectifying portion 663b. At the same time, since the base unit 660 is transparent, the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be satisfactorily visually recognized from below by opening the sensor cover 668 and removing the out-sensor 664. Therefore, when the game ball B is jammed in the out ball passage 663, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from the outside, so that the place where the game ball B is jammed can be identified at a glance. It is possible to eliminate the clogging of the game ball B at an early stage.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper surface of the door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 is formed to be substantially on the same surface as the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 in the outer frame 2. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be turned upside down and upright, and the out sensor 664 can be replaced by opening and closing the sensor cover 668, and the out ball passage 663 from the bottom side through the transparent base unit 660. It is possible to easily perform confirmation work inside or inside the ball ejection discharge passage 665.

Further, according to the present embodiment, even if the out sensor 664 is damaged, the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced, so that the game that was interrupted due to the damage of the out sensor 664 can be restarted at an early stage. , It is possible to alleviate the irritation of the player due to the interruption of the game and suppress the decrease in the interest, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 and reduce the burden on the game hall side. it can.

Further, since one end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, even if the sensor cover 668 is opened when the out sensor 664 is replaced, the sensor cover 668 is attached to the base unit 660. Since the sensor cover 668 is in a suspended state and does not fall off, it is possible to prevent the sensor cover 668 from being lost.

Further, in the sensor cover 668 that holds the out sensor 664 from below, the outer portion of the base unit 660 near the out ball passage 663 through which many game balls B circulate, around the axis in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction). On the other hand, since it is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, the downward force distribution applied to the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 due to the circulation of the game ball B is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 (one side). (End side) of the base unit 660), and relatively smaller on the locking claw portion 668c side (the other end side) locked to the locking portion 663g of the base unit 660. Therefore, when many game balls B pass through the out sensor 664, even if a downward force acts on the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664, it is rotatably attached to one end side thereof. Since it is possible to receive a large amount, it becomes difficult to release the lock at the locking claw portion 668c on the other end side, and it is possible to reduce the possibility that the sensor cover 668 is opened and the out sensor 664 is dropped off. ..

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 126 to 136. FIG. 126 is a front view of a game board in which a center accessory or the like is made opaque in a pachinko machine. 127 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 126 as viewed from the front right, FIG. 128 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 126 as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 129 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the back. .. FIG. 130 is a schematic explanatory view of routing of wiring from the function display unit on the main control board. FIG. 131 is a front view of the game board in a state where the center accessory and the like are transparent. FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 134 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 126, and FIG. 135 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 126. FIG. 136 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut in parallel with the surface of the game panel to show the inside of the game area where the game balls are distributed and the obstacle nails.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, and a normal winning opening that grant a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by accepting or passing the game ball B. The opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a large winning opening 2005, a character winning opening 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. In addition, it is for performing a game to enjoy the driving operation of the handle 195 and the distribution of the game ball B in the game area 5a so as to be accepted.

The game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and the rear end of the game area 5a. It is provided with a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 136 and the like) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a. Further, the game board 5 is a game performed by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 and the board holder 1200. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 134, 173, etc.) for controlling the contents.

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the upper left corner of the front component 1000. The peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the 1100, the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the effect display device 1600 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100. The panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the front unit 2000 that is mounted on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the back unit 3000 that is mounted on the rear surface of the game panel 1100. And, further equipped.

The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. A panel relay board 1710 is attached below the effect display device 1600 on the rear surface of the back unit 3000. The panel relay board 1710 includes a main control board 1310, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a normal winning opening sensor 2401, a large winning opening sensor 2403, and an accessory winning opening sensor 2513. , 1st V winning opening sensor 2514, 1st losing opening sensor 2516, 2nd V winning opening sensor 2515, 3rd losing opening sensor 2518, starting port solenoid 2412, attacker solenoid 2414, accessory winning opening solenoid 2512, first swing Minute solenoid 2532, 2nd distribution solenoid 2545, 3rd distribution middle drive motor 2560, 3rd distribution left drive motor 2561, 3rd distribution right drive motor 2562, 3rd distribution middle rotation detection sensor 2563, 3rd This is for relaying the connection with the distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564, the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565, the magnetic sensor 2010, the vibration sensor 3003, the out sensor 664, and the like.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (here, three) general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that the game ball B driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are game areas. The first starting port 2002, which is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in 5a, and the normal winning opening 2003, which is always open to accept the game ball B at a different position in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port are capable of accepting the game ball B according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B into the ordinary winning opening 2003. A large winning opening 2005 that allows the acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B in 2004, and the first start opening 2002 or the second start. The first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, which is drawn by accepting the game ball B into the mouth 2004, allows the game ball B to be accepted, and the character winning opening 2006 and the character winning opening 2006 are accepted. The first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008, which are given an opportunity to accept the game ball B, and a plurality of magnetic sensors 2010 for detecting illegally acting magnetism in the game area 5a. It has.

Further, the front unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002, and a front surface of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning openings 2001, and a side upper left unit that is mounted slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. An attacker that is attached to the right side of the front view of the 2300 and the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a, and has a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005. It is mounted above the unit 2400, the start port unit 2100, and the side unit 2200, slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a, and is attached to the accessory winning opening 2006, the first V winning opening 2007, and the second V. It is provided with a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a winning opening 2008.

The attacker unit 2400 includes a normal winning opening sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the normal winning opening 2003, a second starting port sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004, and the like. It is provided with a large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005. The center accessory 2500 has an accessory winning opening sensor 2513 that detects the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 and a first V winning opening that detects the game ball B received in the first V winning opening 2007. It includes a sensor 2514 and a first loss opening sensor 2516 that detects a game ball B received by the first loss opening 2535.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 which is box-shaped and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is provided with a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. Further, the back unit 3000 is provided in the general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, and the start opening unit 2100. It includes a first start port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the start port 2002 (see FIG. 173).

Further, the back unit 3000 is mounted on the lower front surface of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 mounted in the back box 3010 and the light guide plate effect unit 3100, and is mounted from the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000. The back lower ball discharge unit 3150 that receives the game ball B and discharges it downward, and the first distribution device 2530 and the second distribution of the center accessory 2500, which are attached to the right corner of the front surface of the light guide plate effect unit 3100. It includes a back right ball discharge unit 3170 that receives the game ball B from the device 2540 and discharges it downward.

Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the light guide plate effect unit 3100, and the back front effect unit 3200 extending along the left and right sides and the upper side of the light guide plate effect unit 3100, and the light guide plate effect unit 3100. The back front lower left effect unit 3300 attached to the lower left on the front side, the back front lower right effect unit 3400 attached to the lower right on the front side of the light guide plate effect unit 3100, and the back upper decorative body in the back front effect unit 3200. A sub-state indicator 3500, which is always visible near the right end of the 3211, is provided.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 (a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 137 (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the rear.

The front component 1000 is formed to be transparent as a whole. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction, passes through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extends diagonally to the upper right. The game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left side in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in the front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front component 1000 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable only with an open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view in the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide unit 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of the portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch portion 1010 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. The notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1103 of the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch 1103 and of the lower full tank path unit 610. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b face forward.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and includes a function display unit mounting portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. There is.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparently, and the game panel 1100 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 137 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, to which the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 136 and the like).

The game panel 1100 is formed of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and the outer shape is formed to have substantially the same shape as the outer shape of the front component 1000. The game panel 1100 is at the lowest position in the game area 5a, and an out recess 1101 recessed upward from the lower end is formed at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000. Further, the game panel 1100 is formed with a plurality of openings 1102 that penetrate the front and rear and for mounting the front unit 2000.

Further, the game panel 1100 includes a notch 1103 which is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. The notch 1103 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch 1103. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610 face forward. Although detailed illustration is omitted, a decorative sheet with a pattern or decoration according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100.

[5-3. Board holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 notched from the front end to the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is on the rear surface. The main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located directly above the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the game ball B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game ball B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received, and the bottom surface can be received. It can be discharged from the discharge unit 1201 formed in the above to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 or the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 122) below. The game balls B discharged to the out ball passage 663 are detected (counted) one by one by the out sensor 664.

[5-4. Main control unit (1)]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 to 134. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 173) that controls the game content and payout of the game ball B, and a setting change board 1311 (see FIG. 130) that can set the game performance. It includes a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 and is attached to the board holder 1200.

The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently molded. The main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are transparently molded from polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 (whether or not they have been tampered with). Or whether or not an unauthorized IC is mounted) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. Further, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms so as to correspond to the cover body and the base body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the main control board box 1320 is then closed. In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting change board 1311. Further, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a normal winning opening sensor 2401, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a large winning opening sensor 2403, and an accessory winning opening sensor. 2513, 1st V winning opening sensor 2514, 1st losing opening sensor 2516, 2nd V winning opening sensor 2515, 3rd losing opening sensor 2518, starting port solenoid 2412, attacker solenoid 2414, accessory winning opening solenoid 2512, 1st Distribution solenoid 2532, 2nd distribution solenoid 2545, 3rd distribution middle drive motor 2560, 3rd distribution left drive motor 2561, 3rd distribution right drive motor 2562, 3rd distribution middle rotation detection sensor 2563, 1st It is connected to a three-segment left rotation detection sensor 2564, a third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565, a magnetic sensor 2010, a vibration sensor 3003, an out sensor 664, and the like.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 has a setting key switch 1311a capable of switching the set value of the pachinko machine 1 and confirming the set value, and a setting switching button 1311b capable of selecting and switching the set value. It is provided with a setting change permission lamp 1311c indicating a state in which switching of the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is permitted. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (connection between boards) (a harness between the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310). May be electrically connected via). By this connector connection (connection between boards), the signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the signal from the setting switching button 1311b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The vertical distance dimension of the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1311 is almost the same as the vertical distance dimension of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, and the horizontal distance dimension thereof is the left and right of the main control board 1310. It is shorter than the distance dimension in the direction, and the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310 and the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1311 are It matches.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the right side of the setting change board 1311 at the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is the main. Along the left side of the control board 1310, a position at the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction is arranged on the center line. A setting in which a setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder that is rotated by inserting a setting key below the center line of the setting change board 1311 is arranged and has a pressing operation unit above the center line of the setting change board 1311. A setting change permission lamp on which the changeover button 1311b is arranged and capable of emitting a single color (for example, red) on the center line of the setting change board 1311 and on the upper left side of the setting key switch 1311a (lower left side of the setting changeover button 1311b). 1311c is arranged. A setting display 1310 g composed of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dots) is arranged above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN, and the center line of the main control board 1310. The base monitor 1310h, which is lower than the center and is composed of six 7-segment LED displays with a decimal point (so-called dots) arranged in a row from the center to the right side, is arranged near the center of the lower side of the main control board 1310. A RAM clear switch 1310f having a pressing operation unit is arranged on the.

In the present embodiment, the position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, the position where the longitudinal direction of the insertion port having a rectangular shape is along the vertical direction). In, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off as the initial position. When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the insertion slot and the setting key can be removed from the insertion slot. In the present embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 with the setting key inserted in the insertion port, the other equipment is arranged in a row opposite to the island equipment of the game hall. The distance dimension of the setting key switch 1311a in the depth direction is adopted so that the member of the pachinko machine (or the member of the island facility of the game hall) and the setting key do not interfere with each other and are not damaged.

The setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and the first ON operation, and the setting key ON signal is set. It is input from the change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position and operating the second ON operation, and the determination key ON signal can be set. Is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, the setting key cylinder is set so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it off, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder to the original position. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), and the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. Can be turned off. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In the present embodiment, two functions in which the function of setting key ON and the function of setting key ON are completely different can be realized by a single setting key switch 1311a depending on the direction in which the setting key silin is rotated. The operation of turning on the setting key and the operation of turning on the enter key can be performed collectively by using only the setting key switch 1311a.

The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f are provided through openings formed in the cover body of the corresponding main control board box 1320. Although it is exposed, there is a "gap" formed in the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the corresponding openings. The structure is such that the wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body for each of these openings so that the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310 cannot be modified by invading the wire or the like. .. Although the setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are housed in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body and cannot be touched at all, the cover body is transparently molded as described above. Through the cover body, the set value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be visually recognized.

In order to prevent unauthorized modification, a wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, a wiring pattern in which the determination key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and a setting key switch The wiring pattern in which the OFF signal of 1311a is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are routed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other) on the setting change board 1311. Along with the formation, the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed separately, and various signals from the setting key switch 1311a are also formed on the main control board 1310. Is transmitted (that is, a wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, a wiring pattern in which the determination key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and OFF of the setting key switch 1311a. The wiring pattern in which the signal is transmitted) and the wiring pattern in which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are also formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other), and the RAM clear switch 1310f The routing with the wiring pattern in which the signal from is transmitted is also formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other).

The setting key switch 1311a, the setting switching button 1311b, and the setting display 1310g will be briefly described. Here, first, a case of changing the setting value of the setting value will be briefly described, and a case of confirming and displaying the current setting value will be briefly described. In addition to changing the set value, the setting key is an important key that allows you to check the current set value, etc., so only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, can own it. Allowed and limited to 2-3 people.

When changing the setting of the set value, the main body frame is relative to the outer frame 2 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). 4 is released, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and the first ON operation is performed. It is necessary that the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is satisfied. That is, the person who actually changes the setting value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the state where the pachinko machine 1 is turned off), and then sets the outer frame 2 to the outer frame 2. The work of opening the main body frame 4 is performed, and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated 60 degrees clockwise to set by the first ON operation. The key switch 1311a is turned on and the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. In addition, as the above-mentioned "predetermined setting value change permission condition", it may be a condition that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is further operated and an operation signal is input. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs), the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a The setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise, and the first ON operation is performed to turn on the setting key switch 1311a. The setting change of the set value may be executed when the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated is satisfied.

The person who changes the setting of the set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off), and then sets the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. The work of opening is performed, and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to set by the first ON operation. The key switch 1311a is set to ON. Subsequently, the power switch 630a of FIG. 7 is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a has the current set value (set value 1 to set value 6 at the time when the set key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned on) stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM. Of these, the set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1311c is switched from the off state to the on state.

When a person who changes the setting of the set value presses the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b, the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting changing board 1311 is sent from the setting changing board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Is entered in. Each time a person who changes the setting of the set value presses the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a sets the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1311. When the value reaches the set value 6 which is the maximum value, the value is increased by 1 and the value is returned to the set value 1 which is the initial value, the value is increased by 1 again, and the set value is displayed on the setting display 1310 g.

When determining the set value, the person who changes the setting of the set value rotates the setting key cylinder 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, the setting key with the setting key switch 1311a turned on). Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return from the cylinder rotation position to the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), and then turn it off. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction). This determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set value determined by changing the setting in the specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

The setting key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, the initial position (that is, the setting key) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The ON signal of the enter key may be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 when the switch 1311a is returned to the setting key cylinder rotation position). After pressing the pressing operation part of the setting switching button 1311b to display the set value on the setting display 1310g, the setting value is determined by simply turning off the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key is pulled out from the setting key cylinder as it is. It becomes possible to improve workability.

The person who changes the setting of the set value should return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the enter key is turned on to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches from the state of displaying the set value to the setting display 1310g to the state of not displaying it, and switches from the state of turning on the setting change permission lamp 1311c to the state of turning off the setting value.

A person who changes the setting of the set value pulls out the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and changes the setting of the set value. To complete.

When confirming and displaying the currently set value, the outer frame 2 is used when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure that causes a momentary power failure). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn the first ON. It is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined setting value display permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the operation. That is, the person who actually confirms and displays the currently set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (a state in which power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). , The work of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first operation. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the ON operation of.

The person who confirms and displays the currently set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (a state in which power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure), and then the outer frame 2 The main body frame 4 is opened, and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. As a result, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a has the current set value stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (the set value 1 to the set value 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned on. Of these, the set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310 g. At this time, the state in which the setting change permission lamp 1311c is turned off is maintained, and even if a person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value presses the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b, this pressing operation is performed. Correspondingly, the set value is not changed at all, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310 g is not changed either.

When the person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value completes the confirmation of the currently set setting value, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the setting key is turned on. Turn the setting key switch 1311a 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it to the turning position of the setting key cylinder) to turn it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1310a switches from a state in which the set value is displayed to the state in which the set value is not displayed on the setting display 1310 g.

The person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value pulls out the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and currently sets. Complete the work of confirming and displaying the set values.

As described above, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is the power when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). At the time of power recovery at the time of recovery, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder moves clockwise. While it is necessary that the setting key is turned on by the first ON operation after being rotated 60 degrees, the predetermined set value display permission condition is the pachinko machine as described above. The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a is set after the power is restored when the power of 1 is turned on or after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs when a power failure occurs momentarily). It is necessary that the setting key is turned on by inserting the setting key into the insertion port of the key cylinder and rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. As described above, the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the preset setting value display permission condition are such that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted. There is a common requirement that the setting key is turned on by inserting the setting key into the switch, rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and operating the first ON operation, and the setting key is set in advance. The difference is that the set value change permission condition requires "at the time of power recovery", whereas the predetermined set value display permission condition requires "after power recovery".

Here, briefly explaining the set value, the "set value" is a probability for determining whether or not it is a big hit by lottery, a probability for determining whether or not it is a small hit by lottery, and usually from the time of probability change. It is possible to change the probability for determining the lottery when shifting to time, the distribution rate to the area that is advantageous to the player, etc., which is advantageous to the player (that is, to be acquired by the player). The probability (degree of advantage) that can increase the number of game balls B that can be played is preset. In the present embodiment, a set value 1, a set value 2, a set value 3, a set value 4, a set value 5, and a set value 6 are prepared in advance as set values, and the set value 1 to the set value 6 The probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is a jackpot determination table in which the ratio of the jackpot determination values indicating that the jackpot has been won is defined, and various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values. The jackpot symbol determination table that defines the ratio of the judgment value of the decision, the small hit judgment table that defines the percentage of the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit was won, and the percentage of the judgment value of the determination of the small hit symbol are specified. It is used to select the small hit symbol determination table to be performed, the normal transition determination table that defines the ratio of the determination value of the transition decision from the probability change to the normal time, etc.), or to use various distribution rates associated with the set value. Various tables (for example, a distribution table in which the distribution time is specified, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) are selected. In various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values, various determination values are assigned at a predetermined ratio. It should be noted that the various tables used in the various lottery determinations are set so that at least some values are different from each other, and the various tables used in the various distribution rates are set so that at least some values are different from each other. Some have different values based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of one electrical drive source and the table that corresponds to the block that manages the drive of another electrical drive source. Some are set to. Further, as the above-mentioned setting values, six setting values (integers) in the range from the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 are set, but the setting values may be smaller than this and may be in the larger range. It may be a thing. For example, it may be four setting values (integers) in the range of setting values 1 to 4, or eight setting values (integers) in the range of setting values 1 to 8.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays the set value, but also checks the contents of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a at the time of power recovery to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an error, and if the main control side power off processing is not completed normally when the power is turned off, there is an error (or trust) in the contents stored in the RAM built in the unit. An error message is displayed to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

Next, the base monitor 1310h will be briefly described. The base monitor 1310h is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 among the game balls B launched in the game area 5a. The number of balls of the game ball B is displayed. Of the game balls B launched into the game area 5a, the game balls B collected by the out port 1008 are detected by the out sensor 664 (see FIG. 173 and the like), and this detection signal is transmitted via the panel relay board 1710. It is input to the main control MPU 1310a.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls B collected by the out port 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. It has become.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a was set from the initial position. The setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range up to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the key is turned on may be used. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a'is counterclockwise so as to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a'can be turned on by turning the setting key switch 1311a'by 60 degrees in the direction and turning it off, and the signal of this decision key ON is sent from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. (The mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be described as "variation example (1) of the enter key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the setting change board 1311 has a pressing operation unit. A decision key button may be provided. In this case, the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and corresponds to the press operation portion of the enter key button. The wire intrusion prevention part covers the opening so that the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310 cannot be modified by invading the wire or the like through the "gap" formed in the opening. The structure will be molded. When the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed. It can be determined that the enter key is not ON when the pressing operation is not performed.

The position where the decision key button is arranged on the setting change board 1311 may be near the setting key switch 1311a or near the setting switching button 1311b. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, a sticker on which the name of each button is printed at the position corresponding to the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b so that the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this sticker). Further, so that the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b are not confused, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation portion of either the enter key button or the setting switching button 1311b (to press the pressing operation portion). It is necessary to open the cover.), The color of the pressing operation unit may be different, or the outer shape of the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b or the pressing operation may be adopted. A switch having a different shape of the portion may be adopted, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation portion may be adopted as the enter key button. Other types of switches that do not have a push operation unit as a decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. The switch can be mentioned. Further, when the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b are provided on the setting change board 1311, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the setting switching button 1311b are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The setting change board 1311 is formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other), and the connection to the connector SMCN terminal of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also separated. In the main control board 1310 as well, the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the enter key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted should not be brought close to each other ( It is formed (separated from each other). Further, when the decision key button is provided on the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a may be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. A possible setting key switch 1311a'may be used (the mode of the decision key button (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (2)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the palm of the handle 195 in the handle unit 180 Detection from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the finger is touching, and detection from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will. A signal may be branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and the presence or absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on these detection signals. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the palm or finger is touching the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, while the palm or finger is on the handle 195. When not touching, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON, and / or when the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194, the decision key is ON. On the other hand, when the launch of the game ball B is not forcibly stopped, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON (even if the mode of the handle touch sensor (including the mode of the single-shot button operation sensor) is included. Good) may be described as "a modified example of the enter key (3)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead of this, the launch control unit of the payout control board 633 described later A firing reference pulse is branched from the firing timing control circuit provided in 633b at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and a determination key is input based on these firing reference pulses. The presence or absence of ON may be determined. The firing reference pulse is a reference pulse in which 100 game balls B can be launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and is generated based on a clock signal from the oscillation circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the emission reference pulse from the payout control board 633 is input, while it is determined that the determination key is not ON when the emission reference pulse is not input. (The mode of the emission reference pulse may be described as "variation example (4) of the determination key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the movement of the player sitting on the opposite side of the pachinko machine 1 was detected. When a distance measuring sensor capable of capable is provided on the game board 5, and the detection signal from the distance measuring sensor is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the relay board, the detection signal from the distance measuring sensor is transmitted. It may be branched on the relay board and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and it may be determined whether or not the determination key is ON based on this detection signal. In the distance measuring sensor, the light emitted by the light emitting unit passes through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and is reflected on the player's arm or hand within a predetermined distance dimension. The reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by the light receiving unit, so that the movement of the player can be detected. In this case, when the detection signal from the distance measuring sensor is input via the relay board, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is an operation based on the detection signal, and when it is determined that there is an operation, the enter key is turned on. While it can be determined that there is, when it is determined that there is no operation, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON (the mode of the distance measuring sensor may be described as "a modification of the determination key (5)"). ..

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform a second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on, and the signal for turning on the decision key is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is set to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder with the key turned on to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) 60 degrees counterclockwise. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by the rotation operation and the OFF operation, and the initial position (that is, the setting) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is set. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off to return it to the setting key cylinder rotation position). This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information for transmitting the setting key ON, the enter key ON, and OFF is sent to the outside as serial information. A serial output circuit capable of serial output may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. Thereby, the security for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a can be improved. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this serial output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1311, but may be provided on the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 633 instead. .. When the serial information serially output from the serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a uses the received serial information to set key ON, enter key ON, and It is possible to determine which of the OFFs is to be transmitted (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be described as "a modification of the decision key (6)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform a second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on, and the signal for turning on the decision key is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is set to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder with the key turned on to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) 60 degrees counterclockwise. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by the rotation operation and the OFF operation, and the initial position (that is, the setting) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is set. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off to return it to the setting key cylinder rotation position). This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information transmitting the setting key ON, the enter key ON, and OFF was sent to the outside as a pulse signal. A pulse output circuit capable of outputting may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. Thereby, the security for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a can be improved. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this pulse output circuit is provided in the setting change board 1311, but may be provided in the main control board 1310 or in the payout control board 633 instead. .. For the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit, for example, the pulse width is set to 1 ms when the information conveys the setting key ON, and the pulse width is set to 3 ms when the information conveys the enter key ON. If the information conveys OFF, the pulse width is set to 5 ms. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a uses the input pulse signal to set the setting key ON and the enter key ON. It is possible to determine which of the above and OFF is the information to be transmitted (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having the pulse output circuit may be described as "a modification of the decision key (7)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. The setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is set to return to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder with the key turned on 60 degrees counterclockwise. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by the rotation operation and the OFF operation, and the initial position (that is, the setting) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is set. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the key switch 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off to return it to the setting key cylinder rotation position). This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the voltage level of the setting key ON signal, the voltage level of the enter key ON signal, and OFF The voltage level of the signal is set on the main control board 1310 by using an intermediate potential (for example, a potential of 2V to 3V from zero V to 5V) between the boards extending from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. By providing a comparator circuit and inputting the comparison result by the comparator circuit to the main control MPU 1310a, the main control MPU 1310a turns on / off the setting key ON signal, turns on / off the enter key ON signal, and turns off the signal. You may judge ON / OFF of. Thereby, the security for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a can be improved (the mode of the setting key switch using the intermediate potential may be described as "variation example (8) of the determination key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation unit. A decision key button may be provided. In this case, the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the enter key button, and corresponds to the press operation portion of the enter key button. A structure in which a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body with respect to the opening so that the payout control board 633 cannot be modified by invading the wire or the like through the "gap" formed in the opening. Become. When the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed. It can be determined that the enter key is not ON when the pressing operation is not performed.

The position where the decision key button is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be near the error release switch having the pressing operation unit described later. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, a sticker on which the name of each button is printed is affixed at a position corresponding to the enter key button and the error release switch so that the enter key button and the error release switch are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this sticker). Also, to avoid confusion between the enter key button and the error release switch, a button with a cover that covers one of the enter key button and the error release switch (a cover for pressing the press operation unit). It is necessary to open the button.), The color of the push operation unit may be different, or the outer shape of the enter key button and the error release switch or the shape of the pressure operation unit. A different type of switch may be used, or another type of switch that does not have a push operation unit may be used as the enter key button. Other types of switches that do not have a push operation unit as a decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. The switch can be mentioned. Further, when the payout control board 633 is provided with the decision key button and the error release switch, the payout is performed as a route between the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the error release switch in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The control board 633 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed so as to be separated. Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the enter key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the error release switch is transmitted should not be close to each other (separated from each other). ) Is formed. Further, when the decision key button is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a may be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. A possible setting key switch 1311a'may be used (the mode of the decision key button (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (9)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation unit. The signal from the error release switch is branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and it is determined whether or not the enter key is ON based on this signal. May be good. As described above, the error release switch is for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, and the system of the pachinko machine 1 is started up after the power is restored (turned on when the power of various control boards is turned on). When the time processing is completed and the interrupt processing is being performed) and no error has occurred in the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation unit of the error release switch is not operated at all. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation unit of the error release switch is operated based on the signal from the error release switch, while the main control MPU 1310a is based on the signal from the error release switch. When the pressing operation unit of the error release switch is not operated, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the decision key ON (the mode of the error release switch may be described as "a modification of the decision key (10)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation unit. The logic of the signal from the error release switch is monitored by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later to create a command, and the payout control unit power-on process described later is performed. The command created in the command transmission process may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receiving this command may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. As described above, the error release switch is for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, and the system of the pachinko machine 1 is started up after the power is restored (turned on when the power of various control boards is turned on). When the time processing is completed and the interrupt processing is being performed) and no error has occurred in the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation unit of the error release switch is not operated at all. Therefore, in the main control MPU 1310a, the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is operated based on the signal from the error release switch in the frame command receiving process in the main control timer interrupt process described later, and conveys that fact. When the command is received, it can be determined that the enter key is ON, while the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is not operated based on the signal from the error release switch and receives a command to that effect. When this is done, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the decision key ON (Aspect 2 of the error release switch may be described as "a modification of the decision key (11)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the initial position (that is, the setting key switch) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is set. Turn the 1311a OFF by 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the setting key cylinder rotation position), and then rotate it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it back to the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on for the decision key, and the signal for turning on the decision key is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, and is branched and paid out on the payout control board 633. The presence or absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on an operation signal input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a. As will be described later, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated at the time of power recovery (to be exact, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), When the setting is changed so that the setting value can be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Be sure to clear the area excluding the specific area out of all the areas of.). Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in the RAM clear switch 1310f. Can be diverted as the determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a turns on the determination key when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. On the other hand, it is determined that the determination key is not ON when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. Can be done. As a result, security can be improved with respect to whether or not the decision key is ON.

The pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the pressing operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f is performed. The wire intrusion prevention part covers the opening so that the payout control board 633 cannot be modified by invading the wire or the like through the "gap" formed in the portion and the opening corresponding to the portion. It becomes a structure that is molded into.

The position where the RAM clear switch 1310f is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be near the error release switch having the pressing operation unit described later. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, there is a sticker on which the name of each button is printed at the position corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch are not confused. It is affixed (the name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this sticker). Further, so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch are not confused, a button with a cover that covers the pressing operation portion of either the RAM clear switch 1310f or the error canceling switch (to press the pressing operation portion). It is necessary to open the cover.), The color of the pressing operation unit may be different, or the outer shape of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch or the pressing operation may be adopted. A switch having a different shape may be adopted, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation portion may be adopted as the RAM clear switch 1310f. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as the RAM clear switch 1310f include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. Various switches can be mentioned. Further, when the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch are provided on the payout control board 633, the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern to the error release switch are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The payout control board 633 is formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other), and the connection to the connector terminal of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed separately. Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern in which the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the error release switch is transmitted should not be brought close to each other (mutually). It is formed (separately). When the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. (The mode of the RAM clear switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (12)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the initial position (that is, the setting key switch) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is set. Turn the 1311a off by 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the setting key cylinder rotation position), and then rotate it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it back to the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on as the decision key, and the signal for turning on the decision key is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, and the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 to the port input of the payout control unit power-on processing described later. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the command by monitoring in the processing and creating a command, transmitting the command created in the command transmission processing of the payout control unit power-on processing described later to the main control board 1310. It may be determined whether or not the enter key is ON. As will be described later, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated at the time of power recovery (to be exact, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), When the setting is changed so that the setting value can be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Be sure to clear the area excluding the specific area out of all the areas of.). Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in the RAM clear switch 1310f. Can be diverted as a decision key, and the main control MPU 1310a is a RAM clear switch 1310f based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process described later. When the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of is being operated and receives a command to that effect, it can be determined that the decision key is ON, while the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 can be used. When the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated based on the operation signal of the above and receives a command to convey that fact, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. Thereby, the security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the decision key ON (the aspect 2 of the RAM clear switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included)) is described as "a modification of the decision key (13). May be described).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the out-port left sensor 3032 and the out-port right sensor 3033 are input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) to turn it off, and then counterclockwise. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees toward it), and the signal of this decision key ON is the main control of the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. Although it was supposed to be input to the MPU 1310a, instead of this, the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 pass through (via) the payout control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 The presence or absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on the detection signals from the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033, which are input to the main control MPU 1310a. As described above, the game ball B launched into the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a. As described above, the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 is detected by the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor 3033. Therefore, in the main control MPU 1310a, the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch, and the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor Based on the detection signal from 3033, it can be determined that the determination key is ON when the out port 1008 collects the game ball B. On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is not opened (that is, closed) with respect to the main body frame 4, and / or based on the detection signal with the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor 3033, both are performed. When the out port 1008 has not collected the game ball B, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (out port switch). (The aspect of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the enter key (14)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B to the out port 1008 in order to turn on the determination key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the out-port left sensor 3032 and the out-port right sensor 3033 are input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) to turn it off, and then counterclockwise. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees toward it), and the signal of this decision key ON is the main control of the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. Although it was supposed to be input to the MPU 1310a, instead of this, the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 transfers the logic of the detection signals from the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 to the payout control unit power supply described later. A command is created by monitoring in the port input process of the on-time process, and the command created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later is transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control board that receives this command is sent. The main control MPU 1310a of 1310 may determine whether or not the determination key is ON. As described above, the game ball B launched into the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a. The game ball B collected by the out port 1008 is detected by the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 as described above. Therefore, in the main control MPU 1310a, the game ball B is collected by the out port 1008 based on the detection signal from the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor 3033 in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process described later. When the payout control MPU determines and receives a command to convey that fact, it can be determined that the decision key is ON, while the payout control MPU determines that the game ball B has not been collected by the out port 1008. When a command to that effect is received, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (out port switch). Aspect 2 (aspect of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (15)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B to the out port 1008 in order to turn on the determination key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the full tank detection sensor 154 and the ball cut detection sensor The detection signal from 574 or the payout detection sensor 591 is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, and is branched at the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the decision key is ON based on the input and these detection signals, or the logic of the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball cut detection sensor 574, or the payout detection sensor 591. The payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 monitors and creates a command in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on processing described later, and creates a command in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that transmits to the main control board 1310 and receives this command may determine whether or not the decision key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (of the payout unit). A mode (a mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (16)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a was released from the main body frame release switch. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, it can be determined that the decision key is ON, while the main body frame 4 remains open with respect to the outer frame 2. When is maintained, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (main body frame open). The mode of the switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the enter key (17)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to turn on the decision key, and after turning on the decision key, the outer frame 2 is closed. It is necessary to open the main body frame 4 again, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 again with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a was released from the door frame open switch. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, it can be determined that the decision key is ON, while the door frame 3 remains closed with respect to the main body frame 4. When is maintained, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (door frame open). The mode of the switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the enter key (17)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the decision key, and after turning on the decision key, with respect to the main body frame 4. It is necessary to close the door frame 3 again, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key cylinder provided in the setting change board 1311 is set to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on. Turn the key switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off, and then rotate it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the position of rotation. The decision key can be turned ON, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, this setting key switch 1311a is used as the main control board. It may be prepared for 1310 (the mode of the setting key switch may be described as "a modification of the decision key (18)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is turned on is turned on. Turn the key switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off, and then rotate it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the second ON operation. The decision key can be turned ON, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, this setting key switch 1311a is used as the main control board. In preparation for 1310, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder to the initial position and turning it off. By inputting the signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the OFF signal is input, while the OFF signal is input. If not, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (setting key switch 1311a'). Aspect 2 (aspect of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (19)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control board 1310 has a pressing operation unit. A decision key button may be provided. In this case, the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and corresponds to the press operation portion of the enter key button. A structure in which a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body with respect to the opening so that the main control board 1310 cannot be modified by invading the wire or the like through the "gap" formed in the opening. Become. When the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed. It can be determined that the enter key is not ON when the pressing operation is not performed.

The position where the decision key button is arranged on the main control board 1310 may be near the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, a sticker on which the name of each button is printed at the position corresponding to the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so that the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this sticker). Further, so that the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused, a button with a cover covering one of the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f (to press the push operation unit). It is necessary to open the cover), or a different color of the pressing operation unit may be adopted, or the outer shape of the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f or the pressing operation. A switch having a different shape of the portion may be adopted, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation portion may be adopted as the enter key button. Other types of switches that do not have a push operation unit as a decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. The switch can be mentioned. Further, when the decision key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are provided on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The main control board 1310 is formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other). Further, when the decision key button is provided on the main control board 1310, the setting key switch 1311a may be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. A possible setting key switch 1311a'may be used (aspect 2 of the decision key button (aspect of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (20)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the RAM clear switch to which the main control MPU 1310a is input. The presence or absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on the operation signal from 1310f. As will be described later, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated at the time of power recovery (to be exact, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), When the setting is changed so that the setting value can be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Be sure to clear the area excluding the specific area out of all the areas of.). Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in the RAM clear switch 1310f. Can be diverted as the decision key, and the main control MPU 1310a determines that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the other hand, based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed. As a result, security can be improved with respect to whether or not the decision key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (RAM clear switch). Aspect 3 (aspect of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (21)"). The period during which the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed is limited to the time when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is a payout control board 633, as will be described later. Since it is input to the payout control MPU, when the RAM clear switch 1310f is configured to also have the function of the error canceling switch described later, the payout control board 633 does not need the error canceling switch.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, a normal winning opening provided on the game board 5 2003 ordinary winning opening sensor 2401, various winning opening sensors (for example, second starting opening sensor 2402, large winning opening sensor 2403, accessory winning opening sensor 2513, general winning opening sensor 3001, first starting opening sensor 3002) The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signals from the out sensor 664 of the main body frame 4 are input may determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (various sensors, etc.). (The aspect of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the enter key (22)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value may open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B to the normal winning opening 2003 in order to turn on the decision key. It is necessary to send the game ball B to the winning opening or the game ball B to the out opening 1008.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a was used for the stepping motor, DC motor, and so on. The operation of the movable body (accessory) is controlled by controlling the drive of an electric drive source such as a solenoid, and the movable body (accessory) is controlled based on the detection signal from the optical sensor (photo sensor, ranging sensor, etc.). When determining the original position, the operating position, or the like, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on the detection signal from the optical sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (optical combination). The mode of the object sensor (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (23)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the decision key, and the optical sensor is in the original position of the movable body (accessory). It is necessary to move the movable body (accessory) so as to detect the operating position and the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, an illegal magnetometer in the game area 5a was detected. The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010 is input may determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (of the magnetic sensor). A mode (a mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (24)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to bring the magnet closer from the front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front of the game board 5 in order to turn on the determination key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the pachinko machine 1 is shaken or hit. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 is vibrated to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 and enter various winning openings and gates provided in the game board 5. When the vibration sensor 3003 for detecting fraudulent activity to make a ball is provided on the game board 5, the main control MPU 1310a determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor 3003, and the detection signal from the vibration sensor 3003. The presence or absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (vibration sensor). A mode (a mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (25)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn on the determination key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the pachinko machine 1 was irradiated with radio waves to play a game. The game board 5 and the payout device 580 are provided with radio sensors for detecting fraudulent acts in which the various sensors of the winning openings provided on the board 5 and the various sensors provided in the payout device 580 malfunction to illegally acquire the game ball B. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a may determine the presence / absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor, and may determine the presence / absence of the determination key ON based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (of the radio wave sensor). A mode (a mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (26)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to irradiate the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves in order to turn on the determination key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead of this, the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 350 The detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 373 that detects the pressing operation of the above, and the detection signal from the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the contact of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 350 are input to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 may be branched and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (effect operation button). A mode of the unit (a mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (27)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are housed in the internal space of the main control board box 1320 composed of the cover body and the base body, but the setting change board 1311 is separated. It may be housed in the body setting change board box and arranged around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. In the main control board box 1320, the cover body and the base body are crimped by a one-way screw or the like in the crimped portion. This caulking part is a sealing mechanism and is provided with a plurality of parts. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like in the caulking portion using one sealing mechanism. Next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, The sealing mechanism needs to be destroyed. That is, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Such a structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, although the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the enter key button are exposed through the openings formed in the cover body of the corresponding main control board box 1320. , The setting change board 1311 can be modified by invading a wire or the like through the "gap" formed in the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the opening corresponding to the pressing operation portion of the enter key button. The structure is such that a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body with respect to the opening so as not to be possible. When the structure of the setting change board box is different from the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above and is configured so that the cover body can be opened or closed from the base body, the structure of the base body is changed. A setting change board cover body open / close switch capable of detecting the opening of the cover body may be provided. In this case, the detection signal from the open / close switch for the setting change board cover may be directly input to the main control board 1310, or (indirectly) input to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. It may be configured to be. The case where the cover body is released from the base body based on the detection signal from the open / close switch for the setting change board cover body can be included in the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition (setting change board box). The embodiment may be described as "a modified example of the determination key (28)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 are configured to be connected, and the setting key switch 1311a is set in order to prevent unauthorized modification. A wiring pattern in which a key ON signal is transmitted, a wiring pattern in which a decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, a wiring pattern in which an OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and a setting switching button 1311b. As a routing with the wiring pattern in which the signal from is transmitted, the setting change board 1311 is formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other), and the terminal (main control) of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311. The connection to the connector MSCN terminal of the board 1310 is also formed separately, and the main control board 1310 also has a wiring pattern in which various signals from the setting key switch 1311a are transmitted (that is, the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a). Signal is transmitted, the wiring pattern in which the decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern in which the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted) and the signal from the setting switching button 1311b. Was formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other) with the wiring pattern to be transmitted, but the wiring pattern to which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted and the setting key switch Regarding the wiring pattern in which the determination key ON signal of 1311a is transmitted, and one of the wiring patterns, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the other connector provided on the setting change board 1311 separately are used. , The connector of the main control board 1310 may be connected to another connector provided on the main control board 1310 (connection between boards) separately from the MSCN, and the other connector provided on the setting change board 1311 and the main control board may be connected. The other connector provided in 1310 may be electrically connected via a harness (the mode of routing the wiring pattern may be described as "a modification of the determination key (29)").

Further, the mode in which the determination key is appropriately selected and combined from the above-described modification keys (1) to (29) may be adopted. May be described).

Further, in the above-mentioned set values, in addition to the probability for determining whether or not a big hit is a lottery and the probability for determining whether or not a small hit is a lottery, the lottery is determined when shifting from the probability change to the normal time. It is possible to change the probability of the above, the distribution rate to the area that is advantageous to the player, and the like, which is advantageous to the player (that is, to increase the number of game balls B that the player can acquire). Probability (degree of advantage) is set in advance. In the present embodiment, a set value 1, a set value 2, a set value 3, a set value 4, a set value 5, and a set value 6 are prepared in advance as set values, and the set value 1 to the set value 6 The probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player is set in advance. By the way, although the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of set values from the set value 1 to the set value 6, the other pachinko machines have a probability (degree of advantage) of being advantageous to the player. In some cases, there is a single preset value. That is, there are game specifications such as the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment in which the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player exists as a plurality of set values in advance and the setting needs to be changed, and the player is advantageous. There is a game specification in which only a single setting value has a probability (advantage) in advance and no setting change is required. However, if the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is changed according to such game specifications and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is changed or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are used. Will depend on the game specifications, and therefore will have a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 having similar or different hardware configurations depending on the game specifications. Therefore, it is required that the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be used in common without depending on the game specifications, that is, without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

For example, in a game specification in which only a single set value exists in advance and the setting value does not need to be changed at all, the probability (advantage degree) that is advantageous to the player is the probability (advantage degree) that the set value is advantageous to the player. Since there is no need to use the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value 6 are assigned as the following contents by design change by software. Can be done.

For example, after the main control MPU 1310a clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (an area excluding a specific area among all the areas of the RAM), a plurality of actual machine confirmation operation patterns can be set (after the RAM is cleared). It can be used as a set value (which can give variation to the starting method of the pachinko machine 1). In this case, for the operation of the movable body (accessory) controlled by the main control MPU1310a and the lighting of the light emitting body such as a lamp or LED, the setting value 1 is set to "all operations (movable body (role)). Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1 that specifies "operation of object), lighting of light emitting body)" is assigned, and actual machine confirmation operation pattern 2 that specifies "operation of movable body (accessory)" is assigned and set as setting value 2. The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that specifies "lighting of the light emitting body" is assigned as the value 3, and the "detailed operation of the movable body (accessory) (variable movement speed, movement over the entire operating area, etc.) is assigned as the setting value 4. The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 that specifies "check for interference with the structure and other movable bodies (roles), operation order with other movable bodies (roles), etc.)" is assigned, and the set value 5 is " An actual machine confirmation operation pattern 5 for specifying "lighting of the light emitting body in units of one port of the light emitting body (lighting of the light emitting body in a predetermined output port unit (that is, for each output port) of the main control MPU 1310a)" is assigned, and " An actual machine confirmation operation pattern 6 that specifies "no operation" is assigned (the mode of changing the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM may be described as "variation example (1) by common hardware configuration"). The main control MPU 1310a operates a movable body (accessory) and lights a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED by repeating the main control side timer interrupt process described later in the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a (described as the setting change completion command in FIG. 178) is peripherally controlled by the contents (actual machine confirmation operation pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. It is possible to operate the movable body (accessory) controlled by the substrate 1510 and to light the light emitting body. Depending on the mode of changing the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM, the method of starting the pachinko machine 1 after clearing the RAM can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of times from the end of the fluctuation of the symbol to the demonstration (demo production performed in the player waiting state). In this case, the time setting pattern 1 that specifies "10 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 1, the time setting pattern 2 that specifies "15 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 2, and "20 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 3. The time setting pattern 3 for specifying "" is assigned, the time setting pattern 4 for specifying "25 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 4, and the time setting pattern 5 for specifying "30 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 5. A time setting pattern 6 that specifies "35 seconds" as the setting value 6 is assigned (a modification of the time from the end of the symbol change to the player waiting state is set to "Modification example by common hardware configuration (2). ) ”). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of changing the time from the end of the symbol change to the player waiting state, the time from the end of the symbol change to the demonstration can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of contents of a demonstration (demo effect performed in a player waiting state) performed after the end of the change of the symbol. In this case, the demo effect setting pattern 1 that specifies "comical effect" is assigned as the setting value 1, and the demo effect setting pattern 1 that specifies "comical effect, motion effect of the movable body (character)" is assigned as the setting value 2. 2 is assigned, and a demo effect setting pattern 3 that specifies "serious effect" as a setting value 3 is assigned, and a demo effect setting pattern 3 that specifies "serial effect, motion effect of a movable body (character)" as a setting value 4. 4 is assigned, and a demo production setting pattern 5 that specifies "historical drama-style production" as a setting value 5 is assigned, and a demo production setting that specifies "historical drama-style production, movable body (role)" as a setting value 6. Pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of setting the change of the content of the demo effect may be described as "variation example (3) by common hardware configuration"). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can perform a demonstration with a demo effect (demo effect setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of changing the content of the demo effect, it is possible to give variation to the content of the demo effect performed after the end of the change of the symbol.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of default volumes adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. By rotating the volume control switch, the volume can be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, the volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "volume 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, the volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "volume 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, and the "volume 3" is assigned as the setting value 3. The volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "volume 5" is assigned, the volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, and the volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "volume 5" is assigned as the setting value 5. A volume setting pattern 6 for designating "volume 6" is assigned as the setting value 6 (the mode of setting the default volume change may be described as "variation example (4) by common hardware configuration"). The volume is set to increase from the set value 1 to the set value 6. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is set to the default volume with a volume (volume setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. In addition, the default volume of "volume 1" assigned to the setting value 1 is moved in the direction in which the volume adjustment switch is lowered (moved in the direction opposite to the direction in which the volume is increased), and the movement is completed to the minimum volume side end. When the volume is adjusted to the minimum side volume, the sound may be muted, or the volume may be such that the sound can be recognized when the player stops in front of the pachinko machine. In addition, the default volume of "volume 6" assigned to the setting value 6 is moved in the direction of increasing the volume (moved in the direction opposite to the direction of decreasing the volume), and the movement is completed to the end on the maximum volume side. When the volume is adjusted to the maximum side volume, the volume may be set to the maximum volume or may be set to a predetermined ratio (for example, 85%) of the maximum volume. Depending on the mode of changing the default volume, the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of volume of error notification sound in error notification such as various defects, gotos, and errors. Various error notification sounds cannot be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, those that are not dependent on it), and a pachinko machine that emits an error notification sound at the maximum volume is used in the game hall. Although it is easy for a staff member such as a clerk to notice, it may be jarring to a player who is playing a game with another pachinko machine. Therefore, a device capable of adjusting the volume of various error notification sounds is also required. In this case, the error notification volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification volume 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, and the error notification volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "error notification volume 2" is assigned as the setting value 2. , The error notification volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification volume 3" is assigned as the setting value 3, the error notification volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, and the setting value 5 is " The error notification volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification volume 5" is assigned, and the error notification volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)" is assigned as the setting value 6 (error notification volume volume). The mode of the change setting of the above may be described as "variation example (5) by common hardware configuration"). It should be noted that the set value 1 (the volume that does not mute and the error notification sound can be recognized when the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound is stopped) to the setting value 6 (the maximum volume and the maximum volume). The volume of the error notification sound is set to increase toward (the volume at which the error notification sound can be sufficiently recognized even if the distance from the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound is several meters). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a controls to emit an error notification sound at the volume of the error notification sound (error notification volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of changing the volume of the error notification sound, the volume of the error notification sound in the error notification can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value at which a plurality of default brightness of a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED can be set. The brightness of the light emitter to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a can be increased or decreased from the default brightness. In this case, the default brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "brightness 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, the default brightness setting pattern 2 that specifies "brightness 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, and the setting value 3 is " The default brightness setting pattern 3 that specifies "brightness 3" is assigned, the default brightness setting pattern 4 that specifies "brightness 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, and the default brightness setting pattern 4 that specifies "brightness 5" as the setting value 5 is assigned. 5 is assigned, and the default brightness setting pattern 6 that specifies "brightness 6" as the setting value 6 is assigned (the mode of setting the change of the default brightness may be described as "variation example (6) by common hardware configuration". is there). The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitting body by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt process described later for changing the default brightness, and lights, blinks, gradation points, etc. of the light emitting body. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is the target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. It is possible to adjust the brightness of the light emitting body to light, blink, gradation point, etc. of the light emitting body. Depending on the mode of changing the content of the default brightness, the default brightness of a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of brightness of a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED in error notification such as various defects, gotos, and errors. An error notification brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification brightness 1" is assigned as the setting value 1 to the lamp controlled by the main control MPU 1310a, and "error notification brightness 2" is assigned as the setting value 2. The specified error notification brightness setting pattern 2 is assigned, the error notification brightness setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification brightness 3" is assigned as the setting value 3, and the error notification that specifies "error notification brightness 4" as the setting value 4 is assigned. The brightness setting pattern 4 is assigned, and the error notification brightness setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification brightness 5" as the setting value 5 is assigned, and the error notification that specifies "error notification brightness 6 (maximum brightness)" as the setting value 6 is assigned. The brightness setting pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of setting the change of the brightness of the light emitter in the error notification may be described as "variation example (7) by common hardware configuration"). From the set value 1 (the brightness of the lamp is low, although it does not turn off, and the brightness of the lamp that can recognize the error notification when stopped in front of the pachinko machine), the lamp changes from the set value 6 (maximum brightness). The brightness is set to be high. The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitting body by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt process described later for changing the brightness of the light emitting body in the error notification, and lights, blinks, gradation points, etc. of the light emitting body. Do. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is the target that the peripheral control board 1510 controls based on the error notification brightness (error notification brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. It is possible to adjust the brightness of the light emitting body so that the light emitting body can be turned on, blinked, a gradation point, or the like. Depending on the mode of changing the brightness of the light emitting body in the error notification, the brightness of the light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED in the error notification can be varied.

Further, for the various setting values assigned to the above-mentioned modification examples (1) to (7) due to the common hardware configuration, the setting value display permission condition predetermined in the setting value confirmation display processing described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a is satisfied. Occasionally, it is displayed on the setting display 1310g, but it may always be displayed on the setting display 1310g from the time when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on to the time when the power is turned off (setting value display). Aspect may be described as "variation example (8) by common hardware configuration").

Further, any one of the above-mentioned modifications (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration may be appropriately selected and adopted in the above-mentioned modification key modification (30).

Further, the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition is applied to the outer frame 2 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, it was necessary that the setting key was turned on. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a is subjected to a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-on processing described later. Clear except for, and then proceed with the game by setting interrupt permission and so on. Further, when the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied when the pachinko machine 1 is restored to power, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on processing described later, and the main control built-in RAM Clear all areas except for specific areas, and then proceed with the game by setting interrupt permission and so on. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f, when the above-mentioned preset value change permission condition is satisfied when the pachinko machine 1 is restored to power, In either case, the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on processing described later, and then advances the game by setting interrupt permission and the like. It will be. Therefore, as the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored at the time of power recovery after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs), the outer frame 2 is The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. By doing so, in addition to the setting key being turned on, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f may be pressed (the case may be described as "a modification of a predetermined setting value change permission condition"). is there).

Further, the above-mentioned predetermined set value display permission condition is applied to the outer frame 2 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after the power is restored after the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, it was necessary that the setting key was turned on. When the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a sets and displays the current set value set in the set value confirmation display process performed as one process of the main control side timer interrupt process described later. Display on the vessel 1310 g. Further, as described above, in the RAM clear switch 1310f, the pressing operation unit needs to be pressed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the period of the pressing operation is limited. Therefore, as the above-mentioned predetermined set value display permission condition, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs), the outer frame 2 is set. The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. By doing so, in addition to the setting key being turned on, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f does not have to be pressed (when described as "a modification of a predetermined set value display permission condition"). There is). In this case, when the modification of the preset value display permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the set value confirmation display process as one of the main control side timer interrupt processes described later, but the main control side power supply described later. In the on-time processing, the game is advanced by performing the initial setting and the start setting of the built-in WDT before the initial setting and the start setting, and then performing the interrupt permission setting and the like. Note that the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt processing on the main control side timer because the interrupt permission setting has not yet been performed when the modified example of the preset value display permission condition is satisfied and the setting value confirmation display processing is performed. Instead, the detection signal from the main body frame open switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key are inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is initially set. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the setting key switch 1311a 60 degrees clockwise from the position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) and performing the first ON operation. The signal of the setting key ON from the setting key switch 1311a is read and is not stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the input information described later. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a opens the main body frame for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 when a modification of the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied and the set value confirmation display process is performed. The detection signal from the switch and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a are read.

By adopting both the above-mentioned modified example of the preset value change permission condition and the above-mentioned modified example of the preset value display permission condition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a at the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after (the momentary power failure that occurs). The pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed on the premise that the setting key is turned ON by rotating the key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and performing the first ON operation. Occasionally, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on processing described later to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then performs an interrupt permission setting or the like. While the game progresses, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a set value confirmation display process in the main control side power-on processing described later, and then performs a set value confirmation display process. The game progresses by setting the interruption permission. By adopting this aspect, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the progress of the game, the set value confirmation display process is never performed. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the progress of the game by setting the interrupt permission or the like, the current set value set is never displayed on the setting display 1310g. The main control MPU 1310a is collected by the out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4 via the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 in the ball number counting process of the main control side power-on processing described later. The number of balls of the game ball B is counted and output to the base monitor 1310h in the port output process of the main control side power-on processing described later, and the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 is calculated by the base monitor 1310h. Display on. Therefore, the current set value displayed by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the above-mentioned base monitor 1310h (may be described as "a modified example of how to use the base monitor"). .. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a displays the current set value set in the period from the power recovery to the start of the game progress by setting the interrupt permission or the like using the base monitor 1310h. When the game starts to proceed by setting the interrupt permission after the power is restored, the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 (out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4) is displayed. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the setting display 1310 g, which can contribute to cost reduction.

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value change permission condition, the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value display permission condition, and the above-mentioned modified example of the usage method of the base monitor is appropriately selected. It may be selected and adopted in the above-mentioned modification of the decision key (30).

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value change permission condition, the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value display permission condition, and the above-mentioned modified example of the usage method of the base monitor is appropriately selected. It may be selected and adopted in the above-mentioned modification examples (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 126 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 displays a status indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game status and a normal lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2003. It is provided with a normal symbol display composed of two LEDs and a normal hold display composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2003.

Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002. The first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs indicating the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004, and the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004. It is equipped with a second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs to display, and a second special holding number display consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. ing.

Further, the function display unit 1400 is a round composed of five LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of the large winning opening 2005 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "hit" or the like. It is equipped with a display.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holds, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 129 and 133. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 houses a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIGS. 173 and 174) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board 1510. It includes a peripheral control board box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like (see FIGS. 173 and 174, etc.). ).

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 15-inch full-color liquid crystal display device backed by a white LED. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

The effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 projecting from the left side surface to the left and one right fixing piece 1602 projecting from the right side surface to the right. The effect display device 1600 has a back box in two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of the 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it upward.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The table unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 138 to 140 and the like. FIG. 138 (a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 138 (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the back. FIG. 139 (a) is a perspective view of the start port unit, the side unit, the side upper left unit, and the attacker unit in the front unit, and FIG. 139 (b) is a start port unit, the side unit, and the side upper left unit in the front unit. , And a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 140 (a) is a perspective view of the center accessory in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 140 (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory in the front unit as viewed from the back.

The front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a part of the rear end protrudes into the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100. There is.

The table unit 2000 is capable of accepting the game ball B driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001 and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are always open. The first starting port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in the game area 5a, and the first start port 2002, which is installed at a further different position in the game area 5a and is always open so that the game ball B can be received. The normal winning opening 2003, the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B in the ordinary winning opening 2003. Alternatively, the first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 or the large winning opening 2005 and the first starting port that can accept the game ball B according to the second special lottery result. A prize opening 2006 that enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and the character The game ball B received in the winning opening 2006 is provided with a first V winning opening 2007 and a second V winning opening 2008 in which an opportunity for acceptance is given.

A plurality of (here, three) general winning openings 2001 are arranged below the center in the vertical direction in the game area 5a and on the left side with respect to the center in the horizontal direction. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The ordinary winning opening 2003 is arranged near the right end in the game area 5a and below the center in the vertical direction. The second starting port 2004 is located at the lower left of the normal winning port 2003. The grand prize opening 2005 is arranged between the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 at a height slightly lower than that of the first starting port 2002. The accessory winning opening 2006 is arranged above the normal winning opening 2003. The first V winning opening 2007 is arranged at a height between the accessory winning opening 2006 and the ordinary winning opening 2003. The second V winning opening 2008 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and directly above the first starting opening 2002.

The table unit 2000 is mounted in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and a front view left of the start port unit 2100. The side unit 2200, which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 and has three general winning openings 2001, and the side upper left unit 2300, which is mounted slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. , Attacker unit 2400 which is attached to the right side of the front view of the start port unit 2100 which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a and has the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005. And, above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, it is attached slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a, and is attached to the accessory winning opening 2006, the first V winning opening 2007, and the second V winning opening. It is provided with a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having 2008.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the start port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139. The start port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1008, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The start port unit 2100 has a first start port 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be accepted.

By attaching the start port unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first start port 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and is opened upward, so that the center accessory 2500 is in the left-right direction. Located just below the center.

The start port unit 2100 guides the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 to the rear of the game panel 1100 in a state of being attached to the game panel 1100, and guides the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 to the rear of the game panel 1100. It can be delivered to the discharge unit 3150.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the start port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes three general winning openings 2001 that are open so that the game ball B can be accepted at all times. The three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002. The two general winning openings 2001 on the right side are open upwards, and the general winning openings 2001 on the left side are open toward the upper left.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, the three general winning openings 2001 project forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side unit 2200 can guide the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back lower ball discharge unit 3150 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. ..

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
Next, the side upper left unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139. The side upper left unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to be in contact with the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The side upper left unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 inclined so as to be lowered to the right.

The side upper left unit 2300 is assembled on the game board 5, and the shelf portion 2301 projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the right side below the center accessory 2500 by the shelf portion 2301.

[5-8d. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139. The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a on the right side of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 from the front. The attacker unit 2400 includes a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 148 and the like).

The attacker unit 2400 is formed in a triangular shape in which the external shape in front view increases in height from the lower side toward the right. In this attacker unit 2400, the normal winning opening 2003 is always open upward in the upper right corner. The second starting port 2004 is provided in the lower left corner at a distance larger than one game ball B from the normal winning opening 2003, and is always open toward the front. The big winning opening 2005 is provided near the lower left lower end of the second starting opening 2004, and can be opened and closed forward.

In the attacker unit 2400, the normal winning opening 2003 is opened with a size slightly larger than that of the game ball B. Further, in the attacker unit 2400, the second starting port 2004 is opened with a size slightly larger than that of the game ball B, and the large winning opening 2005 is about 3 to 6 times the outer diameter of the game ball B in the left-right direction. It is open with the width of.

The attacker unit 2400 includes a normal winning opening sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the normal winning opening 2003, and a second starting port sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the second starting opening 2004. It includes a large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the winning opening 2005, and a magnetic sensor 2010 that detects illegal magnetism (see FIG. 173 and the like).

The attacker unit 2400 is a normal lottery in which the second start opening door 2411 capable of guiding the game ball B to the second start opening 2004 and the second start opening door 2411 are drawn by accepting the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2003. A starting port solenoid 2412 that opens and closes according to the result, a large winning opening door 2413 that can open and close the large winning opening 2005, and a game ball B that opens and closes the large winning opening door 2413 to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. It includes an attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by acceptance.

As shown in FIGS. 148, 149, 152, etc., the attacker unit 2400 is provided at the lower left of the normal winning opening 2003 and above the second starting port 2004, and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the left. The second starting port upper guide shelf 2421, the second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 provided on the left side of the second starting port upper guidance shelf 2421 and extending vertically, and the second starting port upper guidance shelf 2421. It is provided below the second starting port right standing wall portion 2423 extending downward from the right end, the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting port left standing wall portion 2422, and to the right of the grand prize opening 2005. It is equipped with a large winning opening guide shelf 2424, which is inclined so as to be lowered toward the left.

The guide shelf 2421 on the second starting port extends from a portion on the right side of the right end of the second starting port 2004, beyond the left end of the second starting port 2004, to the center of the second starting port 2004 and the grand prize opening 2005 in the left-right direction. It extends to the left to the vicinity. The guide shelf 2421 on the second starting port prevents the game ball B from being accepted into the second starting port 2004 from above.

The left standing wall portion 2422 of the second starting port is provided from the guidance shelf 2421 on the second starting port to the left at intervals so that one game ball B can pass through. The left standing wall portion 2422 of the second starting port extends vertically up and down from a position higher than the guidance shelf 2421 on the second starting port to a position lower than the guidance shelf 2421 on the second starting port and higher than the lower end of the second starting port 2004. ing. The upper end of the left standing wall portion 2422 of the second starting port is bent to the right.

The right standing wall portion 2423 of the second starting port extends vertically from the right end of the guide shelf 2421 on the second starting port to a height substantially the same as the lower end of the second starting port 2004. The right standing wall portion 2423 of the second starting port prevents the game ball B from being accepted from the right side into the second starting port 2004.

The large winning opening guide shelf 2424 has a height slightly lower than the lower end of the second starting port 2004, and one game ball B from the portion to the left of the left end of the second starting port 2004 and from the lower end of the second starting port 2004. At a height one minute below, the left and right directions extend to the left of the left standing wall portion 2422 of the second starting port and to substantially the same portion as the right end of the large winning opening 2005, so that the left end side is lower. As shown in the figure, the large winning opening guide shelf 2424 is curved so that the right end side rises upward, and the inclination angle becomes steeper toward the right.

Further, the attacker unit 2400 is open to the left on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, and guides the game ball B to a position lower than the large winning opening 2005 below the large winning opening guidance shelf 2424. The right passage 2430 is provided.

The attacker right passage 2430 is between the first opening 2431, which is long vertically and opens to the left above the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, and the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421. The second opening 2432 that opens upward to the left, the third opening 2433 that opens upward below the second starting port 2004, and the large winning opening guide shelf 2424 below. The fourth opening 2434, which is long vertically and opens to the left on the right side of the winning opening 2005, and the discharge port which communicates with the lower end of the fourth opening 2434 and opens to the left. It has 2435 and. In the attacker right passage 2430, the game ball B can enter the inside from the first opening 2431, the second opening 2432, the third opening 2433, and the fourth opening 2434, and the discharge port portion 2435. It is said that the game ball B can be released to the outside only from.

The attacker right passage 2430 is formed in a multi-step staircase shape with the left side lowered. More specifically, the attacker right passage 2430 extends downward from the portion above the ordinary winning opening 2003 on the right side of the ordinary winning opening 2003, and extends to the left at the portion at a height below the ordinary winning opening 2003. After bending and wrapping around to the lower side of the normal winning opening 2003, and bending downward with the second starting port right standing wall portion 2423 as a part of the left wall under the normal winning opening 2003, the large winning opening guidance shelf 2424 At a portion lower than the center, it bends to the left again and bends downward below the portion on the right side of the center of the large winning opening guide shelf 2424 to extend to the lower end of the attacker unit 2400.

The attacker right passage 2430 is provided with a plurality of ridges 2436 protruding into the passage and extending to the left and right at intervals in the vertical direction on the inner walls on the front side and the rear side of the portion extending vertically. The plurality of ridges 2436 are provided so that the heights of the front side and the rear side are staggered. When the game ball B comes into contact with the plurality of ridges 2436, the plurality of ridges 2436 can be guided downward in a zigzag manner while suppressing an increase in the downward speed of the game ball B.

The attacker right passage 2430 is on the right side of the grand prize opening 2005, and the plurality of protrusions 2436 provided at the portion where the fourth opening 2434 is long vertically is provided with an end portion on the fourth opening 2434 side. It has a protrusion 2437 that further protrudes into the passage (see FIG. 152 and the like). The presence of the protrusion 2437 can prevent the game ball B in the attacker right passage 2430 from being discharged from the fourth opening 2434 to the outside (to the left), and also passes through the fourth opening 2434. The game ball B can be entered into the attacker right passage 2430 from the outside. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 is released from the attacker unit 2400 into the game area 5a without having a chance to be accepted by the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005.

In addition, since the attacker right passage 2430 has a fourth opening 2434 opened vertically at a portion passing through the right side of the large winning opening 2005, a game ball released to the left from the large winning opening guide shelf 2424. The fourth game ball B, in which B abuts on a plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the large winning opening 2005 and flows above the large winning opening 2005 to the right of the large winning opening 2005. It can be received by the opening 2434 and entered into the attacker right passage 2430. Then, as described above, the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 is discharged to the outside only from the discharge port 2435 at the lower end, and is therefore guided to the right by the obstacle nail N above the grand prize opening 2005. The game ball B does not bounce back to the big winning opening 2005 side due to the presence of the attacker right passage 2430.

Therefore, when the game ball B released from the large winning opening guide shelf 2424 is guided to the right of the large winning opening 2005 by the obstacle nail N when the large winning opening 2005 is open, the attacker right passage 2430 It will not be accepted into the Grand Prize 2005. For this reason, even if a passage for the game ball B (here, the attacker right passage 2430) is provided adjacent to the large winning opening 2005, the wall of the passage (fourth opening 2434) is on the large winning opening 2005 side. It is possible to provide a passage for the game ball B adjacent to the large prize opening 2005 while suppressing excessive acceptance of the game ball B into the large prize opening 2005 without bouncing back to the large winning opening 2005. The pachinko machine 1 has a passage that has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines.

The second starting port door 2411 has a plate shape extending from the lower side of the second starting port 2004 to the vicinity of the left standing wall portion 2422 of the second starting port, and moves back and forth by the starting port solenoid 2412. The second starting port door 2411 is inclined so as to be lowered from the left end side toward the right second starting port 2004 side, and at the portion of the second starting port 2004, it is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear. doing. The second start door 2411 is retracted in the normal state (closed state). Therefore, the game ball B that has entered between the second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting port left standing wall portion 2422 falls onto the large winning opening guidance shelf 2424 without contacting the second starting port door 2411. Therefore, it does not enter (accept) the second starting port 2004.

On the other hand, in the normal hit state (open state), since the second start port door 2411 is advancing, the game ball B that has entered between the second start port upper guide shelf 2421 and the second start port left standing wall portion 2422. Is in contact with the second start port door 2411 and is guided to the second start port 2004 side by the second start port door 2411 to enter (accept) the second start port 2004. In this way, the second starting port 2004 opens and closes as the second starting port door 2411 moves forward and backward. The second start port door 2411 closes the second start port 2004 when the start port solenoid 2412 is OFF (when not energized), and closes the second start port 2004 when the start port solenoid 2412 is ON (when energized). Let it open.

The grand prize opening door 2413 is a rectangle long to the left and right, and is rotatably attached around an axis in the left and right direction with a long side on one side as an axis. The large winning opening door 2413 is in a state where the short side is upright by the attacker solenoid 2414, so that the large winning opening 2005 that opens toward the front can be closed, and the other long side is forward. By rotating it so as to move, the large winning opening 2005 can be opened and the game ball B can be accepted. The large winning opening door 2413 closes the large winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the large winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is ON (when energized).

In the attacker unit 2400, the game ball B received in the normal winning opening 2003 is detected by the normal winning opening sensor 2401 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200. Further, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2402 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200. Further, the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 is detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200.

Further, the attacker unit 2400 includes a second starting port decorative substrate 2451 for luminescent decoration of the second starting port 2004, a large winning opening decorative substrate 2452 for luminescent decoration of the large winning opening 2005, and an attacker right passage 2430. It is provided with a decorative substrate 2453 at the lower right of the table for luminescent decoration (see FIG. 174). The second starting port decorative substrate 2451 is provided behind the second starting port upper guide shelf 2421, and a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted. When a "normal hit" is drawn by accepting the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting port decorative substrate 2451 changes its light emitting mode to attract the player's interest to the second starting port 2004. I try to attract them.

The large winning opening decorative substrate 2452 is provided behind the large winning opening 2005, and a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the decorative substrate. When the big prize opening 2005 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern by "big hit game" or the like, the big winning opening decorative board 2452 is a game ball accepted by the big winning opening 2005 by making the big winning opening 2005 emit light and decorate. B is easy to see. The decorative substrate 2453 at the lower right of the table is provided below the second starting port 2004 and to the right of the winning opening 2005, behind the attacker right passage 2430, and a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted.

In a state where the attacker unit 2400 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, the normal winning opening 2003 is below the two exits of the guide passage group 2520 on the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 described later, and the first starting opening 2002 ( It is located at a height above the third distribution device 2550) of the center accessory 2500, and the second starting port 2004 is at the lower left of the normal winning opening 2003, and the third distribution device 2550 of the center accessory 2500 is located. It is located at a height slightly lower than the strikeout table 2554, and the large winning opening 2005 is located below the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. Further, in the state of being attached to the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in the parts above the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004 (the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421), and the large winning opening 2005. It is installed.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2500 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 to 147 and the like. FIG. 141 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the center accessory and the opening of the game panel. FIG. 142 (a) is a perspective view showing the relationship between the center accessory, the game panel plate, and the back left decorative body of the back unit, and FIG. 142 (b) is a front view of (a). FIG. 143 (a) is a plan view of the third sorting device in the center accessory, and FIG. 143 (b) is a perspective view of the third sorting device in the center accessory as viewed from the front. FIG. 144 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory third sorting device disassembled and viewed from the front upper part, and FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory third sorting device disassembled and viewed from the front lower part. It is a figure. FIG. 146 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball in the third distribution device in the center accessory. FIG. 147 (a) is an explanatory view showing the action of the protrusions provided on the second V winning opening and the third losing opening in the third sorting device of the center accessory, and FIG. 147 (b) is the second V winning opening. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the game ball when the protrusion is not provided in the 3rd loss opening.

The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and slightly above the center of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the light guide plate effect unit 3100 and the back front effect unit 3200 provided in the effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 through the frame. , The back front lower left effect unit 3300, the back front lower right effect unit 3400, the sub status indicator 3500, and the like can be visually recognized from the front.

The center accessory 2500 includes a frame-shaped center base 2501 that is attached to the game panel 1100. The center base 2501 has a frame-shaped front frame portion 2502 extending in a plate shape in the front-rear direction with a substantially constant thickness, and a flat plate shape extending in a direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front frame portion 2502. The flange portion 2503, the frame-shaped rear frame portion 2504 extending rearward in a plate shape with a substantially constant thickness from the rear surface of the flange portion 2503, and the flange portion 2503 penetrating the center accessory 2500. It is provided with a mounting hole 2505 for mounting on the panel 1100.

In the center base 2501 of the center accessory 2500, the flat plate-shaped flange portion 2503 extends in a direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction with respect to the frame-shaped front frame portion 2502 and the rear frame portion 2504 extending in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it can be reinforced by the flange portion 2503, and the front frame portion 2502 and the rear frame portion 2504 are not easily distorted. Further, in the center accessory 2500, at least the center base 2501 is transparently formed.

The front frame portion 2502 is formed in a frame shape by bending a smooth surface. The front frame portion 2502 has a front frame upper right portion 2502a that is linearly inclined so as to be lower from a position on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the frame toward the right. .. The upper right portion 2502a of the front frame portion 2502 has an upstream space portion 2506 having a predetermined size in which the game ball B can be distributed between the front frame portion 2502 and the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. It is what forms.

The rear frame portion 2504 has a plurality of rows of streak-shaped decorations extending in the front-rear direction on the inner peripheral surface side in the circumferential direction. This makes it difficult to see the opposite side through the rear frame portion 2504, and the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b mounted on the back left decorative board 3222 in the back front effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear. It can be made to appear as if it is emitting light by being irradiated with light from the like. The rear frame portion 2504 is formed along the inner circumference of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100, and by attaching the center accessory 2500 to the game panel 1100, the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 is on the player side. It can be made difficult to see from (front).

The center base 2501 has a mounting hole in which the rear frame portion 2504 is inserted from the front into the large central opening 1102 in the game panel 1100 and the rear surface of the flange portion 2503 is in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100. It is attached to the game panel 1100 by a machine screw screwed into the game panel 1100 through 2505. In a state where the center base 2501 (center accessory 2500) is attached to the game panel 1100, the front frame portion 2502 projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B driven into the game area 5a. However, it is not possible to enter the frame.

Further, when the center base 2501 is attached to the game panel 1100, the rear frame portion 2504 is positioned so as to cover the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 in the game panel 1100. The inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 is made difficult to see from the player side (front) due to the plurality of streaky decorations formed on the inner peripheral surface of the rear frame portion 2504.

At the frame-shaped left side portion of the center accessory 2500 (center base 2501), as shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, the flange portion 2503 extends inward of the front frame portion 2502. Further, the inner side surface of the front frame portion 2502 substantially coincides with the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100, and a part of the front frame portion 2502 is located larger than the opening 1102. .. Then, a mounting hole 2505 for mounting on the game panel 1100 is provided in the flange portion 2503 of the portion of the front frame portion 2502 located outside the opening 1102.

In other words, in the frame-shaped left side portion of the center accessory 2500, a part of the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100 protrudes inward more than the front frame portion 2502, and the game is played in the portion. A center accessory 2500 is attached to the panel 1100.

As a result, at the portion of the center base 2501 of the center accessory 2500 that is the left side of the frame, the flange portion 2503 is extended inward of the front frame portion 2502, and nothing is extended outward, so that the front frame portion It is possible to plant the obstacle nail N at a position as close as possible to the 2502. Therefore, the area in which the game ball B is substantially distributed in the game area 5a can be set to a position in contact with the front frame portion 2502, so that the distribution area of the game ball B is made larger than that of the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that allows the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball B itself.

Further, in the center accessory 2500, since the flange portion 2503 extends in the direction orthogonal to the front frame portion 2502 and the rear frame portion 2504 extending in the front-rear direction, the flange portion 2503 extends the front frame portion 2503. The 2502 and the rear frame portion 2504, that is, the entire center accessory 2500 can be reinforced, and by attaching the center accessory 2500 to the game panel 1100 via the flange portion 2503, the front frame portion 2502 and the rear frame portion 2504 can be reinforced. The strength can be further improved. Further, since the flange portion 2503 is attached to the game panel 1100 through the attachment hole 2505 even at the portion extending inward of the front frame portion 2502, the game ball B in the game area 5a is the front frame portion. Even if the flange portion 2503 in the 2502 comes into contact with the portion extending inward, the strength of the front frame portion 2502 can be maintained by attaching the flange portion 2503 or the mounting hole 2505 to the game panel 1100. It is possible to prevent deformation and damage of the frame portion 2502 (center accessory 2500).

Further, as described above, since the strength and rigidity of the front frame portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by the flange portion 2503, the front frame portion 2502 is elastically deformed when the game ball B comes into contact with the elastic body. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being flipped like (rubber or spring). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a from coming into contact with the front frame portion 2502 and making a strange movement different from the conventional one, which causes discomfort to the player. It is possible to prevent it from being stolen and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as described above, since the obstacle nail N can be planted at a position as close as possible to the front frame portion 2502, the front frame portion 2502 in the center base 2501 of the center accessory 2500. Even if the inside of the center accessory 2500 partitioned by the above is enlarged, the substantial distribution area of the game ball B does not become smaller as in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, while suppressing the distribution area in which the game ball B is distributed in the game area 5a from becoming substantially smaller, by enlarging the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500, the effect display provided rearward through the frame. The effect image of the device 1600 and the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 can be made more visible, and the movement of the game ball B in the game area 5a. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of entertaining any of the various effects that can be seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500.

Further, in the center base 2501 of the center accessory 2500, as described above, since the strength of the front frame portion 2502 and the rear frame portion 2504 can be increased by the flange portion 2503, the center base 2501 is resin-molded from the mold. It is possible to prevent the molded product from being deformed when it is pulled out.

In the above embodiment, the rear frame portion 2504 of the center accessory 2500 is light-emitting-decorated by the light from the LED mounted on the back left decorative board 3222 or the like of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear. Although the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100 is made difficult to see, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a surface facing the center side of the opening 1102 so as to be along the inner circumference of the opening 1102 between the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100 and the rear frame portion 2504 of the center accessory 2500. A decorative substrate for an opening on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted may be provided. As a result, the same effects as described above can be obtained, and the inner peripheral surface (cut surface) of the opening 1102 can be hidden by the decorative substrate for the opening, so that the appearance in the game area 5a is improved. Can be done. In this case, by making the surface of the decorative substrate for the opening white, the confidence of the decorative substrate for the opening can be made inconspicuous, and the rear frame portion 2504 can be brightly decorated by emitting light when the LED is emitted. Can be done. Alternatively, the surface of the decorative substrate for the opening may be colored in a predetermined color that matches the concept of the game board 5, and the same effects as described above can be obtained. Further, the decorative substrate for the opening may be provided over the entire circumference of the opening 1102, the center accessory 2500 may be made to emit light in a frame shape (annular shape), or "right-handed" or "left-handed" may be emitted. It is possible to present a variety of light emission effects to the player and entertain them by making them emit light so as to circulate in a predetermined direction so as to encourage them.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is provided in the upper right corner of the center base 2501, and includes a guide passage group 2520 composed of two passages through which the game ball B can be distributed. The guide passage group 2520 guides the game ball B above the attacker unit 2400.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is provided in the middle of one passage of the guide passage group 2520, and the first special lottery is drawn when the game ball B is received at the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Depending on the lottery result and the second special lottery result, the game ball B can be accepted in the character winning opening 2006, and the game ball B received in the character winning opening 2006 is stored in the accommodating portion 2531a side (V winning side) and the first. The first distribution device 2530 that distributes to any of the one loss openings 2535 and the game ball B (distributed to the V winning side) housed in the accommodating portion 2531a by the first distribution device 2530 are the first V winning openings. The second distribution device 2540 that distributes to either 2007 or the second loss opening 2543, and the game ball B that is distributed to the second loss opening 2543 by the second distribution device 2540 are the second V winning openings 2008 and the third. It is provided with a third sorting device 2550 for sorting to any of the loss ports 2555.

Further, in the center accessory 2500, the accessory winning opening door 2511 that can open and close the accessory winning opening 2006 and the accessory winning opening door 2511 are accepted into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. The accessory winning opening solenoid 2512 that opens and closes according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery, and the accessory winning opening sensor 2513 that detects the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006. , The first V winning opening sensor 2514 that detects the game ball B sorted by the second sorting device 2540 and received in the first V winning slot 2007, and the second V winning slot distributed by the third sorting device 2550. The second V winning opening sensor 2515 that detects the game ball B received in the mouth 2008 and the first losing opening that detects the game ball B that is sorted by the first sorting device 2530 and received in the first losing opening 2535. The sensor 2516 (see the enlarged view of FIG. 150 (a)), the second loss opening sensor 2517 that detects the game ball B sorted by the second distribution device 2540 and received in the second loss opening 2543, and the first It is provided with a third loss opening sensor 2518 that detects the game ball B sorted by the three distribution device 2550 and received in the third loss opening 2555.

As shown in FIGS. 148 and 149, the guide passage group 2520 is provided outside the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the upper entrance is provided with the first guide passage 2521 provided at the abutment portion 1006. The upper entrance is composed of a second guide passage 2522 provided adjacent to the left side of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. The guide passage group 2520 (first guide passage 2521 and second guide passage 2522) are all formed of colorless and transparent members, and the game ball B circulating inside can be visually recognized from the front.

The first guide passage 2521 extends vertically shortly downward from the abutting portion 1006 of the front component 1000 and then bends at a right angle to the right, and when it hits the right rail 1005, it bends downward to the right rail 1005. It extends along, bends to the left near the height of 3/4 from the bottom of the height of the game area 5a, extends to the left so as to be lowered at a loose angle, and is more gamed than the entrance of the second guide passage 2522. It bends downward at the position on the left side of the ball B and extends to the center height of the game area 5a, then bends to the right and extends to the vicinity of the right rail 1005, and then bends downward and the exit moves downward. It is formed in a shape that opens toward it. The first guide passage 2521 is not bent in the front-rear direction, and guides the game ball B downward on substantially the same surface as the front surface of the game panel 1100.

The accessory winning opening 2006 is provided at a portion of the first guide passage 2521 extending to the left, extending left and right over approximately the entire length of the portion in the left-right direction, and opening upward. ing. The accessory winning opening door 2511 is formed in a plate shape that extends forward and backward and extends left and right so that the left end is lowered, and the accessory winning opening 2006 that opens upward by moving forward and backward. Can be opened and closed. The accessory winning opening door 2511 can close the accessory winning opening 2006 by moving forward, and in the state where the accessory winning opening 2006 is closed, the portion extending to the left in the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B distributed from the upstream side can be guided to the exit side of the first guide passage 2521 by forming the bottom surface of the door.

The accessory winning opening door 2511 is retracted by the drive of the accessory winning opening solenoid 2512 to open the accessory winning opening 2006, and the game ball B that has been distributed through the first guide passage 2521 is used as the accessory winning opening 2006. Can be accepted by. This accessory winning opening door 2511 closes the accessory winning opening 2006 when the accessory winning opening solenoid 2512 is OFF (when not energized), and serves when the accessory winning opening solenoid 2512 is ON (when energized). The prize opening 2006 is opened.

The second guide passage 2522 has an entrance opening upward on the right end side of the upper right portion 2502a of the front frame at a portion spaced to the left from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. The second guide passage 2522 extends substantially straight downward from the entrance at the upper end, bends backward at a position lower than the height of the portion where the first guide passage 2521 first bends to the right, and then the game. A part extending downward on the left side of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the first guide passage 2521 while bending downward on the rear side of the front surface of the panel 1100 and lining up with the first guide passage 2521 in the front-rear direction. It extends downward so that the left and right directions substantially coincide with each other, bends to the right in a crank shape at a portion at the center height of the game area 5a, then bends downward, and then lower right in the first guide passage 2521. After bending forward at a part below the part extending toward the direction, it extends to the lower right side of the first guide passage 2521 in a state where the front-rear direction is flush with the first guide passage 2521. It bends to the right to extend along the underside of the site and then bends downward to adjoin the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521, forming the exit into a downwardly open shape. ing.

The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are located on the left side of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the first guide passage 2521 and extend vertically, and are arranged in the front-rear direction so as to overlap each other from the front. It has a portion 2520a. In this heavy viewing unit 2520a, both the game ball B circulating in the first guide passage 2521 and the game ball B circulating in the second guide passage 2522 can be satisfactorily visually recognized from the front. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine which passage the game ball B circulating in the Shigemi portion 2520a is circulating.

In the guide passage group 2520, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are twisted 90 degrees around the vertical axis on the upper side of the weight portion 2520a, and on the lower side of the weight portion 2520a. It is twisted 90 degrees around the axis in the vertical direction in the direction opposite to the upper side. The respective exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 open downward above the normal winning opening 2003 in the attacker unit 2400.

The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are each provided with a plurality of protrusions 2520b at intervals in the distribution direction of the game ball B, and when the game ball B comes into contact with the protrusions 2520b, the distribution speed thereof. Can be suppressed (see FIG. 131).

The first distribution device 2530 is provided at a height between the accessory winning opening 2006 and the lower right portion of the first guide passage 2521, and the first guide passage 2521 (game). It is provided behind the front surface of the panel 1100).

The first distribution device 2530 has an accommodating portion 2531a capable of accommodating only one game ball B on the outer peripheral surface, and has a distribution rotating body 2531 that can rotate around an axis in the front-rear direction and a distribution rotating body 2531. The first distribution solenoid 2532 (see FIG. 173, etc.) for rotating the distribution rotating body 2531 between the state in which the accommodating portion 2531a is facing to the right and the state in which it is facing upward, and the vibration. The cylindrical peripheral wall portion 2533 that covers the outer periphery of the minute rotating body 2531 and the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 are shaken through the upper portion of the distribution rotating body 2531 in the peripheral wall portion 2533. The first distribution guide path 2534 that guides to the upper outer peripheral surface of the distribution rotating body 2531 and the lower portion of the first distribution guide path 2534 that are open rearward to accommodate the distribution rotating body 2531 in the accommodating portion 2531a. The first loss opening 2535 into which the unaccommodated game ball B enters and the ball game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 are distributed, and the portion on the right side of the distribution rotating body 2531 in the peripheral wall portion 2533. The first Atari passage 2536 extending to the right through the above, and the first loss opening sensor 2516 (see the enlarged view of FIG. 150 (a)) that detects the game ball B that has entered the first loss opening 2535. , Is equipped.

The distribution rotating body 2531 is formed in a truncated cone shape whose outer peripheral surface is narrowed rearward. The right end side of the first Atari passage 2536 bends backward and then downwards to communicate with the second distribution device 2540 side.

In the first distribution device 2530, when the first distribution solenoid 2532 is OFF (non-energized), the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 faces to the right. In this state, when the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 abuts on the upper part of the outer peripheral surface of the distribution rotating body 2531 through the first distribution guide path 2534, the outer circumference of the distribution rotating body 2531 is contacted. Since the surface is formed in a truncated cone shape that is narrowed to the rear, the game ball B is guided to the rear by the inclination of the outer peripheral surface, and enters the first loss opening 2535.

On the other hand, when the first distribution solenoid 2532 is ON (energized), the distribution rotating body 2531 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, and the accommodating portion 2531a faces upward (FIG. 150 (a)). reference). In this state, when the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 passes through the first distribution taxiway 2534, only one is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a. When the game ball B is further housed in the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 and the game ball B is further guided by the first distribution guide path 2534 from the accessory winning opening 2006 side, the game ball After B comes into contact with the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a, it enters the rear first loss opening 2535. The game ball B that has entered the first loss opening 2535 is delivered onto the back right ball discharge unit 3170 of the back unit 3000 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200.

When the game ball B is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a, the distribution rotating body 2531 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the first distribution solenoid 2532, and the accommodating portion 2531a is turned to the right. The game ball B accommodated in the 2531a rolls from the accommodating portion 2531a to the right side of the first Atari passage 2536, and circulates in the first Atari passage 2536. The game ball B that has circulated through the first Atari passage 2536 is sent to the next second distribution device 2540.

As described above, in the first distribution device 2530, the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 is placed on either the second distribution device 2540 side (accommodation portion 2531a side) or the first loss opening 2535 side. It can be sorted into crabs.

As shown in FIGS. 136 and 148, the second distribution device 2540 is provided below the first distribution device 2530 and behind the vicinity of the exit of the guide passage group 2520. The second distribution device 2540 is provided behind the first distribution guide path 2534, the first Atari passage 2536, and the like of the first distribution device 2530.

As shown in FIG. 150, the second distribution device 2540 distributes the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 in the first distribution device 2530 and distributed to the first Atari passage 2536 side. The second distribution guide path 2541 extending vertically, the first V winning opening 2007 opened on the right side of the lower part of the second distribution guiding path 2541, and the first V winning opening 2007 extending to the right. After that, the first V winning passage 2542 and the first V winning passage 2542 are provided in the first V winning passage 2542, and the first V winning opening sensor that detects the game ball B received in the first V winning opening 2007. 2514 and.

Further, the second distribution device 2540 is provided above the second loss port 2543 and the second loss port 2543 that are opened upward at the lower end of the second distribution guide path 2541. A distribution door 2544 that can open and close the loss port 2543, a second distribution solenoid 2545 for moving the distribution door 2544 forward and backward to open and close the second loss port 2543, and a second distribution port 2543 extending to the left. A second loss passage 2546 that is later bent downward, a second loss opening sensor 2517 that is provided at the downstream end of the second loss passage 2546 and detects a game ball B received by the second loss opening 2543, and a second loss opening sensor 2517. It has. The distribution door 2544 has a flat plate shape that moves back and forth, and is inclined so that the right side is lowered.

In the second distribution device 2540, when the second distribution solenoid 2545 is OFF (non-energized), the distribution door 2544 is retracted and the second loss port 2543 is opened upward. In this state, when the game ball B from the first distribution device 2530 side flows down the second distribution guide path 2541, it enters the second loss opening 2543 and passes through the second loss passage 2546. It is sent to the strikeout device 2550 side.

On the other hand, when the second distribution solenoid 2545 is ON (energized), the distribution door 2544 is advanced above the second loss port 2543, and the distribution door 2544 closes the second loss port 2543 for the game. Ball B cannot be accepted. In this state, when the game ball B from the first distribution device 2530 side flows down the second distribution guide path 2541, it comes into contact with the upper surface of the distribution door 2544 and then of the distribution door 2544. It will be guided to the right by the inclination and will enter (accept) the first V winning opening 2007. Then, the game ball B that has entered the first V winning opening 2007 passes through the first V winning passage 2542 and is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514, and then the back right ball discharging unit 3170 of the back unit 3000. It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 via.

When the ball game ball B from the first distribution device 2530 is received by the first V winning opening 2007 and detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514, the large winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 has a predetermined opening / closing pattern. A "big hit game" that opens and closes is executed. The second sorting device 2540 can be visually recognized from the front through the transparent guide passage group 2520.

As described above, in the second distribution device 2540, the game ball B housed in the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 in the first distribution device 2530 is inserted into the first V winning opening 2007 or the second loss opening. It can be distributed to any of the 2543 (third distribution device 2550) sides.

As shown in FIG. 140 and the like, the third distribution device 2550 is provided at a lower portion within the frame of the center base 2501 in the center accessory 2500. The third distribution device 2550 communicates with the downstream end of the second loss passage 2546 of the second distribution device 2540, and guides the game ball B detected by the second loss opening sensor 2517 to the left. The distribution guide path 2551 and the crune 2553 provided at the left end of the third distribution guide path 2551 and discharging the game ball B downward while turning around the axis in the vertical direction are provided below the distribution guide path 2553. In addition, a second V winning opening 2008 that penetrates downward near the front end in the center in the left-right direction is provided, and the third distribution table 2554 and the third distribution table 2554 in which the game ball B can roll are provided. Two third loss openings 2555 penetrating downward on both the left and right sides of the second V winning opening 2008, and a third distribution middle rotating body provided near the rear end in the center in the left-right direction of the third distribution table 2554. The 2556 and the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558, which are provided near the front ends of both left and right ends of the third distribution table 2554, are provided (FIGS. 143 to 146). Etc.).

Further, the third sorting device 2550 is mounted below the third sorting base 2559, which is mounted below the third sorting table 2554 and is mounted on the center base 2501, and below the third sorting base 2559. The third distribution middle drive motor 2560 for rotating the third distribution middle rotation body 2556 and the third distribution middle left rotation body 2557 attached to the lower side of the third distribution base 2559 are rotated. The third distribution left drive motor 2561 for the purpose and the third distribution right drive motor 2562 for rotating the third distribution right rotating body 2558 attached to the lower side of the third distribution base 2559. I have. The third distribution middle drive motor 2560, the third distribution left drive motor 2561, and the third distribution right drive motor 2562 are connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 (see FIG. 173). ).

The rotation shaft of the drive motor 2560 during the third distribution penetrates the third distribution base 2559 and projects upward. The rotation shaft of the third distribution left drive motor 2561 protrudes upward through the third distribution base 2559, and the third distribution left rotating body 2557 is attached to the rotation shaft. The rotation shaft of the third distribution right drive motor 2562 penetrates the third distribution base 2559 and projects upward, and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 is attached to the rotation shaft.

Further, the third distribution device 2550 is attached to the third distribution base 2559, respectively, and has a third distribution middle rotation detection sensor 2563 for detecting the rotation of the third distribution middle rotating body 2556. The third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 for detecting the rotation of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565 for detecting the rotation of the third distribution right rotation body 2558. The second V winning opening sensor 2515 that detects the game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008, and the third losing opening sensor 2518 that detects the game ball B received in the third losing opening 2555. Is equipped with. The second V winning opening sensor 2515, the third loss opening sensor 2518, the third distribution middle rotation detection sensor 2563, the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564, and the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565 are panels. It is connected to the main control board 1310 via the relay board 1710 (see FIG. 173).

Further, the third distribution device 2550 is a spur gear-shaped drive gear 2566 attached to the rotating shaft of the third distribution middle drive motor 2560 between the third distribution table 2554 and the third distribution base 2559. A spur gear-shaped transmission gear 2567 that meshes with the drive gear 2566 and is attached to a shaft portion 2556a that protrudes downward in the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution. The transmission gear 2567 has a larger diameter than the drive gear 2566, and slows down the rotation of the drive motor 2560 during the third distribution and transmits it to the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution. Further, the transmission gear 2567 extends outward in a flat plate shape and has a detection piece 2567a detected by the rotation detection sensor 2563 during the third distribution.

Further, the third distribution device 2550 is a spur gear-shaped left transmission gear mounted on the rotating shaft of the third distribution left drive motor 2561 between the third distribution table 2554 and the third distribution base 2559. The spur gear-shaped left rotation detection gear 2569, which meshes with the 2568 and the left transmission gear 2568 and is rotatably attached by the third distribution table 2554 and the third distribution base 2559, and the third distribution. The spur gear-shaped right transmission gear 2570 attached to the rotating shaft of the third distribution right drive motor 2562 between the table 2554 and the third distribution base 2559 meshes with the right transmission gear 2570. It is provided with a spur gear-shaped right rotation detection gear 2571 rotatably attached by the distribution table 2554 and the third distribution base 2559.

The left transmission gear 2568 and the right transmission gear 2570 have the same diameter and the same number of teeth. Further, the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571 have the same diameter and the same number of teeth. The left rotation detection gear 2569 has a larger diameter than the left transmission gear 2568, and rotates slower than the rotation of the rotation shaft of the third distribution left drive motor 2561. The left rotation detection gear 2569 projects in a flat plate shape downward from the middle in the radial direction, and has a detection piece 2569a detected by the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564. The right rotation detection gear 2571 has a larger diameter than the right transmission gear 2570 and rotates slower than the rotation of the rotation shaft of the third distribution right drive motor 2562. The right rotation detection gear 2571 has a detection piece 2571a that projects downward in a flat plate shape from the middle in the radial direction and is detected by the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565.

Further, the third distribution device 2550 is provided between the third distribution table 2554 and the third distribution base 2559 below the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution, and can irradiate light upward. Between the third distribution medium rotating body decorative substrate 2572 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, the third distribution table 2554 and the third distribution base 2559, the third distribution medium rotating body 2556 and the second It is provided below the portion between the V winning opening 2008 and includes a third distribution table decorative substrate 2573 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light upward are mounted.

Further, the third distribution device 2550 is attached to the front end side of the third distribution base 2559, and is received in the second V winning opening 2008 and the third loss opening 2555 in cooperation with the third distribution base 2559. A passage forming member 2575 forming a third distribution ball discharge passage 2574 for guiding the game ball B to be discharged downward, a third distribution middle drive motor 2560, and a third distribution left drive motor. The lower cover 2576 attached to the lower surface of the third distribution base 2559 so as to cover the 2561 and the third distribution right drive motor 2562 from below, and the crune 2553 and the third distribution table 2554 are covered from above. It is equipped with a transparent top cover 2577 (see FIG. 134).

The third sorting table 2554 is formed transparently. The third distribution table 2554 has an outer shape in a plan view, which is semicircular on the rear end side and has a length in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the diameter of the semicircle. The length of the third distribution table 2554 in the front-rear direction is 2.5 times the diameter of the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution. In other words, the diameter of the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution is 0.4 times the length in the front-rear direction of the third distribution table 2554. Further, the diameter of the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution is about four times the diameter of the game ball B (for example, 11 mm), and the length of the third distribution table 2554 in the front-rear direction is the diameter of the game ball B. It is about 10.5 times. The length (width) of the central table 2554a in the third distribution table 2554 is about 5 times the diameter of the game ball B in the left-right direction, and the length (depth) in the front-rear direction is the diameter of the game ball B. It is 5 to 7 times that of.

The third distribution table 2554 is provided in front of the third distribution middle rotating body 2556 at the center in the left-right direction, and has a substantially square central table 2554a and a central table 2554a which are inclined so that the front end side is low. The left table 2554b and the right table 2554c, which are provided on both the left and right outer sides of the central table 2554a and are long in the front-rear direction from the position behind the front end of the central table 2554a to the portion behind the rear end of the third distribution middle rotating body 2556. It is provided in front of the central table 2554a, and after tilting so that it is lowered to both the left and right sides with the center in the left-right direction as the boundary, it bends backward at the left and right outer parts of the central table 2554a to the left table 2554b and the right table. The collection table 2554d, which is inclined so as to be lowered toward 2554c, is provided one step higher on both the left and right outer sides of the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c, and is inclined so that the front end side and the inside are lowered. It has a side table 2554e and.

Further, the third distribution table 2554 surrounds the weir portion 2554f protruding upward from both the left and right sides of the central table 2554a, the rear end side of the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c, and the outside of the left and right side tables 2554e. As described above, the peripheral wall portion 2554 g, which is higher than the diameter of the game ball B and extends upward, is provided. The weir portion 2554f suppresses the entry and exit of the game ball B from both the left and right sides of the central table 2554a. Further, the peripheral wall portion 2554 g cooperates with the upper cover 2577 to prevent the game ball B from falling off from the third distribution table 2554.

The length of the central table 2554a in the front-rear direction is slightly longer than the diameter of the rotating body 2556 in the third distribution, and the length in the left-right direction is longer than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the rear end side of the central table 2554a extends to a portion ahead of the center of the third distribution middle rotating body 2556, and both the left and right sides are bent diagonally toward the third distribution middle rotating body 2556. ing. The central table 2554a is only inclined in the front-rear direction and is horizontal in the left-right direction. Near the front end of the central table 2554a, a third loss opening 2555 is opened on both the left and right sides with the second V winning opening 2008 in the center in the left-right direction in between. The second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555 are round holes having the same diameter. The second V winning opening 2008 has a rounded peripheral edge and is R-chamfered.

The left table 2554b and the right table 2554c have the same front-rear direction as the front ends of the second V winning opening 2008 and the third loss opening 2555, respectively, and the game ball B is larger than the same part in the front-rear direction on the central table 2554a. It is located at a height lower than the diameter of. Further, the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c are inclined so that the distance from the front end of each to the portion in the front-rear direction which is the same as the rear end of the center table 2554a is lowered toward the outside in the left-right direction. The rear side is almost horizontal. Further, in the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c, the vicinity of the center and the portion of the third distribution middle rotating body 2556 in the front-rear direction are the same height as the general surface of the third distribution middle rotating body 2556, and the height thereof is higher than that. The rear side is higher than the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution. At the front ends of the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c, a third distribution left rotating body 2557 and a third distribution right rotating body 2558 are provided on both the left and right outer sides, respectively.

Further, the third distribution table 2554 extends forward and backward from the rear end to the vicinity of the second V winning opening 2008 so that the width of the left and right becomes narrower toward the front in the center of the center table 2554a in the left-right direction. It has a bulging portion 2554h that bulges slightly upward. With this bulging portion 2554h, the rolling direction of the game ball B rolling in the center of the central table 2554a in the left-right direction can be directed to the outside in the left-right direction, and it is difficult to enter the second V winning opening 2008. doing.

Further, the third distribution table 2554 projects upward from the front end side of each of the second V winning opening 2008 and the two third loss openings 2555 on the upper surface of the central table 2554a, and extends to the front end of the central table 2554a. It has a protruding portion 2554i. The protrusion 2554i is formed in a triangular shape at the second V winning opening 2008, and is formed in a rod shape having a narrow left and right width at the third loss opening 2555. Further, the protrusion 2554i of the third loss opening 2555 slightly protrudes into the third loss opening 2555. Although the details will be described later, these protrusions 2554i roll outward after the game ball B rolls around the edge of the opening by contacting the circular opening of the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555. This is to prevent the player from jumping out and entering the other third loss opening 2555 or the second V winning opening 2008.

Further, the third distribution table 2554 projects lower than the protrusion 2554i at the central left-right direction portion between the second V winning opening 2008 and the third loss opening 2555 at the front end of the central table 2554a. It has a protrusion 2554j.

The rotating body 2556 during the third distribution projects downward from the center of the disk shape and is rotatably supported by the third distribution table 2554 and the third distribution base 2559, and the shaft portion 2556a to which the transmission gear 2567 is attached is attached. Have. Further, the rotating body 2556 in the third distribution includes three inner protrusions 2556b protruding in a fan shape near the center and an outer protrusion 2556c protruding in an arc shape higher than the inner protrusion 2556b near the outer peripheral edge. ,have. The inner protrusion 2556b and the outer protrusion 2556c are provided at regular intervals in the circumferential direction, and each is provided on the same radiation. The outer protrusion 2556c has a certain width in the radial direction, the outer peripheral side coincides with the general surface of the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution, and the outer peripheral side is inclined in the radial direction so as to be higher. There is. In the state where the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution is assembled in the third distribution device 2550, the general surface is parallel to the surface of the central table 2554a in the third distribution table 2554 and slightly above the central table 2554a. Is located in. The third distribution middle rotating body 2556 is rotated by the third distribution middle drive motor 2560 in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view via the drive gear 2566 and the transmission gear 2567.

The third distribution left-handed rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right-handed rotating body 2558 each have a projecting piece 2557a and a projecting piece 2558a extending in the axial direction while projecting in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction. ing. The projecting piece 2557a and the projecting piece 2558a are the most in each of the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c in a state where the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 are assembled in the third distribution device 2550. With respect to the game ball B located on both the left and right outer sides of the lower front end, the game ball B protrudes to a substantially central position of the game ball B. The tips of the projecting pieces 2557a and the projecting pieces 2558a are rounded in a plan view. Therefore, the projecting pieces 2557a and the projecting pieces 2558a of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 make it difficult to hit the game ball B on the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c.

Further, in the state where the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 are assembled in the third distribution device 2550, the lower ends of the projecting pieces 2557a and the projecting pieces 2558a are the left table 2554b and the left table 2554b. It is located above the center of the game ball B with respect to the game ball B located on both the left and right outer sides of the front end, which is the lowest in each of the right table 2554c. That is, the projecting piece 2557a and the projecting piece 2558a are provided so as to come into contact with the upper portion of the game ball B. As a result, the projecting piece 2557a and the projecting piece 2558a do not come into contact with each other so as to scoop up the game ball B upward, making it difficult for the game ball B to jump upward.

The third distribution left rotating body 2557 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by the third distribution left drive motor 2561, and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 is driven by the third distribution right. It is rotated clockwise by the motor 2562 in a plan view. Therefore, the projecting piece 2557a of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the projecting piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 are used to repel the game ball B of the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c.

The third distribution base 2559 holds the second V winning opening sensor 2515 and the two third losing opening sensors 2518 in cooperation with the passage forming member 2575. Further, the third distribution base 2559 cooperates with the passage forming member 2575 to guide the game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008 and the third loss opening 2555 and discharge it downward. A shunting discharge passage 2574 is formed. The third distribution ball discharge passage 2574 divides the game balls B received in the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing openings 2555 on the left and right sides of the second V winning opening 2008 without merging them. It is formed so as to guide in the state as it is, and a second V winning opening sensor 2515 and a third losing opening sensor 2518 are provided in the middle of each.

As shown in FIG. 134, the upper cover 2577 is formed so that the rear end side is lowered, and is provided rearward when the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 looks inside the gaming area 5a. The first picture 3110 and the second picture 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect image of the effect display device 1600 are not obstructed.

In the state where the third distribution device 2550 is assembled on the game board 5, the front end is located in front of the front surface of the game panel 1100 and slightly rearward of the front surface of the front component 1000, and the rear end is the back end described later. It is located behind the light guide plate 3102 of the unit 3000 and slightly in front of the front surface of the effect display device 1600. The collection table 2554d of the third distribution table 2554 in the third distribution device 2550 is located in front of the front surface of the game panel 1100.

In the third distribution device 2550, the third distribution middle rotating body 2556, the third distribution left rotating body 2557, and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 have the third distribution middle drive motor 2560 and the third distribution left. It is constantly rotating by the drive motor 2561 and the third distribution right drive motor 2562. The third distribution middle rotating body 2556 and the third distribution left rotating body 2557 rotate in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view, and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 rotates in the clockwise direction in the plan view. There is.

In the present embodiment, the third distribution middle rotating body 2556 has a speed of 16.7 rpm, and the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 are far more than the third distribution middle rotating body 2556. They are rotating at a high speed of 625 rpm. As described above, since the rotation speeds of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 are high, detection pieces are provided in the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558. Even if the presence or absence of rotation is detected, the sensor may not be able to reliably detect the detection piece. More specifically, the sensor that detects the detection piece operates at regular intervals to detect the detection piece. Therefore, for example, if the rotation cycle of the detection piece and the detection cycle of the sensor are the same, the detection is performed. Since it may not be possible to detect a piece at all, it is necessary to make the detection cycle of the sensor sufficiently shorter than the rotation cycle of the detection piece. When the rotation of the detection piece is fast and the rotation cycle is further shortened, the detection cycle of the sensor also needs to be shortened. However, when the detection cycle of the sensor is shortened, signals are frequently exchanged between the sensor and the control unit. This increases the load on the control unit, increasing the risk of runaway and malfunction due to overload.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotation shafts of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 (third distribution left drive motor 2561 and third distribution right drive motor 2562) After attaching the left transmission gear 2568 and the right transmission gear 2570 respectively, the left transmission gear 2568 and the right transmission gear 2570 are engaged with the large-diameter left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571, respectively, to rotate. A detection piece 2569a and a detection piece 2571a are provided on the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571 that have been decelerated and the rotation has been decelerated, and the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 and the third distribution right rotation. It is detected by the detection sensor 2565. In the present embodiment, the rotation speed of the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571 is 250 rpm.

As a result, the rotation speeds of the detection piece 2569a and the detection piece 2571a for detecting the rotation of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 become slow, so that the third distribution left rotation detection sensor It can be reliably detected by the 2564 and the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565, and it can be determined whether or not the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 are rotating. Further, since the rotation speeds of the detection piece 2569a and the detection piece 2571a are slowed down, it is not necessary to unnecessarily shorten the detection cycles of the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 and the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565. The detection cycle can be set to an appropriate level, and an increase in the load applied to the main control board 1310 can be suppressed.

The third distribution device 2550 is supplied with the game ball B distributed to the second loss opening 2543 by the second distribution device 2540. More specifically, the game ball B distributed to the second loss opening 2543 is detected by the second loss opening sensor 2517 and then supplied to the crune 2553 through the third distribution guide path 2551, and is supplied to the crune 2553 at the croon 2553. After turning around the axis in the vertical direction, the sample falls near the right end of the recovery table 2554d in the lower third distribution table 2554. At this time, based on the detection of the game ball B by the second loss opening sensor 2517, the effect corresponding to the distribution of the game ball B by the third distribution device 2550 is executed.

The game ball B that has fallen from the crune 2553 near the right end of the recovery table 2554d rolls to the rear right table 2554c, and then rolls and rotates toward the lowest right part of the front end of the right table 2554c. It comes into contact with the projecting piece 2558a of the third distribution right-handed rotating body 2558. After that, the game ball B, which abuts on the projectile piece 2558a and is flipped backward, enters the central table 2554a from the rear end side of the right table 2554c through the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution, and tilts the central table 2554a. Will cause it to roll forward. Then, it is accepted by either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555 provided near the front end of the central table 2554a, or enters the collection table 2554d through the side thereof. The game ball B that has entered the collection table 2554d from the central table 2554a will roll toward either the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c depending on the entered portion. The game ball B rolled from the collection table 2554d to the left table 2554b is repelled by the projecting piece 2557a of the rotating third distribution left rotating body 2557 in the same manner as the movement on the right table 2554c described above. , From the rear end side of the left table 2554b, it will enter the central table 2554a through the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution.

As described above, the basic flow of the game ball B supplied to the third distribution table 2554 of the third distribution device 2550 passes from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c through the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution. After rolling the central table 2554a, the game ball B is accepted to be sent to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c by the collection table 2554d to either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555. It repeats up to.

By the way, in the present embodiment, since the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 are rotating at high speed, the game ball B is the projecting piece 2557a in the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c. Depending on the timing when the projecting piece 2558a enters the contact area where it can come into contact with the projecting piece 2558a and the timing when the projecting piece 2557a or the projecting piece 2558a abuts on the game ball B, the projecting piece 2557a or the projecting piece 2558a scoops the game ball B. The game ball B is struck out or hits the game ball B, and the momentum of the game ball B that is repelled backward varies depending on the contact condition of the projecting piece 2557a and the projecting piece 2558a.

Therefore, even if the game ball B is repelled by the projecting piece 2557a or the projecting piece 2558a, if the contact condition is weak, the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, which are higher toward the rear, cannot be climbed completely. It may come back, and the game ball B may move back and forth between the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c without entering the rotating body 2556 side during the third distribution. Alternatively, even when the game ball B bounced backward by the projecting piece 2557a or the projecting piece 2558a reaches the third distribution middle rotating body 2556, the outside of the three rotating third distribution middle rotating bodies 2556. Depending on the timing at which the protrusion 2556c is located, the outer protrusion 2556c may prevent the game ball B from entering and may not be able to move to the central table 2554a side and may be returned to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c. .. Further, when the game ball B enters the third distribution middle rotating body 2556 from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, the third distribution middle rotating body 2556 is rotating, so that the three outer protrusions 2556c Since the portion between the two is moving, the game ball B may be carried to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c on the opposite side by the rotation of the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution. Further, when the game ball B is strongly repelled by the projecting piece 2557a or the projecting piece 2558a, it may pass through the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution and enter the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c on the opposite side. It may enter the side table 2554e. The game ball B that has entered the side table 2554e rolls to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c that are in contact with each other.

For this reason, in the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c, the third distribution is repelled by the projecting piece 2557a of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the projecting piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 and the third distribution The game ball B that has entered the middle rotating body 2556 will enter the central table 2554a with a certain probability. At this time, since the rotating body 2556 is rotating during the third distribution, the game ball B enters the central table 2554a from various positions in the left-right direction according to the rotation position.

The game ball B that has entered the central table 2554a will roll forward due to its inclination, but will enter from the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c on both outer sides in the left-right direction through the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution. At the same time, since the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution is rotating, it has a movement vector in the left-right direction, and it is rare that it rolls straight forward, and it rolls diagonally. Become. At this time, since the bulging portion 2554h bulges upward in the center of the central table 2554a in the left-right direction, the bulging portion 2554h weakens the movement of the game ball B in the left-right direction or returns it to the opposite side. It will be done. Then, the game ball B rolling forward on the central table 2554a enters or beside any of the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555 provided near the front end. It will enter the collection table 2554d through.

By the way, on the central table 2554a, depending on the rolling direction of the game ball B that rolls toward the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555, the game ball B is the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening. By touching the circular opening of 2555, the game ball B may move like a swing-by that rotates along the edge of the opening. Then, as shown in FIG. 147 (b), when there is nothing in the openings of the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555, the game ball B rotates along the edge of the opening and rolls. If there is another 2nd V winning opening 2008 or 3rd losing opening 2555 ahead of the point where the direction is changed and it jumps out from the edge of the opening, the game ball is placed in the 2nd V winning opening 2008 or 3rd losing opening 2555. B may enter. Due to such a phenomenon, for example, if you think that the game ball B has entered the second V winning opening 2008, it will go around the edge of the opening and enter the next third losing opening 2555, disappointing the player and making him entertained. There is a risk of lowering it. Further, due to such a phenomenon, the probability of receiving the game ball B to the second V winning opening 2008 (winning probability) in the third sorting table 2554 (third sorting device 2550) becomes large, and the player becomes a player. On the other hand, there is a risk of giving a feeling of distrust.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the protrusion 2554i is projected toward the front end side of the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555, the game ball B tries to rotate along the edge of the opening. However, in the middle of the process, the protrusion 2554i can be abutted and flipped from the edge of the opening to the front side or the inside of the opening, and the second V winning opening 2008 or the second V winning opening 2008 or the first It is possible to prevent the entry into the three loss openings 2555. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball B unnecessarily enters the third loss opening 2555 and disappoint the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. In addition, since it is possible to prevent the unscheduled acceptance of the game ball B into the second V winning opening 2008, it is possible to reduce the variation in the acceptance probability of the game ball B into the second V winning opening 2008, and the game can be played. It is possible to make it difficult to give a feeling of distrust to a person.

In the present embodiment, since the protrusion 2554i is projected inward of the opening at the third loss opening 2555, the game ball B that has rolled along the edge of the opening can be reliably played. Further, since the edge of the opening of the second V winning opening 2008 is roundly chamfered, the chamfering makes it easy to direct the movement vector of the game ball B to the outside or the inside of the opening, so that the game ball B can be made. It is difficult to turn along the edge of the opening.

When the game ball B rolling forward on the central table 2554a passes between the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555, it will enter the collection table 2554d from the front end of the central table 2554a. .. At this time, there is a possibility that the front end of the central table 2554a abuts on the protruding portion 2554j. Then, depending on the degree of contact of the game ball B with the protrusion 2554j, the game ball B may be reflected backward, and depending on the reflection angle, it can be accepted by the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555. There is sex. On the other hand, when the game ball B abuts on the protrusion 2554j and is reflected to the front side, it enters the recovery table 2554d from the front end of the central table 2554a. When the game ball B passes between the third loss opening 2555 and the weir portion 2554f on the central table 2554a, it enters the collection table 2554d from the front end of the central table 2554a without contacting the protrusion 2554j. ..

In this way, the game ball B that has entered the collection table 2554d from the central table 2554a rolls to either the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c according to the entered portion, and is a third distribution left rotating body. By being flipped by 2557 or the third distribution right rotating body 2558, it is sent to the central table 2554a again through the third distribution middle rotating body 2556, and either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555. The movement as described above is repeated until it is accepted in the third distribution table 2554. In the present embodiment, the game ball B is distributed (accepted) to the second V winning opening 2008 with a probability of 1/5.

Then, the game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008 is guided by the third distribution ball discharge passage 2574, detected by the second V winning opening sensor 2515, and then discharged downward. On the other hand, the game ball B received in the third loss opening 2555 is guided by the third distribution ball discharge passage 2574, detected by the third loss opening sensor 2518, and then discharged downward. The game ball B discharged downward from the third distribution device 2550 is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 via the back lower ball discharge unit 3150 in the back unit 3000.

In this way, in the third distribution device 2550, the game ball B distributed to the second loss opening 2543 by the second distribution device 2540 is either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third loss opening 2555. Can be distributed to.

Further, according to the third distribution device 2550 of the present embodiment, the height and the amount of protrusion of the protrusion 2557a of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the protrusion 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 are set as the game ball. Since it is difficult to hit B and the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 are rotating at high speed, the game ball B has entered the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c. At times, it is possible to make it unpredictable to the player what strength the game ball B will be bounced backwards, and the player's line of sight will be nailed to the game ball B on the third distribution table 2554. At the same time, it is possible to enjoy the movement of the game ball B going back and forth on the third distribution table 2554, raising expectations for acceptance to the second V winning opening 2008 and reducing the interest. Can be suppressed.

Further, unless the game ball B is strongly repelled by the projecting piece 2557a of the third distribution left rotating body 2557a or the projecting piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558, the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c to the center table 2554a If the game ball B does not enter the center table 2554a and the game ball B does not enter the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555, the collection table 2554d causes the left table 2554b or the right table. Since it is returned to 2554c, the game ball B stays on the third distribution table 2554 for a relatively long time, and the game ball B is distributed for a longer time than a distribution device such as a crune in a conventional pachinko machine. It can be entertained, and by allocating the game ball B to the second V winning opening 2008, it is possible to raise the expectation for the occurrence of the "big hit game" and suppress the decline in interest. That is, since the "big hit game" is generated by the movement of the game ball B, which is the acceptance of the game ball B into the second V winning opening 2008, the effect display device 1600 is directed to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. When a "big hit game" occurs when an image effect is shown in which a plurality of symbol rows for suggesting the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by acceptance is displayed in a variable manner. In comparison, even if it takes a long time for the occurrence of the "big hit game" to be confirmed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, alleviate the disappointment at the time of "loss" and suppress the decline in interest. Can be made to.

By the way, in a distribution device using a crune or the like in a conventional pachinko machine, acceleration of the game ball B is not essential in order to reach a distribution destination such as a V winning opening or a loss opening, and the rolling path and rolling speed are not essential. The structure was such that the game ball B could reach the distribution destination even if no change was given to the ball B. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, although the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed to some extent, the player gets tired of getting used to it, and there are problems as illustrated below. That is, for example, in the case where the rolling path of the game ball B is not changed and is guided to an unfavorable sorting destination, the player's interest before reaching the sorting destination because the sorting destination can be predicted from the rolling path. Was in danger of decreasing. Alternatively, even if the rolling path of the game ball B is changed by some means, if the rolling path of the game ball B is changed, and as a result, the player is guided to a disadvantageous sorting destination, the originally advantageous sorting (unless the rolling path is changed) is advantageous. If the development that could be reached earlier is hindered by the means and suffers a disadvantage, the player may feel distrust and the player's interest may be reduced.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the third distribution device 2550, what kind of strength is achieved by the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 that rotate at high speed. Whether the game ball B is accelerated and played cannot be clearly predicted by the player, and the game ball B is played by the third distribution left-handed rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right-handed rotating body 2558. The number of times is not limited to one, and after drawing a complicated rolling path on the third distribution table 2554, the game ball B is assigned to either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555. Since it will be accepted, it is possible to make the player feel that the distribution destination has been selected by random luck. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, not only the movement of the game ball B due to the natural flow is enjoyed but also the random distribution destination is selected without causing the above-mentioned problems in the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to entertain the game development by the player, and to give the player a strong interest and interest in the movement of the game ball B.

Further, in the third distribution device 2550 of the present embodiment, two third loss openings 2555 are provided side by side on the left and right sides of the second V winning opening 2008 on the front end side of the central table 2554a. Even if the game ball B is accepted in the loss opening 2555, it is possible to make the player feel that the advantage / disadvantage results are divided by a slight difference. As a result, even if the player is assigned to the disadvantageous third loss opening 2555, it can be expected to have the effect of making the player feel regretful and continuously increase the motivation to play.

Further, the third distribution device 2550 of the present embodiment is provided with one second V winning opening 2008 as an advantageous distribution destination, while two third loss openings 2555 are provided as disadvantageous distribution destinations. It is provided, and in the third distribution table 2554, it is shown that it is more difficult to accept the game ball B to the advantageous distribution destination than the disadvantageous distribution destination, and thus the difficulty to the advantageous distribution destination is By being clearly indicated visually, it is possible to strongly request the player to accept the game ball B to an advantageous distribution destination, and raise the player's interest in the movement of the game ball B to improve the interest. The effect can be expected.

Further, the third distribution device 2550 of the present embodiment enters the central table 2554a because the central table 2554a is tilted so that the front end side is lowered and the second V winning opening 2008 is provided near the front end. The second V winning opening 2008 will be located between the game ball B and the player, and the player can easily see whether or not the game ball B is rolling toward the second V winning opening 2008. It is possible to make the movement of the game ball B more enjoyable. Further, since the game ball B rolls toward the player side (forward) toward the second V winning opening 2008, the player is made to think that the game ball B is attracted to the second V winning opening 2008. This makes it possible to raise expectations for acceptance into the second V winning opening 2008 and enjoy the distribution at the third distribution table 2554.

Further, according to the third distribution device 2550 of the present embodiment, the game ball B distributed to the second loss opening 2543 side by the second distribution device 2540 is the second of the third distribution table 2554 by the crune 2553. It is designed to be supplied to the collection table 2554d on the downstream side of the V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555, and the game ball is provided on the central table 2554a provided with the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555. In order to reach B, a certain amount of strength is applied by the third distribution right rotating body 2558 (third distribution left rotating body 2557) so as to get over the inclined right table 2554c (left table 2554b). It has the characteristic that contact is a necessary condition. Therefore, for example, even if the game ball B is supplied from the second distribution device 2540 side when the rotation of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 and the third distribution left rotating body 2557 is stopped for some reason. It stays at the front end side of the right table 2554c, which is the lowest position in the third distribution table 2554, via the croon 2553, and does not go to the central table 2554a provided with the second V winning opening 2008. The game ball B is not illegally accepted into the second V winning opening 2008.

The center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment is provided between the lower side of the frame-shaped center base 2501 and the third distribution device 2550, and has a front center decorative substrate 2591 capable of irradiating light forward and a guide passage. A table provided between the decorative board 2592 on the upper right of the table provided above the accessory winning opening 2006 in the group 2520, and between the accessory winning opening 2006 and the first Atari passage 2536 of the first sorting device 2530. The right middle decorative substrate 2593 and the front right lower decorative substrate 2594 provided below the second loss passage 2546 of the second sorting device 2540 are provided (see FIGS. 131 and 174, etc.).

A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on each of the front center decorative substrate 2591, the front upper right decorative substrate 2592, the front right middle decorative substrate 2593, and the front right lower decorative substrate 2594, respectively. By emitting light from the LED mounted on the front center decorative substrate 2591, the lower side of the center base 2501 can be made to emit light. When the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate 2592 on the upper right of the table, the decorative substrate 2593 on the middle right of the table, and the decorative substrate 2594 on the lower right of the table are made to emit light, the guide passage group 2520, the first distribution device 2530, and the second distribution device 2540 are emitted. Is luminescent and decorated so that the game ball B in circulation can be easily seen from the player side.

The front center decorative substrate 2591 and the front upper right decorative substrate 2592 are connected to the production relay substrate 3026, respectively, and the front right middle decorative substrate 2593 and the front right lower decorative substrate 2594 are connected to the front upper right decorative substrate 2592. That is, the front right middle decorative substrate 2593 and the front right lower decorative substrate 2594 are connected to the effect relay substrate 3026 via the front upper right decorative substrate 2592.

[5-8f. Flow of game balls in the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 136, 148 to 152 and the like. FIG. 148 is an explanatory diagram showing a flow path of the game ball on the right side in the table unit. FIG. 149 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball flowing through the first guide passage in the guide passage group, and FIG. 149 (b) is an explanation showing the flow of the game ball flowing through the second guide passage in the guide passage group. It is a figure. FIG. 150 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball received in the accessory winning opening, and FIG. 150 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the portion of the third sorting device in (a) from a plane. c) is an explanatory diagram showing a part of the second sorting device in (a). Further, FIG. 151 is an explanatory diagram showing the timing of the operation of the accessory winning opening, the first distribution device, and the second distribution device according to the type of “small hit”. FIG. 152 (a) is an explanatory view showing the flow of the game ball in the attacker unit, and is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in (a).

In the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided on the upper right side with respect to the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion on the left side and a portion below the center accessory 2500, and a portion between the attacker unit 2400 and the center accessory 2500. Has been done. Further, a windmill W that rotates due to contact with the game ball B is provided on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B driven on the left side of the center accessory 2500 mainly enters the part on the right side of the center of the wind turbine W. It is adjusted so that it enters the part on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W with a lower probability. The windmill W has a plurality of obstacle nails in which most of the game balls B that have entered to the right of the center are arranged in a row under the center accessory 2500 so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a. Let it enter on N and let the rest flow down to the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300.

A plurality of obstacle nails N planted in a row below the center accessory 2500 so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a circulate the game ball B flowing on the upper side and the lower side. It is adjusted so that it can be accepted by the first starting port 2002 with a higher probability than that of the game ball B.

A plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the lower end of the guide passage group 2520 in the center accessory 2500 and the ordinary winning opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 are a game in which the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520 is circulated. The ball B is adjusted to enter the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430, the normal winning opening 2003, and the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 with the same probability, and the second guide passage. The game ball B that has circulated 2522 is adjusted so as to enter the left side of the ordinary winning opening 2003 and the ordinary winning opening 2003 with a higher probability than the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430.

In the game area 5a, the game ball B is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and is driven upward from the left side along the peripheral edge of the game area 5a. When the game ball B is driven so as to circulate on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. 136, a plurality of obstacle nails planted on the left side of the center accessory 2500. By N, it is mainly guided to enter the part on the right side of the center of the wind turbine W, and with a lower probability, it is guided to enter the part on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W.

The game ball B guided to a portion on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W is guided to the right by the shelf portion 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. Then, there is a possibility that the side unit 2200 will be accepted by the three general winning openings 2001. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then delivered to the back lower ball discharging unit 3150 of the back unit 3000, and detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001. It is discharged onto the board holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given. The game ball B guided to a portion on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W is rarely accepted by the first starting port 2002.

The game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the wind turbine W is centered in the left-right direction (first starting port) by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted diagonally in a row along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. There is a possibility that it will be guided to the 2002) side and accepted by the first starting port 2002. Further, the game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the wind turbine W may flow down to the side unit 2200 through between a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally, and the side unit 2200 There is a possibility that it will be accepted by the general winning opening 2001. The game ball B distributed on the left side of the center accessory 2500 is unlikely to be accepted by the large winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400.

The game ball B received in the first start port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then delivered to the back lower ball discharge unit 3150 of the back unit 3000, and detected by the first start port sensor 3002. It is ejected onto the board holder 1200 above. When the game ball B is detected by the first start port sensor 3002, a lottery of the first special lottery result is performed and a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out. Then, the game ball B that is not accepted by either the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002 is discharged from the out opening 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

It should be noted that the game ball B on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a is unlikely to be accepted by the normal winning opening 2003 or the second starting opening 2004, and is rarely opened to the large winning opening 2005. May be accepted.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B driven to the left side of the center accessory 2500 has a probability of being accepted by the second starting port 2004 with respect to the probability that the game ball B driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 is accepted. The probability of being accepted by the first starting port 2002 is set higher.

On the other hand, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is driven with the strength that the game ball B enters above the right portion 2502a on the front frame of the center accessory 2500 (upstream space portion 2506). , The game ball B circulates in either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

More specifically, the game ball B is driven with a strength that abuts on the abutting portion 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 forming a part of the peripheral edge of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed striking). Then, the game ball B in contact with the abutment portion 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521 (see FIG. 149 (a)). The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 rolls on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening door 2511 that closes the accessory winning opening 2006 in the middle of the first guide passage 2521, and then the guide passage group. It is discharged from the right exit at the lower end of the 2520 to the lower attacker unit 2400 side.

The game ball B released downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 has a first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 and a normal prize due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the first guide passage 2521 and the attacker unit 2400. It is guided to enter either the mouth 2003 or the part on the left side of the normal winning mouth 2003 with a similar probability.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upstream space portion 2506 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates through the second guide passage 2522, it is twisted rearward and the first guide passage in the Shigemi portion 2520a. After lining up with 2521 in the front-rear direction, it is twisted forward and discharged from the exit on the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521 to the lower attacker unit 2400 side.

The game ball B released downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is a portion on the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 or the normal winning opening 2003 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the attacker unit 2400 and the game ball B. It is guided to enter any of the above, and rarely, it is guided to enter the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430.

Then, the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 through the first opening 2431 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 is placed on the lower right rail 1004 from the discharging port 2435 that is lower than the large winning opening 2005. It is discharged and discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a. Further, the game ball B that has entered the normal winning opening 2003 is detected by the normal winning opening sensor 2401 and discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. By detecting the game ball B by the normal winning opening sensor 2401, a privilege such as a normal lottery being performed and a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is given.

Further, the game ball B that has entered the left side portion of the normal winning opening 2003 further abuts on the plurality of obstacle nails N and flows down onto the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421. In rare cases, the game ball B that has entered the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 passes through the second opening 2432 between the normal winning opening 2003 and the guidance shelf 2421 on the second starting opening, and enters the attacker right passage 2430. May enter. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down onto the second start opening upper guidance shelf 2421 passes between the second starting opening upper guidance shelf 2421 and the second starting port left standing wall portion 2422 and flows down onto the large winning opening guidance shelf 2424. ..

At this time, if the game ball B is accepted in the normal winning opening 2003 and the "normal hit" is drawn as a result of the normal lottery, the second starting port 2004 is opened in a predetermined pattern, so that the second starting The game ball B that has passed between the oral guide shelf 2421 and the left standing wall portion 2422 of the second starting port may be received by the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game ball B is received by the second start port 2004, it is detected by the second start port sensor 2402 and then discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the second start port sensor 2402, a lottery of the second special lottery result is performed and a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out.

The game ball B that has passed between the second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting port left standing wall portion 2422 and has flowed down onto the large winning opening guidance shelf 2424 is the large winning opening 2005 from the left end of the large winning opening guiding shelf 2424. It is released to the part above. Then, when the game ball B is released from the large winning opening guide shelf 2424, the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. When the "big hit" is drawn, or when the game ball B is accepted in the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008, the big winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, so that the big winning is won. The game ball B released to the left from the mouth guide shelf 2424 will be accepted into the large winning opening 2005 with a high probability.

The game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 is detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403 and then discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. By detecting the game balls B by the large winning opening sensor 2403, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given. The game ball B released to the attacker unit 2400 side through the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 is accepted by any of the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005. If not, the game is discharged downward from the out port 1008 at the lower end of the game area 5a to the rear and lower part of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a.

Although the case of hitting right is described above, the game ball B hit with a strength that jumps over the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 that is open near the right end of the right portion 2502a on the front frame , The first guide passage 2521 will be entered, and the result will be the same as above.

As described above, due to the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the attacker unit 2400, the game ball B circulating the second guide passage 2522 is better than the first guide passage 2521. , There is a high possibility that it will be accepted by the ordinary winning opening 2003.

By the way, when the game ball B is accepted in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 and a "small hit" is drawn as the result of the first special lottery or the second lottery, in the middle of the first guide passage 2521. The provided accessory winning opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, and the distribution rotating body 2531 of the first distribution device 2530 and the distribution door 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 operate in a predetermined pattern. Therefore, when the "small hit" is drawn, the character winning opening 2006 opens and closes, so that the player can receive the game ball B in the character winning opening 2006. "Right-handed" can be performed so that the game ball B is distributed in the first guide passage 2521 provided with the mouth 2006.

In the present embodiment, the "small hit" has a higher probability of being drawn than the "big hit", and the "small hit" includes "first small hit", "second small hit", and "third small hit". Three patterns are set, and in each pattern, the accessory winning opening 2006 is roughly divided and opens and closes twice.

First, the opening and closing of the accessory winning opening 2006 in each "small hit" will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 151, in the "first small hit", after a certain period of time (3000 ms) has elapsed from the start of execution, the accessory winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (80 ms), and then closed. After a short time (1252 ms) has elapsed, it is opened again for a short time (80 ms) and then closed. In the "second small hit", after a certain period of time (3000 ms) has elapsed from the start of execution, the accessory winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (80 ms), and then closed, and the "first small hit" is performed. After a long time (5420 ms) has elapsed, it is opened for a long time (9414 ms) and then closed. In the "third small hit", after a certain period of time (3000 ms) has elapsed from the start of execution, the accessory winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (80 ms), and then closed, and the "second small hit" is performed. After a long time (19366 ms) has elapsed, it will be in the open state for a long time (9404 ms) and then closed.

The second open state of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the "first small hit" is started after the time when the "first small hit" is completed from the start of execution. In addition, the second open state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the "third small hit" is started after the time when the "second small hit" is completed from the start of execution.

In addition, in FIG. 151, in the second long open state in the "second small hit" and the "third small hit", eight open states (80 ms) are repeated at regular intervals (1252 ms). .. That is, the accessory winning opening 2006 is opened and closed (opened) twice in the "first small hit" and nine times in the "second small hit" and the "third small hit".

Next, the operation of the distribution rotating body 2531 of the first distribution device 2530 in the "small hit" rotates counterclockwise at the same time as the execution starts, and the accommodating portion 2531a is directed upward for a predetermined time (3020 ms). After the first accommodating state, after that, when the accommodating portion 2531a is turned clockwise and the accommodating portion 2531a is turned to the right and the predetermined time (4560 ms) elapses, the second time is longer than the first time (13446 ms). After being in the storable state for a short time (500 ms) and being in the storable state for the third time (13446 ms) for the same time as the second time, the storable state is reached.

The distribution rotating body 2531 ends in the first open state of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the "small hit" and becomes unaccommodable. Further, the distribution rotating body 2531 will be in the second accommodating state after the time when the "first small hit" is completed from the start of execution. Therefore, at the time of the "first small hit", the control of the distribution rotating body 2531 is completed before the second accommodating state is reached, and the second and third accommodating states are not executed. The second open state of the distribution rotating body 2531 is started before the second open state of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the "second small hit", and the second open state is the closed state. After that, it becomes uncontainable.

Further, the distribution rotating body 2531 will be in the accommodating state for the third time after the time when the "second small hit" is completed from the start of execution. Therefore, at the time of the "second small hit", the control of the distribution rotating body 2531 is completed before the third accommodating state is reached, and the third accommodating state is not executed. That is, the distribution rotating body 2531 can be accommodated once for the "first small hit", twice for the "second small hit", and three times for the "third small hit", respectively. The distribution rotating body 2531 is started in the third accommodating state before the second open state of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the "third small hit", and the second open state is completed. After it is closed, it becomes uncontainable.

Next, the operation of the distribution door 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 in the "small hit" is the first closed state (3020 ms) of closing the second loss port 2543 by protruding forward at the same time as the execution starts. (A state in which distribution is possible to the first V winning opening 2007), and then a predetermined time (23006 ms) in an open state in which the second loss opening 2543 is opened (a state in which distribution is made to the third distribution device 2550). ) Elapses, the second closed state is set for a longer time (13446 ms) than the first open state, and then the open state is set.

The distribution door 2544 is opened after the first closed state ends in the middle of the first open state of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the "small hit". Further, in the second distribution device 2540, the second closed state of the distribution door 2544 is started from the middle of the second open state of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the "third small hit", and the accessory winning opening is started. After the second open state of 2006 is closed, the distribution door 2544 is changed from the closed state to the open state. Therefore, in the second distribution device 2540, the second closed state of the distribution door 2544 is executed only at the time of "third small hit", and the distribution is performed at the time of "first small hit" or "second small hit". The second closed state of the branch door 2544 is not executed.

For this reason, in the "first small hit", the opening and closing of the accessory winning opening 2006 is executed twice in a short time, so that the game is distributed through the first guide passage 2521 by "right-handed". It is unlikely that the ball B will be accepted by the prize winning opening 2006. In addition, since the first open state of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the "second small hit" and the "third small hit" is also a short time, there is a possibility that the game ball B will be accepted by the accessory winning opening 2006. Is low. Further, the time during which the first accommodating state of the distribution rotating body 2531 in the first distribution device 2530 overlaps with the first open state of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the "small hit" is the accessory winning opening. Since it is shorter than the time of the first opening state of 2006, the game ball B received in the character winning opening 2006 at the time of the first opening state of the character winning opening 2006 is the accommodating portion of the distribution rotating body 2531. It is even less likely to be housed in 2531a. Then, since the time for completing the first accommodating state of the distribution rotating body 2531 and the first closed state of the distribution door 2544 in the second distribution device 2540 is the same, the distribution rotating body 2531 At the time of the first accommodating state, the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a is not distributed to the first V winning opening 2007 side.

On the other hand, since the second open state of the character winning opening 2006 in the "second small hit" and the "third small hit" takes a long time, the game ball B wins the character through the first guide passage 2521. It is likely to be accepted by the mouth 2006. At this time, the distribution rotating body 2531 of the first distribution device 2530 is in a state where it can be accommodated before the accessory winning opening 2006 is opened, and then the accessory winning opening 2006 is in the closed state from the open state. Since it becomes unaccommodated after the above, it is highly possible that the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 in the second open state is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531. ..

As described above, in this example, it is unlikely that the game ball B will be accepted by the character winning opening 2006 in the first open state of the character winning opening 2006 in the "second small hit" and the "third small hit". In addition, it is even less likely that the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 will be accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 when the accessory winning opening 2006 is opened for the first time. Nevertheless, at the same time as the execution of the small hit game state is started, the distribution rotating body 2531 is rotated counterclockwise to bring the accommodating portion 2531a upward so that the accommodating portion 2531a can be accommodated for a predetermined period (3020 ms). After facing upward, it rotates clockwise to bring the accommodating portion 2531a to the right so that it cannot be accommodated. That is, although it is unlikely that the distribution rotating body 2531 distributes the game ball B to the first Atari passage 2536 side immediately after the start of the small hit game state, the distribution rotating body 2531 distributes the game ball B to the first Atari passage. The distribution operation is executed on the 2536 side, and the distribution operation by the distribution rotating body 2531 is shown in advance.

Similarly, although it is unlikely that the distribution rotating body 2531 distributes the game ball B to the first Atari passage 2536 side immediately after the start of the small hit game state, the second distribution is performed at the same time as the execution of the small hit game state is started. By projecting the distribution door 2544 of the device 2540 forward and closing the second loss opening 2543, it is possible to distribute to the first V winning opening 2007, and after a predetermined time (3020 ms) elapses, the second loss opening is retracted. When 2543 is opened, it is in a state of being distributed to the third distribution device 2550. That is, although it is unlikely that the distribution door 2544 distributes the game ball B to the first V winning opening 2007 side immediately after the start of the small hit game state, the distribution door 2544 distributes the game ball B to the first V winning opening. The sorting operation by the sorting door 2544 is performed in advance by executing the sorting operation on the 2007 side.

In this example, the distribution rotating body 2531 and the distribution door 2544 are produced at the same time as the execution of the small hit game state, that is, at the start of the small hit game state (the opening effect of the small hit game state, for example, "Character winning opening". It operates during the execution of the game (the effect of explaining the game in the small hit game state such as "Aim for 2006"), and after the operation of the distribution rotating body 2531 and the distribution door 2544, the accessory winning opening 2006 is the first time. Will be in the open state. As a result, the possibility of distributing the game ball B to the first Atari passage 2536 side by the distribution rotating body 2531 and the distribution of the game ball B to the first V winning opening 2007 side by the distribution door 2544 is low. doing. There is no possibility that the game ball B is distributed to the first Atari passage 2536 side by the distribution rotating body 2531 and the game ball B is distributed to the first V winning opening 2007 side by the distribution door 2544. Alternatively, if it is extremely low, the accessory winning opening 2006 may be opened for the first time at the same time as the distribution rotating body 2531 and the distribution door 2544 are operated.

Further, only one of the distribution rotating body 2531 and the distribution door 2544 may be operated in advance, and the other may not be operated in advance. That is, some of the movable parts (distribution rotating body 2531, distribution door 2544) that distribute the game ball B that has won the prize winning opening 2006 are operated in advance to show the distribution operation. , Other moving parts may not be operated in advance. For example, do not operate the distribution door 2544, which has a high possibility of allowing the game ball B to enter the V winning opening (first V winning opening 2007 in this example) by operating (high expectation of V winning). And, it is less likely that the game ball B will enter the V winning opening (second V winning opening 2008 in this example) than the sorting door 2544 (the V winning expectation is low) only for the sorting rotating body 2531 in advance. You may make it work. As a result, although it is possible to know in advance a part of the distribution destinations of the game ball B that has won the prize winning opening 2006, it is possible to make the other distribution destinations unknown, and the other distribution destinations are clear. By increasing the number of distribution destinations when it becomes, it is possible to surprise the player and raise the sense of expectation, and at the same time, it is possible to pay attention to the game ball B to be distributed and enjoy the movement, which reduces the interest in the game. It can be suppressed.

In addition, the movable part (distribution door 2544) with a high expectation of V winning is concealed by not operating it in advance, and the player is made to assume that the game ball B enters the third distribution device 2550. When the "third small hit" is executed, the movable part (distribution door 2544) with high expectation of V winning operates to move the game ball B to the V winning opening (first V winning opening 2007 in this example). The entry can give unexpectedness, and the game ball B can enter the unexpected distribution destination to improve the game interest. In addition, the distribution to the first V winning opening 2007 side is concealed as the distribution destination, and it can be assumed that there are only two of the first loss opening 2535 side and the third distribution device 2550 side. Even if the "second small hit", which is less expected to win a V prize than "" is executed and the game ball B is distributed to the third distribution device 2550 side, the player is not discouraged.

Further, in this example, the distribution rotating body 2531 is arranged in such a manner that the player can easily see it, whereas the distribution door 2544 is formed into a flat plate shape that moves forward and backward in the game board 5 and has an area on the front side. Is narrow, so it is difficult to notice the operation even if it is operating. As a result, it is difficult for the player to notice the passage on the side of the first V winning opening 2007, which can be entered by the distribution door 2544 protruding forward. Therefore, when the distribution door 2544 operates and the game ball B enters the first V winning opening 2007 in the case of a "third small hit", it becomes difficult to notice the behavior of the game ball B, and the game ball Without noticing that B has entered the first V winning opening 2007, the player can be given the feeling as if a V winning suddenly occurred and a 15R jackpot was executed.

In addition, by operating the distribution rotating body 2531 in advance during the opening effect of the small hit game state, the distribution rotating body 2531 is added to the instruction content in the opening effect, for example, "Aim at the character winning opening 2006". The player can easily recognize the driving destination, that is, the position to be aimed at during the small hit game state by the operation of.

By drawing a "small hit" as described above, when the character winning opening 2006 is opened, the game ball B that has flowed down the first taxiway 2521 is accepted into the character winning opening 2006. After being detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 2513, it is sent to the first distribution guide path 2534 of the first distribution device 2530. When the game ball B is detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 2513, a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is given.

Among the "small hits", in the "second small hit", when the accessory winning opening 2006 is in the second open state, the distribution door 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 is in the open state, so that the distribution rotation is performed. When the body 2531 rotates from the accommodating state to the unaccommodating state, the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a passes through the first Atari passage 2536 and passes through the first Atari passage 2536 to the second distribution guide path 2541 of the second distribution device 2540. Is circulated from the second loss port 2543 at the lower end to the second loss passage 2546, detected by the second loss port sensor 2517, and then sent to the third distribution device 2550 side.

The game ball B sent to the third distribution device 2550 side is supplied to the crune 2553 through the third distribution guide path 2551, turns in the crune 2553, and then falls to the lower third distribution table 2554. To do. The game ball B that has fallen from the crune 2553 near the right end of the recovery table 2554d rolls to the rear right table 2554c, and then rolls and rotates toward the lowest right part of the front end of the right table 2554c. It comes into contact with the projecting piece 2558a of the third distribution right-handed rotating body 2558. After that, the game ball B, which abuts on the projectile piece 2558a and is flipped backward, enters the central table 2554a from the rear end side of the right table 2554c through the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution, and tilts the central table 2554a. Will cause it to roll forward.

Whether the game ball B that has entered the central table 2554a from the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution is accepted by either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555 provided near the front end of the central table 2554a. , Enter the collection table 2554d by the side of them. The game ball B that has entered the collection table 2554d from the central table 2554a will roll toward either the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c depending on the entered portion. Then, the game ball B rolled from the collection table 2554d to the left table 2554b is repelled by the projecting piece 2557a of the rotating third distribution left rotating body 2557 in the same manner as the movement at the right table 2554c described above. , From the rear end side of the left table 2554b, it will enter the central table 2554a through the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution.

As described above, the basic flow of the game ball B supplied to the third distribution table 2554 of the third distribution device 2550 passes from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c through the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution. After rolling the central table 2554a, the game ball B is accepted to be sent to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c by the collection table 2554d to either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555. It repeats up to 2554 and patrolls on the third distribution table.

Then, the game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008 passes through the third distribution ball discharge passage 2574, is detected by the second V winning opening sensor 2515, and then discharges the back lower ball of the back unit 3000. It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 via the unit 3150. On the other hand, the game ball B received in the third loss opening 2555 passes through the third distribution ball discharge passage 2574, is detected by the third loss opening sensor 2518, and then the back lower ball discharge unit 3150 of the back unit 3000. It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 via. When the game ball B is detected by the second V winning opening sensor 2515, a privilege of opening and closing the large winning opening 2005 in a predetermined pattern is given.

On the other hand, in the "third small hit", when the accessory winning opening 2006 is opened for the second time, the distribution door 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 is in the closed state, so that the distribution rotating body 2531 Rotates from the accommodating state to the unaccommodating state, the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a flows down the second distribution guide path 2541 of the second distribution device 2540 through the first Atari passage 2536. Then, it abuts on the upper surface of the closed distribution door 2544 and is guided to the right, and enters (accepts) the first V winning opening 2007. The game ball B that has entered the first V winning opening 2007 passes through the first V winning passage 2542, is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514, and then passes through the back right ball discharging unit 3170 of the back unit 3000 to be a substrate. It is discharged onto the holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514, the privilege of opening and closing the large winning opening 2005 in a predetermined pattern is given.

Therefore, in order to open and close the big winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400, the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 is made to accept the game ball B, such as "small hit" or "big hit". It is necessary to have the lottery of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result of. When the game ball B is driven so as to flow down the left side of the center accessory 2500, there is an opportunity to be accepted by the first starting port 2002, but there is no opportunity to be accepted by the second starting port 2004.

On the other hand, when the game ball B is driven so as to flow down the right side of the center accessory 2500, a guide passage group 2520 composed of two guide passages 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is located on the right side of the center accessory 2500. Although there is an opportunity to be accepted by the ordinary winning opening 2003 for opening and closing the second starting port 2004 even if it passes through the aisle, the first guide is to make a "right-handed" that is easy to drive. If the passage 2521 is circulated, there is a possibility of entering the attacker right passage 2430, which is sent to the out opening 1008 without a chance to be accepted by the ordinary winning opening 2003, etc., and the game ball B is circulated in the second guide passage 2522. Therefore, it is necessary to adjust the driving strength of the game ball B. Further, in order for the second starting port 2004 to accept the game ball B, it is necessary to have the normal winning opening 2003 accept the game ball B and derive the normal lottery result of "normal hit", so that the game ball B The acceptance probability of the second starting port 2004 is lower than that of the first starting port 2002.

Therefore, in a normal state, the game ball B is driven into the player so that the game ball B flows down the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B can be received at the first starting port 2002. The operation can be performed, the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown, and the original game by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 can be enjoyed. It is possible to raise the expectation for acceptance of.

Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 and a "small hit" is drawn as a result of the first special lottery, the character winning opening 2006 opens and closes, so that the game is played in the character winning opening 2006. It is possible to change the driving operation of the game ball B to "right-handed" so that the ball B can be accepted, and to drive the game ball B into the first guide passage 2521 provided with the accessory winning opening 2006. It is possible to raise the expectation for the acceptance of the game ball B into the accessory winning opening 2006.

The game ball B driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 may be accepted by the ordinary winning opening 2003 on the downstream side even if it is not accepted by the accessory winning opening 2006, and further, the ordinary winning opening 2003 There is a possibility that it will be accepted at the second starting port 2004, which is opened according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to, and as a result of the second special lottery, "small hit" or "big hit" May be drawn.

When the game ball B driven into the first guide passage 2521 is received by the accessory winning opening 2006, it is sent to the first distribution device 2530, so that the game ball B is placed in the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531. Depending on whether or not it is accommodated, the player can be thrilled.

When the game ball B sent to the first distribution device 2530 is housed in the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531, the game ball B is sent to the next second distribution device 2540. The player can be thrilled depending on whether the game ball B is distributed to the first V winning opening 2007 or the second losing opening 2543 in the distribution device 2540. In this second distribution device 2540, even if the game ball B is distributed to the second loss opening 2543, the game ball B passes through the second loss passage 2546 and has the second V winning opening 2008. Since it is sent to the distribution device 2550, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the second V winning opening 2008, and it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

The game ball B distributed to the second loss opening 2543 in the second distribution device 2540 is supplied to the third distribution table 2554 from the crune 2553 of the third distribution device 2550. Then, it is repelled by the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 of the third distribution table 2554, enters the central table 2554a through the third distribution middle rotating body 2556, and moves forward. When the player is transferred to, the player can be thrilled and excited depending on whether or not the player is accepted in the second V winning opening 2008, and the player can be entertained.

Then, when the game ball B is accepted in the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008, or when the game ball B is accepted in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the first special When a "big hit" is drawn as a result of the lottery and the result of the second special lottery, a lot of game balls B will be paid out by opening and closing the big winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 in a predetermined pattern. It is possible to perform a driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B can be received by the opening and closing large winning opening 2005.

At this time, the probability that the game ball B will reach the grand prize opening 2005 is higher for the player than for the person who circulated the first guide passage 2521 than for the person who circulated the second guide passage 2522. It is possible to refrain from "striking to the right" and adjust the striking strength so that the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522, and the striking operation of the game ball B can be enjoyed.

By the way, since the guide passage group 2520 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 has a weighted portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction, the weighted portion 2520a is provided. Looking at 2520a, it is difficult to determine which passage the game ball B is circulating in, so the player should have hit the second guide passage 2522 but entered the first guide passage 2521. It is possible to make the player think that the game ball B is in circulation in the guide passage group 2520. In addition, the game ball B hit at the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 can excite the player depending on whether or not the game ball B comes out from the exit of the second guide passage 2522. , It is possible to raise the expectation for the game, and when it comes out from the unexpected exit of the first guide passage 2521, it can give the player a surprise and surprise the player, and entertain the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[5-8 g. Another embodiment of the distribution passage group of the center accessory]
Subsequently, the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 of the embodiment different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 153 and 154. 153 (a) to 153 (d) are explanatory views showing an embodiment of a guide passage group different from FIG. 136, and FIGS. 154 (e) and 154 (f) are explanatory views showing an embodiment of a further different guide passage group. Is. In addition, in FIG. 153 and FIG. 154, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as described above.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 153 (a), the distance at which the upper end entrance of the second guide passage 2522 is separated from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 to the left is longer than that in FIG. 136. It was done. The guide passage group 2520 can also exert the same effect as described above.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 153 (b), the angle of the abutting portion 1006 of the front component 1000 is such that the abutting portion 1006 is easily bounced back toward the entrance side of the second guide passage 2522. Is changed, and the portion between the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 in the right portion 2502a on the front frame is lowered so that the second guide passage 2522 side (left side) is lower. It is tilted. As a result, the game ball B easily enters the second guide passage 2522 side, and the adjustment range of the driving strength of the game ball B in which the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522 becomes wider. (Ii) It is possible to facilitate the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the guide passage 2522.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 153 (c), in the guide passage group 2520 of FIGS. 136 and 153 (a) and (b), the entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are directed upward. While the opening is open, the upstream side of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 is extended to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction above the center accessory 2500, and the respective entrances are lined up and down. It is designed to open to the left in the state.

In this embodiment, a part of the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the game area 5a) constitutes a part of the first guide passage 2521, and a part of the upper right portion 2502a of the front frame is the second guide passage 2522. It constitutes a part. Further, in this embodiment, the length of the upstream space portion 2506 between the front frame upper right portion 2502a and the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the game area 5a) in the left-right direction is the first from the left end of the front frame upper right portion 2502a. The length is the length to each entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, which is narrower than the upstream space portion 2506 shown above in FIG. 136 and the like.

In this embodiment, in order to allow the game ball B to enter the entrance of the second guide passage 2522, is it the driving strength that abuts on a narrow portion on the left side of the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 in the right portion 2502a on the front frame? Since it is necessary to drive the game ball B with a driving strength that directly enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 that opens to the left, the game is compared with the embodiment of FIG. 136 and the like. The adjustment range of the driving strength of the ball B is narrowed. Further, the game ball B driven into the upstream space 2506 on the left side of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 separates the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. When it comes into contact with the left end of the wall portion (the portion between the two entrances), it may deviate from the upstream space portion 2506 depending on the momentum and angle of the bounced game ball B to the left. That is, even if the game ball B is driven with the strength to enter the upstream space portion 2506, it does not deviate to the left from the upstream space portion 2506 and enter neither the first guide passage 2521 nor the second guide passage 2522. There is a possibility that the left side of the center accessory 2500 will be distributed. For this reason, the difficulty level of the driving operation of the game ball B becomes high, so that the player's motivation for the driving operation of the game ball B can be increased, and the player can drive the game medium. It is possible to entertain the operation and suppress the decline in interest.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 153 (d), in the embodiment shown in FIG. 153 (c), a branch portion 2524 is provided in the middle of the first guide passage 2521 so as to communicate with the second guide passage 2522 in a one-way manner. Is. The branch portion 2524 is provided directly above the portion of the second guide passage 2522 that extends to the left and right (the right portion 2502a on the front frame) and is bent downward from the right end. In this embodiment, even if the game ball B is driven with the strength of entering the first guide passage 2521, the game ball B is second at the branch portion 2524 (when the driving strength is weak) depending on the driving strength. Since the branch is made to the guide passage 2522 side, the difficulty level of distribution of the game ball B to the second guide passage 2522 can be made lower than that of the embodiment of FIG. 153 (c).

In addition, in order for the game ball B to enter the second guide passage 2522, it is necessary to drive the game ball B weaker than the driving strength of the game ball B entering the first guide passage 2521, and the first guide passage 2521 Since the communicating branch portion 2524 is provided above the portion of the second guide passage 2522 that is bent downward, the game ball B that has entered the second guide passage 2522 is located at the portion that is bent downward. It does not bounce upward (branch portion 2524 side) and does not enter the first guide passage 2521 side through the branch portion 2524. That is, the branch portion 2524 communicates from the first guide passage 2521 to the second guide passage 2522 in a one-way manner.

Further, in this embodiment, when the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 having the branch portion 2524 is entered in the middle and the first guide passage 2521 is circulated, the first guide passage 2521 side at the portion of the branch portion 2524 Alternatively, since the branch is made to either side of the second guide passage 2522, the player can be thrilled depending on which side the game ball B branches to at the branch portion 2524, and the first guide can be excited. It is possible to entertain the flow of the game ball B in the passage 2521 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, in this embodiment, even if the game ball B enters the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 even though the player hits the game ball B aiming at the second guide passage 2522. Since there is a possibility that the branch portion 2524 of the first guide passage 2521 branches to the second guide passage 2522 side, the player may be harassed depending on whether or not the branch portion 2524 branches to the second guide passage 2522 side. It is possible to excite and entertain the player, and when the branch portion 2524 branches to the second guide passage 2522 side, the mistake of the player's driving operation is covered and the desired second guide passage 2522 is formed. Since the game ball B is distributed, it is possible to make the player feel as if he / she has gained, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 154 (e), the second guide passage 2522 is provided with a bypass portion 2525 that crosses the frame of the center accessory 2500. In this embodiment, the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 opens upward at a position to the left of the left end of the right portion 2502a on the front frame. Therefore, all the game balls B driven into the upstream space portion 2506 above the right portion 2502a on the front frame circulate in the first guide passage 2521. According to this embodiment, when the game ball B enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates through the bypass portion 2525, the game ball B crosses the frame of the center accessory 2500, and thus the player side. Since the distribution of the game ball B can be made conspicuous from the above, it becomes possible to make the player think that there is something good after the game ball B distributes the bypass portion 2525, and the player. It is possible to perform the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 having the bypass portion 2525, and to entertain the driving operation of the game ball B and suppress the deterioration of the interest. it can.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 154 (f), the entrances of the second guide passage 2522 are provided behind the first guide passage 2521, and the respective entrances are arranged in the front-rear direction. The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is provided on the front side of the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 is provided on the rear side of the front surface of the game panel 1100. In this embodiment, the front surface of the game panel 1100 is inclined to the right rear in the vicinity of the abutting portion 1006 of the front component 1000 in the upstream space portion 2506, and the game ball distributed along the front surface of the game panel 1100. B is guided to the second guide passage 2522 side. Further, the abutting portion 1006 of the front component 1000 is inclined so that the portion near the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 moves to the right as it goes backward, and faces the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B that has been hit vigorously can be reflected toward the entrance side of the second guide passage 2522. In this embodiment, since the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 appear to overlap side by side in the front-rear direction, the game is driven into the upstream space portion 2506 above the center accessory 2500. It can be difficult to determine which passage the ball B has entered, and the player can be noticed.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 155 to 159 and the like. FIG. 155 is a front view of the back unit of the game board, FIG. 156 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 157 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the back. FIG. 158 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 159 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the peripheral control unit 1500 and the effect display device 1600 are attached to the rear side.

The back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the three general winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, and a first general winning opening sensor 3001 provided in the starting opening unit 2100. One start port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the start port 2002, and a vibration sensor 3003 for detecting the vibration acting on the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) are provided.

Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010, which is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and has a box-shaped opening at the front and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and the back surface of the back box 3010. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the cage effect display device 1600 and a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the left side of the rear surface below the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 to connect the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. The relaying panel relay board 1710, the panel relay board cover 3025 attached to the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the panel relay board 1710, and the rear surface below the opening 3010a of the back box 3010. The effect relay board 3026, which is attached to the right side and relays the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and various decorative boards provided on the game board 5, and the back box so as to cover the rear side of the effect relay board 3026. The effect relay board cover 3027 attached to the 3010 is provided.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-shaped opening 3010a having an open front and a square penetrating rear wall, and a flat plate frame-shaped opening protruding rearward at a distance from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, the two fixing grooves 3010c which are recessed from the inside of the frame to the left on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. It is provided with a notch 3010d, which is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached, near the center of the right side in the left-right direction.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size capable of fitting the effect display device 1600 into the frame. The lock mechanism 3020 is slidably attached to the back box 3010 on the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from the rear.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the light guide plate effect unit 3100 and the like at appropriate positions. The vibration sensor 3003 is attached to a portion of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010a.

Further, the back unit 3000 is mounted on the lower front surface of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 mounted in the back box 3010 and the light guide plate effect unit 3100, and is mounted from the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000. The back lower ball discharge unit 3150 that receives the game ball B and discharges it downward, and the first distribution device 2530 and the second distribution of the center accessory 2500, which are attached to the right corner of the front surface of the light guide plate effect unit 3100. It includes a back right ball discharge unit 3170 that receives the game ball B from the device 2540 and discharges it downward.

Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the light guide plate effect unit 3100, and the back front effect unit 3200 extending along the left and right sides and the upper side of the light guide plate effect unit 3100, and the light guide plate effect unit 3100. The back front lower left effect unit 3300 attached to the lower left on the front side, the back front lower right effect unit 3400 attached to the lower right on the front side of the light guide plate effect unit 3100, and the back upper decorative body in the back front effect unit 3200. It is provided with a sub-state indicator 3500 provided near the right end of the 3211.

[5-9a. Light guide plate production unit]
Subsequently, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 160 to 162. FIG. 160A is a perspective view of the light guide plate effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 160B is a perspective view of the light guide plate effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 161 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the light guide plate and the pattern substrate in the light guide plate effect unit from the front. FIG. 162 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the first pattern of the light guide plate is made to emit light, and FIG. 162 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the second pattern of the light guide plate is made to emit light.

The light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. The light guide plate effect unit 3100 includes a square frame-shaped unit base 3101 attached to the front end of the back box 3010, a transparent flat plate-shaped light guide plate 3102 attached to the unit base 3101, and a unit base 3101 above the light guide plate 3102. It is attached to the first pattern substrate 3103 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the upper surface of the light guide plate 3102 are mounted, and to the unit base 3101 on the left side of the light guide plate 3102. A second pattern substrate 3104 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the left side surface of the light guide plate 3102 are mounted is provided.

Further, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 is a unit that covers the front of the upper substrate cover 3105 attached to the upper side of the unit base 3101 so as to cover the front of the first pattern substrate 3103 and the front of the second pattern substrate 3104. It includes a left board cover 3106 attached to the left side of the base 3101, and a left cooling fan 3107 and a right cooling fan 3108 attached to the lower side of the unit base 3101 at intervals in the left-right direction.

The light guide plate 3102 has only the first pattern 3110 (see FIG. 162 (a)) formed by innumerable uneven first reflecting portions that reflect only the light from above and the light from the left. It is provided with a second pattern 3120 (see FIG. 162 (b)) formed by innumerable second reflecting portions having an uneven shape that reflects the light forward. That is, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 can display the first pattern 3110 by emitting light when the LED of the first pattern substrate 3103 is made to emit light, and when the LED of the second pattern board 3104 is made to emit light, the second pattern is emitted. The 3120 can be displayed by light emission.

The light guide plate 3102 is a point-shaped light emitting portion 3102a (shaded portion in FIG. 162) that emits light in a dot shape by light emitted from the corresponding direction as a reflecting portion constituting the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120. And the linear light emitting unit 3102b (the cross-hatched portion in FIG. 162) that emits light linearly by the light emitted from the corresponding direction, and the spectral light emitting unit that emits light by dispersing the cocktail light emitted from the corresponding direction. It has 3102c (the mottled portion of FIG. 162) and. That is, the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 are formed by appropriately combining the point light emitting unit 3102a, the linear light emitting unit 3102b, and the spectral light emitting unit 3102c. Although not shown, the point light emitting unit 3102a, the linear light emitting unit 3102b, and the spectral light emitting unit 3102c form the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 by making the densities different from each other. There is.

Here, the cocktail light is a color containing two or more of the three primary colors of light. For example, when yellow light, which is a mixture of red and green light, is irradiated to the spectral light emitting part as cocktail light, the yellow light component is dispersed into red light and green light, and the red or green light is dispersed in the portion. The part that looks green appears. Alternatively, when white light is irradiated to the spectral light emitting part as cocktail light, the white light component is dispersed into red light, green light, and blue light, and the part that looks red, green, or blue in the relevant part or , Light of a color in which they are appropriately mixed appears, and it is possible to show rainbow-colored glittering light emission. When the spectroscopic light emitting unit is irradiated with light of only one of the three primary colors of light, the light has no component to be dispersed, so that the light of the color is used for light emission. For this reason, the spectroscopic light emitting unit can emit light in a single color or in a plurality of glittering colors depending on the color of the emitted light, and can produce a wider variety of light emission effects. it can.

In the light guide plate 3102, the innumerable first reflecting portions forming the first pattern 3110 and the innumerable second reflecting portions forming the second pattern 3120 are each formed with fine irregularities. When the LED of the first pattern substrate 3103 and the LED of the second pattern substrate 3104 are not emitted, the effect image and the like displayed on the effect display device 1600 arranged on the rear side appear transparent. , Can be visually recognized in good condition.

As shown in FIG. 162 (a), the first pattern 3110 is a pattern composed of the characters “decisive battle”. In this first pattern 3110, a part in which the shadow of the "decisive battle" extends radially outward and a plurality of arc-shaped parts are arranged radially outside the part centering on the character of the "decisive battle". ing. In the first pattern 3110, the part of the character "Decisive Battle" is formed by the dotted light emitting part 3102a, and the part is formed by the linear light emitting part 3102b in the shadow outside the character of "Decisive Battle", and the outside thereof. The arc-shaped portion of the above is formed by the spectral light emitting portion 3102c and the linear light emitting portion 3102b.

As shown in FIG. 162 (b), the second pattern 3120 is a pattern that imitates a predetermined character in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. The second pattern 3120 is studded with a central pattern portion 3121 composed of characters, a radial pattern portion 3122 extending outward radially from the central pattern portion 3121, and petals flying outside the central pattern portion 3121. It has a scattered pattern portion 3123 and the like. The central pattern portion 3121 is formed by a point-shaped light emitting portion 3102a whose periphery is bordered by the spectroscopic light emitting portion 3102c. The radiation pattern portion 3122 is formed by a spectroscopic light emitting portion 3102c bordered by a linear light emitting portion 3102b. The scatter pattern portion 3123 is formed by the spectroscopic light emitting portion 3102c.

The radial pattern portion 3122 of the second pattern 3120 is formed so as to be continuous with the radial decorative portion 3212b of the back left decorative body 3212 and the radial decorative portion 3213b of the back right decorative body 3213 of the back front effect unit 3200 (described later). See FIG. 172). As a result, when the second pattern 3120 is light-emittingly displayed, the radiation pattern portion 3122, the radiation decoration section 3212b, and the radiation decoration section 3213b appear to be connected to each other, so that the second pattern 3120 can be made to appear larger and the radiation decoration section can be displayed. Since the 3212b and the radiant decoration portion 3213b project forward, a sense of depth can be given to the second pattern 3120, and a strong impact can be given to the player.

Further, the light guide plate 3102 includes a lower notch portion 3102d notched upward from the lower side and a right notched portion 3102e notched from the right side to the left. The lower notch 3102d is for preventing contact with the third distribution table 2554 and the upper cover 2577 of the third distribution device 2550 in the center accessory 2500, and the right notch 3102e is for the center accessory. This is to prevent contact with the second guide passage 2522 twisted backward in the guide passage group 2520 of 2500.

The first pattern substrate 3103 is divided into three in the left-right direction, such as the left decorative substrate 3103a on the light guide plate, the middle decorative substrate 3103b on the light guide plate, and the right decorative substrate 3103c on the light guide plate. A plurality of full-color LEDs that irradiate light downward are mounted on the lower surface of the. The first pattern substrate 3103 is connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510 via the effect relay substrate 3026. The effect relay board 3026 is connected in the order of the left decorative board 3103a on the light guide plate, the middle decorative board 3103b on the light guide plate, and the right decorative board 3103c on the light guide plate in a beaded manner (see FIG. 174).

The second pattern substrate 3104 is divided into two in the vertical direction, such as the light guide plate upper left decorative substrate 3104a and the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3104b, and a plurality of substrates that irradiate the right side of each substrate with light to the right. Full color LED is mounted. The second pattern substrate 3104 is connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510 via the effect relay substrate 3026. The effect relay board 3026 is connected to the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3104b and the light guide plate upper left decorative board 3104a in the order of a string of beads (see FIG. 174).

The two left cooling fan 3107 and the right cooling fan 3108 mounted on the lower side of the unit base 3101 are the third distribution middle drive motor 2560 and the third distribution left drive of the third distribution device 2550 in the center accessory 2500. This is for cooling the motor 2561 and the third distribution right drive motor 2562. The left cooling fan 3107 and the right cooling fan 3108 are separated from each other to the left and right, and are mounted obliquely toward the front in the center in the left-right direction. The left cooling fan 3107 and the right cooling fan 3108 each have a left fan motor 3107a and a right fan motor 3108a connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via the effect relay board 3026 (see FIG. 174). ..

The light guide plate effect unit 3100 has a back lower ball discharge unit 3150, a back right ball discharge unit 3170, a back front effect unit 3200, a back front left lower effect unit 3300, and a back front lower right effect on the front surface of the outer circumference of the unit base 3101. Unit 3400, is attached. That is, all the effect units in the back unit 3000 are attached to the light guide plate effect unit 3100. As a result, when assembling the back unit 3000 (game board 5), all the other production units of the back unit 3000 such as the back lower ball discharge unit 3150 are attached to the light guide plate production unit 3100 to produce the light guide plate. All the production units can be attached to the back box 3010 only by attaching the unit 3100 to the back box 3010.

Further, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 is unitized by attaching a light guide plate 3102, a first pattern substrate 3103, a second pattern substrate 3104, and the like to a square frame-shaped unit base 3101. As a result, in the state of being assembled to the light guide plate effect unit 3100, the light guide plate 3102 can be handled by holding the unit base 3101 without touching the light guide plate 3102, so that the operator can handle the light guide plate 3102 at the time of assembly or the like. By touching the light guide plate 3102, it is possible to prevent fingerprints, stains, scratches, etc. from being attached to the light guide plate 3102, and it is possible to facilitate the handling of the light guide plate 3102.

By the way, when a decorative body to be light-emitting is provided on the rear side of the light guide plate, the light from the light-emitting decoration of the decorative body is emitted to the player side in front through the light guide plate. The light guide plate may appear to be partially shining, or the pattern displayed by light emission on the light guide plate may be visible. Then, when the light guide plate shines or the pattern is visible, it will appear to overlap with the decorative body that is luminescently decorated in the rear, so that the luminescent decoration of the decorative body will be difficult to see, and the effect of the luminescent decoration may be reduced. There is. In addition, if the pattern emitted by the light guide plate is visible in advance due to the light emitting decoration of the decorative body provided behind the light guide plate, when the pattern of the light guide plate is actually displayed by light emission, the player is notified. The impact given may be reduced, and the effect of the light guide plate may not be sufficiently obtained. Further, when the decorative body is provided behind the light guide plate, when the pattern is luminescently displayed on the light guide plate, the rear decorative body appears to overlap through the pattern. Therefore, depending on the shape and color of the decorative body, etc. There was a risk that the design of the light guide plate displayed with light emission would be difficult to see.

On the other hand, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment is located at the rearmost position in the back box 3010 when assembled on the game board 5, and is located at the rearmost position of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 (light guide plate 3102). There is no decoration on the back side. That is, since the back front effect unit 3200, the back front lower left effect unit 3300, and the back front lower right effect unit 3400 are provided on the front side of the light guide plate 3102, the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back left decorative body 3212, and Even if the back right decorative body 3213, etc. is light-emittingly decorated, it is possible that the light does not easily reach the light guide plate 3102.

Therefore, even if the decorative bodies such as the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 are light-emittingly decorated, the light guide plate 3102 (first pattern 3110 or second pattern 3120) appears to shine. Since this can be suppressed, the luminescent decoration of the decorative body does not become difficult to see, the luminescent decoration of the decorative body can be shown in a good state, and the effect of the luminescent decoration of the decorative body is fully exhibited. be able to.

Further, even if the decorative bodies such as the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 are light-emittingly decorated, the light guide plate 3102 (first pattern 3110 or second pattern 3120) appears to shine. Since this can be suppressed, the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can be seen by the player before the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 are displayed by light emission, so that the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can be seen. It is possible to prevent the impact on the player when the two patterns 3120 are displayed by light emission from being reduced, and it is possible to fully exert the effect of the light emission display of the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120. it can.

Further, since a decorative body such as a back-up decorative body 3211 is not provided behind the light guide plate 3102, even if the light guide plate 3102 displays the first pattern 3110 or the second picture 3120 by light emission, the first picture 3110 or the first picture 3110 The decorative body does not appear to overlap the rear side of the two patterns 3120, and the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can be shown in good condition, and the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 are produced by the light emitting display. The effect can be fully exerted.

Further, as described above, the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, the back right decorative body 3213, and the like are not visible on the rear side of the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120. Since the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can be shown in good condition, the first pattern is irrespective of the shape and color of the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, the back right decorative body 3213, and the like. The 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can be shown in good condition. Therefore, the shapes and colors of the decorative bodies such as the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 shall be considered in consideration of the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102. It is not necessary, the degree of freedom in designing the decorative body can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 provided with the decorative body having a higher decorative effect can be provided.

Further, since the light guide plate effect unit 3100 is provided on the rearmost side in the back box 3010 and the light guide plate 3102 is brought as close as possible to the effect display device 1600, the effect display device 1600 Since the direction of light is substantially perpendicular to the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 may appear to be partially shining, or the first pattern 3110 or the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 may appear to shine. It is possible to obtain the same effect as described above.

Further, since the light guide plate 3102 is brought as close as possible to the effect display device 1600, the light guide plate 3102 that emits light is displayed depending on the effect image (including the screen color) displayed on the effect display device 1600. The first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can be made to stand out or be enhanced, and the effect of the light guide plate 3102 can be further enhanced. Further, by bringing the light guide plate 3102 close to the effect display device 1600, the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 are illusioned with the effect image of the effect display device 1600, and the effect of the effect display device 1600 is produced. The image can be illusioned with the first pattern 3110 or the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102, and a more diverse effect can be shown to the player.

The effect display device 1600 may be mounted on the rear side of the light guide plate effect unit 3100. As a result, when the effect display device 1600 is attached to the light guide plate effect unit 3100, the rear side of the light guide plate 3102 is covered by the effect display device 1600, so that it is more difficult to touch the light guide plate 3102. The same effect can be achieved.

[5-9b. Back lower ball discharge unit]
Subsequently, the back lower ball discharge unit 3150 of the back unit 3000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 to 159 and the like. The lower back ball discharge unit 3150 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the unit base 3101. The back lower ball discharge unit 3150 receives the received game ball B at the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 and the three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200, and discharges the game ball B to the lower substrate holder 1200. Is. The back lower ball discharge unit 3150 is used for the general winning opening sensor 3001 for separately detecting the game balls B received in the three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 and the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. It has a first start port sensor 3002 that detects the received game ball B.

Further, the back lower ball discharge unit 3150 receives the game ball B which is received by the second V winning opening 2008 and the third loss opening 2555 and discharged downward in the third distribution device 2550 of the center accessory 2500. , Is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200.

Further, the back lower ball discharge unit 3150 detects an out ball B received in the out port 1008 under the opening for receiving the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002. It has a mounting portion 3155 that allows the unit 3030 to be mounted. By attaching the out ball detection unit 3030 to the attachment portion 3155, the game ball B received in the out port 1008 can be detected.

[5-9c. Back right ball discharge unit]
Subsequently, the back right ball discharge unit 3170 of the back unit 3000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 to 159 and the like. The back right ball discharge unit 3170 is attached to the lower right side of the unit base 3101. The back right ball discharge unit 3170 receives the game ball B received in the first loss opening 2535 of the first distribution device 2530 and the first V winning opening 2007 of the second distribution device 2540 in the center accessory 2500. This is for discharging to the lower substrate holder 1200.

[5-9d. Back front production unit]
Subsequently, the back front effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 155 to 159, FIG. 163, and the like. FIG. 163 is a front view showing the arrangement of each decorative substrate of the back front effect unit in the back unit. The back front effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3101 in the light guide plate effect unit 3100.

The back front effect unit 3200 is formed in a U shape with the front view open downward, and is attached to the unit base 3101 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 on the decorative body base 3201 and on the front side of the upper side of the decorative body base 3201. On the back left decorative body 3211 that is attached and extends to the left and right, the back left decorative body 3212 that is attached to the front side of the left side of the decorative body base 3201, and the front side of the right side of the decorative body base 3201. It is equipped with a back right decorative body 3213 that is attached and extends vertically.

Further, the back front effect unit 3200 is provided between the back upper decorative body 3211 and the decorative body base 3201, and has a back upper decorative substrate 3221 for emitting and decorating the back upper decorative body 3211 and a back left decorative body 3212. It is provided between the back left decorative body 3212 and the back left decorative body 3212, and is provided between the back right decorative body 3213 and the decorative body base 3201. It is provided with a back right decorative substrate 3223 for light-emitting decoration of the right decorative body 3213.

Further, the back-front effect unit 3200 suggests the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and also suggests those A sub-status indicator 3500 for displaying the number of holds is provided. The sub-state indicator 3500 is provided near the right end of the back-up decorative body 3211.

The back surface decorative body 3211 has translucency as a whole. The back-up decorative body 3211 includes a logo portion 3211a in which three circles are arranged so as to overlap in the left-right direction, and a logo decorative portion 3211b in which small spheres are arranged in a bead shape along the outer circumference of the logo portion 3211a. Have. In the logo portion 3211a, characters of a predetermined logo in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 are formed as reliefs. The front surface of the back surface decorative body 3211 is inclined so as to project forward as it goes upward. In the present embodiment, a part of the logo decoration unit 3211b constitutes the sub status display unit 3501 of the sub status display 3500.

The back left decorative body 3212 has translucency as a whole. The front surface of the back left decorative body 3212 is inclined so as to project forward as it goes to the left. The back left decorative body 3212 extends radially around the right outer side so as to cross the main decorative portion 3212a, which is formed in a three-dimensional uneven shape by imitating a flame over the entire surface, and the main decorative portion 3212a. It has a radiant decoration portion 3212b and the like. The main decorative portion 3212a is formed so that a colorless (transparent) portion, a red portion, and a yellow portion are mixed. The radial decoration portion 3212b is formed to be colorless (transparent). The radiation decoration portion 3212b is formed so as to be continuous with the radiation pattern portion 3122 of the second pattern 3120 when the second pattern 3120 is emitted and displayed on the light guide plate 3102.

The back right decorative body 3213 has translucency as a whole. The back right decorative body 3213 is slightly inclined with respect to the surface in the front-rear direction so that the front surface faces substantially left and the front side is located slightly to the right of the rear side. The back right decorative body 3213 extends radially around the left outer side so as to cross the main decorative portion 3213a, which is formed in a three-dimensional uneven shape by imitating a flame over the entire surface, and the main decorative portion 3213a. It has a radial decoration portion 3213b and the like. The main decorative portion 3213a is formed in red. The radial decoration portion 3213b is formed to be colorless (transparent). The radiation decoration portion 3213b is formed so as to be continuous with the radiation pattern portion 3122 of the second pattern 3120 when the second pattern 3120 is light-emittingly displayed on the light guide plate 3102.

The back-up decorative substrate 3221 is a flat plate having a substantially constant top and bottom and extending to the left and right, and is provided in an inclined state along the front surface of the back-up decoration body 3211, and a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the front surface. ing. The surface of the back surface decorative substrate 3221 is formed to be white. The back-up decorative substrate 3221 is connected to the effect relay substrate 3026 via the back-left decorative substrate 3222.

The back left decorative substrate 3222 has a flat plate shape extending vertically, and is attached with the substrate surface facing in the front-rear direction, and the surface is formed in white. The back left decorative substrate 3222 includes a plurality of first LEDs 3222a mounted behind the main decorative portion 3212a of the back left decorative body 3212, and a plurality of first LEDs 3222a mounted behind the radial decorative portion 3212b of the back left decorative body 3212. The second LED 3222b and the like. The first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b are full-color LEDs, respectively. The back left decorative board 3222 is connected to the effect relay board 3026. When the first LED 3222a is made to emit light, the main decorative portion 3212a of the back left decorative body 3212 can be made to emit light, and when the second LED 3222b is made to emit light, the back left decorative substrate 3222 is radiatedly decorated. Part 3212b can be radiated and decorated. The plurality of second LEDs 3222b are arranged in a row in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction) of the radiation decoration portion 3212b at the portion of each radiation decoration portion 3212b.

The back right decorative substrate 3223 has a flat plate shape extending vertically, and is attached with the substrate surface facing left and right, and the surface is formed in white. The back right decorative substrate 3223 is mounted on the right side of the first LED 3223a mounted on the right side of the main decorative portion 3213a of the back right decorative body 3213 and on the right side of the radial decorative portion 3213b of the back right decorative body 3213. It has two LEDs 3223b and. The first LED 3223a and the second LED 3223b are full-color LEDs, respectively. The back right decorative board 3223 is connected to the effect relay board 3026 via the back upper decorative board 3221 and the back left decorative board 3222. When the first LED 3223a is made to emit light, the main decorative portion 3213a of the back right decorative body 3213 can be made to emit light, and when the second LED 3223b is made to emit light, the back right decorative substrate 3223 is radiatedly decorated. The part 3213b can be radiated and decorated. The plurality of second LEDs 3223b are arranged in a row in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction or front-rear direction) of the radiation decoration portion 3213b at the portion of each radiation decoration portion 3213b (see FIG. 164 (a)).

Further, the back right decorative substrate 3223 is mounted on a substrate surface facing to the right, and has a plurality of third LEDs 3223c capable of illuminating a portion on the right side of the center accessory 2500. The third LED 3223c is a full-color LED. When the third LED 3223c is made to emit light, it is possible to brightly illuminate the accessory winning opening 2006, the first distribution device 2530, etc. in the center accessory 2500.

Further, on the back right decorative substrate 3223, a plurality of sub-state LEDs 3510 for displaying a sub-design or the like on the sub-state indicator 3500 are mounted on the substrate surface facing left at the top. The sub-state LED 3510 is a side-view type LED that irradiates light in a direction parallel to the mounted substrate surface. The light from each sub-state LED 3510 is guided by the light guide pin 3520 to the rightmost sub-state display unit 3501 in the logo decoration unit 3211b of the back-up decorative body 3211 and radiated forward. The sub-state LED 3510 is a second sub-design LED 3512 composed of one first sub-design LED 3511 consisting of a full-color LED for suggesting the first special lottery result and one full-color LED for suggesting the second special lottery result. And two first sub-holding number LEDs 3513 consisting of a single color LED for displaying the holding number of the first special lottery result, and two seconds consisting of a single color LED for displaying the holding number of the second special lottery result. It has a sub-holding number LED3514 and.

The back-front effect unit 3200, in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, is provided at the rear through a space surrounded by the back-top decorative body 3211, the back-left decorative body 3212, and the back-right decorative body 3213. The first picture 3110 and the second picture 3120, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, etc., which are emitted and displayed on the light guide plate 3102 of the light plate effect unit 3100, are visually recognized from the front (player side) in good condition. Can be done. Further, the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 can decorate the surroundings of the first pattern 3110, the second pattern 3120, and the effect image, and the appearance in the game area 5a. Can be improved.

Further, according to the back front effect unit 3200, the back top decorative substrate 3221, the back left decorative substrate 3222, and the back right decorative substrate 3223 are appropriately made to emit light by appropriately emitting the LEDs mounted on the back top decorative substrate 3221, the back left decorative substrate 3222, and the back right decorative substrate 3211. The decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 can be light-emitting decorated, and the light-emitting effect using them can be shown to the player.

Further, according to the back front effect unit 3200, the second LED 3222b of the back left decorative board 3222 and the second LED 3222b of the back right decorative board 3223 match the light emission display of the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 in the light guide plate effect unit 3100. By emitting light from the LED 3223b and radiating the radiant decoration portion 3212b of the back left decorative body 3212 and the radiant decoration portion 3213b of the back right decorative body 3213, the radiant decoration portion 3122 of the second pattern 3120 is radiated to the left and right outside. The decorative portion 3212b and the radial decorative portion 3213b can be made to appear to be continuous.

Further, since the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 of the back front effect unit 3200 are inclined so that the front end side protrudes forward from the center side of the game area 5a toward the outside in the left-right direction, the guide is guided. A sense of depth can be given to the second pattern 3120 by the radiation decoration part 3212b and the radiation decoration part 3213b that are continuous with the radiation pattern part 3122 of the second pattern 3120 of the light plate 3102.

For this reason, the player can create a wide and large light emitting decoration (light emitting effect) that spreads to the left and right by the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 and the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 of the back front effect unit 3200. Because it can be shown to the player, it can have a strong impact on the player, attract the player's attention strongly, and I think that there is something good for the player. It is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest.

Further, since the back left decorative body 3212 of the back front effect unit 3200 is located behind the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the first LED 3222a and the first LED 3222a of the back left decorative board 3222 (Ii) When the LED 3222b is made to emit light, the rear frame portion 2504 of the center accessory 2500 can be made to emit light and be decorated, and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100 is made difficult to see from the player side (front). Can be done.

[5-9e. Back front left lower production unit]
Subsequently, the back front lower left effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 155 to 159, FIG. 163, and the like. The back front lower left effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the left side of the lower front surface of the unit base 3101 in the light guide plate effect unit 3100 and above the left cooling fan 3107.

The back front lower left effect unit 3300 guides the back lower left decorative body 3301 and the back lower left decorative body 3301 having a translucent shape in which the characters "decision" are formed so as to project diagonally upward. It is provided between the decorative body base 3302 attached to the unit base 3101 of the light plate effect unit 3100, the decorative body base 3302, and the back lower left decorative body 3301, and the character "decision" of the back lower left decorative body 3301. The lower left decorative substrate 3303 for luminescent decoration of the portion and the lower left decorative substrate 3304 for luminescent decoration of the outer periphery of the lower left decorative body 3301 attached to the lower surface of the decorative body base 3302 (FIG. 174) and.

The lower left decorative substrate 3303 on the lower back and the lower left decorative substrate 3304 on the lower back have white surfaces. A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the upper surfaces of the lower back upper left decorative substrate 3303 and the lower back left decorative substrate 3304, respectively. By appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower back upper left decorative board 3303 and the lower back left decorative board 3304, the character portion of the "decision" on the lower back left decorative body 3301 can be light-emitting and decorated. The outer circumference of the character portion of "" can be light-emitting decorated, or the entire back lower left decorative body 3301 can be light-emitting decorated.

[5-9f. Back front lower right production unit]
Subsequently, the back front lower right effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 155 to 159, FIG. 163, and the like. The back front lower right effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the right side of the lower front surface of the unit base 3101 in the light guide plate effect unit 3100 and above the right cooling fan 3108.

The back front lower right production unit 3400 has a translucent back lower right decorative body 3401 and a back lower right decorative body 3401 that are formed so that the characters "war" are relief-shaped and project diagonally upward. It is provided between the decorative body base 3402 attached to the unit base 3101 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100, the decorative body base 3402, and the lower right decorative body 3401, and is used for the "war" of the lower right decorative body 3401. The lower right decorative substrate 3403 for luminescent decoration of the character part and the lower right decorative substrate 3404 for lower back right decorative body 3401 attached to the lower surface of the decorative body base 3402 for luminescent decoration. (See FIG. 174).

The surface of the lower back upper right decorative substrate 3403 and the lower back lower right decorative substrate 3404 is formed in white. A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the upper surfaces of the lower right decorative substrate 3403 and the lower right decorative substrate 3404 on the lower back. By appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower back upper right decorative board 3403 and the lower back right decorative board 3404, the character portion of the "war" of the lower right decorative body 3401 can be light-emitting and decorated. The outer circumference of the character portion of "war" can be luminescently decorated, or the entire lower right decorative body 3401 can be luminescently decorated.

[5-9 g. Sub status indicator]
Next, the sub-state indicator 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 164 and 165. FIG. 164 (a) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the back right decorative substrate of the back front effect unit in the back unit, the sub-state indicator, and the right part of the center accessory by the left side cross section, and (b) is (b). a) It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the back right decorative board of the back front effect unit in a back unit, a sub-state indicator, and the right part of a center accessory from the front. FIG. 165 is a wiring diagram showing wiring of some LEDs of the sub-state LED on the back right decorative substrate.

The sub-state display 3500 is drawn by the effect display device 1600 by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002, separately from the effect image for suggesting the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result. The result of the first special lottery and the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 can be displayed to suggest the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery. It displays the number of pending items.

The sub-state indicator 3500 is provided near the right end of the back-up decorative body 3211 in the back-front effect unit 3200 so as to be always visible from the front (player side). The sub-state display 3500 includes a sub-state display unit 3501 forming a part of the logo decoration portion 3211b in which small spheres of the back-up decoration body 3211 are arranged in a bead shape in the back-front effect unit 3200, and a back-front effect. A plurality of sub-state LEDs 3510 mounted on the upper left surface of the back right decorative substrate 3223 of the unit 3200, and a plurality of light guide pins 3520 for guiding light from the sub-state LEDs 3510 to the front end of the sub-state display unit 3501. And have.

The sub-state display unit 3501 extends up and down in an arc shape along the outer circumference of the logo portion 3211a in the back-up decorative body 3211. Further, the sub-state display unit 3501 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward.

The plurality of sub-state LEDs 3510 are side-view type LEDs that are arranged vertically on the back right decorative substrate 3223 and irradiate light in a direction parallel to the mounted substrate surface (here, forward). Since the plurality of sub-state LEDs 3510 are mounted on the back right decorative board 3223, they are connected to the effect relay board 3026 via the back top decorative board 3221 and the back left decorative board 3222, and are connected to the effect relay board 3026. Light emission is controlled by the connected peripheral control board 1510.

The sub-state LED 3510 is a second sub-design LED 3512 composed of one first sub-design LED 3511 consisting of a full-color LED for suggesting the first special lottery result and one full-color LED for suggesting the second special lottery result. And two first sub hold number LEDs 3513 consisting of a single color LED for displaying the hold number of the first special lottery result, and a single color LED (for example, a red LED) for displaying the hold number of the second special lottery result. It is composed of two second sub-holding number LEDs 3514 and.

The rear end of the light guide pin 3520 is located in front of the sub-state LED 3510, and the front end penetrates one sphere in the sub-state display unit 3501 and is located near the front end of the sphere.

The sub-state indicator 3500 displays the light emitting mode (lighting, extinguishing, blinking, light emitting color, etc.) of the sub-state LED 3510 as a sub symbol. Specifically, when suggesting the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn, the first sub-symbol LED 3511 and the second sub-symbol LED 3512 are blinked in red during a predetermined fluctuation time. In this embodiment, turning on and off is repeated every 2F (2 / 30sec).

Then, when the lottery first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "missing", the first sub symbol LED 3511 and the second sub symbol LED 3512 are lit in red as the "missing" symbol. On the other hand, when the lottery first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "hit", the first sub symbol LED 3511 and the second sub symbol LED 3512 are lit in green as the "hit" symbol.

In addition, the display of the number of hold of the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by the sub status indicator 3500 is the two first sub hold numbers LED3513 and the second sub hold number arranged vertically in each case. The number of holds is displayed by the combination of the lighting states of the LEDs 3514. Specifically, when the number of holds is "0", the upper and lower two are turned off, when the number of holds is "1", the upper is turned on and the lower is turned off, and when the number of holds is "2", the upper and lower lights are turned off. The upper and lower two are lit, and when the number of holds is "3", the upper part is blinked and the lower part is lit, and when the number of holds is "4", the upper and lower two are blinking. In this way, the number of holds is displayed by the combination of the lighting states of the two LEDs in the first sub hold number LED 3513 and the second sub hold number LED 3514.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the first sub symbol LED 3511 and the second sub symbol LED 3512 are full-color LEDs, but as described above, the first sub symbol LED 3511 and the second sub symbol LED 3512 emit light in red or green as sub symbols. It is made to emit light in blue. Therefore, in the back right decorative substrate 3223, as shown in FIG. 165, the anode and cathode of the blue light emitting elements of the first sub-design LED 3511 and the second sub-design LED 3512 are connected and short-circuited. As a result, even if some kind of malfunction occurs, electricity is not supplied to the blue light emitting element, and the first sub symbol LED 3511 and the second sub symbol LED 3512 do not emit blue light. Therefore, the sub-design is not displayed due to the blue color that normally does not emit light, and it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game. it can. Further, since the anode and cathode of the blue light emitting element that is not used are connected and short-circuited, it is possible to prevent static electricity from being accumulated in the light emitting element, and the first sub-design LED 3511 and the second sub-design LED 3511 and the second due to static electricity can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the sub symbol LED3512 from being damaged and to display the sub symbol reliably.

As described above, according to the sub-state display 3500 of the present embodiment, the sub-symbols suggesting the special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by the sub-state display 3500 are displayed. Therefore, even if you miss the display of the main symbol by the effect image on the effect display device 1600, or if you do not understand the suggestion of the special lottery result by the main symbol, you can see the special lottery by looking at the sub symbol. The lottery result can be recognized by the player.

Further, in the sub-state display 3500, since the sub-state display unit 3501 forms a part of the logo decoration portion 3211b in the back-up decorative body 3211, the sub-state LED 3510 is made to emit light to display the sub design or the like. Then, the logo decoration part 3211b appears to be light-emittingly decorated, but the game ball is accepted at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result Is drawn, the light emitting mode of the sub-state display unit 3501 in the logo decoration unit 3211b changes. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the light emitting mode is changed according to the result of the first special lottery and the result of the second special lottery, and can be made to recognize the sub symbol. At this time, since the sub-state display unit 3501 forming a part of the logo decoration unit 3211b is decorated with the sub-designs suggesting the lottery first special lottery result and the second special lottery result, conventionally. Unlike the above technique, the sub-design does not look inorganic, the sub-design can be blended into the decoration, and the sub-state indicator 3500 and thus the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved.

Further, the light from the sub-state LED 3510 mounted on the back right decorative board 3223 is guided by the light guide pin 3520 to the sub state display unit 3501 provided at a position away from the back right decorative board 3223. Therefore, it is possible to guide the light to the front end of the sub state display unit 3501 in a good state to display the sub symbol or the like. Further, since the light from the sub-state LED 3510 can be guided to an arbitrary position by the light guide pin 3520, the logo decoration portion 3211b provided along the outer circumference of the logo portion 3211a of the back upper decoration body 3211 The light can be guided to the position of the sub-state display unit 3501 which constitutes a part thereof, and the sub-design can be blended into the decoration of the back-up decorative body 3211 to improve the appearance.

Further, on the back right decorative substrate 3223 on which the sub state LED 3510 for displaying the sub design or the like is mounted, the first LED 3223a and the second LED 3223b for emitting and decorating the back right decorative body 3213 and the center accessory 2500 Since the third LED 3223c for illuminating the first distribution device 2530 and the like is further mounted, the game ball distributed by making the back right decorative body 3213 emit light and decorating the first distribution device 2530 and making it brighter. B can be made easy to see.

In the above embodiment, the sub-design for suggesting the special lottery result is displayed by red light and green light, but the present invention is not limited to this, and red light is used. The sub symbol may be displayed by the blue light, or the sub symbol may be displayed by the green light and the blue light. Further, the sub symbol may be displayed by only one of the red light, the green light, and the blue light. At this time, by connecting the anode and cathode of the light emitting element of a color that is not used (not emitting light) in the full-color LED and short-circuiting (short-circuiting), the same effect as described above can be obtained. It is desirable to connect the anode and cathode of the light emitting element of an unused color to short-circuit them, and then connect them to the GND (ground), so that static electricity can be dropped to the GND and escaped.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the sub-state indicator 3500, as shown in FIG. 165, the anode and cathode of the unused light emitting element among the three light emitting elements of the full-color LED are connected and short-circuited. Although the example in which it is used is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative body is illuminated by light emission, a predetermined part is illuminated, and the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 are displayed by light emission. It may be applied to a full-color LED such as. Specifically, for example, when a decorative body that does not transmit light of a specific color or a decorative body that has a portion that does not transmit light of a specific color is made to emit light and decorate with a full-color LED, the color that does not transmit is used. Since it is not necessary to emit light, the anode and cathode of the light emitting element of the color are connected and short-circuited. As a result, it is possible to prevent the luminescent decoration of the decorative body from appearing unnatural by emitting light in a color that does not need to be emitted due to a malfunction or the like, and it is possible to achieve the same effect as described above. ..

More specifically, for example, the parts (main decorative portion 3212a and main decorative portion 3213a) formed in red in the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 in the back front effect unit 3200. ) Is made so that only red and green light can be transmitted, and when the full-color LEDs (first LED 3222a and first LED 3223a) provided corresponding to the relevant part emit blue light, the relevant part is blue. The part is not decorated with light emission because it does not transmit light, but the part with a different color adjacent to the part is decorated with light emission by the blue light, and the intended effect is produced by the unintended light emission decoration. There is a risk that it will not be fully exerted. On the other hand, by connecting the anode and cathode of the blue light emitting element to the full-color LED provided corresponding to the part that does not transmit blue light, the full-color LED can be short-circuited. It is possible to prevent an unintended light emitting decoration from being performed on a part adjacent to the relevant part due to a malfunction, and it is possible to prevent an unnatural light emitting effect from being performed, and it is also intended. The effect can be exerted, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Further, in the above embodiment, the sub-state LED 3510 is mounted on the back right decorative substrate 3223, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a substrate different from the back right decorative substrate 3223 (for example, a sub) is shown. The sub-state LED 3510 may be mounted on the status display board), or the sub-state LED 3510 may be mounted on the back-up decorative board 3221.

[5-9h. Out ball detection unit]
Next, the out-ball detection unit 3030 that can be attached to the attachment portion 3155 of the back lower ball discharge unit 3150 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 166 to 170 and the like. FIG. 166 (a) is a front view of the out ball detection unit in the back unit, (b) is a right side view of the out ball detection unit, (c) is a rear view of the out ball detection unit, and (d). ) Is a perspective view of the out-ball detection unit viewed from the front, (e) is a perspective view of the out-ball detection unit viewed from the back, and (f) is a perspective view of the out-ball detection unit and the lower right front position. (G) is a perspective view of the out-ball detection unit as viewed from the lower right rear. FIG. 167 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the out sphere detection unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 167 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the out sphere detection unit disassembled and viewed from the rear.

Further, FIG. 168 (a) is a perspective view showing the relationship between the game panel and the out-ball detection unit, and FIG. 168 (b) is a perspective view showing the out-ball detection unit in contact with the game panel. FIG. 169 is an enlarged cross-sectional view seen from the right side after being assembled on the game board and cut up and down at the center of the out port right sensor. FIG. 170 is a perspective view showing the vicinity of the out port from the front in a state of being assembled on the game board.

In the present embodiment, the out ball detection unit 3030 for detecting the game ball B received in the out port 1008 is formed so as to be able to be attached to the attachment portion 3155 of the back lower ball discharge unit 3150. When the game board 5 of the present embodiment is attached to the main body frame 4 of the first embodiment, the out-ball detection unit 3030 may or may not be attached.

The out-ball detection unit 3030 is driven into the game area 5a, and the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006. This is for detecting a game ball B (a game ball B for which a privilege has not been given, also referred to as an "out ball") that has not been accepted in the game. In the present embodiment, the game ball B discharged from the out port 1008 is detected.

The out ball detection unit 3030 is inserted into the out recess 1101 of the game panel 1100 from the rear, and the unit main body 3031 attached to the front surface of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 and the out port left sensor attached to the unit main body 3031. It includes a 3032 and an out port right sensor 3033, and a cover 3034 attached to the unit main body 3031 so as to cover the rear side of the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033.

The unit main body 3031 includes a tubular tubular portion 3031a that is inserted into the out recess 1101 of the game panel 1100 and extends in a tubular shape in the front-rear direction, and a partition portion 3031b that divides the inside of the tubular portion 3031a into left and right. , The flange portion 3031c protruding from the rear end of the tubular portion 3031a in a flat plate shape in the left-right direction, and the out-port left sensor 3032 and the out-port right sensor 3033 recessed from the rear end side of the tubular portion toward the front are inserted. It is provided with an insertion recess 3031d. The front end of the tubular portion 3031a is substantially the same size as the out port 1008 of the front component 1000, is long to the left and right, and is inclined so that the inner surface on the lower side is lowered toward the rear side.

The partition portion 3031b is provided near the rear end of the tubular portion 3031a, and is partitioned to a size that allows one game ball B to pass on both the left and right sides. The partition portion 3031b is curved so that the front end side projects forward as it goes downward, and is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B and projects forward. The insertion recess 3031d is inclined so that the front surface side is perpendicular to the lower inclined inner surface of the tubular portion 3031a and moves backward as it goes upward.

The out port left sensor 3032 detects the game ball B that has circulated on the left side of the partition portion 3031b in the tubular portion 3031a of the unit main body 3031. The out port right sensor 3033 detects the game ball B that has circulated on the right side of the partition portion 3031b in the tubular portion 3031a of the unit main body 3031. The out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 are non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches.

The cover 3034 is curved so as to guide the game ball B that has passed through the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 downward, and has a partition plate 3034a in the center in the left-right direction.

In the out ball detection unit 3030, the flange portion 3031c of the unit main body 3031 is attached to the attachment portion 3155 on the front surface of the back lower ball discharge unit 3150 (see FIG. 169). Further, in the out-ball detection unit 3030, the tubular portion 3031a of the unit main body 3031 is inserted into the out recess 1101 of the game panel 1100 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the front surface of the flange portion 3031c is the game panel 1100. It is in contact with the rear surface (see FIGS. 168 and 169).

When the out-ball detection unit 3030 is assembled on the game board 5, the upper part of the front end of the tubular portion 3031a of the unit main body 3031 projects forward from the rear end of the out-guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000 (FIG. 169). See). That is, the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 is inserted into the tubular portion 3031a of the unit main body 3031. Further, the lower end of the cover 3034 passes through the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 and projects below the lower surface of the substrate holder 1200 (see FIG. 169).

In the game area 5a, the out-ball detection unit 3030 is such that the game ball B, which is guided backward by the out-guide unit 1003 after flowing down to the downstream end of the inner rail 1002 or the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000. It is supplied into the tubular portion 3031a, is detected by either the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor 3033, and is discharged downward by the cover 3034. The out-ball detection unit 3030 discharges the game ball B to the island facility side of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed without bringing the game ball B into contact with the substrate holder 1200.

According to the out-ball detection unit 3030 of the present embodiment, the player is driven into the game area 5a to enter the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the like. Since it is possible to detect the game ball B (“out ball”) that has not been accepted by any of the prize winning openings 2006, for example, the acceptance of the game ball B into a specific winning opening is continuously detected. If the "out ball" is not detected even though the ball is out, it means that the cheating is being performed on a specific winning opening, and it is possible to notify that the cheating is being carried out.

In addition, since the number can be counted by detecting the "out ball", the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the accessory From the number of "safe balls" counted by the detection of the game ball B received in the winning opening 2006 and the number of "out balls", the ratio of "safe balls" in the pachinko machine 1 can be known.

Further, in the out ball detection unit 3030, since the partition portion 3031b partitions between the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 provided on the left and right, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500. Can be guided to the out-port left sensor 3032 side, and the game ball B that has flowed down the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be guided to the out-port right sensor 3033 side. The game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the object 2500 can be mainly detected, and the game ball B that has flowed down the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be mainly detected by the out-port right sensor 3033. Therefore, it is determined whether the player has a tendency of "left-handed" or "right-handed" based on the number of game balls B detected per hour by the out-mouth left sensor 3032 and the out-mouth right sensor 3033. Based on the determination, it is possible to promote the optimum driving operation for the game situation and enjoy the intended game.

Further, since the protrusion of the partition portion 3031b to the front is shortened so that the game ball B can easily get over the game ball B, when a large number of game balls B enter the out port 1008 per hour, the relatively game ball of the partition portion 3031b The game ball B can be released to the left side or the right side where the distribution amount of B is small, and the game ball B can be discharged without delay at the out port 1008.

Further, since the lower end of the cover 3034 is projected downward from the discharge portion 1201 of the board holder 1200, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening The game ball B (“safe ball”) received in 2005 and the accessory winning opening 2006 and discharged onto the board holder 1200 flows back in the out ball detection unit 3030 to the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor. It is possible to prevent the detection by 3033, and it is possible to accurately detect only the "out ball".

In this embodiment, the out-ball detection unit 3030 is attached to the back unit 3000, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the out-ball detection unit 3030 may be attached to the game panel 1100. At this time, if the game panel 1100 has the out recess 1101, the out ball detection unit 3030 can be attached, so that the game panel 1100 can correspond to the existing game panel 1100 having the out recess 1101. At the same time, it can be retrofitted to the existing game board 5.

Further, in the game board 5, all the game balls B (“global”) hit in the game area 5a are detected, and all the game balls B (“global”) discharged from the game area 5a are detected. ) Is detected, since only the "out ball" is detected by the out ball detection unit 3030, the numbers of "out ball", "safe ball", and "global ball" are compared. Therefore, it is possible to detect the occurrence of ball clogging in the game board 5.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, the main effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 171 and 172. FIG. 171 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the second pattern is luminescent and decorated on the light guide plate of the light guide plate effect unit of the back unit. FIG. 172 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the first pattern is luminescent and decorated on the light guide plate of the light guide plate effect unit of the back unit. The game board 5 produces a light guide plate of the back unit 3000 according to the result of the first special lottery and the result of the second special lottery, which are drawn when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. The unit 3100, the back front effect unit 3200, the back front lower left effect unit 3300, and the back front lower right effect unit 3400 perform a predetermined light emission effect.

Specifically, as a light emitting effect using the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 171, it is mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 arranged on the upper side of the light guide plate 3102 in the front view. The plurality of LEDs are made to emit light, and the first pattern 3110 is made to emit light and be decorated. As a result, the characters "decisive battle" are luminescently decorated in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 and behind the back front effect unit 3200, thereby suggesting the arrival of a chance to the player. It is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress the decline in interest by making people think that there is something good.

Further, as a light emitting effect using the light guide plate effect unit 3100, for example, as shown in FIG. 172, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the second pattern substrate 3104 arranged on the left side of the front view of the light guide plate 3102 emit light. The second pattern 3120 is light-emittingly decorated. As a result, a predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is emitted and displayed in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, which can surprise the player and have a strong impact on the player. It is possible to make it think that an advantageous gaming state such as a "big hit game" will occur, and it is possible to raise expectations for the game.

When the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 is light-emittingly displayed, when the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 of the back front effect unit 3200 are light-emittingly decorated, the radial pattern portion of the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 The 3122 and the radiation decoration part 3212b and the radiation decoration part 3213b of the back left decoration body 3212 and the back right decoration body 3213 appear to be continuous, and they together form one picture (special picture). Therefore, a large pattern can be shown to the player. At this time, since the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 forming the outer peripheral side of the pattern are provided on the front side of the light guide plate 3102, the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3212 Since the decoration of 3213 is located in front of the second pattern 3120, it is possible to give a sense of depth to the special pattern and make the special pattern appear three-dimensional. Therefore, since a strong impact can be given to the player, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the special pattern, the player can be entertained, and what can be done to the player. It is possible to make people think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the light emitting effect by the light guide plate 3102 as described above and the light emitting effect of the decorative body can be appropriately combined, and the effect displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. It can also be combined with an image (display effect). As a result, it is possible to present a variety of patterns to the player by appropriately combining the light emission effect, the display effect, and the like, and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored. It can be entertained, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 and 174. FIG. 173 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 174 is an explanatory diagram showing a connection configuration of each board, a motor, and the like in the game board. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control unit 1511 and the peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on the command from the main control board 1310. The effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the above is provided. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 195.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control that is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU1310a, main control I / O port as input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches, and main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. The circuit, the RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, the setting display 1310g for displaying the set value and the error, and the game board 5 are divided. It is provided with a base monitor 1310h for displaying the number of the game balls B collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a formed. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and the built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in ROM") of the main control MPU 1310a. It also has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out an ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter, referred to as "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and when the register changes to a content that does not make sense, the main control MPU 1310a is forced to be affected by electrical noise. It is a circuit to reset. The forced reset by such a built-in reset circuit cannot be invalidated by being controlled by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without executing the main control side power off processing described later, and again executes the main control side power on power processing described later. Will be reset. In this case, since the main control side power off processing is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (as described later). Will be cleared). Even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control board 1310 (main control) does not output a reset signal to the payout control board 633 from the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a. Only the MPU1310a) will be restarted, and the payout control board 633 will be maintained in the activated state.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a is a hard random number circuit (hereinafter, "hardware with built-in main control") that updates the big hit determination random number to be used for determining whether or not to generate the big hit game state among various random numbers related to the game. It is described as "random number circuit".) Is built-in. This main control built-in hard random number circuit generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a maximum value of 65535 is preset as a minimum value), and an initial value is generated. The circuit is configured so that a predetermined value is not fixed as a value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets a single value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and a clock signal (main) input to the main control MPU 1310a. Based on the control MPU 1310a (clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and within the predetermined numerical range. When all the values in the above are extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the other values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU1310a uses the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a random number for jackpot determination. It is designed to be set as.

The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information in which the detection signals from the various sensors are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, the main control input circuit outputs various signals based on the information from the various output terminals because the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset. It is configured as a circuit to be used.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has a first start port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, and a second start for detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2004. The mouth sensor 2402, the general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, the normal winning opening sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the ordinary winning opening 2003, and the large winning opening 2005 The large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B, the accessory winning opening sensor 2513 that detects the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006, and the game ball B received in the first V winning opening 2007. The first V winning opening sensor 2514 to detect, the first losing opening sensor 2516 to detect the game ball B received in the first losing opening 2535, and the second to detect the game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008. V winning opening sensor 2515, third losing opening sensor 2518 for detecting the game ball B received in the third losing opening 2555, out sensor 664 (or out opening left) for detecting the game ball B discharged from the game board 5. The detection signals from the sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033), the magnetic sensor 2010 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, the vibration sensor 3003 that detects the vibration acting on the game board 5, and the like are the main control inputs. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via a circuit.

Further, each detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1311 is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Further, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch are transmitted via the payout control board 633 (via, that is, the payout control input circuit and the payout control output circuit described later). When they are input to the main control board 1310 as they are (without going through), they are input to the input terminals of the predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The detection signals from the out sensor 664, the first start port sensor 3002, and the second start port sensor 2402 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without passing through another board, that is, the main control. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via an input circuit. On the other hand, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the normal winning opening sensor 2401, the accessory winning opening sensor 2513, the large winning opening sensor 2403, the magnetic sensor 2010, and the vibration sensor 3003 are the panel relay boards 1710. Is input to the main control board 1310 via, that is, indirectly, and is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, so that the start port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414 are output from the main control solenoid drive circuit. , Each drive signal to the accessory winning opening solenoid 2512, the first distribution solenoid 2532, and the second distribution solenoid 2545 is output via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, or a predetermined value thereof. From the output terminal of the output port, the status indicator, normal symbol display, normal hold indicator, first special symbol display, first special hold number indicator, second special symbol display, second special of the function display unit 1400. Each drive signal is output to the hold number indicator and the round indicator without going through another board, that is, directly. Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c of the setting change board 1311 by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information related to the game (game information) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, thereby outputting various information related to the game (game information) to the payout control board 633. By outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, a signal (power failure clear signal) can be output to the power failure monitoring circuit, or the game ball B can be output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B, a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B is output to the payout control board 633. The logic of the launch permission signal that conveys that the launch is permitted is set to the launch permission logic when the launch is permitted, while the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in which the launch permission logic is reversed when the launch is not permitted. Is set to. As for the logic of the launch permission signal, as an initial value (default), the launch permission signal setting process in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is started after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after the power is restored). It is composed of hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so as to be set to a launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted.

In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, the normal winning port sensor 2401, the large winning opening sensor 2403, the accessory winning opening sensor 2513, the first V winning opening sensor 2514, and the first The non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the one loss opening sensor 2516, the second V winning opening sensor 2515, the third loss opening sensor 2518, and the out sensor 664, whereas the general winning opening sensor 3001 Uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the normal winning port 2003, so that the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2402, and the normal winning port 2003 are won. The detection of the game ball B by the mouth sensor 2401 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having high durability and a long life is used for the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, and the ordinary winning port sensor 2401.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters, so that the game ball by the big winning opening sensor 2403 B detection also occurs frequently. For this reason, the large winning opening sensor 2403 also uses a proximity switch with high durability and long life. Further, since the game ball B launched into the game area 5a is collected in a large amount by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5, the game ball B is frequently detected by the out sensor 664. Occurs in. For this reason, a proximity switch having high durability and a long life is used for the out sensor 664 as well. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch. Regardless of whether the game ball B frequently enters the general winning opening 2001, a proximity switch having high durability and a long life may be used.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or something. Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. The main control MPU 1310a will be described in detail later, but when it receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, it shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Although detailed description will be described later, various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. It is equipped with. With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1310a can store various information in the RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I / O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of the game ball B, performs launch control by the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout and the launch solenoid 542, and launches by ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. A control unit 633b, an error LED display that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch that has a pressing operation unit for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, and a ball during maintenance. A ball removal switch for discharging the game ball B in the tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guidance unit 570, and the payout device 580 to the outside (upper plate 201) of the pachinko machine 1 to start the ball removal operation. , Is equipped.

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633 is a micro that contains a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a built-in function to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from is input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, and the ball cut detection sensor 574 is paid out. The detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

The detection signals from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit and payout control is performed via the payout control I / O port. Input to MPU.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the payout device 580, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the power failure of the main control board 1310. The power failure warning signal from the monitoring circuit and the error release signal from the error release switch are input to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. , Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal plate 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, which displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , When the number "5" is displayed, a "retry error" is notified (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When it is displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 633 to the CR unit). When the number "9" is displayed, it indicates that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number). ..

The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port to the payout control MPU. Entered. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal is used for ball lending. It is input to and displayed on the ball rental display unit 226 of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b has a launch control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to launch, an oscillation circuit for outputting a clock signal at regular time intervals, and the clock signal. Based on this, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a, a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on this launch reference pulse, and launch. It is provided with a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on a reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game region 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the launch reference pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , Generates a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle 195, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will is detected. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, they are input to the launch control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the launch timing control circuit. The launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys that the launch of the game ball B is permitted is input to the launch control input circuit and then input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 195 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

In the launch timing control circuit, the launch condition 1 that the palm or finger is touching the handle 195 is satisfied based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, and the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are formed based on the CR connection signal. If the launch condition 2 that the solenoids are electrically connected is satisfied and the launch condition 3 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted based on the launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 is not satisfied, the game ball B is not satisfied. Since the firing reference pulse for launching the game toward the game area 5a is not output, for example, the firing solenoid drive circuit does not output a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 and the game ball B cannot be launched.

In this launch solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch reference pulse generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game region 5a with a launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the handle 195. When it is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, so that the game ball stored in the upper dish 201 of the dish unit 200 One ball B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped to move the received game ball B to the ball launching device 540 side. send. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

In the present embodiment, the payout control board 633 is provided with the launch control unit 633b, which controls the launch by the launch solenoid 542 and the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145, but the power supply board 630 is provided. It may be configured. In this case, the emission permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be directly input to the power supply board 630, may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, and is shown in the figure. It may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board that does not.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 173, the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. It is provided with an effect display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the above.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration of the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 is omitted, the CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I / O interfaces, and the like are mounted on one semiconductor chip. The integrated peripheral control IC, the peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, the sound source IC that performs high-quality performance, and the sound information such as music, voice, and sound that the sound source IC refers to. It has a stored sound ROM.

The peripheral control IC has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, the peripherals are based on these various commands. The CPU of the control IC outputs the game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the game board 5, and serial I / O for the lamp drive board. For the game board decorative drive board, the game board side drive data for transmitting from the port to each decorative board of the game board 5 and outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating various production units provided on the game board 5. Transmission from the serial I / O port to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5, or drive signals to the vibration motor 356 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the sudden output adjustment drive motor 381, and the like. It is composed of door-side drive data for outputting the data, and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. The door side drive light emission data to be transmitted is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side, and the control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed serial for the display control unit. In addition to transmitting data from the I / O port to the effect display control unit 1512, it also outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

The detection signal from the second loss opening sensor 2517 of the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5 is input to the peripheral control IC. Further, the detection signals from the contact detection sensor main body 358, the pressure detection sensor 373, the elevating detection sensor 374, and the sudden output detection sensor 375 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

Further, in the CPU of the peripheral control IC, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally is input from the effect display control unit 1512, and the effect display control unit is based on this operation signal. The operation of 1512 is monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and provides the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the like provided in the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. , The main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 and the like are controlled so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects are played. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume adjusting switch protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 have acoustic signals as sound information (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, By sending a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown). The built-in WDT and the external WDT are used together to diagnose whether or not the own system is out of control.

The display command output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2. Kilo (k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting / blinking command, the game board side lighting / blinking command, the movable body drive command, etc. output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 side are a plurality of serial inputs / outputs different from the display commands. It is performed by the port, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

[6-3b. Production display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 displays and controls a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that displays and controls the effect display device 1600. (Abbreviation for Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM in which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. It is in control. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU performs interrupt processing when an executing signal is input from VDP and the output of the executing signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, and control data (display command). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in chronological order. As the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM is defined.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM, outputs it to the VDP, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the first screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an executing signal to that effect to the display control MPU. The line buffer method is adopted for VDP. This "line buffer method" means that the drawing data for one line that draws the left-right direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM becomes large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded in the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a unit. For example, when displaying various characters (characters) on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 by setting the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "the order of superimposing the sprites").

The sprite is composed of a plurality of rectangular areas having 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in a width of 2 x a height of 3 can be used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 repeats a main scan for setting a display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels and a main scan in a direction intersecting the one direction, sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front. Driven by sub-scanning performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input to the effect display device 1600, one line is sequentially displayed from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as the main scan. It is output to each pixel of. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, it is based on the drawing data for the next line. As the main scan, the output is sequentially output to one line of pixels from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game content]
The content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136, 148 to 152 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated by the player by rotating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. However, the game is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game by the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The striking strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 195, and the more it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the striking can be, and a maximum of 100 game balls can be continuously driven per minute. B, that is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in front of the game panel 1100 at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N to cause the game ball. The flow speed of B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movements can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates due to the contact of the game ball B is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view (left side of the right portion 2502a on the front frame) from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500. , While abutting on a plurality of obstacle nails N, the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 will flow down. Then, the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 passes through the windmill W and is above or below the plurality of obstacle nails N planted diagonally in a row along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. Supplied to either side.

The game balls B supplied to the upper side of the plurality of obstacle nails N planted diagonally in a row along the lower side of the center accessory 2500 are centered in the left-right direction of the game area 5a along the row of the obstacle nails N. When it is guided to and released below the row of the obstacle nails N in the central part, the central part is located directly above the first starting port 2002, so there is a high probability that the first starting port 2002 will be reached. Accepted. When the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

The game balls B supplied above the plurality of obstacle nails N planted diagonally in a row along the lower side of the center accessory 2500 are the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 and the general winning opening 2001. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the open large winning opening 2005.

By the way, the game balls B supplied to the lower side of the plurality of obstacle nails N planted diagonally in a row along the lower side of the center accessory 2500 are provided by the shelf portion 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nails N. It may be moved toward the center side in the left-right direction and accepted by the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200, the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, or the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

On the other hand, in the game area 5a, the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 is on the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (upstream above the right portion 2502a on the front frame). When entering the space portion 2506), it is discharged above the normal winning opening 2003 of the center accessory 2500 through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500. , After contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the ordinary winning opening 2003, the ordinary winning opening 2003 is accepted with a certain probability.

In the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, the first guide passage 2521 having an entrance opened in the vicinity of the abutment portion 1006 and the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 are opened at intervals to the left. It is composed of a second guide passage 2522 and the like. As a result, when the game ball B is driven (so-called right-handed) with the strength of contacting the abutting portion 1006, the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521, enters the upstream space portion 2506, and hits the abutting portion 1006. If the game ball B is hit with a strength that does not touch (a strength that is weaker than right-handed hitting), it will enter the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B driven into the upstream space portion 2506 circulates in either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 according to the driving strength.

In the present embodiment, the distribution of the second guide passage 2522 is more likely to be accepted by the ordinary winning opening 2003 than the first guide passage 2521.

When the game ball B is received by the ordinary winning opening 2003 and detected by the ordinary winning opening sensor 2401, a predetermined number (for example, one) of games is played from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. When the ball B is paid out to the upper plate 201 and a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and the lottery normal lottery result is "normal hit", the second starting port closed in the attacker unit 2400. 2004 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by accepting the game ball B in the ordinary winning opening 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery until the result of the ordinary lottery is suggested (for example,). 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the lapse of the fluctuation time.

In addition, if the game ball B is accepted in the ordinary winning opening 2003 between the time when the game ball B is accepted in the ordinary winning opening 2003 and the ordinary lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result may be started. Since it is not possible, the start of suggestion of the normal lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous normal lottery result is completed. In addition, the maximum number of pending lottery results is four, and even if the game ball B is accepted in the ordinary winning opening 2003, it is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 is released onto the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000 without having a chance to be accepted by the second starting opening 2004 or the large winning opening 2005. It is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a from the out port 1008. On the other hand, the game ball B that has passed through the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 passes between the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422, and then passes through the large winning opening guiding shelf 2424. , Passing in front of the closed large winning opening 2005, is discharged onto the lower right rail 1004.

Then, when the game ball B passes between the second start opening upper guide shelf 2421 and the second start port left standing wall portion 2422, the normal lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B at the normal winning opening 2003 is ". When the second start opening door 2411 is advanced in the "normal hit", the game ball B is guided by the second start opening door 2411 and the game ball B is received in the second start opening 2004. When the game balls B are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

The game ball B, which is not guided by the second starting door 2411, falls on the large winning opening guide shelf 2424, passes in front of the closed large winning opening door 2413 from the left end of the large winning opening guide shelf 2424, and is right. It is discharged onto the lower rail 1004 and discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

On the other hand, the game ball B, which is guided to the second starting port 2004 side by the second starting port door 2411, but is not accepted by the second starting port 2004 due to the second starting port door 2411 retracting in the middle, is the second. It enters the attacker right passage 2430 from the third opening 2433 on the lower side of the start port 2004, and is discharged onto the lower right rail 1004 without passing in front of the closed large prize opening door 2413, and is discharged from the out port 1008. It is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a.

In addition, since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the normal winning opening 2003 and the guidance shelf 2421 on the second starting opening, and the second opening 2432 of the attacker right passage 2430 is open. The game ball B passing through the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 has a low probability of entering the attacker right passage 2430 through the second opening 2432. The game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a without being involved in the big winning opening 2005.

From the above, the game ball B distributed through the first guide passage 2521 is rarely accepted by the ordinary winning opening 2003. Therefore, by accepting the game ball B into the ordinary winning opening 2003, the second starting port 2004 The result of the ordinary lottery in which is open is rarely derived, and the game ball B is not accepted so much at the second starting port 2004. On the other hand, the game ball B circulated through the second guide passage 2522 is accepted into the normal winning opening 2003 with a higher probability than that of the first guide passage 2521. There is a high possibility that the normal lottery result (“normal hit”) will be drawn in the open state, and the game ball B will be accepted at the second starting port 2004.

For this reason, the player will perform a driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second guide passage 2522, so that the driving strength at which the game ball B enters the upstream space portion 2506 In addition, the driving strength of the game ball B must be adjusted so that the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with the driving strength of the game ball B entering the second guide passage 2522. It doesn't become. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the driving operation of the game ball B so that the player is less likely to get bored, and to entertain the player with the driving operation of the game ball B and suppress the deterioration of the interest. Can be made to.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 is in an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit"). , "Small hit", "Time reduction (time reduction) hit")) will be drawn. Then, the lottery special lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, the special lottery results drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include "loss", "first small hit", "second small hit", and " There are "third small hit", "2R big hit", "15R big hit", and the like. In the present embodiment, the lottery probability of the "small hit" ("first small hit", "second small hit", "third small hit") is higher in the second special lottery result than in the first special lottery result. Is set high.

If the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is "small hit", "small hit". The accessory winning opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern according to the type (see FIG. 151). Since the accessory winning opening 2006 is provided in the middle of the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the center accessory 2500, if a "small hit" is drawn, "right-handed" and the first guide passage Hit the game ball B into 2521.

When the "small hit" is the "first small hit", the opening and closing time of the accessory winning opening 2006 is short, and the game ball B can hardly be accepted. In the case of "second small hit" or "third small hit", the game ball B is accepted into the character winning opening 2006 by "right-handing" because the character winning opening 2006 is open for a long time. Probability is high. When the game balls B are received in the accessory winning opening 2006, a predetermined number (for example, 4) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

When the "small hit" is "second small hit" or "third small hit", when the game ball B is accepted into the prize winning opening 2006, one of the accepted game balls B is the first distribution. It is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 in the device 2530. When the "small hit" is the "second small hit", the game ball B housed in the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 passes through the second distribution device 2540 and the third distribution device 2550. It is supplied to the third distribution table 2554 via the Kroon 2553. The game ball B supplied to the third distribution table 2554 is repelled by the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558, and is moved from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c to the central table 2554a. It rolls from the central table 2554a to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c via the collection table 2554d, and becomes either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555 provided in the central table 2554a. It will be sorted. When the game ball B is received (sorted) in the second V winning opening 2008, the "15R jackpot" is executed. On the other hand, when the game ball B is received at the third loss opening 2555, the "15R jackpot" or the like is not executed and the game returns to the previous state.

On the other hand, when the "small hit" is the "third small hit", the game ball B housed in the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 moves to the first V winning opening 2007 side in the second distribution device 2540. It is sorted and "15R jackpot" is executed.

The first special lottery result and the first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008, and accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. (Ii) If the result of the special lottery is "2R jackpot" or "15R jackpot", a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed or a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed after the jackpot 2005 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted. When any of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B to the large winning opening 2005 is satisfied, the opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern) that makes the game balls B unacceptable is closed. A "big hit" game is performed in which a predetermined number of times (referred to as one round) (a predetermined number of rounds, for example, two rounds or 15 rounds) is repeated.

Since this grand prize opening 2005 is mainly on the flow path of the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500, the player is allowed to drive the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500. Can be done. When the game ball B is received in the large winning opening 2005 when the large winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) is received from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Game ball B is paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2005 allows the game ball B to be accepted, by allowing the large winning opening 2005 to accept the game ball B, a large number of game balls B can be paid out, and the player can be entertained. it can.

In the guide passage group 2520 provided on the right side of the center accessory 2500, the first guide passage 2521 side is easier to drive than the second guide passage 2522 side, but the second guide passage 2522 is easier to drive. Since it is less likely to be accepted by the big prize opening 2005 than the side, it is possible to let the player choose which passage to perform the driving operation, and it is difficult for the player to get bored by various games. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, in the case of "15R jackpot" or "2R jackpot" during the time saving state, after the "big hit" game is completed, a lottery is drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The fluctuation time of the special symbol for suggesting the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result to the player is shortened than usual until the predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) is reached, and then The time until the "win" is drawn is shortened.

In addition, in the "big hit" game aiming at the big winning opening 2005, since the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening 2004 exist on the way to the big winning opening 2005, the big winning opening 2005 is aimed at. There is a high possibility that the game ball B will be accepted in the second starting port 2004, and if the next "big hit" or "small hit" is drawn during the "big hit" game, the player will be in an advantageous gaming state. It will last for a long time and can entertain the player more.

In the present embodiment, from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the result of the special lottery by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the first start port 2002 and When the game ball B is accepted in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. It is put on hold. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than that, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

By the way, the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time and then by combining the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 indirectly controls the effect image to suggest the special lottery result. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the effect display device 1600 is a pattern sequence in which three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and each pattern sequence is varied to display the pattern. Are stopped and displayed in sequence, and each of the three picture rows is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three picture rows that are stopped and displayed are combined with the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than "missing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is performed. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a "small hit" game, a "big hit" game, etc.) occurs according to the result of the special lottery.

In addition, the time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern sequence fluctuates and the confirmed image is displayed. It is different from the time until it is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 is performed according to the lottery special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect of operating the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301. In the player participation type production, the pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by the operation button elevating drive motor 367 to make it stand out, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and the back It is possible to perform light emission effect, display effect, etc. by appropriately using the pre-effect unit 3200, etc., and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. It can be suppressed.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type production in which the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated, the correct operation is performed when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation to be operated. Notify the player to that effect.

[8. Main effects of the game board]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a from the left side along the peripheral edge is the first in the guide passage group 2520 on the right side of the center accessory 2500. When the player is accepted into the ordinary winning opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 provided on the downstream side through either the guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522, a predetermined privilege (with the payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) is received. Since a normal lottery for whether or not to open and close the second starting port 2004) is given, the player is made to drive the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 having the normal winning port 2003. You can play a game.

The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 are twisted so as to be lined up in the front-rear direction at the heavy-duty portion 2520a in the middle of being lined up in the left-right direction. On the upper entrance side, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are lined up in the left-right direction, and the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 can be clearly distinguished from each other. The driving operation of the game ball B can be made easy to separate, and the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the desired first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 can be enjoyed.

On the other hand, in the middle of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, since the weighted portion 2520a is twisted so as to line up in the front-rear direction, the player with respect to the game ball B circulating in the portion. From this, it is possible to make it difficult to determine which guide passage is being distributed, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to the game ball B circulating in the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522. it can. The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 make the game ball B that is guiding (circulating) visible from the front, and the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are formed of transparent members. Therefore, it is difficult to recognize the route of each guide passage at a glance because the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 appear to overlap each other at the parts of the heavy viewing portions 2520a that are lined up in the front and rear. Can be. Further, on the lower exit side of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, since the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are twisted so as to line up in the left-right direction, each of the exit side Although the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 can be clearly distinguished, since they are twisted twice on the upstream side, the arrangement of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 on the entrance side , The relationship with the arrangement of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 on the exit side can be difficult to determine and unclear.

Therefore, on the right side of the center accessory 2500, it is difficult to know where the game ball B comes out when the game ball B is driven (entered) into one of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. It can be difficult to recognize what the game result will be after the group 2520 is distributed, and if the game ball B is hit into which of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, a normal prize is won. Since it is difficult to know whether it is likely to be accepted by the mouth 2003, when the game ball B is hit, it is possible to make people care about which guide passage the game ball B is circulating, and the player is distributed. You can pay attention to the game ball B that you are playing.

Further, when the player pays attention to the game ball B circulating in either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522, the guide passage (second guide) that is likely to be accepted by the ordinary winning opening 2003. The player can be thrilled depending on whether or not the game ball B comes out from the exit of the passage 2522), the expectation for the game can be raised, and an unexpected exit (exit of the first guide passage 2521) can be raised. ), It is possible to give the player unexpectedness and surprise, and to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in order for the game ball B to enter the second guide passage 2522 having an exit that is likely to be accepted by the ordinary winning opening 2003, it is necessary to adjust the driving strength of the game ball B, so that the player It is possible to adjust the driving strength of the game ball B to drive the ball B. Therefore, it is possible to give a difficulty level to the driving operation of the game ball B, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored due to the change in the driving operation of the game ball B, and the game ball to the player. It is possible to entertain the driving operation of B and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, since the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 have a portion of the weighted portion 2520a arranged in the front-rear direction, the width of the guide passage group 2520 in the left-right direction is possible in the portion. Since it can be made narrower, it is possible to relatively easily secure a space on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and the accessory winning opening 2006, the first distribution device 2530, etc. are arranged in the secured space. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 more entertaining to the player by making it possible to play and arrange the effect device.

Further, according to the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game area 5a is divided into a frame-shaped opening 1102 of the game panel 1100 provided with the game area 5a into which the game ball B is driven. Since the center accessory 2500 is attached and the third distribution device 2550 having the front end protruding forward from the game panel 1100 is provided on the lower side of the inner circumference of the center accessory 2500, the third The distribution device 2550 can be made to stand out, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the third distribution device 2550 can strongly have an interest in the distribution of the game ball B. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be used, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player can be provided. Further, since the third distribution device 2550 is provided on the lower side of the inner circumference of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 that divides the game area 5a, the third distribution device 2550 is located in the game area 5a. It is possible to enjoy both the game by the game ball B in the game area 5a and the distribution of the game ball B by the third distribution device 2550 without disturbing the game ball B that is distributed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

The game ball B driven into the game area 5a is the right table of the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c provided on both the left and right outer sides of the third distribution table 2554 with the central table 2554a in between. When supplied to 2554c via the recovery table 2554d, it rolls to the lower front side of the right table 2554c and onto the projecting piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 provided on the front side of the right table 2554c. It will be hit and move to the rear side. At this time, depending on the timing of hitting the game ball B by the projecting piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 and the timing of the game ball B reaching the third distribution right rotating body 2558, the third distribution right The strength and situation in which the projecting piece 2558a of the rotating body 2558 hits the game ball B varies. Therefore, when the impact of the projecting piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 is strong to some extent, the game ball B climbs the right table 2554c toward the rear side, passes through the third distribution middle rotating body 2556, and passes through the rear side. It will enter the central table 2554a which is connected in. At this time, in the third distribution middle rotating body 2556, the communication condition between the central table 2554a and the right table 2554c (left table 2554b) is changed by rotation, so that the projecting piece of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 Even if the game ball B reaches the rear third distribution middle rotating body 2556 after being hit by 2558a, the game ball B enters the central table 2554a side depending on the rotation timing of the third distribution middle rotating body 2556. It may be returned to the right table 2554c without doing so. Further, since the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c are provided on both the left and right sides of the central table 2554a, when the game ball B is strongly hit to the rear side by the projecting piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558, the first During the strikeout, it may pass through the rotating body 2556 and enter the left table 2554b on the opposite side.

On the other hand, if the hit by the projecting piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 is weak, the game ball B will return without being able to climb the right table 2554c to the rear side, and the timing of returning to the front side and the third Depending on the timing of the projecting piece 2558a of the distribution right rotating body 2558, the game ball B may be hit weakly again, and the right table 2554c may move back and forth between the rear side and the front side. Then, when the game ball B is hit by the projecting piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 and enters the central table 2554a from the rear side through the third distribution middle rotating body 2556, the central table 2554a is directed to the front side. It will be rolled, and it will be accepted by either one of the second V winning opening 2008 and the two third losing openings 2555 provided near the front end of the central table 2554a. Instead, it enters the front side of either the left or right left table 2554b or the right table 2554c from the front end of the central table 2554a through the collection table 2554d, and again enters the projecting piece 2558a (or) of the third distribution right rotating body 2558. , It is hit by the projecting piece 2557a) of the third distribution left-handed rotating body 2557) and moves to the rear side.

In this way, the game ball B supplied to the third distribution device 2550 is the projecting piece 2557a or the third distribution right rotating body 2558 of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 on the front side of the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c. By being hit to the rear side by the projecting piece 2558a, it enters the central table 2554a from the rear side of the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c through the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution, and rolls the central table 2554a to the front side. The movement of moving and sequentially patrolling the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, the central table 2554a, and the collection table 2554d so as to be supplied to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c again via the collection table 2554d is centered. It will be repeated until it is accepted by either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555 opened in the table 2554a.

Therefore, the game ball B is hit by the rotation of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 or the third distribution right rotating body 2558, and the second table 2554b or the right table 2554c passes through the third distribution middle rotating body 2556. Since the game ball B is sent to the central table 2554a in which the second V winning opening 2008 and the third loss opening 2555 are open, what happens when the game ball B is supplied to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c? It is possible to make it unpredictable for the player whether the game ball B is hit to the rear side with such strength, and the player's line of sight goes back and forth between the left table 2554b, the right table 2554c, and the central table 2554a. You can entertain by nailing it to the game ball B.

Further, the timing at which the game ball B reaches the third distribution left rotating body 2557 or the third distribution right rotating body 2558, the third distribution left rotating body 2557 or the third distribution right rotating body 2558 moves the game ball B. If conditions such as the timing of hitting and the timing of the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution that facilitates the entry of the game ball B into the central table 2554a are not met, the game ball B moves from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c to the central table 2554a. Depending on the strength of the impact of the game ball B by the projecting piece 2557a of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 or the projecting piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558, the third distribution is performed on the rear side. Since it may pass through the middle rotating body 2556 and enter the right table 2554c or the left table 2554b on the opposite side, the projecting piece 2557a of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 or the projecting piece of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 It is possible to make it difficult to predict the movement of the game ball B when the game ball B is hit to the rear side by the 2558a, and the player may be disturbed depending on whether or not the game ball B enters the central table 2554a. It is possible to entertain the player, and it is possible to give a premium feeling to the central table 2554a, and to have the player have a strong interest and interest in the game ball B that has entered the central table 2554a. You can do it. At this time, since the game ball B enters the central table 2554a through the third distribution middle rotating body 2556, the rotation of the third distribution middle rotating body 2556 when the game ball B enters the central table 2554a. Depending on the position, the game ball B may be sent to the center side or the end side in the width direction of the central table 2554a, and the game ball B can be guided in various directions on the central table 2554a. It is possible to entertain the movement of the game ball B that rolls on a smooth path, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Then, when the game ball B that has entered the central table 2554a is accepted by the second V winning opening 2008 that is open near the front end of the central table 2554a, a privilege that gives the player an advantage (here, "big hit game"). ) Is given, so that the player can be strongly requested that the game ball B that has entered the central table 2554a from the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution is accepted into the second V winning opening 2008. Depending on whether or not the player is accepted in the second V winning opening 2008, the player can be thrilled and the expectation for acceptance in the second V winning opening 2008 can be raised, and the third distribution can be made to the player. It is possible to have a strong interest in the distribution of the game ball B in the device 2550, to entertain the distribution of the game ball B, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, unless the game ball B supplied to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c is hit by the projecting piece 2557a of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 or the projecting piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 to some extent. Even if the third distribution middle rotating body 2556 does not reach, and depending on the rotation position of the third distribution middle rotating body 2556, it does not enter the central table 2554a, and even if the game ball B enters the central table 2554a, the second If neither the V winning opening 2008 nor the third losing opening 2555 is accepted, the ball is returned from the front side of the central table 2554a to either the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c via the collection table 2554d, so that it takes a relatively long time. , The game ball B stays in the third distribution device 2550, and the distribution of the game ball B can be enjoyed for a longer time than the distribution device such as the crune in the conventional pachinko machine, and the player's game. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in.

Further, as described above, it is unpredictable to the player how strong the game ball B is hit by the third distribution left rotating body 2557 or the third distribution right rotating body 2558. Above, the number of times the game ball B is hit by the projecting piece 2557a of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 or the projecting piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 is not limited to one, and a complicated rolling path. Since it is accepted by either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555 after passing through, the player strongly feels that the distribution destination of the game ball B is selected by random luck. Can be done. Therefore, even if the time (distribution time) until the game ball B is accepted into either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555 in the third distribution device 2550 becomes long, it is due to the natural flow. You can enjoy the movement of the game ball B, and you can also enjoy the development by randomly selecting the distribution destination (rolling destination), and you will get tired of having the player have a strong interest and interest in the game ball B. It can be difficult to make.

Also, for a relatively long time, the game ball B was struck out between the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, the central table 2554a, and the collection table 2554d, and then was accepted into the third loss opening 2555 ( Even if it is sorted), as described above, it is possible to make the player strongly feel that the sorting of the game ball B by the third sorting device 2550 is random, so there is simply no luck. As a result, the distribution result can be easily accepted, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disappointed and degrading the interest.

Further, the game ball B moves back and forth between the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c, and patrolls between the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, the central table 2554a, and the collection table 2554d. Even if it takes a long time to be accepted by either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555 and the distribution is confirmed, since the second V winning opening 2008 is provided, the second V winning opening 2008 The expectation of acceptance of the player does not diminish the interest of the player, the player can be continuously entertained, the player can be made less bored, and the player can be fully enjoyed. Therefore, even if it is accepted by the third loss opening 2555, the disappointment can be alleviated and the deterioration of the player's interest can be suppressed.

Further, when the game ball B that has entered the central table 2554a and rolled to the front side is not accepted by either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555, the game ball B is received from the front end of the central table 2554a. Since the player enters the collection table 2554d and is guided to either the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c on both the left and right sides, is the game ball B guided to the desired left table 2554b or right table 2554c at the collection table 2554d? Whether or not the player can be excited, the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the projecting piece 2557a of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the projecting piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 are in contact with the upper side of the center of the game ball B to strike, the second When the game ball B is struck out from the strikeout left rotating body 2557 or the third distribution right rotating body 2558, the game ball B can be made difficult to lift from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, and the third distribution device can be used. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from popping out from the 2550. Further, the projecting piece 2557a of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the projecting piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 are projected into the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c with substantially the same length as the radius of the game ball B. Therefore, the chance that the projecting piece 2557a or the projecting piece 2558a just meets the game ball B can be reduced, and the game ball B is unnecessarily struck to hit the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c (third distribution device 2550). Since it is possible to prevent the game ball B from jumping out from the center table and the projecting piece 2557a or the projecting piece 2558a easily scoops the game ball B, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to enter the central table 2554a, and the left table 2554b And on the right table 2554c, the game ball B can be easily moved back and forth between the rear side and the front side.

Further, since the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555 are provided with the protrusion 2554i at the front end, the game ball B has a circular opening of the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555. Even if it tries to rotate along the edge of the opening, it will come into contact with the protrusion 2554i on the way, and the game ball B can be flipped from the edge of the opening to the front side or the inside of the opening by the contact with the protrusion 2554i. It is possible to prevent the player from jumping out of the edge and being accepted by the third loss opening 2555 or the second V winning opening 2008. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball B is unnecessarily accepted by the third loss opening 2555 and disappoint the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Further, the protrusion 2554i prevents the game ball B from being accepted into the third loss opening 2555 or the second V winning opening 2008 by going around the edge of the circular opening of the second V winning opening 2008 or the third loss opening 2555. Since it can be prevented, the acceptance probability to the second V winning opening 2008 can be made to be substantially the same as the designed one, and the variation in the acceptance probability to the second V winning opening 2008 for each pachinko machine 1 can be prevented. The pachinko machine 1 can be reduced and is less likely to give a distrust to the player.

Further, a third distribution device 2550 is provided on the lower side of the inner circumference of the center accessory 2500, and the central table 2554a, the left table 2554b, and the right table 2554c are arranged side by side so that the rear side is higher. Since the third distribution device 2550 is tilted, it is lower than the eye level of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, so that the central table 2554a and the left of the third distribution device 2550 The table 2554b and the right table 2554c can be easily seen by the player, and the game ball B rolling on the center table 2554a, the left table 2554b, and the right table 2554c can be easily seen, and the second V winning opening 2008 or the first It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can enjoy the movement of the game ball B distributed to the strikeout 2555.

Further, since the central table 2554a is tilted so that the rear side is higher, the game ball B that has entered the rear side of the central table 2554a from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c and the game ball B are seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Since the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555 will be located between the player and the player, whether or not the game ball B is rolling toward the second V winning opening 2008 is determined. It is possible to make the movement of the game ball B more enjoyable, which can be easily understood and shown to the player, and at the same time, it is possible to make the player think that the game ball B is being drawn to the second V winning opening 2008. , It is possible to raise the expectation for acceptance of the second V winning opening 2008 and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the central table 2554a and the like are tilted so that the rear side is higher so that the game ball B rolls forward, the central table 2554a is compared with the case where the central table 2554a is rolled in the left-right direction. Since the left and right widths of the game ball B can be widened, the rolling path of the game ball B on the central table 2554a can be made more diverse, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made more enjoyable for the movement of the game ball B. ..

Further, in the third sorting device 2550, the game ball B is first supplied to the right table 2554c via the collection table 2554d, and the game ball B is received by the second V winning opening 2008. Since the hitting of the game ball B by the third distribution right rotating body 2558 is a necessary condition, when the third distribution right rotating body 2558 or the like is stopped for some reason, the right table 2554c of the third distribution device 2550 Even if the game ball B is supplied to the second V winning opening 2008 to illegally accept the game ball B, the game ball B is not hit by the projecting piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558. The game ball B does not enter the table 2554a, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from being illegally accepted into the second V winning opening 2008.

Further, the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution left rotation body 2557 are performed by the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 and the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565 via the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571. It is possible to detect the presence or absence of rotation of the distribution right rotating body 2558, and detect the presence or absence of rotation of the third distribution middle rotation body 2556 by the third distribution middle rotation detection sensor 2563 via the transmission gear 2567. For some reason, the rotation of the third distribution left rotating body 2557, the third distribution right rotating body 2558, the third distribution middle rotating body 2556, etc. is detected and stopped. Can be notified to the player, the staff in the game hall, and the like.

Further, the rotation of the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571, which are rotated by decelerating the rotation of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558, is performed by the third vibration. It is detected by the minute left rotation detection sensor 2564 and the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565 to detect the presence or absence of rotation of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558. Therefore, even if the rotation speed of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 is increased, the presence or absence of rotation of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 is determined. Since the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571 for detection are rotated by decelerating the rotation of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558. Since the rotation speed is slower than the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558, the left rotation detection gear is used by the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 and the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565. The rotation of the 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571 can be reliably detected, and the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation via the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571. It is possible to detect the presence or absence of rotation of the body 2558.

Further, even if the rotation speed of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 is increased (even at a high speed), the rotation speeds of the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571 are increased. Is slower than the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558, so the detection cycle of the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 and the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565 is unnecessary. It is not necessary to shorten the detection cycle, and an appropriate detection cycle can be set, and an increase in the load applied to the main control board 1310 can be suppressed.

For this reason, in the present embodiment, the rotation speeds of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 are increased (increased), so that the third distribution device 2550 The player can be surprised by the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 rotating at high speed, and he has a strong interest in the distribution of the game ball B by the third distribution device 2550. Can be struck out. Further, by rotating the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 at high speed, the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 hit the game ball B. It is possible to make it more difficult to predict the timing at which the game ball B is to be played, and since the game ball B is obscured even by a slight position or timing deviation of the game ball B, it is possible to make it difficult to hit the game ball B. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that surely exhibits the desired action and effect.

Further, according to the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, nothing is displayed on the light guide plate 3102 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, and the back is provided near the periphery thereof. The decorations of the back upper decoration body 3211, the back left decoration body 3212, and the back right decoration body 3213 of the front production unit 3200 can be visually recognized from the player side, and the back top decoration body 3211, the back left decoration body 3212, and the back left decoration body 3212, The pachinko machine 1 is decorated with the back right decorative body 3213 to improve the appearance. When the back upper decoration body 3211, the back left decoration body 3212, and the back right decoration body 3213 are light-emitting decorated in this normal state, the outer peripheral side of the light guide plate 3102 can be light-emitting decorated in the front view. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out by the luminous decoration of the body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213, and the player's interest can be raised to the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right. It can be attracted to the decorative body 3213. On the other hand, when the first pattern 3110 or the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 is light-emittingly displayed in a normal state, the first picture 3110 or the second picture 3120 becomes visible from the player side and the outer peripheral side. Since the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 are not luminescent decorated, the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 appear dark and are relative to each other. Therefore, the first pattern 3110 or the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 looks brighter, and the player's interest can be attracted to the first pattern 3110 or the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102.

Then, when the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitting and the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 are light-emitting decorated, the second picture 3120 of the light guide plate 3102, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right are displayed. Since the decoration of the decorative body 3213 is combined to form one pattern (special pattern), a large pattern can be shown to the player. At this time, since the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 forming the outer peripheral side of the pattern are provided on the front side of the light guide plate 3102, the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3212 Since the decoration of 3213 is located in front of the second pattern 3120, it is possible to give a sense of depth to the special pattern and make the special pattern appear three-dimensional. Therefore, since a strong impact can be given to the player, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the special pattern, the player can be entertained, and what can be done to the player. It is possible to make people think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest.

Further, the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 has a radial pattern portion 3122 that reaches the peripheral edge of the light guide plate 3102, and the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 have a radial pattern portion. Since it has a radiant decoration part 3212b and a radiant decoration part 3213b that are continuously decorated with 3122, the back unit 3000 displays the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 by emitting light and decorates the back left. When the body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 (at least the radiant decoration part 3212b and the radiant decoration part 3213b) are radiated and decorated, the radiant pattern part 3122, the radiant decoration part 3212b, and the radiant decoration part 3213b appear to be continuous. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the sense of unity between the radiation pattern portion 3122, the radiation decoration portion 3212b, and the radiation decoration portion 3213b, and the second pattern 3120, the back left decoration body 3212, and the back right decoration are given to the player. The special pattern composed of the body 3213 can be shown without discomfort, and the above-mentioned effects can be surely achieved.

Further, as described above, since the radiation pattern portion 3122, the radiation decoration section 3212b, and the radiation decoration section 3213b can enhance the sense of unity of the special pattern, after the second pattern 3120 is light-emittingly displayed on the light guide plate 3102. By radiating the radiant decoration portion 3212b and the radiant decoration portion 3213b of the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect such that the second pattern 3120 spreads outward. It can surprise the player. At this time, since the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 are provided on both the left and right sides of the second pattern 3120, the second pattern 3120 seems to spread horizontally and become a special pattern, so that it is wide. A three-dimensional special pattern can be shown to the player, and the powerful special pattern can entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 constituting the special pattern are inclined so as to project forward toward the outer peripheral side, the inside of the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213. The light guide plate 3102 (second pattern 3120) in the above appears to be retracted to the back, further enhancing the depth of the special pattern composed of the second pattern 3120 and the decorations of the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can surely achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Further, when the second pattern 3120 is emitted and displayed by the cocktail light on the light guide plate 3102 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100, the portion of the spectral light emitting portion 3102c in the radiation pattern portion 3122 or the like of the second pattern 3120 constitutes the cocktail light. Since it is decomposed into the components of the light and emits light in a plurality of colors, it is possible to change the light emission mode of the second pattern 3120 (first pattern 3110), which is of great interest to the player. Can be attracted. More specifically, for example, when yellow light composed of red light and green light is irradiated from the peripheral surface of the light guide plate 3102 as cocktail light, the portion of the second pattern 3120 excluding the spectral light emitting portion 3102c. Then, while it emits light in yellow, in the portion of the spectral light emitting portion 3102c in the second pattern 3120, the yellow light is dispersed into red light and green light, and the light is emitted glitteringly so that red and green are mixed. This means that the second pattern 3120 is emitted and displayed at the portion that emits light in yellow and the portion that emits light in which red and green are mixed. On the other hand, when light of one of the three primary colors of light (for example, red light) is irradiated from the peripheral surface of the light guide plate 3102, the light may be further dispersed at the portion of the spectroscopic light emitting portion 3102c in the second pattern 3120. Therefore, the light of the irradiated color is emitted, and the entire second pattern 3120 is emitted and displayed in the same color. In this way, the light emission mode of the second pattern 3120 (first pattern 3110) that is emitted and displayed can be changed depending on the color of the light that irradiates the peripheral surface of the light guide plate 3102, so that a wider variety of light emission effects can be produced. It is possible to make the player less likely to get bored, and the spectroscopic light emitting unit 3102c can entertain the player by shining in a plurality of colors, providing a pachinko machine 1 with a higher effect. can do.

Further, since the spectroscopic light emitting unit 3102c disperses using the difference in the refractive index due to the difference in the color (wavelength) of the light, for example, when yellow light is irradiated from the peripheral surface of the light guide plate 3102, the player One point of the spectroscopic light emitting unit 3102c may appear red, green, or yellow between red and green, depending on the difference in the viewing position of the second pattern 3120. Since one point of the spectroscopic light emitting unit 3102c on the light guide plate 3102 is very small, even a slight movement of the player causes one point of the spectroscopic light emitting unit 3102c to appear red or green, or red and green. Since it looks yellow in between, the spectroscopic light emitting unit 3102c appears to shine in a plurality of colors, and the above-mentioned effects can be obtained. For this reason, when white light containing all three primary colors of light is irradiated from the peripheral surface of the light guide plate 3102, the spectroscopic light emitting unit 3102c appears to be rainbow-colored and glittering, which gives a strong impact to the player. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect with a high effect.

Further, the spectral light emitting unit 3102c is provided on the radiation pattern portion 3122 in the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 which is continuous with the radiation decoration portion 3212b and the radiation decoration portion 3213b of the back left decoration body 3212 and the back right decoration body 3213. When cocktail light is irradiated from the peripheral surface of the light guide plate 3102, the radiation pattern portion 3122 shines in a plurality of colors, so that the radiation pattern portion 3122 emits light from the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213. The light emitting mode is similar to that of decoration, and the sense of unity between the radiation pattern portion 3122, the radiation decoration section 3212b, and the radiation decoration section 3213b can be further enhanced, and the discomfort of the special pattern displayed as a unit is reduced. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that makes the player more entertaining.

Further, according to the game board 5 of the present embodiment, a light guide plate effect unit 3100 having a light guide plate 3102 is provided behind the game panel 1100, and the outer circumference of the light guide plate 3102 in the light guide plate effect unit 3100 is provided. On the front side of the frame-shaped unit base 3101 holding the light guide plate 3102, the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 of the back front effect unit 3200 are attached so as to surround the light guide plate 3102. At the same time, the effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 3101 via the back box 3010. Therefore, under normal conditions, the back upper decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213 can be seen through the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100, and the back upper decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back left decoration 3212, Since the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be seen inside the back right decorative body 3213, when the effect image is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 or when the light guide plate 3102 has the first pattern 3110 or the second pattern. Even when the 3120 is not displayed by light emission, the pachinko machine 1 can be decorated by the back top decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. At the same time, by illuminating the back upper decoration body 3211, the back left decoration body 3212, and the back right decoration body 3213, they can be made to stand out and attract the attention of the player.

At this time, since the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 are provided on the front side of the light guide plate 3102, the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right Even if the decorative body 3213 is light-emittingly decorated, the light from the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 does not pass through the light guide plate 3102 and is emitted forward, and the back is not emitted. It is possible to reduce the light from the light emitting decorations of the upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213, causing the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 to shine and emerge. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the light guide plate 3102 until the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light plate 3102 are displayed by light emission. Further, since the effect display device 1600 is provided on the rear side of the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 are in a state of being as close as possible to each other. It is possible to prevent diffused reflection of light from occurring with the device 1600, and it is possible to reduce the appearance of the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 shining and floating due to the diffused reflection. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the light guide plate 3102, the LEDs of the first pattern substrate 3103 and the second pattern substrate 3104 are made to emit light to emit the first pattern of the light guide plate 3102. By making the 3110 and the second pattern 3120 emit light, the player will notice the existence of the light guide plate 3102 for the first time, and the player can be greatly surprised, and there may be something good for the player. It is possible to raise the expectation for the game by making people think that there is no such thing, and it is possible to entertain the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 that are displayed by light emission and suppress the deterioration of the interest, and the effect of the light guide plate 3102. Can be fully demonstrated.

Further, since the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 are provided on the front side of the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate is provided by the LEDs of the first pattern substrate 3103 and the second pattern substrate 3104. Even if the first pattern 3110 or the second pattern 3120 of 3102 is emitted and displayed, the light does not brightly illuminate the front surface of the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213, and guides the light. The back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 cannot be seen through the light plate 3102, and the first picture 3110 and the second picture 3120 can be displayed by light emission in a good state. Therefore, unlike the conventional case, the light emitting display of the light guide plate pattern brightens the rear part of the light guide plate, so that the light emitting pattern is not difficult to see, and the light emitting display is displayed to the player. The picture 3110 and the second picture 3120 can be visually recognized and entertained in a good state, and the effect of the light guide plate 3102 can be fully exhibited.

Further, since the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 that can be light-emitting decorated so as to surround the light guide plate 3102 are attached to the front side of the unit base 3101, the back upper decorative body 3213 is attached. Since the body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 can decorate the periphery of the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 emitted by the light guide plate 3102, the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3110 and the second The design 3120 can be complemented to strongly attract the player's interest, and the first design 3110 and the second design 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 can be entertained to suppress the deterioration of the interest, and the back decoration can be suppressed. By appropriately emitting and decorating the body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213, various effects are produced by the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, the back right decorative body 3213, and the light guide plate 3102. Can be shown to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing the decline in interest.

Further, the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 are provided on the front side of the light guide plate 3102, and the decoration of the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 is provided on the light guide plate 3102. Since it is related (or continuous) to the second pattern 3120 displayed by light emission, the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 and the second pattern 3120 can be seen as one. The second pattern 3120 that is displayed by light emission can be made to appear larger, and the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 on the outside of the second pattern 3120 are located in front of the light guide plate 3102. Therefore, a sense of depth can be given to the second pattern 3120, and the second pattern 3120 can be made to look three-dimensional. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and make the player think that there is something good, thereby raising the expectation for the game and suppressing the decline in the interest. Can be done.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 is provided on the rear side of the light guide plate 3102, it is possible to prevent diffused reflection of light between the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 as described above. It is possible to reduce the difficulty in seeing the effect image due to the front surface of the effect display device 1600 shining due to diffused reflection, and the effect image can be visually recognized in a good state. Therefore, both the effect of the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect of the effect image of the effect display device 1600 can be shown to the player in good condition, which entertains the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 is provided on the rear side of the light guide plate 3102, the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is darkened when the first pattern 3110 or the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 is light-emittingly displayed. , The first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can be made more visible, and the effect of the light guide plate 3102 can be fully exhibited. In addition, the effect display device 1600 may display an effect image (for example, an imitation image) of the first pattern 3110 or the second pattern 3120 such that the light guide plate 3102 emits light, or the first pattern 3110 or the first pattern 3110 of the light guide plate 3102. By displaying a production image that is integrated with the two patterns 3120, it is possible to present a wider variety of productions to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decline in interest. ..

The unit base 3101 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 with the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 in between, and the rear side of the unit base 3101. Since the effect display device 1600 is attached to the back box 3010, the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, the back right decorative body 3213, and the game panel 1100 are provided on the front side of the light guide plate 3102. At the same time, since the rear side of the light guide plate 3102 is closed by the effect display device 1600, when handling the light guide plate effect unit 3100 (pachinko machine 1 or game board 5), the operator also from the front side to the rear side. The light guide plate 3102 can be made difficult to touch, and the light guide plate 3102 can be prevented from being soiled or scratched.

Therefore, during manufacturing, the light guide plate 3102 can be made difficult to get dirty or scratched without having to pay close attention to prevent the light guide plate 3102 from getting dirty or scratched. The production unit 3100 (light guide plate 3102) can be easily handled, workability during manufacturing can be improved, and the occurrence of defective products during manufacturing due to scratches can be reduced, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. Can be suppressed from increasing.

Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall or when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained in the game hall, the operator makes it difficult for the operator to touch the light guide plate 3102, so that the light guide plate 3102 is not easily soiled or scratched. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game with the pachinko machine 1 without the light guide plate 3102 being dirty or scratched, and the first pattern 3110 or the first pattern 3110 displayed by light emission on the light guide plate 3102. The second pattern 3120 can be shown in a good state, and the effect of the light guide plate 3102 can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, according to the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the transparent center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100 provided with the game area 5a through which the game ball B is distributed on the front side via the flange portion 2503. At the same time, a frame-shaped rear frame portion 2504 is provided along the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 from the flange portion 2503 to the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100, and the rear frame portion 2504 has a constant cross-sectional shape. Since the decoration is provided in which a plurality of irregularities extending in the front-rear direction are arranged in a row in the circumferential direction of the frame, light is diffusely refracted by the lens action of the decoration, and the opening 1102 is passed through the rear frame portion 2504. The inner peripheral surface of the is indistinct. In addition, the decorative part composed of a plurality of irregularities is the light from the LED provided in the pachinko machine 1, the effect display device 1600, etc., the light in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and other pachinko machines. By reflecting the light from, etc., the rear frame portion 2504 appears to shine brilliantly. In this way, due to the lens action and the reflective action of the decoration of the rear frame portion 2504, the inner peripheral surface (cut surface) of the opening 1102 can be made difficult to see through the rear frame portion 2504, and the deterioration of the appearance can be suppressed. it can.

Further, the outside of the front frame portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500 is a game area 5a through which the game ball B is distributed, the center accessory 2500 is made transparent, and the rear frame portion 2504 is substantially along the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102. The size of the inner circumference of the rear frame portion 2504 approaches the size of the opening 1102, and the range in which the rear of the game panel 1100 can be seen can be at least the same size as the opening 1102. The visibility behind can be improved. Therefore, the range in which the back front effect unit 3200, the light guide plate 3102, the effect display device 1600, etc. provided behind the game panel 1100 can be seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500 can be made wider than before. The back front effect unit 3200 and the like can be satisfactorily visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the effect of the back front effect unit 3200 and the like can be fully exhibited.

Further, the front frame portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500 can clearly divide the front surface (game area 5a) of the game panel 1100 into an area where the game ball B is distributed (outside the frame) and an area where the game ball B is not distributed (inside the frame). Therefore, the back-front effect unit 3200, the light guide plate 3102, the effect display device 1600, etc. provided behind the game panel 1100 of the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a outside the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which does not impair the visibility, can enjoy the game by the game ball B in the game area 5a, and can suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the LED, the light from the effect display device 1600, etc., and the game in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, due to the decoration of the rear frame portion 2504 consisting of a plurality of irregularities. Since it is possible to reflect the light in the hall, the light from other gaming machines such as pachinko machines, etc., the rear frame part 2504 and the front frame part 2502 of the center accessory 2500 appear to shine brilliantly, and the pachinko machine It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can improve the appearance of the machine 1 and attract the attention of the player.

Further, as described above, since the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 in the game panel 1100 can be made difficult to see from the player side by the rear frame portion 2504 of the center accessory 2500, the opening 1102 is used as the game panel 1100. Even if a plywood whose inner peripheral surface (cut surface) is not clean is used, deterioration of the appearance can be suppressed. Therefore, a relatively inexpensive plywood can be used as the game panel 1100, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

By the way, when the rear frame portion 2504 of the center accessory 2500 is separated from the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100 to some extent, the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 that can be seen through the transparent rear frame portion 2504 becomes the rear frame. Since the part 2504 appears to be misaligned, the player can easily notice the existence of the inner peripheral surface. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the rear frame portion 2504 of the center accessory 2500 is brought close to the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100, the opening 1102 that can be seen through the transparent rear frame portion 2504. The inner peripheral surface of the rear frame portion 2504 appears to be substantially aligned with the rear frame portion 2504, and the player can be made to have the illusion that the rear frame portion 2504 and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 are integrated with each other. By making it difficult to notice the existence of the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102, deterioration of the appearance can be suppressed.

Further, since the rear frame portion 2504 of the center accessory 2500 is brought close to the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100, the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 that can be seen through the transparent rear frame portion 2504 is the rear frame. The rear frame portion 2504 and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 can be made to appear to be integrated with the portion 2504, and the player can be made to think that the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 is integrated. By making it difficult to notice the existence of, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance.

Further, since the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b of the back left decorative substrate 3222 in the back front effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 that emits and decorates the rear frame portion 2504 behind the game panel 1100 are provided, the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222a are provided. (Ii) By emitting light from the LED 3222b, the rear frame portion 2504 of the center accessory 2500 can be illuminated and decorated together with the back left decorative body 3212, and the light emitting decoration of the rear frame portion 2504 makes the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 difficult to see. At the same time, by appropriately emitting light of the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b according to the game situation (game state) and decorating the rear frame portion 2504 with light emission, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect, and the game can be played. It is possible to entertain people and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b for emitting and decorating the rear frame portion 2504 are provided behind the game panel 1100, the LED is mounted between the rear frame portion 2504 and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102. Compared with the case where the decorative substrate is provided, the rear frame portion 2504 can be brought as close as possible to the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102, so that the frame does not pass through the transparent center accessory 2500. The range that can be seen through the inside can be widened, and the visibility behind can be improved.

Further, since the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b for emitting and decorating the rear frame portion 2504 are provided behind the game panel 1100, the light for emitting and decorating the rear frame portion 2504 of the center accessory 2500 is forward. Since the light of the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b can be easily reached by the player's eyes, the rear frame portion 2504 can be brightly luminescent and decorated, and the rear frame portion 2504 can be illuminated. Since the plurality of irregularities forming the decoration of the above are extended in the front-rear direction, the rear frame portion 2504 is light-emitting and decorated by the light from the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b, and the first LED 3222a The light from the second LED 3222b can be guided to the front end of the rear frame portion 2504, and the front surface of the center accessory 2500 and the front frame portion 2502 can also be light-emitting and decorated, so that the appearance can be improved.

Further, since the rear frame portion 2504 has a decoration in which a plurality of irregularities extending in the front-rear direction with a constant cross-sectional shape are provided in a plurality of rows in the circumferential direction of the frame, the center accessory 2500 is resin-molded. When removing from the mold, the center accessory 2500 can be removed from the mold simply by pulling it out in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it is not necessary to use a complicated mold for molding the center accessory 2500, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used. The increase in such cost can be suppressed.

Further, according to the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the center accessory 2500 is partitioned on the front side of the game panel 1100 having an opening 1102 penetrating in the front-rear direction so that the game ball B does not invade inward. In the frame-shaped front frame portion 2502 of the center base 2501, the flange portion 2503 extending inward from the rear end of the portion extending at least vertically and located outside the opening 1102 is played. Since the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100 by attaching to the panel 1100, nothing extends to the outside (game area 5a side) at the portion of the front frame portion 2502 where the flange portion 2503 extends inward. It will not be. Therefore, since it is possible to plant the obstacle nail N at a position as close as possible to the front frame portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500, a substantial game area 5a is provided in the front frame portion 2502. The game area 5a can be made larger even if the size of the frame-shaped front frame portion 2502 is the same.

Further, in the game area 5a, in the area outside (left side) of the portion extending vertically on the left side of the frame-shaped front frame portion 2502 in the center accessory 2500, the game ball B mainly flows downward. In addition, since the flange portion 2503 extending inward is provided in the portion of the front frame portion 2502, the width in the left-right direction of the region where the game ball B circulates downward (the region on the left outer side of the center accessory 2500). Can be increased. Therefore, the plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the area allow the game ball B to flow down while being largely moved in the left-right direction, so that the game ball B can be given a complicated movement or the game can be played. The flow time of the ball B can be lengthened, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B itself and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the flange portion 2503 is extended inward from the portion of the front frame portion 2502 located outside the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100, and the flange portion 2503 is opposite to the game area 5a. Since the game ball B extends to the side, the game ball B always circulates on the game panel 1100, and the game ball B can be circulated in a stable state without any strange behavior. More specifically, for example, the flange portion attached to the game panel in the center accessory is extended inward of the opening of the game panel, and the peripheral wall portion is extended forward from the inner end portion of the flange portion. By doing so, it is conceivable to increase the game area outside the peripheral wall portion. However, in the above case, since the game panel does not exist behind the portion located inside the opening in the flange portion, the game medium circulates (rolls) in the portion in the flange portion. , The part may vibrate and behave strangely differently from the game medium distributed on the game panel, or the flange portion may be quickly fatigued and damaged due to the vibration. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the game ball B is always distributed on the game panel 1100, so that the game ball B is distributed in a stable state without any strange behavior. It is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted by the strange behavior of the game ball B, and the game ball B does not circulate on the flange portion 2503 extending inward. , The portion of the flange portion 2503 is not prematurely fatigued and damaged due to the distribution of the game ball B.

Further, since the flange portion 2503 extends inward from the portion of the front frame portion 2502 located outside the opening 1102, the flange portion 2503 can be reliably attached to the game panel 1100, as described above. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that exerts an action effect.

Further, a part of the flange portion 2503 that attaches the center accessory 2500 to the game panel 1100 extends inward from the front frame portion 2502, and the game ball B circulates on the portion of the flange portion 2503. Therefore, the transparent flange portion 2503 does not become dirty or damaged due to the distribution of the game ball B and the transparency does not deteriorate, and it is possible to prevent the appearance from being deteriorated and to serve as a transparent center. It is possible to continuously exert the action and effect of the object 2500.

Further, at the portion of the front frame portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500 in which the flange portion 2503 extends inward, the front frame portion 2502 can be reinforced from the inside of the frame by the flange portion 2503, so that the front frame portion 2502 can be reinforced from the inside of the frame. Even if the game ball B comes into contact with (contacts) the portion of the front frame portion 2502, the strength of the front frame portion 2502 can be maintained by the flange portion 2503, and the front frame portion 2502 (center accessory 2500) is deformed. And damage can be prevented.

Further, as described above, since the strength and rigidity of the peripheral wall portion can be increased by the mounting portion, when the game medium comes into contact with the peripheral wall portion, the peripheral wall portion is elastically deformed to form the game medium like an elastic body (rubber or spring). It is possible to prevent it from being played. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game medium circulating in the game area from making strange movements different from the conventional ones due to contact with the peripheral wall portion, and it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as described above, since the strength and rigidity of the front frame portion 2502 can be increased by the flange portion 2503, the center accessory 2500 can be maintained at the same strength and rigidity as the conventional product, and the center accessory 2500 can be maintained. It is possible to prevent deformation of the molded product when the molded product is resin-molded and removed from the mold, and it is possible to increase the yield and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 is transparent, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the front frame portion 2502 and the like, so that the player has the illusion that the game area 5a through which the game ball B is distributed is large. This makes it possible to differentiate the pachinko machine 1 from other pachinko machines so that the game area 5a looks large.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 is transparent, the light from the LED or the like provided in the pachinko machine 1, the light in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the light from other pachinko machines, etc. By reflecting the above, the center accessory 2500 appears to shine brilliantly, the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, and the pachinko machine 1 capable of attracting the attention of the player is provided. be able to.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 is transparent, even if the front frame portion 2502 is positioned outside the edge of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100, the front frame portion 2502 is at the same position as the edge of the opening 1102. The game area 5a in which the game ball B is distributed can be made to appear larger than the actual one.

Further, as described above, since the game area 5a can be increased by extending the flange portion 2503 inward, the frame-shaped front frame portion 2502 is enlarged and the position where the flange portion 2503 is extended is set. By devising it, it is possible to suppress the inside of the game area 5a from becoming small while increasing the inside of the frame. Therefore, the light guide plate effect unit 3100, the back front effect unit 3200, the effect display device 1600, etc. provided behind the game panel are in good condition from the player through the frame of the center accessory 2500 and the opening 1102. It is possible to entertain both the game by the game ball B in the game area 5a and the effect by the light guide plate effect unit 3100, the back front effect unit 3200, the effect display device 1600, and the like. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of

Further, according to the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the main decorative portion capable of transmitting only two of the three primary colors of light to the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) in the back front effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000. Since the 3212a (main decoration portion 3213a) is provided, the main decoration portion 3212a (main decoration portion 3213a) is colored in a predetermined color, so that the back left decoration body 3212 (back right decoration) is provided. Even if the body 3213) is not light-emittingly decorated, the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) can be made to stand out by the color of the main decorative part 3212a (main decorative part 3213a), and the back left decorative substrate 3222 (back). A highly appealing pachinko machine that can attract the attention of players even when the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b (first LED 3223a and second LED 3223b) composed of full-color LEDs on the right decorative substrate 3223) are not emitting light. 1 can be provided. Then, when the game is played in the game area 5a by the operation of the player, the plurality of first LEDs 3222a mounted on the back left decorative board 3222 (back right decorative board 3223) and the plurality of first LEDs 3222a are mounted according to the change in the game situation. Since the second LED 3222b (first LED 3223a and second LED 3223b) emits light as appropriate to illuminate the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213), the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) is luminescent. ) Can be made to look beautiful, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and at the same time, the player can be made aware of the change in the game situation and think that there is something good. It is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

When the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) is light-emitting decorated, the first LED 3222a (first LED 3223a) made of a full-color LED corresponding to the main decorative portion 3212a (main decorative portion 3213a) is mainly used. Since the anode and cathode of the light emitting element that emits a color that does not transmit through the decorative portion 3212a (main decorative portion 3213a) are connected and short-circuited, the light emitting element does not emit light due to a malfunction. Therefore, due to a malfunction of the first LED 3222a (first LED 3223a) corresponding to the main decoration portion 3212a (main decoration portion 3213a), the radiation decoration portion 3212b (which is adjacent to the main decoration portion 3212a (main decoration portion 3213a)) Since it is possible to prevent the radiant decoration portion 3213b) from being luminescently decorated with an unintended color, the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) can be reliably luminescent decorated with the intended color. The decorative effect of the luminescent decoration of the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) can be fully exhibited.

Further, in the first LED 3222a (first LED 3223a) composed of a full-color LED corresponding to the main decoration portion 3212a (main decoration portion 3213a), the anode and cathode of the light emitting element of a color that does not emit light are connected in the one full-color LED. Since the light emitting element is short-circuited, it is possible to prevent static electricity from being charged in the light emitting element, and the charged static electricity adversely affects other light emitting elements in the same package, so that the first LED 3222a (first LED 3223a) becomes It is possible to prevent the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) from being damaged and to illuminate the back left decorative body 3212 in a good condition.

Further, since the main decorative portion 3212a (main decorative portion 3213a) in the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) can transmit only two of the three primary colors of light, the main decorative portion 3212a (main decorative portion 3213a) The second LED 3222b (second LED 3223b) composed of a full-color LED corresponding to the radiation decoration portion 3212b (radiation decoration portion 3213b) adjacent to the main decoration portion 3212a (main decoration portion 3213a) is a color that does not pass through. When light is emitted, the radiation decoration portion 3212b (radiation decoration portion 3213b) adjacent to the main decoration portion 3212a (main decoration portion 3213a) can be brightly illuminated and decorated. Therefore, even if a partition (for example, a reflector) that blocks light is not provided between the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) and the back left decorative board 3222 (back right decorative board 3223), the main decorative portion The 3212a (main decoration part 3213a) and the adjacent radiation decoration part 3212b (radiation decoration part 3213b) can be clearly separated and luminescently decorated, and the back left decoration body 3212 (back right decoration part 3213) can be luminescently decorated. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 by simplifying the configuration.

Further, since the surface of the back left decorative substrate 3222 (back right decorative substrate 3223) is white, the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b (first LED 3223a) mounted on the back left decorative substrate 3222 (back right decorative substrate 3223) are mounted. And the light from the second LED 3223b) can be reflected by the surface of the white back left decorative substrate 3222 (back right decorative substrate 3223), and the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) is luminescent and decorated brighter. Can be made to. Further, since the surface of the back left decorative substrate 3222 (back right decorative substrate 3223) is white, it is colored like the main decorative portion 3212a (main decorative portion 3213a) in the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213). It is possible to improve the color development of the part of the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213), and it is possible to make it easier to exert the decorative effect of the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213). The back left decorative substrate 3222 (back right decorative substrate 3223) can be made inconspicuous from the player side (front), and the deterioration of the appearance can be suppressed.

Further, since the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b (the first LED 3223a and the second LED 3223b) composed of a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the back left decorative board 3222 (back right decorative board 3223), all the first LEDs 3222a And since the second LED 3222b (first LED 3223a and second LED 3223b) can be a full-color LED, all the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b mounted on the back left decorative board 3222 (back right decorative board 3223). By using (first LED 3223a and second LED 3223b) as full-color LEDs of the same type (model number), it is possible to reduce the cost of manufacturing the back left decorative board 3222 (back right decorative board 3223) by unifying the parts. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, according to the game board 5 of the present embodiment, in the game area 5a where the game ball B is driven, the effect display device 1600 provided in the center and the first start port capable of receiving the game ball B can be received. 2002 and the center accessory 2500 as a special distribution area where the back right decorative body 3213 of the back front effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 adjacent to each other and the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 can be distributed. The first distribution device 2530 and the sub-state display unit 3501 of the sub-state display 3500 that is continuous with the logo decoration unit 3211b of the back-up decorative body 3211 are provided, and the game is played by the operation of the player. When the game ball B driven into the area 5a is received in the first starting port 2002 (second starting port 2004), the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) is received on the main control board 1310. The lottery is held, and a predetermined privilege is given according to the result of the special lottery. Therefore, in order to obtain the privilege, the player is hit with the game ball B aiming at the first starting port 2002. You can entertain the operation.

Then, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 (second start port 2004) and the special lottery result is drawn, the lottery is performed in the effect display device 1600 provided in the center of the game area 5a. According to the special lottery result, a symbol (also referred to as a main symbol) suggesting the special lottery result is displayed, and the sub-state LED 3510 of the back right decorative substrate 3223 emits light as appropriate, and the light is emitted by the light guide pin 3520. The light is guided to the sub state display unit 3501, and the sub symbol is displayed on the sub state display unit 3501.

Therefore, in addition to being able to make the player recognize the special lottery result drawn by the main symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600, the sub-state display unit 3501 (sub-state display 3500) having a predetermined decoration formed therein. Also, since the sub symbol that suggests the special lottery result of the lottery is displayed, even if the display of the main symbol is overlooked or the suggestion of the special lottery result by the main symbol is not well understood, the sub symbol is displayed. By looking at it, the player can be made to recognize the result of the special lottery drawn.

Since the sub-state display unit 3501 is formed with a predetermined decoration (the same decoration as the logo decoration unit 3211b), the display of the sub-design makes it appear that the decoration is luminescent. When the game ball B is accepted in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) is drawn, the light emitting mode of the decoration changes. It is possible to make the player recognize that the light emitting mode is changed according to the special lottery result of the lottery, and to recognize the sub-design (suggestion of the special lottery result of the lottery). At this time, since the sub symbol suggesting the result of the special lottery drawn by the sub status display unit 3501 is decorated, the sub symbol does not look inorganic like the conventional pachinko machine, and the sub symbol is decorated. It can be blended into the sub-state display unit 3501 (sub-state display 3500), and thus the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved.

Further, the first LED 3223a and the second LED 3223b and the first distribution device 2530 for light-emitting decoration of the back right decorative body 3213 on the back right decorative substrate 3223 on which the sub state LED 3510 for displaying the sub pattern is mounted. Since the third LED 3223c for illuminating the above is further mounted, the back right decorative body 3213 is light-emitting and decorated, and the first distribution device 2530 is brightened to make the game ball B in circulation easier to see. can do. Further, as compared with the case where the sub-state LED 3510, the first LED 3223a and the second LED 3223b, and the third LED 3223c are mounted on separate substrates, one back right decorative substrate 3223 is sufficient, which is a space for that amount. Because it is possible to secure the space, it is possible to enlarge the back right decorative body 3213, the first sorting device 2530, etc., or to arrange another decorative body, an accessory, etc. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can entertain people.

Further, since the light from the sub-state LED 3510 on the back-right decorative substrate 3223 is guided to the sub-state display unit 3501 by the light guide pin 3520, the sub-state display unit 3501 is separated from the back-right decorative substrate 3223. Even if it is provided at a vertical position, the light guide pin 3520 can guide light to the sub state display unit 3501 in a good state to display the sub symbol. Further, since the light from the sub-state LED 3510 can be guided to an arbitrary position by the light guide pin 3520, the part where the sub pattern is displayed can be set to a position that matches the shape of the decoration. The design can be blended into the decoration to improve the appearance.

Further, the substrate surface on which the sub-state LED 3510, the first LED 3223a and the second LED 3223b, and the third LED 3223c are mounted on the back right decorative substrate 3223 is directed to the back in a direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction (left-right direction). Since the right decorative substrate 3223 is provided and the side surface of the back right decorative substrate 3223 in the thickness direction faces the front-rear direction, it is possible to make the back right decorative substrate 3223 difficult to see from the front, and the back right. It is possible to improve the appearance in the game area 5a by suppressing the deterioration of the appearance due to the visibility of the decorative substrate 3223.

Further, since the surface of the back right decorative substrate 3223 is white, the light from the first LED 3223a and the second LED 3223b mounted on the back right decorative substrate 3223 and the light from the third LED 3223c are emitted from the white back right decorative substrate 3223. It can be reflected by the surface, and the back right decorative body 3213 can be brightly luminescent and decorated, the first distribution device 2530 of the center accessory 2500 and the like can be illuminated brighter, and the back right decorative substrate 3223 can be illuminated. It can be made inconspicuous from the front, and deterioration of appearance can be suppressed.

Further, since the back right decorative substrate 3223 is provided between the back right decorative body 3213 and the first distribution device 2530 of the center accessory 2500, the first LED 3223a is placed on one of the substrate surfaces of the back right decorative substrate 3223. And the second LED 3223b is mounted, and the third LED 3223c is mounted on the other substrate surface, so that the light from each is not blocked by the back right decorative substrate 3223 and irradiated to the opposite side. The first distribution device 2530 is not illuminated when the first LED 3223a and the second LED 3223b are made to emit light, and the back right decorative body 3213 is not made to emit light when the third LED 3223c is made to emit light. The body 3213 and the first sorting device 2530 can be separately illuminated and illuminated in a clear state, so that the player can be shown a natural light emitting effect, and the effect of the light emitting effect is sufficient. It can be used to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the accessory winning opening 2006 and the first distribution device 2530 are provided in the special distribution area, when the third LED 3223c of the back right decorative substrate 3223 is made to emit light, the accessory provided in the special distribution area is provided. Since the winning opening 2006 and the first sorting device 2530 are brightly illuminated, the player's attention can be directed to the winning opening 2006 and the first sorting device 2530, and the winning opening 2006 can be directed. It is possible to make the player think that the game ball B is open so that it can be accepted, and to perform the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the accessory winning opening 2006. Then, when the prize winning opening 2006 becomes acceptable and the game ball B is received and sent to the first distribution device 2530, the game ball B is drawn by the first distribution device 2530 according to the special lottery result. Since it is distributed to either the first loss opening 2535 side or the first Atari passage 2536 side, the player can be thrilled and thrilled depending on whether or not it is distributed to the first Atari passage 2536, and the player is entertained. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest. At this time, by making the third LED 3223c emit light to illuminate the first distribution device 2530, the game ball B in the first distribution device 2530 can be easily seen, and the first distribution device 2530 can be easily seen. You can enjoy the sorting.

Further, the first sub-design LED 3511 and the second sub-design LED 3512 in the sub-state LED 3510 are made into a full-color LED in which three light emitting elements of red, green, and blue are combined into one, and then the anode of the blue light emitting element. And the cathode are connected to short-circuit (short-circuit), and the anode and cathode of the blue light-emitting element that do not need to emit light are connected to short-circuit, so even if some malfunction occurs, the light emission is concerned. No electricity is supplied to the element, and it does not emit light in the color (blue). Therefore, the sub-design is not displayed due to the color that normally does not emit light, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game. it can.

Further, since the first sub-design LED 3511 and the second sub-design LED 3512 are full-color LEDs, and the anode and cathode of the unused color (blue) light-emitting element are connected and short-circuited in one full-color LED, the light-emitting element is short-circuited. It is possible to prevent static electricity from being charged in the above, and it is possible to prevent the charged static electricity from adversely affecting other light emitting elements in the same package and damaging the full-color LED, ensuring that the sub-design is secured. It can be displayed.

Further, in one full-color LED, since the anode and cathode of the light emitting element of the unused color are connected and short-circuited, it is not necessary to connect the light emitting element to the LED driver for driving (light emitting) the LED. Therefore, the channels of the LED driver can be saved by the number of light emitting elements short-circuited (connecting the anode and the cathode). Therefore, the number of LED drivers is reduced with respect to the number of full-color LEDs to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1, or the LED driver is driven by using the surplus channel in the LED driver to drive another LED. It can be used effectively without waste.

Further, since full-color LEDs are used as the first sub-design LED 3511 and the second sub-design LED 3512, and full-color LEDs are also used for the first LED 3223a and the second LED 3223b and the third LED 3223c, a single type of LED is used. The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the guide passage group 2520 is composed of two guide passages, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be composed of one or more guide passages.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the guide passage group 2520, after twisting 90 degrees, twisting 90 degrees in the opposite direction shows that the arrangement of entrances and the arrangement of exits are the same, but the arrangement is not limited to this. Instead, it may be twisted so that the arrangement of entrances and the arrangement of exits are different. Alternatively, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 may be twisted a plurality of times so as to form a spiral.

Further, in the above embodiment, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are provided with openings 426a and openings 435a penetrating the front and rear, respectively, and are guided to the openings 426a and 435a. The optical axis portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a are inserted, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the left side of the door frame is not limited to this. In the decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, recesses recessed from the rear are provided at the portions of the opening 426a and the opening 435a, and the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft are provided in the recesses. The portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a may be inserted. Alternatively, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 having no opening 426a and opening 435a are used, and then the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are used. , The light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a may be extended forward to the rear surfaces of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. As a result, the surfaces of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are made into a neat surface without the opening 426a and the opening 435a, while the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the guide are provided. The optical axis portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a can cause spot light emission in a point shape, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, in the above embodiment, the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 is provided with the radial pattern portion 3122, and the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 are provided with the radial decorative portion 3212b and radiation continuous with the radial pattern portion 3122. Although the decorative portion 3213b is provided and the radial pattern portion 3122, the radial decorative portion 3212b, and the radial decorative portion 3213b display one large pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the back left decorative body. The 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 may be eliminated, and a light guide plate curved so that both the left and right end sides project forward may be provided. As a result, by displaying a predetermined pattern on the light guide plate by light emission, it is possible to display a special pattern in which the outer peripheral side protrudes forward with respect to the center side. A high special pattern can be displayed by light emission, which can give an extremely strong impact to the player. In addition, since the light guide plate provided in the conventional pachinko machine is not curved and is flat, the curved light guide plate can greatly surprise the player and is of interest to the player. Can be strongly attracted and the decline in interest can be suppressed. At this time, it is desirable to bend the light guide plate in an arc shape or an elliptical arc shape centered on the position of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1.

[9. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 173 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 to 180. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control-side power-on processing of FIG. 175, and FIG. 177 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. 178 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change processing, FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing an example of the error display processing, and FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting value confirmation display processing. First, various random numbers used for game control will be explained, followed by the operation of the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on processing, main control side timer interrupt processing, setting change processing, error display processing, and setting value confirmation. The display process will be described.

[9-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a special random number used to determine whether to generate a big hit game state or a small hit game state, and an initial value for hit determination to be used to determine the initial value of this special random number. A determined random number, a reach determination random number for determining whether to generate reach (reach loss) when the jackpot game state is not generated, and a first special symbol display and a second special of the function display unit 1400. A random number for the variable display pattern used to determine the variable display pattern of the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the symbol display, and the first special symbol display and the second special of the function display unit 1400 when the jackpot game state is generated. A symbol random number to be used to determine the jackpot symbol and small hit symbol (determination of the hit type) derived and displayed on the symbol display, and a random number to determine the initial value for the jackpot symbol to be used to determine the initial value of this symbol random number. Etc. are prepared. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining whether or not to open / close the movable piece capable of accepting the game ball B of the second starting port 2004, and a random number for determining normal symbol hit, and this normal symbol hit Normal symbol hit judgment initial value determination random number to be used to determine the initial value of the judgment random number, and normal symbol to be used to determine the variable display pattern of the normal symbol that is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Random numbers for the symbol variation display pattern are prepared.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the special random numbers are updated by the hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by the software.

For example, the special random number is directly updated by the hardware by the main control built-in hard random number circuit built in the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value and preliminarily at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. When other values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another and all the values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again and the main control is performed. Based on the clock signal input to the MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a special random number at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit. It is designed to do.

On the other hand, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number, the normal symbol hit judgment initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter". The normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which one value is drawn from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, various types of RAM clear switches stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a are stored in the main control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, or in the process when the main control side power is turned on, which will be described later. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by regarding the information as a numerical value and calculating the total is one with the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power off processing (power off). When clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, such as when not done, the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is ID from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU1310a. The code is taken out, and the initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit judgment based on the taken out ID code is executed, and the derived fixed value is set. It is a mechanism to be done. That is, the same fixed value derived based on the ID code is constantly overwritten and updated in the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and is stored in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. The first security measure that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used when the ID code is stored, and the initial value derivation process is executed when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area. By doing so, it is prevented from being analyzed by taking a second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the ID code and a two-step security measure by.

Here, an advantage of taking out an ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the taken-out ID code as an initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains the game ball B to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method, disassembles it, and has an ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Is illegally acquired and the random number for normal symbol hit judgment is updated. Even if the timing at which the counter value and the normal symbol hit judgment value match can be grasped, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. The ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a'provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for the normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol hit determination value match is also completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in another game board 5', that is, another pachinko machine 1', so it was disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval obtained and the game ball B is passed through the normal winning opening 2003 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece is opened and closed to move the game ball B to the second starting port 2004. It is not possible to generate an acceptable gaming state.

[9-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set at a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address loaded on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, as shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, the main control side power-on processing is performed. When the main control side power-on processing is started, the main control MPU 1310a sets the RAM access permission (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM can be updated.

Following step S10, the main control MPU 1310a performs a power failure clearing process (step S12). In this power failure clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input. The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the voltage reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer). Has been done.

Following step S12, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 1310f is being operated (step S14). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM is cleared when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is cleared, and it is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310f is being operated. Since the time is extremely short within the period from the start of the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, to the determination in step S14, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is actually pressed. The operator turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f.

In the determination in step S14, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is being operated, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, in the determination in step S14, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value 0 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). That is, the main control MPU 1310a is in a state in which the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a can be executed for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, and is stored in the main control built-in RAM. It is a flag indicating whether to delete various information including information indicating the value of the information output judgment counter), and is set to a value 1 when various information is deleted and a value 0 when various information is not deleted. .. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S16A and S16B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether or not there is an operation of opening the main body frame 4 and turning on the setting key (step S18). In this determination, in the main control MPU 1310a, the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key are inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. , The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), and the first ON operation is performed to set the setting key switch 1311a. Is turned on, and the setting key is turned on based on the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame release switch, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. By determining that, it is determined that the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied, while it is determined that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame open switch. Then, and / or by determining that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on by the signal of setting key ON, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied.

In the determination in step S18, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value 1 in the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination in step S18, when it is determined that the predetermined set value change permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value 0 in the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S20B). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is the current setting value (setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area (described later, a setting value dedicated area in a specific area) of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Is a flag indicating whether or not to allow the setting change of the set value 1 to the set value 6 at the time of the first ON operation), and the setting of the set value is changed. The value is set to 1 when it is permitted, and the value is set to 0 when it is not permitted to change the setting of the set value. The value of the setting change permission flag CS-FLG set in steps S20A and S20B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU1310a performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the system that controls drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until it starts (boots). In the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 is in a state in which various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) can be received when the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process. When the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process, the payout control board 633 completes booting in a shorter time than the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the payout control board 633 is the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). ) Is in a state where it can receive various commands.

Following step S22, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure warning when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S24 is performed based on this power failure warning signal. In the determination in step S24, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the power failure warning signal is input, the main control MPU 1310a returns to the determination in step S24 again and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the input of the power failure warning signal continues. A detailed description of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described later.

In the determination in step S24, when the main control MPU1310a determines that there is no input of the power failure warning signal, it determines whether or not the setting change permission flag CS-FLG has a value of 0 (step S25). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to a value 1 when the setting change of the setting value is permitted, and a value 0 when the setting change of the setting value is not permitted.

In the determination in step S25, when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when the setting change of the setting value is not permitted, the main control MPU1310a has a value of 0 for the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG. (Step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when various information is erased and a value 0 when various information is not erased. In the determination in step S26, the main control MPU 1310a calculates the checksum when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that various information is not erased (step S28). This checksum regards various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculates the total.

Following step S28, in the main control MPU1310a, the calculated checksum value (sum value) is the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power off processing (power off) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). In step S30, when the main control MPU1310a determines that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores various information, checksum value (sum value), game backup information such as backup flag BK-FLG value, etc. in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power off processing described later. This flag indicates whether or not the operation has been performed, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power off processing is normally completed, and a value of 0 when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 is calculated and the determination of step S30 is performed when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. , Will be described in detail later.

In the determination of step S30, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S32, the backup flag BK-FLG of the main control MPU 1310a is not a value 1. When (value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power off processing has not been normally completed, an error display processing is performed (step S33), and an infinite loop is entered. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process is completed is maintained, the game cannot proceed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. The detailed explanation of this error display processing will be described later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power off processing is not completed normally when the power is cut off. If it is determined, it is considered that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted), and an error display is performed to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

The power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is set from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). By turning the pachinko machine 1 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation and then turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, this routine, the main control side power-on processing, is started again. In the determination in step S18 described above, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame release switch, and the setting key is set by the setting key ON signal. By determining that the setting key 1311a is ON, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, and in step S20A described above, the value 1 is set to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG. In order to set, in the determination of step S25 described above, it is determined that the setting change permission flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, that is, it is determined that the setting change of the set value is permitted, and the setting change process of step S37 described later is performed. Following the above, in the process of step S38 described later, the RAM error can be cleared and the game can proceed by clearing all the areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (hereinafter,). , "First RAM error clearing method").

As a method different from the first RAM error canceling method, the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, and the pachinko machine 1 is turned on again while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f. The routine main control side power-on processing is started. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is being operated in the determination in step S14 described above, and sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. In the determination of step S26, it is determined that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1, that is, it is determined that various information is to be erased, and in the process of step S38 described later, a specific area of the total area of the main control built-in RAM is selected. By clearing the exception, the RAM error can be canceled and the game can proceed (hereinafter, referred to as "second RAM error clearing method").

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S30, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU 1310a determines. When the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power off processing has not been completed normally, the error display in step S33 is performed and the main control built-in RAM is displayed. When telling that there is something wrong with the contents stored in (or it is unreliable), there are two cancellation methods, the first RAM error cancellation method and the second RAM error cancellation method. Can be done by. As a result, when it is not necessary to change the setting of the set value at all, the RAM error can be canceled by performing the second RAM error canceling method by the RAM clear switch 1310f.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the main control side power off processing has been normally completed, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in main control as a power recovery time. The work area of the RAM is set (step S34). In this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM (that is, the main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU 1310a advances the game based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition to the state where the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off, the "reset" is the state where the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure, and the fraudulent means (for example, the cheating person is on the hem of the arm The state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with the high frequency from the hidden high frequency output device), the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset, and then returned is also included.

Following step S34, the main control MPU1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed by performing various subsequent processes. Therefore, the backup flag BK- is normally terminated when the main control side power is turned off, which will be described later. If the value 1 is not set in FLG, it will be cleared except for a specific area in the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, as will be described later.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S25, the main control MPU1310a performs the setting change process when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when the setting change of the setting value is permitted. (Step S37). In this setting change process, a detailed description thereof will be described later, but the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b of the setting changing board 1311 is pressed based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting changing board 1311. Each time, the set value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on from the first ON operation to the second ON operation, so that the enter key from the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. The changed set value is determined based on the signal of, and is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

In the process of step S37 or the determination of step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, the main control built-in RAM Clear all areas except for a specific area (step S38). Here, the main control MPU 1310a is performed by writing a value 0 to a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area excluding a specific area among all areas of the main control built-in RAM). In the present embodiment, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined to erase various information, and when the setting change process is completed, the main control built-in RAM is always used. Except for a specific area among all the areas of the above (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area excluding the specific area of the total area of the main control built-in RAM)) is cleared. Here, the "specific area" is the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the set value dedicated area in which the set value is stored and the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5. It is composed of an out-ball counting dedicated area in which the counting results (total number) are stored. The set value dedicated area stores the set value whose setting is changed in the setting change process described later, and the out ball counting area is the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 counted in the ball number counting process described later. The counting result (total number) of the number of balls is stored.

The main control MPU 1310a may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. Further, in the main control MPU 1310a, the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f indicates RAM clear, and when various information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or on the main control side. When the power off processing is not normally completed, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated based on the taken out ID code. The initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter is performed, and this fixed value is used for determining the initial value of the above-mentioned normal symbol hit judgment random number. Set to a fixed random number.

Following step S38, the main control MPU 1310a sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and for example, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set (set) to the initial value 0. Further, the main control MPU 1310a advances the game based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU 1310a sets the initial value and the start setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, the watchdog timer control register built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter referred to as “) to set the initial value in the main control built-in WDT that monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally”. The timer setting value is set in the "WDT control register"), the main control built-in WDT is started, and the time counting until the main control MPU 1310a is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT is started, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT is started, and the watchdog timer clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a is reached before the timed time reaches the time set by the timer set value. Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in the “WDT clear register”), the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the WDT with built-in main control is activated and the time is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the time is reached by the time set by the timer setting value, The timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the time measurement. It is possible to monitor whether or not it is.

Following step S41, the main control MPU1310a performs interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports built in the main control MPU 1310a (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 633, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the peripheral control board 1510). ), The communication speed is set and the presence / absence of parity is set in the transmission serial port prescaler, and the initialization of the transmission circuit and the transmission permission are set in the transmission serial port control register.

Following step S44, the main control MPU 1310a sets the test signal output port initialization (step S46). Here, in the testing institution of the game machine, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control MPU 1310a sets the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a special random number used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state is input to the hard random number control register built in the main control MPU1310a in order to be updated by the hardware. In addition to making settings such as latching and acquiring, the start of the main control built-in hard random number circuit is set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a without duplication, and are predetermined. When all the values in the numerical range have been extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the numerical range predetermined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU1310a. The other values in the are extracted one after another without duplication. When the main control MPU 1310a acquires a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control built-in hardware when this latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the random number circuit is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU 1310a sets a reservation for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to notify that the power has been turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on. Creates a power-on state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output judgment counter notification command as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Remember in. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information may be stored. is there. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed among various information, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information The output judgment counter notification command will be sent. These commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later. A detailed description of the fact that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described later.

Following step S50, the main control MPU1310a sets interrupt enable setting (step S52). With this setting, the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning. To. The determination in step S54 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

In the determination in step S54, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is not input, the main control MPU1310a performs the non-winning random number update process (step S56). In this non-winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for reach determination, random number for variable display pattern, random number for determining initial value for big hit symbol, random number for determining initial value for small hit symbol, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, the random numbers that are not related to the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated by the software. The above-mentioned random numbers for determining normal symbol hits, random numbers for determining initial value for determining normal symbol hits, random numbers for ordinary symbol variation display patterns, and the like are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control MPU1310a determines whether or not there is a power failure warning signal input. If this power failure warning signal is not input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S56. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processes of steps S54 to S56 are referred to as "main control side main process".

On the other hand, in the determination in step S54, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU1310a sets the interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). With this setting, the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and the above-mentioned rewriting of various information including game information and other information is protected.

Following step S58, the main control MPU 1310a starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting the output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S12 is performed.

Following step S60, the main control MPU 1310a stops the drive signals output to, for example, various indicators of the function display unit 1400, the start port solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, the base monitor 1310h, and the like (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control MPU 1310a calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum calculates the total of the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value described above, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control MPU1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). As a result, the storage of the game backup information is completed.

Following step S66, the main control MPU 1310a sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control built-in RAM, so that it is possible to prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT started in step S41, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time counting is started again. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT because it cannot be made to do so. After that, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power-on processing again. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power off processing".

As described above, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit when it is affected by electrical noise. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a cannot perform the determination in step S54, and cannot perform the main control side power cutoff process. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without executing the main control side power off processing, and the main control side power on processing is executed again. .. In other words, because the main control side power off processing is not executed, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power off processing based on immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored, so the previous time The checksum value (sum value) stored by executing the main control side power off processing when the power is cut off, and the checksum calculated in step S28 when the system is restarted after being forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. The value (sum value) cannot match, and a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, and in the process of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area It will be completely erased (cleared).

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU1310a) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and when the power is restored thereafter, the main control side power-on processing is performed.

In step S30, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S32, whether or not the main control side power off processing is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

Further, in the determination in step S25, when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when the setting change of the set value is permitted, the setting change process of step S37 is performed. In the process of step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area, and in the determination of step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1). At that time, that is, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area in the process of step S38. In this way, when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (to be exact, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f), the set value is determined to be changed. When changing the settings that can be performed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing), the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. This means that when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, for example, when the game hall is closed, the pachinko machine 1 is in an advantageous state for the player (for example, probability fluctuation (probability change)). In the case of a hit state, etc.), it is necessary to erase (clear) the above-mentioned game backup information before the next business start, so the staff such as the clerk of the game hall should use the RAM clear switch 1310f. It is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of. In addition, when the setting value is decided to be changed, if the setting change processing is performed (even if the current setting value is maintained as a result, the setting value before the setting change processing is performed is obtained. It is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information including various information such as the game information from the main control built-in RAM. As described above, the setting key is currently set in addition to changing the set value. Since it is an important key for checking the set value, only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, are allowed to possess it, and the number is limited to 2 to 3. In this embodiment, the set value is set. Even if the change is not decided, that is, even if there is no setting key possessed only by a limited specific person, the staff such as the clerk of the game hall needs to erase (clear) the game backup information in the RAM. By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the clear switch 1310f, the game backup information can be erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM.

Here, it will be described that the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is not determined, that is, the case where the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined after the wait time standby process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is proceeded. The problem in is explained.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, receives the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 when the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off due to a power failure or a momentary power failure. It is applied as DC + 5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. That is, even if the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC + 5V, so that the island of the game hall The main control side power cutoff process can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power supply from the equipment is cut off. This is because a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs when the player is playing a game, that is, when the main control side main process or the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed, and the island equipment of the game hall When the power supply from the main control side is cut off, the main control side power supply cutoff process can be reliably completed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process in step S22 at the time of power recovery, the waiting time until the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots) (boot timer: in the present embodiment). (2.5 seconds is set.) Is started, and if a momentary power failure or power failure occurs just before the standby time is reached, hardware called an electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the charge charged in is applied as DC + 5V, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within a period of about 7 ms, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, so that the main control side described later is performed. Even if the timer interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing may not be completed. Therefore, the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is not stored, and the main control side power-on processing is started again at the time of power recovery.

Then, at the time of this power recovery, the main control side power-on processing is started, the wait time standby processing in step S22 is completed without the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure, and then in step S28, the main control built-in RAM When the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the above and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or power failure are compared and judged in step S30, the checksum values should match. Instead, in step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared except for a specific area. In other words, the RAM clear switch 1310f is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM even if the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated by a staff member such as a game hall clerk at the time of power recovery and there is no manifestation of intention by a staff member such as a game hall clerk to clear the RAM. There is a problem that the above-mentioned game backup information is deleted (cleared).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, The determination in step S24 is returned again, and the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input. As a result, it is not possible to proceed with the game. Although the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in step S16A or step S16B before the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process in S22), the determination in step S24 is returned again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. By repeating the determination in step S24, the game cannot be progressed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter). Can be prevented from being updated, and the checksum calculation result does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 and the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64 match. Therefore, the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure stored in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized at the time of power recovery.

Immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), the pachinko machine is being played while the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game. Even if the power to 1 is cut off, the power is supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU1310a, by the electrolytic capacitor MC2, so that the game information and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) due to the progress of this game The main control board performs the processes of steps S58 to S68, which are backup processes for storing various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter, and the main control side power offage process composed of an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of 1310 can be completed, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, the checksum calculation result of step S28 and the checksum in the backup process Since it is determined that the calculation result (that is, the value calculated and stored in the checksum in step S64) matches, the game immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored in the main control built-in RAM is generated. No information is initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be started by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal is input, the main control built-in WDT forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a to contents the main control built-in RAM. While the main control side power off processing can be started again without updating at all, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22, so far. As you can see, it is possible to reliably complete the power cutoff process on the main control side within the "power supply securing period during a momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by the hardware. That is, in the present embodiment, the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure during the processing when the main control side power is turned on at the time of power recovery, and the main control The charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU 1310a, as DC + 5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power cutoff process cannot be completed within the “instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period” of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22. It is determined in step S24 whether or not the power failure warning signal is input, and when the power failure warning signal is input, the determination returns to the determination in step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24. By repeating the above, the game cannot be advanced.

By making it impossible for the game to proceed by such software, the steps after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt is enabled in step S52. By blocking the progress to the main control side timer interrupt process that is set and described later, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination)) We have adopted a mechanism that can prevent various information) including information indicating the value of the counter for use) from being updated. When the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a power failure or momentary power failure in this way, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination)) Various information including information indicating the value of the counter for) is covered by software so that it will not be changed at all, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and game information) by surely completing the power outage processing on the main control side. By dividing it into two parts, one is covered by hardware so that other information (for example, various information including the value of the main prize ball number information output judgment counter) is not changed at all. , The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and various information including other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter)) are surely prevented from being changed. Can be done.

Next, the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In order to convey, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output judgment counter notification command are created and the main control is built in as transmission information. It is stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. This power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information indicating the driving state of the start port solenoid 2412 and information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2414. Here, first, the problem when the main control return destination command at power-on does not include the information indicating the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2412 and the information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2414, that is, , The problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power-on main control return destination command is not performed in step S50 will be described.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the jackpot game state screen (for example, the screen of the jackpot game effect) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the attacker solenoid 2414. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs when the large winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 is mainly controlled in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the built-in RAM, the attacker solenoid 2414 is started to be driven and the grand prize opening 2005 is opened and closed by restoring the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. The state of being closed by the member is changed to the state of being open.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit gaming state as a gaming state, and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will be subjected to the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and returned according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from, the jackpot game state. It is not possible to display at all which round of the throat. That is, for example, the game ball B enters the large winning opening 2005, is detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403, and the large winning opening 1 count display command that conveys the number of balls of the game ball B entering the large winning opening 2005 is mainly used. Even if the control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 is a ball of the game ball B that has entered the grand prize opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, the number of rounds) of the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, for example, when the main control board 1310 finishes the fourth round (fourth round) of the big hit game state, the drive of the attacker solenoid 2414 is stopped and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member. From the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a command to indicate that the attacker unit 2400 is in the closed state (that is, the start of closing of the large winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400) is issued. When the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) of the big hit game state, the attacker solenoid 2414 is started to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is released from the state of being closed by the opening / closing member. A command for displaying the fifth round of opening the special winning opening 2005 is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 instructing the transition to the above state (that is, the opening of the fifth round of the large winning opening 2005 is started). As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of starting 5 rounds of the jackpot game state from the screen according to the above-mentioned probability and time saving state and displays it in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

Further, for example, a screen for notifying the player that the game ball B is in a game state in which the game ball B can be accepted and the game state is advantageous to the player (for example, a game indicating that the movable piece is open) to the second start port 2004. When the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the start port solenoid 2412 to open the movable piece to start the second start. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs when the port 2004 is open, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of, the start port solenoid 2412 is started to be driven and the movable piece is closed by being restored to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. The second starting port 2004 will be closed.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. Then, when the power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and can be returned, but the game state is such that the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen to that effect in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player seated in front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and the game ball B is moved to the second starting port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs at the time of power restoration. In some cases, it may be forgotten that the gaming state is acceptable, and in such a case, the gaming state is returned to the gaming state in which the gaming ball B can be accepted to the second starting port 2004 as the gaming state at the time of power recovery. However, the screen instructing the game (that is, the screen instructing the game to put the game ball B into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the time of power recovery. Therefore, there is also a problem that the player cannot know what kind of game to play.

As described above, in the above-mentioned two examples, there is a problem that the gaming state immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), a power-on state command is used. And the main control return destination command at power-on are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the power-on A counter notification command for determining the output of the main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above-mentioned example, in the four rounds of the jackpot gaming state. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the attacker solenoid 2414 is started to be driven as the return destination of the main control board 1310, and the grand prize opening 2005 is released from the state of being closed by the opening / closing member. Since it is possible to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the state is to be changed, the peripheral control board 1510 is a screen that specifies that it is the 4th round of the jackpot game state (that is, a screen indicating how many rounds it is). Can not be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but a screen telling that the attacker solenoid 2414 is started to be driven in the big hit game state and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member. (For example, a screen that conveys a message to the player, "It's a big hit. The big winning opening is open. Please play the game so that the game ball B enters the big winning opening.") It is possible to instruct a player who sits in front of the pachinko machine by displaying it in the display area of the above-mentioned game to insert the game ball B into the large winning opening 2005 after the power is restored. , In a state where the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 and the game state is favorable to the player, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the main control is performed. As a return destination of the substrate 1310, a screen telling that the start port solenoid 2412 is started to be driven to open the movable piece and the second start port 2004 is opened (for example, "the movable piece is open"). The peripheral control board 1510 displays a message (a screen that conveys the message "Please play the game so that the game ball B is inserted into the second starting port" to the player) in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is possible to instruct a player seated on the front surface of the pachinko machine to play a game in which the game ball B is inserted into the second starting port 2004 after the power is restored.

As a result, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power is restored after that, the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely instructed on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. Can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection step, which is the inspection step of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection step, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board is composed of the above-mentioned backup processes of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control side power off processing, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30. In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and in step S38, all the areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area are always cleared.

As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is made in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information By creating an output judgment counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball Only three commands, the counter notification command for determining the number information output, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, in these commands, in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later, the power-on state command is first transmitted, then the power-on main control return destination command is transmitted, and then the number of main prize balls at power-on. The information output judgment counter notification command is sent. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the power-on state command is issued as the first command from the main control board 1310. It will be transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, the power-on state command is operated when the RAM clear switch 1310f is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). Information indicating that when the RAM is cleared, and when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure) Information indicating which of the low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state (probability and time-saving state) is to be restored, and the model code of the pachinko machine. It is composed of the information shown. Here, a problem will be described when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

The model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and amadeji type as pachinko machine 1 (to be exact, main control board 1310). In addition to the game specifications (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs), the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). It is possible to specify whether or not the game specification (so-called ST machine), etc., in which the probability fluctuation occurs in the state of)).

In the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works may coexist. Then, the worker of the production line is responsible for the copyright of any of the copyrights of the multiple types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works A, movie B, drama C, movie D, cartoon E, and cartoon F). I don't know if the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one of the copyrights of multiple types of works (for example, the copyright of the work called movie D). Although the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the 1310, the main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work called Manga F). There are also beliefs and misunderstandings that it is flowing to the production line.

For this reason, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line will be on the manufacturing line. It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is for the copyright of which work, and for the copyright of the same work, any model type (max type, middle type, or Amadeji type). It is also not possible to confirm whether it is a type) and what kind of game specification (a game specification or ST machine that, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs).

As a result, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board for the copyrights of the plurality of types of works is mixed. The 1310s are sent to the game board assembly line for mounting the main control board 1310 on the game board 5 while being mixed. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310, which does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work, to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the model code of the pachinko machine is used when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). In order to transmit the power-on state command including the information indicating the above to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on A counter notification command for determining the output of the main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later.

As a result, the workers on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turn on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can perform the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, the above-mentioned max type, middle type, indicating the model type, which constitutes the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. And the series code for specifying which type of Amadeji type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when the probability fluctuates, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited, and the game specification code. By visually observing the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the above, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 belongs to, and which work has the same copyright. What type of machine (max type, middle type, and Amadeji type), and what kind of game specifications (when probability fluctuations occur, that state will continue until the next big hit game state occurs. It is also possible to determine whether it is a game specification or ST machine).

As a result, in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the production line By visually observing the inspection monitor and accurately determining the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, the worker of the above can sort each of the main control boards 1310 for the copyright of the work and succeed. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the worker of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[9-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on time process shown in FIGS. 175 and 176.

When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1310a switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 177 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks composed of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, the second register bank from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. Switch the register bank to the register tank of. In the present embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the routine, is started, it is not necessary to save each register on the stack.

Following step S100, the main control MPU 1310a performs a timer subtraction process (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to the fluctuation display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process described later. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 lights up according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process described later, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) transmits. When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received various commands has been input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. .. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In the present embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, so that the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S102, the main control MPU 1310a performs a switch input process (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a is, for example, from a detection signal from the normal winning port sensor 2401, a detection signal from the general winning port sensor 3001, a detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002, and a second starting port sensor 2402. Detection signal, detection signal from the large winning opening sensor 2403, detection signal from the accessory winning opening sensor 2513, detection signal from the first V winning opening sensor 2514, detection signal from the first loss opening sensor 2516, second Detection signal from V winning opening sensor 2515, detection signal from third loss opening sensor 2518, detection signal from out sensor 664 (or out opening left sensor 3032 and out opening right sensor 3033), detection signal from magnetic sensor 2010 , Operation signal from RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), detection signal from door frame open switch, detection signal from main body frame open switch, signal from setting key switch 1311a, signal from setting changeover button 1311b, out sensor The detection signal from 664 and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that conveys that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later are read and used as input information. It is stored in the input information storage area of the control built-in RAM. Further, when the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402 are read, the start port winning command corresponding to the other is used as transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002, the corresponding start port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and from the second start port sensor 2402. When there is a detection signal of, the corresponding start opening winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

In this embodiment, when the switch input process is started in the state where all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are input (including those that have been subjected to the empty terminal process). First, each is read as the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result read for the second time and the result read for the first time are compared. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball B or if the input is ignored.

In this way, in the switch input processing, the state of being input to all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a (including those that have been subjected to the empty terminal processing) is set for the first to third times. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc. by performing a total of two readings, one for comparing twice and the other for comparing twice to four times. Therefore, the detection signal from the normal winning port sensor 2401, the detection signal from the general winning port sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402, Detection signal from the large winning opening sensor 2403, detection signal from the accessory winning opening sensor 2513, detection signal from the first V winning opening sensor 2514, detection signal from the first losing opening sensor 2516, second V winning opening sensor Detection signal from 2515, detection signal from third loss port sensor 2518, detection signal from out sensor 664, detection signal from magnetic sensor 2010, operation signal from RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), door frame opening switch Detection signal from, detection signal from main body frame opening switch, signal from setting key switch 1311a, signal from setting switching button 1311b, detection signal from out sensor 664, prize ball command transmitted by prize ball control processing described later The reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that conveys that the payout control board 633 has been normally received can be improved.

Following step S104, the main control MPU 1310a performs an input terminal defect monitoring process (step S105). In this input terminal defect monitoring process, among the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a, the state of which the empty terminal process is performed is performed based on the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104. Specifically, for example, since the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process, the logical state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal defect monitoring process, among the input terminals of various input ports, whether or not the logical state of the input terminal to which the empty terminal process is performed is LOW is the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104. Do based on. The main control MPU 1310a is classified into a notification display indicating that a problem has occurred in the peripheral circuits of the main control MPU 1310a when it is determined that the logical state of the input terminal to which the free terminal processing has been performed is not LOW. The malfunction command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

Following step S105, the main control MPU1310a performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the symbol random number described above is updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated by the non-winning random number update process in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 176, And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. .. On the other hand, since the symbol random number is a random number related to the winning determination (winning determination), each counter counts up only each time the winning random number update process is performed. The above-mentioned random number for determining the hit of the normal symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for determining the hit of the normal symbol are also updated by this winning random number update process.

For example, as described above, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is an initial value update type counter, which is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value. The range from to the maximum value is counted up by adding a value of 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is counted up from the minimum value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number, the hit judgment initial value determination random number is updated by this winning random number update process. The normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which one value is drawn from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are not in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 176. The winning random number is updated in the winning random number update processing and the winning random number update processing in step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine, but the processing time of this routine becomes uneven every time the interrupt timer occurs, and the next If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-winning random number update process in step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU 1310a performs a ball count processing (step S107). In this ball count processing, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the detection signal from the out port left sensor 3032 is input based on the input information, and the game area 5a is partitioned on the game board 5. When the out port left sensor 3032 detects the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 provided in, the value is the value of the collection ball counter that counts the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the out port 1008. The game ball B collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 by inputting the detection signal from the out port right sensor 3033 while performing the calculation of adding (incrementing) 1 When the out port right sensor 3033 detects the above, a value 1 is added (incremented) to the value of the collected ball counter that counts the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the out port 1008. That is, in the ball number counting process, when the out port left sensor 3032 detects the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 and the out port right sensor 3033 detects the game ball B collected by the out port 1008. Is calculated by adding the value 2 to the value of the collection ball counter. The main control MPU 1310a uses the value of the collection ball counter, which is the calculation result, as the counting result (total number) of the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the out port 1008, and is an area dedicated to counting out balls in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. The output of the lighting signal to be displayed on the base monitor 1310h is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information. Further, the main control MPU 1310a issues a ball collection command to notify when the value of the collection ball counter is divisible by the value 10, that is, every time the number of game balls B collected at the out port 1008 reaches 10. It is created and stored in the output information storage area as transmission information. In the main control MPU 1310a, when the value of the collection ball counter, which is the calculation result, reaches the maximum value (value 65535 in this embodiment) and further adds (increments) the value by 1 to the value of the collection ball counter, the collection ball The value of the counter overflows and becomes a value 0, and the operation of adding from this value 0 is performed.

Following step S107, the main control MPU 1310a performs a prize ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the prize ball command for reading the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area and paying out the game ball B based on the input information is created, or the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are used. Create a self-check command to check the connection status between the boards. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball B enters the large winning opening 2005, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of balls of the game ball B scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball is 10 balls. In order to convey that fact, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set, stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633. Self-check to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 when the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prize ball command is not input within the specified time. A command is created and sent to the payout control board 633.

Further, in the prize ball control process of step S108, the number of game balls B scheduled to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10 balls based on the input information read from the above-mentioned input information storage area. In this case, a main prize ball number information output command, which is classified into other categories, is created to convey that fact, and is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of the counter for determining the output of the number of main prize balls is based on the input information read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, that is, the general winning opening 2001, the normal winning opening 2003, provided in the game board 5. Based on the game ball B that has entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005 (hereinafter, referred to as "various winning openings provided in the game board 5"). The number of balls of the game ball B scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball is counted, and in the prize ball control process of step S108, the memory is updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. ing. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter is read. To the value of, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the number of game balls B to be paid out as prize balls is added, and the value indicating the added number of balls is a value. When the number exceeds 10, (that is, when the number of game balls B to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10), a main prize ball number information output command is created and transmitted to inform that fact. The information is stored in the output information storage area, and the value indicating the number of balls exceeding the number is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. It is designed to do.

Following step S108, the main control MPU 1310a performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into status displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information for transmitting that fact to the payout control board 633 is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU1310a formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, etc.). And frame state 2 command)), it is stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

Following step S110, the main control MPU1310a performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. When it is determined that a fraudulent act by radio wave irradiation (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave irradiation goto") is performed, the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter is added (incremented) by a value of 1. The value of this radio wave goto counter is incremented each time it is determined that radio wave irradiation goto is performed in the fraud detection process, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection process is performed by the timer interrupt process on the main control side. ), Create a radio wave irradiation goto notification command classified into a notification display that informs that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed, and store it in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Further, in the fraud detection process of step S112, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and when the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010 is input, the fraud using a magnet (hereinafter, “magnet goto”” It is determined that the above is performed, and the value of the magnet goto counter is added (incremented) by the value 1. The value of this magnet goto counter is incremented each time it is determined that radio wave irradiation goto is performed in the fraud detection process, and is included in the game backup information. When the RAM is cleared, the initial value is set. The value 0 (zero) is set as the value. When the value of the magnet goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection process is performed by the timer interrupt process on the main control side. ), A magnet goto notification command classified into a notification display indicating that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed is created and stored as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. In the present embodiment, by reliably detecting and notifying the magnet goto by such a mechanism, it is possible to contribute to the ability of the staff such as the clerk of the game hall to find the magnet goto at an early stage. It has become.

Further, in the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403 is input when the game is not in the big hit game state (big winning opening). When a large winning opening abnormality winning a prize such as (when the game ball B enters in 2005) occurs, a winning abnormality display command classified into a notification display as an abnormal state is created and stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. To do.

In the fraud detection process in step S112, when the radio wave irradiation goto and / or the magnet goto is detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to a value 1 to detect the cheating, while the radio wave irradiation goto and the magnet. When the goto is not detected, the value 0 is set in the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as the fraud detection has not been detected. This fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, a value of 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. Further, even when the occurrence of abnormal winning of the large winning opening is detected, the value 1 may be set in the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as the detection of fraudulent activity.

Following step S112, the main control MPU 1310a performs a firing permission signal setting process (step S113). In this launch permission signal setting process, the logic of the launch permission signal for notifying the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to permit the launch of the game ball B is set. Specifically, the main control MPU1310a determines that the fraud detection flag FD-FLG has a value of 0, that is, the fraud has not been detected, based on the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG described above. Occasionally, it is set in the launch permission logic as the logic of the launch permission signal and stored in the output information storage area described above as output information, while the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, a fraudulent activity. When it is determined that the detection is, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. The main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, a detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. If the door frame release switch detects that the door frame is open, the detection signal from the main body frame open switch is input and the main body frame open switch detects that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. As the logic of the launch permission signal, the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted is set, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. The logic of the firing permission signal is that, as an initial value (default), the firing permission signal setting process in step S113 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after the power is restored), is performed. Until it is started, it is composed of hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that it is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) that inverts the launch permission logic.

Following step S113, the main control MPU 1310a performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is mainly used. It is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the control MPU 1310a, and the acquired random number value is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the special random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) and the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match (big hit). It is determined whether or not to generate a game state (referred to as "special lottery")), and the value of the counter that updates the symbol random number is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM according to the big hit type and the small hit type. It is judged (determines the hit type) which of the hit type judgment values is matched.

When these determination results (lottery results) are based on the first start port sensor 3002, various commands related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect are created, while the determination results (lottery results) are the second start port sensor 2402. In the case of the above, various commands related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the variation display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the variation display pattern. Then, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is turned on so as to light the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol. The output of the lighting signal to the display is set and stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a big hit game state is reached, various commands classified as big hit related commands (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 open Nth display command, big winning opening 1 closed display command, big hit A winning opening 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or, for example, a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2414 to open / close the opening / closing member. When the output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) that the grand prize opening 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state is two times, 2 of the round display of the function display unit 1400 The output of the lighting signal to the 2-round indicator lamp is set to turn on the round indicator lamp, and it is stored in the output information storage area as output information. When the round is 15 times, the round indicator of the function display unit 1400 Function display unit 1400 that sets the output of the lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp so that the 15-round display lamp is lit, stores it in the output information storage area as output information, and lights the presence or absence of time reduction in a predetermined color. The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator of is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S114, the main control MPU 1310a performs a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In this ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the ordinary winning opening winning process is performed based on this input information. In this ordinary winning opening winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the ordinary winning opening sensor 2401 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this judgment result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter that updates the above-mentioned normal symbol hit judgment random number is extracted and the main control is built in as the normal winning opening winning information. It is stored in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the RAM.

The normal winning opening winning information storage area is provided with the 0th to 3rd sections (4 sections), and the normal winning opening is in the order of the 0th section, the 1st section, the 2nd section, and the 3rd section. Winning information is stored. For example, when the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the normal winning opening winning information storage, it is normal when the detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401 is input to the input terminal of the input port. The winning opening winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

As for the normal winning opening winning information, the one stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this ordinary winning opening winning information is set, the ordinary winning opening winning information in the first section of the ordinary winning opening winning information memory is placed in the 0th section of the ordinary winning opening winning information memory, and the second section of the ordinary winning opening winning information memory is stored. The ordinary winning opening winning information of the section is in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information memory, and the ordinary winning opening winning information of the third section of the ordinary winning opening winning information memory is in the second section of the ordinary winning opening winning information memory. After being shifted, the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the ordinary winning opening winning information is stored in the first to second sections of the ordinary winning opening winning information storage, the ordinary winning opening winning information in the first section of the ordinary winning opening winning information memory is the ordinary winning. The normal winning mouth winning information in the second section of the ordinary winning opening information storage is shifted to the first section of the ordinary winning opening information storage in the 0th section of the ordinary winning opening information storage, and the ordinary winning opening winning information memory is shifted to the first section. The 2nd section and the 3rd section of the normal winning opening winning information storage are free areas. Here, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first to third sections of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the total number of the stored ordinary winning opening winning information is used as a hold ball and the normal winning opening unit 1400 is used. The output of the lighting signal of the normal hold indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-mentioned ordinary winning opening winning information so as to turn on the hold indicator, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information.

Following the normal winning opening winning process, the normal winning opening winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for determining the normal symbol hit is extracted from the read normal winning opening winning information and the main control is performed. It is determined whether or not the value matches the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the built-in ROM (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece is determined based on this determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the movable piece is opened, so that the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous to the player. The variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above, various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect are created, and the transmission information storage described above is stored as transmission information. While storing in the area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined variation display pattern of the normal symbol, and the output information. Is stored in the output information storage area described above.

Further, for example, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit judgment random number matches the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric service effect are created and transmitted. While storing as information in the transmission information storage area, the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2412 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area, while the extracted normal When the value of the symbol hit judgment random number does not match the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the above-mentioned normal symbol variation display pattern random number. , Create various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect, store them in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information, and turn on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to be stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. In this example, the winning probability of the ordinary lottery (probability of winning the ordinary lottery) is halved.

Following step S116, the main control MPU 1310a performs a set value confirmation display process (step S117). In this set value confirmation display process, a detailed description thereof will be described later, but for reading input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area and detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the input information. The detection signal from the main body frame release switch and the setting key are inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is in the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). ) Is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and the first ON operation is performed to turn on the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a causes the outer frame. By determining that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to 2 and determining that the setting key switch 1311a is ON by the signal of setting key ON, the predetermined setting value display permission condition is set. On the other hand, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch, and / or the setting key switch 1311a is determined by the setting key ON signal. By determining that the setting key is not turned on, it is determined that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied. In the set value confirmation display process, when the set value display permission condition is satisfied, a lighting signal for displaying the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310 g. Is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information. On the other hand, when the set value display permission condition is satisfied, the process is terminated as it is and the process returns to this routine.

Following step S117, the main control MPU 1310a performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a main pay ACK signal when, for example, successfully receives various commands from the payout control board 633 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. Outputs a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the big winning opening 2005, and outputs a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2412 that opens and closes the movable piece when it is in the big hit game state. In addition to doing, 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, small hit information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving and medium information output signal, start opening winning information Various information (game information) signals related to the game such as output signals are output to the payout control board 633, and the launch permission signal set in the launch permission logic or the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) is output to the payout control board 633. The display signal can be output to the base monitor 1310h that displays the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls B collected by the out port 1008, or stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. A lighting signal for displaying the set value set on the setting display 1310g is output.

Following step S118, the main control MPU 1310a performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified in the special figure 1 synchronization effect-related, various commands classified in the special figure 2 synchronization effect, and jackpot-related, which are created by the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine. Various commands (for example, a large winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to a large winning opening count command based on a detection signal from the large winning opening sensor 2403 when a game ball B entered in the large winning opening 2005 is detected. ), Various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal electric service production, various commands classified as normal electric service production, various commands classified as notification display, and status display. Various commands, various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified into others (for example, the main control board 1310 is paid as a prize ball based on the game ball B entered into the various winning openings provided in the game board 5. Every time the number of game balls B to be released reaches 10, the main prize ball number information output signal is instructed to be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 as the main prize ball number information. Main prize ball number information output command, etc., and various commands classified into a specific history (for example, a ball collection command that notifies each time the number of game balls B collected at the out port 1008 reaches 10 balls, etc. A setting change command that tells you that the setting value has been changed, an error display command that tells you that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or unreliable), and the main control built-in RAM The ON operation command of the setting key that informs the confirmation of the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area described later in the specific area of is stored. One packet of the main peripheral serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. It is composed of a sum value obtained by regarding the mode as a numerical value and the sum of the sum values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute various commands as main peripheral serial data. As described above, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC + 5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, in the event of a power failure or a momentary power failure. The main peripheral serial transmission port built in the main control MPU 1310a at least transfers the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit, and completes transmission from the transmission shift register as main peripheral serial data. Can be done. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure after the power is turned on, transmission is performed when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 176. In the reservation setting of the command to be executed, in order to notify that the power has been restored, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output judgment counter Since a notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the status, mode, and sum value that configure the power-on state command are stored as main circumference serial data in that order. Sends to the peripheral control board 1510, then sends to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configures the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and then the main prize ball number information when the power is turned on. The output determination counter notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various information is read from the game backup information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on processing, and the various information is supported. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed among various information, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information The output judgment counter notification command will be sent.

When a ball collection command for notifying the fact is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 every time the number of game balls B collected at the out port 1008 reaches 10, the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 will be charged. For each received ball collection command, the number of balls of the game ball B collected at the out port 1008 is counted, and the ball collection information stored and stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) (counted value (that is, out port). Information) associated with the total number of game balls B collected in 1008 and the updated date and time) is updated. If the pachinko machine 1 is turned off after the business hours of the game hall are closed without receiving the ball collection command, as a result, the last counted value (that is, the game ball collected at the out port 1008) is used. The ball collection information associated with the total number of balls in B) and the updated date and time is stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on when the game hall is opened, the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 stores the ball collection information stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). The ball collection information is created again from the start date, and the ball collection information is stored and held as the ball collection history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). As the counted value stored and stored as ball recovery information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), the value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day may be used, or from the value 0 (zero) on that day. Both the counted value and the sum of the counted values so far may be used.

Following step S120, the main control MPU 1310a clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122) and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT in step S122 is cleared by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. As a result, the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, by restarting the time counting by the main control built-in WDT, the main control MPU 1310a is not forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

As described above, the main control board 1310 is used as the backup for storing the game information due to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off during the progress of the game. The processing can be executed and completed, and at the time of power recovery, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information in which the backup processing is executed as the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414, which are the electric drive sources by the port output process of step S118 in this routine, is output to the peripheral control board 1510. You can do it. That is, the main control board 1310 has the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the same process shown in FIG. 175 in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 176. Power-on state command, which is classified as power-on, to notify that the power has been turned on (restored) based on the power-on information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the work area setting of. A command to return to the main control when the power is turned on and a counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls when the power is turned on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in step S120 in this routine. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main peripheral serial data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configure the power-on state command, and then the main control return destination at power-on. The command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the status, mode, and sum value that configures the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on. The data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order.

Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 sets the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration to the display area of the effect display device 1600 based on the main control return destination command when the power is turned on from the main control board 1310. Can be displayed in the production. As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while the player is playing a game and then the power is restored, the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure is quickly restored after the power is restored. At the same time, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed and notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a solid state, that is, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure by promptly returning to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored.

Further, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, FIG. 175 shows. In step S38 in the main control side power-on processing shown, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared except for a specific area. As a result, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same process shown in FIG. 176, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is made, the power-on state command classified as power-on , When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. A state in which only three commands, a status command, a main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on, are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in this routine, the main control board inspection device is used as the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configure the power-on state command as main peripheral serial data. It is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and then the main prize ball number information is output when the power is turned on. The judgment counter notification command is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , The series code for specifying which of the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and Amadeji type indicating the model type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications. (For example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited (ST). Based on the game specification code for identifying the machine), etc.), detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process.

[9-4. Setting change process]
Next, the setting change process will be described. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 175.

When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the current installation value as shown in FIG. 178 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When acquiring this set value, it may be read out or taken out, but when the set value is taken out, the taken out set value is set in a predetermined area.

Following step S200, the main control MPU1310a calculates the checksum (step S202). This checksum calculates the total of various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values, and is performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 175. This is the same process as the calculation of.

Following step S202, the calculated checksum value (sum value) is stored in the main control MPU 1310a in the main control side power off processing (power off) in the main control side power on processing shown in FIG. 176. It is determined whether or not the checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (step S204). In step S204, when the main control MPU1310a determines that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S206). The determination in step S204 and the determination in step S206 are the same as the determination in step S30 and the determination in step S32 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 175. As described above, the backup flag BK-FLG has a built-in main control in the main control side power cutoff process, which describes various information, checksum value (sum value), game backup information such as backup flag BK-FLG value, etc. It is a flag indicating whether or not the memory is stored in the RAM, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power off processing is normally completed and a value of 0 when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed. Will be done.

In the determination of step S204, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S206, the backup flag BK-FLG of the main control MPU 1310a is not a value 1. When (value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power off processing has not been normally completed, it is determined whether or not the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). .. Here, the "normal range" is a value at which the set value can be changed, and in the present embodiment, the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the setting It is preset to a value up to a value of 6. When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM by proceeding to the determination in step S208, or when it is determined that the main control side power off processing is not normally completed when the power is cut off. Therefore, there is something wrong with the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM (or it cannot be trusted). Therefore, in the determination in step S208, the main control MPU 1310a has the set value 1 to the set value 6 in which the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is in the normal range. It is determined whether or not the value is one of the values, and when it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S208, when it is determined that the main control MPU 1310a is not in the normal range, the set value 1 which is an initial value is set with respect to the set value acquired in step S200 (step S210). In the determination in step S208, any one of the set value 1 to the set value 6 in which the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is in the normal range. Although it is determined whether or not it is a value, the main control MPU1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S204 without performing the determination in step S208. When, or in the determination in step S206, the main control MPU1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value is 0), that is, the main control side power off processing is not normally completed. Occasionally, the process of step S210 may be proceeded, and the set value 1 which is the initial value may be set with respect to the set value acquired in step S200.

In the determination in step S206, the main control MPU1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, that the main control side power off processing has been normally completed, or in the determination in step S208, the main control When the MPU 1310a determines that the range is normal, or following step S210, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c to light the setting change permission lamp 1311c (step S212).

Following step S212, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal for displaying the set value on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g, and displays the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). ..

Following step S214, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the setting switching button 1311b is being operated (step S216). In this determination, the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is read, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is input. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button 1311b is operated when the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is input, while the setting switching button when the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is not input. It is determined that 1311b is not operated.

In the determination in step S216, when it is determined that the setting switching button 1311b is being operated, the main control MPU 1310a updates by performing an operation of adding (incrementing) the value 1 to the set value (step S218). At this time, when the set value is acquired in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area is set. The value 1 is added (incremented) to the set value set in.

Following step S218, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value updated in step S216 to the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g, and updates the setting value for the setting display 1310g. Is displayed (step S220).

Following step S220 or in the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button 1311b has not been operated, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the enter key has been operated (step). S222). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a is set in the counterclockwise direction from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees (that is, the initial position which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (that is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch is operated by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the rotation position) and turning it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise) by performing the second ON operation. 1311a is turned on and the decision key is turned on based on the decision key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a. When the decision key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the decision key is operated. When the decision key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input, it is determined that the decision key is not operated.

In the determination of step S222, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the enter key is not operated, it returns to the determination of step S216 again and determines whether or not the setting switching button 1311b is operated. In the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button 1311b is being operated, the processes of steps S218 and S220 are performed again, the determination of step S222 is performed, and the enter key is operated. When it is determined that there is no such value, the determination in step S216 is returned again, and until the enter key is operated, when the setting switching button 1311b is operated, the set value is added by one value each time the operation is performed, and the setting is displayed. It is displayed on the device 1310g, and if the setting switching button 1311b is not operated, the setting switching button 1311b is operated immediately before and the updated setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g. Even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored by the time the decision key is determined in step S222, the set value updated immediately before the power failure or momentary power failure occurs is the main control. Since it is not stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the internal RAM, it is discarded and the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is not changed.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S222, when it is determined that the enter key has been operated, the main control MPU 1310a stores the updated set value in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). At this time, when the set value is acquired in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area is set. Since it is updated with respect to the set value set in, the updated set value is returned to the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs after the processing in step S224 is completed and the power is restored, the updated setting value when the enter key is operated before the power failure or momentary power failure occurs is the main control built-in RAM. It is stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of.

Following step S224, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key (step S226). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a is set to the initial position (that is, the setting key) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return to the setting key cylinder rotation position), and the setting key switch 1311a is turned off and the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. It is performed based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF, while the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input. Sometimes it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off.

In the determination of step S226, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the setting key has not been turned off, it returns to the determination of step S226 and repeats the determination of step S226 until the setting key is turned off.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S226, when it is determined that the setting key has been turned off, the main control MPU 1310a stops outputting the lighting signal to the setting indicator 1310g for displaying the updated setting value on the setting indicator 1310g. Then, the updated setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S228).

Following step S228, the main control MPU 1310a stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1311c (step S230).

Following step S230, the main control MPU 1310a sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to a value 0 (step S232). As described above, the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is the current setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is the first ON). It is a flag indicating whether or not to allow the setting change of the set value 1 to the set value 6 at the time of operation), and when the setting change of the set value is permitted. The value is set to 1 and the value is set to 0 when the setting change of the set value is not permitted. In the process of step S232, by setting the value 0 in the setting change permission flag CS-FLG, the setting change of the setting value is not permitted after that.

Following step S232, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the set value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The “normal range” is the same as that of the determination in step S208, and as described above, in the present embodiment, the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the setting It is preset to a value up to a value of 6. In the determination in step S233, in order to reconfirm whether the set value is an abnormal value, the main control MPU 1310a has a normal set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM in step S224. It is determined whether or not the value is one of the set value 1 to the set value 6 which is the range, and when it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

In the determination of step S233, when it is determined that the main control MPU1310a is in the normal range, the serial communication initial setting is performed (step S234), and then a setting change command is created to set transmission information (step S236). Subsequently, the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process for transmitting the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 as the main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 is performed (step S238), and this routine is terminated. The serial communication initial setting in step S234 is the same process as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 176, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 is FIG. 177. This is the same process as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in 1. Here, in the initial setting of serial communication in step S234, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 is mainly performed prior to the initial setting of serial communication in step S44. Although it is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as peripheral serial data, this is prioritized before the reservation of the command to be transmitted at power-on is set in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 176. This is to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the set value has been changed by the setting change command. The setting change command is a command for notifying the setting value whose setting has been changed and the setting value storage completion. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, it updates the set value history information (information corresponding to the set value and the date and time) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). To do.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S233, when it is determined that the main control MPU1310a is not in the normal range, an error display process is performed (step S240), and the infinite loop is entered. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process is completed is maintained, the game cannot proceed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. The detailed explanation of this error display processing will be described later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power off processing is not completed normally when the power is cut off. If it is determined, it is considered that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted), and an error display is performed to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

[9-5. Setting value confirmation display processing]
Next, the set value confirmation display process will be described. This set value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S117 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177.

When the set value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 179 (step S350). This confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and the value 1 is set when the set value is confirmed and displayed. When the value is not confirmed and displayed, the value is set to 0.

In the determination in step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when the set value is not confirmed and displayed, the main control MPU 1310a opens the main body frame 4 and turns on the setting key. (Step S352). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. Then, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is set clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) 60. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the rotation operation and the first ON operation, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a causes the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. On the other hand, it is determined that the preset value display permission condition is satisfied by determining that the setting key is open and that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the signal of the setting key ON. , It is determined that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame release switch, and / or the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on by the setting key ON signal. By the determination, it is determined that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied.

In the determination of step S352, when it is determined that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a terminates this routine as it is, while the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the set value is to be confirmed and displayed, the value 1 is set in the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG (step S354), and then the current installation value is acquired (step S356). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S356, the main control MPU1310a determines whether or not the set value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The "normal range" is the same as that of the determination in step S208 and the determination in step S233 in the setting change process of FIG. 215. As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, and the setting The values up to the value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value 6 are preset. In the determination in step S357, the main control MPU 1310a reconfirms whether the set value is an abnormal value, so that the set value acquired in step S356 (that is, the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM) It is determined whether or not the set value (set value stored in) is one of the set values 1 to 6 which is in the normal range, and when it is determined that it is in the normal range, the set value is used as it is. To do.

In the determination of step S357, when it is determined that the main control MPU 1310a is in the normal range, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal for displaying the set value acquired in step S356 on the setting indicator 1310g to the setting indicator 1310g. The set value is displayed for 1310 g (step S358).

Following step S360, the main control MPU1310a creates an ON operation command for the setting key, stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and sets the ON operation command for the setting key (step S360). ), End this routine. The ON operation command of this setting key is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177. The ON operation command of the setting key indicates that the setting value confirmation display process, which is this routine, has started (that is, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is confirmed). It is a command to convey.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ON operation command of the setting key, the ON operation history information of the setting key (the set value is confirmed) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). Information that associates the fact with the date and time) is updated.

Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ON operation command of the setting key, the ball collection history information, the set value history information, the error display history information, and the ON operation history information of the setting key described above are received. The predetermined specific history information display permission condition that the display of the specific history information such as the above can be permitted is satisfied. In the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510, a person who confirms the specific history information in a state where the predetermined specific history information display permission condition is satisfied performs a rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 and a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303. By performing the above, the control is performed to switch from the previously displayed image to the specific history information display image for selectively displaying the specific history information and display the specific history information in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S350, whether the main control MPU1310a has an OFF operation of the setting key when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when the set value is confirmed and displayed. It is determined whether or not (step S362). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by the OFF operation, and the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is used. When the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF. On the other hand, when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input, it is determined that the setting key has not been turned OFF.

In the determination of step S362, the main control MPU 1310a terminates this routine as it is when it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off, but does not confirm and display the set value when it is determined that the setting key has been turned off. The value 0 is set in the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG (step S364), and then the output of the lighting signal for displaying the set value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g is stopped. The acquired setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S366), and then an OFF operation command for the setting key is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. , The OFF operation command of the setting key is set (step S368), and this routine is terminated. The OFF operation command of this setting key is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177. The OFF operation command of the setting key indicates that the setting value confirmation display process, which is this routine, has been completed (that is, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM has been confirmed). It is a command to convey.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the OFF operation command of the setting key, the predetermined specific history information display permission condition described above is not satisfied. At this time, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 controls to display the above-mentioned specific history information display image in the display area of the effect display device 1600, immediately before switching to the specific history information display image. Control is performed to switch back to the original image by switching to the image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S357, the main control MPU1310a sets the interrupt disallowance setting when it is determined that the range is not normal (step S370). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, which was repeatedly performed every 4 ms, is stopped.

Following step S370, the main control MPU 1310a enters an infinite loop that performs error display processing (step S372) and then continues to clear the main control built-in WDT (step S374). Due to this infinite loop, the main control built-in WDT will continue to be cleared, but this cannot be stopped once the main control built-in WDT is started, so by continuing to clear the main control built-in WDT, the main control built-in WDT will continue to be cleared. By setting the timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built in the control MPU1310a, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is restarted, so that the main control is mainly controlled by the main control built-in WDT. The MPU 1310a does not have to be forcibly reset. Further, due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process is completed is maintained, the game cannot proceed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. The detailed explanation of this error display processing will be described later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power off processing is not completed normally when the power is cut off. If it is determined, it is considered that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted), and an error display is performed to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

[9-6. Error display processing]
Next, the error display process will be described. This error display process is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 175, and is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 175 (FIG. 178). It is a process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 179), and is a process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 179.

When the error display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a stops the firing permission signal as shown in FIG. 180 (step S400). As described above, the launch permission signal conveys that the launch of the game ball B is permitted to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, and when the logic is set to the launch permission logic, the launch is performed. If the logic is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is the reverse of the launch permission logic, it is possible to tell that the launch is stopped (not permitted). ..

The error display process of this routine is one of the processes performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 175 or the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 175. When started as (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 178), the main control MPU 1310a interrupts step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 176. Since the permission setting cannot be performed, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177 cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting process in step S113 in the same process cannot be performed. Since the launch permission signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a reset function, a reset function is provided at the time of power recovery. The main control output circuit has been reset, and its logic is the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is the reverse of the launch permission logic.

Therefore, the error display process of this routine is the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 175 or the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 175. When started as one process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 178), the main control MPU1310a returns the power in step S400 and then displays an error, which is the present routine. In order to prevent the game ball B from being fired even after the processing is started, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic), and the predetermined output port thereof. It is output from the output terminal of the above to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a reset function.

When the error display process, which is the present routine, is started as the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 179, the main control MPU 1310a is set in step S357 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 179. In the judgment, it is judged that the content of the main control built-in RAM is abnormal. Although the main control MPU 1310a has already set the interrupt permission in step S52 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 176, it has already been shown in FIG. 179 before the error display processing of this routine is started. Since the interrupt non-permission setting is performed in step S370 of the set value confirmation display process, when the error display process of this routine is completed, an infinite loop is entered as described above. Therefore, the main control side shown in FIG. 177. The timer interrupt process cannot be performed, and the launch permission signal setting process in step S113 in the process cannot be performed.

Therefore, when the error display process of this routine is started as the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 179, the main control MPU 1310a has an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S400. In order to prevent the game ball B from being fired in a certain state, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) and reset from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. It is output to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a function.

Following step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the alphabet E as an error display on the setting display 1310g is output to the setting display 1310g, and an error is displayed on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

Following step S402, the main control MPU 1310a displays an error to the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In this step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all the various indicators of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400.

Following step S404, the main control MPU1310a performs serial communication initial setting (step S406), then creates an error display command to set transmission information (step S408), and then sets in step S406. Peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing for transmitting transmission information (error display command) as main peripheral serial data to peripheral control board 1510 is performed (step S410), and this routine is terminated.

The serial communication initial setting in step S406 is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 178 and the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 176. The peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S410 is the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 178 and the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177. This is the same process as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S120. The error display process of this routine is performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 175, and is performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 175 (FIG. 178). The process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 179) and the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 179 are started and ended, respectively, and the infinite loop is entered as described above. , This infinite loop keeps the state where the error display process is completed, and the game cannot proceed at all.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the serial communication is initially installed in step S406, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S410 is used as the main peripheral serial data as the peripheral control board. It is being transmitted to 1510.

The error display command is a command for notifying that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or unreliable). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the error display history information (information corresponding to the error display command and the date and time of reception) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) ) Is updated.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the display area of the effect display device 1600 says "RAM error has occurred. Please call the staff." In the blue background image. In addition to controlling the display of message images in white characters, the announcement "A RAM error has occurred. Please call a staff member." Is adjusted by rotating the volume control switch on the peripheral control board 1510. It is controlled to flow from various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, main body frame speaker 622, etc.) by forcibly setting the maximum volume regardless of the volume. The process of notifying a RAM error by an error display command is the process having the highest priority, and when the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command to convey another error and then receives an error display command, the RAM Gives the highest priority to error notification.

[10. Various control processes for payout control boards]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 173 will be described with reference to FIGS. 181 to 184. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on processing of the payout control unit, FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on processing of the payout control unit of FIG. 181. FIG. 183 is a payout control unit following FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the power-on processing, and FIG. 184 is the flowchart which shows an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt processing. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described.

[10-1. Dispensing control unit power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633, as shown in FIGS. 181 to 183, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed. .. When the payout control unit power-on processing is started, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the interrupt priority of the payout control MPU. In the present embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set to the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

Following step S500, the payout control MPU performs input / output settings (I / O input / output settings) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506) and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the voltage reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. .. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (waiting timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is being operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch, and it is determined that it does not indicate that the RAM is cleared when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI. While determining that the RAM clear switch is not being operated, it is determined that when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is cleared and the RAM is cleared. Determine that the switch is operating.

In the determination in step S512, when it is determined that the RAM clear switch is being operated, the payout control MPU sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU is in a state in which the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU can be executed for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S512, when the payout control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch is not operated, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 0 (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, a prize ball information storage area). The logical state of the PRDY signal stored in the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the CR communication information storage area is set. It is a flag indicating whether or not to delete the payout information related to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information, etc.), and is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU is set to allow access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, the RAM with built-in payout control can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

Following step S518, the payout control MPU sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address loaded on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are pushed onto the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by reading in order from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

Following step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

In the determination in step S522, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that the payout information is not erased (step S524). In this checksum, the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is regarded as a numerical value and the total is calculated.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power cutoff process (power down) described later. (Step S526). In step S526, when the payout control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the payout backup information such as the payout information and the checksum value is stored and held in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power cutoff process described later, and is paid out. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power off processing is normally completed, and is set to 0 when the payout control unit power off processing is not normally completed.

In the determination of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power cutoff process has been normally completed, the payout control built-in RAM is used as the time of power recovery. The work area of (step S530) is set. In this setting, the value 0 is set in the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, and the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in ROM), and the power is restored. The information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area), which are the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc., PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the PRDY signal is set, stored in the CR communication information storage area, Information to be used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the inconsistency counter reset judgment time stored in the time management information storage area. The term "recovery" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on from the state in which the power is cut off, but also the state in which the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S522, the payout control MPU determines that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, that the payout information is to be erased, or in the determination in step S526. When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or in the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, When it is determined that the payout control unit power off processing has not been normally completed, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). This setting reads the initial information from the payout control built-in ROM and sets this initial information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initial setting (step S536). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt enable setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every 2 ms, that is, the interrupt cycle set in step S536.

Following step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is set to clear by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. Will be done. The determination in step S540 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

In the determination of step S540, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is not input, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that clocks 2 ms in the payout control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later, and has a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. Set.

In the determination of step S542, when the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, the payout control MPU returns to step S540, and the payout control MPU inputs a power failure warning signal. Determine if it has been done.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S542, the payout control MPU sets the value 0 in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed (step S544). ).

Following step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information for notifying that various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received, and drive control to the payout motor 584 are performed. Various information such as drive information, prize ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display is stored, and payout is performed based on this output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the control MPU, the payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 or the drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Or, the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is output to the external terminal plate 558 as a prize ball number information output signal (in the present embodiment, the payout motor 584 actually pays out 10 game balls). Every time B is paid out, a prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558.

Specifically, a counter for determining the number of prize balls information for determining whether or not to output the number of prize balls information is provided, and the payout motor 584 actually determines the counter for determining the number of prize balls. The number of balls of the game ball B paid out to the above is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, and the payout motor 584 actually pays out the game ball B. The prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is stored and updated by a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of balls.

In a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls B actually paid out by the payout motor 584, a counter for determining the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. Based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, the number of the game balls B actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value of and the memory is updated.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter is read from the prize ball information storage area, and when the value of the read prize ball number information output determination counter exceeds the value 10 ( That is, the prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal plate 558 (when the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10 balls), and the number of balls exceeding the number is output. The indicated value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter), and the display signal is output to the error LED display.

Following step S548, the payout control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, an operation signal of the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from the CR unit, The BRDY signal and CR connection signal, and the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys that the main control board 1310 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later are read and input as input information. Store in the information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer update process, the ball squeeze determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a ball squeeze state is generated by the payout blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted is determined. The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed is set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the game ball B in which the lower plate 202 is stored is full. It is determined whether or not the number of balls of the game ball B taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number by the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 and the full tank determination time. In addition to managing the time such as the ball out judgment time set as the judgment condition, the number of balls of the game ball B received and paid out by the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the actual payout. It is determined whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the inconsistent game ball B is paid out repeatedly due to the mismatch between the number of balls detected by the detection sensor 591 and the number of balls. At that time, the time management of the judgment condition and the inconsistency counter reset judgment time set is performed. For example, when the ball gummy judgment time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms. Therefore, the ball gummy judgment time is subtracted by 2 ms each time the timer update process is performed, and the subtraction result is a value. When it becomes 0, the ball shaving judgment time is accurately measured. It should be noted that these various determination times are stored in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input is determined. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags and various information stored in the various information storage areas, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Etc. (for example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information to be used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the signal is set.

By this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery are stored as the payout backup information. It can be restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. As a result, even if the payout operation of the game ball B by the payout device 580 is being executed and the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the payout operation is continued at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the game ball B can be paid out to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, in the CR communication processing, the payout control MPU momentarily stops or loses power when the game ball B is paid out to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202 while exchanging various signals with the CR unit. Even if the exchange of various signals with the unit is cut off and the payout of the game ball B cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the mismatch counter INCC at the time of power recovery. By restoring the values such as, etc. to the values stored as the payout backup information, such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC, immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. , The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure can be continued from the time of power recovery, and the game ball B can be continuously paid out. It has become like.

In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power stop or stop even if the power is restored. Therefore, various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (pain control MPU) and the CR unit do not change due to the influence of the momentary power failure or stoppage. Therefore, the reliability of exchanging various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (pain control MPU) and the CR unit can be improved.

Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 at the time of power recovery. When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal that conveys, for example, that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is paid out. Output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the specified output port of the MPU. Then, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as one of the main operation setting processes, for example, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM included in the payout backup information. Based on, it is determined whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, and when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. In other words, it is determined that the payout operation of the game ball B by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, a value 1 is set in the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and the payout ball Gami movement determination setting process is performed. , As a setting of the output of the error state to the CR unit, for example, the logical state (LOW) of the PRDY signal that conveys that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible when not communicating with the CR unit is set as the PRDY signal. It is set in the output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication processing, the logical state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area by the next timer interrupt from the time of power recovery, and the PRDY signal is read out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU. Outputs to the CR unit. In this way, for example, if the payout operation of the game ball B by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power failure, that state is restored when the power is restored. At an early stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible can be output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU, and the payout device can be sent to the CR unit. It is possible to convey that the payout operation of the game ball B by the 580 is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent BRDY, which is a useless ball lending request signal, from being output from the CR unit at an extremely early stage after the power is restored.

Further, in the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, when the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and the logic is HI based on the CR connection signal, that is, the pachinko machine. When 1 is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, PRDY is used to convey that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible. While the logical state of the signal is output as HI from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, when the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout control MPU sets the logical state of the PRDY signal as LOW in order to convey that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible. Output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the specified output port of. The logical state of the EXE signal for notifying that one payout operation has started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and is stored in the payout control board 633. The CR connection signal that conveys whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs a full tank and out-of-ball check process (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the game ball in which the above-mentioned lower plate 202 is stored by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154. It is determined whether or not the tank is full in B, and the number of balls of the game ball B taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 described above by the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is equal to or more than a predetermined number. It is judged whether or not it is. For example, to determine whether or not the lower plate 202 is full in the stored game ball B, the full tank detection sensor 154 is used in the current full tank and out-of-ball check process using the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms. When the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned off in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and ball out check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned from OFF to ON. When the transition to, the timer update process in step S552 starts the time counting of the full tank determination time described above. Then, when the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, is the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 ON in this full tank and ball out check process? Judge whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the full tank information indicating that the lower plate 202 is full in the stored game ball B is transmitted to the above-mentioned state information storage area. Remember. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, the full tank information indicating that the lower plate 202 is not full in the stored game ball B is stored in the state information storage area.

Whether or not the number of balls of the game ball B taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number is also determined by using the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms to check the full tank and the ball out. When the detection signal from the ball-out switch is turned on in the process and the detection signal from the ball-out switch is turned off in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and ball-out check process, that is, the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 When transitions from OFF to ON, the timer update process in step S552 starts the timing of the ball-out determination time described above. Then, when the ball-out determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball-out determination time is reached, is the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 ON in this full tank and ball-out check process? Judge whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is ON, it is assumed that the number of balls of the game ball B taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number. While the cut information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is OFF, the number of balls of the game ball B taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number. If it is not, the ball-out information that conveys that fact is stored in the state information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs a command reception process (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received. When these various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, a connection abnormality is transmitted to indicate that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the payout control MPU performs a command analysis process (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as received command information.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs the main operation setting process (step S562). In this main motion setting process, motion settings such as prize balls, ball lending, ball removal and ball shavings are set, retry motions are determined, and the number of unpaid balls (prize ball stock number) is monitored. ..

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the state information storage area described above, display data to be displayed on the error LED display of the payout control board 633 is created, and stored as LED display information in the output information storage area described above. To do. For example, when the above-mentioned ball-out information is read from the state information storage area and the number of balls of the game ball B taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number based on the ball-out information. Display data (display value 1 (number "1") in the present embodiment) is created and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into status displays are created based on the various information. Then, it is transmitted to the main control board 1310. For example, when the ball-out information is read from the state information storage area, the frame state is obtained when the number of balls of the game ball B taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number based on the ball-out information. One command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310.

Following step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are set in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is set to clear.

Following step S568, returning to step S539 again, the payout control MPU sets a value A in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL, determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input in step S540, and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If there is no signal input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, and when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, step S544 Set the value 0 in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG in step S546, set the value B in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL in step S546, perform port output processing in step S548, perform port input processing in step S550, and step S552. Performs timer update processing in step S554, CR communication processing in step S554, full tank and ball out check processing in step S556, command reception processing in step S558, command analysis processing in step S560, and step S562. The main operation setting process is performed, the LED display data creation process is performed in step S564, the command transmission process is performed in step S566, the value C is set in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. Do. The processes of steps S539 to S568 are referred to as "payout control unit main process".

The processing content of the payout control unit main processing differs according to the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. Therefore, the time required for processing the payout control MPU will fluctuate. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU preferentially outputs a payer ACK signal indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received to the main control board 1310. There is. As a result, the payout control MPU secures the processing time so that other fluctuating processing can be sufficiently performed.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S540, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt prohibition setting when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has been input (step S570). With this setting, the timer interrupt process of the payout control unit, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and the above-mentioned rewriting of the payout information is protected.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). As a result, the payout of the game ball B is stopped.

Following step S574, the payout control MPU sets the watchdog timer to clear (step S576). As described above, this clear setting is performed by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S576, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). For this checksum, the payout information of the work area of the payout control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, is regarded as a numerical value, and the total is calculated.

Following step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S580). As a result, the storage of the payout backup information is completed.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU sets the prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading become impossible, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not set to clear because the value A, the value B, and the value C are not set in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL. Therefore, the payout control MPU is reset, and then the payout control unit power-on processing is performed again. The processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power off processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (pain control MPU) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and when the power is restored thereafter, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed.

In step S526, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power off processing is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

[10-2. Payout control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 181 to 183.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU sets the timer interrupt to disabled and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 184 (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-mentioned payout control unit main processing is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing of the payout control unit from being destroyed.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets a value of 1 in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that clocks 2 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and becomes a value 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. Each is set.

Following step S592, the payout control MPU switches (returns) registers (step S594). This return switches from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

Following step S594, the payout control MPU sets interrupt enable (step S596) and ends this routine.

[11. Various control processes for peripheral control boards]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) shown in FIG. 173 will be described with reference to FIGS. 185 to 189. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 187 shows an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing. First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing will be described. .. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority as the interrupt processing, followed by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

As described above, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 has a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, a sound source, a SATA controller, various I / O interfaces, and the like integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[11-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 185. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control unit power-on processing is performed as shown in FIG. 185 under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the initial setting processing (step S1000). In this initial setting process, a process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, a process of determining a hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, a process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), etc. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs the process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control IC is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC takes an extremely short time. Can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is in a state in which interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, a command related to control of the game effect output from the main control board 1310. And various commands such as commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current time information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Set calendar information and current time information.

In the present embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires the calendar information and the time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when the power is turned on. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) after the current time information acquisition process is performed so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Is set to a value of 0 when is not executed. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG receives a V blank signal from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to convey that the screen data (information defining the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, which is executed when the data is executed. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT after setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), the CPU returns to step S1006 again to see if the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1. Whether or not it is repeatedly determined. By repeating such a determination, the state waits until the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset. ing.

In the determination of step S1006, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG. The value 1 is set (step S1008). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed.

Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is set to a value of 1 to initialize the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the contact detection sensor main body 358, the pressure detection sensor 373, and the elevating detection sensor 374 provided in the effect operation unit 300, Rotation (rotation direction) and pressing operation of the contact operation unit 302 based on detection signals from various detection sensors such as the sudden output detection sensor 375 (hereinafter, referred to as "various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300"). Various information acquired from the operation of the unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the contact operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300, and the pressing operation unit 303. Based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC in which the operation history information of the above is set, the rotation direction of the contact operation unit 302 and the presence / absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 303 are monitored, and the rotation direction of the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit are monitored. It is appropriately determined whether or not the operation state of 303 is reflected in the game production. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted by the effect operation unit information acquisition process, the schedule data for sound generation is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the light emission mode is adjusted according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite the generation schedule data. As a result, the adjustment of the volume and the brightness is reflected in real time, and the production proceeds with the adjusted volume and the brightness.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one process of the effect operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp pallet setting table composed of the specified brightness value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. Are set respectively. While the production is in progress, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, and the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the production operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to perform the first operation. When one brightness specified value ranging from the brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value which is the maximum brightness is set, the above-mentioned floor set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so as to be the set brightness specified value. It is possible to update the tone information.

Here, the luminance designation value, the normal palette value, and the special palette value that constitute the lamp palette setting table will be briefly described. As the brightness designation value, one brightness designation value can be set in a range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value which is the minimum brightness (light off) to the 31st brightness designation value which is the maximum brightness. It is a possible value, and the normal palette value and the special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance corresponding to the 0th (zero) luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value. The player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the operable production operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the 31st brightness, which is the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value. It is possible to set one specified brightness value up to the specified value.

For example, a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) specifies the 0th (zero) brightness in which the current brightness is tentatively the minimum brightness (extinguished) when the contact operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise. When it is set to the first luminance specified value, which is the next highest brightness level after the value, a predetermined formula (for example, linear) is set from the first luminance specified value to the 31st luminance designated value which is the maximum brightness. Along the tone curve (or spline curve tone curve), the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed so as to increase, while the contact operation unit 302 is countered. When the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness in the case of rotating clockwise, a predetermined formula (for example, linear) from the 31st brightness specified value, which is the maximum brightness, to the first brightness specified value. The brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed so as to be lowered along the tone curve (or a spline curve-like tone curve). When the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) rotates the contact operation unit 302 to select the desired brightness and presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired brightness is determined. In the present embodiment, there is a case in which the player (or a clerk of the game hall, etc.) can set the brightness while the production is in progress. At this time, the player (or the clerk of the game hall, etc.) can set the brightness. Etc.) can set the desired brightness by operating the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. Further, when a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) operates the contact operation unit 302 at a predetermined position in the display area of the effect display device 1600 while the effect is in progress, the first brightness specified value to the 31st brightness By displaying a bar-shaped indicator showing the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually show as an image how much the desired brightness of the player (or a clerk of a game hall, etc.) is. You can do it. Further, in the present embodiment, the 14th luminance designated value is set as the initial value (default).

The normal palette value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information by the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side, which are irradiated as direct light. is there. As the normal pallet value, one of 17 steps is selected in 5% increments from the minimum pallet value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum pallet value (100%), which is the maximum value. A mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve) in which one brightness designation and the corresponding palette value are predetermined in a range of 32 steps from the specified value of the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value. , Or a spline curve tone curve).

The minimum palette value (20%) is the maximum palette value corresponding to one brightness designation in the range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which is the above-mentioned brightness designation value. It is a value of 20% with respect to (100%), and similarly for other palette values, the value (%) described in parentheses is the 0th (zero) brightness specified value ~ which is the above-mentioned brightness specified value. It is a value for the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one luminance designation in the range of 32 steps up to the 31st luminance designation value.

In the present embodiment, as the normal pallet value, the maximum pallet value (100%) is selected in advance with respect to various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side, which are irradiated as direct light. Of the various decorative boards provided on the game board side that are set as the gradation information described above and are irradiated as direct light, a palette is used for a specific decorative board (LED that the player feels dazzling), which is not shown. A value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the gradation information described above.

The special palette value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information of the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light. Unlike the normal palette value, the special palette value has only one step, and is one of the 32 steps in the range from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which is the brightness designation value described above. The luminance designation and the corresponding palette value are set as the above-mentioned gradation information according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve).

As described above, if the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light is the same as the brightness of the LED used as the direct light, the indirect light by the light guide plate becomes darker than the direct light. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set by using a special palette value instead of using the normal palette value set with respect to the brightness of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate emits light by indirect light with the first luminance specified value, which is the next highest luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance specified value, which is the minimum luminance (off). As the lowest possible brightness, the normal palette value is set to a value almost equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the maximum palette value (100%) is set, and the range from the 1st brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value. Of these, one luminance designated value and a corresponding palette value are set according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curved tone curve).

As described above, in the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the LED used as indirect light are based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the specified brightness value, the normal palette value, and the special palette value. When the brightness of the LED is set, the brightness obtained by the operation of the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 by the player (or a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall) with respect to the brightness of the LED used as the direct light. While it is set according to the normal palette value corresponding to the specified value, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) touches the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit with respect to the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. It is set according to the special palette value corresponding to the specified brightness value by the operation of 303. As a result, when the player feels that the brightness of the LED used as direct light is dazzling and the player operates and sets the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in order to reduce the brightness, the direct light is used. The brightness of the LED used is set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value that is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value that is the minimum brightness (light off)), and is linked to this. Therefore, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is also set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value which is the minimum brightness (extinguishing)). Even so, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value substantially equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). The minimum brightness at which the state in which the light guide plate is emitting light by indirect light can be visually recognized is set.

In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually sets the brightness of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side with respect to the LEDs used as direct light. Even if it is not set, the light emission mode according to the flow of the effect is set, and the flow of the effect by the light emission mode of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. After seeing, set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative substrate that is too dazzling (or a slightly darker brightness can exert the effect more), and other By setting the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) with respect to the decorative substrate, the balance of the overall light emission mode can be changed extremely easily. That is, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the operable production operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value. Even if one brightness designation value up to the brightness designation value is set, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to the one brightness designation value is set for a specific decorative substrate. Since one brightness designation value and the corresponding maximum palette value (100%) are set for each of the other decorative substrates, the relationship between the light emission modes (bright or dark) set to each other is set. The brightness can be adjusted extremely easily without breaking the relationship.

Further, although it is difficult to adjust the brightness of the indirect light by the light guide plate as compared with the direct light, the special palette value different from the normal palette value (that is, independent of the normal palette value) for the LED used as the indirect light. The brightness can be set by. As a result, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is controlled by the special palette value, and the brightness of the LED used as direct light is controlled by the normal palette value. Therefore, the LED used as indirect light. The brightness of the LED and the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, in the display data creation process described later, one screen generated on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC by reading the image data from the SDRAM based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC by the VDP of the peripheral control IC. Minutes (1 frame) of drawing data are output to the liquid crystal output board. As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, when drawing that exceeds the drawing capacity of the VDP of the peripheral control IC is performed, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent a delay in the processing time, but so-called frame dropping occurs, but various speakers such as the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker 622 by the sound data output processing described later. (Hereinafter referred to as "various speakers"), the mechanism is such that it is possible to prioritize the production by the production sound such as music and sound effects according to various productions.

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process described later, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC and outputs it to various speakers from the set output channel. .. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects that match various effects are played from various speakers.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the number of the screen data from the first screen data is to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC. Update the pointer to.

Further, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is set to indicate which light emission data is to be output from the first light emission data among the light emission data arranged in the time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Update.

In the scheduler update process, among the sound data of the production sounds such as music and sound effects, and the sound command data for instructing the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in the time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation. The pointer is updated to indicate which sound command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC from the first sound command data.

In the scheduler update process, the output target is the drive data from the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in the time series constituting the electrical drive source schedule data. Update the pointer to indicate if you want to. Electrical drive source The drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that compose the schedule data is the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt that is repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. It updates the pointer to the data and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. That is, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed in the motor and solenoid drive processing for some reason. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be used, the drive data that should be originally instructed in the scheduler update process is forcibly updated.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the received command analysis process (step S1022). In this reception command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, and the received commands are analyzed and used for various settings of the effect. Update random numbers (for example, random numbers used for hold look-ahead related effects). Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In this reception command analysis processing, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyze the various commands issued. The CPU of the peripheral control IC reads out the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, and the like from the peripheral control ROM based on the various analyzed commands. (Extract) Set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the above-mentioned specified brightness value, normal palette value, and special palette value. And, respectively. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads (extracts) the schedule data for generating the light emission mode from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and performs the lamp palette setting process. By executing this, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value described above. When one brightness specified value up to the 31st brightness specified value is set, the above-mentioned gradation information may be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so as to be the set brightness specified value. You can do it.

Further, in the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start opening winning command for instructing the start of the starting opening winning effect, or a normal symbol. A normal symbol storage command for identifying the number of holds (0 to 4), and a variation pattern for instructing the start of a variation effect such as a variation display of a decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of a special symbol. It is analyzed whether it is a command, a symbol memory command that is output when the number of start hold changes, or a large prize opening 1 count display command that is output every time the game ball B is accepted in the large winning opening 2005. Recognize whether it is in a gaming state.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the reception command analysis processing. Analyze various commands. Various commands include various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronization effect, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronization effect, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power-on, and general. Various commands classified as related to synchronization production, various commands classified as related to normal electric service production, various commands classified as notification display, various commands classified as status display, various commands classified as related to test, and so on. There are various other commands that are classified. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process related to a notice or the like based on the received command, and based on the lottery result, screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical The drive source schedule data and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. As a result, the effect according to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

In the peripheral control ROM, various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1512, and the like are stored in advance. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and sounds for generating effect sounds such as music and sound effects. There are schedule data for generation, schedule data for electric drive sources that generate drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, and the like. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission mode data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and the order in which music and sound effects are played is defined. This sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. , A track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects, and a track number are specified. The electric drive source schedule data is composed of drive data of electric drive sources such as a motor and a solenoid arranged in chronological order, and the operation of the electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid is defined.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified into the notification display, the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in descending order of priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically transitioned to. It is designed to do. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another anomaly has occurred and one anomaly has occurred after one anomaly has occurred but before the anomaly has been resolved. Can be done.

Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and the time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which is the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, is updated, and the calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC based on the updated time information. The date is updated.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer is stored in the peripheral control ROM. It is read from (extracted) and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the VDP of the peripheral control IC is a screen that reads image data from the SDRAM and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600 based on the input screen data. Minutes (1 frame) of drawing data are generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in the time series constituting the sound generation schedule data, the sound command data indicated by the pointer is displayed. It is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When the sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates the sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data. , Set the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit performs steady processing), the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. Is specified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the volume corresponds to the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch, and in the sound data output process of step S1018, the output set in this sound data creation process. Sound data is output from the channel to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects that match various effects are played from various speakers.

Specifically, the resistance value is variable by rotating the volume control switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and the value is 0 to 0. It is converted into a value of 1024 steps up to the value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music is transmitted from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4. And sound effects are flowing. In this way, music and sound effects can be played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch. It has become.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track that incorporates the sound data, and multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC include directing sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data of and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume, the sound data of the notification sound and its volume are adjusted to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1. Subvolume value to be included.

Specifically, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch described above is set as a sub-volume value for the effect sound, and the volume adjustment switch is rotated for the notification sound. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or a special symbol display. A certain period of time (in this example, the peripheral control unit) when starting or stopping the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the device (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) 0.5 seconds have passed since the variation pattern command was received and 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, and 0.5 seconds have passed since the stop display command was received by the peripheral control unit. Except for (up to)), the adjustment can be performed by operating the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)). A certain period of time (in this example, the periphery) when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display). 0.5 seconds after the variable pattern command is received by the control unit until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or 0.5 seconds after the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed after the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command. By operating the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 except for (until seconds have passed), the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch in the sound data creation process is applied to the substrate. It is converted into 7 levels of volume 0 to 6, and further, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is used to operate the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by setting the board volume by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value accordingly.

In addition, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC include a plurality of multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined production sound is calculated. Actually, the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 are amplified to the master volume value which is the volume to flow, and the amplified production sound is serialized and audio. It is designed to be output as data.

In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined production sound is the maximum volume, the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side is amplified to the master volume value. The volume flowing from the top side speaker and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. The volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value to adjust is combined with the board volume adjusted by rotation operation, and the volume of this combined production sound is actually the top center on the door frame 3 side. Amplifies to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker, top side speaker, and main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4, and serializes this amplified production sound and outputs it as audio data for the notification sound. Is completely for volume adjustment based on the sound data of the notification sound built into the track to be used and the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound built into the track to be used. The maximum volume is combined without depending, and the volume of the combined notification sound is actually obtained from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4. It amplifies to the master volume value, which is the flowing volume, and serializes this amplified notification sound and outputs it as audio data.

Here, when the production sound is flowing from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4, a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or the pachinko machine 1 is dealt with. To briefly explain the control of playing a notification sound to notify the clerk of the hall of fraudulent activity, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and this production sound is incorporated. The sound data of the track, the sub-volume value set to mute the sound, the sound data of the track in which the notification sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value set to the maximum volume of the notification sound are combined and this is performed. The master volume value that is the volume of the combined production sound and the notification sound that actually flows from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4. The amplified production sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data. That is, as for the sound actually flowing from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4, only the maximum volume notification sound flows. At this time, since the production sound is muted, the production sound does not flow from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4, but the production sound is the above-mentioned sound. It is proceeding according to the schedule data for generation.

In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). After this predetermined period elapses, the volume of the effect sound that has been progressing according to the sound generation schedule data that has been forcibly set to mute is the sub-volume value of the board volume that is adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch. (At this time, if the volume of the production sound is adjusted by operating the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300, the sub-volume value of the adjusted production sound is adjusted. (Set to), the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 flow.

In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4, a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or the pachinko machine 1 When the notification sound is played to notify the clerk of the hall of the fraudulent act against, the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound is for the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass of the main body frame 4. Although it flows from the main body frame speaker 622, the muted production sound is proceeding according to the sound generation schedule data, so that the notification sound has passed a predetermined period and the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side have passed. When the bass frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 stops flowing, the production sound does not start to flow again from the place where the notification sound starts to flow, but is generated until the time when the notification sound starts to flow and a predetermined period elapses. It is designed to start flowing again from where it progressed according to the schedule data.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC peripherally controls the volume from mute to the maximum volume by a program. The sound source of the IC can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall rotates the volume control switch to set the volume to a low level, the production sounds such as music and sound effects played from various speakers are reduced, but the pachinko machine 1 is used. When a problem occurs or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a loud volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the staff such as the clerk of the game hall from being less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound.

Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to the backup area for steady processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are provided in the SDRAM. Copy to the backup area for routine processing and back up.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the WDT clear process (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and detects the V blank signal. A value 0 is set in the flag VB-FLG for initialization, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until a value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1006, it waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, steps S1008 to step S1006. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1008 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

In this peripheral control unit steady processing, first, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1008, and a value 1 is set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG. In step S1010, the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process is performed. Then, each process of step S1014, ..., And step S1036 is performed, and finally, when the value 0 is set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution completion of the peripheral control unit steady processing in step S1038, the process is completed. Become. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1006. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be received from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to the peripheral control IC. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later, which is executed when the data is input to the CPU. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so that the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. It is .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[11-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC. Will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 186 (step S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 185 is being executed, and the peripheral control unit steady-state. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

In the determination in step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, this is performed as it is. End the routine. On the other hand, in the determination in step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed, the V blank signal detection flag VB -Set the value 1 to FLG (step S1050) and end this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the steady processing is not executed.

In the present embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit stationary processing has been executed, and the peripheral control unit stationary processing is executed. When completed, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050, but this is because the V blank signal is input while the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady processing currently being executed is assumed to be executed in the determination of step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. Since the processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning, for the purpose of preventing this, step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 185. By setting the value 1 to the flag SP-FLG during steady processing in, the peripheral control unit stationary processing is being executed, which is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, and the peripheral control in FIG. 185. Peripheral control unit, which is this routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed by setting the value 0 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). By transmitting to the V blank signal interrupt process, whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine, that is, the peripheral control unit stationary process Is designed to determine whether or not the execution has been completed. In other words, it is a measure when the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time, the determination in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing that has failed the processing is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) of FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady processing, but if the above-mentioned peripheral control unit steady processing that has failed this time exists, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is 64 times. It is designed to be executed only 32 times. That is, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the consistency between the production progress state by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the production progress state by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is the timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect can be reliably matched.

[11-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 185 will be described. .. When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. 187 (step S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. A peripheral control unit 1ms timer A counter that counts the number of times interrupt processing is executed. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so that the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. It is .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second, ..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt is sequentially performed. It will occur.

In the determination of step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times, that is, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. When it is determined, this routine is terminated as it is. When the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, , The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt is newly started. ing.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1100, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33, the CPU of the peripheral control IC adds a value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 185. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one time.

Following step S1102, a motor and solenoid drive process is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the pointer indicates the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series while driving an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid according to the drive data to be performed, and the pointer is updated each time the motor or solenoid drive process is executed. To do. As a result, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 or an electric drive source provided in various production units provided in the game board 5). ) Is driven according to the electrical drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the movable body information acquisition process (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, original) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in various production units provided on the game board 5 are input. (Position history information, movable position history information, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The CPU of the peripheral control IC is the original position (standby position) of various movable bodies provided in the various production units provided on the game board 5 based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The movable position is grasped by setting or acquiring the movable position.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the effect operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, a contact operation unit) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input. (Rotation direction) history information of 302, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. From the history information of the detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, the rotation direction of the contact operation unit 302 and the operation presence / absence of the pressing operation unit 303 can be acquired. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by operating the effect operation unit 301, the volume of the effect sound output from the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be adjusted, and the door can be adjusted. It is possible to adjust the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided in the frame 3 and the game board 5.

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a backup process (step S1110) and ends this routine. In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and backed up, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are transferred to the SDRAM. Copy to the backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided and back up. In the present embodiment, the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and the backup area for steady processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are set in different areas and are set in different areas and are SDRAM. The 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the SDRAM and the steady processing backup area provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effect of steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 185, various processes related to the production of steps S1014 to S1032 are executed as the progress of the production within a period of about 33.3 ms. There is. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt Peripheral control by forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process, restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then newly generating the 1 ms timer interrupt. Part 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is not broken. Therefore, the progress state of the production can be surely matched.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is also generated in the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the part V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb the time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[11-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC starts transmitting various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC takes this as an opportunity to send 1 byte (8 bits) of the main peripheral serial data to the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC. ) Is fetched into the receive buffer, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main peripheral serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte and the total. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 188 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

In the determination in step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs 1 byte (8 bits) of information when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, among the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. When it is determined that the data can be received, 1 byte of information received from the reception buffer of the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC is taken in (step S1202), and a value 1 is added (incremented) to the reception counter SRXC. Step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data has been fetched from the receive buffer, and when the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data is fetched from the receive buffer, the value is 1, and the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data is set. When it is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 3. The initial value 0 of the reception counter SRXC is set when the power is turned on or the like.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, has been fetched from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data are sequentially output from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

In the determination of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is in a mode in which the reception counter SRXC is not a value 3, that is, the status is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, and is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. Then, when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, has not been sequentially fetched from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, in the second byte of the main peripheral serial data following the status of the first byte of the main peripheral serial data. When it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, is sequentially taken out from the receive buffer in a certain mode, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1210). S1212). In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 are regarded as numerical values, and the total (sum value). ) Is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step). S1214). The thumb value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202, is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, in the pachinko machine 1, the game ball B is supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and when the game balls B rub against each other and become charged, the pachinko machine 1 is electrostatically discharged to generate noise. It is in a vulnerable environment.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the status allocated as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is judged whether or not. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data has changed to the main peripheral serial data different from the normal one due to the influence of noise between the substrates of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. Can be determined.

In the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC matches the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212. When it is determined, the received status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216). ), End this routine.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC has 1 byte (8 bits) of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that the period during which information can be received has been exceeded, or in the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC has a sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202. When it is determined that the sum value calculated in step S1212 does not match, this routine is terminated as it is.

[11-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process executed when the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first activates a 2-microsecond timer (step S1300) as shown in FIG. 189, and whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. (Step S1302). In the determination in step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal has not been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC ends this routine as it is.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1302, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has elapsed 2 microseconds. In the determination of step S1304, when 2 macroseconds have not elapsed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC returns to step S1302, determines whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input, and if the power failure warning signal has not been input. When it is determined, this routine is terminated as it is, and when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the routine, is started.

In the determination in step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal has been continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is started, the power saving process is performed. (Step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially turning off the backlight of the effect display device 1600, turning off the excitation to the motor and solenoid provided on the game board 5, turning off various LEDs, and the like. By suppressing the power consumption of the pachinko machine 1, stable operation is ensured for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC can receive the commands being transmitted for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started, and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command backup processing (step S1310). In the backup process of this command, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is copied to the backup area for steady processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup.

Following step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S1312). In the determination in step S1312, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the WDT clear process (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal has not been input, or after step S1314, returns to step S1312 again to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input. Is determined. That is, it is infinitely determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely in this way, in the determination in step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal has not been input, the clear signal cannot be output to the external WDT. While the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal has been input in the determination of step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314 to perform the WDT clear processing of the peripheral control IC. The CPU does not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 185 is restarted.

In this way, when the input of the power failure warning signal continues in the infinite loop according to the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is executed in step S1314 to reset the CPU of the peripheral control IC immediately before the power failure state. It is designed not to take. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop according to the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, so that the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. It has become. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for more than a period of 2 microseconds, the determination in step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination in S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset because the WDT clear process in step S1314 is not executed. It is possible to deal with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[12. Main control board control process]
Next, an example of the control process executed on the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (step S114).

Assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes are updated (step S106), as shown in FIG. 190, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is first driven by the first start port sensor 3002. On condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first start port 2002) (step S231), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the above random number counter and this is the first of the RAM. (I) Execute a first start port passing process such as storing in a special symbol hold storage area (step S232). Further, on condition that the detection signal by the second start port sensor 2402 is in the ON state (the ball has entered the second start port 2004) (step S233), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the above random number. A second start port passage process such as acquiring from a counter and storing this in the second special symbol hold storage area of the RAM is executed (step S234).

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is controlled is set (step S235), and if the jackpot executing flag is set, the jackpot gaming state is controlled. The jackpot control process (step S235A) is executed. In the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped is a mode suggesting "15R jackpot", 15R A process of opening / closing the big winning opening 2005 is executed according to the big hit game state. Further, when the mode suggesting "2R jackpot" is reached, a process of opening / closing the jackpot 2005 is executed according to the 2R jackpot gaming state.

Further, in the jackpot control process (step S235A), after the opening control of the jackpot 2005 is performed, each set process of the time saving flag and the time saving number counter is executed. The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time is shortened, and the 2R big hit game is based on the fact that the result of the lottery process at the time when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped during the time saving state is a mode suggesting "2R big hit". It is set when ending the 15R jackpot game state during the time saving state and the non-time saving state. Then, when the time saving flag becomes a big hit next time, or when the counter value of the time saving number counter becomes "0", the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 201 or the second special symbol stop not shown will be described later. It is reset by the process.

Further, the time reduction counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of fluctuation displays of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of continuations of the time reduction state, and is controlled to the time reduction state after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case, when the jackpot game state is ended, the number of continuations of the time saving state is set. Then, the time reduction counter is counted down every time the fluctuation display of the special symbol is executed until the counter value becomes "0", but the next big hit is made before the counter value becomes "0". Occasionally, it is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 201, which will be described later, or the second special symbol stop process (not shown) (the counter value is returned to "0").

If the jackpot executing flag is not set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is "0". (Step S237), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S238), and the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area. On condition that the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S237), the second special symbol including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. The process process is executed (step S239). As described above, in this example, when the value of the second special hold number counter is not "0", the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S232).

If it is determined in the process of step S231 that the first start port sensor 3002 is in the ON state and the game ball B has entered the first start port 2002, it is shown in FIG. 191. As described above, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S241.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires a counter value by the first special hold number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol hold storage area from the main control built-in RAM. Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is "4", which is the maximum value (upper limit value) (step S242). In the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S243 to the following steps S243 to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S245 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special hold number counter is counted up (1 addition). Next, as the process of step S244, each random number acquired in step S241 is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is a display result of the variation display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variation random number acquired in step S241. Whether or not to make a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( After executing the effect pre-determination process for determining the pre-determination information (type of variation pattern) before starting the variation display according to the start winning prize (step S245), the process ends.

However, in the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variation display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S243 to S245, the variation display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, when the first hold storage number changes based on the game ball B entering the first start port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special hold number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is first held. A command (first hold number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 memory command 0)) instructing the first hold memory number in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) while updating the memory number. ~ 4)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 storage command 0 to 4). It has become like.

FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the effect pre-determination process (step S245). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random numbers acquired in step S241 above, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation Whether or not a big hit is achieved by comparing with a random number, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600. The mode type of the game effect is specified (step S261).

Then, the specified pre-judgment information (whether or not it is a big hit, the type of the big hit if it is a big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600. Depending on the mode type of the game effect to be played, the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number), and the number of pending storages (value of the pending number counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number. Set the pre-judgment command. For example, in the effect pre-determination process relating to the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first start port passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first reserved storage number (the first reserved memory number) (1) The value of the special hold number counter) and the first special symbol pre-determination command according to the above are set (step S262).

Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), the pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that it is stored corresponding to the first start port 2002 in which the start winning is generated. In addition to the number of reserved storages, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the special symbol based on the generated start prize is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the effect display device 1600 Peripheral control mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before the advance determination information such as the mode type of the game effect to be executed is executed as the game effect to be executed, and the variation display according to the start winning is started. You will be able to grasp the IC.

When the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a first hold storage area for storing prior determination information regarding the variation display of the first special symbol.

Further, the first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved storages, and the peripheral control IC stores the first (earliest) pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Store in order from the area. Then, when the pre-judgment command is received when the pre-judgment information is stored in the n-th (n = 1-3) storage area, the pre-judgment information notified to the n + 1-th (n = 1-3) storage area is received. Is stored, and when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of variation display of the first special symbol is received, the advance stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area according to the received first variation pattern command. The judgment information is discarded and the pre-judgment information stored in the Nth (N = 2-4) storage area is moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) storage area (to the reserved storage area). Shift the stored pre-judgment information). As a result, the pre-determination information of the first special symbol is stored so that the order in which the suspension of the start of the variable display occurs can be specified, and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-determination information.

When the variable display control is put on hold in this way, the jackpot expectation (pseudo-winning probability) of the variable display control is maintained even though the variable display control is maintained in the unexecuted state (holding state). ) Will be notified in advance at a predetermined timing, for example, when the hold display is newly output or when the hold display is shifted according to the hold digestion. ..

FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S234).

If it is determined in the process of step S233 that the second start port sensor 2402 is in the ON state and the game ball B has entered the second start port 2004, it is shown in FIG. 193. As described above, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S251.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the second hold storage number is the maximum value (upper limit value) based on this counter value. ) Is "1" or not (step S252). In the process of step S252, when it is determined that the second reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S253 to S253 to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S254 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S254, each random number acquired in step S251 is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

However, in the process of step S252, when it is determined that the second reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S253 to S254, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, when the second hold storage number changes based on the game ball B entering the second start port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special hold number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is secondly held. A command for instructing the second hold storage number in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) (second hold number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 storage command 0)) while updating to correspond to the memory number. ~ 1)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 storage command 0 to 1). It has become like.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the upper limit of the first reserved memory number based on the game ball B entering the first starting port 2002 is set to "4", while the game is played to the second starting port 2004. The upper limit of the second reserved memory number based on the entry of the ball B is set to "1". The second starting port 2004 allows a large number of game balls B to enter during the time saving state, and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shorter than that in the normal state. Even if the upper limit of is set to "1", the period in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is not performed continues for a long time, or the period in which the second reserved memory number is the upper limit continues for a long time. Even if the game ball B enters the ball, it is suppressed that the player is not in a disadvantageous state such that the chance of a big hit lottery is not obtained.

FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S238). The first special symbol process process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S239 of the special symbol process process are the same program modules, and are random numbers used for determination. Only the first special symbol process process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. 1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and based on the read first special random number, a lottery process for displaying the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed. Design normal processing (step S280)
2. 2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) in which the process of determining the mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped. )
3. 3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbol. First variation pattern setting process (step S282) in which the lottery process for
4. First special symbol variation processing (step S283) that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
5. The mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, is displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. First special symbol stop processing (step S284) to stop the variable display of the first special symbol so as to be performed.

The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S280) should be performed in the main control side power-on processing (see FIG. 175).

FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 195, first steps S301. As the process of, it is determined whether or not there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variation display control of the first special symbol in the hold state, it is then stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as the process of step S302. The random number stored in the earliest storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) is read from the RAM. .. Next, as the processing of steps S303 and S304, the first special hold number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control FIFO 1310a is stored in each storage area. The random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped are shifted in the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning prize are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a start winning prize occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1-3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1-3) storage area, and the first prize is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display control hold of the first special symbol occurs is identifiable and stored, and the hold of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). become.

Then, as the process of step S305, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process for winning the big hit, is performed based on the first special random number of the read first special symbol. After that, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) (step S306), this process ends.

FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the hit determination process (step S305).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has a hit determination table shown in FIG. 222 (A) and a special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 when the first special symbol normal process is executed, the first special random number, (Ii) When the special symbol normal processing is being executed, the comparison is made with the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal processing (step S311).

The hit determination table shown in FIG. 197 (A) is provided for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). Then, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, there are three types of hit determination values that match the jackpot determination value indicating that one type of first special random number has won the jackpot and are different from the jackpot determination value. Each of the above first special random numbers matches the big hit judgment value indicating that the first special random number has won a small hit, and matches the loss judgment value indicating that the 315 types of first special random numbers are lost. It is associated (big hit probability; 1/319, small hit probability; 3/319). Further, in this example, in the second special symbol process processing, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, the jackpot determination value indicating that one type of second special random number has won the jackpot is used. A loss judgment that matches the small hit judgment value indicating that 144 types of second special random numbers that match and are different from the big hit judgment value have won the small hit, and that the 174 types of second special random numbers are the above-mentioned loss. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the values (big hit probability; 1/319, small hit probability; 144/319). That is, the judgment table referred to for comparison with the second special random number is configured to have a higher probability of being judged as a small hit than the hit judgment table referred for for comparison with the first special random number. , When the variation display of the second special symbol based on the start prize to the second start port 2004 is executed than when the variation display of the first special symbol based on the start prize to the first start port 2002 is executed. It is becoming more advantageous for the player.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has the hit determination table and a special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing, or the second special read in the second special symbol normal processing. As a result of comparison with the random number), if it is determined to be a big hit (step S312), a big hit flag indicating that the fluctuation has won the big hit is set (step S313), and the hit determination process is completed.

Further, as a result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal processing), When it is determined to be a small hit (step S314), a small hit flag indicating that the fluctuation has won a small hit is set (step S315), and the hit determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, when neither the big hit nor the small hit is won, that is, when it is determined that the hit is lost, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the game state is the time reduction state and is used when the game state is the non-time reduction state. It is equipped with a reach judgment table for the state. Then, in the reach determination table in the time saving state, the reach is matched with the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number is reachable, and is consistent with the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach random numbers are not reachable. Random numbers are associated with each other.

Further, in the reach determination table in the non-time saving state, it matches the reach determination value indicating that five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time saving state reach. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the 67 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reach is higher in the non-time saving state than in the time saving state.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a reach loss as a result of comparison between the selected reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316), the fluctuation is caused. The reach flag indicating that the reach is reached is set, and the process ends (step S318).

FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 198, first. The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S321) and whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S324).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a compares the first symbol random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing with the jackpot symbol determination table shown in FIG. 197 (B). The type of jackpot is determined according to the above, and the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of jackpot is determined (step S322).

In particular,
1. 1. The opening / closing pattern is closed 15 times after the large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403 that 10 game balls B have won in the large winning opening 2005. (15 rounds) By repeating, the game ball B is controlled to the 15R jackpot game state in which the ball B can enter the jackpot 2005 (easy), and after the jackpot game state ends, a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) 15R jackpot that controls the time saving state to be terminated if the fluctuation display of is not a jackpot before it is executed 77 times. The opening / closing pattern is closed twice when the large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403 that 10 game balls B have won in the large winning opening 2005. (2 rounds) By repeating, the game ball B is controlled to the 2R jackpot game state in which the ball B can enter the jackpot 2005 (easy), and if it is controlled to the time saving state before the start of the 2R jackpot game state, the jackpot game state. After the end of, if the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times before the jackpot is reached, the time is controlled to be shortened, and before the start of the 2R jackpot game state. If it is controlled to a non-time saving state, it is determined to be one of two types of big hits, a 2R big hit that is controlled to a normal state after the end of the big hit game state.

In the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number, eight determination values are distributed in the case of a 15R jackpot, and 192 determination values are distributed in the case of a 2R jackpot. That is, when a lottery result of a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, there is a 4% probability of a 15R big hit and a 96% probability of a 2R big hit. Similarly, in the jackpot symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number, 196 determination values are distributed when the 15R jackpot is obtained, and 4 determination values are distributed when the 2R jackpot is achieved. That is, when a lottery result of a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, there is a 98% probability of a 15R big hit and a 2% probability of a 2R big hit. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the probability of being determined as a 15R jackpot is higher in the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number than in the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number. The game is played when the variation display of the second special symbol based on the start prize to the second start port 2004 is executed rather than the variation display of the first special symbol based on the start prize to the first start port 2002. It is in a state that is advantageous to the person.

Further, when the type of jackpot is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when the 2R jackpot is determined, the 2R jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol. In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), when the 15R jackpot is determined, the 15R jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and when the 2R jackpot is determined, the 2R jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing if the small hit flag is set when the big hit flag is not set in step S131 (step S324). The type of small hit is determined by comparing the first symbol random number and the small hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 197 (C), and when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of large hit is stopped. Aspect (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S325).

In particular,
1. 1. The opening / closing pattern of opening and closing the character winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) is executed twice to control the game ball B into a small hit game state in which the character winning opening 2006 can be entered (easily). By guiding all the game balls B that won the prize winning opening 2006 to the first losing opening 2535 during the small hit game state, the game balls B are accepted into the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008. First small hit that is difficult 2. The opening / closing pattern of opening and closing the prize winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) is executed 9 times to control the game ball B into a small hit game state in which the winning opening 2006 can be entered (easily). The second V by guiding one of the game balls B, which has won the prize winning opening 2006 during the small hit game state, to the third distribution device 2550 after the bonus winning opening 2006 is closed. The game ball B can be accepted into the winning opening 2008, and when the game ball B is accepted into the second V winning opening 2008, the large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time after the small hit game state (for example, 29). After (seconds) or when 10 game balls B have won in the big prize opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern that closes when the big prize opening sensor 2403 detects that the game ball B is large is repeated 15 times (15 rounds). It is controlled to the 15R jackpot game state where it is possible (easy) to enter the winning opening 2005, and after the end of the jackpot game state, the variation display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times. The second small hit that controls the time saving state that ends if there is no big hit in the meantime 3. By executing the opening / closing pattern 9 times in which the accessory winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed, the game ball B is controlled to be in a small hit game state in which the accessory winning opening 2006 can be entered (easily). , One of the game balls B that won the prize winning opening 2006 during the small hit game state is guided to the first V winning opening 2007 after the accessory winning opening 2006 is closed, and the game ball. Based on the fact that B has been accepted into the first V winning opening 2007, after the large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) after the small hit game state, or 10 game balls B are won in the large winning opening 2005. The opening / closing pattern that closes when the above-mentioned large winning opening sensor 2403 is detected is repeated 15 times (15 rounds), and the game ball B is controlled to a 15R big hit game state in which the game ball B can enter the large winning opening 2005 (easy). Then, after the end of the big hit game state, if the change display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is not executed 77 times before the jackpot is not reached, the time is controlled to be shortened. One of the three types of small hits is decided as the big hit.

In the small hit symbol determination table to be compared with the first symbol random number, 199 judgment values are distributed when the second small hit is obtained, and one judgment value is distributed when the third small hit is obtained. ing. That is, when a lottery result of a small hit is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, there is a 99.5% probability of becoming a second small hit, and a 0.5% probability of becoming a third small hit. You won't win a small hit. On the other hand, in the small hit symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number, 20 judgment values are distributed in the case of the first small hit, and 130 judgment values are distributed in the case of the second small hit. , 50 judgment values are distributed in the case of the third small hit. That is, when a lottery result of a small hit is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, there is a 10% probability of becoming a first small hit, a 65% probability of becoming a second small hit, and a 25% probability of becoming a small hit. It becomes the third small hit. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in the small hit symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number as compared with the small hit symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number, the prize winning opening 2006 was won. By guiding one of the game balls B to the first V winning opening 2007, the probability that the third small hit will always be the 15R big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state is increased. The game is played when the variation display of the second special symbol based on the start prize to the second start port 2004 is executed rather than the variation display of the first special symbol based on the start prize to the first start port 2002. It is in a state that is advantageous to the person.

Further, when the type of small hit is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of small hit is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when the second small hit is determined, the second small hit symbol is determined as the small hit symbol, and when the third small hit is determined, the third small hit symbol is determined as the small hit symbol. .. In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), if the first small hit is determined, the first small hit symbol is determined as the small hit symbol, and if the second small hit is determined, the small hit symbol is determined. If the second small hit symbol is determined, and if the third small hit is determined, the third small hit symbol is determined as the small hit symbol.

When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is determined to be an outlier symbol (step S327). Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs any of the above lottery results (big hit type, small hit, reach loss, and loss) as the process of step S328. (It may be the one that indicates the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol)) is set to the determination result notification command according to each of the lottery results so as to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S328). ). After that, as the process of step S329, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

Peripheral control unit 1511 displays and controls the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and fluctuation pattern command (left, middle, and right decorative symbols are variablely displayed, and left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle. The decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the decorative symbols (the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the same symbol and stopped and displayed at the same time). Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1511 specifies a small hit from the received determination result notification command as an mode (stop symbol) when the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped, the peripheral control unit 1511 is a small hit. When the symbol ("final battle") is decided and the 2R jackpot is specified, the combination of the 2R jackpot symbols (the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the same even-numbered symbols among the symbols "0" to "9". ), And when the 15R jackpot is specified, the 15R jackpot symbol (a combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the same odd-numbered symbols among the symbols "0" to "9") is determined. In addition, when the reach loss is specified, the loss symbol with reach (the combination of the same symbols with the left and right decorative symbols "0" to "9" but different intermediate decorative symbols; reach loss If it is decided to be a design) and the outlier is specified, it is decided to be an outlier symbol without reach (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative symbols are different symbols among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols) and fluctuate. When the variation time specified from the pattern command elapses (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the effect display device 1600.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to control the time saving state until the variation display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed up to 77 times after the big hit game state. The time saving state may be terminated based on the occurrence of a predetermined number of big hits after the transition control is performed. Specifically, if a predetermined number of big hits (for example, two times) occur after the big hit game state is controlled, the time saving state is not controlled after the predetermined number of big hit game states are completed. , It may be controlled to the normal state. Further, even when the number of times of big hits is less than a predetermined number of times, the non-time saving state may be controlled during the big hit gaming state, and the time saving state may be controlled again after the big hit gaming state.

FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first fluctuation pattern setting process should be performed, the jackpot flag is set in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 199. If this is done (step S341), a variable pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the type of big hit determined in step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S342), and the small hit flag Is set (step S343), and a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of small hit according to the type of small hit determined in step S325 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S344). If the reach flag is set (step S345), the variation pattern table at the time of reach (not shown) is selected (step S346), and neither the jackpot flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, normal. In the case of loss (loss without executing the reach effect), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of loss is selected (step S347).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S348), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started (step S349). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S350). As a result, the effect control is performed by the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 for the fluctuation time determined in this way.

In addition, a plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables of this example are provided for each determination result based on a special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and a symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). Further, in the fluctuation pattern set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. It is stored in a form associated with each variable random number. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a includes the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined by acquiring the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number from this table. As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the above special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of this example, it is set to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. .. For example, among the reach effects, the super reach effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation for the big hit gaming state is increased.

Further, when the fluctuation display control of the first special symbol is started, it is determined as the process of step S351 whether or not the counter value of the time reduction counter for which the continuation number of the time reduction state is set is "0". To do. Then, if this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time reduction counter (step S352), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous reduction counter is "0" (step S353). .. As a result, if the counter value is "0", the time saving end flag indicating that the time saving control is terminated is set (step S354).

If it is determined in the process of step S351 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is "0", or if it is determined in the process of step S353 that the time reduction counter is not "0", that time point In step S355, the process proceeds to step S355. Then, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S283), this process ends.

In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of disconnection, the fluctuation time information of the special symbol set to about 1 second in the time saving state is associated with the above special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol), while The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is set in such a way that the fluctuation time information of the special symbol set to about 12 seconds in the non-time saving state is associated with the above special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol). .. That is, the variation pattern at the time of loss selected in the time-saving state has an extremely short time required for the variation display control of the special symbol as compared with the variation pattern at the time of deviation selected in the non-time reduction state. The fluctuation time information of the above special symbol is set.

FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation processing (step S283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 200, first steps S371. As the process of, the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time is set according to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S282) for the fluctuation pattern is subtracted by 1. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in the process of step S373, this process ends when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 201, first steps S381. As the process of, the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined by the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed, and the effect display device 1600 is used. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S382).

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 resets the time saving end flag (step S384) and resets the time saving flag (step S385) when the time saving end flag is set (step S383). As a result, when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed a predetermined number of times (77 times in this example), the time saving control (control of the time saving state) is terminated and the non-time saving control is performed. (Control of normal state) will be started.

Further, when the jackpot flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating to start the jackpot game (step S387), and the jackpot game The waiting time until the start (the time for displaying the start of the jackpot game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S388). Although not shown, in step S388, a process of setting the number of rounds according to the type of jackpot in the jackpot count counter indicating the remaining number of rounds is also executed. The jackpot count counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the jackpot control process described later, and when the jackpot count counter becomes "0", it is determined that the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has executed the specified number of rounds. Control to end the jackpot game. Specifically, in the big hit control process described later, the big winning opening pre-opening process (step S401) and the big winning opening opening process (step S402) are repeatedly executed until the big hit count counter becomes "0", and the big winning opening is opened. When the round is completed in the opening processing (step S402), the jackpot counter is subtracted by 1 to become "0", and the process proceeds to the large winning opening post-processing (step S403) to end the jackpot game. Perform control to make it.

Then, the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is set (step S389). The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S387, a jackpot start command (15R jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (15R jackpot, 2R jackpot) is set. As a result, the effect of the jackpot game according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process process, a jackpot start command (15R jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) according to the type of jackpot (15R jackpot, 2R jackpot) is set. It has become.

Further, the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is, specifically, when the jackpot game is finished, the jackpot is hit in the jackpot control process (step S235A) after the jackpot is opened (step S403). Opening / closing control of the large winning opening 2005 according to the type (for example, after opening the large winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or 10 game balls B winning the large winning opening 2005 is the above-mentioned large winning opening sensor 2403. It is reset when the opening / closing pattern (opening / closing control that repeats the opening / closing pattern to be closed twice or 15 times) is completed (all rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game). By resetting the jackpot execution flag, the jackpot control process (step S235A) is not executed in step S235 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114), while the first function display unit 1400 The variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 become feasible.

Further, when the big hit flag is not set (step S386) and the small hit flag is set (step S390), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 indicates that the small hit game is started. The small hit start command is set (step S391), and the waiting time until the start of the small hit game (time for displaying the start of the small hit game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S392). Then, the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is set (step S393). The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of small hit. In step S391, the small hit start command (first small hit start command, second small hit start command, third small hit) according to the type of small hit (first small hit, second small hit, third small hit) Start command) is set. As a result, the effect of the small hit game according to the type of the small hit instructed by the small hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process process, the small hit start command (first small hit) according to the type of small hit (first small hit, second small hit, third small hit) The hit start command, the second small hit start command, and the third small hit start command) are set.

Further, when the small hit game is finished, the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is the small hit middle process (step S411) of the small hit control process (step S236A) described later. ) Ends the opening / closing control of the accessory winning opening 2006 according to the type of small hit (for example, the opening / closing control in which the opening / closing pattern of opening the accessory winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing it is repeated 2 or 9 times). Will be reset when you do. By resetting the small hit execution flag, the small hit control process (step S236A) is not executed in step S236 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114), while the function display unit 1400 The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 become feasible.

In addition, when the small hit flag is not set, that is, when a loss occurs, the waiting time (the time during which the stop symbol of the special symbol is displayed) until the next variation display of the special symbol is started is set in the interval timer. (Step S394), the process proceeds to step S395.

When the processes of steps S386 to S394 are executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process shifts to the initial value of the first special symbol normal process. (Step S395), this process ends.

FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S235A). In the jackpot control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed according to the jackpot process flag.

1. 1. The peripheral control board notifies the player that the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) shifts to the jackpot game state based on the mode when the variable display is stopped is the jackpot symbol. Pre-processing for opening the large winning opening (step S401), which waits until it is performed by 1510 or until the next round is started.
2. 2. The big winning opening 2005 is controlled to the open state based on the mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped is the big hit symbol, or the big winning opening 2005 is opened based on the start of the next round. After controlling and opening the large winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or when it is detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403 that 10 game balls B have won in the large winning opening 2005, it is closed. Processing while opening the large winning opening (step S402)
3. 3. Post-processing after opening the big winning opening, which waits until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the big hit game state ends when all the rounds are finished (step S403).

The jackpot process flag is operated to indicate that the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S401) should be performed in the process of step S42. Further, in the above-mentioned processing during opening of the large winning opening (step S402), at the start of a round for controlling the large winning opening 2005 to be in the open state, a big hit round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is set and the large winning opening 2005 is closed. At the end of the round to control the state, set the jackpot round end command according to the number of rounds. The jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command are commands transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect of the jackpot game according to the number of rounds instructed by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command is displayed. It is executed by the device 1600, a lamp / LED, a speaker, and the like.

FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small hit control process (step S236A). In the small hit process, one of the following two process processes is selectively executed according to the small hit process flag.

1. 1. Small hit start process (step S410) for executing the setting process for starting the small hit game state
2. 2. Small hit processing (step S411) for monitoring the entry and opening time of the game ball B during the small hit game state.

The small hit process flag is operated to indicate that the small hit start process (step S410) should be performed in the process of step S42. In addition, when the entry of the game ball B into a specific area is detected in the small hit middle process, the big hit executing flag is set and the number of rounds that can be executed in the big hit game state (15 rounds in this example) is set. Set to the count counter and end the process. As a result, the big hit game state is started following the small hit game state.

FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the ordinary symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process (step S116).

Now, assuming that the detection signal by the normal winning opening sensor 2401 is in the ON state in the process of step S801 and it is determined that the game ball B has passed through the normal winning opening 2003, as shown in FIG. 204. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains a normal random number of a normal symbol from the random number counter and stores it in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM as the process of step S802. Execute the oral winning process.

Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. 1. The normal symbol normal process (step S803) in which the normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number.
2. 2. Normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S804) in which a lottery process is performed for the fluctuation mode (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the normal symbol fluctuation random number.
3. 3. Normal symbol fluctuation processing (step S805) that waits until the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
4. The mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped, is displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Normal symbol stop processing (step S806) to stop the variable display of the symbol
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "hit the normal figure", the second start port door 2411 retracts and the game ball B to the second start port 2004 Ordinary electric accessory opening process (step S807) for executing a process for controlling the acceptance of

The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the main control side power-on processing (see FIG. 175).

[13. Game in the small hit game state]
Next, the game in the small hit game state will be described. As described above, in this example, when the result of the variable display of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit game in which the opening / closing pattern of opening and closing the accessory winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) is executed a predetermined number of times. All of the game balls B, which are controlled to the state and enter the accessory winning opening 2006 during the small hit game state and are detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 2513, are the first loss opening sensor 2516 and the third loss opening sensor 2518. , The small hit game state when detected by any of the first V winning opening sensor 2514 and the second V winning opening sensor 2515, that is, when the accessory winning opening 2006 is discharged to the rear of the game board 5. Is supposed to end. In addition, the game ball B that has entered the accessory winning opening 2006 during the small hit game state is accepted by the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008, and the first V winning opening sensor 2514 and the second V winning opening. When detected by the mouth sensor 2515, the game ball B is controlled to the big hit game state after the small hit game state, and the game ball B that has entered the accessory winning opening 2006 during the small hit game state is the first loss mouth 2535 or the third loss mouth. When it is received by 2555 and detected by the first loss opening sensor 2516 or the third loss opening sensor 2518, it is controlled to a normal state or a time saving state according to the control state before the small hit after the small hit game state.

Further, as described above, in this example, the first small hit that controls so that all the game balls B that have won the prize winning opening 2006 are guided to the first losing opening 2535, and the game that has won the winning feature winning opening 2006. After controlling one of the ball B to be guided to the third distribution device 2550 and patrolling the third distribution table 2554, the second V winning opening 2008 and the two third losses The second small hit that is controlled so as to be accepted by either of the mouths 2555 and one of the game balls B that have won the prize winning mouth 2006 are guided to the first V winning mouth 2007. It is designed to control the third small hit and any of the small hit gaming states.

In addition, in the first small hit, the number of times the accessory winning opening 2006 is opened and closed is smaller than that in the second small hit and the third small hit, and all the game balls B that have won the accessory winning opening 2006 are awarded the accessory. The execution period of the small hit game state (the period from the start to the end of the small hit game state) is short because it is guided to the first loss mouth 2535 closest to the mouth 2006 and detected by the first loss mouth sensor 2516. In the third small hit, one of the game balls B that won the prize winning opening 2006 is the first V winning opening 2007 whose distance from the winning opening 2006 is the next closest to the first losing opening 2535. Since it is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514, the execution period of the small hit game state is the shortest next to the first small hit. On the other hand, in the second small hit, one of the game balls B that won the prize winning opening 2006 is guided to the third distribution device 2550, which is the farthest from the winning opening 2006, and the first The game ball B guided to the strikeout device 2550 is circulated in the third distribution table 2554, and then the game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008 is detected by the second V winning opening sensor 2515. Since the game ball B received in the third loss opening 2555 is detected by the third loss opening sensor 2518, the execution period of the small hit gaming state is the longest among the above three types of small hits.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when it is determined as a small hit based on the first special random number in the variation display of the first special symbol executed in the above normal state, it is regarded as the second small hit. In the variable display of the second special symbol executed in the above-mentioned time saving state, the second small hit is executed based on the second special random number, whereas the second small hit is executed in most cases in the normal state by setting a high ratio. When it is determined that, the rate at which the third small hit is executed is higher than in the normal state, and in the time saving state, the third small hit is executed at a rate of once for every four small hits. ..

That is, in the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, if the game ball B is received in the second V winning opening 2008 during the small hit game state, it is advantageous for the player that the time is shortened after the 15R big hit game state. Since the transition to the state is controlled, one of the game balls B that entered the accessory winning opening 2006 during the small hit game state is patrolled in the third distribution table 2554. While making people pay attention to whether it is accepted by the 2nd V winning opening 2008 or the 3rd losing opening 2555 for a certain period of time, it is a small hit game in the variable display of the 2nd special symbol that is executed in a short time state. Even if the game ball B is received in the second V winning opening 2008 during the state, it is only controlled to the time saving state again after the 15R jackpot game state, so that of the game balls B that have entered the accessory winning opening 2006. If one game ball B circulates in the third distribution table 2554, there is a risk that the game interest will be lowered. Therefore, in this example, in the variable display of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state, the small hit game state is shortened during the time saving state by increasing the ratio of the third small hit in which the execution period of the small hit game state is short. It is designed to finish in time.

Further, as described above, when the distribution rotating body 2531 rotates from the accommodating state to the unaccommodating state in the third small hit, the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 is first attacked. It flows down the second distribution guide path 2541 of the second distribution device 2540 through the passage 2536, abuts on the upper surface of the closed distribution door 2544, is guided to the right, and enters the first V winning opening 2007. To do. Therefore, in the third small hit, the game ball B distributed to the first Atari passage 2536 by rotating the distribution rotating body 2531 from the accommodating state to the unaccommodable state is discharged to the rear of the game board 5 in a short time. It becomes invisible to the player. Further, the distribution door 2544 can enter the first V winning opening 2007 when the distribution door 2544 is advanced above the second loss opening 2543, but the distribution door 2544 operates in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the operating state. That is, the existence of the distribution door 2544 is difficult for the player to recognize (difficult to see), and the game ball B distributed to the first V winning opening 2007 by the distribution door 2544 is quickly transferred to the game board 5. Since it is difficult to recognize the existence of the first V winning opening 2007 due to the discharge to the rear, the player can use the game ball B to be guided to the first V winning opening 2007, in other words, the first V winning opening 2007. It is difficult to notice that the game ball B passes. In this way, in order to make it difficult for the player to notice that the game ball B is guided to the first V winning opening 2007 when the third small hit is made in the time saving state, the game ball B is in the small hit game state. Without being aware of the lottery (whether or not the game ball B is accepted in the V winning opening (first V winning opening 2007, second V winning opening 2008)), the small hit game state is executed and the small hit game is executed. After the end of the state, the 15R jackpot game state can be executed. As a result, the small hit game state and the 15R big hit game state are continuously generated in a short time, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the case where the game ball B is distributed to the third distribution device 2550 as the second small hit, and when the game ball B is distributed to the first V winning opening 2007 as the third small hit, the effect is produced. The effect of the small hit game state executed by the display device 1600 is different. Specifically, in the case of a second small hit, whether the game ball B distributed to the third distribution device 2550 enters the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555. On the other hand, when the third small hit is made, the effect of not being aware of the rotation of the distribution rotating body 2531 (for example, when the third small hit is made, the big hit is performed. By giving the same notification as in the case of (such as notifying that a big hit was made instead of a small hit when the third small hit was made), the player was made aware that the small hit game state was executed. It seems that the same prize ball acquisition opportunity as the small hit game state is executed before the start of the big hit game state as a special bonus chance to obtain a prize ball different from the prize ball that can be obtained in the big hit game state. The effect may be executed. As a result, the player who recognizes that he / she has won the 15R jackpot is given a special bonus chance before the start of the 15R jackpot game state, which is different from the 15R jackpot game state. Since you can win prize balls, you can improve your playing interest.

If the time to reach the V winning opening is shorter in the third small hit than in the second small hit, the route until the game ball B guided by the second small hit is accepted in the V winning opening. The length of the (first route) and the route (second route) until the game ball B guided by the third small hit is accepted by the V winning opening becomes longer in proportion to the arrival time at the V winning opening. If the time to reach the V winning opening is longer than that of the third small hit, the route (first route) until the game ball B guided by the second small hit is accepted by the V winning opening is not limited to the one. The game ball B guided by the third small hit may be shorter than the route (second route) until it is accepted by the V winning opening. For example, by providing a deceleration means for decelerating the rolling speed of the game ball B in the first path, the time to reach the V winning opening may be longer than that of the game ball B passing through the second path.

Further, in the above example, a plurality of V winning openings of the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 are provided, and in the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, the accessory winning opening 2006 One of the game balls B that won the prize is distributed to the third distribution device 2550 having the second V winning opening 2008, and it is an accessory in the variable display of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state. By guiding one of the game balls B that won the prize opening 2006 to the first V winning opening 2007, which is the next closest to the first loss opening 2535, the distance from the accessory winning opening 2006 is small. Although the execution period of the winning game state is configured to be different, the distance to the V winning opening and the number of V winning openings are not limited to those described above. For example, a gaming machine equipped with only one V winning opening. The technical idea of the present invention is also applicable. Specifically, for example, a means (obstacle) for inhibiting or delaying the acceptance of the game ball B into the V winning opening, such as allowing the game ball B to be accepted into the V winning opening after patrolling the third distribution table 2554. Etc.), so that the second small hit with a long arrival time at the V winning opening and the means for inhibiting or delaying the acceptance of the game ball B to the V winning opening are not provided (at least than the second small hit). (It suffices if the number of pieces provided is small), so that the third small hit with a short arrival time at the V winning opening and the normal state according to the arrival time at the common V winning opening (of the first special symbol) The execution ratio may be changed between the variable display) and the time saving state (variable display of the second special symbol).

[13-1. Error notification in small hit game state]
Next, the error notification in the small hit game state will be described. In this example, in the small hit game state, the time until the game ball B that has won the prize in the accessory winning opening 2006 is discharged is monitored, and if it is not discharged even after the predetermined period, an error notification is performed. ..

FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small hit start process (step S411). In the small hit start process, a setting process for starting the small hit game state is executed.

When the small hit start process is started, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first subtracts 1 from the interval timer set in step S392 of the first special symbol stop process and the second special symbol stop process (step S421), and then the interval baima When the time-out occurs (step S422), that is, when the waiting time from the stop display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) to the start of the small hit game state elapses, the small hit game state is started. The initial value "0" is set in the elapsed timer for measuring the elapsed time since then (step S423).

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects the opening / closing pattern data according to the type of small hit being executed (first small hit, second small hit, third small hit) (step S424), and also selects. Based on the opening / closing pattern data, the control of the accessory winning opening 2006, the distribution rotating body 2531, and the distribution door 2544 is started (step S425), and the process is shifted to the small hit medium processing (step S411). When the small hit process flag of (step S426) is updated, this process ends. On the other hand, if the interval timer has not timed out in step S421, the process ends without executing the subsequent processes.

The opening / closing pattern data is provided for each type of small hit, and indicates the operation mode of each of the accessory winning opening 2006, the distribution rotating body 2531, and the distribution door 2544 according to the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game state. It is a thing. In this example, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 controls the accessory winning opening 2006, the distribution rotating body 2531, and the distribution door 2544 based on the opening / closing pattern data according to the small hit type selected in step S424. Then, the accessory winning opening 2006, the distribution rotating body 2531, and the distribution door 2544 operate in the manner shown in FIG. 151.

FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small hit medium processing (step S412).

When the small hit middle process is started, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first adds 1 to the progress timer that measures the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game state, and the discharge monitoring timer described later is set. If so, the timer value of this discharge monitoring timer is subtracted by 1 (step S431). When the elapsed timer is added by 1, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has an open / close pattern corresponding to the elapsed timer (elapsed time from the start of the small hit game state) among the open / close pattern data selected in step S424 of the small hit start process. The data is read out, and the opening / closing control of the accessory winning opening 2006, the distribution rotating body 2531, and the distribution door 2544 is performed based on the read-out opening / closing pattern data (step S432).

Further, if the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has the accessory winning opening sensor 2513 for detecting the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 turned on (step S433), that is, the accessory winning opening 2006 If the game ball B is accepted, the residual ball counter that counts the remaining balls that have not yet been discharged from the character winning opening 2006 among the game balls B that have won the prize winning opening 2006 is added by 1 (step S434). ..

Further, in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is first received in the accessory winning opening 2006 after the small hit game state is started (when the first game ball B enters). (Step S435), it is provided corresponding to each small hit type as the longest period assumed until all the game balls B that have entered the accessory winning opening 2006 including the game ball B are discharged. The assumed longest period is set in the discharge monitoring timer (step S436).

In this example, in the case of the first small hit, all the game balls B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 are sent to the second loss opening 2543 without being distributed to the first Atari passage 2536 by the distribution rotating body 2531. In order to enter, the shortest period among the three types of small hits is set as the assumed longest period (for example, 10000 ms). In the case of the second small hit, one of the game balls B received in the prize winning opening 2006 is distributed to the first Atari passage 2536 by the distribution rotating body 2531, and the first Atari passage is used. In order for the game ball B that has entered the third distribution device 2550 through 2536 to enter either the second V winning opening 2008 or the two third losing openings 2555 after patrolling the inside of the third distribution table 2554. , The longest period among the three types of small hits is set as the assumed maximum period (for example, 180,000 ms). In the case of the third small hit, one of the game balls B received in the prize winning opening 2006 is distributed to the first Atari passage 2536 by the distribution rotating body 2531, but the first Since the game ball B passing through the Atari passage 2536 is accepted at the second V winning opening 2008 without entering the third distribution device 2550, a short period next to the first small hit is set as the assumed longest period ( For example, 60000s).

The discharge monitoring timer is subtracted in step S431, and the time-out of the discharge monitoring timer is a mismatch between the number of game balls B that have won the prize winning opening 2006 and the number of game balls B that have been discharged from the prize winning opening 2006. If it continues until later, it is determined that some kind of abnormality (error) or cheating has been performed.

In addition, if the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game state is monitored and this elapsed time reaches the assumed maximum period according to the type of small hit being executed, it is said that some abnormality (error) or cheating has been performed. It may be determined, or the elapsed time from the first opening timing of the prize winning opening 2006 in the small hit game state is monitored, and this elapsed time is the assumed maximum period according to the type of small hit being executed. If this happens, it may be determined that some kind of abnormality (error) or cheating has been performed, or the timing at which the game ball B is actually distributed by the distribution rotating body 2531 (in the first small hit). With the start of the small hit game state, the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned on (energized), and the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned off (non-energized) from the state where the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 is facing upward. The timing when the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 operates so as to face to the right (the first distribution operation timing of the distribution rotating body 2531), and the distribution rotating body in the second small hit. After the first distribution operation timing of 2531, the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned ON (energized) again, and the first distribution solenoid 2532 is moved from the state where the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 is facing upward. The timing at which the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 is turned off (non-energized) and operates so as to face to the right (the second distribution operation timing of the distribution rotating body 2531), and the vibration at the third small hit. After the second distribution operation timing of the distribution rotating body 2531, the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned ON (energized) again, and the first distribution is performed from the state where the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 is facing upward. Elapsed from the timing when the solenoid 2532 is turned off (non-energized) and the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 operates so as to face to the right (the third distribution operation timing of the distribution rotating body 2531). You may monitor the time and determine that some kind of abnormality (error) or fraudulent activity has occurred when this elapsed time reaches the assumed maximum period according to the type of small hit being executed.

Further, when the discharge of the game ball B received in the character winning opening 2006 is detected, that is, when the game ball B received in the character winning opening 2006 is discharged, the first loss opening sensor 2516, the first When the game ball B is detected by any of the V winning opening sensor 2514, the second V winning opening sensor 2515, and the third losing opening sensor 2518 (step S437), the remaining ball counter is subtracted by 1 (step S438). ).

Then, whether or not the remaining ball counter is "0", that is, whether the number of game balls B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 and the number of game balls B discharged from the accessory winning opening 2006 match. Whether or not it is determined (step S439), and if the residual number counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S442 assuming that no abnormality or fraud has occurred.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S439 that the residual ball counter is not "0", it is determined whether or not the discharge monitoring timer has timed out in order to determine whether or not an abnormality or fraudulent activity has occurred (step S440). .. As described above, the discharge monitoring timer is provided according to each small hit type as the longest period expected from the start of the small hit game state to the discharge of all the game balls B from the accessory winning opening 2006. It shows the remaining period of the assumed maximum period. If the discharge monitoring timer has not timed out in step S440, the process ends without executing the subsequent processes. As a result, when the special symbol of the main control side timer interrupt process and the special electric accessory control process (step S114) are executed again, the small hit medium process is executed and the residual ball counter is monitored until the discharge monitoring timer times out. Will be.

If the discharge monitoring timer has timed out in step S440 when the residual ball counter is not "0", it is determined that an abnormality or fraudulent activity has occurred and a discharge error notification is performed (step S441). The hit processing is finished. The discharge error notification includes an error display on the effect display device 1600, output of a notification sound by the main body frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, etc., and a predetermined mode by lamps, LEDs, etc. provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3. In this example, the output of the main unit frame speaker 622, top center speaker, top side speaker, etc. is displayed by displaying "Discharge is abnormal" in a part of the area of the effect display device 1600. Is not done. That is, the state in which the residual ball counter is not "0" indicates a minor abnormality such that the game ball B that has entered the accessory winning opening 2006 is not discharged, so that the abnormality of the game machine is notified. The display is made so as not to make the player uncomfortable or anxious. After the discharge error is notified in step S441, the small hit middle process is terminated without updating the small hit process flag, and then the special symbol of the main control side timer interrupt process and the special electric accessory control process (step). When S114) is executed, the small hit middle process is executed again. That is, all the game balls B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 are discharged, or the RAM clear switch is operated by the game clerk to completely erase the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. The discharge error notification will be executed without ending the small hit game state until it is played (until it is reset).

When it is determined in step S439 that the residual ball counter is "0", it is determined whether or not the game ball B has entered the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 (step S442). When the game ball B does not enter the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 in step S442, that is, the game ball B enters the first losing opening 2535 or the third losing opening 2555 and the first losing. If it is detected by the mouth sensor 2516 or the third loss mouth sensor 2518, the small hit end command for instructing the execution of the effect at the end of the small hit game state is set (step S443), and the small hit start process (step S411) is set. ), When the small hit process flag is updated (step S447), this process ends.

If the game ball B enters the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 in step S442 and is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514 or the second V winning opening sensor 2515, the jackpot game starts. After setting the waiting time until (step S444), the small hit executing flag is reset and the big hit executing flag is set (step S445). Further, a V winning jackpot start command is set (step S446) to instruct the execution of the effect at the start of the jackpot game state based on the acceptance of the game ball B into the first V winning slot 2007 and the second V winning slot 2008, and the above small When the small hit process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the hit start process (step S411) (step S447), this process ends.

As described above, in this example, when the game ball B is received in the accessory winning opening 2006, the value of the residual ball counter is added by 1, and the value of the remaining ball counter is added each time the game ball B is discharged from the accessory winning opening 2006. By subtracting 1 from the above, the number of game balls B remaining without being discharged from the accessory winning opening 2006 (center accessory 2500) can be grasped. In addition, the period (estimated longest period) until the discharge error notification is executed differs depending on the small hit type, in other words, the distribution destination of the game ball B, and the game ball B passing through the first Atari passage 2536 is the first. In the third small hit received at the second V winning opening 2008 without entering the strikeout device 2550, the game ball B is entered into the third strikeout device 2550 and patrolls in the third distribution table 2554. The period (estimated maximum period) until the discharge error notification is executed is shorter than the two small hits. That is, a small hit with a shorter time (distance) to reach the V winning opening has a shorter period until the discharge error notification is executed.

Normally, the game ball B does not remain in the character winning opening 2006, so if the state in which the game ball B remains in the character winning opening 2006 continues for a long period of time, some abnormality ( It can be determined that an error) has occurred. In addition, when it is detected that more game balls B are discharged than the number of game balls B won in the character winning opening 2006, a fraudulent act such as illegally winning the game ball B in the character winning opening 2006 is performed. It can be determined that there is a possibility that it has been damaged. The pachinko machine 1 of this example monitors the occurrence of these abnormalities and fraudulent acts, and notifies the discharge error when there is a suspicion of these.

Further, in this example, it is detected that the game balls B remain in the character winning opening 2006, or that a larger number of game balls B than the game balls B winning in the character winning opening 2006 are discharged. As a result, even after the discharge error notification is performed based on the discharge monitoring timer timed out when the residual ball counter is not "0", it is small every time the main control side timer interrupt process is executed without stopping the game. The hit processing is executed to monitor the value of the residual ball counter, and if the value of the residual ball counter is "0", that is, when it returns to the normal state, the first V winning opening 2007 and the first It automatically returns to the state of determining the entry of the game ball B into the second V winning opening 2008 and ends the small hit game state.

In this example, even if the value of the residual ball counter is not "0" after executing the discharge error notification in step S441 of the small hit medium processing, if a more serious abnormality occurs. Priority is given to error notification regarding this serious abnormality. As a serious abnormality, for example, when magnetism acting illegally in the game area 5a is detected by any one of a plurality of magnetic sensors 2010 (magnetic detection error notification), or when radio wave irradiation is detected (radio wave detection error notification). ), When it is detected that the door frame 3 has been opened (door opening error notification), there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act has been performed. When such a serious abnormality occurs, the discharge error notification in step S441 in the small hit game state is terminated, and the error notification (magnetic detection error notification, radio wave detection error notification, magnetic detection error notification) related to these serious abnormalities is terminated. Etc.) may be executed to restart the discharge error notification in step S441 in the small hit game state after the error notification related to the serious abnormality is completed, or the error notification related to the serious abnormality may be restarted in the small hit game state. By overwriting the discharge error notification of step S441 in the above, the discharge error notification of step S441 in the small hit game state can be displayed on the effect display device 1600, the main body frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the like. Although it is not reflected in the output, lighting / blinking of lamps / LEDs provided on the game board 5 or door frame 3 (executed so that it can be viewed / viewed) (executed behind the scenes), it is a serious abnormality. The content of the discharge error notification progresses with the passage of time even while the error notification related to is being performed, and when the error notification related to a serious abnormality is completed, the discharge error notification is visually recognized and viewed with the progressed content. The display on the effect display device 1600, the output of the main body frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, etc., and the lighting / blinking of the lamps / LEDs provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are reflected. (For example, when the error notification related to the serious abnormality is started 5 seconds after the discharge error notification in step S441 in the small hit game state is started and this error notification is executed for 30 seconds, the serious abnormality may be performed. After the error notification related to the above is completed, the discharge error notification in step S441 in the small hit game state is started, and the content is restarted 35 seconds later).

Further, the mode of the discharge error notification may be different depending on whether the residual ball counter is "1" or more and less than "0" in step S439 of the small hit middle processing. When the residual ball counter is "1" or more, it indicates only a slight abnormality that the game ball B that has entered the accessory winning opening 2006 is not discharged, while the residual ball counter is less than "0". In this case, it indicates a serious abnormality that more than the number of game balls B that have entered the character winning opening 2006 is discharged, and the game balls B are illegally entered into the character winning opening 2006. It may be. Therefore, when a minor abnormality occurs in which the game ball B that has entered the accessory winning opening 2006 is not discharged, the discharge error notification 1 is "discharged" to a part of the effect display device 1600 as shown in FIG. 207, for example. "It is abnormal." Etc. is displayed and the production sound is continuously output from the main body frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, etc., so that no error sound is output and the door frame 3 is provided. When a serious abnormality occurs in which a part of the LED is partially emitted and more than the number of game balls B that the game balls B have entered are discharged, the discharge error notification 2 is set as, for example, the entire area of the effect display device 1600. In addition to displaying "Illegal occurrence!" Etc., the volume of the production sound is suppressed from the main body frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, etc., and the error sound "Illegal is being performed." It is also possible to notify the occurrence of fraudulent activity by outputting the sound at a volume and further emitting the entire LED provided on the door frame 3 to emit the entire door frame 3.

Further, in this example, the detection signal of the second loss port sensor 2517 provided in the middle of the third distribution guide path 2551 is input to the peripheral control board 1510, and the third distribution device 2540 is used in the second small hit game state. When the game ball B guided to the distribution guide path 2551 is detected by the second loss opening sensor 2517 provided in the middle of the third distribution guide path 2551, the peripheral control unit 1511 displays the effect display device 1600 and the main body frame speaker. The game ball B that controls the 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, the lamp / LED provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 and circulates in the third distribution table 2554 in the third distribution device 2550. It is designed to excite which of the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555 is accepted.

The detection signal of the second loss port sensor 2517 provided in the middle of the third distribution guide path 2551 may be input to the main control board 1310. In this case, the game ball by the second loss port sensor 2517. The presence or absence of an abnormality may be determined according to the detection of B. For example, when the game ball B is detected at a V winning opening or a losing opening different from the V winning opening or the losing opening scheduled according to the small hit type in the above small hit middle processing, or depending on the small hit type. When there is a possibility that the game ball B is detected at a V winning opening or a losing opening that is different from the planned V winning opening or the losing opening (different from the planned passage or winning opening according to the small hit type). When the game ball B faces the passage or the winning opening), it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred, and the distribution error notification may be executed in step S441 of the small hit middle process.

Specifically, as the V winning opening and the losing opening scheduled according to the small hit type, the first losing opening 2535 is planned in the case of the first small hit, and the second in the case of the second small hit. The V winning opening 2008 or the third loss opening 2555 is scheduled, and in the case of the third small hit, the first V winning opening 2007 is scheduled. Then, in the case of the first small hit, when it is detected that the game ball B is accepted in any of the first V winning opening 2007, the second V winning opening 2008, and the third losing opening 2555 in the small hit middle processing, In the case of the second small hit, when it is detected that the game ball B is accepted in one of the first loss opening 2535 and the first V winning opening 2007 in the small hit medium processing, the small hit is in the case of the third small hit. When it is detected that the game ball B is accepted in any of the first loss opening 2535, the second V winning opening 2008, and the third loss opening 2555 in the processing, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in, for example, FIG. As shown in 207, "illegal occurrence!" Is displayed in the entire area of the effect display device 1600, and the volume of the effect sound is suppressed from the main body frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, etc. to make an error sound. "A fraud is being performed." Is output at a loud volume, and the entire door frame 3 is made to emit light by making all the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 emit light to notify the occurrence of fraud. The minute error notification may be executed. In this case, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be immediately notified, and the fraudulent activity can be detected at an early stage.

Further, a second distribution detection sensor for detecting the game ball B circulating inside the second distribution guide path 2541 is provided in the middle of the second distribution guide path 2541, and the detection signal of the second distribution detection sensor is provided. May be input to the main control board 1310, and in the case of the first small hit, the game is played in one of the first V winning opening 2007, the second V winning opening 2008, and the third losing opening 2555 in the small hit middle processing. When there is a possibility that the ball B will be accepted, that is, when the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball B and it is determined that the game ball B has entered the second distribution guideway 2541, the second In the case of a small hit, the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball B in the small hit middle process, but the second loss opening sensor 2517 cannot detect the game ball B, so that the second distribution guide path 2541 passes through. When it is determined that the game ball B is heading toward the first V winning opening 2007, in the case of the third small hit, the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball B in the small hit middle processing, and then the second loss opening sensor. When it is determined that the game ball B passing through the second distribution guideway 2541 is heading for the third distribution device 2550 by detecting the game ball B in 2517, the planned V winning opening, etc. When there is a possibility that the game ball B is detected at the V winning opening or the losing opening different from the losing opening, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred and the distribution error notification may be executed. In this case, it is possible to notify when a fraudulent activity is likely to occur, and the fraudulent activity can be detected at an early stage.

It should be noted that the mode of the distribution error notification may be different depending on the degree of abnormality (illegal level). For example, in the case of the first small hit, the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball B. When it is determined that the game ball B has entered the second distribution guideway 2541, or in the case of a second small hit, the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball B in the small hit middle processing, but the second loss. When it is determined that the game ball B passing through the second distribution taxiway 2541 is heading toward the first V winning opening 2007 because the game ball B cannot be detected by the mouth sensor 2517, the degree of abnormality is high. Judging, for example, "Illegal has occurred!" Is displayed in the entire area of the effect display device 1600, and at the same time, "Illegal has been performed" from the main body frame sensor 622, the top center sensor, the top side sensor, etc. The occurrence of fraudulent activity is notified by outputting with, and the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball B in the small hit medium processing in the case of the second small hit and in the small hit medium processing in the case of the third small hit. If it is later determined that the game ball B passing through the second distribution guide path 2541 is heading for the third distribution device 2550 by detecting the game ball B with the second loss opening sensor 2517, it is abnormal. By judging that the degree is low, for example, a display such as "Discharge is abnormal" is displayed in a part of the production display device 1600, and the output of the main body frame speaker 622, the top center sensor, the top side sensor, etc. is not performed. It may be possible to notify the occurrence of an abnormality different from cheating. That is, when the game ball B passes through a route in which the game ball B enters the V winning opening at a rate higher than the entry rate of the game ball B into the V winning opening preset according to the small hit type. (When the V-winning expectation is higher than the preset V-winning expectation according to the type of small hit being executed), it is judged that the degree of abnormality is high and cheating is performed. The game ball B passes through the route in which the game ball B enters the V winning opening at a rate lower than the entry rate of the game ball B into the V winning opening, which is set in advance according to the small hit type. If it is (when the V prize expectation is lower than the preset V prize expectation according to the type of small hit being executed), it is judged that the degree of abnormality is low and cheating. The occurrence of an abnormality different from the above may be notified. In addition, if the V-winning expectation is lower than the preset V-winning expectation according to the type of small hit being executed, the player himself suffers a disadvantage, but the game store side suffers damage. Since it does not occur, the distribution error notification may not be performed when the degree of such an abnormality is low.

In addition, the game ball B was detected at a V winning opening or a losing opening different from the V winning opening or the losing opening scheduled according to the small hit type, and the V winning opening scheduled according to the small hit type. During the period when the distribution error notification is performed based on the possibility of detecting the game ball B at the V winning opening or the losing opening different from the mouth or the losing opening, the accessory winning opening is performed in the above small hit medium processing. Even if it is determined that a minor abnormality has occurred that the game ball B that has entered 2006 has not been discharged, the V winning opening or loss opening that is different from the planned V winning opening or loss opening according to the small hit type Based on the fact that the game ball B was detected and that there was a possibility that the game ball B was detected at a V winning opening or a losing opening different from the V winning opening or the losing opening scheduled according to the small hit type. The distribution error notification that is being executed is continuously executed without being terminated. However, the discharge error notification 1 based on the determination that a minor abnormality that the game ball B that has entered the accessory winning opening 2006 has not been discharged has occurred in the above small hit middle processing is in a state where it can be visually recognized and viewed. Although it is not removed, it is executed behind the scenes, and the content of the discharge error notification 1 is progressing with the passage of time. Further, in this case, when the game ball B that has entered the character winning opening 2006 is discharged and the value of the residual ball counter becomes "0", the game ball B that has entered the character winning opening 2006 is not discharged. The discharge error notification 1 based on the determination that an abnormality has occurred ends. In this way, even if a minor abnormality occurs during the period during which the error notification (sorting error notification in this example) is performed based on the occurrence of a serious abnormality, the error notification based on the occurrence of a minor abnormality ( In this example, the discharge error notification 1) is not executed visually and visually. However, it is quietly executed behind the error notification based on the occurrence of a serious abnormality (sorting error notification in this example), and when the minor abnormality is resolved, the error notification based on the occurrence of a minor abnormality (this) In the example, the discharge error notification 1) is terminated.

In this example, even when the small hit game state or the big hit game state does not occur, the accessory winning opening sensor 2513, the first V winning opening sensor 2514, the first losing opening sensor 2516, the second V winning opening sensor 2515, The detection of the game ball B by the third loss mouth sensor 2518 is monitored, and when the game ball B is detected by any of these, it is determined that a fraudulent activity has been performed and the occurrence of the fraudulent activity is notified. It has become like. In the state where the small hit game state or the big hit game state has not occurred, the detection of the game ball B by the second distribution detection sensor or the second loss opening sensor 2517 may be monitored, and the second distribution may be performed. When the game ball B is detected by either the detection sensor or the second loss opening sensor 2517, the degree of abnormality is high, that is, even if it is determined that fraudulent activity is being performed and the occurrence of fraudulent activity is notified. Good. That is, in the state where the small hit game state or the big hit game state has not occurred, regardless of the degree (high or low) of the game ball B entering the V winning opening, any passage in the accessory winning opening 2006 is played. Even if the ball B has passed, it may be determined that fraudulent activity is being performed and the occurrence of fraudulent activity may be notified.

In the above example, when the discharge error notification is executed in step S441, the game ball B is detected at the V winning opening or the losing opening, which is different from the V winning opening or the losing opening scheduled according to the small hit type. Sorting error notification is performed based on the fact that there is a possibility that the game ball B is detected at the V winning opening or the losing opening that is different from the V winning opening or the losing opening scheduled according to the small hit type. In such a case, the small hit middle process is repeatedly executed to monitor the value of the residual ball counter, but the progress of the game may be stopped without monitoring the value of the residual ball counter. In addition, even if the progress of the game is not stopped, the value of the residual ball counter is monitored, and when the value of the residual ball counter becomes normal (“0”), it is automatically restored from the abnormal state and a small hit. You may not end the game state. This makes it possible to reliably grasp the occurrence of an abnormality.

In addition, after the distribution error notification is performed, when the game ball B is detected at the V winning opening or the loss opening (regular entrance) scheduled according to the small hit type, or according to the small hit type. When the game ball B rolling on the planned route (regular route) is detected (for example, when the second small hit is detected by the second loss opening sensor 2517), the distribution error notification is terminated. You may try to do it. In addition, after the discharge error notification is sent, if the game ball B is detected at the V winning opening or the loss opening (regular entrance) scheduled according to the small hit type, or according to the small hit type. When the game ball B rolling on the route (regular route) is detected (for example, when the second small hit is detected by the second loss opening sensor 2517), the discharge error notification is terminated. May be good. In addition, the measured value of the discharge monitoring timer that causes the discharge error notification to be detected is the game ball B that rolls on the planned route (regular route) according to the small hit type (for example, the second small). In the case of a hit, it may be reset every time (detected by the second loss opening sensor 2517). In this case, after the reset, the discharge monitoring timer is measured again and the measured value of the discharge monitoring timer is being executed. It suffices to enable the discharge error notification when the assumed maximum period is reached according to the small hit type.

[14-1. Volume control]
The volume control switch is used for a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and a special symbol display (first). A certain period of time (in this example, the peripheral control unit determines the fluctuation pattern) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped on the special symbol display (second special symbol display). From the reception of the command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or from the reception of the stop display command by the peripheral control unit to the time 0.5 seconds have passed since the final display of the decorative symbol has been completed) Except, the volume adjustment switch is operated to rotate the volume of the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4. It can be adjusted by this. As described above, the volume control switch has a variable resistance value by being rotated, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter has a resistance value at the rotation position of the volume control switch. The voltage divided by the above is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into a value in 1024 steps from a value to a value of 1023.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. Music and effects are controlled from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 by controlling the sound source IC so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6. Sound is flowing. In this way, by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch, music, sound effects, etc. are produced from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4. Sound is flowing.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the directing sounds such as music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1. Or, announcing the contents related to the game production (for example, it is highly likely that the screen unfolded on the effect display device 1600 is produced as more powerful, or the game state is likely to be advantageous to the player. The notification sound for (or, etc.) also flows from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4, but the notification sound and the notification sound are from the volume adjustment switch. It is a mechanism that flows without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation, and the volume from mute to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the peripheral control IC by a program.

The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-mentioned substrate volume divided into 7 stages, and can be changed from mute to maximum volume in 5 stages. As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the volume adjustment switch to set the volume low, the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass of the main body frame 4 are used. Although the production sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the main body frame speaker 622 are reduced, the volume is loud when the pachinko machine 1 has a problem or when the player is cheating (in this embodiment). , Maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and special A certain period of time (peripheral control in this example) when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) 0.5 seconds after receiving the variation pattern command in the unit until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, or 0.5 seconds after receiving the stop display command in the peripheral control unit and confirming the display of the decorative symbol. Except for the lapse of time, in addition to adjusting the volume of the production sound of music and sound effects by rotating the volume adjustment switch, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, Special symbols in the peripheral control unit (the period until the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002) are completed) and the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display). 0.5 after the start or stop of the variation display of (first special symbol, second special symbol) for a certain period (in this example, after the variation pattern command is received by the peripheral control unit and the variation display of the decorative symbol is started) Until a second elapses, or 0.5 seconds elapses after the confirmation display of the decorative symbol is performed after receiving the stop display command in the peripheral control unit), and the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 set in the variable effect. And the operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 (the effective period for accepting the operation of the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the so-called button effect), etc., the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing of the effect operation unit 300. By operating the operation unit 303, it is possible to adjust the volume of the production sound of music and sound effects. Specifically, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and the special symbol display (first). A certain period of time (in this example, the peripheral control unit determines the fluctuation pattern command) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped on the special symbol display (second special symbol display). 0.5 seconds after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or 0.5 seconds after the confirmation display of the decorative symbol is received by the peripheral control unit) Operation period of the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 set in the variable effect (effective period for accepting the operation of the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 in the so-called button effect), etc. Except for, when the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is rotated, an indicator composed of a plurality of scales is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is rotated. It is possible to change the volume of the production sound of music or sound effect to a desired volume (any of the minimum volume of 1 to the maximum volume of 5).

Specifically, the contact operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise without operating the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, and when the rotation amount of the contact operation unit 302 reaches a predetermined rotation amount, the volume of the effect sound becomes 1. The volume is changed to a step-up volume, and the contact operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise without operating the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, and when the rotation amount of the contact operation unit 302 reaches a predetermined rotation amount, the effect sound is produced. The volume is changed to one step lower.

FIG. 208 shows the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame for bass of the main body frame 4 in response to the rotation operation of the volume control switch and the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. With the volume of the effect sound output from the speaker 622 set to volume 5, the effect display device 1600 starts a variable effect for displaying the decorative symbol in a variable manner, and the effect operation unit 300 is pressed during the variable effect. FIG. 5 is a timing diagram showing an example of a case where the unit 303 is pressed and a case where the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is subsequently rotated.

As shown in FIG. 208, the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operating unit 300 is not operated in order to change the volume of the effect sound from the volume 5 to the volume 4 in the middle of the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600. When the contact operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise and the rotation amount of the contact operation unit 302 reaches a predetermined rotation amount, the volume of the effect sound is lowered by one step from the volume 5 and changed to the volume 4, and the rotation of the contact operation unit 302 is changed. The change according to the operation is immediately reflected in the effect sound output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4. That is, the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is used to change the volume of the effect sound output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the body frame speaker 622 for bass of the body frame 4. At the timing of t1 when the rotation operation is performed, the changed volume is reflected in the output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4. ..

Further, the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 is adapted to change its scale according to the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. This makes it possible to visually determine the currently set volume. Further, in this example, the indicator displayed in response to the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 on which the effect by the decorative symbol or the like is executed. Further, this indicator is displayed on the outermost surface of the image displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this example, by displaying the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 semi-transparently, it is possible to recognize an image of a variable effect or the like executed on the back of the indicator. It should be noted that a sub display device different from the effect display device 1600 in which the variation effect by the decorative pattern or the like is executed may be provided. In this case, in this case, according to the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. The indicator may be displayed on the sub display device. Further, in this example, when a predetermined period (for example, 3 s) elapses from the end of the operation of the contact operation unit 302, the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 disappears. After displaying the indicator on the effect display device 1600 based on the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302, the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 disappears based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 303. You may let it. The above-mentioned indicator may be displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600, or a lower right display area or the like that does not overlap with the effect image or the like in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is partitioned to the right. An indicator may be displayed in the lower display area. Further, a display device for displaying various settings of the pachinko machine 1 may be provided separately from the effect display device 1600, and an indicator may be displayed on this display device.

Further, when the scale of the indicator and the volume of the effect sound of music or sound effect change by rotating the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300, a specific sound (such as "pip") corresponding to the changed volume is generated. Electronic sound) is output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4. As a result, when the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is rotated, the effect sounds of music and sound effects are produced by the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4. Even if it is not output from 622, while checking the actual volume by the specific sound output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4. You can adjust the volume. It should be noted that the specific sound may not be output during the execution of the variation effect. That is, during the execution of the variable effect, the effect sound corresponding to the content of the variable effect is output, and the actual volume can be confirmed without outputting the specific sound. As a result, it is possible to prevent a specific sound irrelevant to the content of the variation effect from being output during the variation effect, which hinders the variation effect during execution and reduces the game interest.

This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for the track in which the sound data of the production sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound and the notification sound described above.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of the effect sound of music or sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. Adjust the volume of the production sound of music or sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value to the volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch according to the operation. There are two methods, one is to do it and the other is to do it. Since the volume control switch is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to make sure that the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Then, only the clerk in the hall can rotate the volume control switch. However, at the volume adjusted by the clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and it may be difficult to hear the sound effect of the music or sound effect, or the player may feel loud and the sound effect of the music or sound effect may be noisy. is there. Therefore, when the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the volume of the effect sound of music or sound effect can be adjusted to a desired volume. It has become like. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the production sound of the music or the sound effect to a desired volume, so that the volume adjusted by the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the production sound of the music or the sound effect. Can operate the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 to increase the volume to a desired level, and feel the volume adjusted by the clerk in the hall to increase the effect sound of music or sound effect. When it feels noisy, the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is not playing is continued for a predetermined time, the pachinko machine 1 is in the waiting state for customers, and the demonstration by the effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times), the previous time, The volume adjusted by the player who is sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In this volume initialization, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the volume adjustment switch. As a result, if the player who was sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time feels that the volume adjusted is low and it is difficult to hear the production sound of music or sound effects, this time, the front of the pachinko machine 1 A player who sits on the pachinko machine and plays a game can operate the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300 to increase the volume to a desired level, and was seated on the front of the pachinko machine 1 last time. When the player who is playing the game feels the volume adjusted loudly and the production sound of music or sound effect is noisy, this time, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game is the production operation unit 300. The contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

[14-2. Volume control for a specific frequency band]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated, a predetermined value is added or subtracted from the volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch. In addition to adjusting the volume of the production sound of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume, it is possible to adjust the volume of a specific frequency band. Specifically, it is possible to suppress (or mute) the sound output in the high frequency range (above a predetermined frequency band).

That is, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and the special symbol display (first special symbol). A variable pattern command is received by the peripheral control unit for a certain period of time (in this example, the peripheral control unit receives the variable pattern command) when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped on the display (display, second special symbol display). After that, until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or 0.5 seconds after the confirmation display of the decorative symbol has been received by the peripheral control unit), further variation effects The operation period of the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 set in (the valid period for accepting the operation of the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 in the so-called button effect) and the like. Except, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed, an environment change mode for setting various environments of the pachinko machine 1 (whether or not high-pitched sound is output, whether or not the LED of the door frame 3 is emitted, etc.) is performed. The screen of is displayed on the effect display device 1600. On the screen for performing the environment change mode, the environment that can be changed (whether or not high-pitched sound is output, whether or not the LED of the door frame 3 emits light, etc.) is displayed in a list, and the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 will eventually display it. By operating the pressing operation unit 303 with the environment setting selected, it is possible to execute the process of changing the environment setting. In this way, by operating the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 according to the screen of the environment change mode, the sound output in a specific frequency band can be suppressed, or the volume adjustment switch can be rotated. It is possible to output at a volume set according to the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. Further, although the screen of the environment change mode is displayed on the outermost surface of the images displayed on the effect display device 1600, the image of the back can be recognized by being displayed semi-transparently.

Specifically, when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed without rotating the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300, a screen for performing the environment change mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Then, a state in which the sound output in the specific frequency band is suppressed by pressing the pressing operation unit 303 in a state where the contact operation unit 302 is operated and the volume adjustment in the specific frequency band is selected and the specific frequency band are suppressed. A selection screen is displayed for the state where the sound output of is not suppressed (for example, a mini character for volume setting is displayed, and "treble frequency cut-on" or "treble frequency cut-off" is displayed in the mini character's balloon, and the contact operation The display is switched each time the unit 302 is rotated by a predetermined amount of rotation), and the contact operation unit 302 is operated again to suppress the sound output in a specific frequency band and the sound output in a specific frequency band is not suppressed. By pressing the pressing operation unit 303 while one of the above is selected, the change to the selected state is determined, and the determination screen is displayed ("High frequency range" in the mini character balloon for volume setting. Either "There is a cut in the treble range" or "There is no cut in the high frequency range" is displayed). After that, when a predetermined period (for example, 3 s) elapses, the environment change mode is terminated by eliminating the determination screen displayed on the effect display device 1600. After the decision screen is displayed, the decision screen displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be erased based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 303. The screen for performing the environment change mode, the selection screen, and the determination screen may be displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600, or the effect image or the effect in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The lower left display area or the like that does not overlap with the display of the indicator when adjusting the volume of the sound may be divided, and the screen for performing the environment change mode, the selection screen, and the decision screen may be displayed in this lower left display area. In addition, a display device for displaying various settings of the pachinko machine 1 is provided separately from the effect display device 1600, and the display device displays a screen, a selection screen, and a determination screen for performing the above-mentioned environment change mode. You may.

By pressing the pressing operation unit 303 without rotating the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300, the screen for performing the environment change mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and then the contact operation is performed. Even if the unit 302 is rotated, the volume control of the effect sound is invalidated, and the indicator is not displayed on the effect display device 1600. Then, when the contact operation unit 302 is rotated without pressing the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 after the end of the environment change mode, the volume adjustment of the effect sound becomes effective and the indicator is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Will be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 208, in the middle of the fluctuation effect executed by the effect display device 1600, the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band is adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch or rotating the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. When the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in order to suppress the volume higher than the volume set according to the operation, the contact operation of the effect operation unit 300 is performed at the timing of t2 when these operations are completed. Changes according to the operation of the unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are not reflected in the effect sound output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4. Then, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped based on the timing of t3 when the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600 ends (the stop display command instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol is received from the main control MPU 1310a). The volume adjustment switch reflects the change according to the operation of the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, that is, the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band. The volume is suppressed more than the volume set according to the rotation operation of the above and the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300.

It should be noted that the volume adjustment of the production sound in the specific frequency band is invalid after the timing of t2 when the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are completed in the volume adjustment of the production sound in the specific frequency band during the fluctuation effect. To. Then, when the change in the volume adjustment of the production sound in a specific frequency band according to the operation of the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300 is reflected at the timing of t3 when the fluctuation effect ends, a specific change is reflected. The volume adjustment of the production sound in the frequency band is effective. Further, in this example, even when the volume adjustment of the effect sound in a specific frequency band is invalidated, the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed without rotating the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. The screen for performing the change mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600, but it is not possible to select the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band. During the period in which the volume adjustment of the effect sound in a specific frequency band is invalidated, the environment change mode is performed even if the press operation unit 303 is pressed without rotating the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. The screen of is not displayed on the effect display device 1600.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 300 are used to adjust the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band during the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600. When the unit 303 is operated, the changes corresponding to these operations are not immediately reflected, but are reflected after the variation effect executed by the effect display device 1600 is completed. Normally, from the start to the end of the variable effect, the effect sound according to the content of the variable effect is continuously generated from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4. Since it is output, when adjusting the volume of the production sound in a specific frequency band during the fluctuation production (the continuously output production sound is interrupted for a moment, and then the volume of the specific frequency band is suppressed. There is a risk of giving the player a sense of discomfort (due to the restart of the output of the produced effect sound or the unsuppressed effect sound of the volume of a specific frequency band, etc.).

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band during the variation effect, the variation effect is generated. By reflecting the change according to this operation after the end of the fluctuation effect without reflecting the change until the end, the effect sound that continuously flows during the variation effect is output with the preset contents and changes. Volume in a specific frequency band by operating the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 after the effect is completed and the output of the effect sound that has been continuously flowing according to the content of the variable effect is stopped. Since it is possible to output a production sound that reflects the adjustment, the player does not feel uncomfortable. That is, during the variable production in which the production sound is continuously output, the continuously output production sound is stopped without reflecting the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band, and the next production sound is output. By reflecting it at the switching timing until it is output, it is possible to change the effect sound according to the adjustment without discomfort.

On the other hand, when the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band during the period when the fluctuation effect is not performed, this operation is performed. The corresponding changes are immediately reflected, and the adjusted production sound of the volume of a specific frequency band is output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4. ..

In this way, while the volume adjustment of the effect sound during the variable effect is immediately reflected, the volume adjustment of the effect sound in a specific frequency band is not immediately reflected. That is, for sound-related information that may adversely affect the planned effect of the variable effect during execution, such as giving the player a sense of discomfort due to the change of the effect sound, the change during the variable effect is prohibited to reduce the effect. It is designed to be deterred.

Further, when the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is not immediately reflected, the player may be notified by displaying the effect on the effect display device 1600. For example, when the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band during the fluctuation effect, the volume adjustment in the specific frequency band is performed. Although it is not reflected immediately, the volume of the production sound in a specific frequency band can be adjusted by displaying a mini character for volume setting on the production display device 1600 and performing a standby display such as "Wait a minute" in the balloon of this mini character. The player may be notified that the operation of the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is normally accepted. In addition, a standby display for notifying the player that the operations of the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 for adjusting the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band are normally accepted is specified. It may be changed according to the remaining time until the timing to reflect the volume adjustment of the frequency band of, for example, a mini character for volume setting is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and "Wait a moment" in the balloon of this mini character. The player acknowledges that the operation of the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 for adjusting the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band by performing the standby display 1 such as "ne" is normally accepted. After notifying to, when the remaining time until the timing to reflect the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band reaches a predetermined time, a mini character for volume setting is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and in the balloon of this mini character. The standby display 2 for counting down such as "3", "2", and "1" may be performed. Further, when the timing for adjusting the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band is reached, a notification to that effect may be given. For example, a mini character for volume setting may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 to display the mini character of this mini character. A reflection display such as "Selection reflection start!" May be displayed in the balloon.

Further, in the above example, as the volume control of the specific frequency band, the equalizer setting A in which the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed and the equalizer setting B in which the volume of the specific frequency band is suppressed are set in advance as equalizer setting patterns. By switching between the equalizer setting A and the equalizer setting B by adjusting the volume of the production sound in the specific frequency band, the volume in the specific frequency band is not suppressed and the specific frequency is stored. It is designed to switch between two stages (on and off), one in which the volume of the band is suppressed. It should be noted that a plurality of equalizer settings having different degrees of suppression of the volume of a specific frequency band are stored in advance as an equalizer setting pattern, and by switching these multiple equalizer settings, a plurality of equalizer settings having different degrees of suppression of the volume of a specific frequency band are obtained. You may switch to the state. For example, an equalizer setting A in which the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed, an equalizer setting B in which the volume of a specific frequency band is muted, and an equalizer setting B in which the volume of a specific frequency band is muted, and a volume adjustment switch rotation operation or effect operation unit 300 Equalizer setting C (for example, if the set volume is volume 6, change to volume 3), which is suppressed to half the volume set in response to the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302, is set in advance. The volume of the production sound in the specific frequency band is adjusted by switching to either the equalizer setting A, the equalizer setting B, or the equalizer setting C. The unsuppressed state, the state in which the volume in a specific frequency band is muted, and the volume in a specific frequency band are set according to the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch or the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. It may be possible to switch between three stages, that is, the volume is suppressed to half of the current volume. This makes it possible to make settings that suit the tastes of various players.

In addition, the production sound in a specific frequency band is not limited to the above-mentioned one, but also includes the frequency band and bass range of the voice. For example, the volume of the dialogue emitted from the character or the like during the fluctuation production can be adjusted. It may be adjusted (if there are a plurality of characters, they may be adjusted collectively or individually), or the volume of the bass range may be adjusted. In addition, it may be possible to adjust the effect sound (confirmed sound) for notifying the confirmation of the big hit, the payout sound at the time of paying out the prize ball, and the like. Further, the volume of a plurality of frequency bands may be adjusted as a specific frequency band, and for example, the volume of both the treble range and the bass range may be adjusted. In this case, the treble range and the bass range may be adjusted together (for example, an operation of switching between a state in which the treble range is not suppressed and a state in which the treble range is suppressed, and a state in which the bass range is not suppressed and suppressed. The operation to switch to one of the states is performed in one operation), and each is adjusted (for example, the operation to switch to one of the state where the treble range is not suppressed and the state where the bass range is not suppressed and the state where the bass range is not suppressed and suppressed. The operation of switching to one of the states may be performed separately). That is, the player may be able to select one of a plurality of setting modes (treble cut, payout sound cut, jackpot fixed sound cut, etc.). This makes it possible to make settings that suit the tastes of various players.

Further, when a continuous effect sound is output during a big hit game state or a small hit game state, the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame. The volume adjustment of a specific frequency band may be reflected immediately after the end of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, while it is immediately reflected in the output from the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of 4. As a result, the continuous output of the production sound is stopped, and the volume of a specific frequency band is adjusted at the switching timing until the next production sound is output. The top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame. By reflecting it in the output from the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of No. 4, it is possible to change the effect sound according to the adjustment without discomfort. During the big hit game state and the small hit game state, the player's attention to the effect content is lower than that of the variable effect, so the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is the same as the volume adjustment of the above effect sound. The output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the 3rd side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 may be immediately reflected.

In addition, when a continuous production sound is output in a game state different from the normal state such as during a short time state, the volume of the production sound is adjusted by the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body. The output from the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the frame 4 is immediately reflected, and the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is changed. The production operation unit 300 is used to adjust the volume of the production sound of the specific frequency band during the variable production. When the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, the change corresponding to this operation is not reflected until the variation effect is completed, but is reflected after the end of the variation effect, and the variation effect is performed. When the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band when there is no effect, the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side are used. , The output from the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 may be immediately reflected. That is, it is specified when the player does not pay much attention by reflecting the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band after the end of the variable effect without reflecting the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band during the execution of the player's most noticed effect called the variable effect. It may be possible to reflect the volume adjustment of the frequency band of the above and change the effect sound according to the adjustment without discomfort.

Even when the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is reflected, the production sound is actually output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4. The changed production sound is not output until it is done. Therefore, when the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band during the variation effect, the specific frequency is specified after the end of the variation effect. Even if the volume control of the band is reflected, the effect sound after the change is output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the body frame speaker 622 for bass of the body frame 4 after the start of the next variation effect. Will be done. That is, the actual output is performed after the lottery process (winning determination lottery, etc.) for starting the next variation effect is performed. Similarly, when the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band during the period when the effect display device 1600 is performing the demonstration. Immediately reflects the volume adjustment of the production sound in a specific frequency band, but if the production sound is not output as a demonstration, the production sound after the change will be the door frame 3 until the next variable production is started. It is not output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4, but is output after the start of the variation effect.

Further, the volume control of a specific frequency band is initialized at the same time when the volume of the effect sound is initialized. That is, when the state in which the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 1 is continued for a predetermined time, the customer is in the waiting state, and the demonstration by the effect display device 1600 is repeated (for example, 10 times), the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed last time. The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting in the pachinko machine is canceled, the volume is initialized, and at the same time, the volume adjustment in a specific frequency band is also initialized (the volume in a specific frequency band is not suppressed). State) is supposed to be.

Further, in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band during the execution of the error notification in which the notification sound is output at a loud volume (may be the maximum volume), the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit 300 When 303 is operated, whether or not to reflect the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band in the notification sound is appropriately set according to the degree of abnormality (illegal level) that caused the error notification. Good.

For example, as shown in FIG. 209, when a minor abnormality (full tank error) occurs, such as the full tank detection sensor 154 detecting that the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is full of the game ball B. When the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of a specific frequency band during the full tank error notification executed in, the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is immediately notified. When a slight abnormality (full tank error) occurs after adjusting the volume of a specific frequency band, the state of reflecting the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band in the notification sound is continued, and the top center on the door frame 3 side. The changed notification sound may be output from the speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4. In this example, the sound output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side (for example, "Please pull out the ball!") Reflects the volume control of a specific frequency band as a full tank error notification. It is changed (for example, if the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed, the female voice is output, and if the volume of a specific frequency band is suppressed, the male voice is output).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 210, the volume of a specific frequency band is set during the door opening error notification that is executed when a serious abnormality (door opening error) such as detecting that the door frame 3 is opened occurs. When the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated for adjustment, or when a serious abnormality (door opening error) occurs after adjusting the volume of a specific frequency band, a specific frequency band The volume control of is not reflected in the notification sound. In this example, as a door opening error notification, the volume of the sound output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side (for example, "the door is open!") Can be adjusted in a specific frequency band. However (for example, if the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed, it is output by a female voice, and if the volume of a specific frequency band is suppressed, it is output by a male voice), but it is a serious abnormality. When the above occurs, the volume control in the specific frequency band is invalidated and the notification sound in which the volume in the specific frequency band is not suppressed is output.

That is, as shown in FIG. 209, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is full when a minor abnormality (full tank error) occurs as detected by the full tank detection sensor 154 that the inside of the lower plate 202 is full of the game ball B. During the tongue error notification, when the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is rotated to adjust the volume, the operation is accepted as valid, but this volume adjustment is not reflected in the notification sound. The volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is reflected in the notification sound, and the changed notification sound is output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 210, the effect operation unit 300 is used to adjust the volume during the door opening error notification when a serious abnormality (door opening error) such as the detection that the door frame 3 has been opened occurs. When the contact operation unit 302 is rotated, the operation is accepted as valid, but this volume adjustment is not reflected in the notification sound, and the volume adjustment in a specific frequency band is not reflected in the notification sound. It has become like. By appropriately setting whether or not to reflect the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band in the notification sound according to the degree of abnormality (illegal level) that caused the error notification in this way, it is possible to ensure that a serious abnormality is detected. You will be able to discover it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 210, the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 are operated so as to suppress the volume in a specific frequency band, and the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side are used. , If a serious abnormality occurs while the changed effect sound is being output from the bass frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4, a specific environment change mode or operation of the effect operation unit 300 is performed. Without adjusting the volume of the frequency band, the suppression of the volume of the specific frequency band is forcibly released (off), and the notification sound in which the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed is output. As described above, the notification sound is output for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and when the output of the effect sound is restarted after the notification sound is stopped, a specific environment change mode or operation of the effect operation unit 300 is performed. Without adjusting the volume of the frequency band, the suppression of the volume of the specific frequency band that was forcibly released is set (on) again, and the suppressed production sound of the specific frequency band is on the door frame 3 side. It is output from the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of this example enables the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band, and reflects the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band by the operation of the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. When the production sound and the notification sound can be output immediately, and when the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band by the operation of the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300 is not immediately reflected in the output of the production sound. The case where the timing is delayed to enable the output of the changed effect sound and the notification sound and the case where the changed effect sound and the notification sound can be output are appropriately set according to the state (game state, error state, etc.) of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect and to reliably detect a serious abnormality.

[15. Change settings such as winning probability]
An example in which the probability of a big hit, a small hit, or the like is changed according to a set value in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. In the following, it is assumed that the payout control board 633 outputs the operation signals from the setting key, the setting change switch, and the setting confirmation switch on the setting board. In this example, the setting board is connected to the payout control board 633, but it may be connected to the power supply board 630 in the power supply board cover 631 or the setting board may be connected to the main control board 1310. Further, the setting board is not an independent board, but may be a part of a payout control board 633, a power supply board 630, or a main control board 1310. That is, a setting key, a setting change switch, a setting confirmation switch, and a setting indicator may be mounted on any of the payout control board 633, the power supply board 630, or the main control board 1310.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the board unit 620 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 has a setting board for setting the gaming performance of the pachinko machine. The setting board is connected to the payout control board 633 of the board unit 620, and the payout control unit 633a acquires the operating state of each switch provided on the setting board and displays the set or selected set value. Control the vessel.

On the setting board, there are a setting key for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode, a setting change switch for changing the setting value, a setting confirmation switch for confirming the changed setting value, and a setting confirmation switch. , A setting display that displays the set or selected set value is provided, and functions as a setting change operation unit that accepts the setting change operation. As described above, the setting board is provided on the board unit 620 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row on the game island at a game store, the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. This makes it possible to change settings.

In the present embodiment, the operation signals of the setting key, the setting change switch, and the setting confirmation switch on the setting board are taken into the payout control unit 633a. Further, the setting display is controlled by the payout control unit 633a. The confirmed setting is transmitted from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a responds to the setting as a table (hit determination table, big hit symbol determination table, small hit symbol determination table, etc.) used in a special lottery or the like. Select the table. The tables used in the special lottery and the like are provided for each setting, and each table is set so that at least a part of the values is different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 211, in this example, the "big hit probability", the "small hit probability", the "small hit type", the "normal symbol hit probability", and the "second according to the normal symbol hit type". The opening / closing pattern of the starting port ”is set corresponding to each of the set values 1 to 6.

In addition, the jackpot probability (the ratio of the jackpot judgment value indicating that the jackpot has been won in the hit judgment table) is set to a different value for each set value, and the set value 1 is "1/319" and the set value 2 is "1/319". It is "1/309", the set value 3 is "1/299", the set value 4 and the set value 6 are "1/279", and the set value 5 is "1/289". In this example, the higher the set value is, the higher the jackpot probability is set for the set values 1 to 5, but the set value 6 having the highest set value has a lower jackpot probability than the set value 5. There is. The jackpot probability may be improved in proportion to the set value. In this case, the jackpot probability may be set to increase as the set value increases from the set value 1 to the set value 6.

In addition, the small hit probability (the ratio of the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit has been won in the hit judgment table) is set to a different value for each set value, and in the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol, The set values 1 to 4 are set to "1/100", the set values 5 and 6 are set to "1/90", and in the table used for the special lottery of the second special symbol, the set values 1 to 1 Up to the set value 5, it is "50/100", and with the set value 6, it is "66/100". In this example, in the case of a high set value (set value 5 or set value 6), the small hit probability is increased more than other set values (low set value) so that the frequency of occurrence of the big hit game state is indirectly increased. It has become. In this way, in the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol, the set value is estimated by the winning frequency of the small hit in the normal state by changing the small hit probability according to the set value, while the second special symbol is used. In the table used for the special lottery, the small hit probability is made almost the same for all set values so that the continuation of the time-saving state (Ren-chan) can be enjoyed purely in the time-saving state.

Further, in the table mainly used for the special lottery of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, the small hit probability of the set value 5 and the set value 6 is set higher than the set value 1 to the set value 4. On the other hand, in the table mainly used for the special lottery of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state, only the small hit probability of the set value 6 is set higher than the set value 1 to the set value 5. Therefore, with the set value 4 and the set value 5, the lottery is performed with different small hit probabilities in the special lottery of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, but in the special lottery of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state. Is designed to have a small hit lottery with the same probability. However, the jackpot probability and the determination rate of the small hit type described later are set to be higher in the set value 5 than in the set value 4, so that the set value 5 is more advantageous than the set value 4 as a whole. Has been done.

In addition, since the jackpot probability in the normal state is high but the small hit probability is low, there is a high possibility that the hit as an opportunity to shift to the time saving state like the setting value 4 is a "big hit". A game that is unlikely to be a big hit through a "small hit" and a "small hit" that is unlikely to be a "big hit" as an opportunity to be controlled to shift to a time saving state like the set value 5. It is possible to realize a game that is likely to be a big hit through the game by changing the set value, and to provide a new game property that allows the set value to be guessed according to the type of hit as an opportunity to shift to the time saving state and be controlled. Can be done.

The small hit probability may be improved in proportion to the set value. In this case, the small hit probability may be increased as the set value increases from the set values 1 to 6. .. Further, the small hit probability corresponding to some of the set values 1 to 6 is lower than the small hit probability corresponding to any of the set values lower than some of the set values. You may try to do so. For example, the small hit probability of the set value 4 may be 1/100, and the small hit probability of the set value 3 which is lower than the set value 4 may be 1/90. In this case, the ratio determined for the small hit type (third small hit in this example), which is advantageous in the case of a small hit, is set so that the set value 4 is higher than the set value 3. The set value 4 may be more advantageous than the set value 3.

In addition, as a result of the above special lottery (hit determination process (step S305)), the determination ratio when determining the small hit type based on the decision to make a small hit is also set in the small hit symbol determination table. A different value is set for each set value. In this example, when it is decided to make a small hit as a result of the special lottery of the first special symbol, the set value 1 to the set value 3 is decided to be the second small hit at a rate of 9/10 for 10 minutes. It is decided to be the third small hit at the ratio of 1 of, and at the set value 4 and the set value 5, it is decided to be the second small hit at the ratio of 8/10 and it is decided to be the third small hit at the ratio of 2/10 At the set value of 6, the first small hit is determined at a rate of 1/10, the second small hit is determined at a rate of 6/10, and the third small hit is determined at a rate of 3/10. It has become like.

In addition, when it is decided to make a small hit as a result of the special lottery of the second special symbol, the set value 1 and the set value 2 are decided to be the first small hit at a ratio of 3/10, and 6/10. The ratio is determined to be the second small hit, the ratio is determined to be the third small hit at a ratio of 1/10, and the set value 3 and the set value 4 are determined to be the first small hit at a ratio of 2/10, and 10 minutes. The ratio of 6 is determined as the second small hit, the ratio of 2/10 is determined as the third small hit, and the set value 5 and the setting value 6 are determined as the first small hit at the ratio of 1/10. The second small hit is decided at a rate of 6/10, and the third small hit is decided at a rate of 3/10.

Further, as described above, the first small hit guides the game ball B received in the prize winning opening 2006 to the first loss opening 2535, and there is no possibility of a big hit gaming state or a big hit gaming state. Is extremely unlikely to occur. Then, in this example, when it is decided to make a small hit as a result of the special lottery of the first special symbol, the first small hit is selected only when the set value is 6, and another set value (set value) is selected. By not selecting in 1 to set value 5), if a small hit is made in a state that is disadvantageous to the player compared to the time saving state of the normal state, if the set value 1 to the set value 5 is set, the big hit game is always played. It is possible to execute the small hit gaming state while generating the second small hit or the third small hit having the possibility of generating the state and having the expectation for the big hit gaming state. That is, when the set value 1 to the set value 5 is a small hit in a state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state, which is a time-saving state, the player pays attention to the small hit game state while holding expectations for the big hit game state. , The player's disappointment increases when he / she recognizes that all the game balls B received in the character winning opening 2006 are guided to the first loss opening 2535 and there is no possibility that a big hit game state will occur. By generating at least the second small hit or the third small hit that has the possibility of generating a big hit gaming state, it is possible to draw attention to the big hit gaming state during the small hit gaming state, which is a hobby of the game. The decline can be suppressed. On the other hand, in the case of the set value 6, the first small hit may be selected, but it can be determined that the set value 6 is the highest set value by executing the first small hit in the normal state. , It is possible to give the player more joy than the disappointment of winning the first small hit, and to prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

In addition, when it is decided to make a small hit as a result of the special lottery of the second special symbol, the first small hit is selected. In the short time state, the small hit probability is higher than in the normal state, so that the small hit game state is executed more frequently. Therefore, it is assumed that the first small hit is executed and all the game balls B received in the prize winning opening 2006 are guided to the first loss opening 2535, and it is recognized that there is no possibility of a big hit gaming state. Does not discourage the player. In addition, when it is decided to make a small hit as a result of the special lottery of the second special symbol, the determination ratio of the first small hit is increased at the low set value (set value 1 or set value 2), and at the high set value. The decision rate of the first small hit is reduced. That is, at the high setting value, when it is decided to make a small hit as a result of the special lottery of the second special symbol, the ratio of the small hit type that is disadvantageous to the player is lower than the low setting value. Therefore, the high setting value is more advantageous to the player than the low setting value.

Further, as described above, the third small hit guides the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 to the first V winning opening 2007, and the determination of the third small hit is a big hit. It is almost the same as what I did. In other words, increasing the determination rate of the third small hit is synonymous with increasing the winning probability of the big hit. In this example, the high set value (set value 5 or set value 6) determines the third small hit. By increasing the ratio, the probability of occurrence of a big hit game state is indirectly improved.

In addition, the winning probability of the normal lottery (the ratio of the normal symbol hit judgment value indicating that the normal symbol hit judgment random number is a normal hit) is set to a different value for each set value, and the set values 1 to 5 are set. It is set to "1/2", and the set value 6 is set to "1/2". Therefore, at the set value 6, when the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2003 and the normal lottery is performed, the second starting door 2411 always advances and the game ball B can be received in the second starting port 2004. It is in a state that is more advantageous to the player than other set values.

Further, in this example, when it is decided to be a normal hit as a result of the normal lottery, A per normal symbol (symbol A per normal symbol) and B per normal symbol (design B per normal symbol (symbol B1 per normal symbol)). It is designed to be determined from a plurality of normal symbol hit types, that is, a normal symbol per symbol B5)) and a normal symbol per C (a normal symbol per symbol C), and the determined normal symbol hit type is determined. Aspects (symbol A per ordinary symbol, symbol B per ordinary symbol, symbol C per ordinary symbol) are derived and displayed on the ordinary symbol display. Further, the opening / closing mode of the second starting port door 2411 is different for each set value. Specifically, when the number is A per normal symbol in the normal state, the opening / closing mode of "performing 0.1s opening once" is executed with all the set values (set value 1 to set value 6), and the time is shortened. Occasionally, when the normal symbol hit A is executed, the opening / closing mode of "execute 6s opening once" is executed with all the set values (set value 1 to set value 6), and when the normal symbol hit B is obtained in the normal state. With odd-numbered setting values (setting value 1, setting value 3, and setting value 5), the opening / closing mode of "execution of 0.1s opening twice" is executed, and even-numbered setting values (setting value 2, setting value 4, setting) are executed. With the value 6), the opening / closing mode of "execute 0.1s opening once" is executed, and when the normal symbol hits B in the time saving state, "6s opening is executed once" for the set values 1 to 3 The opening / closing mode is executed, the setting value 4 and the setting value 5 execute the opening / closing mode "execute 3s opening twice", and the setting value 6 executes the opening / closing mode "execute 3s opening once".

Further, in the case of the set value 1 to the set value 5, the normal symbol hit type is determined to be one of two types of normal symbol hit types, normal symbol hit A and normal symbol hit B. In the case of the set value 6, the normal symbol hit type is determined to be one of three types of normal symbol hit types: normal symbol hit A, normal symbol hit B, and normal symbol hit C. .. Then, when the normal symbol hit C is reached in the normal state, the opening / closing mode of "executing 0.1s opening 6 times" is executed with the set value 6, and when the normal symbol hit C is reached in the time saving state, the setting is made. At a value of 6, the opening / closing mode of "executing 1s opening 6 times" is executed.

In this way, the operation mode of the second start port door 2411 (opening / closing mode of the second start port 2004) for opening the second start port 2004 based on the result of the normal lottery being a normal hit is set for each set value. Therefore, the current set value of the pachinko machine 1 can be suggested depending on the operation mode of the second starting port door 2411.

The above setting key serves as an opportunity to change to the setting change mode by inserting a predetermined key into the keyhole (key insertion part) and keeping the contact short-circuited or open state by turning the key to the set position. It is a switch that outputs a signal. It should be noted that other switches may be used in combination without providing the setting key. In this case, the setting change mode is started by operating the setting change switch for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (long press), and the setting change mode is ended by long pressing the setting change switch in the setting change mode. You may.

Further, the setting change mode may be started / ended by operating the RAM clear switch. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch and continuing the operation of the RAM clear switch for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (holding down). Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch is less than a predetermined time, the RAM clear process is executed. Further, the setting change mode may be terminated by pressing and holding the RAM clear switch in the setting change mode.

In this way, even an employee who does not have the key for the setting key can change the setting, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily handled in the hall. Further, since the operation time of the setting change switch is detected, it is preferable to detect the operation by turning down the setting change switch.

The setting change switch is composed of, for example, a push button switch, and is operated to switch and select a setting value (1 to 6) in order. That is, when the setting change switch is pressed once, the setting value is incremented by 1, and when the setting change switch is operated when the setting value = 6, the setting value becomes 1. It should be noted that the set value may be selectable by operating the RAM clear switch without providing the setting change switch. The set value may be not 6 steps, but may be less steps (for example, 2 steps) or more steps (for example, 8 steps).

The set value changes the operation ratio of the condition device (that is, the hit probability of the special symbol). The set value = 1 has a low hit probability, and the set value = 6 has a high hit probability. Also, depending on the set value, the probability variation jackpot ratio, the time reduction (ST) ratio after the jackpot, the number of time reductions, the number of rounds and counts of the jackpot, the probability of hitting a normal figure, the prize ball of the general winning opening, the starting opening, and the big winning opening Various parameters related to the game, such as the number, may be changed to change the number of prize balls that the player can obtain.

The setting confirmation switch is composed of, for example, a momentary type switch, and is a switch for confirming the setting value selected by operating the setting change switch and inputting it to the pachinko machine 1. The setting confirmation switch may be a push button switch or a momentary toggle switch as long as it is a momentary type switch. The setting change switch and the setting confirmation switch may be composed of switches having different operation methods (operation directions) and shapes so that both switches are not operated by mistake. For example, the setting change switch may be composed of a push button switch, and the setting confirmation switch may be composed of a momentary toggle switch.

The setting selected by the operation of returning the setting key to the normal position may be confirmed without providing the setting confirmation switch. Further, the selected set value may be determined by the operation of another switch or sensor provided in the pachinko machine 1. For example, the operation of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180, the contact detection by the handle touch sensor 192 by touching the handle 195, the operation of the single-shot button operation sensor 194, the operation of the ball lending button, the operation of the return button, and the like. The selected setting may be confirmed by detecting the winning of the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The operation unit that substitutes for the setting confirmation switch may be a switch that can be operated by the player (used for the game) or a switch that cannot be operated by the player (provided on the back side of the pachinko machine).

That is, in order to set the game performance in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, three switches (including setting keys) are provided on the setting board, but it is sufficient to provide one or two switches on the setting board. ..

Further, the setting change operation may be performed only by the RAM clear switch without providing any of the setting key, the setting change switch and the setting confirmation switch. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch and continuing the operation of the RAM clear switch for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (holding down). Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch is less than a predetermined time, the RAM clear process is executed. Further, instead of the setting change switch, the set value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch for less than a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) in the setting change mode, and instead of the setting confirmation switch, the predetermined time of the RAM clear switch. By the above operation (hold down), the set value can be confirmed. Further, the setting change mode may be terminated by pressing and holding the RAM clear switch after the setting is confirmed.

The setting display is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, displays a setting value selected by operating a setting change switch, and displays a current setting value by a predetermined operation (for example, operating a setting key). The setting display may be configured by a number of LEDs having a settable value instead of the 7-segment LED. In this case, the LED corresponding to the set value lights up to display the set value.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the payout control board 633 is provided with an error type indicator using a 7-segment LED that displays the type of the payout error. The error type indicator and the setting indicator are also used for selection. The set value and the current set value may be displayed on the error type display. In this case, it is advisable to change the display mode so that the display of the error type and the display of the set value can be distinguished. For example, the dot may be turned off when displaying the error type, and the dot may be turned on when displaying the set value. Further, the error type display may be a lighting display (not blinking), and the set value display may be a blinking display.

[15-1. Setting change process]
Next, the process related to the setting change will be described. FIG. 212 is an explanatory diagram showing a procedure for changing the above set value.

In this example, when the main control side power-on processing is executed based on the fact that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and the setting change mode start condition is satisfied in the main control side power-on processing. The above setting value is changed.

Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a determines the state of the setting key after performing the initial value setting and the start setting (step S12) of the main control built-in WDT of the main control side power-on processing, and the setting key is turned on. If it is operated, the setting change mode for changing the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is executed. When the setting key is operated, the payout control unit 633a outputs the setting key operation signal to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting key is turned on when the setting key operation signal is received. .. In addition, the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 is operated, the handle touch sensor 192 is detected by touching the handle 195, or a prepaid card is inserted in the CR unit (there is a balance of the prepaid card). , If there is a balance put into the cash sand, the setting change mode may not be started. Further, even when there is a possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity has been performed on the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a magnetic error has been detected), the setting change mode may not be started.

When the setting change mode is started, the main control MPU 1310a is the data other than the game state (for example, the probability change state, the time saving state, and the prize ball information) in the game control area (also referred to as a specific area) of the built-in RAM. The first RAM clear process for clearing the data indicating the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 is executed.

Next, the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 are switched by performing the setting change operation. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a finishes the first RAM clearing process, the payout control unit 633a sends a first RAM clearing process end command, and when the first RAM clearing process end command is received, the payout control unit 633a sets a value on the setting display. The initial value (for example, setting value 0) is blinked and displayed, and the setting value displayed on the setting display is switched every time the setting change switch is operated (loop between setting value 1 to setting value 6).

When the main control MPU 1310a executes the first RAM clear process, the set value is cleared and the set value is not set. In addition, the setting change mode cannot be terminated when the setting value is not set, and if the power is cut off during the setting change mode when the setting value is not set, the power is turned on again. Then, the setting change mode will be performed. At this time, if the setting key is turned off, a loop process is performed to monitor the state of the setting key until the setting key is turned on, and the setting change mode is set according to the setting key being turned on. It will be started.

Further, the payout control unit 633a confirms whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, that is, whether the main body frame open switch is off, and the main body frame open switch is on (the main body frame 4 is the outer frame 2). If it is set to (not released from), it loops until the main body frame release switch is turned off and does not accept the operation of the setting confirmation switch. That is, the setting change operation is not completed until the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2.

When the main body frame release switch is off or the main body frame open switch is off and the setting confirmation switch is operated, the payout control unit 633a confirms and displays the setting value displayed on the setting display ( The blinking display is terminated and the lighting is displayed), and a setting change end command indicating the confirmed setting value is transmitted to the main control MPU1310a.

When the main control MPU 1310a receives the setting change end command, it stores the set value indicated by the received setting change end command in the game control area of the built-in RAM. As a result, lottery processing and the like according to the determined set value will be performed.

Then, when the end condition of the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, when the setting key is turned off, the main control MPU 1310a performs the power failure clearing process (step S14).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the set value is changed by the above-mentioned processing.

When the setting change mode ends, that is, when the setting key is turned off, the payout control unit 633a ends the display of the set value on the setting display (does not display the set value). You may. Also, if the setting key is turned on after the setting change mode is finished, the setting change mode is not executed, but the current setting value is displayed on the setting display. As a result, the game clerk can change the set value after grasping the current set value.

Further, when the setting change mode is executed, a notification to that effect may be given. For example, when it is determined that the setting key is turned on, the setting change mode start command for notifying the peripheral control unit 1511 to start the setting change mode is transmitted, and the setting change mode start command is received. Based on this, the peripheral control unit 1511 may perform a predetermined display (setting is being changed, etc.) on the effect display device 1600. In this case, when the setting change mode is terminated, that is, when the setting key is operated off, a setting change mode end command for notifying the peripheral control unit 1511 to end the setting change mode is transmitted, and the setting is performed. The peripheral control unit 1511 may end the predetermined display performed by the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the change mode end command. In addition, the set value confirmed as a predetermined display or the set value displayed on the setting display may be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and in this case, it may be deleted at the end of the setting change mode. Good.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a may also notify the setting change mode in accordance with the notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511. For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be a display of a special mode that does not appear during a normal game (for example, all the special symbol indicators are turned off or on).

On the other hand, after the initial value setting and start setting (step S12) of the main control built-in WDT of the main control side power-on processing are performed, the state of the setting key is determined, and if the setting key is not turned on, the step The processing after S14 is executed.

Then, in the main control side power-on processing, the main control MPU 1310a determines when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined to erase various information, or in step S30. When it is determined that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in the determination in step S32, that is, the main control side power off processing. When it is determined that the game has not been completed normally, in step S38, the data other than the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 in the game control area and is related to the game state (for example, the probability change state, the time saving state, and the prize ball). After executing the second RAM clearing process for clearing the data indicating), the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set (step S40). As described above, in the second RAM clear process, unlike the first RAM clear process, the set value information is not initialized. That is, the first RAM clear process can be executed by operating the setting key when the power is turned on to clear the set value information of the pachinko machine 1, and the second RAM is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch when the power is turned on. It is possible to execute the process to clear the information regarding the gaming state (for example, the probability change state, the time saving state, and the information regarding the prize ball). Also, when the power is turned on, the setting key is turned on to execute the first RAM clear process to clear the set value information of the pachinko machine 1, and then the RAM clear switch is operated to execute the second RAM clear process for the game. Clear the information about the state (for example, the probability change state, the time saving state, the information about the prize ball), that is, the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 and the information about the game state (for example, the probability change state, the time saving state, the information about the prize ball) It is also possible to clear both. In this way, one or both of the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process can be selectively executed according to the information to be cleared.

In this example, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting key is operated, but the payout control unit 633a may determine. Further, the setting key operation signal transmitted from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310 can be transmitted by serial communication, a predetermined pulse signal (a predetermined number of pulses of a predetermined frequency can be transmitted), or ground even at the power supply voltage. A signal having an intermediate potential that is not a voltage may be output. This is because, in order to prevent fraudulent activity that short-circuits the terminal of the setting key and activates the setting change mode, a signal related to the operation of the setting key is sent from the main control board 1310 by a signal that cannot occur by short-circuiting the terminal. This is because it is preferable to transmit to.

[15-2. Fluctuation production according to the set value]
Next, the variation effect according to each set value will be described. FIG. 213 is a variation pattern table referred to in the variation pattern setting process (first variation pattern setting process, second variation pattern setting process).

In this example, a variation pattern table is provided for each set value, and the variation pattern type selected is different according to the set value of the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, when the first special lottery result is out of reach in the normal state, the special figure 1 balloon variation pattern table referred to when determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the first variation pattern setting process ( In FIG. 213 (A)), for example, a mini character for suggesting a setting is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and "maybe low?" Or "maybe one of 1, 2, or 3?" Is displayed in the balloon of the mini character. By doing so, the balloon variation pattern 25 that executes the "low setting suggestion effect" that suggests that the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is 1, 2, or 3 can be selected from the set values 1 to 3. For example, by displaying a mini character for setting suggestion on the effect display device 1600 and displaying "maybe it is expensive?" Or "maybe any of 4, 5, or 6?" In the balloon of the mini character, the pachinko machine 1 The balloon variation pattern 26 for executing the “high setting suggestion effect” suggesting that the set value is any of 4, 5 and 6 can be selected from the set value 4 to the set value 6. Therefore, when the "high setting suggestion effect" is executed in the variable effect, the player can recognize that the set value is at least 4 or more, so that the game enjoyment can be improved.

Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 is displayed by displaying a mini character for setting suggestion on the effect display device 1600 and displaying "may be an even number?" Or "maybe any of 2, 4, or 6?" In the balloon of the mini character. The balloon variation pattern 27 that executes the "even number setting suggestion effect" that suggests that the set value of is 2, 4, or 6 can be selected with the set value 2, the set value 4, and the set value 6, for example. The setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed by displaying the mini character for setting suggestion on the effect display device 1600 and displaying "may be an odd number?" Or "maybe any of 1, 3 and 5?" In the balloon of the mini character. The balloon variation pattern 28 for executing the "odd number setting suggestion effect" suggesting that is 1, 3, or 5 can be selected with the set value 1, the set value 3, and the set value 5. Therefore, when the "even number setting suggestion effect" is executed in the variable effect, it is one of the setting value 2, the setting value 4, and the setting value 6, and when the "odd number setting suggestion effect" is executed, the setting value 1 and the setting value are set. The player can recognize that it is either 3 or the set value 5. It is possible to estimate the set value by combining it with the execution history of "low setting suggestion effect" and "high setting suggestion effect". That is, if the "odd number setting suggestion effect" and the "low setting suggestion effect" are executed, the setting value 1 or the setting value 3 is executed, and the "odd number setting suggestion effect" and the "high setting suggestion effect" are executed. If so, the setting value is 5, and if the "even number setting suggestion effect" and the "low setting suggestion effect" are executed, the setting value is 2, and the "even number setting suggestion effect" and the "high setting suggestion effect" are If is executed, it can be inferred that the set value is 4 or the set value is 6. As described above, this example provides a new game property in which the set value is estimated by the combination of the executed setting suggestion effects among the plurality of types of setting suggestion effects.

Further, in this example, for example, the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is set by displaying a mini character for setting suggestion on the effect display device 1600 and displaying "maybe the best?" Or "maybe 6?" In the balloon of the mini character. The balloon variation pattern 29 for executing the "highest setting suggestion effect" suggesting that the value is 6 can be selected only with the set value 6. Therefore, when the "highest setting suggestion effect" is executed in the variable effect, the player can recognize that the set value is the maximum setting value 6, and the game entertainment is improved. Further, in the case of the setting value 6, it is possible to select the deviation variation pattern 31 that executes the "highest setting confirmation effect" in the case of the deviation that does not result in the reach or the case where the reach is lost, so that the player can set the set value. It is possible to notify that the setting value 6 of the maximum setting is confirmed, and it is possible to improve the game interest by making the player recognize that the maximum setting has been confirmed.

Further, when the first special lottery result is a small hit in the normal state, the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation pattern table (FIG. 213) is referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol in the first fluctuation pattern setting process. In (B)), for example, the pachinko machine 1 is set by displaying a mini character for setting suggestion on the effect display device 1600 and displaying "maximum setting confirmed!" Or "6 confirmed!" In the balloon of the mini character. The small hit variation pattern 33 and the small hit variation pattern 34 that execute the "highest setting confirmation effect" for notifying that the value is 6 can be selected only with the set value 6. Therefore, when the "highest setting confirmation effect" is executed in the variable effect in the case of a small hit, the player can recognize that the set value is the maximum setting value 6, and the game entertainment is improved. ..

Further, when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit in the normal state, the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation pattern table (FIG. 213 (C)) referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol in the first fluctuation pattern setting process. In)), the jackpot fluctuation pattern 34 for executing the "highest setting confirmation effect" can be selected only with the set value 6. Therefore, when the "maximum setting confirmation effect" is executed in the variable effect in the case of a big hit, the player can recognize that the set value is the maximum setting setting value 6, and the big hit game state is further executed. By doing so, it is possible to give the player double joy, which improves the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the second special lottery result is a small hit in the time saving state, the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation pattern table (FIG. 213) is referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the second fluctuation pattern setting process. In (D)), the small hit variation pattern 34 for executing the "highest setting confirmation effect" can be selected only with the set value 6. Therefore, when the "highest setting confirmation effect" is executed in the variable effect in the case of a small hit, the player can recognize that the set value is the maximum setting setting value 6, and further, the character winning opening. By guiding the game ball B that entered 2006 to the first V winning opening 2007 and winning the third small hit that generates a big hit game state, double joy can be given to the player. The game entertainment is improved.

As described above, in this example, the small hit probability is changed according to the set value of the pachinko machine 1. That is, in the normal state, the set value 1 to the set value 4 have a small hit probability of "1/100", whereas the set value 5 and the set value 6 are higher than the set value 1 to the set value 4 "90 minutes". It is said to be 1 ". Similarly, in the time saving state, the set value 1 to the set value 5 is set to the small hit probability "1/10", whereas the set value 6 is "1/9" higher than the set value 1 to the set value 5. It is said that.

In addition, the small hit variation pattern 34 that executes the "highest setting confirmation effect" that can be selected in the second variation pattern setting process when the second special lottery result is a small hit in the time saving state is for a long period (155 s). This is executed, and is longer than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern that can be selected with the setting values 1 to 5 lower than the setting value 6. Further, at the set value 6, the selection rate of the small hit fluctuation pattern 20 having a longer fluctuation time than the small hit fluctuation patterns 1 to 3 is higher than the set values 1 to 5 which are lower than the set value 6. That is, at the set value 6 in which the small hit probability is higher than the other set values, the variation time of the variation effect executed in the time saving state is long. As described above, the set value 6 has a higher small hit probability than the set values 1 to 5, and when a small hit is obtained, the game ball B that has entered the accessory winning opening 2006 is used as the first V winning opening. Since the ratio determined for the third small hit that induces the big hit game state in 2007 is also set higher than the set value 1 to the set value 5, it becomes possible to acquire a large number of prize balls in a short time. .. Therefore, in the case of the set value 6, the selection rate of the small hit fluctuation pattern 20 or the small hit fluctuation pattern 34 in which the fluctuation time is set longer than that of the other small hit fluctuation patterns is increased from the set value 1 to the set value 5. The number of executions of the variable effect per unit time is suppressed, and the improvement of gambling is suppressed.

Further, in this example, the random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern are distributed in substantially the same manner for all the set values, but in the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the set value 6, the fluctuation pattern peculiar to the set value 6 (outlier fluctuation pattern 29 to out-of-order fluctuation) Since the pattern 31, the small hit fluctuation pattern 33, the small hit fluctuation pattern 34, and the big hit fluctuation pattern 34) are provided, the distribution of the random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern is different. Therefore, in this example, in the variation pattern table corresponding to the set value 6, only the variation pattern determination random numbers assigned to the specific variation pattern (adjustment variation pattern) are adjusted and the variation pattern determination random numbers are distributed. In this way, in the variation pattern table corresponding to the set value 6, only the variation pattern determination random numbers assigned to the specific variation patterns are adjusted without changing the distribution of the variation pattern determination random numbers for each variation pattern. Therefore, the load of adding or deleting the variation pattern is reduced, and the design of the game machine becomes easy. It should be noted that the specific fluctuation pattern maintains a certain frequency of appearance even if the number of random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern is reduced, and at least the random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern set in other set values are used. It may be adjusted so as to have 60% or more of the number of distributions, and the appearance rate may not be excessively lowered as compared with other set values.

In this way, in this example, the small hit probability and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect executed when the special lottery result is a small hit are made different according to the set value of the pachinko machine 1, thereby balancing the gambling. I'm taking.

In addition, the above setting suggestion effect (low setting suggestion effect, high setting suggestion effect, even number setting suggestion effect, odd number setting suggestion effect, maximum setting suggestion effect, maximum setting confirmation effect) is out of the first special lottery result in the normal state. Or, it is most easily executed when the reach is out of reach, and there are many types of feasible setting suggestion effects. On the other hand, when the second special lottery result in the time saving state is out of order or reach is out, or the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) in the normal state and the time saving state is a small hit or a big hit. In this case, it is more difficult to execute than in the case where the first special lottery result in the normal state is out of reach or out of reach, and there are few types of feasible setting suggestion effects. That is, by reducing the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect as compared with the case where the setting suggestion effect is out of the normal state or the reach is out of the normal state during the time saving state or the small hit, the acceptance of the game ball B into the V winning opening is focused on. ing.

[16. Guide passage group consisting of the first guide passage and the second guide passage]
[16-1. When the right detection sensor 2404 is provided in the first guide passage]
As an embodiment different from the above, in the case where the right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting the game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 is provided, FIG. 214 and FIG. This will be described with reference to FIG. 215. FIG. 214 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which the right detection sensor 2404 is provided in the first guide passage 2521, and FIG. 215 is a specific production example at the time of executing a warning effect using the right detection sensor 2404. ..

As shown in FIG. 214, a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting the passage of the game ball B is provided slightly below (near the entrance) the entrance which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521. The right detection sensor 2404 is provided at a position where the game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 always passes through. That is, when the game ball B is hit (so-called right-handed) with the strength of entering the upstream space portion 2506 and abutting against the abutting portion 1006, the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520 is entered. When the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521, the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404. On the other hand, if the game ball B is hit with a strength that does not come into contact with the abutting portion 1006 (a strength that is somewhat weaker than right-handed hitting) after entering the upstream space portion 2506, it will enter the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. When the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided inside the first guide passage 2521, so that the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404. There is no.

The right detection sensor 2404 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and a detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404 is input to the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Then, the peripheral control MPU monitors whether or not the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 based on the detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404. Specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, the peripheral control MPU determines that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and the right detection sensor 2404 determines that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521. If the passage of the game ball B is not detected, it is determined that the game ball B is not in the state of being driven into the first guide passage 2521.

In the present embodiment, it is necessary to change the hitting method (launch intensity) of the game ball B according to the game state, and to make the area and the passage where the game ball B is hit different. First, during the small hit game, the accessory winning opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521 is opened, and the game ball B is inserted into the opened accessory winning opening 2006. Is required. Therefore, during the small hit game, the game ball enters the upstream space portion 2506 and abuts on the abutment portion 1006 so that the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520. It is necessary to hit B (so-called right hit).

Further, during the big hit game, the big winning opening 2005 provided at the lower right of the center accessory 2500 is opened, and the game ball B is required to enter the open big winning opening 2005. However, among the guide passage group 2520, it is configured so that the game ball B is discharged from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 with a higher probability than the exit of the first guide passage 2521 to enter the grand prize opening 2005. ing. In addition, during the time saving state, the second starting port 2004 provided at the lower right of the center accessory 2500 is opened based on the entry into the normal winning opening 2003 provided at the lower right of the center accessory 2500. It is required to put the game ball B into the second starting port 2004, which is in the open state, but the second guide passage 2522 is more than the exit of the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520. It is configured so that the game ball B is discharged from the exit of the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening 2004 with a higher probability. Therefore, during the big hit game and the time saving state, the game ball B enters the upstream space portion 2506 so as to enter the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520, and does not come into contact with the abutment portion 1006. It is preferable to hit the game ball B with a force (somewhat weaker than right-handed).

Further, in the normal state, it is required to put the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 provided below the center accessory 2500. Therefore, in the normal state, the highest of the outer peripheral surfaces of the center accessory 2500 so as to flow down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in which the game ball B can enter the first starting port 2002. It is necessary to hit the game ball B (so-called left-handed) with the strength to enter the left side of the front view (left side of the right portion 2502a on the front frame) from the portion where the ball has become.

In the present embodiment, it is necessary to change the hitting method (launch intensity) of the game ball B according to the game state to make the area or passage where the game ball B is hit different, but the game is performed in the recommended area or passage. If the ball B has not been hit, the player is alerted to hit the game ball B in the recommended area or passage. Specifically, when the game state is not such that the game ball B should be driven into the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520, the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 passes the game ball B. When the detected state continues for a predetermined time, the player is alerted.

First, it is recommended to drive the game ball B into the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 during the big hit game and the time saving state, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521. When it detects the passage of the game ball B, it determines that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and that state continues for a predetermined time (for example, five game balls B in 5 seconds). When the above is detected), the player is warned that the game ball B should be driven into the second guide passage 2522. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 215 (A), the effect display device 1600 executes the first warning effect for notifying the message "Please drive into the second guide passage". As a result, during the big hit game and in the time saving state, the hitting method is changed to a strength that does not come into contact with the abutment portion 1006 (strength that is weaker than right-handed hitting) by entering the upstream space portion 2506. The player can grasp that the game ball B should be driven into the passage 2522. Then, if the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the execution of the first warning effect, the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521. It is determined that the state in which the player has been driven has been resolved, and the first warning effect is terminated.

More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B during the big hit game and the time saving state, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and the monitoring timer Is started, and the count value is counted up every time the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 during monitoring by the monitoring timer. Then, when the state in which the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 continues for a predetermined time after the start of the monitoring timer (for example, when five or more game balls B are detected in 5 seconds), When the first warning effect is executed, but the state does not continue for a predetermined time (for example, when the game ball B ends with the detection of less than 5 balls in 5 seconds), the first guide passage 2521 is used. Assuming that the state in which the game ball B has been hit has been resolved, the first warning effect is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. In addition, even if the game state is switched from the big hit game or the time saving state after the start of the monitoring timer and the game ball B should no longer be driven into the second guide passage 2522, the information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. doing. Then, after the execution of the first warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the first In addition to ending the first warning effect assuming that the state in which the game ball B has been driven into the guide passage 2521 has been resolved, the second guide passage 2522 also occurs when the game state is switched from the jackpot game or the time saving state. The first warning effect has been completed because it is no longer in a state where the game ball B should be hit.

Further, in the normal state, it is recommended to drive the game ball B into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 passes through the game ball B. When it is detected, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and if that state continues for a predetermined time (for example, five or more game balls B are detected in 5 seconds), The player is warned that the game ball B should be driven into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 215 (B), the effect display device 1600 executes a second warning effect for notifying the message "Please hit left". As a result, in the normal state, the striking method is changed to the strength of entering the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 to the left side of the front view (left side of the right part 2502a on the front frame) from the highest portion. The player can grasp that the game ball B should be driven into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Then, when the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the state in which the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 is resolved. It is judged that it has been done, and the second warning effect is finished.

More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B during the normal state, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and the monitoring timer is started. , The count value is counted up every time the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 during monitoring by the monitoring timer. Then, when the state in which the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 continues for a predetermined time after the start of the monitoring timer (for example, when five or more game balls B are detected in 5 seconds), When the second warning effect is executed, but the state does not continue for a predetermined time (for example, when the game ball B ends with the detection of less than 5 balls in 5 seconds), the first guide passage 2521 is used. Assuming that the state in which the game ball B has been hit has been resolved, the second warning effect is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. In addition, even if the game state is switched from the normal state after the start of the monitoring timer and the game ball B should no longer be driven into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500, the information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. doing. Then, after the execution of the second warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the first In addition to ending the second warning effect assuming that the state in which the game ball B has been driven into the guide passage 2521 has been resolved, the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 even when the game state is switched from the normal state. The second warning effect has been completed because it is no longer in a state where the game ball B should be hit.

As described above, when the game state is not such that the game ball B should be driven into the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520, the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 passes through the game ball B. When the detected state continues for a predetermined time, a warning screen (first and second warning effects) is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the content of the warning changes according to the game state. As a result, even if the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 when the game state is not such that the game ball B should be driven into the first guide passage 2521, the recommended area or passage is any. The player can accurately grasp whether or not there is.

On the other hand, during the small hit game, it is recommended to drive the game ball B into the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 is a game ball. If the passage of B is not detected, it is determined that the game ball B has not been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and if that state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the first guide passage 2521 Warn the player that the game ball B should be driven into. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 215 (C), the effect display device 1600 executes a third warning effect for notifying the message "Please drive into the first guide passage". As a result, during the small hit game, the hitting method should be changed to the strength of entering the upstream space portion 2506 and contacting the abutting portion 1006, and the game ball B should be driven into the first guide passage 2521. It can be grasped by the player. Then, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the state in which the game ball B has not been driven into the first guide passage 2521 has been resolved, and the third warning effect is terminated. I am doing it.

More specifically, if the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B during the small hit game, it is determined that the game ball B has not been driven into the first guide passage 2521 and is monitored. The timer is starting. Then, when the state in which the game ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521 continues for a predetermined time (for example, for 5 seconds) after the start of the monitoring timer, the third warning effect is executed, whereas the third warning effect is executed. When the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), it is assumed that the state in which the game ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521 has been resolved. 3 The warning effect is not executed, and the information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. Further, even when the game state is switched from the small hit game after the start of the monitoring timer and the game ball B should no longer be driven into the first guide passage 2521, the information of the monitoring timer and the like is cleared. Then, after the execution of the third warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, the game ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521. In addition to ending the fourth warning effect as if the problem has been resolved, even if the game state is switched from the small hit game, the third guide passage 2521 is no longer in a state where the game ball B should be driven. The warning effect has been completed.

In the present embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided slightly below the entrance (near the entrance), which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, but the game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 is always present. Any position may be provided as long as it passes through, for example, an entrance at the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, an exit at the lower end of the first guide passage 2521, and the inside of the first guide passage 2521.

Further, in the present embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided on the upstream side of the accessory winning opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521, but on the downstream side of the accessory winning opening 2006. It may be provided. In such a case, when the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 during the small hit game, there is a high possibility that the game ball B will enter the open character winning opening 2006. Therefore, the frequency with which the game ball B passes through the right detection sensor 2404 located on the downstream side decreases, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from passing excessively and causing a problem in the right detection sensor 2404.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first to third warning effects exemplify that a predetermined warning screen is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but the game ball B is displayed in any mode in each game state. When a driving area instruction display (for example, a right-handed display consisting of a right-arrow image or a left-handed display consisting of a left-arrow image) is separately performed so that the player always knows that the player should be driven. It is desirable to execute the first to third warning effects so as not to interfere with the driving area instruction display. For example, a "display area for displaying the input area instruction display" is provided in the upper right portion of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 different from that area is provided. It is desirable to divide the "display area for displaying the first to third warning effects" in the upper left portion of the above so that the respective guides are not overlapped and obstructed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first to third warning effects exemplify that a predetermined warning screen is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but such a warning is realized as an effect by voice instead of display. In that case, the priority of the allocation to the finitely provided channels for outputting the sound becomes higher than the various production sounds set in the normal state, the big hit game, or the time saving state. It is desirable to set so as to output as much as possible even in a situation where there is no free space (unused channel) in the finitely provided channels. As a result, it is possible to effectively suppress the disadvantage of a player who is unfamiliar with the game characteristics having various types of hits of the game ball B.

[16-2. When detection sensors are provided in the first guide passage and the second guide passage]
As an embodiment different from the above, the right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting the game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are entered in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500. A case where the left detection sensor 2405 capable of detecting the game ball B is provided will be described with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217. FIG. 216 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which detection sensors are provided in the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, and FIG. 217 is a warning effect using the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405. This is a concrete production example at the time of execution.

As shown in FIG. 216, a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting the passage of the game ball B is provided slightly below the entrance (near the entrance), which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, and the second A left detection sensor 2405 capable of detecting the passage of the game ball B is provided slightly below the entrance (near the entrance), which is the upper end of the guide passage 2522. The right detection sensor 2404 is provided at a position where the game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 always passes through. That is, when the game ball B is hit (so-called right-handed) with the strength of entering the upstream space portion 2506 and abutting against the abutting portion 1006, the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520 is entered. When the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521, the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404.

On the other hand, the left detection sensor 2405 is provided at a position where the game ball B that has entered the second guide passage 2522 always passes through. That is, if the game ball B is hit with a strength that does not come into contact with the abutting portion 1006 (a strength that is somewhat weaker than right-handed hitting) after entering the upstream space portion 2506, it will enter the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. When the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522, the game ball B is detected by the left detection sensor 2405.

The right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 are connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 has a detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405. Has been entered. Then, the peripheral control MPU monitors whether or not the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521 based on the detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404, and also uses the detection signal from the left detection sensor 2405. Based on this, it is monitored whether or not the game ball B is driven into the second guide passage 2522. Specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, the peripheral control MPU determines that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and the left detection sensor 2405 determines that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521. When the passage of the game ball B is detected, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the second guide passage 2522, and the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 have not detected the passage of the game ball B. It is determined that the game ball B is not in a state of being driven into either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522.

In the present embodiment, as described above, it is necessary to change the way of hitting the game ball B (launching intensity) according to the game state, and to make the area and passage where the game ball B is hit different, but it is recommended. If the game ball B is not driven into the area or passage to be played, the player is alerted to drive the game ball B into the recommended area or passage. Specifically, since the right detection sensor 2404 is provided in both the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, it is normal to drive the game ball B into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. In the state, it is predetermined that either the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 or the left detection sensor 2405 provided in the second guide passage 2522 detects the passage of the game ball B. If the time continues, it is possible to alert the player.

More specifically, it is recommended to drive the game ball B into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 during the normal state, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 is the game ball B. When the passage of the game ball B is detected, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and when the left detection sensor 2405 provided in the second guide passage 2522 detects the passage of the game ball B, It is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the second guide passage 2522, and those states continue for a predetermined time (for example, the game is played for 5 seconds by one or both of the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405. When 5 or more balls B are detected), the player is warned that the game ball B should be driven into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 217 (A), the effect display device 1600 executes a fourth warning effect for notifying the message "Please hit left". As a result, in the normal state, the striking method is changed to the strength of entering the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 to the left side of the front view (left side of the right part 2502a on the front frame) from the highest portion. The player can grasp that the game ball B should be driven into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Then, when the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 do not detect the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, for 5 seconds), the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are reached. It is determined that the state in which the game ball B has been hit has been resolved, and the fourth warning effect is terminated.

More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 detect the passage of the game ball B during the normal state, the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. It is determined that there is, and the monitoring timer is started, and the count value is counted up every time the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 or the left detection sensor 2405 during monitoring by the monitoring timer. Then, after the start of the monitoring timer, when the state in which the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 continues for a predetermined time (for example, five or more game balls B are detected in 5 seconds). In the case of), the fourth warning effect is executed, but when the state does not continue for a predetermined time (for example, when the game ball B ends with the detection of less than 5 balls in 5 seconds), Assuming that the state in which the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 has been resolved, the fourth warning effect is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. In addition, even if the game state is switched from the normal state after the start of the monitoring timer and the game ball B should no longer be driven into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500, the information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. doing. Then, after the execution of the fourth warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 have not detected the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In addition to ending the fourth warning effect assuming that the state in which the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 has been resolved, the game state is switched from the normal state. In addition, the fourth warning effect has been completed because it is no longer in a state where the game ball B should be driven into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500.

During the small hit game, it is recommended to drive the game ball B into the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 is a game ball. If the passage of B is not detected, it is determined that the game ball B has not been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and if that state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the first guide passage 2521 Warn the player that the game ball B should be driven into. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 217 (B), the effect display device 1600 executes the fifth warning effect for notifying the message "Please drive into the first guide passage". As a result, during the small hit game, the hitting method should be changed to the strength of entering the upstream space portion 2506 and contacting the abutting portion 1006, and the game ball B should be driven into the first guide passage 2521. It can be grasped by the player. Then, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the state in which the game ball B has not been driven into the first guide passage 2521 has been resolved, and the fifth warning effect is terminated. I am doing it.

More specifically, if the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B during the small hit game, it is determined that the game ball B has not been driven into the first guide passage 2521 and is monitored. The timer is starting. Then, when the state in which the game ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521 continues for a predetermined time (for example, for 5 seconds) after the start of the monitoring timer, the fifth warning effect is executed, whereas the fifth warning effect is executed. When the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), it is assumed that the state in which the game ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521 has been resolved. 5 The warning effect is not executed, and the information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. Further, even when the game state is switched from the small hit game after the start of the monitoring timer and the game ball B should no longer be driven into the first guide passage 2521, the information of the monitoring timer and the like is cleared. Then, after the execution of the fifth warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, the game ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521. In addition to ending the fifth warning effect as if the problem has been resolved, even if the game state is switched from the small hit game, the fifth guide passage 2521 is no longer in a state where the game ball B should be driven. The warning effect has been completed.

On the other hand, it is recommended to drive the game ball B into the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 during the big hit game and the time saving state, but the left detection sensor 2405 provided in the second guide passage 2522. If it does not detect the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the game ball B has not been driven into the second guide passage 2522, and if that state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the second The player is warned that the game ball B should be driven into the guide passage 2522. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 217 (C), the effect display device 1600 executes the sixth warning effect for notifying the message "Please drive into the second guide passage". As a result, during the big hit game and in the time saving state, the hitting method is changed to a strength that does not come into contact with the abutment portion 1006 (strength that is weaker than right-handed hitting) by entering the upstream space portion 2506. The player can grasp that the game ball B should be driven into the passage 2522. Then, when the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the state in which the game ball B has not been driven into the second guide passage 2522 has been resolved, and the warning effect is terminated. ing.

More specifically, if the left detection sensor 2405 does not detect the passage of the game ball B during the big hit game and the time saving state, it is determined that the game ball B is not driven into the second guide passage 2522. Then, the monitoring timer is started. Then, when the state in which the game ball B is not driven into the second guide passage 2522 continues for a predetermined time (for example, for 5 seconds) after the start of the monitoring timer, the sixth warning effect is executed, whereas the sixth warning effect is executed. When the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of the game ball B within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), it is assumed that the state in which the game ball B is not driven into the second guide passage 2522 has been resolved. 6 The warning effect is not executed, and the information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. Further, even when the game state is switched from the big hit game or the time saving state after the start of the monitoring timer and the game ball B should no longer be driven into the second guide passage 2522, the information of the monitoring timer or the like is cleared. .. Then, after the execution of the sixth warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of the game ball B, the game ball B is not driven into the second guide passage 2522. In addition to ending the sixth warning effect, it is assumed that the game ball B should no longer be driven into the second guide passage 2522 even when the game state is switched from the jackpot game or the time saving state. The sixth warning production has been completed.

In the present embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided slightly below the entrance (near the entrance), which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, but the game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 is always present. Any position may be provided as long as it passes through, for example, an entrance at the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, an exit at the lower end of the first guide passage 2521, and the inside of the first guide passage 2521. Similarly, the left detection sensor 2405 is provided slightly below the entrance (near the entrance), which is the upper end of the second guide passage 2522, but the game ball B that has entered the second guide passage 2522 always passes through. It may be provided at any position, for example, an entrance at the upper end of the second guide passage 2522, an exit at the lower end of the second guide passage 2522, and the inside of the second guide passage 2522.

Further, in the present embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided on the upstream side of the accessory winning opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521, but on the downstream side of the accessory winning opening 2006. It may be provided. In such a case, when the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 during the small hit game, there is a high possibility that the game ball B will enter the open character winning opening 2006. Therefore, the frequency with which the game ball B passes through the right detection sensor 2404 located on the downstream side decreases, and it is possible to prevent the right detection sensor 2404 from malfunctioning due to the excessive passage of the game ball B.

Further, in the present embodiment, the detection sensors (right detection sensor 2404, left detection sensor 2405) are provided in both the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 in the guide passage group 2520. One detection sensor may be provided at a position where the game ball B entering the passage group 2520 always passes. For example, the game ball B that has entered the upstream space portion 2506 is guided by providing one detection sensor in the passage on the front side of the passage where the game ball B enters either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522. Whether or not the game ball B enters the passage group 2520 can be detected by one detection sensor. That is, when one detection sensor detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the guide passage group 2520, and one detection sensor detects the passage of the game ball B. Without it, it is possible to determine that the game ball B is not in the state of being driven into the guide passage group 2520. Even in such a case, if the state in which one detection sensor detects the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time in the normal state in which the game ball B should be driven into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500, By alerting the player, it becomes possible for the player to know whether or not the game ball B should be hit at least in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth to sixth warning effects exemplify displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but the game ball B is displayed in any mode in each game state. When a driving area instruction display (for example, a right-handed display consisting of a right-arrow image or a left-handed display consisting of a left-arrow image) is separately performed so that the player always knows that the player should be driven. It is desirable to execute the 4th to 6th warning effects so as not to interfere with the driving area instruction display. For example, a "display area for displaying the input area instruction display" is provided in the upper right portion of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 different from that area is provided. It is desirable to divide the "display area for displaying the 4th to 6th warning effects" in the upper left portion of the above so that the respective guides are not overlapped and obstructed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth to sixth warning effects exemplify that a predetermined warning screen is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but such a warning is realized as an effect by voice instead of display. In that case, the priority of the allocation to the finitely provided channels for outputting the sound becomes higher than the various production sounds set in the normal state, the big hit game, or the time saving state. It is desirable to set so as to output as much as possible even in a situation where there is no free space (unused channel) in the finitely provided channels. As a result, it is possible to effectively suppress the disadvantage of a player who is unfamiliar with the game characteristics having various types of hits of the game ball B.

[16-3. When a ball clogging clearing hole is provided in the heavy section where the first guide passage and the second guide passage are lined up in the front-rear direction]
As an embodiment different from the above, in the weight portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction, a ball capable of removing the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side can be removed. The case where the clogging clearing hole 2523 is provided will be described with reference to FIGS. 218 and 219. 218 and 219 are explanatory views showing an embodiment in which the ball clogging clearing hole 2523 is provided in the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522.

Although the details have been described above, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction at the portion extending vertically on the left side of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the first guide passage 2521. It has a heavy-duty portion 2520a that appears to overlap with each other. In the stigma 2520a, the second guide passage 2522 is located behind the first guide passage 2521.

As shown in FIGS. 218 and 219 (A), a predetermined rod-shaped member is attached to the weight portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction from the front side of the first guide passage 2521. A ball clogging clearing hole 2523 that can be inserted and that can remove the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side by inserting the rod-shaped member is provided. Specifically, a ball clogging clearing hole 2523 is provided in a portion adjacent to the front side of the first guide passage 2521, the rear surface side of the first guide passage 2521, and the front side of the second guide passage 2522. Further, the ball clogging clearing hole 2523 provided in a portion adjacent to the rear surface side of the first guide passage 2521 and the front side of the second guide passage 2522 is provided on the front side of the first guide passage 2521 visually as seen from the front. The position coincides with the ball clogging clearing hole 2523, and is provided so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522. As a result, the rod-shaped member can be smoothly inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522. That is, when a ball is clogged in the second guide passage 2522, a rod-shaped member is inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522, so that the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side The rod-shaped member can come into contact with the jammed game ball B, and by moving the rod-shaped member in the front-rear direction, the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 can be removed.

If a cover member is provided on the front side of the guide passage group 2520 composed of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the cover member can also be visually recognized from the front of the first guide passage. The ball clogging clearing hole 2523 may be provided at a position corresponding to the ball clogging clearing hole 2523 provided on the front surface side of the 2521. As a result, when the ball is clogged in the second guide passage 2522, the rod-shaped member can be inserted from the front side of the cover member toward the second guide passage 2522 without removing the cover member.

Further, the ball clogging clearing hole 2523 is formed in a circular shape having a diameter slightly larger than that of the rod-shaped member. As a result, when the rod-shaped member is inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522, the rod-shaped member can be freely moved not only in the front-rear direction but also in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. .. That is, when a ball clogging occurs in the second guide passage 2522, the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 can be easily removed by moving the rod-shaped member not only in the front-rear direction but also in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. be able to.

Further, a plurality of ball clogging clearing holes 2523 are provided at predetermined intervals at a portion where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 extend vertically in the weight viewing portion 2520a arranged in the front-rear direction. As a result, no matter where the ball clogging occurs in the second guide passage 2522 in the heavy viewing portion 2520a, the rod-shaped member may be inserted from the ball clogging clearing hole 2523 provided near the position. , The ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 can be easily removed.

Of the guide passage group 2520, the first guide passage 2521 is curved only in the left-right direction, whereas the second guide passage 2522 is complicated in that the passage is bent not only in the left-right direction but also in the front-rear direction. The second guide passage 2522 is more likely to be clogged with balls than the first guide passage 2521. Further, the weighted portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction is either an inlet at the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 or an exit at the lower end. Since it is a portion separated from the inlet and after being bent from the inlet or outlet, the rod-shaped member does not reach the portion even if the rod-shaped member is inserted from the inlet or outlet. In this regard, a rod-shaped member can be inserted into the weighted portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522. A possible ball clogging clearing hole 2523 is provided. As a result, not only when the ball is clogged in the first guide passage 2521 on the front side of the weighted portion 2520a but also when the ball is clogged in the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side, the rod-shaped member can be inserted. The ball clogging can be easily removed.

In the above, in the weighted portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are lined up in the front-rear direction, the ball penetrates in the front-rear direction from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522. Although the clogging clearing hole 2523 is provided, another example of the ball clogging clearing hole 2523 capable of clearing the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side is shown below.

As a first alternative example, as shown in FIG. 219 (B), on the left side of the second guide passage 2522 in the weighted portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction, A predetermined rod-shaped member can be inserted from the left side of the second guide passage 2522, and by inserting the rod-shaped member, a ball clogging clearing hole 2523 capable of removing the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 is provided. You may. In such a case, when a ball is clogged in the second guide passage 2522, a rod-shaped member is inserted from the left side of the second guide passage 2522 to form a rod in the game ball B that is clogged in the second guide passage 2522. The members can come into contact with each other, and by moving the rod-shaped member in the left-right direction, the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 can be removed. In the present embodiment, a transparent plate-shaped light guide plate 3102 is provided on the left side of the guide passage group 2520 composed of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, and the light guide plate 3102 is provided. It is located behind the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, and allows the rod-shaped member to be inserted from the left side of the second guide passage 2522 without being hindered by the light guide plate 3102.

Further, as a second alternative example, as shown in FIG. 219 (C), the weighted portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction is on the front side of the first guide passage 2521. A ball clogging clearing hole 2523 is provided so as to penetrate from the second guide passage 2522 in the front-rear direction, but the shape of the ball clogging clearing hole 2523 is not a circular shape but a slit shape extending in the vertical direction. It may be formed in. In such a case, when the rod-shaped member is inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522, the rod-shaped member can be greatly moved in the vertical direction, and the ball in the second guide passage 2522. The clogging can be easily removed.

Further, in the vicinity of the entrance which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are provided side by side in the left-right direction. Then, as a third alternative example, as shown in FIG. 219 (D), at a place where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are lined up in the front-rear direction, a predetermined rod-shaped member is attached to the second guide passage 2522. A ball clogging clearing hole 2523 that can be inserted from the left side of the above and can remove the ball clogging in the first guide passage 2521 on the right side (back side) by inserting the rod-shaped member may be provided. That is, the ball clogging clearing hole 2523 may be provided so as to penetrate in the left-right direction from the left side of the second guide passage 2522 toward the first guide passage 2521. In such a case, when a ball is clogged in the first guide passage 2521, the ball is clogged in the first guide passage 2521 on the right side (back side) by inserting a rod-shaped member from the left side of the second guide passage 2522. The rod-shaped member can come into contact with the game ball B, and by moving the rod-shaped member in the left-right direction, the ball clogging in the first guide passage 2521 can be removed.

Further, when the ball clogging clearing hole 2523 is provided on the left side of the second guide passage 2522 as in the first alternative example and the third alternative example, the ball clogging clearing hole 2523 is provided from the left side of the second guide passage 2522. By inserting a rod-shaped member via 2523, it is possible to remove the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522, but the light guide plate 3102 is provided at a position adjacent to the rear of the second guide passage 2522. Therefore, when the rod-shaped member is inserted through the ball clogging clearing hole 2523, the rod-shaped member may come into contact with the light guide plate 3102. Then, when the light guide plate 3102 is scratched by the rod-shaped member, when the light guide plate 3102 is light-emittingly decorated with a pattern (first pattern 3110, second pattern 3120), there is also a portion with a scratch that is not related to the pattern. Light is guided (light is reflected), but if the scratched part overlaps with the pattern, there is a problem that the pattern becomes difficult to see. For this reason, it is desirable not to provide a light guide decorative region on which a pattern is displayed in the right region portion of the light guide plate 3102, which is a portion adjacent to the second guide passage 2522. Further, the light guide plate 3102 is attached to a square frame-shaped unit base 3101 attached to the front end of the back box 3010, but the light guide plate 3102 is manually left to the left so that the light guide plate 3102 is separated from the second guide passage 2522. When the rod-shaped member is inserted through the ball clogging clearing hole 2523, the rod-shaped member can be moved to a position where it does not come into contact with the light guide plate 3102 as a preliminary step. You may. Further, on the left side of the second guide passage 2522, a movable member capable of moving to a position where the ball clogging clearing hole 2523 provided on the left side side of the second guide passage 2522 is concealed and a position where the ball clogging clearing hole 2523 is not concealed is provided. When the rod-shaped member is inserted through the ball clogging clearing hole 2523, the movable member may be movable to a position where the ball clogging clearing hole 2523 is not concealed as a preliminary step. In such a configuration, when it is not necessary to clear the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522, the movable member is positioned at a position concealing the ball clogging clearing hole 2523, and the player visually recognizes the ball jam clearing hole 2523. There is an advantage that it becomes difficult and the overall decorativeness including the second guide passage 2522 is not impaired.

[16-4. About the ball clogging prevention structure near the exits of the first guide passage and the second guide passage that are installed side by side]
As described with reference to FIG. 149 (a), the game ball B is driven with a strength of contacting the abutment portion 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 forming a part of the peripheral edge of the game area 5a ( (So-called right-handed), the game ball B in contact with the abutting portion 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 rolls on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening door 2511 that closes the accessory winning opening 2006 in the middle of the first guide passage 2521, and then the guide passage group. It is discharged from the right exit at the lower end of the 2520 to the lower attacker unit 2400 side. Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 has the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 due to the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the first guide passage 2521 and the attacker unit 2400. It is guided to enter either the ordinary winning opening 2003 or the part on the left side of the ordinary winning opening 2003 with a similar probability.

On the other hand, as described in FIG. 149 (b), when the game ball B driven into the upstream space portion 2506 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates through the second guide passage 2522, it twists backward. After being aligned with the first guide passage 2521 in the front-rear direction in the Shigemi portion 2520a, it is twisted forward and discharged from the left exit of the exit of the first guide passage 2521 to the lower attacker unit 2400 side. Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is left side of the normal winning opening 2003 or the normal winning opening 2003 by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the attacker unit 2400 and the game ball B. It is guided to enter any of the sites of the attacker, and rarely to enter the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430.

The game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 through the first opening 2431 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 is placed on the lower right rail 1004 from the discharge port 2435, which is lower than the large winning opening 2005. It is discharged and discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

At the lower end of the guide passage group 2520, the exits of the first guide passage 2521 are located on the right side and the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is located on the left side. In the vicinity of the exits of the passages 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, a large amount of game balls B discharged from the outlets flow in in a short time, and ball clogging is likely to occur below the outlets. In this regard, below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, and the first opening 2431 thereof. When the game ball B enters, it is guided to the out port 1008 through the attacker right passage 2430. As a result, in the vicinity of the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, a part of the game balls B discharged from those outlets is guided from the first opening 2431 to the out port 1008. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from staying in the vicinity of the exit of the ball and prevent the ball from clogging. Further, even if ball clogging occurs below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the game ball B discharged from those outlets is guided from the first opening 2431 to the out port 1008. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from being piled up inside the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522.

As described above, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, but the position thereof is the exit of the second guide passage 2522. It is provided so that the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is closer than that. Inside the first guide passage 2521, an accessory winning opening 2006 that is opened during the small hit game is provided, but due to the ball clogging below the exit of the first guide passage 2521, the first When the game ball B is piled up to the position of the character winning opening 2006 provided inside the guide passage 2521, the game ball B more than expected flows into the opened character winning opening 2006, and the player is illegal. You will be able to get a good profit. In this regard, since the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided so that the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is closer than the exit of the second guide passage 2522, the first guide passage 2521 and the first guide passage 2521 are provided. Even if a ball jam occurs below the exit of the second guide passage 2522, the game ball B near the exit of the first guide passage 2521 can be efficiently guided from the first opening 2431 to the out port 1008. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being piled up to the position of the accessory winning opening 2006 provided inside the guide passage 2521.

In the present embodiment, below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, the attacker right capable of guiding the game ball B to the out opening 1008. Although the first opening 2431 of the passage 2430 is provided, the attacker right passage 2430 is provided with an out opening different from the out opening 1008, and the game ball B entering from the first opening 2431 is provided with another out opening. It may be discharged from the out port to the outside of the game area 5a. Even in such a case, a part of the game ball B discharged from the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 is efficiently guided to the outside of the game area 5a from an out port different from the out port 1008. This makes it difficult for the game balls B to stay in the vicinity of their outlets, and it is possible to prevent ball clogging from occurring.

Further, below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the attacker right passage capable of guiding the game ball B to the out port 1008 at a position close to the exit of the first guide passage 2521. Although the first opening 2431 of the 2430 is provided, the passage where the game ball B can be guided to the out port 1008 or the outside of the game area 5a is also located near the exit of the second guide passage 2522. An out port different from the out port 1008 capable of discharging the game ball B may be provided. Even in such a case, a part of the game balls B discharged from the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 can be efficiently guided to the outside of the game area 5a, and in the vicinity of those exits. The game ball B is less likely to stay, and it is possible to prevent ball clogging from occurring.

In the above, near the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 capable of guiding the game ball B to the out port 1008 is provided. However, near the entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, a passage capable of guiding the game ball B to the out port 1008 and a game ball B outside the game area 5a can be discharged. An out port different from the possible out port 1008 may be provided. The following is another example of a case where a second out port 1013 capable of discharging the game ball B to the outside of the game area 5a is provided near the entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. Shown. FIG. 220 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which the second out port 1013 is provided near the entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522.

As shown in FIG. 220, the game ball B can be discharged to the outside of the game area 5a between the entrance which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance which is the upper end of the second guide passage 2522. A second out port 1013 is provided. In such a configuration, when the game ball B is hit (so-called right-handed) with the strength of entering the upstream space portion 2506 and abutting against the abutting portion 1006, the first guide passage 2521 is entered with a high probability. , A part of the driven game ball B enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. Similarly, if the game ball B is hit with a strength that does not come into contact with the abutting portion 1006 (a strength that is somewhat weaker than right-handed hitting) after entering the upstream space portion 2506, it enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. However, a part of the driven game ball B enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the second guide passage 2522. That is, a part of the game ball B driven so as to enter the upstream space portion 2506 enters the second out port 1013. As a result, one of the game balls B driven so as to enter the upstream space portion 2506 regardless of whether the player aims at the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 or the entrance of the second guide passage 2522. Since the unit is guided to the outside of the game area 5a from the second out port 1013, the number of game balls B entering the inside from those entrances is reduced, and the balls are inside the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. It is possible to prevent clogging from occurring.

In addition to the above, what is the out port 1008 in which the game ball B can be discharged to the outside of the game area 5a only when the ball is clogged inside the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522? Another out port may be provided. The following is another example of a case where the second out port 1013 capable of discharging the game ball B to the outside of the game area 5a is provided near the exit inside the first guide passage 2521. FIG. 221 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which the second out port 1013 is provided near the exit inside the first guide passage 2521.

As shown in FIG. 221 (A), slightly above the exit at the lower end of the first guide passage 2521, on the front surface of the game area 5a (game board 5) which is the same surface as the rear surface of the first guide passage 2521. A second out port 1013 is provided which is open and can discharge the game ball B to the outside of the game area 5a. Further, inside the first guide passage 2521, an accessory winning opening 2006 that is opened during the small hit game is provided, but the second out opening 1013 is on the downstream side of the accessory winning opening 2006. It is provided in the following position. In such a configuration, when the ball is not jammed below the second out port 1013, such as below the exit of the first guide passage 2521, when the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521, the second out It will pass in front of the second out opening 1013 as it is without entering the mouth 1013.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 221 (B), when a ball jam occurs below the second out port 1013, such as below the exit of the first guide passage 2521, the game is played up to the position of the second out port 1013. When the balls B are piled up, the game ball B that has circulated through the first guide passage 2521 will enter the second out port 1013. That is, inside the first guide passage 2521, the game balls B are prevented from being stacked up to a position above the second out port 1013. As described above, the inside of the first guide passage 2521 is provided with the accessory winning opening 2006 which is opened during the small hit game, but the cause is that the ball is clogged near the exit of the first guide passage 2521. As a result, when the game ball B is piled up to the position of the character winning opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521, the game ball B more than expected flows into the opened character winning opening 2006. Players will be able to obtain unfair profits. In this regard, the game ball B is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a only when the ball is clogged inside the first guide passage 2521 on the downstream side of the accessory winning opening 2006 inside the first guide passage 2521. Since the second out port 1013 is provided, even if the ball is clogged near the exit of the first guide passage 2521, the accessory winning opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521 Before the game ball B is piled up to the position, the game ball B can be discharged from the second out port 1013 to the outside of the game area 5a, and a situation occurs in which the player can obtain an illegal profit. Can be prevented.

[17. Out port detection when an abnormality occurs]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the power is turned on, the ball entry ports (first start opening 2002, second start opening 2004, large winning opening 2005, accessory winning opening 2006, etc.) provided on the game board 5 are reached. When the game ball B enters the game ball B and when the game ball B enters the out port 1008, the number of each ball entered is counted and a predetermined calculation is performed, and the calculation result is used as information about the pachinko machine 1. It is designed to be displayed on a predetermined display device (for example, base monitor 1310h). In addition, when an abnormality occurs, whether to continue or stop (stop) the calculation depends on whether the abnormality is mild or severe, and when a serious abnormality occurs, the calculation is performed. I try to stop (stop). The execution state of the calculation when such an abnormality occurs will be described with reference to FIG. 222. FIG. 222 is an explanatory diagram showing an execution state of an operation when an abnormality occurs.

First, in the main control board 1310, as the entry openings provided on the game board 5, the general winning opening 2001, the normal winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the accessory When the game ball B enters the winning opening 2006, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the normal winning opening sensor 2401, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, the large winning opening sensor 2403, and the accessory winning The mouth sensor 2513 detects the game ball B and adds it to the ball entry counter corresponding to each. With such a ball entry counter, it is possible to grasp the number of entry of the game ball B that has entered each entry port among the game balls B that have been hit into the game area 5a.

Further, in the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is discharged to the outside from the out port 1008 provided on the game board 5, either the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor 3033 is the game ball B. Is detected, and all are added to the out number counter. With this out number counter, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls B that have entered the out port 1008 among the game balls B that have been driven into the game area 5a.

Then, in the main control board 1310, a predetermined calculation is performed using the number of incoming balls counter and the number of outs counters. As a specific example, by adding all of the ball entry counters, the total number of game balls B that have been hit into the entry slot provided on the game board 5 among the game balls B that have been hit into the game area 5a. Can be calculated. In addition, the total number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a can be calculated by adding all of the number of incoming balls counter and the number of outs counters.

The above-mentioned calculation result is displayed on a predetermined display device as information about the pachinko machine 1. However, as the information displayed on the predetermined display device, the number of balls of the game ball B that has entered each of the entry / exit ports 1008 is used as it is based on the respective entry / exit counters and out number counters. It is also possible to output. In addition, examples of the predetermined display device include an effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5, a hall computer managed by the hall side externally, and the like. Further, a monitor (base monitor 1310h) may be mounted on the main control board 1310 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and displayed on the monitor (base monitor 1310h). Of these, when the information is displayed on the effect display device 1600, it can be grasped at a position where both the player and the hall side can see it, whereas the monitor of the hall computer or the main control board 1310 can grasp the information. When the information is displayed on the (base monitor 1310h), it can be grasped at a position where only the hall side can see it.

Further, as the information displayed on the predetermined display device, the total number of game balls B that have entered the entry port provided on the game board 5 and the total number of game balls B that have entered the out port 1008 are displayed. In that case, it is possible to determine from these ratios whether or not the degree to which the game ball B enters the entry / exit opening 1008 is within the normal numerical range. When a normal game is performed, the game ball B hit into the game area 5a enters the entry slot at a predetermined ratio. For example, with respect to the out opening 1008. If the total number of game balls B that have entered the entrance is too large, it can be suspected that the ball is being entered into the entrance due to an illegal act. On the other hand, if the total number of game balls B that have entered the out opening 1008 is too large, it can be suspected that the ball has been entered into the out opening 1008 by an illegal act.

In the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is paid out from the payout device 580, the payout detection sensor 591 detects the game ball B and adds it to the payout number counter. With this payout number counter, it is possible to grasp the payout number of the game ball B paid out to the player. Then, since the total number of game balls B driven into the game area 5a calculated by all the input number counters and the out number counters is the total number of game balls B used by the player, the player is asked. The net increase number of the game ball B can be calculated by calculating the difference from the payout number of the game ball B paid out, and the net increase number of such a game ball B is displayed on a predetermined display device. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball B that has entered the ball entry port or the out port 1008 provided on the game board 5 passes through the ball discharge port 629 provided in the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1. A frame-side out-port sensor capable of detecting the game ball B, which is discharged to the rear outside (island facility side of the game hall) (see FIG. 93) but passes through the ball discharge port 629, is provided. .. When the frame-side out port sensor detects the game ball B that has passed through the ball discharge port 629, the detection signal is input to the main control board 1310. Then, in the main control board 1310, when the game ball B enters the entry port or the out port 1008 provided on the game board 5, and then the merged game ball B is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the frame-side out-port sensor detects the game ball B and adds it to the frame-side out-number counter. With this frame-side out number counter, it is possible to grasp the number of balls entered in the game ball B hit into the game area 5a.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 is also the upper ball removal passage 600e of the upper full tank path unit 600 and the lower full tank ball. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball pulling passage 610c to the ball pulling guide portion 627 of the substrate unit 620 through the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the path unit 610, it passes through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharging port 629. It is discharged to the outside behind the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall), and is discharged downward not only from the game ball B driven into the game area 5a but also from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580. The game ball B is also configured so that the frame-side out-port sensor can detect it. Here, considering the purpose of grasping the number of balls of the game ball B driven into the game area 5a, the number of the game balls B discharged downward from the ball ejection passage 580b of the payout device 580 is as follows. It is hoped that various calculations will be made by eliminating (invalidating). In response to this, in the configuration in which the frame-side out-port sensor also detects the game ball B discharged downward from the ball-extracting passage 580b of the payout device 580, the game ball B is located upstream of the frame-side out-port sensor. A ball removal detection sensor (not shown) is provided so that the ball removal detection sensor detects the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580, and further, the ball removal detection sensor detects the game ball B. It is desirable that the number of game balls B played is subtracted from the out number counter. As a result, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball ejection passage 580b of the payout device 580 is detected by the ball ejection detection sensor, once subtracted from the out number counter, and then detected by the frame side out port sensor. It will be added to the out number counter, and the number of game balls B discharged downward from the ball ejection passage 580b of the payout device 580 can be substantially prevented from being reflected in the out number counter. In such a form, when the game ball B is discharged downward from the ball ejection passage 580b of the payout device 580 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is not energized (when the ball ejection action of the payout device 580 is performed). There is no problem because neither the ball ejection detection sensor nor the frame side out port sensor can detect itself, but the game is played downward from the ball ejection passage 580b of the payout device 580 while the pachinko machine 1 is energized. When the ball B is released (when the payout device 580 is pulled out) or when the pachinko machine 1 is not energized, the game ball B is released downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580. However, the problem is solved when the pachinko machine 1 is energized during the ball removal, although the ball is removed from the payout device 580. Further, the game ball B driven into the game area 5a and the game ball B discharged downward from the ball ejection passage 580b of the payout device 580 pass through separate passages behind the pachinko machine 1 without merging. It may be configured so that it is discharged to the outside (island equipment side of the game hall), and only the game ball B driven into the game area 5a can be detected by the frame side out port sensor. In such a configuration, it is not necessary to subtract the number of game balls B detected by the above-mentioned ball removal detection sensor from the out number counter.

As described above, the number of balls entered in the game ball B hit into the game area 5a can be grasped by the frame-side out number counter, but the game hit into the game area 5a is also possible by the out number counter. The total number of spheres B can be calculated. That is, in the state where the game is not performed and the game ball B is not driven into the game area 5a, the frame-side out number counter matches the numerical value of the out number counter. On the other hand, in the state where the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a, after the game ball B passes through the detection sensors provided at the entry port and the out port 1008, the frame side out is separated by a predetermined distance. Since it passes through the mouth sensor, the total value of all the ball entry counters and the out number counter is slightly larger than that of the frame side out number counter.

In the present embodiment, when an abnormality occurs, whether the addition to the counter or the calculation is continued or stopped (stopped) differs depending on whether the abnormality is mild or severe. As shown in FIG. 222 (A), when a minor abnormality occurs, the addition to the counter and the calculation are continued without being stopped (stopped). As this minor abnormality, the upper plate 201 is full of the game ball B and the game ball B cannot be paid out from the payout device 580, or the game ball B should be driven into the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500. , The state of not hitting right is mentioned. In these states, an effect of warning the game ball B on the upper plate 201 to be guided to the lower plate 202 and an effect of warning to hit right are executed. Further, in these states, with respect to the ball entry port and the out port 1008 provided on the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 in a state where the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are not released from the outer frame 2. This is a state in which the game ball B cannot be artificially inserted. Therefore, when a minor abnormality occurs, the number of incoming balls and the number of outs will not increase due to fraudulent acts, and the addition to the counter and the calculation will be continued without being stopped. There is.

On the other hand, when a serious abnormality occurs, the addition to the counter and the calculation are stopped (stopped). As this severe abnormality, a state in which the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are opened from the outer frame 2 can be mentioned. In these states, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are released from the outer frame 2, and artificially with respect to the ball entry port and the out port 1008 provided on the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. It is a state in which the game ball B can be inserted. Therefore, when a serious abnormality occurs, the addition to the counter and the calculation are stopped (stopped) so that the number of balls entered and the number of outs counters do not increase due to an illegal act.

Further, when a serious abnormality occurs, the addition to the counter and the calculation are stopped (stopped), but the detection sensors themselves provided at the entry port and the out port 1008 pass through the game ball B. It is being detected. In addition, when a serious abnormality occurs, the numerical values of the counters such as the number of incoming balls and the number of outs before the occurrence and the calculation result are retained, and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are the outer frame 2. After the serious abnormality has been resolved, such as when the counter is closed, the addition to the counter and the calculation are restarted. In addition, when a serious abnormality occurs and the addition or calculation to the counter is stopped (stopped), the addition or calculation to the counter is performed by displaying an image on a predetermined display device or outputting audio from a speaker. A cancellation effect is being executed to notify that the cancellation has been completed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 222 (B), a serious abnormality occurs in the addition to the out number counter corresponding to the detection by the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 and the calculation related to the out number counter. From time until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses, the addition to the out number counter and the calculation related to the out number counter are continued without being stopped (stopped), and when the predetermined time elapses, the out number counter The calculation related to the addition to and the out number counter is stopped (stopped). As a result, when a serious abnormality such as the door frame 3 being released from the outer frame 2 occurs, the number of game balls B entering the out port 1008 can be grasped until a predetermined time elapses. ..

For example, if the game ball B becomes grape-shaped in the game area 5a and the ball is clogged, the normal game cannot be performed. Therefore, the person on the hall side opens the door frame 3 and the grape-shaped game ball B However, there is a high possibility that the removed game ball B will flow into the out port 1008 at the lower end as it is. Such a grape-shaped game ball B is originally a game ball B having a high possibility of being discharged from the out port 1008 if it does not become grape-shaped. In this regard, when the door frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 in order to remove the grape-shaped game ball B, the addition to the out number counter and the calculation related to the out number counter are performed until a predetermined time elapses. Since the game is continued without being stopped (stopped), the number of balls that the grape-shaped game ball B has flowed into the out port 1008 can be grasped, and the reliability of the information regarding the out port 1008 can be enhanced. After a lapse of a predetermined time, it is unlikely that the grape-shaped game ball B will flow into the out opening 1008, and it is suspected that the ball is being entered into the out opening 1008 by an illegal act. It is decided to stop (stop) the calculation related to the addition to and the out number counter.

Further, as shown in FIG. 222 (C), a serious abnormality occurs in the addition to the out number counter corresponding to the detection by the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 and the calculation related to the out number counter. From time to the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the addition to the out number counter and the calculation related to the out number counter are continued without being stopped (stopped), but the predetermined time elapses. Even before, if a large amount of game balls B are continuously detected by the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor 3033, it is added to the out number counter or the out number counter at that time. The calculation related to is stopped (stopped). In such a case, when the door frame 3 is opened, it is possible that more than the number of balls that are expected to flow into the out port 1008 due to the removal of the grape-shaped game ball B has flowed into the out port 1008. Since it is suspected that the ball is being thrown into the out opening 1008 due to a high price and an illegal act, the addition to the out number counter and the calculation related to the out number counter are stopped (stopped).

Further, as shown in FIG. 222 (D), when the door frame 3 is opened in the case where a serious abnormality occurs, the out number counter corresponding to the detection by the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 is displayed. Regarding the addition and the calculation related to the out number counter, the addition to the out number counter and the calculation related to the out number counter are stopped (stopped) from the time when the door frame 3 is opened until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses. On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is opened, the addition to the out number counter and the calculation related to the out number counter are stopped (stopped) at that time. It is considered that the door frame 3 is opened for the purpose of removing the grape-shaped game ball B in the game area 5a when the door frame 3 is opened, whereas the main body frame 4 is opened in the game area 5a when the main body frame 4 is opened. This is because the main body frame 4 which does not need to be opened is opened for the purpose of removing the grape-shaped game ball B. That is, when the main body frame 4 is opened, it is opened for another purpose such as removing the ball clogging on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, so that the addition to the out number counter and the calculation related to the out number counter are stopped (stopped). I'm supposed to do it.

As described above, in the present embodiment, after the game ball B enters the ball entry port or the out port 1008 provided on the game board 5, the merged game ball B is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. At this time, the frame-side out-port sensor detects the game ball B, but as shown in FIG. 222 (E), the frame-side out-count counter corresponding to the detection by the frame-side out-port sensor Regarding the addition and the calculation related to the frame side out number counter, when a serious abnormality occurs, the addition to the frame side out number counter and the calculation related to the frame side out number counter are stopped (stopped). Therefore, when the person on the hall side opens the door frame 3 and removes the grape-shaped game ball B, the out corresponding to the detection by the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 within a predetermined period. While addition to the number counter is performed, since addition to the frame side out number counter corresponding to the detection by the frame side out port sensor is not performed, all the ball entry counters and the out number counter are used. From the difference between the added numerical value and the numerical value of the frame side out number counter, it is possible to grasp the number of incoming balls of the grape-shaped game ball B removed when the door frame 3 is opened. It should be noted that the number of such grape-shaped game balls B entered can be displayed on a predetermined display device as information regarding the pachinko machine 1.

Further, as described above, in the state where the game is not performed and the game ball B is not driven into the game area 5a, the frame-side out number counter includes all of the incoming ball counters and the out number counter. Will match the value obtained by adding. On the other hand, in the state where the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a, after the game ball B passes through the detection sensors provided at the entry port and the out port 1008, the frame side out is separated by a predetermined distance. Since it passes through the mouth sensor, the total value of all the ball entry counters and the out number counter is slightly larger than that of the frame side out number counter. In this way, as long as the normal game is performed, the value obtained by adding all the ball entry counters and the out number counters may have a difference of a predetermined number or more as compared with the frame side out number counters. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not a normal game is being performed by monitoring whether or not a difference of a predetermined number or more has occurred.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 223, when a difference of a predetermined number or more occurs in the numerical value obtained by adding all of the ball entry counters and the out number counters as compared with the frame side out number counters, it is special. It is judged that an abnormality has occurred, and the addition to the counter and the calculation are stopped (stopped). In addition, when a special abnormality occurs and the addition or calculation to the counter is stopped, the addition or calculation to the counter is stopped by displaying the image on the predetermined display device or outputting the sound from the speaker. A cancellation effect is being executed to notify the user. Then, when a difference of a predetermined number or more occurs with respect to the value obtained by adding all of the number of incoming balls counter and the number of outs counters as compared with the number of outs counters on the frame side, for example, an illegal act is performed on the game board 5. After an object other than the game ball B is passed only through the provided ball entry port or out port 1008, or after the game ball B passes through the detection sensor provided at the ball entry port or out port 1008. It is possible to suspect that the ball is clogged before passing through the frame side out port sensor. As a result, it is possible to detect at an early stage that an obstacle such as an illegal act or a ball jam has occurred, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, as a serious abnormality, a state in which the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are opened from the outer frame 2 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are not limited to this. If a situation is detected in which the game is supposed to be progressing due to an illegal act even if the door is not released from the outer frame 2, addition to various counters and calculation are stopped (stopped). It may be. For example, when a level of magnetism that attracts the game ball B is detected in the vicinity of the game area 5a, or when a predetermined vibration (impact) with respect to the game area 5a is detected, it is determined that normal game is not performed. Then, it can be exemplified that addition to various counters and calculation are stopped (stopped). Further, when the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is not opened from the outer frame 2 and an illegal magnetism or vibration is detected. However, although addition to various counters and calculation are stopped (stopped), it is considered illegal only when illegal magnetism or vibration is detected when the door frame 3 or main body frame 4 is not released from the outer frame 2. It may be determined that the progress of the game including the launch of the game ball B is immediately stopped.

[17-1. Out port detection when multiple out ports are provided]
As an embodiment different from the above, in addition to the out port 1008 provided on the downstream side of the game area 5a, a second out port 1013 is provided on the upstream side and a third out port 1014 is provided on the middle stream side, respectively, from the out port. A case where a detection sensor capable of detecting the ejected game ball B is provided will be described with reference to FIGS. 224 and 225. FIG. 224 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which the second out port 1013 and the third out port 1014 are provided separately from the out port 1008. FIG. 225 is an explanatory diagram showing an execution state of the calculation when the second out port 1013 and the third out port 1014 are provided separately from the out port 1008.

As shown in FIG. 224, the game ball B can be discharged out of the game area 5a between the entrance which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance which is the upper end of the second guide passage 2522. A second out port 1013 is provided. In such a configuration, when the game ball B is hit (so-called right-handed) with the strength of entering the upstream space portion 2506 and abutting against the abutting portion 1006, the first guide passage 2521 is entered with a high probability. , A part of the driven game ball B enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. Similarly, if the game ball B is hit with a strength that does not come into contact with the abutting portion 1006 (a strength that is somewhat weaker than right-handed hitting) after entering the upstream space portion 2506, it enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. However, a part of the driven game ball B enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the second guide passage 2522. That is, a part of the game ball B driven so as to enter the upstream space portion 2506 enters the second out port 1013.

Further, below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, but the attacker right passage 2430 is provided. A third out port 1014 different from the out port 1008 is provided, and the game ball B that has entered through the first opening 2431 is discharged from the third out port 1014 to the outside of the game area 5a.

In addition, the effect of providing the second out port 1013 around the entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 in the guide passage group 2520, and providing the third out port 1014 around the exit. Although the details of the above are described above, the provision of the second out port 1013 and the third out port 1014 causes the ball to be clogged inside the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. Can be prevented from occurring.

In the present embodiment, the second out port sensor capable of detecting the game ball B discharged to the outside from the second out port 1013 and the game ball B discharged to the outside from the third out port 1014 are detected. A third outlet sensor capable of detecting this is provided. When the second out port sensor detects the game ball B that has entered the second out port 1013, the detection signal is input to the main control board 1310, whereas the third out port sensor is the third. When the game ball B that has entered the out port 1014 is detected, the detection signal is input to the main control board 1310. Then, in the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is discharged to the outside from the second out port 1013, the second out port sensor detects the game ball B and adds it to the second out number counter. On the other hand, when the game ball B is discharged to the outside from the third out port 1014, the third out port sensor detects the game ball B and adds it to the third out number counter. The second out number counter keeps track of the number of game balls B that have entered the second out port 1013, while the third out number counter determines the number of game balls B that have entered the third out port 1014. It is possible to grasp the number of balls entered.

In addition, in the main control board 1310, a predetermined calculation is performed using not only the number of incoming balls counter and the number of outs counter but also the second number of outs counter and the third out number counter. As a specific example, by adding the out number counter, the second out number counter, and the third out number counter, among the game balls B driven into the game area 5a, the third out number counter is provided on the game board 5. It is possible to calculate the number of game balls B discharged to the outside without entering the ball into the ball entry port such as the start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Further, by adding the number of incoming balls counter, the number of outs counter, the second number of outs counter, and the third out number counter, the total number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a can be calculated.

In the present embodiment, in a state where the game ball B is driven into the right side area of the game area 5a, a predetermined number or more (for example, 30 or more balls out of 100 balls that can be fired per minute) are second out per unit time. It is designed so that it does not enter the mouth 1013. Therefore, in the time saving state or the big hit game state, the second out number counter is used to determine whether or not the number of balls of the game ball B that has entered the second out port 1013 is equal to or more than a predetermined number per unit time. It is monitored and it is judged that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game when the number exceeds a predetermined number per unit time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 225 (A), when the number of balls of the game ball B that has entered the second out port 1013 exceeds a predetermined number per unit time, an image is displayed on a predetermined display device. A warning effect is executed to warn that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game by the sound output from the speaker or the speaker. Then, this warning effect ends when the number of balls of the game ball B that has entered the second out port 1013 is less than a predetermined number per unit time.

For example, when the number of balls of the game ball B that has entered the second out port 1013 is a predetermined number or more per unit time, the entry is on the downstream side of the second out port 1013 in the right region of the game area 5a. The chances of the game ball B entering the ball opening (normal winning opening 2003, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, large winning opening 2005, accessory winning opening 2006) are reduced, which is disadvantageous for the player. It becomes. In this regard, when the number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number per unit time, the game board is provided so that the game ball B can easily enter the second out port 1013. It is possible to suspect that 5 may have been tampered with. As a result, it is possible to discover at an early stage that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game, and it is possible to improve the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

In the above, it is monitored whether or not the number of balls of the game ball B that has entered the second out port 1013 is equal to or more than a predetermined number per unit time in the time saving state or the big hit game state. The number of game balls B that entered the second out port 1013, and the entry and out ports (out port 1008, third out port 1014) that are downstream of the second out port 1013. A ratio of the game ball B to the number of balls entered may be calculated, and whether or not the ratio is equal to or higher than a predetermined rate may be monitored. Even in such a case, if the ball entry rate of the game ball B that has entered the second out port 1013 per unit time is too high, it can be determined that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game.

Similarly, in a state where the game ball B is driven into the right side area of the game area 5a, a predetermined number or more (for example, 30 or more balls out of 100 balls that can be fired per minute) per unit time is the third out port 1014. It is designed so that it will not enter the ball. Therefore, in the time saving state or the big hit game state, the third out number counter is used to determine whether or not the number of balls of the game ball B that has entered the third out port 1014 is equal to or more than a predetermined number per unit time. It is monitored and it is judged that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game when the number exceeds a predetermined number per unit time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 225 (B), when the number of balls of the game ball B that has entered the third out port 1014 exceeds a predetermined number per unit time, an image is displayed on a predetermined display device. A warning effect is executed to warn that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game by the sound output from the or speaker. Then, this warning effect is set to end when the number of balls of the game ball B that has entered the third out port 1014 is less than a predetermined number per unit time.

For example, when the number of balls of the game ball B that has entered the third out port 1014 is a predetermined number or more per unit time, the entry is on the downstream side of the third out port 1014 in the right region of the game area 5a. The chances of the game ball B entering the ball openings (ordinary winning opening 2003, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, large winning opening 2005) are reduced, which is disadvantageous for the player. In this regard, if the number of game balls B that have entered the third out port 1014 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number per unit time, the game board is provided so that the game ball B can easily enter the third out port 1014. It is possible to suspect that 5 may have been tampered with. As a result, it is possible to discover at an early stage that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game, and it is possible to improve the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

In the above, it is monitored whether or not the number of balls of the game ball B that has entered the third out port 1014 is equal to or more than a predetermined number per unit time in the time saving state or the big hit game state. The ratio of the number of game balls B that entered the third out port 1014 to the number of game balls B that entered the entry port and the out port 1008 that are downstream of the third out port 1014. May be calculated and it may be monitored whether or not the ratio is equal to or higher than a predetermined rate. Even in such a case, if the ball entry rate of the game ball B that has entered the third out port 1014 per unit time is too high, it can be determined that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game.

In the present embodiment, when the number of balls B entered into the second out port 1013 or the third out port 1014 becomes a predetermined number or more per unit time in the time saving state or the big hit game state. The addition to the second out number counter and the third out number counter and the calculation related to those out number counters are continued, but as in the above-described embodiment, when the number exceeds a predetermined number per unit time. , It may be determined that an abnormality has occurred, and the addition to the second out number counter or the third out number counter or the calculation related to those out number counters may be stopped. In such a configuration, even if the game ball B is inserted into the second out port 1013 or the third out port 1014 by an illegal act, the second out number counter and the third out number counter do not increase. , The reliability of the information regarding the second out port 1013 and the third out port 1014 can be enhanced.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the normal state, the game ball B should be driven into the left region of the game area 5a, but when the game ball B is driven into the right region of the game region 5a, the game ball B is driven into the right region. The game ball B may enter the second out port 1013 or the third out port 1014. Therefore, in the normal state, when the second out-port sensor or the third out-port sensor detects the game ball B, it is hit from right to left by displaying an image on a predetermined display device or outputting audio from a speaker. We are executing an instruction effect to instruct to change to.

[18. About the light emission history after the light emission effect using the light guide plate]
In the present embodiment, the effect display device 1600 performs the variation display of the decorative symbol based on the variation pattern transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. During the variation display, the effect display device 1600 The light guide plate 3102 provided on the front surface of the display area of the above is decorated with light emission a plurality of times, and the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is changed stepwise by the multiple times to emit light that suggests a jackpot expectation for the variable display. The production is feasible. Further, when the light guide plate 3102 is light-emittingly decorated, the back-up decorative body 3211 and the back-left decoration of the back-front effect unit 3200 provided around the display area of the effect display device 1600 (around the opening 3010a of the back box 3010). The body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 are made to emit light in the same light emitting color as the light guide plate 3102, but even after the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off, the light emitting color history of the light guide plate 3102 is recorded. It is possible to execute a history effect in which the back-up decorative body 3211 or the like is continuously emitted with the emission color immediately before.

Specifically, when the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 (the start condition is satisfied), the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310. Then, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation pattern command in the command analysis process of step S601, whether or not to execute the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102 based on the fluctuation pattern specified from the fluctuation pattern command. To decide. Further, when it is decided to execute the light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102, the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 in the light emitting effect is changed by referring to the light emitting color pattern table based on the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command. One of a plurality of types of emission color patterns set over a plurality of times is determined.

Further, on the light guide plate 3102, by changing the emission color of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 arranged above the light guide plate 3102, the first one is white, green, blue, or red. It is possible to decorate the pattern 3110 (see FIG. 172) by light emission, but in the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is set to a predetermined light emission color three times with the light emission color set in the light emission color pattern. I try to decorate it with light emission at the timing. Further, the time for light emitting and decorating the light guide plate 3102 at one timing is a short time (for example, less than 1 second), and the light is turned off after the light guide plate 3102 is light emitting and decorated until the next light emitting decoration. The time spent is longer. Further, the number of times the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitting and decorated at one timing is only once, but the light guide plate 3102 may be light-emitting and decorated a plurality of times at each timing.

Further, the light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed during the normal fluctuation before the reach is formed during the variation display of the decorative pattern, but at the timing during the reach effect after the reach is formed. It may be executed, for example, 1 to 3 times out of 3 times of luminescent decoration of the light guide plate 3102 may be executed at the timing during the reach effect after the reach formation.

Further, the light guide plate 3102 can emit a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 arranged above the light guide plate 3102 to emit light and decorate the first pattern 3110. It is possible to illuminate the second pattern 3120 by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the second pattern substrate 3104 arranged on the left side of the front view, but the light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102 is used. Then, the first pattern 3110 is light-emittingly decorated. As a result, it is possible to clearly understand that the three light emitting decorations of the first pattern 3110 in the light emitting effect are a series of effects.

Next, the emission color pattern table in which the emission color pattern of the light guide plate 3102 is set will be described with reference to FIG. 226. The emission color pattern table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. 226 is an emission color pattern table in which the emission color pattern of the light guide plate 3102 is set.

As described above, a plurality of types of emission color patterns are set in the emission color pattern table, and the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is set in the emission color pattern as many times as the number of times the light guide plate 3102 is emitted and decorated. How it changes is set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 226, a light emitting pattern is set in the light emitting color pattern table so that the light guide plate 3102 can be light-emitting and decorated with a predetermined light-emitting color and then changed twice.

Further, as the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 set in the light emitting color pattern, it is set to be decorated by emitting light in any of four colors of white, green, blue, and red. Then, when determining the emission color pattern from the emission color pattern table, as a result of the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 changing to the end, the jackpot expectation is set to be higher in the order of white → green → blue → red. Has been done. That is, when the lottery result specified from the fluctuation pattern is a big hit, a light emitting color pattern having a high expectation of a big hit (for example, red) is determined with a high probability as the final light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102. When the lottery result specified from the fluctuation pattern is a loss (loss, reach loss), there is a high probability that the final emission color of the light guide plate 3102 will be an emission color with a low expectation of a big hit (for example, white). I will decide. As a result, when the final luminescent color of the light guide plate 3102 is luminescent and decorated with a luminescent color having a high expectation for a big hit, the player's expectation for the big hit is increased.

In the light emitting color pattern, the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 does not change in the reverse order of white → green → blue → red, and when the light guide plate 3102 is light emitting and decorated next time. Is set so that the emission color is maintained or the emission color has a high expectation of a big hit. As a result, even if the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with a light emitting color having a low expectation of a big hit, there is a possibility that the light emitting color will change to a light emitting color having a high expectation of a big hit unless the three timings of the light emitting effect are completed. Therefore, the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 can be expected to be noticed until the emission effect is completed.

Further, in the emission color pattern, the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 does not necessarily have to change in the order of green → blue → red after being decorated with white emission, and the emission color may start from a color other than white. It is also set to skip the above emission color and change to the next emission color (for example, change from white to red). As a result, even if the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitting decorated with a light-emitting color with a low expectation of a big hit, it is not possible to predict which light-emitting color the next light-emitting color will change to, and the light guide plate will be used until the light-emitting effect is completed. The emission color of 3102 can be noticed with expectation.

Next, the back-up decorative body 3211 and the like provided around the display area of the effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. 227. As described above, the back front effect unit 3200 surrounds the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, that is, surrounds the display area of the effect display device 1600 in the front view, and the back front decoration unit 3211 of the back front effect unit 3200. , Back left decorative body 3212, and back right decorative body 3213. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 227, in the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 on the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display device 1600, each of the three radial decorative portions 3212b and the radial decorative portion 3213b It is divided into four parts. Here, these will be collectively referred to as a decorative body 3210. Therefore, four decorative bodies 3210 are provided on the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display device 1600 so as to be arranged in the vertical direction. Further, behind these decorative bodies 3210, a decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the front is mounted is provided. Further, in the plurality of decorative bodies 3210, it is possible to perform light emitting decoration in any of white, green, blue, and red, similarly to the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102.

When the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitting and decorated in the light-emitting effect, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 provided around the display area of the effect display device 1600 emit light in the same light-emitting color as the light-emitting plate 3102. Further, in the light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitting decorated three times at a predetermined timing, but even after the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off at each timing, a plurality of decorative objects The light emission of 3210 is maintained. As described above, when the light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed, as the history of the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102, the history effect of continuously emitting the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 with the light emitting color immediately before the light guide plate 3102 is performed. Running.

Specifically, at the first or second timing of emitting and decorating the light guide plate 3102 in the light emitting effect, a plurality of decorative bodies 3210 are emitted with the same emission color as the light guide plate 3102, and after the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitting and decorated, the next time. The light emission of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 is maintained until the timing of the light emission decoration. Further, at the third timing of emitting and decorating the light guide plate 3102 in the light emitting effect, a plurality of decorative bodies 3210 are emitted with the same emission color as the light guide plate 3102, and after the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitting and decorated, the variation display of the decorative pattern is terminated. The light emission of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 is maintained until this is done. As a result, the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 at one timing is a short time (for example, less than 1 second), but the light emitting color of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 is the same as that of the light guide plate 3102. By maintaining the above, even if the light emitting color is overlooked when the light guide plate 3102 is light emitting and decorated, the light emitting color can be grasped after the light guide plate 3102 is light emitting and decorated.

Further, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 are provided with a number corresponding to the number of emission colors capable of emitting and decorating the light guide plate 3102 by the light emitting effect. The number of light emitting colors of the decorative body 3210 is different depending on the light emitting colors of the light guide plate 3102 and the decorative body 3210. The number of light emitting the decorative body 3210 is set to increase in order from the lower side of the decorative body 3210. Specifically, when the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102, which is light-emitting and decorated by the light-emitting effect, is white, which is the light-emitting color with the lowest expectation of a big hit, four each on the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display device 1600 Of the decorative bodies 3210, one lower decorative body 3210a is set to emit white light. When the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 is green, the lower two decorative bodies 3210a and 3210b are set to emit green light. When the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 is blue, the lower three decorative bodies 3210a to 3210c are set to emit blue light. Further, when the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 is red, which is the emission color with the highest expectation of big hit, all four decorative bodies 3210a to 3210d are set to emit red light. As a result, even when the jackpot expectation cannot be grasped from the emission colors of the light guide plate 3102 and the decorative body 3210, the jackpot expectation can be easily grasped from the number of the decorative bodies 3210 emitting light.

Further, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 are located behind the light guide plate 3102, and can emit light toward the front. When the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitting and decorated in the light emitting effect, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 are emitting light with the same light emitting color as the light guide plate 3102, but the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 are located behind the light guide plate 3102. The light guide plate 3102 is irradiated with light not only by the plurality of LEDs for illuminating and decorating the first pattern 3110 on the light guide plate 3102, but also by the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 that emit light. As a result, the first pattern 3110 light-emittingly decorated on the light guide plate 3102 becomes more emphasized, and the effect using the light guide plate 3102 can be made more conspicuous.

Further, the light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed during the normal fluctuation before the reach is formed in the variable display of the decorative symbol, but during the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102, the light emitting effect is performed. Other notice effects using the effect display device 1600 are not newly started. That is, another notice effect using the effect display device 1600 is started at the timing when the light guide plate 3102 is not light-emitting and decorated. As a result, the light guide plate 3102 is located in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, but the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 does not hinder the visibility of other advance notice effects, and other advance notice effects are started. But don't miss it. That is, it is possible for the player to firmly grasp each of the light emitting effect for decorating the light guide plate 3102 and the other notice effect.

Next, a specific example of the effect of the light guide plate 3102 and the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 at the time of executing the light emission effect will be described with reference to FIG. 228. FIG. 228 is a specific example of the effect of the light guide plate 3102 and the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 when the light emitting effect is executed. In FIG. 228, the eyes (pupils) of a predetermined character are shown as an enlarged pattern as the second pattern 3120.

FIG. 228 describes a case where a emission color pattern in which the emission color for illuminating and decorating the light guide plate 3102 changes from white to green to red is determined by the emission effect. First, as shown in FIG. 228 (A), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600. After that, as shown in FIG. 228 (B), at the first timing of luminescent decoration of the light guide plate 3102 by the light emitting effect, the light guide plate 3102 is luminescently decorated with the second pattern 3120 in white and the effect display device 1600. Of the four decorative bodies 3210 on both the left and right sides of the display area, one of the lower decorative bodies 3210a is emitting light, but the emission color is white, which is the same emission color as the light guide plate 3102. .. Then, as shown in FIG. 228 (C), the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off in a short time (for example, less than 1 second), but the decorative body 3210a that is already emitting white light is not included. The light emission in white is maintained until the second timing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 228 (D), at the second timing of luminescent decoration of the light guide plate 3102 by the light emitting effect, the light guide plate 3102 is luminescently decorated with the second pattern 3120 in green and the effect display device 1600. Of the four decorative bodies 3210 on both the left and right sides of the display area, the lower two decorative bodies 3210a and the decorative body 3210b are increased so as to emit light, but the light emitting color is the same as that of the light guide plate 3102. It emits light in green. Then, as shown in FIG. 228 (E), the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off in a short time (for example, less than 1 second), but the decorative body 3210, which is already emitting green light, As for 3210b, the light emission in green is maintained until the third timing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 228 (F), at the third timing of luminescent decoration of the light guide plate 3102 by the light emitting effect, the light guide plate 3102 is luminescently decorated with the second pattern 3120 in red and the effect display device 1600. Of the four decorative bodies 3210 on both the left and right sides of the display area, all four decorative bodies 3210a to 3210d are increased to emit light, but the light emitting color is the same as that of the light guide plate 3102. It emits a certain red color. Then, as shown in FIG. 228 (G), the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off in a short time (for example, less than 1 second), but is already emitting red light. As shown in FIG. 228 (H), the 3210d maintains its light emission in red until the variable display of the decorative symbol is finished.

In the present embodiment, when the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitting and decorated in the light emitting effect, a plurality of decorative bodies 3210 are emitted with the same light emitting color as the light guide plate 3102, but at that time, the light guide plate does not emit light. From the time when the light emitting decoration of the 3102 is turned off, a plurality of light emitting bodies may be made to emit light in the light emitting color immediately before the light guide plate 3102. Even in such a case, the emission color can be grasped after the emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of the decorative bodies 3210 to emit light is different depending on the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 and the decorative body 3210, and the larger the number of the decorative bodies 3210 to emit light, the higher the expected jackpot color. Although it is shown that there is, the number of times the light guide plate 3102 is already luminescent may be indicated out of the three timings of luminescent decoration of the light guide plate 3102. For example, at the first timing of light emitting and decorating the light guide plate 3102 in the light emitting effect, one of the four decorative bodies 3210 on the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display device 1600 is emitted. Then, at the second timing, the lower two decorative bodies 3210a and the decorative body 3210b are emitted, and at the third timing, the lower three decorative bodies 3210a to 3210c are emitted. Good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitting decorated three times at a predetermined timing in the light emitting effect, but the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitting decorated at the first timing, but the light guide plate is light-emitting decorated at the second and third timings. A pattern in which the light guide plate 3102 is not light-emitting and decorated at the first and second timings, or a pattern in which the light guide plate 3102 is not light-emitting and decorated at the first and second timings may be provided. In such a case, it is not possible to know how many times the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 continues in the light emitting effect, and it is possible to pay attention to how many times the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 can be changed.

Further, in the present embodiment, during the variable display of the decorative symbol, a light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed as an effect indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit for the variable display of the decorative symbol, but the first start port 2002 Alternatively, light emission using the light guide plate 3102 spans a plurality of fluctuations from the time when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 (the starting condition is satisfied) until the variation display of the decorative symbol due to the entry is performed. You may try to perform the production. For example, when the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 (the start condition is satisfied), the pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the pre-determination command is transmitted on the peripheral control board 1510. Is received, based on the fluctuation pattern specified from the pre-determination command, whether or not to execute the light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102, and when it is decided to execute the light emitting effect, the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 is determined. It may be configured to determine. Further, in the light emitting effect using such a light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is light-emitting decorated a plurality of times at a predetermined timing out of a plurality of fluctuations, and the light guide plate is even after the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off. It may be configured so that the light emission of the plurality of light emitters is continued with the light emission color immediately before 3102. In such a case, it is possible to pay attention to how the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 changes until the emission effect is completed over the plurality of fluctuations.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 arranged above the light guide plate 3102 are made to emit light, and the first pattern 3110 is light-emitting and decorated. However, when a plurality of LEDs do not emit light due to a failure or the like, the light emitting and decorating the light guide plate 3102 is not performed at the timing of emitting and decorating, and the expected degree of jackpot indicated by the emitted color is grasped. I can't. In this respect, after the timing of emitting and decorating the light guide plate 3102, a plurality of decorative bodies 3210 are emitted with the same emission color as the light guide plate 3102, so that even if the light guide plate 3102 cannot be light-emitting and decorated, a plurality of decorative bodies 3210 are emitted. The jackpot expectation can be grasped by the emission color of the decorative body 3210.

Further, in the present embodiment, when an abnormality (error) occurs, a warning effect for notifying that the abnormality has occurred is executed with priority over other effects. For example, when magnetism at a level that attracts the game ball B is detected in the vicinity of the game area 5a, or when a predetermined vibration (impact) with respect to the game area 5a is detected, it is determined that normal game is not performed. Then, a warning effect is being executed. In this regard, if an abnormality (error) occurs at the timing when the light emitting effect is executed and the light guide plate 3102 is light emitted and decorated, the warning effect is prioritized and the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 or the light emission of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 is emitted. However, when the abnormality is resolved after the timing of emitting and decorating the light guide plate 3102 (before the end of the variation display of the decorative symbol), the light emission of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 is started. There is. In this way, even when the warning effect is prioritized over the light emission effect, the jackpot expectation can be grasped from the emission colors of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 after the abnormality is resolved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot expectation is suggested by the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 and the emission color of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 in the light emission effect and the history effect, but the light emission effect and the history effect are as the setting suggestion effects described above. Is executed, and the set value may be suggested by the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 or the emission color of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210. In such a configuration, for example, when the emission color pattern is determined from the emission color pattern table, the set value is higher in the order of white → green → blue → red as a result of the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 changing to the end. It may be set to suggest that. That is, among the setting suggestion effects, the high setting suggestion effect is the emission pattern in which the final emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is red, and the low setting suggestion effect is the final emission color of the light guide plate 3102. The light emission pattern that becomes white may be executed. As a result, when the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 or the emission color of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 is decorated with a light emitting color suggesting that the set value is high, the player's light emitting color with respect to the high set value (set value 6) You can raise your expectations.

[19. About image production similar to the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate]
In the present embodiment, the light guide plate 3102 is provided in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, but the light guide plate 3102 is not only light-emittingly decorated with a predetermined pattern, but is also guided in the display area of the effect display device 1600. By displaying a pattern on the light plate 3102, which is a visual mode similar to the pattern luminescent and decorated, it is possible to perform an imitation effect of visually recognizing as if there are a plurality of light guide plates. In this imitation effect, the pattern luminescent and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed, and finally one of the patterns is displayed. , The reach effect that is executed after that is different.

Specifically, when the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 (the start condition is satisfied), the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, when the variation pattern command is received in the command analysis process of step S601, the variation pattern is specified from the variation pattern command, but the variation pattern for executing the first reach effect is specified. In this case, the pattern luminescent and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed, and finally the pattern is luminescently decorated on the light guide plate 3102. By executing the production, the process proceeds to the first reach production after that. On the other hand, when the variation pattern for executing the second reach effect is specified, the pattern luminescent and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed. In this way, the imitation effect of displaying the pattern in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is finally executed, and then the process proceeds to the second reach effect.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned imitation effect is executed during the normal fluctuation before the reach is formed, among the variable display of the decorative pattern. Further, among the reach effects, the first reach effect is set so that the expectation of a big hit is higher than that of the second reach effect. As a result, in the imitation effect during normal fluctuation, when the light guide plate 3102 is finally luminescent and decorated, the process proceeds to the first reach effect with a high expectation of a big hit. Therefore, the light guide plate 3102 is finally decorated with a pattern. It is possible to pay attention to whether or not the luminescent decoration is applied.

Next, the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 at the time of executing the imitation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 229. FIG. 229 is a pattern displayed on the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 when the imitation effect is executed. In addition, in FIG. 229, the second pattern 3120 is shown by a pattern consisting of the characters "CHANGE!".

As shown in FIG. 229 (A), on the light guide plate 3102 in which the imitation effect is being executed, as the second pattern 3120, the characters "CHANGE!" Are displayed in the center and an effect pattern is luminescently decorated around the light guide plate 3102. .. The light guide plate 3102 can emit a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 arranged above the light guide plate 3102 to emit light and decorate the first pattern 3110. It is possible to make the second pattern 3120 emit light by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the second pattern substrate 3104 arranged on the left side of the front view, but an imitation effect using the light guide plate 3102 is possible. In, only the light emitting decoration of the second pattern 3120 is used.

Further, as shown in FIG. 229 (B), in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the imitation effect is being executed, an imitation pattern 1600a is displayed, along with the characters "Lucky!" In the center and an effect pattern around the display area. it's shown. Although it is possible to display a moving image in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a still image is displayed like the imitation pattern 1600a described above during the execution of the imitation effect.

Further, while the light guide plate 3102 emits and decorates the characters "CHANGE!" As the second pattern 3120, the characters "LUCKY!" Are displayed as the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600. However, the characters of the imitation pattern 1600a have the same line thickness, font type, and size as those of the second pattern 3120. As described above, in the imitation effect, since the character forms are the same, it is difficult to grasp which of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

Further, while the light guide plate 3102 emits and decorates the effect picture as the second picture 3120, the effect picture is displayed as the imitation picture 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but the imitation picture 1600a The effect pattern that is a part is the same as the effect pattern that is a part of the second pattern 3120. As described above, in the imitation effect, since the effect pattern shared as a part of the pattern is displayed, it is difficult to grasp which of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

Further, while the light guide plate 3102 emits and decorates the second pattern 3120 in a single color by a plurality of LEDs, the imitation pattern 1600a is also displayed in a single color in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Further, in the light guide plate 3102, when the second pattern 3120 is light-emitting and decorated, the light-emitting decoration of the second picture 3120 is shaded depending on the distance from the plurality of LEDs, but the display area of the effect display device 1600 is also imitated. It is displayed so that the pattern 1600a has shading. Further, when the second pattern 3120 is light-emittingly decorated on the light guide plate 3102, a black image without displaying any information is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but the effect display device 1600 When the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area, a black image is displayed as the background image thereof. As described above, in the imitation effect, since the visual mode of the pattern is the same as a whole, it is difficult to grasp which of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

Further, the light guide plate 3102 is located in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the size of the light guide plate 3102 is configured to be larger than the display area of the effect display device 1600. The area for emitting and decorating the second pattern 3120 on the 3102 is substantially the same as the area for displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600. As described above, in the imitation effect, since the areas in which the patterns are displayed are substantially the same, it is difficult to grasp which of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

Further, in the imitation effect, the second pattern 3120 that is light-emittingly decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a that is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed, but each display is performed. The time is the same for both. Further, during the execution of the imitation effect, a predetermined sound is output from the speaker at the timing of displaying each of the second pattern 3120 and the imitation picture 1600a, or around the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600. A complex effect is executed in which the provided members are operated in a predetermined operation mode (for example, lighting of a lamp provided on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 or operation of a movable member). Even at the timing of displaying the pattern of, a common effect is executed as a complex effect. However, at the timing of displaying each of the second pattern 3120 and the imitation pattern 1600a, although the lamps provided on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are turned on, their emission colors are turned on in different colors. You may. As described above, in the imitation effect, there is no difference in effect between the case where the second pattern 3120 is light-emitting and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the case where the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp which of the light plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

Next, a specific example of the effect of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 at the time of executing the imitation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 230. FIG. 230 is a specific example of the effect of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 when the imitation effect is executed. In FIG. 230, the second pattern 3120 is shown by a pattern consisting of the characters "CHANGE!".

In FIG. 230, a variation pattern for executing either a chance reach effect as the first reach effect or a lucky reach effect as the second reach effect is determined, and the imitation effect is performed before the reach effect is executed. The case of execution will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 230 (A), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600. After that, as shown in FIG. 230 (B), when the imitation effect is started, the light guide plate 3102 has a second pattern 3120 with the characters "CHANGE!" In the center and an effect pattern around it for a predetermined time ( For example, less than 1 second), it is decorated with light emission in red. Then, as shown in FIG. 230 (C), when the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off, the display area of the effect display device 1600 has an imitation pattern 1600a with the characters "LUCKY!" In the center. The effect pattern is displayed in blue for a predetermined time (for example, less than 1 second) in the surrounding area. The display time for displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is the same as the display time for displaying the second pattern 3120 on the light guide plate 3102.

As described above, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the second pattern 3120 in red, while the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600. As described above, in the imitation effect, the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 are used depending on whether the second pattern 3120 is light-emittingly decorated on the light guide plate 3102 or the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Although it is difficult to grasp which of the two is used, it is possible to grasp which of the second pattern 3120 and the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed from the display color.

Further, in the imitation effect, the second pattern 3120 that is light-emittingly decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately repeated a plurality of times (for example, 5 times). Although it is displayed, after repeating it a plurality of times, as shown in FIG. 230 (D), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, and a black image without displaying any information is displayed. There is. As a result, as a result of the imitation effect, it is possible to pay attention to which of the second pattern 3120, which is light-emittingly decorated on the light guide plate 3102, and the imitation pattern 1600a, which is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, is stopped. it can.

Then, as shown in FIG. 230 (E), when the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out and then the second pattern 3120 is light-emitting-decorated on the light guide plate 3102, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner to reach. After forming the above, the chance reach effect (first reach effect) is advanced as the reach effect corresponding to the second pattern 3120. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 230 (F), when the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600 after the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. After forming the reach with, the lucky reach production (second reach production) is proceeded as the reach production corresponding to the imitation pattern 1600a. Further, the display time for displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in FIG. 230 (F) is the same as the display time for displaying the second pattern 3120 on the light guide plate 3102 in FIG. 230 (E). (For example, 3 seconds).

In the present embodiment, the characters and the effect picture are displayed by the second picture 3120 that is light-emittingly decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation picture 1600a that is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It suffices to display a pattern having a similar visual mode so that the elements of the above are matched. For example, a pattern of a character having a similar style may be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, after blacking out the display area of the effect display device 1600, the second pattern 3120 is light-emittingly decorated on the light guide plate 3102, and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. However, after blacking out the display area of the effect display device 1600, neither the second pattern 3120 nor the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed, and the first reach effect and the second reach effect and the second pattern 1600a are stopped. You may set a pattern that does not progress to any of the reach effects. In such a case, as a result of the imitation effect, it is possible to pay more attention to what kind of result is notified after blacking out the display area of the effect display device 1600.

Further, in the present embodiment, the second pattern of the second pattern 3120 that is light-emittingly decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the start of the imitation effect. Although it starts from the light emitting decoration of 3120, a pattern starting from the display of the imitation pattern 1600a may be set. Further, in the imitation effect, the second pattern 3120 is light-emitting and decorated in red on the light guide plate 3102, while the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but any part or all of them are displayed. For the time of color development, a pattern to be executed in a different color may be set. In this way, when the imitation effect is executed with a display or color different from the usual one, the light guide plate 3102 is light-emittingly decorated by setting the jackpot expectation for the variable display of the decorative symbol to be high. It is possible to pay attention not only to which of the two patterns 3120 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is stopped, but also the content of the effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the imitation effect is executed, the second pattern 3120 that is light-emittingly decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed. However, in addition to the imitation effect, the effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed. For example, as an effect other than the imitation effect using the light guide plate 3102, an effect of suddenly emitting and decorating the second pattern 3120 on the light guide plate 3102 is executed without displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600. can do.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the imitation effect, the second pattern 3120 is light-emitting and decorated in red on the light guide plate 3102, while the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600. In addition to such a pattern, a pattern in which the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in red in the display area of the effect display device 1600, while the second pattern 3120 is light-emitting and decorated in blue on the light guide plate 3102 so as to invert the color development. It is set. In these patterns, red color is used to indicate that the expectation of a big hit is higher than that of blue. For example, when the second pattern 3120 is light-emitting decorated with red on the light guide plate 3102, it is a big hit rather than light-emitting decoration with blue. It notifies that the degree of expectation is high, and similarly, when the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in red in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is notified that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than that of displaying in blue. As described above, in the imitation effect, since it is possible to display both the second pattern 3120 and the imitation pattern 1600a in blue and red, either the light guide plate 3102 or the effect display device 1600. It can be difficult to grasp whether or not you are using.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the imitation effect, the second pattern 3120 that is light-emittingly decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed, and finally. By displaying one of the patterns, the reach effect to be executed after that is suggested, but by executing the imitation effect as the above-mentioned setting suggestion effect and finally displaying one of the patterns. , May be configured to suggest a set value. In such a configuration, for example, as a high setting suggestion effect among the setting suggestion effects, an imitation effect of finally displaying the second pattern 3120 in red on the light guide plate 3102 is executed, and as a low setting suggestion effect, the final The imitation effect of displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be executed. As a result, when the light guide plate 3102 is finally decorated with the second pattern 3120 in red when the imitation effect is executed, the player's expectation for the high set value (set value 6) can be increased.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the light guide plate 3102, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 arranged above the light guide plate 3102 can be made to emit light to illuminate and decorate the first pattern 3110. On the other hand, it is possible to make the second pattern 3120 emit light by emitting light of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the second pattern substrate 3104 arranged on the left side of the front view. The brightness of the LED can be changed by the player operating the pressing operation unit 303. That is, when the brightness of the plurality of LEDs is set to be weak, the brightness of the plurality of LEDs is increased while the second pattern 3120, which is light-emittingly decorated on the light guide plate 3102, has a dark display mode. When set, the second pattern 3120, which is light-emittingly decorated on the light guide plate 3102, has a bright display mode. Then, in the imitation effect, when the second pattern 3120 luminescently decorated on the light guide plate 3102 is in a dark display mode, the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a dark display mode. On the other hand, when the second pattern 3120 luminescently decorated on the light guide plate 3102 is in a bright display mode, the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a bright display mode. As described above, in the imitation effect, since the effect is executed so that the brightness corresponds to both the second pattern 3120 and the copy pattern 1600a, any of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600. It can be difficult to grasp whether or not you are using. When adjusting the brightness, when the player operates the pressing operation unit 303, the settings of both the brightness of the plurality of LEDs for the light guide plate 3102 and the brightness of the backlight of the effect display device 1600 are changed. May be good.

[20. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, some of the various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 231 to 233. FIG. 231 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and FIGS. 232 and 233 show the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board of FIG. 231 to the peripheral control board. It is a table.

[20-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 231 to 233, the status indicating the type of the command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and It is composed of a mode showing a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 231 to 233, the various commands are related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect, the special figure 2 synchronization effect, the jackpot, the power-on, the normal figure synchronization effect, the normal electric function effect, and the notification display. , Status display, and others.

[20-1-1. Special figure 1 Synchronized production related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002, and the classification is as shown in FIG. 231 regarding the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. It is composed of commands named FIG. 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronization effect end, and change state designation. These various commands are assigned "A * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 1 synchronization effect start command (variation pattern command) instructs the start of the special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern (variation pattern) specified in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designation command is off, specific jackpot, The non-specific jackpot is designated, the special figure 1 synchronized effect end command is instructed to end the special figure 1 synchronized effect, and the variable state specification command is to instruct the game state. The gaming state is composed of a time saving state instructing that the time saving state is in effect, a probability changing state instructing that the time saving state is in effect, and a normal state instructing that neither the time saving state nor the probability changing state is present. Has been done.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a special figure 1 synchronization effect start command (variation pattern command) and a special figure 1 synchronization effect end command are provided for each set value of the pachinko machine 1. Then, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits the special figure 1 tuning effect start command (variation pattern command) and the special figure 1 tuning effect end command, the main control built-in RAM becomes a set value dedicated area in a specific area. Select and send the command according to the stored setting value. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the peripheral control board 1510 is subjected to different modes of the special figure 1 tuning effect start command (variation pattern command) and the special figure 1 tuning effect end command that have been conventionally used. The set value information of the pachinko machine 1 can be transmitted, the set value information is periodically transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped on the peripheral control board 1510 side. It has become like.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special diagram 1 synchronization effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state specification command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information is specified. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

[20-1-2. Special figure 2 synchronization production related]
The special figure 2 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402, and the classification is related to the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 as shown in FIG. 231. It is composed of commands named FIG. 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end. Each of these commands is assigned a status of "B * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 2 synchronization effect start command (variation pattern command) instructs the start of the special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern (variation pattern) specified in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designation command is off, specific jackpot, The non-specific jackpot is specified, and the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command instructs the end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect.

In addition, the special figure 2 synchronization effect start command (variation pattern command) and the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command are the pachinko machine 1 in the same manner as the special figure 1 synchronization effect start command (variation pattern command) and the special figure 1 synchronization effect end command. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits a special figure 2 tuning effect start command (variation pattern command) and a special figure 2 tuning effect end command, a specific area of the main control built-in RAM is provided for each set value of. Select and send the command according to the setting value stored in the dedicated area. It should be noted that the special figure 2 tuning effect (the variation effect of the second special symbol based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 2004) is mainly executed in the probabilistic state and the time saving state. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, by changing the modes of the special figure 2 synchronization effect start command (variation pattern command) and the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command that have been conventionally used, the pachinko machine can be mounted on the peripheral control board 1510. The set value information of the machine 1 can be transmitted, and the set value information is periodically transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 even in the probability change state and the time saving state, and the pachinko machine 1 on the peripheral control board 1510 side. It is possible to grasp the set value of.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 2 synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special diagram 2 synchronization effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[20-1-3. Big hit related]
As shown in FIG. 231, the categories related to big hits include big hit opening, big winning opening 1 open Nth display, big winning opening 1 closed display, big winning opening 1 count display, big hit ending, big hit symbol display, small hit opening. , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending commands. These various commands are assigned "C * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command indicates the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for opening the jackpot 1 is the start during the opening of the jackpot 1 in the 1st to 15th rounds (the Nth round of the jackpot 2005). (Opening or opening start) is instructed, and the large winning opening 1 closing display command instructs the large winning opening 1 closing start during the rounds (closing or closing start between the rounds of the large winning opening 2005). The large winning opening 1 count display command counts the number of balls of the game ball B with a count of 0 to 10 (the game ball entered into the large winning opening 2005 detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403). The number of balls of B) is transmitted, the jackpot ending command instructs the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command instructs the jackpot symbol information display.

In addition, the small hit opening command instructs the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command indicates the start of the small hit opening (during the opening of the accessory winning opening 2006 or the opening start at the time of the small hit). The small hit count display command is a small hit medium / large winning opening winning effect (when the game ball B that has entered the accessory winning opening 2006 during the small hit is detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 2513). The V-passing command is a V-passing command (the game ball B that has won the character winning opening 2006 during the small hit is the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008). The small hit ending command is instructed to start the small hit ending. The V passing command corresponding to each of the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 (the first V winning opening command when the game ball B is detected by the first V winning opening 2007, the second A second V winning opening command) may be provided when the game ball B is detected by the V winning opening 2008.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for opening the jackpot 1 is when the jackpot 1 is opened in the 1st to 15th rounds (the jackpot 2005). It is sent when the Nth round is opened), the big winning opening 1 closing display command is sent when the big winning opening 1 is closed (when the big winning opening 2005 is closed), and the big winning opening 1 count display command is large. Sent when the winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the large winning opening 1 (when the large winning opening 2005 is opened and when the game ball B that has entered the large winning opening 2005 is detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403). The jackpot ending command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is transmitted when the jackpot opening is opened (when the jackpot 2005 is opened).

In addition, the small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command is transmitted at the time of small hit opening (when the accessory winning opening 2006 is opened at the time of small hit), and the small hit count display is displayed. The command is transmitted at the time of winning the small hit medium / large winning opening (when the game ball B that has entered the accessory winning opening 2006 is detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 2513 during the small hit), and the small hit ending command is sent. Is transmitted at the start of the small hit ending. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[20-1-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 232, the power-on category is named as power-on state, power-on main control return destination, setting key ON operation command, setting key OFF operation command, setting change command, and error display command. It consists of the commands of. These various commands are assigned "D * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. The power-on state command is used for the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 232 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). Information instructing that when the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, also when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure. Including), it is composed of the above-mentioned information indicating which of the normal state, the time saving state, and the probable change state is to be restored, and the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

In addition, when creating so-called max type, middle type, and Amadeji type, for example, the model code of the pachinko machine is for the copyright of which work, and what kind of game specifications (for example, probability fluctuation). When it occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game that the probability fluctuation occurs when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). It specifies whether it is a specification (so-called ST machine, etc.), whether the pachinko machine has a plurality of set values, or whether the pachinko machine has only one set value. In other words, the information on the model code of the pachinko machine is to specify the series code to identify which type is the max type, middle type, or Amadeji type indicating the model type, and to specify the copyright of the work. In addition to the copyright code of the game specification and the game specification (for example, when a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the probability change in a state where the number of changes of the special symbol is limited. It is mainly composed of a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine) or the like in which the pachinko machine 1 is generated, and a setting value code for whether the pachinko machine 1 has one or more setting values.

The main control return destination command at power-on indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command at the time of power-on is mainly composed of information indicating the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2412 and information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2414 and the accessory winning port solenoid 2512.

The ON operation command of the setting key indicates to confirm the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the control built-in RAM, and the OFF operation command of the setting key is the main control built-in RAM. It indicates that the confirmation of the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area has been completed.

The setting change command indicates that the setting value has been changed and that the setting value has been changed. In this example, the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 by changing the mode of the setting change command, and the peripheral control board 1510 side pachinko by the received setting change command. The set value of the machine 1 can be grasped. The setting change command may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on regardless of whether or not the set value is changed. If the set value is not changed when the power is turned on, the current set value may be sent. A setting notification command may be sent to instruct. As a result, the latest set value can be grasped on the peripheral control board 1510 side every time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.

The error display command indicates that there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM.

These commands are transmitted when the power of the main control board is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure). Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when recovering from a power failure or a momentary power failure, the main control built-in RAM is transmitted by the reserved setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side game control main process. It is stored in the information storage area, and the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[20-1-5. Fuzu synchronization production related]
The normal-figure tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401, and as shown in FIG. 232, the normal-figure tuning effect of the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started. It is composed of commands named, normal pattern designation, normal figure synchronization production end, and state specification at the time of fluctuation. These various commands are assigned "E * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal-figure synchronization effect start command (general-figure variation pattern command) instructs the start of the general-figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern (general-figure variation pattern) specified in the mode. The jackpot and the non-specific jackpot are designated, the normal-figure synchronization effect end command indicates the end of the normal-figure synchronization effect, and the variable state specification command indicates the game state. As described above, the gaming state is composed of a time saving state instructing that the time saving state is in effect and a normal state instructing that the game state is not in the time saving state.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the normal symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the normal symbol fluctuation, the normal symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the normal symbol synchronization effect, and the normal symbol synchronization effect end command is transmitted. It is transmitted when the normal symbol fluctuation time elapses (when the normal symbol is confirmed), and the command for specifying the fluctuation state is sent immediately after the normal symbol winning information is specified. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[20-1-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The normal electric service production-related is related to the second start port door 2411 which is moved forward and backward by the drive of the start port solenoid 2412, and the classification includes the opening per normal figure, the normal electric open display, as shown in FIG. And it consists of a command named ending per solenoid. These various commands are assigned "F * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The opening command per normal drawing indicates the start of the opening per normal drawing, and the opening command for opening the normal power is to start during the opening of the normal power (the second start door 2411 protrudes forward by driving the starting solenoid solenoid 2412). (When the door is in a closed state or when it protrudes), and the ending command per normal figure indicates the start of the ending per normal figure.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per normal figure is transmitted at the start of the opening per normal figure, and the open power display command is sent when the normal power is opened (the second start door 2411 drives the start port solenoid 2412). (When projecting forward), the ending command per normal figure is transmitted at the start of the ending per normal figure. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[20-1-7. Others]
As shown in FIG. 233, the other categories include start opening prize, variation shortening operation end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, special symbol type look-ahead, variation pattern look-ahead 1, variation pattern look-ahead 2, variation pattern. It is composed of commands named look-ahead 3, variable pattern look-ahead 4, variable pattern look-ahead 5, variable pattern look-ahead 6, normal winning opening winning, and normal symbol memory. These various commands are assigned a status of "9 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The start opening winning command instructs the start of the starting opening winning effect, and starts the effect when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002. And, based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402, the start of the effect when the game ball B enters the second start port 2004 is instructed, respectively, and the variation shortening operation end designation command is , The state transition from the fluctuation shortening operation state to the fluctuation shortening non-operation state is instructed, and the special symbol 1 storage command is 0 to 4 special symbol 1 hold (the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002). Then, the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls (holding number) that have not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol, and the special symbol 2 storage command is the special symbol 2 hold 0. ~ 4 (the number of balls (holding number) that the game ball B has entered the second starting port 2004 and has not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400) is transmitted. The special symbol type look-ahead command is based on the special symbol 1 hold by pre-reading before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Pre-read the display result (missing symbol, jackpot symbol) by the first special symbol display and the special symbol 2 hold before being used for the variable display of the special symbol by the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. The display result (small hit symbol, big hit symbol) by the second special symbol display based on the special symbol 2 hold is specified respectively.

Further, the variable pattern look-ahead command 1 to the variable pattern look-ahead command 6 pre-reads the special symbol 1 before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. 1 The fluctuation pattern used in the variable display of the special symbol based on the hold, and the special symbol 2 hold is read ahead before being used for the variable display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. The fluctuation pattern used in the fluctuation display of the special symbol based on the symbol 2 hold is specified, and the fluctuation pattern look-ahead command 1 is a command corresponding to the setting value 1 of the pachinko machine 1, and the fluctuation pattern look-ahead command 2 Is a command according to the setting value 2 of the pachinko machine 1, the fluctuation pattern look-ahead command 3 is a command according to the setting value 3 of the pachinko machine 1, and the fluctuation pattern look-ahead command 4 corresponds to the setting value 4 of the pachinko machine 1. The variation pattern look-ahead command 5 is a command according to the setting value 5 of the pachinko machine 1, and the variation pattern look-ahead command 6 is a command according to the setting value 6 of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 described above (special figure 1 synchronization effect start command, special figure 1 synchronization effect end command, special figure 2 synchronization effect start command, special figure 2 synchronization effect end command, setting change command) ) Is an example, and other commands may be provided for each set value.

In addition, the normal winning opening winning command is for instructing the acceptance of the game ball B to the ordinary winning opening 2003, and the ordinary symbol memory command is 0 to 4 ordinary symbol holdings (the game ball B is accepted by the ordinary winning opening 2003). The normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls (holding number) that have not yet been used for the variable display of the normal symbol.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start port winning command is used at the time of starting port winning (when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002, or the first (When the game ball B enters the second start port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402), the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker 622 notify the fact mainly by voice. The command to specify the end of the fluctuation shortening operation is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is confirmed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been completed (after the out-of-order stop period has elapsed), and the special symbol 1 storage command is the special symbol. 1 When the number of reserved balls for operation changes (when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 and the number of reserved balls increases, or when the number of reserved balls increases, it is used to display the fluctuation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display. When the number of reserved balls is reduced), the special symbol 2 storage command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 operation changes (when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 and the number of reserved balls increases). , When the number of reservations is reduced by using it for variable display of special symbols on the second special symbol display), the special symbol type look-ahead command increases the number of special symbols 1 and 2 on hold. It is transmitted at the time (when the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and the number of holds increases), and the variation pattern look-ahead command is sent immediately after the special symbol type look-ahead command is sent. To. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

Further, the normal winning opening winning command is transmitted when the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2003, and the normal symbol memory command is sent when the number of balls on hold for normal symbol operation changes (the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2003). It is transmitted when the number of holds increases, or when the number of holds decreases when the number of holds is used to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

By the way, as described above, the start opening winning command is used when the starting opening is won (when the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, or when the second start is started. When the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the mouth sensor 2402), the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker 622 notify the fact mainly by voice. However, how the peripheral control board 1510 uses the start port winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment is designed to be used not only for voice notification from the top center speaker, top side speaker, and main body frame speaker 622, but also for monitoring the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start opening winning command, and the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker 622 do not notify by voice.

[21. Setting information error notification]
Next, among the various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 described above, a process of notifying when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal based on the command including the set value information of the pachinko machine 1. Will be described. FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the setting information determination process executed when a command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is received from the main control board 1310 in the reception command analysis process (step S1022).

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the setting information determination process, it determines whether or not the setting abnormality notification flag described later is set (step S1500). The setting abnormality notification flag is a flag that is set when a setting value abnormality is notified. If the setting abnormality notification flag is set in step S1500, it is determined that the setting value abnormality is being notified, and the process proceeds to step S1507. It is determined that the above is not notified, and the process proceeds to step S1501.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the received command is the above setting change command (step S1501), and if the setting change command is received, the pachinko machine indicated by the setting change command. The set value of the pachinko machine 1 is stored in the set information storage area based on the set value information of 1 (step S1502), and the process ends. As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 1 set when the power is turned on is stored in the setting information storage area, and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped on the peripheral control board 1510 side.

If the received command is not the above setting change command (in this example, the special figure 1 synchronization effect start command, the special figure 1 synchronization effect end command, the special figure 2 synchronization effect start command, the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command, and the variation pattern In (when the look-ahead command 1 to the variable pattern look-ahead command 6 is received), the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the received command and the set value information stored in the set information storage area in step S1502 match. Whether or not it is determined (step S1504), and if they do not match, an abnormality has occurred in the set value information (step S1504), and a setting abnormality notification flag indicating that the setting value information is being notified of an abnormality is set. It is set and the process ends (step S1505).

Further, when it is determined in step S1500 that the setting abnormality notification flag is set, that is, when the setting value information is being notified of an abnormality, the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the received command and the setting in step S1502 are set. It is determined whether or not the set value information stored in the information storage area matches (step S1507), and if they do not match, the abnormality notification of the set value information is continued.

On the other hand, if the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the received command and the set value information stored in the set information storage area in step S1502 match, the abnormality notification of the set value information is terminated (step S1508). , The setting abnormality notification flag is reset to end the process (step S1509).

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is set on the peripheral control board 1510 side by transmitting a command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. If there is an abnormality in the set value information indicated by the command including the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310, specifically, the normal process (set value change process) has not been performed. Nevertheless, when the set value is changed, it is determined that an error or fraud has occurred and a process for notifying the fact is executed. The game progresses even during the abnormality notification of the set value information, and the effect display device 1600 executes a variable effect or the like. Therefore, the abnormality notification of the set value information is performed so as not to interfere with the execution of the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600. Specifically, the control for displaying "setting abnormality!" Or the like in an area that does not overlap with the fluctuation effect executed in the effect display device 1600, and the variation effect executed in the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized. Control to semi-transparently display "setting error!" Etc. in the area that overlaps with the fluctuation effect, control to output "setting error has occurred" from the top center speaker, top side speaker, and main unit frame speaker 622, game board 5 Or a lamp, LED, or the like provided on the door frame 3 is executed by combining one or a plurality of controls such as light emission control in a predetermined mode (for example, blinking red).

When there is an abnormality in the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the abnormality notification of the setting value information is not executed or the abnormality notification of the setting value information is executed. At the same time, the effect suggesting the set value of the pachinko machine 1 to be described later is prevented from being executed, and the execution of this effect is stopped when the effect suggesting the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is executed. It may be. That is, the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310 is affected by noise or the like, and the setting value information indicated by this command changes to an abnormal value, or the peripheral control board 1510. The setting of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the command transmitted from the main control board 1310 because the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area has changed to an abnormal value due to the influence of noise or the like. When there is an abnormality in the consistency between the value information and the set value information stored in the setting information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510, if an effect suggesting the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is executed, the reliability of this effect is increased. descend. Therefore, in such a case, the effect suggesting the set value of the pachinko machine 1 may not be executed, and if it is being executed, this effect may be stopped to suppress the decrease in reliability. ..

Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 may determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the set value information. In this case, the game is stopped when an abnormality occurs in the set value information. It may be. For example, when the set value is changed in the set value change process, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is set to a reference area different from the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Also stores the changed setting value, and for reference and the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area at any timing (for example, the timing to send the special figure 1 synchronization effect start command and the special figure 2 synchronization effect start command) It may be determined whether or not the set value stored in the area matches, and if it is determined that the set value does not match, the game may be stopped and the abnormal notification of the set value information may be performed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, after the abnormality notification of the set value information is started, when the abnormality is resolved, the abnormality notification of the set value information is automatically terminated without any operation by the game clerk. Therefore, when the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310 is affected by noise or the like and the setting value information is changed to an abnormal value, it is stored in the setting information storage area. If an error notification of the set value information is started because it does not match the set value information, and then a command including the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310 is received in a normal state, the setting is immediately set. It is possible to end the abnormality notification of the value information.

In the above example, a setting change command indicating the changed setting value when the setting value is changed in the setting change process is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting value instructed by the command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 side. It is configured to determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the set value information according to whether or not it matches the stored set value, but whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the set value information. The method of determining whether or not is not limited to this. For example, when a command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is received from the main control board 1310, the setting value information indicated by the command and the setting indicated by the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 received last time. It may be determined whether or not the value and the value match, and if they do not match, an abnormality notification of the set value information may be performed. In this case, when the setting change command transmitted from the main control board 1310 is received based on the change of the set value, the abnormality notification of the set value information may not be performed.

Further, in connection with the fluctuation effect, a command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted a plurality of times from the main control board 1310, and when at least a part of the commands does not match, an abnormality notification of the setting value information is sent. You may do it. Specifically, it is indicated by the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the special figure 1 synchronization effect start command and the special figure 2 synchronization effect start command, the special figure 1 synchronization effect end command, and the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command. It may be determined whether or not the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 matches, and if they do not match, an abnormality notification of the set value information may be performed.

Further, in the above example, the special figure 1 synchronization effect start command, the special figure 1 synchronization effect end command, the special figure 2 synchronization effect start command, the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command, and the variation pattern look-ahead command are set values of the pachinko machine 1. Although the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 is shown for each, if the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 is notified from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. The command to be notified is provided separately from the special figure 1 synchronization effect start command, the special figure 1 synchronization effect end command, the special figure 2 synchronization effect start command, the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command, and the variation pattern look-ahead command, and is the main control. Whenever a command is transmitted from the board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, or when a specific command is transmitted, a command for notifying the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 may also be transmitted. For example, a setting notification command 1 to a setting notification command 6 for notifying the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is provided, and a setting notification command (setting value 1) corresponding to the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is provided from the main control board 1310 at an arbitrary timing. If this is the case, the setting notification command 1 may be transmitted, if the setting value is 2, the setting notification command 2 ... If the setting value is 6, the setting notification command 6) may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. With this configuration, it is not necessary to change the command design for each model (one with a plurality of setting values and one with only one setting value), and the labor of design can be saved.

Further, in this case, commands related to the effects (special figure synchronization effect, hold notice effect described later, etc.) executed by the effect display device 1600 (for example, special figure 1 synchronization effect start command, special figure 1 synchronization effect end command, etc.). Not only when the special figure 2 synchronization effect start command, the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command, and the variation pattern look-ahead command are transmitted, but also commands that are not related to the effect executed by the effect display device 1600 (for example, a normal winning opening winning command, etc.) ) Is also transmitted, and a command for notifying the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 is also transmitted, and the consistency between the setting value information indicated by the command and the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510. It may be determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the command. With this configuration, it becomes possible to frequently determine whether or not the set value information stored in the setting information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal, and avoid problems due to noise or the like. The accuracy of is further improved.

[22. Hold notice production]
Next, the hold notice production will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the first hold storage number changes based on the game ball B entering the first start port 2002, a command for instructing the first hold storage number (first hold). Based on the fact that the number designation commands 0 to 4) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 to display the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 and the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004. When the second hold storage number changes, a command (second hold number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 storage command 0 to 1)) for instructing the second hold storage number is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The second reserved storage number is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the game ball B has entered the first start port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002, and based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402. When the special symbol type look-ahead command and the variation pattern look-ahead command are received from the main control board 1310 based on the game ball B entering the second starting port 2004, the special symbol type look-ahead command and the variation pattern look-ahead command are received. The display mode of the first reserved storage 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved storage 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is changed according to the special lottery result in which the start of the suggestion is suspended based on the above. It is possible to execute a hold notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit at the time of executing the suggestion of.

In this example, the first hold storage number specified by the first hold number specification command transmitted from the main control board 1310 or the second hold storage number specified by the second hold number storage command, the variation pattern look-ahead command, and the special Peripheral control board 1510 according to each of the pre-judgment information indicated by the symbol type look-ahead command (loss, small hit, big hit, etc., which may be able to notify the type of big hit such as probabilistic big hit or normal big hit). Is provided with a hold notice determination table for determining the presence / absence of a hold notice and the type of hold notice pattern when the hold notice is executed.

Then, when the decision to execute the hold notice is made and the hold notice pattern type to be executed is decided, the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 are different from the usual ones. It is displayed in a display mode (in this example, a display color different from the usual one). In this example, the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a are usually displayed in white, which is the basic color, and when the hold notice is executed, they are displayed in blue, green, red, or a ladybug pattern. To do. Further, the display modes of the first reserved memory 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a are set so that the expectation of a big hit increases in the order of white → blue → green → red → ladybug pattern.

In addition, when the lottery result is specified as a big hit as the preliminary judgment information, a hold notice pattern that has a high expectation of a big hit (for example, red or ladybug pattern) is determined with a high probability as the final hold display mode, and in advance. When the lottery result is identified as a loss as the judgment information, the final hold display mode is determined by determining with a high probability a hold notice pattern in which the jackpot expectation is low (for example, blue) as the final hold display mode. When a mode with a high jackpot expectation is displayed as a mode, the player's expectation for the jackpot gaming state is increased.

In addition, the hold notice pattern is displayed every time a special lottery result is suggested (variation display of decorative symbols (variation display of special symbols)) during execution of the hold notice effect (every time the hold is exhausted). How the display mode of the first reserved storage 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved storage 1701a displayed on the device 1600 changes is set. In the hold notice pattern, the display modes of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 are in the reverse order of white → blue → green → red → ladybug pattern. It is set so that it does not change in order (that is, the jackpot expectation does not decrease), and every time a suggestion of a special lottery result (variation display of decorative symbols (variation display of special symbols)) is performed (holding is exhausted). The display mode of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained (the display mode does not change), or the mode has a high expectation of a big hit. Is set to. Therefore, even if the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d or the second hold memory 1701a is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a display mode with a low expectation of big hit, the suggestion of the special lottery result which is the execution target of the hold notice starts. Until this is done, there is a possibility that the mode of the hold display will change to a mode with a high expectation of a big hit, and the mode of the hold display can be paid attention to with expectation until the end.

Further, in the hold notice pattern, it is not always necessary to change the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a in the order of blue → green → red → ladybug pattern after displaying them in white (basic color). Starting from the display mode in the middle (for example, the first hold memory 1700c is displayed in red based on the fact that the game ball B has entered the first start port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002. ), The display mode changes to the next display mode without going through the display mode in the middle (for example, when the first hold memory 1700d is displayed in white, the suggestion of the special lottery result ends and the next special lottery result is displayed. When the first reserved memory 1700d is moved to the first reserved memory 1700c according to the start of, the white color changes to a ladybug pattern). Therefore, even if the display mode of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a changes (the number of holds) is small, the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the first hold memory 1701a and the first hold memory 1701a are displayed in a display mode with high expectation of big hit. (Ii) It is possible to display the hold memory 1701a. Further, even if the first reserved memory 1700a to 1700d or the second reserved memory 1701a is displayed in the display mode with low expectation of big hit, it is not possible to predict which display mode will be changed next, and the first The display modes of the reserved storage 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved storage 1701a can be expected to be noticed until the end.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the display mode of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a is different from the above hold notice, together with the hold notice effect suggesting the above-mentioned jackpot expectation. By changing to, it is possible to execute the set value hold suggestion effect that suggests the set value of the pachinko machine 1.

In this example, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the setting value holding suggestion effect and the set value hold suggestion effect according to the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 instructed by the fluctuation pattern look-ahead command transmitted from the main control board 1310. It is equipped with a set value hold suggestion judgment table for determining the set value hold suggestion pattern type. Then, a decision is made to execute the set value hold suggestion effect, and when the set value hold suggestion pattern type to be executed is determined, the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 are determined. Is displayed in a display mode different from the usual one (in this example, a shape different from the usual one).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 235 (A), when the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a are normally displayed as circles, which are the basic shapes, and the set value hold suggestion effect is executed. It is indicated by any of the square shown in the first reserved memory 1700c of FIG. 235 (B), the triangle shown in 1700c of FIG. 235 (C), and the star shown in 1701a of FIG. 235 (D). Further, in the display mode of the first reserved memory 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a, the degree of expectation for the set value of the pachinko machine 1 (the degree of expectation for the high set value) increases in the order of circle → square → triangle → star. Is set to.

Further, when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 5 or 6 based on the fluctuation pattern look-ahead command, the set value hold is a mode (for example, a star) with a high expectation for a high set value as the final hold display mode. When the suggestion pattern is determined with a high probability and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 3 or 4, the set value in which the expectation for the high set value is medium (for example, a triangle) as the final hold display mode. When the hold suggestion pattern is determined with a high probability and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 1 or 2, the set value is the mode in which the expectation for the high set value is the lowest (for example, a square) as the final hold display mode. By determining the hold suggestion pattern with a high probability, the player's expectation for the high setting value is increased when the mode with high expectation for the high setting value is displayed as the final hold display mode. There is.

In addition, in the set value hold suggestion pattern, every time the suggestion of the special lottery result (variation display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the special symbol)) is performed during the execution of the set value hold suggestion effect (every time the hold is exhausted). ), How the display mode of the first hold storage 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 changes is set. In the set value hold suggestion pattern, the display modes of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 are in the reverse order of circle → square → triangle → star. It is set so that it does not change (that is, the degree of expectation for a high setting value does not decrease), and every time a suggestion of a special lottery result (variation display of decorative symbols (variation display of special symbols)) is performed (holding is exhausted). The display mode of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained (the display mode does not change), or the degree of expectation for a high set value is maintained. It is set to have a high aspect. Therefore, even if the first hold storage 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a are displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a display mode in which the degree of expectation for a high set value is low, the special setting value hold suggestion effect is executed. Until the suggestion of the lottery result is started, there is a possibility that the mode of the hold display will change to the mode with high expectation for the high setting value, and it is possible to pay attention to the mode of the hold display with expectation until the end. it can.

Further, in the set value hold suggestion pattern, it is not always necessary to change the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a in the order of square → triangle → star after displaying them as circles (basic shape). Starting from the display mode (for example, the first hold memory 1700d is displayed as a square based on the fact that the game ball B has entered the first start port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002). The display mode changes to the next display mode without going through the display mode in the middle (for example, when the first reserved memory 1700d is displayed in a square, the suggestion of the special lottery result ends and the next special lottery result starts. When the first hold memory 1700d is moved to the first hold memory 1700c, it changes from a square to a star). Therefore, even if the display mode of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a changes (the number of holds) is small, the first hold memory 1700a to 1700a to the display mode with high expectation for a high set value. It is possible to display 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a. Further, even if the first reserved storage 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved storage 1701a are displayed in the display mode with low expectation for the high set value, it is not possible to predict which display mode will be changed next. , The display modes of the first reserved memory 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a can be noticed with expectation until the end.

Further, since the hold notice pattern of the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion pattern of the set value hold suggestion effect are determined separately, the second is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the hold notice pattern of the hold notice effect. The display mode of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a is changed to a mode having a high degree of expectation for a high set value, and is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the set value hold suggestion pattern of the set value hold suggestion effect. When the display mode of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d or the second hold memory 1701a is changed to a mode having a high degree of expectation for a high set value, the display mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the hold notice pattern of the hold notice effect. While changing the display mode of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a to a mode having a high degree of expectation for a high set value, the effect display device 1600 is based on the set value hold suggestion pattern of the set value hold suggestion effect. When the display mode of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed in is maintained, and the first hold memory 1700a to displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the hold notice pattern of the hold notice effect. While maintaining the display mode of the 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a, the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the set value hold suggestion pattern of the set value hold suggestion effect. There is a case where the display mode of is changed to a mode in which the degree of expectation for a high set value is high.

For example, when the display mode of the hold notice effect is "white" and the display mode of the set value hold suggestion effect is "circle", the hold is digested and displayed on the effect display device 1600, such as the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d or the first. (Ii) When moving the hold memory 1701a, the display mode "white" of the hold notice effect is changed to "red" and the display mode "circle" of the set value hold suggestion effect is changed to "square" (color and shape). (Change both), when the display mode of the hold notice effect is "red" and the display mode of the set value hold suggestion effect is "circle", the hold is digested and displayed on the effect display device 1600. When moving ~ 1700d or the second hold memory 1701a, the display mode "red" of the hold notice effect is maintained without being changed, while the display mode "circle" of the set value hold suggestion effect is changed to "square". (While maintaining the color and changing the shape), when the display mode of the hold notice effect is "white" and the display mode of the set value hold suggestion effect is "triangle", the hold is digested and displayed on the effect display device 1600. When moving the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d or the second hold memory 1701a, the display mode "white" of the hold notice effect is changed to "blue", while the display mode "triangle" of the set value hold suggestion effect is changed. It may be maintained without change (change the color to maintain the shape).

That is, in this example, the process of determining the hold notice pattern of the hold notice effect and the process of determining the set value hold suggestion pattern of the set value hold suggestion effect are performed separately, and the suggestion of the special lottery result is suggested based on each change pattern ( Display of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 each time the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) is performed (every time the hold is exhausted). The mode is maintained (the display mode is not changed), or the mode is changed to a mode in which the expectation for a high set value is high.

In addition, the final display mode of the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect is separately determined, and the change scenario of the display mode of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a according to the determination result is shown. One of a plurality of types of change patterns may be executed.

Further, the start timing of the set value hold suggestion effect (timing at which the display mode is displayed in a mode different from the usual one) is first based on the fact that the game ball B is accepted at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. Not limited to the timing of displaying the hold memory 1700a to 1700d or the second hold memory 1701a, the timing after that (the timing after displaying in the basic shape, for example, the suggestion of the special lottery result is completed and the next special lottery result is started. Correspondingly, it is also started when the first reserved storages 1700b to d are moved to the first reserved storages 1700a to c). As a result, even if the set value hold suggestion effect is not executed, the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a can be noticed with expectation until the end.

The execution frequency of the set value hold suggestion effect is set lower than that of the hold notice effect. That is, the hold notice effect is executed based on the prior determination information, and when the special lottery result is suggested based on the Tobetsu lottery result based on the hold memory executing the hold notice effect, the content of the hold notice effect is reset. On the other hand, since the content of the set value hold suggestion effect continues without being reset until the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed, the execution frequency of the set value hold suggestion effect is lower than that of the hold notice effect. By setting, it is prevented that the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified.

Further, as shown in the first hold storage 1700c of FIGS. 235 (A) and 235 (B) and the second hold storage 1701a of FIG. 235 (D), the set value hold suggestion effect is executed at the same time as the hold notice effect. In addition, as shown in the first hold storage 1700c of FIG. 235 (C), the set value hold suggestion effect may be executed independently. The hold notice pattern may include a change pattern of the display mode of the set value hold suggestion effect. In this case, the hold notice determination table may be further provided for each set value of the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 236, the pachinko machine 1 of this example includes a plurality of types of image data in which the display mode of the hold notice effect and the display mode of the set value hold suggestion effect are combined, and the hold notice of the hold notice effect is provided. The target hold storage is displayed based on the image data corresponding to both the pattern and the set value hold suggestion pattern of the set value hold suggestion effect. That is, after determining the color as the display mode of the hold notice effect of the target memory and the shape as the display mode of the set value hold suggestion effect, a display mode in which these are combined is generated, and the combined display mode is generated. Is displayed as a hold memory.

Specifically, in the example of FIG. 236 (A) in which only the hold notice effect is executed and the set value hold suggestion effect is not executed, the first hold memory 1700a and 1700b are referred to as “composite pattern white 1”. Is displayed based on the image data of "composite pattern blue 1", and the first hold storage 1700c is displayed based on the image data of "composite pattern blue 1". Further, in the example of FIG. 236 (B) in which the hold memory in which both the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect are executed is displayed, the first hold memory 1700a and 1700b are the image data of the “composite pattern white 1”. The first hold storage 1700c is displayed based on the image data of the “composite pattern blue 2”. Further, in the example of FIG. 236 (C) in which the hold storage in which only the hold notice effect is executed and the hold memory in which only the set value hold suggestion effect is executed are displayed, the first hold memory 1700a is referred to as a “composite pattern”. Displayed based on the image data of "Blue 1", the first reserved memory 1700b is displayed based on the image data of "Composite pattern white 1", and the first reserved memory 1700c is displayed based on the image data of "Composite pattern white 3". Is displayed.

Further, also in the second hold memory 1701a, the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect are executed, and the hold memory in which both the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect are executed is displayed. FIG. 236 (D). In the example of, the second hold storage 1701a is displayed based on the image data of the “composite pattern red 4”.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a are displayed and controlled in a mode different from the usual mode, thereby suggesting the jackpot expectation degree and the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to execute a set value hold suggestion effect that suggests a set value. The hold notice effect is executed based on the prior determination information, while the set value hold suggestion effect is not based on the prior determination information. That is, the hold notice effect can be executed by acquiring the reserved special lottery result in advance, while the set value hold suggestion effect can be executed without acquiring the hold special lottery result in advance. is there.

It should be noted that the special lottery results for which the start of the suggestion is suspended are not limited to those displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the first reserved memory 1700a to 1700d or the second reserved memory 1701a, and the special lottery for which the suggestion is being executed is considered to be in progress. The hold memory according to the result may also be displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the hold memory during execution. In this case, the final display mode in the above-mentioned hold notice effect or set value hold suggestion effect may be displayed in the running hold memory, and by configuring in this way, the suggestion of the special lottery result can be obtained. Since it is possible to pay attention to the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect until the time when the game is executed, the big hit and the high set value can be expected, so that the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

Further, in the above example, the display mode of the hold storage is changed as the display mode of the hold notice effect, and the shape of the hold memory is changed as the display mode of the set value hold suggestion effect. It is not limited to the above as long as it can be determined that it is being executed. For example, as a display mode of the hold notice effect, the display color of the hold notice effect is changed, and as a display mode of the set value hold suggestion effect, a numerical value or a hold memory corresponding to a set value suggested without changing the shape of the target hold memory. Additional information such as the effect mode (glittering effect or flame effect) around the object may be displayed in association with the hold memory.

Further, when displaying the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d based on the fact that the game ball B has entered the first starting port 2002, or based on the fact that the game ball B has entered the second starting port 2004, the second When displaying the hold memory 1701a, when updating and displaying the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a based on the fact that the hold has been exhausted (the first hold memory 1700b to 1700d is the first hold memory 1700a to 1700a ~. A sound effect may be output to suggest the set value of the pachinko machine 1 when moving to 1700c or when moving the first hold memory 1700a or the second hold memory 1701a to the running hold memory). .. For example, when suggesting that the set value is "1", a sound effect (for example, "pip") corresponding to the set value "1" is output from a plurality of types of sound effects, and the set value is "2". When suggesting that, a sound effect corresponding to the set value "2" (for example, "pip") is output from a plurality of types of sound effects, and ... It is suggested that the set value is "5". If you want to output a sound effect (for example, "Pip Pip Pip") according to the set value "5" among multiple types of sound effects, and if you suggest that the set value is "6", multiple types of effects Of the sounds, a sound effect (for example, "Pampakapan") corresponding to the set value "6" may be output.

In addition, when the hold notice effect or the set value hold suggestion effect is executed, the jackpot expectation degree and the pachinko machine 1 are set according to the operations of the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300. The value may be suggested. In this case, after displaying the operation instruction image instructing the operation of the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 on the effect display device 1600. The jackpot expectation degree and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 may be suggested according to the operation of the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300. In addition, the operation instruction image may be shared between the case of maintaining the jackpot expectation and the suggested setting value and the case of further increasing the jackpot expectation and the suggested setting value, whereby the hold notice effect and the setting value may be shared. It becomes impossible to determine whether or not the jackpot expectation and the suggested set value can be increased by the effect (the effect of displaying the operation instruction image) that is a precursor to the execution of the hold suggestion effect, and the contact of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300. It is possible to induce the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to be positively operated.

In addition, it may be possible to select the presence / absence of the hold notice effect and the presence / absence of the set value hold suggestion effect during the demonstration (demonstration effect performed while waiting for the player). As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that suits the taste of the player, and even for a player who does not want to suggest the jackpot expectation level or the set value of the pachinko machine 1, the hold notice effect or the set value hold suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the suggestion of the jackpot expectation and the set value of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, a demonstration (a player waiting state) will be given to explain the mode suggested by the set value hold suggestion effect (such as a mode that suggests the set value of the pachinko machine 1 and not a mode that suggests the jackpot expectation). It may be executed at the time of executing (demo production) or suggestion of the special lottery result (during variable display of decorative symbols). As a result, it is possible to prevent the expectation for the jackpot from being improved due to being mistaken for the jackpot expectation when the set value hold suggestion effect is executed.

Further, during the execution of the time saving state or the probabilistic change state, the pre-judgment instructed by the variation pattern look-ahead command and the special symbol type look-ahead command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002. Preliminary determination instructed by the variable pattern look-ahead command and the special symbol type look-ahead command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 without executing the hold notice effect based on the information. It may be possible to execute only the hold notice effect based on the information. In addition, the set value is held in relation to the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the entry of the game ball B into the first start port 2002 even during the execution of the time saving state or the probability change state. The suggestion effect may be executed. As a result, even when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 during the time saving state or the probability change state, it is possible to have expectations for the set value hold suggestion effect.

[23. Set value continuous suggestion effect]
Next, the set value continuous suggestion effect will be described. In this example, the set value continuous suggestion effect suggesting the set value of the pachinko machine 1 can be executed over a plurality of times of variable display of the decorative symbol. The variation display of the decorative symbol is not limited to one executed once for one variation display of the special symbol, but is executed multiple times for one variation display of the special symbol (so-called pseudo-continuous). Fluctuation) is also included.

In this example, the peripheral control board 1510 continuously suggests the set values according to the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 instructed by the special figure 1 tuning effect start command and the special figure 2 tuning effect start command transmitted from the main control board 1310. Presence / absence of effect and set value Set value for executing continuous suggestion effect The set value continuous suggestion effect table for determining the continuous suggestion effect pattern type is provided. Then, when a decision is made to execute the set value continuous suggestion effect and the type of the set value continuous suggestion effect pattern to be executed is determined, the set value is set every time the effect display device 1600 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Any one of a plurality of setting suggestion characters 1702 having different display modes is caused to appear.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 237 (A), when the effect display device 1600 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, "1" is drawn on the head as the setting suggestion character 1702 according to the set value 1. The setting suggestion character 1702 is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 237 (C), when the next variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the effect display device 1600, "3" is drawn on the head as the setting suggestion character 1702 according to the set value 3. The setting suggestion character 1702 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 237 (E), when the next variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the effect display device 1600, the setting suggestion character 1702 is set according to the setting value 4. The setting suggestion character 1702 with "4" drawn on the head is displayed.

Further, when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as "6" based on the special figure 1 synchronization effect start command and the special figure 2 synchronization effect start command, the setting suggestion according to the setting value "6" is used as the final mode. The setting value continuous suggestion effect pattern to be the character 1702 is determined with a high probability, and when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 1, the setting is set to be the setting suggestion character 1702 according to the set value "1" as the final mode. By determining the value continuous suggestion effect pattern with a high probability, when the setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to the high setting value is displayed as the mode of the final setting suggestion character 1702, the player's expectation for the high setting value. The degree is increasing.

Further, in the set value continuous suggestion effect pattern, how is the display mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 each time the variable display of the decorative symbol is started during the execution of the set value continuous suggestion effect? It is set whether it changes to. In the set value continuous suggestion effect pattern, the display mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 does not change in the reverse order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 ( That is, it is set so that the degree of expectation for a high set value does not decrease), and the display mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained every time the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. (The display mode does not change), or the mode is set according to the high setting value. Therefore, even if the setting suggestion character 1702 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a display mode corresponding to the low setting value, the mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 is a high setting value until the set value continuous suggestion effect is completed. There is a possibility that the mode will change according to the above, and the mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 can be paid attention to with expectation until the end.

Further, in the set value continuous suggestion effect pattern, it is not always necessary to change the setting suggestion character 1702 in the order of 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 after displaying the setting suggestion character 1702 in the mode corresponding to the set value “1”. (For example, the setting value continuous suggestion effect is started and the setting suggestion character 1702 is first displayed with the set value "2"), and the display mode is changed to the next display mode without going through the display mode in the middle. (For example, when the setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to the setting value "2" is displayed, the setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to "4" is displayed according to the start of the next variation display of the decorative symbol. It is also set to put out). Therefore, even if the setting suggestion character 1702 is displayed in the display mode corresponding to the low setting value, it is not possible to predict which display mode will be changed next, and the display mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 cannot be predicted. Can be noticed with expectation until the end.

The execution frequency of the set value continuous suggestion effect is set lower than that of the hold notice effect as in the above set value hold suggestion effect. That is, the hold notice effect is executed based on the prior determination information, and when the special lottery result is suggested based on the Tobetsu lottery result based on the hold memory executing the hold notice effect, the content of the hold notice effect is reset. On the other hand, since the content of the set value continuous suggestion effect continues without being reset until the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed, the execution frequency of the set value continuous suggestion effect is lower than that of the hold notice effect. By setting, it is prevented that the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the setting value continuous suggestion effect suggesting the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is executed by displaying the setting suggestion character 1702 over a plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol. It is supposed to get. Since the set value continuous suggestion effect is not based on the prior determination information like the set value hold suggestion effect, it can be executed without acquiring the special lottery result in advance.

The set value continuous suggestion effect for displaying the setting suggestion character 1702 can be executed beyond the upper limit of the number of reserved memories (the upper limit of the first reserved memory is 4 and the upper limit of the second reserved memory is 1). (For example, over 5 variations of the decorative pattern). In addition, when the number of reserved memories becomes 0 during the execution of the set value continuous suggestion effect, the decorative symbol changes based on the game ball B entering the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. When the display is started, the set value continuous suggestion effect may be restarted so that the setting suggestion character 1702 is displayed. In this case, the setting suggestion character 1702 is displayed until the set value continuous suggestion effect is restarted. The effect display device 1600 may continue to display. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the set value continuous suggestion effect is continued and the game can be continued, and even if the game is quit, the new player can be made to continue the set value continuous suggestion effect. You can make them interested in playing with the game machine.

Further, the set value continuous suggestion effect may be executed in parallel with the set value hold suggestion effect. As a result, it is possible to provide a new game in which the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is estimated from both the effect mode in the set value hold suggestion effect and the effect mode in the set value continuous suggestion effect. Further, a plurality of types of setting suggestion characters 1702 may be provided so that any setting suggestion character 1702 is displayed according to the degree of expectation of a big hit.

[24. Use of surplus settings other than jackpot probability and small hit probability]
In the present embodiment, the set value (set value 1 to 6) can be changed by pressing the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b in a state where the setting of the set value can be changed. Yes, as the table used in the special lottery or the like (hit determination table, big hit symbol determination table, small hit symbol determination table, etc.), a table corresponding to the determined set value is used. In the above-described embodiment, the tables corresponding to the respective set values are displayed according to the "big hit probability", "small hit probability", "small hit type", "normal symbol hit probability", and "normal symbol hit type". The combination of the "opening and closing pattern of the second starting port" is set differently, but as another example, even though the "big hit probability" and "small hit probability" are the same set values, the "big hit probability" and "small hit probability" are set. As information other than the "hit probability", the fraud monitoring system may be set differently.

As described above, in the fraud detection process of step S112, various frauds are monitored. Specifically, various winning openings and gates (gates) provided in the game board 5 by changing the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a formed in the game board 5 by bringing a magnet close to the pachinko machine 1 ) Is provided, and the main control MPU1310a determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010, and monitors the fraudulent activity by the magnet. ing. In addition, by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 is vibrated to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 to become the game board 5. By providing a vibration sensor 3003 that detects fraudulent activity such as entering a ball into various winning openings or gates provided, the main control MPU 1310a determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor 3003. However, it monitors fraudulent activities caused by vibration. In this example, as a fraud monitoring system, the detection sensitivity of the detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) for detecting fraud is changed, or the detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) for detecting fraud is changed. ) Is possible to change the part (target area) that is judged to be fraudulent, or to change the conditions for canceling the error state when it is judged to be fraudulent and shifts to an error state. There is.

As shown in FIG. 238, in this example, the "big hit probability", the "small hit probability", and the "fraud monitoring system" are set to the set values 1 to 3 and the set values 1'to 3', respectively. Correspondingly set.

Specifically, as the jackpot probability (the ratio of the jackpot judgment value indicating that the jackpot was won in the hit judgment table), the set value 1 and the set value 1'are "1/319", the set value 2 and the set value. "1/309" is set for 2', and "1/299" is set for the set value 3 and the set value 3'. In this example, the set values 1 to 3 and the set values 1'to 3'are set so that the higher the set value, the higher the jackpot probability.

Further, as the small hit probability (the ratio of the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit was won in the hit judgment table), in the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol, the set values 1 to 3 and the set value 1 While "1/100" is set for each of "~ 3", in the table used for the special lottery of the second special symbol, the set values 1 to 3 and the set values 1'to 3'are respectively set. Is set to "50/100". The set values 1 to 3 and the set values 1'to 3'may be set so that the higher the set value, the higher the small hit probability.

Further, as a fraud monitoring system, "fraud monitoring A" is set in the set values 1 to 3 and "fraud monitoring B" is set in the set values 1'to 3'. In this example, "fraud monitoring A" is set so that the monitoring system is strengthened more than "fraud monitoring B".

In this example, the "big hit probability" and "small hit probability" are the same set values for each of the set value 1 and the set value 1', the set value 2 and the set value 2', and the set value 3 and the set value 3'. However, the fraud monitoring system is set to either "fraud monitoring A" or "fraud monitoring B". For example, in the setting change board 1311 provided with the setting key switch 1311a or the like, when it is possible to set 6 setting values, if it is necessary to set only 3 types of "big hit probability", 3 types In addition to the three set values corresponding to the "big hit probability" of, three surplus set values will be generated. In this way, when the setting change board 1311 capable of setting 6 setting values is also diverted to another game machine, a surplus setting value may be generated, but as in this example, the surplus setting By using the value to change the monitoring system for fraudulent activity, the surplus setting value can be effectively used and the change in the program can be minimized.

As a display mode of the selected setting value at the time of the operation related to the setting change, in the settings 1 to 3, "1", "2", and "3" are displayed on the setting display 1310g composed of the 7-segment LED display alone. At the same time, the 7-segment LED is displayed so as to blink normally, whereas in the settings 1'to 3', "1", "2", and "3" are displayed on the setting display 1310 g, and the 7-segment LED is displayed. The segment LED is displayed so as to blink at high speed (blinking faster than settings 1 to 3). Thereby, when the operator changes the setting of the set value, it is possible to clearly distinguish whether the set value being changed is the setting 1 to 3 or the setting 1'to 3'. However, when the set value is determined after changing the setting of the set value, the 7-segment LED is normally blinking or high-speed in both of the settings 1 to 3 and the settings 1'to 3'as the display mode of the set value. It stops blinking and is displayed with normal lighting. Therefore, when the operator determines the set value after changing the setting, it is unclear whether the set value is set 1 to 3 or set 1'to 3'.

Further, as another example of the above, regarding the display mode of the selected set value at the time of the operation related to the setting change, in the settings 1 to 3, the setting display 1310 g composed of the 7-segment LED display alone is set to "1" and "2". "3" is displayed, whereas in the settings 1'to 3', "1." "2." "3." is displayed on the setting display 1310g, as compared with the settings 1 to 3. You may add dots. In the case of such another example, even if the 7-segment LED is normally blinked during the change, it is clearly distinguished whether the setting value being changed is the setting 1 to 3 or the setting 1'to 3'. be able to. Further, when the set value is determined after changing the setting of the set value, the determined set value is set as the display mode of the set value even if the normal blinking of the 7-segment LED is terminated and the LED is normally lit. It is possible to clearly distinguish whether the setting is ~ 3 or the setting 1'to 3'.

Next, as specific monitoring systems of "fraud monitoring A" and "fraud monitoring B", the first specific example to the fifth specific example can be mentioned. In this example, as "fraud monitoring A" and "fraud monitoring B", any one or more of the first specific example to the fifth specific example may be executed. First, as a first specific example, a case where the detection sensitivities of the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) for detecting fraudulent activity are different will be described below.

As a first specific example, in "fraud monitoring A", the detection sensitivity of the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) for detecting fraudulent activity is increased, whereas in "fraudulent monitoring B", fraudulent activity is detected. The detection sensitivity of the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) to be detected is lowered. When the detection sensor that detects fraudulent activity detects excessively due to individual differences in the pachinko machine 1 or the installation location in the hall, selecting "fraudulent monitoring B" prevents the excessive detection. be able to. On the other hand, when the detection by the detection sensor that detects fraudulent activity is dull, it is possible to prevent the dull detection by selecting "fraudulent monitoring A". Further, when it is desired to strengthen the countermeasures against the magnet goto and the vibration goto, it is possible to strengthen the monitoring of the cheating by the magnet goto and the vibration goto by selecting "Cheating A".

In "fraud monitoring A", when a detection signal is input from a detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) that detects fraudulent activity, the time for which the detection signal is input is short, or the detection signal. Even if the number of times the detection signal is input is small, it is judged to be fraudulent, whereas in "fraud monitoring B", the detection signal is input for a long time or the detection signal is input the number of times. If there are many cases, it may be determined that the act is fraudulent. Even in such a case, the same effect as described above can be obtained when the detection sensitivity of the detection sensor for detecting fraudulent activity is different.

Next, as a second specific example, a case where the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) for detecting fraudulent activity have different parts (target areas) for determining fraudulent activity will be described below.

In this example, as the magnetic sensor 2010 for detecting fraudulent activity by a magnet, a setting operation unit capable of detecting the generation of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5. A magnetic sensor and a game area magnetic sensor capable of detecting the generation of magnetism in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5 are provided. Then, depending on the magnetic sensor of the setting operation unit, it is monitored whether the magnet approaches the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided, and the setting is set by a person other than the person who changes the setting of the set value or displays the confirmation. It monitors fraudulent activities such as changes and attempts to display confirmations. On the other hand, depending on the magnetic sensor of the game area portion, it is monitored whether the magnet approaches the area in front of the game area 5a, and the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a is changed to be provided on the game board 5. It monitors fraudulent activities such as entering the ball into the winning opening or the gate.

Similarly, as the vibration sensor 3003 for detecting fraudulent activity due to vibration, the vibration of the setting operation unit capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5. A sensor and a game area vibration sensor capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration around the third distribution device 2550 of the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5 are provided. Then, depending on the vibration sensor of the setting operation unit, it is monitored whether vibration is applied to the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided, and the person other than the person who changes the setting of the set value or displays the confirmation is the person. It monitors fraudulent activities such as changing settings and trying to display confirmation. On the other hand, the game area vibration sensor monitors whether vibration is applied to the third distribution device 2550, changes the course of the game ball B in the third distribution device 2550, and changes the course of the game ball B to the second V winning opening 2008. We are monitoring cheating such as letting the game ball B enter the ball.

As a second specific example, in "fraud monitoring A", all the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) for detecting fraudulent activity are used to increase the number of parts to be determined to be fraudulent activity. In "Fraud monitoring B", only the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and the setting operation unit vibration sensor, which are a part of the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) for detecting fraudulent activity, are used to determine that the fraudulent activity is performed. The number of parts to judge is reduced. That is, in the "fraud monitoring A", not only the generation of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 located on the rear side of the game board 5 and the setting key switch 1311a is detected, but also the game area located on the front side of the game board 5 is detected. While it is possible to detect the occurrence of magnetism and vibration in front of 5a, in "fraud monitoring B", the magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located behind the game board 5 It is possible to detect only the occurrence of magnetism and vibration. For example, if the magnetic sensor in the game area and the vibration sensor in the game area have a problem and such a detection sensor frequently detects the sensor even though no fraudulent activity has been performed, "Fraud monitoring B" is used. By selecting it, it is possible to prevent its frequent detection. If you want to strengthen the countermeasures against magnet goto and vibration goto, you can select "Fraud monitoring A" to monitor cheating even in front of the game area 5a and cheat by magnet goto or vibration goto. Monitoring can be strengthened.

In this example, two magnetic sensors 2010, a setting operation unit magnetic sensor and a game area magnetic sensor, are provided as magnetic sensors 2010 for detecting fraudulent acts by magnets, but the location where magnetism is generated (Whether it is around the setting change board 1311 located on the rear side of the game board 5 or the setting key switch 1311a, or in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5) can be specified. One magnetic sensor 2010 may be provided. Similarly, as the vibration sensor 3003 for detecting fraudulent activity due to vibration, two vibration sensors 3003, a setting operation unit vibration sensor and a game area vibration sensor, are provided, but the location where the vibration occurs (game board). To specify (whether it is around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of 5 or around the third distribution device 2550 of the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5). It is also possible to provide one vibration sensor capable of the above. Even in such a case, in "fraud monitoring B", only when it is specified that magnetism or vibration is generated around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5, the fraudulent act is performed. By determining that there is, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Next, as a third specific example, a case where the condition for canceling the error state is changed when the error state is determined to be a fraudulent act will be described below.

As a third specific example, in "fraud monitoring A", when it is determined that the act is fraudulent and the error state is entered, the error state can be canceled by turning the power on again. , "Fraud monitoring B" makes it possible to automatically cancel the error state after a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) has elapsed when the error state is determined to be fraudulent. ing. That is, in "fraud monitoring A", when it is determined that the act is fraudulent and the state shifts to an error state, the hall clerk performs the work of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and operates the power switch 630a. Then, the error state cannot be canceled unless the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on again. When the detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) that detects fraudulent activity detects the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, it shifts to an error state and outputs from the image, lamp, or speaker of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is difficult to normally grasp the progress of the game because the abnormality generation effect for notifying that the state is abnormal due to the generation of magnetism or vibration is executed. For this reason, when "fraud monitoring A" is selected, when the hall clerk determines that it is a fraudulent act and shifts to an error state, the hall clerk needs to work, and the hall clerk grasps the fraudulent act. Therefore, it is possible to increase the deterrence against fraudulent activities. Further, when it is desired to strengthen the countermeasures against the magnet goto and the vibration goto, it is possible to strengthen the monitoring of the fraudulent activity by the magnet goto and the vibration goto by selecting "fraud monitoring A".

Next, as a fourth specific example, when it is determined that the pachinko machine is fraudulent and the state shifts to an error state, information on the error state is transmitted to the hall installed on the game hall side via the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1. The case of making a difference whether or not to output to a computer will be described below.

As a fourth specific example, in "fraud monitoring A", when it is determined that the machine is fraudulent and the state shifts to an error state, information on the error state is transmitted to the game hall via the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1. While it is output to the hall computer installed on the side, "fraud monitoring B" outputs information about the error state to the hall computer even if it is judged to be fraudulent and shifts to an error state. I try not to. In other words, in "fraud monitoring A", when it is determined that the fraud is fraudulent and the error state is entered, the hall clerk can immediately grasp the fraudulent activity even if he / she is not there. Deterrence can be increased. Further, when it is desired to strengthen the countermeasures against the magnet goto and the vibration goto, it is possible to strengthen the monitoring of the fraudulent activity by the magnet goto and the vibration goto by selecting "fraud monitoring A".

Next, as a fifth specific example, whether or not the information regarding the error state is externally notified by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, or the output from the speaker when the error state is determined to be an illegal act. The case of making the difference will be described below.

As a fifth specific example, in "fraud monitoring A", when it is determined that the act is fraudulent and the error state is entered, magnetism or vibration is generated by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, or the output from the speaker. While the information about the error state is externally notified by executing an abnormality occurrence effect to notify that the state is abnormal due to "Fraud monitoring B", the error state is judged to be a fraudulent act. Even if it shifts to, the information about the error status is not notified to the outside. In other words, in "fraud monitoring A", when it is determined that the fraud is fraudulent and the state shifts to the error state, the fraudster is warned by the external notification of the information about the error state, and the deterrence against the fraudulent act is high. can do. Further, when it is desired to strengthen the countermeasures against the magnet goto and the vibration goto, it is possible to strengthen the monitoring of the fraudulent activity by the magnet goto and the vibration goto by selecting "fraud monitoring A".

In this example, "illegal monitoring A" is set in the setting values 1 to 3 and "illegal monitoring B" is set in the setting values 1'to 3', and the main control MPU 1310a is set toward the peripheral control board 1510. By transmitting the information regarding the value as a command, it is possible to determine whether the peripheral control board 1510 side should wait in "fraud monitoring A" or "fraud monitoring B". Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a transmits information about the error state as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 when it is determined that the act is fraudulent and the state shifts to the error state, the peripheral control board 1510 side. It is possible to determine whether or not to externally notify the information regarding the error status.

In "fraud monitoring B", when it is determined that the act is fraudulent and the state shifts to an error state, information on the error state is externally notified, and at that time, the image, lamp, or speaker of the effect display device 1600 is used. The output of may be executed in a mode that is less (inconspicuous) than that of "fraud monitoring A". For example, in the "illegal monitoring B", when the information regarding the error state is externally notified, the output from the lamp or the speaker may be stopped and only the image of the effect display device 1600 may be displayed. Even in such a case, the same effect as described above can be obtained when it is different whether or not the information regarding the error state is externally notified.

In the above, the case where it is necessary to set only three types of "big hit probabilities" using the setting change board 1311 capable of setting six setting values and three surplus setting values are generated has been described. That is, in the set values 1'to 3', the fraud monitoring system is set to "fraud monitoring A" even though the set values 1 to 3 have the same "big hit probability" and "small hit probability". "Fraud monitoring B" is set for the set values 1 to 3, but it is not limited to this, and for example, set values 1 to 5 corresponding to 5 types of "big hit probabilities" are set. When one surplus setting value is generated, the fraud monitoring system may be different for the one surplus setting value. For example, in the setting value 1'which is one surplus setting value, even though the setting value 1 and the "big hit probability" and the "small hit probability" are the same setting values among the setting values 1 to 5, fraud monitoring is performed. The "fraud monitoring B" may be set for the set values 1 to 5 in which the system is set to "fraud monitoring A". Even in such a case, the surplus setting value can be effectively utilized.

Further, in the above, either "fraud monitoring A" or "fraud monitoring B" is set as the fraud monitoring system, but "fraud monitoring A" and "fraud monitoring B" having different fraud monitoring systems are set. , "Fraud monitoring C" may be set. In addition, the monitoring of fraudulent activities is strengthened in the order of "fraud monitoring C", "fraud monitoring B", and "fraud monitoring A". For example, if setting values 1 and 2 corresponding to two types of "big hit probabilities" are set and four surplus setting values occur, the setting for monitoring fraudulent activity is set to "fraud monitoring A". For the values 1 and 2, although the "big hit probability" and "small hit probability" are the same set values, the set values 1'and 2'set in "fraud monitoring B", "big hit probability" and "small hit" Even though the "probability" is the same setting value, the setting values 1 "and 2'" set in the "fraud monitoring C" may be set as the surplus setting values. Even in such a case, the surplus setting value can be effectively utilized.

In the above, the case where the "big hit probability" and "small hit probability" are set to be the same but the monitoring system for fraudulent activity is set to be different has been described, but the "big hit probability" and "small hit probability" have been described. As the information other than the above, the operating systems of all or part of the plurality of accessories (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 may be set to be different. A case where a part of the operation system of a plurality of accessories (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 is set to be different will be described below as a sixth specific example.

As shown in FIG. 239, in the sixth specific example, it is set as an operation system of a specific accessory (specific movable object) among a plurality of accessories (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3. The first point in which the "fraud monitoring system" is set is that the values 1 to 3 are set to "with specific accessory operation" and the set values 1'to 3'are set to "no specific accessory operation". Specific example-Different from the fifth specific example. That is, in the sixth specific example, the "big hit probability" and the "small hit probability" are set for each of the set value 1 and the set value 1', the set value 2 and the set value 2', and the set value 3 and the set value 3', respectively. Although the set values are the same, the operation system of the specific accessory (specific movable object) is set to either "with specific accessory operation" or "without specific accessory operation". The plurality of accessories (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 can each operate by using a drive source such as a drive motor or a solenoid. For example, the specification of the present embodiment is specified. The accessory is composed of the effect operation unit unit 350 in the effect operation unit 300 described above, and the effect operation unit 300 can be moved up and down by the operation mechanism described above. Since the effect operation unit 300 can be operated by the player in direct contact with the effect operation unit 300, there is a high possibility that a failure or malfunction will occur as compared with other accessories. Then, in "with specific accessory movement", the specific accessory is controlled to operate at a predetermined timing during execution of the movable object effect accompanied by the movement of the specific accessory (the effect operation unit 300 moves up and down). On the other hand, in "no specific accessory movement", the specific accessory is controlled so as not to operate without executing the movable object effect accompanied by the movement of the specific accessory. For example, if a problem occurs in the operation mechanism of the specific accessory and the specific accessory does not operate normally, the operation of the specific accessory can be stopped halfway by selecting "No specific accessory operation". It is possible to prevent a situation in which it becomes difficult to continue the game.

In this example, when the fluctuation pattern in which the execution of the movable object effect accompanied by the movement of the specific accessory is set is determined among the plurality of fluctuation patterns, "with specific accessory movement" indicates the specific accessory. While the specific accessory is controlled to operate at a predetermined timing during the execution of the movable object effect accompanied by the movement, in "no specific accessory operation", the movable object effect accompanied by the movement of the specific accessory is executed. It controls so that the specific accessory does not operate. On the other hand, the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern may be changed between "with specific accessory operation" and "without specific accessory operation". For example, "with specific accessory operation" may be used. , Among a plurality of fluctuation patterns, it is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern in which the execution of the movable object effect accompanied by the movement of the specific accessory is set, whereas in "no specific accessory movement", the specific accessory is set. It may be controlled so as not to determine the fluctuation pattern in which the execution of the moving object effect accompanied by the operation of is set. Even in such a case, in the case of "no specific accessory operation", the same effect as described above can be obtained by controlling the specific accessory so that it does not operate without executing the movable object effect accompanied by the operation of the specific accessory. Can be obtained.

Further, in this example, when the operation system of the specific accessory (specific movable object) is set to the setting values 1 to 3 of "there is a specific accessory operation", the specific combination is performed when the power is turned on (after the setting is changed). While the initial operation of the object is performed, when the setting value 1'to 3'that is "no specific accessory operation" is set, the initial operation of the specific accessory is performed when the power is turned on (after the setting is changed). I try not to do it. As a result, it is possible to recognize again that the specific accessory (specific movable object) among the plurality of accessories (movable objects) is excluded from the operation target. In addition, regarding the operation of the specific accessory (specific movable object), it is possible to confirm whether or not the set value is intended by the operator, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the operator mistakes the set value unintentionally. be able to.

Unlike the above, when prioritizing the presence or absence of defects related to the operation of the specific accessory (specific movable object), "with specific accessory operation" and "without specific accessory operation" to accurately notify it. Regardless of which of the above is set, the initial operation of the specific accessory may be performed when the power is turned on (after the setting is changed).

Further, which of "with specific accessory operation" and "without specific accessory operation" is set can be confirmed by the set value displayed on the setting display 1310 g, but other than the setting display 1310 g. However, it may be notified. For example, when the setting change of the set value is completed, the notification of "set with specific accessory operation / set without specific accessory operation" is notified by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Whether a specific accessory (specific movable object) among a plurality of accessory (movable objects) is an operation target by performing or notifying the fact as a standby screen during the period when the game is not performed. You can recognize it.

Further, in this example, it is possible to set either "with specific accessory operation" or "without specific accessory operation" by changing the setting value by the operator. After the setting, the player may be able to change the initial setting to another setting. For example, it may be possible for the player to change to either "with a specific accessory operation" or "without a specific accessory operation" while the standby screen is displayed during the period when the game is not being performed. That is, the set values 1 to 3 are set to "with specific accessory operation", and the setting values 1'to 3'are set to "without specific accessory operation", and the main control MPU 1310a is set toward the peripheral control board 1510. By sending information about the value as a command, one of the settings will be executed as the initial setting on the peripheral control board 1510 side, but if the player changes to the other setting after the initial setting, On the peripheral control board 1510 side, the setting changed by the player is prioritized over the initial setting.

Further, the specific accessory (specific movable object) among the plurality of accessories (movable objects) is not limited to the effect operation unit unit 350 in the effect operation unit 300, but is provided on the game board 5 or the door frame 3, or The effect display device 1600 may operate from the outside of the front of the screen toward the front of the screen. Further, in this example, it is possible to change the operation system of a specific accessory (specific movable object) among a plurality of accessories (movable objects) by changing the setting value, but the operation system is not limited to the specific accessory. It is possible to change the movement system of multiple characters (movable objects) or all the characters, and set the target character to either "with character movement" or "without character movement". You may do so. Further, the accessory (movable object) may be provided not only on the game board 5 and the door frame 3, but also on the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and the operation system of such accessory can be changed. It may be an object to be used.

[25. Fraud monitoring]
In the present embodiment, various fraudulent activities are monitored in the fraudulent activity detection process in step S112 described above. Specifically, various winning openings and gates (gates) provided in the game board 5 by changing the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a formed in the game board 5 by bringing a magnet close to the pachinko machine 1 ) Is provided, and the main control MPU1310a determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010, and monitors the fraudulent activity by the magnet. ing. In addition, by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 is vibrated to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 to become the game board 5. By providing a vibration sensor 3003 that detects fraudulent activity such as entering a ball into various winning openings or gates provided, the main control MPU 1310a determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor 3003. However, it monitors fraudulent activities caused by vibration. Regarding the monitoring of these fraudulent activities, the mode of monitoring is different between the normal time and the state in which the setting value is changed and the setting value is confirmed and displayed.

[25-1. About fraud monitoring during normal times]
First, the monitoring of fraudulent activity during normal times will be described below. Here, the normal time is a state in which the main body frame 4 is closed and the setting value setting is not changed or the setting value confirmation display is not performed, and the symbol variation, the big hit game, the small hit game, etc. It refers to the state in which it is possible to play the game.

In this example, as the magnetic sensor 2010 for detecting fraudulent activity by a magnet, a setting operation unit capable of detecting the generation of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5. A magnetic sensor and a game area magnetic sensor capable of detecting the generation of magnetism in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5 are provided. Then, in a normal state, a magnetic sensor of the setting operation unit is used to monitor fraudulent acts on a predetermined area on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. That is, normally, the magnetism of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor should not be generated in the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (magnetism due to unauthorized access). ) Has occurred (whether the magnet is approaching), and fraudulent activities such as trying to change the setting or display the confirmation by someone other than the person who changes the setting of the set value or displays the confirmation are monitored. Examples of fraudulent acts against the back side of the pachinko machine 1 using magnets include a metal fraudulent device in the island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed (in the space where the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed). A magnet that indirectly operates a metal fraudulent device is installed, and the magnet and the metal fraudulent device are installed through a slight gap between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facility and an opening that destroyed a part of the pachinko machine 1. It is conceivable that the pachinko machine 1 is operated to illegally access the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. In the fraud detection process in step S112, when the detection signal from the magnetic sensor of the setting operation unit is input, fraud using a magnet is performed on the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. Judging that it is being done.

Similarly, normally, a game area magnetic sensor is used to monitor fraudulent activity on a predetermined area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1. That is, in the normal state, the game area magnetic sensor monitors whether magnetism (magnetism due to unauthorized access) that should not be generated originally is generated (whether the magnet approaches) in the area in front of the game area 5a. , The course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a is changed, and fraudulent acts such as entering the ball into various winning openings and gates provided on the game board 5 are monitored. In the fraud detection process in step S112, when the detection signal from the magnetic sensor in the game area is input, it is determined that the fraud using the magnet is performed in the area in front of the game area 5a. ing.

In this example, two magnetic sensors 2010, a setting operation unit magnetic sensor and a game area unit magnetic sensor, are provided as magnetic sensors 2010 for detecting fraudulent acts by magnets. These two setting operations The part magnetic sensor and the game area part magnetic sensor may have the same performance. That is, although not shown, the two magnetic sensors 2010 are composed of a rectangular box-shaped sensor body, and have a first magnetic detection having a directional property that is highly sensitive in the direction perpendicular to one side surface. It has become possible to perform magnetic detection in a region and magnetic detection in a second magnetic detection region having a directivity that is highly sensitive in the direction perpendicular to the opposite side surface on the other side. ing. Note that "strong sensitivity in the vertical direction" means that the sensitivity is stronger in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction with respect to each side surface, and does not mean that there is no sensitivity in the horizontal direction. In other words, the magnetic detection region emitted from each side surface is a wide area surrounded by a sphere. Then, the game area magnetic sensor is arranged so that the first magnetic detection area and the second magnetic detection area emitted from the side surface of the sensor body spread in the left-right direction or the up-down direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 1. Multiple locations on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, winning openings such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the normal winning port 2003, and the large winning port 2005, and other main parts of the ball flow path). ) Can be monitored. On the other hand, in the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, the first magnetic detection region and the second magnetic detection region emitted from the side surface of the sensor body described above are spread in the front-rear direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 1, and on the other hand. The magnetic detection region is arranged so as to include the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, so that the region on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided can be monitored.

It should be noted that the two setting operation unit magnetic sensors and the game area unit magnetic sensor may have embodiments that do not have the same performance. For example, instead of the magnetic sensor of the setting operation part and the magnetic sensor of the game area part, it may be around the place where magnetism is generated (the setting change board 1311 located behind the game board 5 or the setting key switch 1311a, or the game board 5). It is also possible to provide one magnetic sensor 2010 capable of identifying (whether it is in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game area). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to monitor whether the magnet approaches the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and whether the magnet approaches the area in front of the game area 5a. ..

Further, in this example, as the vibration sensor 3003 for detecting fraudulent activity due to vibration, it is possible to detect the occurrence of vibration around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5. An operation unit vibration sensor and a game region vibration sensor capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration around the third distribution device 2550 of the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5 are provided. Then, in normal times, fraudulent activity is monitored using the vibration sensor of the setting operation unit. That is, normally, the setting operation unit vibration sensor monitors whether vibration (vibration due to unauthorized access) that should not originally occur is applied to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. However, a person other than the person who changes the setting of the set value or displays the confirmation is monitoring fraudulent activities such as trying to change the setting or display the confirmation. In the fraud detection process in step S112, when the detection signal from the vibration sensor of the setting operation unit is input, the fraud due to vibration is performed on the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. It is judged that it is.

On the other hand, during normal times, only during the small hit game, the game area vibration sensor is used to monitor the fraudulent activity, and other than the small hit game, the game area vibration sensor is not used to monitor the fraudulent activity. This is because, in the small hit game, in the third distribution device 2550, the game ball B distributed to the second V winning opening 2008 side by the second distribution device 2540 is either the second V winning opening 2008 or the losing side. However, when vibration is applied to the third distribution device 2550, the course of the game ball B in the third distribution device 2550 is changed to the second V winning opening 2008. This is because it becomes possible to let B enter the ball and prevent such cheating. That is, during the small hit game during normal operation, the game area vibration sensor monitors whether vibration (vibration due to unauthorized access) that should not originally occur is applied to the third distribution device 2550. However, fraudulent acts such as changing the course of the game ball B in the third distribution device 2550 and inserting the game ball B into the second V winning opening 2008 are monitored. In the fraud detection process in step S112, when the detection signal from the game area vibration sensor is input, it is determined that the third distribution device 2550 is being cheated by vibration.

In this example, as the vibration sensor 3003 for detecting fraudulent activity due to vibration, two vibration sensors 3003, a setting operation unit vibration sensor and a game area vibration sensor, are provided, but the location where vibration occurs. (Whether it is around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5, or around the third distribution device 2550 of the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5). One vibration sensor 3003 that can be specified may be provided. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to monitor whether vibration is applied to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and whether vibration is applied to the third distribution device 2550. it can.

Further, in the normal time, in the launch permission signal setting process in step S113, the logic of the launch permission signal for notifying the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to permit the launch of the game ball B is set, and the player sets the logic. It is possible to fire the game ball B when the handle 195 is operated.

Further, in the normal state, when the game ball B wins a prize in the winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, and the large winning opening 2005, the detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to each of them are obtained. Is input by the main control MPU 1310a so that the detection of the game ball B is treated as valid. Specifically, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B wins the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the symbol does not change and the game ball B is not changed. However, when the detection of the game ball B is enabled, the symbol changes when the game ball B wins the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. At the same time, it is possible to pay out the game ball B.

Further, in a normal state, the volume output from the speaker, the screen of the lamp, the effect display device 1600, etc., except for the period during which the effect using the contact operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 is executed during the symbol variation It is possible to adjust the amount of light output from the light emitting member. Specifically, after displaying an image for adjustment on the effect display device 1600 by operating the pressing operation unit 303, it is possible to adjust the volume and the amount of light by rotating the contact operation unit 302. During the period during which the effect using the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 is being executed during the symbol variation, the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are waiting to be operated for the effect. Since it is in a state, even if the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, the volume and the amount of light cannot be adjusted during the prohibited period.

[25-2. About fraud monitoring while changing the setting value]
Next, monitoring of fraudulent activity while changing the setting of the set value will be described with reference to FIG. 240. FIG. 240 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraudulent activity while changing the setting value.

When changing the setting of the set value, first, when the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. Perform the work (timing t1), then insert the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and rotate the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key switch 1311a (timing t2). Then, by operating the power switch 630a to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 (timing t3), it becomes possible to change the setting of the set value (change permission state). In such a change permission state, the set value (set value 1 to 6) can be changed each time the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, and then the setting key cylinder is turned counterclockwise. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation by rotating the setting key switch 1311a by 120 degrees, and then the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder to the original position. The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it OFF so as to return it (timing t4). That is, the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4 is a state in which the setting of the set value can be changed (change permission state), and after the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the set value is set. It becomes impossible to change the settings (unchangeable state). Then, by pulling out the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t5), the game can be played. Become.

In this example, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, the main control MPU 1310a starts the main control power-on processing (see FIGS. 175 and 176), but the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4. Until this is done, the setting change process in step S37 is not completed (it is not determined that the setting key switch 1311a was turned off in step S222 of the setting change process), and during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, thereafter. It is prohibited so that the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is not performed, and the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is delayed as compared with the normal power-on. Then, since the main control side timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177) is not started until the interrupt enable setting in step S52 is performed, the switch input process in step S104 and the fraud detection in step S112 in the main control side timer interrupt process. The processing, the firing permission signal setting processing in step S113, and the like are not executed and are in a standby state. That is, for the period from timing t3 to timing t4, it is possible to change the setting of the set value (change permission state), but the monitoring of fraudulent activity is not executed, and the game ball B It is a special period in which firing is not permitted and the input of the detection signal is not valid when the game ball B wins a prize in the winning opening. In the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, information regarding the setting change of the set value is output to the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1. , The hall clerk can know that the setting is being changed.

Specifically, in the change permission state during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor of the setting operation unit and the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor of the gaming area are all performed. Is not executed. This is because, in the change permission state, a regular worker who changes the setting of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b, and a magnet other than the regular worker who changes the setting of the set value is a magnet. This is because there is no room for cheating using. In addition, when changing the setting of the set value, even if the legitimate worker who changes the setting has something that can generate magnetism, it is prevented from being detected as a fraudulent act using a magnet. , It is possible to suppress the obstruction of the regular setting change work.

Similarly, in the change permission state during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor of the setting operation unit and monitoring of fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor of the game area are executed. I try not to. This is because, in the change permission state, a legitimate worker who changes the setting value is operating the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b, and a person other than the legitimate worker who changes the setting is illegal due to vibration. This is because there is no room for action. In addition, when changing the setting of the set value, even if the legitimate worker who changes the setting vibrates, it is prevented from being detected as a fraudulent act due to the vibration, and the legitimate setting change work is performed. Inhibition can be suppressed.

Further, in the change permission state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the logic of the launch permission signal for notifying the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to permit the launch of the game ball B is not set. And the launch of the game ball B is prohibited. As a result, even if a regular worker who changes the setting of the set value touches the handle 195, the game ball B can be prevented from being fired, and the hindrance of the regular setting changing work can be suppressed. Further, even if the player operates the handle 195 in the change permission state, the game ball B cannot be fired.

In addition, in the change permission state during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, winning openings such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, and the large winning opening 2005 and various gates (gates) ), The main control MPU1310a does not input the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to each of the game balls B, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. It should be noted that the game ball B may not be detected by the detection sensor itself, or the detection signal from the detection sensor may be input but treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the lottery, the symbol variation, and the game ball B Since neither of the payouts is performed, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 for some reason during the regular work of changing the setting of the set value. , It is possible to suppress the progress of the game.

Further, although not shown, the main control MPU 1310a inputs detection signals from detection sensors corresponding to each of the winning opening and the gate portion (gate) in the change permission state during the period from timing t3 to timing t4. At the same time, the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to the out port 1008 is also prevented from being input by the main control MPU1310a, so that the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B discharged from the out port 1008 is invalidated, for example, the game ball B discharged from the game area 5a in the change permission state is measured by the above-mentioned base monitor 1310h. It is possible to exclude from the target (target to be added to the out number counter), and the game ball B remaining in the game area 5a due to slinging (ball jamming) or the like is detected in the change permission state, and the base monitor 1310h It is possible to avoid a situation in which the data is measured (added to the out number counter).

Further, in the change permission state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, even if the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, the volume output from the speaker, the screen of the lamp or the effect display device 1600, etc. The amount of light output from the light emitting member of is not adjustable.

Further, in the change permission state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the set value is set by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. A setting change notification (setting change related notification) is being executed to notify that the change is in progress. As a notification during setting change, the voice that repeats "setting is being changed", the message "setting is being changed!" Is displayed, and the lamp is emitted in the color corresponding to the setting values 1 to 6 in the selection operation process. It is said. This setting changing notification is a notification (effect) that is performed only in the change permission state, and is executed with priority over the main body frame opening notification that is performed when the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2. That is, in the state where the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening notification (display of "frame is open", voice, etc.) is normally performed, but in the change permission state, the main body frame opening notification is performed. It is decided that the notification during setting change is executed with the highest priority without performing. In addition, the main body frame opening notification and the setting changing notification are executed in parallel, the setting changing notification is prioritized over the main body frame opening notification, and the main body frame opening notification is performed after the setting changing notification is completed. The form can also be exemplified.

Further, in the change permission state during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, in addition to the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker, the function display unit 1400 also notifies as the above-mentioned setting change notification. Running. Specifically, although not shown, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator, a normal symbol display, a normal hold indicator, a first special symbol display, a first special hold number indicator, and a second special. In addition to the symbol display, the second special hold number display, and the round display, the setting changing display consisting of one LED indicating that the setting value setting is being changed (change permission state), the setting value A confirmation display in-display indicator including one LED indicating that the confirmation is being displayed (confirmation display state) is provided. Then, in the change permission state, only the LED of the indicator during the setting change in the function display unit 1400 is turned on, and all the LEDs of the other indicators are turned off. As a result, in the change permission state, it is possible to grasp that the game does not proceed by the notification by the function display unit 1400.

Further, at the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the setting change processing in step S37 in the main control power-on processing (see FIGS. 175 and 176) is completed (the setting key in step S222 of the setting change processing). It is determined that the switch 1311a has been turned off), and the interrupt enable setting in step S52 is performed. Then, it becomes possible to start the main control side timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177), the switch input process in step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt process, the fraud detection process in step S112, and the launch permission signal setting in step S113. Processing etc. will be performed. However, in the present embodiment, until the work of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed (timing t5), the launch of the game ball B is permitted, and the game ball B is detected when the game ball B wins the winning opening. It does not allow the input of signals and keeps the state where the game cannot be started. That is, the period from the timing t4 to the timing t5 is a period in which the detection signal is not input even if the game ball B is won in the winning opening by fraudulent act, and an illegal profit cannot be obtained. In addition, since there is a possibility of receiving an impact of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, fraudulent activity monitoring using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and fraudulent activity using the game area magnetic sensor Monitoring, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit vibration sensor, and monitoring of fraudulent activity using the game area vibration sensor are in a standby state as unexecuted.

In addition, the game ball B can be launched from the time t5 when the work of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and it is possible to perform games such as symbol variation, big hit game, and small hit game. In this state, the monitoring of various fraudulent activities is started according to the contents explained in [Regarding fraud monitoring during normal times].

Further, during the period from the timing t4 to the timing t5, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the screen of the effect display device 1600 is waiting for the start of the game. An image is displayed to notify that (game standby notification). Then, during the predetermined period from the timing t5, after the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, on the screen of the effect display device 1600, a game such as a symbol variation, a big hit game, or a small hit game is started. An image (game start notification) is displayed to notify that the game has become possible.

In this example, the game ball B is launched during the period including the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5 (the change permission state may be the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4). Although the logic of the launch permission signal for notifying the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to permit is not set, in consideration of checking the launch operation by the handle 195 in the change permission state, The logic of the launch permission signal may be set during that period so that the game ball B can be launched when the operator operates the handle 195. However, during the period including the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5 (the change permission state may be the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4), the permission until the launch of the game ball B is limited. , It is desirable to prevent the detection signal from being input even if the game ball B is inserted into various winning openings and gates (gates) so that the game does not proceed unreasonably. ..

Further, in this example, the game ball B is launched during the period including the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5 (the change permission state may be the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4). The logic of the launch permission signal for notifying the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to permit is not set, and the game ball B is launched from the time of timing t5 (may be timing t4). Although it is possible, the setting value was changed in the change permission state when the handle 195 was operated (contacted with the handle 195) for the first time after the change permission state was finished and the launch of the game ball B was permitted. Notification is executed after the setting is changed. As notification after changing the setting, the voice of "setting changed", the message "setting changed" is displayed, and the lamp is emitted. In addition, this notification after changing the setting operates the handle 195 for the first time after changing the setting of the set value even if a person other than the legitimate worker who changes the setting of the set value changes the setting of the set value by fraudulent act. It will be executed at the time of contacting 195). As a result, if a legitimate worker who changes the setting of the setting value does not change the setting of the setting value but executes the notification after changing the setting, the setting of the setting value is changed due to fraudulent activity. It will be known to the outside, and it will be possible to increase the deterrence against fraudulent activities.

Further, in this example, the game ball B is launched during the period including the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5 (the change permission state may be the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4). The logic of the launch permission signal for notifying the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to permit is not set, and the game ball B is launched from the time of timing t5 (may be timing t4). Although it is possible, if the handle 195 is operated (contacting the handle 195) from the time before the launch permission of the game ball B is permitted, the contact with the handle 195 is temporarily released after the launch permission of the game ball B is permitted. The game ball B is not fired unless the handle 195 is touched (operated) again (with the contact detection turned off). That is, even if the contact of the handle 195 is turned on before the timing t5, the continuous handle 195 is reached unless an edge is detected in which the contact detection for the handle 195 changes from OFF to ON after the timing t5. The contact is invalidated and the game ball B is restricted from being fired. As a result, even if a regular worker who changes the setting of the set value comes into contact with the handle 195 when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 is attached to the outer frame 2. When the game ball B is closed, the game ball B is not accidentally fired, and it is possible to reliably prevent the player from suffering a loss.

Further, unlike the above, in consideration of accelerating the start of the game based on the end of the change permission state, when the handle 195 is operated from the time before the launch permission of the game ball B, the handle 195 is moved to the handle 195. While the contact is continued, the continuous contact with the handle 195 may be enabled so that the game ball B can be launched from the time when the launch of the game ball B is permitted. In such a case, the handle 195 is operated to prepare for the launch of the game ball B before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and immediately after closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. You will be able to start the game.

Further, in this example, the game ball B can be launched from the time t5 when the work of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and the game such as symbol variation, big hit game, and small hit game can be played. Although it is in a state where it can be performed, it may be in a state where the game can be performed immediately at the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. That is, from the time of the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the game ball B can be launched, and the game such as the symbol variation, the big hit game, and the small hit game can be performed. Fraudulent monitoring at the time] may be used to monitor fraudulent activity. In such a configuration, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2 during the period from the timing t4 to the timing t5, but on the screen of the effect display device 1600, the symbol variation, the big hit game, and the small hit game. An image (game start notification) notifying that it is possible to start a game such as a winning game may be displayed.

As another example, after the power is turned on and before starting the setting change process in step S37, at least the switch input process in step S104, the fraud detection process in step S112, and the launch permission signal setting process in step S113 are performed. It may be configured to perform the corresponding processing in advance. With such a configuration, for the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the setting of the set value is changed (change permission state), but fraudulent activity is not monitored and the game ball. The firing of B may not be permitted, and the input of the detection signal may not be valid when the game ball B wins the winning opening.

Further, in the above-mentioned alternative example, the change permission state (which may be the period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5), which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, includes the magnetic sensor 2010 or the like. While the vibration sensor 3003 is used to monitor fraudulent activity, it may be configured not to notify that the abnormal state is detected when an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration is detected. Further, normally, when it is determined that a fraudulent act by a magnet or vibration is performed, the value of the magnet goto counter or vibration goto counter is added (incremented) by a value of 1, but from timing t3 to timing t4. In the change permission state (which may be the period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5), which is the period of, even if it is determined that a fraudulent act by a magnet or vibration is performed, the magnet It may be configured so that the values of the goto counter and the vibration goto counter are not added. Even with such a configuration, when changing the setting of the set value, even if a legitimate worker who changes the setting approaches the magnet or applies vibration, it is illegal due to the magnet or vibration. No notification or addition is performed as an act, and it is possible to prevent the monitoring of fraudulent activity from becoming an obstacle when changing the setting value.

Since various needs related to the above-mentioned change permission state may exist depending on the environment of the game hall and the like, it may be possible to select and set for each game field. For example, when the power is turned on with the operation of a normal RAM clear switch instead of the change permission state, a state in which the operator of the playground can select which setting should be set for various processes related to the change permission state is generated. After that, when a change permission status occurs, various processes related to the change permission status are executed with the selected setting. As a result, in the game hall A, fraud monitoring is not monitored in the change permission state, but the contact with the handle 195 is enabled, and in the game hall B, the fraud monitoring is performed in the change permission state. It can be set to be non-monitoring and to invalidate the contact with the handle 195, and the needs of the amusement park, such as whether or not to check the firing operation by the handle 195 in the change permission state. You will be able to adjust to.

[25-3. About fraud monitoring while confirming and displaying the set value]
In the above, regarding the monitoring of fraudulent activity while changing the setting value, it was explained that the fraudulent activity is not monitored while the setting value setting is changed. It may be configured in either a state in which fraudulent activity is not monitored during the confirmation display of the set value or a state in which fraudulent activity is partially monitored. First, a case where fraudulent activity is not monitored during the confirmation display of the set value will be described with reference to FIG. 241. FIG. 241 is a time chart showing the monitoring state of fraudulent activity when the fraudulent activity is not monitored during the confirmation display of the set value.

To confirm and display the currently set value, first check that the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and also check that the symbol has not changed (there is no hold). , Open the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 (timing t5), then insert the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and watch the clock in the same way as when changing the setting. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the setting key switch 1311a 60 degrees in the direction and performing the first ON operation (timing t6). At this time, the current set value (the set value among the set value 1 to the set value 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned on) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. To do. Then, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the original position, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF (timing t7). The state of displaying the set value for 1310 g is switched to the state of not displaying it. That is, the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7 is a state in which the confirmation display of the set value is performed (confirmation display state), and after the timing t7 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the confirmation of the set value is performed. It becomes a state where the display is not performed (unconfirmable state). Then, by extracting the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t8), the game can be played. Become.

At the time of timing t6 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, the current setting value is not displayed on the setting display 1310g unless the game ball B such as the prize ball is paid out. ing. Further, even if the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, the game ball B such as the prize ball pays. If it is issued, the setting key switch 1311a may not be turned on (the setting key remains OFF), or the setting key switch 1311a may be set after the payout of the game ball B such as the prize ball is completed. May be configured to display the current set value on the setting display 1310 g by setting the setting key ON.

As another example, when confirming and displaying the currently set value, the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on) as in the case of changing the setting of the set value. In the shut-off state), the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. By setting the key switch 1311a to ON and operating the power switch 630a to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1, the set value can be confirmed and displayed (confirmation display state). You may. Further, when the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1, if the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch, the state shifts to a state in which the setting of the set value can be changed (change permission state). On the other hand, when the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch, the state may be changed to a state in which confirmation display of the set value can be performed (confirmation display state). In such a configuration, by turning on the setting key switch 1311a and turning on the power without operating the RAM clear switch, the state shifts to the state where the confirmation display of the set value is performed (confirmation display state). The state in which the confirmation display of the set value is performed (confirmation display state) corresponds to the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7.

In this example, for the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the confirmation display of the set value is performed (confirmation display state), but the monitoring of fraudulent activity is not executed, and the game ball B It is a special period in which the input of the detection signal is not valid when the game ball B wins a prize in the winning opening. In the confirmation display state during the period from timing t6 to timing t7, information regarding the confirmation display of the set value is output to the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1. , The hall clerk can understand that the confirmation is being displayed.

Specifically, in the confirmation display state during the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor of the setting operation unit and the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor of the gaming area are all performed. Is not executed. This is because, in the confirmation display state, a legitimate worker who confirms and displays the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and a person other than the legitimate worker who confirms and displays the set value is a fraudulent act using a magnet. This is because there is no room to do. In addition, when confirming and displaying the set value, even if the legitimate worker who performs the confirmation display has something that can generate magnetism, it is prevented from being detected as a fraudulent act using a magnet. , It is possible to suppress the obstruction of the regular confirmation display work.

Similarly, in the confirmation display state during the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit vibration sensor and the entire monitoring of fraudulent activity using the game area vibration sensor are executed. I try not to. This is because, in the confirmation display state, a legitimate worker who confirms and displays the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and there is room for a person other than the legitimate worker who displays the confirmation to commit fraudulent acts due to vibration. Because there is no such thing. In addition, even if a legitimate worker who performs the confirmation display vibrates when performing the confirmation display of the set value, it is prevented from being detected as an illegal act due to the vibration, and the regular confirmation display work is performed. Inhibition can be suppressed.

Further, in the confirmation display state during the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, the logic of the launch permission signal for notifying the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to permit the launch of the game ball B is not set. And the launch of the game ball B is prohibited. As a result, even if a regular worker who confirms and displays the set value touches the handle 195, the game ball B can be prevented from being fired, and hindrance to the regular confirmation and display work can be suppressed. Further, even if the player operates the handle 195 in the confirmation display state, the game ball B cannot be fired.

In addition, in the confirmation display state during the period from timing t6 to timing t7, winning openings such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, and the large winning opening 2005 and various gates (gates) ), Even if the main control MPU1310a inputs the detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to each of the game balls B, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. It should be noted that the detection sensor itself may not detect the game ball B, or the detection signal itself from the detection sensor may not be input. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the lottery, the symbol variation, and the game ball B Since neither of the payouts is performed, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 for some reason during the regular work of confirming and displaying the set value. , It is possible to suppress the progress of the game.

Although not shown, the main control MPU 1310a inputs detection signals from detection sensors corresponding to the winning opening, the gate, and the like in the confirmation display state during the period from timing t6 to timing t7. At the same time, the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to the out port 1008 is also prevented from being input by the main control MPU1310a, so that the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B discharged from the out port 1008 is invalidated, for example, the game ball B discharged from the game area 5a in the confirmation display state is measured by the above-mentioned base monitor 1310h. It is possible to exclude from the target (target to be added to the out number counter), and the game ball B remaining in the game area 5a due to slinging (ball jamming) or the like is detected in the confirmation display state, and the base monitor 1310h It is possible to avoid a situation in which the data is measured (added to the out number counter).

Further, in the confirmation display state during the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, even if the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, the volume output from the speaker, the screen of the lamp or the effect display device 1600, etc. The amount of light output from the light emitting member of is not adjustable.

Further, in the confirmation display state during the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the set value is confirmed by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Confirmation during display notification (confirmation display related notification) is being executed to notify that the display is in progress. As the notification during confirmation display, the voice that repeats "confirmation display is in progress", the message display "confirmation display in progress!", And the lamp emission in the color corresponding to the set values 1 to 6 in the confirmation process are executed. There is. This confirmation display notification is a notification (effect) that is performed only in the confirmation display state, and is executed with priority over the main body frame opening notification that is performed when the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2. That is, in the state where the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening notification (display of "frame is open", voice, etc.) is normally performed, but in the confirmation display state, the main body frame opening notification is performed. It is decided that the notification during confirmation display is executed with the highest priority without performing. In addition, the main body frame opening notification and the confirmation display notification are executed in parallel, the confirmation display notification is prioritized over the main body frame opening notification, and the main body frame opening notification is performed after the confirmation display notification is completed. The form can also be exemplified.

Further, in the confirmation display state during the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, in addition to the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker, the function display unit 1400 also notifies as the above-mentioned confirmation display notification. Running. Specifically, although not shown, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator, a normal symbol display, a normal hold indicator, a first special symbol display, a first special hold number indicator, and a second special. In addition to the symbol display, the second special hold number display, and the round display, the setting changing display consisting of one LED indicating that the setting value setting is being changed (change permission state), the setting value A confirmation display in-display indicator including one LED indicating that the confirmation is being displayed (confirmation display state) is provided. Then, in the confirmation display state, only the LED of the confirmation display in the function display unit 1400 is turned on, and all the LEDs of the other indicators are turned off. As a result, in the confirmation display state, it is possible to grasp that the game does not proceed by the notification by the function display unit 1400.

Further, the confirmation display state (which may be the period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8), which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, includes the first start port 2002 and the second start port. When the game ball B wins a prize in the winning openings such as 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, and the large winning opening 2005, even if the main control MPU1310a inputs the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to each, the game ball B is detected. However, when such a detection signal is input, the launch of the game ball B is not permitted due to the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Even though it is a period in which the game ball B does not win a prize in the winning opening, a warning effect C for notifying that the game ball B has won a prize in the winning opening is executed. This warning effect C is executed with priority over the confirmation display notification and the main body frame opening notification. That is, when the warning effect C is executed, the warning effect C is executed with the highest priority without performing the confirmation display notification or the main body frame opening notification.

Further, in the confirmation display state during the period from timing t6 to timing t7, it is not possible to permit the launch of the game ball B or input a detection signal when the game ball B wins a prize at the winning opening, so that the game is played. Although it is in a state where it cannot be started, the state is maintained until the work of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed after that (timing t8). That is, the period from timing t7 to timing t8 is a period in which a detection signal is not input even if the game ball B is won in the winning opening by fraudulent act, and an illegal profit cannot be obtained. In addition, since there is a possibility of receiving an impact of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, fraudulent activity monitoring using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and fraudulent activity using the game area magnetic sensor Monitoring, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit vibration sensor, and monitoring of fraudulent activity using the game area vibration sensor are in a standby state as unexecuted.

In addition, the game ball B can be launched from the time t8 when the work of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and it is possible to perform games such as symbol variation, big hit game, and small hit game. In this state, the monitoring of various fraudulent activities is started according to the contents explained in [Regarding fraud monitoring during normal times]. It should be noted that the game ball B can be fired even before the timing t6 when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, and the symbol changes and the big hit. It is possible to play games such as games and small hit games, and monitoring of various fraudulent activities is started according to the contents explained in [Regarding fraud monitoring during normal times].

Further, during the period from timing t7 to timing t8, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the screen of the effect display device 1600 is waiting for the start of the game. An image is displayed to notify that (game standby notification). Then, during a predetermined period from the timing t8, after the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, on the screen of the effect display device 1600, a game such as a symbol variation, a big hit game, or a small hit game is started. An image is displayed to notify that the game has become possible (game start notification).

Further, in the normal state when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key switch 1311a should not be in the state of turning on the setting key, but when such a setting key is turned on. The warning effects A and B are executed to notify that the setting key is illegally turned on by the output from the image, the lamp, and the speaker of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (timing t1) while the symbol is being changed during normal operation, the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF. Until (timing t2), the warning effect A is being executed. Similarly, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (timing t3) while the symbol is not constantly changed, until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF. During the period (timing t4), the warning effect B is being executed. Further, the warning effects A and B are executed with priority over the effect being executed. That is, when the warning effects A and B are executed, the effects being executed are stopped regardless of whether or not the symbol is changed, and the warning effects A and B are executed with the highest priority. Although the warning effects A and B execute the effects in the same mode, the effects may be executed in different modes so that it can be determined whether or not the symbol is in a state of being changed.

In addition, when the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected during the period of monitoring fraudulent activity by magnets or vibration, the magnetism or vibration is generated over a predetermined period by the output from the image, lamp, or speaker of the effect display device 1600. An abnormal occurrence effect is executed to notify that the abnormal state is caused by the occurrence of. Further, in the abnormality occurrence effect, the content of the abnormality (magnetic or vibration) depends on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, the game area magnetic sensor, the setting operation unit vibration sensor, and the game area vibration sensor detects the abnormality. Whether it is the area where the occurrence is detected) or the part where the abnormality is detected (the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided, or the area in front of the game area 5a, or the area in front of the game area 5a, the third distribution device 2550. Is it a peripheral area?) And so on. In addition, the abnormal occurrence effect is executed with priority over the effect being executed. That is, when the abnormality occurrence effect is executed, the effect being executed is stopped and the abnormality occurrence effect is executed with the highest priority regardless of whether or not the symbol is changed.

In this example, the game ball B is launched during the period including the confirmation display state from the timing t6 to the timing t8 (the confirmation display state may be the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7). Although the logic of the launch permission signal for notifying the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to permit is not set, in consideration of checking the launch operation by the handle 195 in the confirmation display state, etc. The logic of the launch permission signal may be set during that period so that the game ball B can be launched when the operator operates the handle 195. However, during the period including the confirmation display state from the timing t6 to the timing t8 (the confirmation display state may be the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7), the permission until the launch of the game ball B is limited. , It is desirable that the detection signal is not input even if the game ball B is inserted into various winning openings and gates (gates) so that the game does not proceed unreasonably. ..

Further, in this example, the game ball B is launched during the period including the confirmation display state from the timing t6 to the timing t8 (the confirmation display state may be the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7). The logic of the launch permission signal for notifying the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to allow is not set, and the game ball B is launched from the time of timing t8 (may be timing t7). However, if the handle 195 is operated (contacting the handle 195) from the time before the launch permission of the game ball B is permitted, the contact with the handle 195 is temporarily made after the launch permission of the game ball B is permitted. The game ball B is not fired unless it is separated (contact detection is turned off) and the handle 195 is touched (operated) again. That is, even if the contact of the handle 195 is turned on before the timing t8, the continuous handle 195 is reached unless an edge is detected in which the contact detection for the handle 195 is changed from OFF to ON after the timing t8. The contact is invalidated and the game ball B is restricted from being fired. As a result, even if a regular worker who confirms and displays the set value comes into contact with the handle 195 when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 is attached to the outer frame 2. When the game ball B is closed, the game ball B is not accidentally fired, and it is possible to reliably prevent the player from suffering a loss.

Further, unlike the above, in consideration of accelerating the start of the game based on the end of the confirmation display state, if the handle 195 is operated from the time before the launch permission of the game ball B, the handle 195 is reached. The contact with the handle 195 may be enabled so that the game ball B can be launched from the time when the launch of the game ball B is permitted. In such a case, the handle 195 is operated to prepare for the launch of the game ball B before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and immediately after closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. You will be able to start the game.

Further, in this example, the game ball B can be launched from the time t8 when the work of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and the game such as symbol variation, big hit game, and small hit game can be played. Although it is in a state where it can be performed, it may be in a state where the game can be performed immediately at the timing t7 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. That is, from the time of the timing t7 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the game ball B can be launched, and games such as symbol fluctuation, big hit game, and small hit game can be performed. Fraudulent monitoring at the time] may be used to monitor fraudulent activity. In such a configuration, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2 during the period from the timing t7 to the timing t8, but on the screen of the effect display device 1600, the symbol variation, the big hit game, and the small hit game. An image (game start notification) for notifying that it has become possible to start a game such as a winning game may be displayed.

Further, as another example, the confirmation display state (which may be the period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8), which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, includes the magnetic sensor 2010 and the vibration sensor. While monitoring fraudulent activity using 3003, it may be configured not to notify that the abnormal state is detected when an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration is detected. In addition, normally, when it is determined that a fraudulent act by a magnet or vibration is performed, the value of the magnet goto counter or vibration goto counter is added (incremented) by a value of 1, but from timing t6 to timing t7. In the confirmation display state (which may be the period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8), which is the period of, even if it is determined that a fraudulent act by a magnet or vibration is performed, the magnet The values of the goto counter and the vibration goto counter may not be added. Even with such a configuration, when the confirmation display of the set value is performed, even if the legitimate worker who performs the confirmation display brings the magnet close to the magnet or applies vibration, it is illegal due to the magnet or vibration. No notification or addition is performed as an act, and it is possible to prevent the monitoring of fraudulent activity from becoming an obstacle when confirming and displaying the set value.

Since various needs related to the above-mentioned confirmation display state may exist depending on the environment of the game hall and the like, it may be possible to select and set for each game field. For example, when the power is turned on with the operation of a normal RAM clear switch instead of the confirmation display state, a state in which the operator of the amusement park can select which setting should be set for various processes related to the confirmation display state is generated. After that, when a confirmation display state occurs, various processes related to the confirmation display state are executed with the selected setting. As a result, in the game hall A, fraud monitoring is not monitored in the confirmation display state, but the contact with the handle 195 is enabled, and in the game hall B, the fraud monitoring is performed in the confirmation display state. It can be set to be non-monitoring and to invalidate the contact with the handle 195, and the needs of the amusement park, such as whether or not to check the firing operation by the handle 195 in the confirmation display state. You will be able to adjust to.

Next, a case where fraudulent activity is partially monitored during the confirmation display of the set value will be described with reference to FIG. 242. FIG. 242 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraudulent activity when a fraudulent activity is partially monitored during confirmation display of the set value. Here, the points different from the case where the fraudulent activity is not monitored during the confirmation display of the above-mentioned set value will be described below.

In this example, for the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the confirmation display of the set value is performed (confirmation display state), but the launch of the game ball B is not permitted and the game ball is inserted into the winning opening. It is a special period in which the input of the detection signal is not valid when B wins a prize, and among the fraudulent activities, only the fraudulent activities in the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided are monitored. There is.

Specifically, in the confirmation display state during the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the game area magnetic sensor is not used to monitor fraudulent activity, whereas the setting operation magnetic sensor is used. I try to monitor the fraudulent activity of. This is because, in the confirmation display state, the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and a regular worker who confirms and displays the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a, but the set value. A person other than a legitimate worker who confirms and displays the above does an illegal act so as to bring the magnet closer to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and the set value is changed illegally. This is to eliminate the possibility of malfunction.

On the other hand, in the confirmation display state during the period from timing t6 to timing t7, even if the game ball B is won in the winning opening by fraudulent activity, the detection signal is not input, and an illegal profit can be obtained. Since it is not possible to do so, it is not necessary to monitor fraudulent activities using the magnetic sensor in the game area.

The magnetic sensor of the setting operation unit is used not only in the confirmation display state which is the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7 but also in the period until the timing t8 when the work of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed. I try to monitor the fraudulent activity of. That is, regarding the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor of the setting operation unit, whether the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON, whether it is the normal time or the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. Regardless of the confirmation display state, the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is constantly monitored.

Similarly, in the confirmation display state during the period from timing t6 to timing t7, fraudulent activity is not monitored using the game area vibration sensor, whereas fraudulent activity is performed using the setting operation unit vibration sensor. I try to monitor the behavior. This is because, in the confirmation display state, the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and a regular worker who confirms and displays the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a, but the set value. A person other than the legitimate worker who confirms and displays the setting value is illegally changed by vibrating the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. This is to eliminate the possibility of malfunction.

On the other hand, in the confirmation display state during the period from timing t6 to timing t7, even if the game ball B is won in the winning opening by fraudulent act, the detection signal is not input, and an illegal profit can be obtained. Since it is a period during which it cannot be performed, it is not necessary to monitor fraudulent activities using the game area vibration sensor.

The setting operation unit vibration sensor is used not only in the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, but also in the period until the timing t8, in which the work of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed. I try to monitor the fraudulent activity. That is, regarding the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor of the setting operation unit, whether the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON, whether it is the normal time or the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. Regardless of the confirmation display state, the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is constantly monitored.

Further, during the period including the confirmation display state from the timing t6 to the timing t8 (the confirmation display state may be the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7), the setting operation unit magnetic sensor is used illegally. Action monitoring and setting operation unit The vibration sensor is used to monitor fraudulent activity. If these sensors detect the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, the image of the effect display device 1600 shows the magnetism or vibration. The abnormality occurrence effect A for notifying that the state is abnormal due to the occurrence of is being executed. Further, in the abnormality occurrence effect A, the content of the abnormality (whether the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected) or the abnormality is detected depending on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and the setting operation unit vibration sensor detects the abnormality. The site (the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided) and the like are notified. Then, when the abnormality occurrence effect A is executed, the time at the timing t7 (which may be the time at the timing t8), which is the end of the confirmation display state in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key OFF, is executed. The abnormality occurrence effect A is forcibly terminated. This is because, in the confirmation display state, a legitimate worker who confirms and displays the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and when confirming and displaying the set value, the legitimate worker who displays the confirmation is It cannot be ruled out that the magnet may have been unintentionally brought closer or vibrated. Therefore, even if it is determined that a fraudulent act is performed by a magnet or vibration, it is less necessary to determine that a serious abnormality has occurred, and the abnormal occurrence effect A being executed is forcibly performed. It is supposed to end.

As described above, during the period from the timing t6 to the timing t8, the fraudulent activity is monitored by using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and the setting operation unit vibration sensor. However, even during normal times other than that period, fraudulent activity monitoring using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, fraudulent activity monitoring using the game area magnetic sensor, and setting operation unit vibration sensor are used. The fraudulent activity is monitored, and the fraudulent activity is monitored using the vibration sensor in the game area. In addition, when the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected in such a normal time, the output from the image, lamp, or speaker of the effect display device 1600 causes the magnetism or vibration to be generated in an abnormal state for a predetermined period of time. The abnormality occurrence effect B for notifying the existence is being executed. Here, in the abnormality generation effect B, the image of the effect display device 1600 and the output from the lamp and the speaker are used, whereas in the abnormality generation effect A, only the image of the effect display device 1600 is used, and the abnormality occurs. The production is performed in a manner that is less noticeable than the production B. This is because, in the confirmation display state, the person who confirms and displays the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and when the confirmation display of the set value is performed, the legitimate worker who displays the confirmation is not intentional. This is because the possibility that the magnets are brought close to each other or vibrations are applied cannot be ruled out. In the abnormality occurrence effect B, the content of the abnormality (magnetic or vibration) depends on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, the game area magnetism, the setting operation unit vibration sensor, and the game area vibration sensor detects the abnormality. Whether it is the area where the occurrence is detected) or the part where the abnormality is detected (the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided, or the area in front of the game area 5a, or the area in front of the game area 5a, the third distribution device 2550. Is it a peripheral area?) And so on.

Further, as described above, in the state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 which is the period from the timing t5 to the timing t8, the outer frame 2 is based on the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. The main body frame opening notification for notifying that the main body frame 4 is in the opened state is executed. Further, in the confirmation display state during the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the set value is confirmed by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Confirmation during display notification (confirmation display related notification) is being executed to notify that the display is in progress. Then, after performing the work of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the confirmation display state is entered by turning on the setting key switch 1311a, but in the confirmation display state, the main body frame opening notification is obtained. When the magnetic sensor of the setting operation unit or the vibration sensor of the setting operation unit detects the occurrence of magnetism or vibration in the confirmation display state, the notification during the confirmation display is executed with priority over the notification of opening the main body frame. The abnormality occurrence effect A is executed with priority over the notification during confirmation display.

[25-4. About a modified example of fraud monitoring while changing the setting value]
In the above, regarding the monitoring of fraudulent activity while changing the setting value, it was explained that the fraudulent activity is not monitored while the setting value setting is changed, but even if it is configured to partially monitor the fraudulent activity. Good. A case where fraudulent activity is partially monitored during such setting change of the set value will be described with reference to FIG. 243. FIG. 243 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraudulent activity when a fraudulent activity is partially monitored while the setting value is changed. Here, the points different from the case where fraudulent activity is not monitored during the setting change of the above setting value shall be described below.

In the above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, the main control MPU 1310a starts the main control power-on processing (see FIGS. 175 and 176), but the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4. Until, the setting change process of step S37 is not completed (it is not determined that the setting key switch 1311a was turned off in step S222 of the setting change process), and the subsequent steps are taken during the period from timing t3 to timing t4. It is prohibited so that the interrupt permission setting in S52 is not performed, and the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is delayed as compared with the normal power-on. That is, since the main control side timer interrupt process (see FIG. 177) is not started until the interrupt enable setting in step S52 is performed, the switch input process in step S104 and the fraud detection in step S112 in the main control side timer interrupt process. The processing, the firing permission signal setting processing in step S113, and the like are not executed and are in a standby state. On the other hand, after the power is turned on, before starting the setting change process in step S37, it corresponds to at least the switch input process in step S104, the fraud detection process in step S112, and the launch permission signal setting process in step S113. The process (same process) may be configured to be performed in advance. With such a configuration, in this example, the setting of the set value is changed (change permission state) for the period from timing t3 to timing t4, but the launch of the game ball B is not permitted. At the same time, a special period is set in which the input of the detection signal is not valid when the game ball B wins the winning opening, and the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided in the fraudulent activity. I try to monitor only cheating.

Prior to starting the setting change process in step S37, a process (same process) corresponding to the fraud detection process in step S112 is performed in advance, and among the fraudulent acts, the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch are performed. When only the fraudulent activity in the area where 1311a is provided is monitored, in the process, as in the fraudulent activity detection process in step S112, when the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010 or the vibration sensor 3003 is input, It is determined that fraudulent activity by magnets or vibration is being performed, and the values of the magnet goto counter and vibration goto counter are added (incremented) by a value of 1. However, in the main control power-on processing, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, and after the setting change processing in step S37 is completed (the setting key switch 1311a is turned off in step S222 of the setting change processing). After making a determination), in step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared except for a specific area. Therefore, even if it is determined that a fraudulent act by a magnet or vibration is performed in the change permission state during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the values of the magnet goto counter and the vibration goto counter are added (incremented). By clearing the RAM at the end of the change permission state, the value 0 (zero) is set (initialized) as the initial value in the value of the magnet goto counter or the vibration goto counter. In this way, at the end of the change permission state, the values of the magnet goto counter and the vibration goto counter are initialized, but in the change permission state, the person who changes the setting of the set value is the setting key switch 1311a or the setting switching button 1311b. It is not possible to rule out the possibility that the person who changes the setting unintentionally brings the magnet closer or vibrates when the setting of the set value is changed. For this reason, even if it is determined that fraudulent activity is being performed by magnets or vibration, it is less necessary to determine that a serious abnormality has occurred, and the values of the magnet goto counter and vibration goto counter are initially set. It is supposed to be changed.

Specifically, in the change permission state during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, fraudulent activity is not monitored using the magnetic sensor in the game area, whereas the magnetic sensor in the setting operation unit is used. I try to monitor the fraudulent activity of. This is because, in the change permission state, a regular worker who changes the setting of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b while the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. However, a person other than a legitimate worker who changes the setting value of the setting value illegally changes the setting value by cheating to bring the magnet closer to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. This is to eliminate the possibility of malfunction such as being damaged.

On the other hand, in the change permission state during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, even if the game ball B is won in the winning opening by fraudulent act, the detection signal is not input and an illegal profit can be obtained. Since it is not possible to do so, it is not necessary to monitor fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor in the game area.

The magnetic sensor of the setting operation unit is used not only in the confirmation display state which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4 but also in the period until the timing t5 when the work of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed. I try to monitor the fraudulent activity. That is, regarding the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor of the setting operation unit, whether the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON, whether the setting key switch 1311a is in the normal state or the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. Regardless of the change permission state, the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is constantly monitored.

Similarly, in the change permission state during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, fraudulent activity is not monitored using the game area vibration sensor, whereas fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit vibration sensor is not performed. I try to monitor the behavior. This is because, in the change permission state, a regular worker who changes the setting value of the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b while the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. However, a person other than a legitimate worker who changes the setting value of the setting value illegally changes the setting value by vibrating the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. This is to eliminate the possibility of malfunction such as being damaged.

On the other hand, in the change permission state during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, even if the game ball B is won in the winning opening by fraudulent act, the detection signal is not input and an illegal profit can be obtained. Since it is not possible to do so, it is not necessary to monitor fraudulent activities using the game area vibration sensor.

It should be noted that the setting operation unit vibration sensor is used not only in the change permission state which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4 but also in the period until the timing t5 when the work of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed. I try to monitor the fraudulent activity of. That is, regarding the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor of the setting operation unit, whether the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON, whether it is the normal time or the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. Regardless of the change permission state, the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is constantly monitored.

Further, in the change permission state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the set value is set by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. The setting is being changed to notify that the change is being made. The change permission state (which may be the period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5), which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, includes the first start port 2002 and the second start port. When the game ball B wins a prize in the winning openings such as 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, and the large winning opening 2005, even if the main control MPU1310a inputs the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to each, the game ball B is detected. However, when such a detection signal is input, the game ball B is not permitted to be launched due to the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Even though it is a period during which the game ball B does not win a prize in the winning opening, a warning effect C for notifying that the game ball B has won a prize in the winning opening is executed. This warning effect C is executed with priority over the setting change notification and the main body frame opening notification. That is, when the warning effect C is executed, the warning effect C is executed with the highest priority without performing the setting change notification or the main body frame opening notification.

Further, during the period including the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5 (the change permission state may be the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4), the setting operation unit magnetic sensor is used for fraud. Action monitoring and setting operation unit The vibration sensor is used to monitor fraudulent activity. When these sensors detect the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, the image of the effect display device 1600 shows the magnetism or vibration. The abnormality occurrence effect A for notifying that the state is abnormal due to the occurrence of is being executed. Further, in the abnormality occurrence effect A, the content of the abnormality (whether the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected) or the abnormality is detected depending on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and the setting operation unit vibration sensor detects the abnormality. The site (the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided) and the like are notified. Then, when the abnormality occurrence effect A is executed, the time at the timing t4 (which may be the time at the timing t5), which is the end of the change permission state in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key OFF, is executed. The abnormality occurrence effect A is forcibly terminated. This is because, in the change permission state, a regular worker who changes the setting of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b, and when the setting of the set value is changed, the setting is changed. It cannot be ruled out that a legitimate worker may have unintentionally brought the magnet closer or vibrated. Therefore, even if it is determined that a fraudulent act is performed by a magnet or vibration, it is less necessary to determine that a serious abnormality has occurred, and the abnormal occurrence effect A being executed is forcibly performed. It is supposed to end.

As described above, during the period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5, fraudulent activity monitoring is performed using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, and fraudulent activity monitoring is performed using the setting operation unit vibration sensor. However, even during normal times other than that period, fraudulent activity monitoring using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, fraudulent activity monitoring using the game area magnetic sensor, and setting operation unit vibration sensor are used. The fraudulent activity is monitored, and the fraudulent activity is monitored using the vibration sensor in the game area. In addition, when the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected in such a normal time, the output from the image, lamp, or speaker of the effect display device 1600 causes the magnetism or vibration to be generated in an abnormal state for a predetermined period of time. The abnormality occurrence effect B for notifying the existence is being executed. Here, in the abnormality generation effect B, the image of the effect display device 1600 and the output from the lamp and the speaker are used, whereas in the abnormality generation effect A, only the image of the effect display device 1600 is used, and the abnormality occurs. The production is performed in a manner that is less noticeable than the production B. This is because, in the change permission state, a regular worker who changes the setting of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b, and when the setting of the set value is changed, the setting is changed. This is because it cannot be ruled out that a legitimate worker may have unintentionally brought the magnet closer or vibrated. In the abnormality occurrence effect B, the content of the abnormality (magnetic or vibration) depends on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, the game area magnetic sensor, the setting operation unit vibration sensor, and the game area vibration sensor detects the abnormality. 3), the part where the abnormality was detected (the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, or the area in front of the game area 5a, the third distribution device 2550. Is it the area around the?) And so on.

Further, as described above, in the state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t5 after the power is turned on, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker are used. , The main body frame opening notification is executed to notify the outer frame 2 that the main body frame 4 is in the opened state. Further, in the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4 after the power is turned on, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker are used. A setting change notification (setting change related notification) is being executed to notify that the setting of the set value is being changed. Then, after performing the work of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the change permission state is entered by turning on the power with the setting key switch 1311a turned on, but in the change permission state, the main body frame When the magnetic sensor of the setting operation unit or the vibration sensor of the setting operation unit detects the occurrence of magnetism or vibration in the change permission state, the notification during setting change is executed with priority over the opening notification. The abnormality occurrence effect A is executed with priority over the opening notification and the setting changing notification.

[26. Modification example of setting change such as winning probability]
In the above example, the game ball B is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the result of the special lottery, and the game ball B is accepted in the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 during the small hit gaming state. In the case, the setting of the winning probability etc. is changed for the one that is controlled to shift to the big hit game state, but as shown in FIG. 244, the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 may not be provided. Alternatively, even if the game ball B is received in the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 during the small hit game state, the setting of the winning probability or the like is changed for those that are not controlled to shift to the big hit game state. Good. Hereinafter, a modified example of changing the setting of the winning probability and the like in the pachinko machine in which the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 are not provided will be described as the second embodiment. The pachinko machine 1 of the second embodiment replaces the accessory winning opening 2006 of the pachinko machine 1 in the above example (the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 are arranged inside). The second major winning opening 2006A (the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 are not arranged inside) is provided, and other configurations are the same.

[27-1. Game content of the second embodiment]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit") that is advantageous to the player. , "Small hit", "Time reduction (time reduction) hit", "Probability fluctuation (probability change) hit")) will be drawn. Then, the lottery special lottery result is suggested (derived) to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In the present embodiment, when the game ball B is accepted in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the second special lottery result corresponding to the acceptance in the second starting port 2004 is given priority (derivation). To do. The game ball B is accepted in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 without giving priority to suggesting (deriving) the special lottery result according to the acceptance in the second starting port 2004 (priority change). The special lottery results may be suggested (deriving) in the following order (sequential variation), or the first special lottery result according to the acceptance to the first starting port 2002 and the acceptance to the second starting port 2004 may be suggested. It may be possible to suggest (derive) the result of the second special lottery in parallel at the same time (simultaneous fluctuation).

In addition, the special lottery results drawn by accepting the game ball B at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include "loss", "small hit", "2R probability change big hit", and "15R probability change big hit". , "15R normal jackpot" and the like. In the present embodiment, the second special lottery result includes a "small hit", while the first special lottery result does not include a "small hit". In addition, while making sure that both the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result include "small hit", the second special lottery result wins the "small hit" more than the first special lottery result. The probability may be set high.

If the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is a "small hit", the first After a predetermined time (for example, 0.88 s) elapses after the two major winning openings 2006A are in an open state in which the game ball B can be accepted, a "small hit" game in which the game ball B is closed unacceptably is performed. Will be executed. Since the second big winning opening 2006A is provided in the middle of the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the center accessory 2500, if a "small hit" is drawn, "right-handed" and the first guide The game ball B is driven into the passage 2521. Further, in the small hit game of the second embodiment, although the period for opening the second big winning opening 2006A is shorter than that of the big hit game, keep hitting the game ball so as to flow down the first guide passage 2521. For example, at least one game ball B can enter the second large winning opening 2006A in one small hit game. During the small hit game, the game state before the start of the small hit game state (probability change state, time saving state, etc., which will be described later) is maintained, and after the small hit game, the game state before the start of the small hit game state continues. ..

The first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are either "15R probability variation jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot". In the case, a predetermined time (for example, 29 s) has elapsed after the large winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be accepted, or a predetermined limit number (for example, 10) to the large winning opening 2005. ), When any of the conditions for accepting the game ball B is satisfied, the opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is called one round) that makes the game ball B unacceptable is repeated 15 times as a "big hit". The game is executed. If the result of the first special lottery and the result of the second special lottery are "15R normal jackpot", the lottery is performed by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 after the jackpot game is completed. The fluctuation time of the special symbol for suggesting the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result to the player is the total number of fluctuations (for example, the suggestion of the first special lottery and the suggestion of the second special lottery). It is controlled to shift to the "time saving state" in which the time until the next "hit" is drawn is shortened by making it shorter than usual until the number of times reaches 100 times. If the result of the first special lottery and the result of the second special lottery are "15R probability variation big hit", after the end of the "big hit" game, go to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 until the next "big hit". The variation time of the special symbol for suggesting the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result to the player by the acceptance of the game ball B is shorter than usual, and the first special lottery result and the second The transition is controlled to a "probability change state (high probability state)" that improves the probability that the special lottery result will be a "win".

If the result of the first special lottery and the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are "2R probability variation jackpot", the second big winning opening 2006A , An opening / closing pattern that makes the game ball B unacceptable after a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 s) has elapsed after the opening state in which the game ball B can be accepted (one opening / closing pattern is defined as one round). A "big hit" game is executed in which (referred to as) is repeated twice. In addition, after the end of the "big hit" game, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery are drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 until the next "big hit". A "probability change state (high probability state)" that shortens the fluctuation time of the special symbol for suggesting the result to the player and improves the probability that the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result will be "wins". ) ”.

Since the second large winning opening 2006A and the large winning opening 2005 are mainly on the flow path of the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500, the operation of driving the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500. Can be made a player. When the game ball B is received in the second large winning opening 2006A and the large winning opening 2005 when the second large winning opening 2006A and the large winning opening 2005 are open, the payout device 580 is provided by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. A predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the second big winning opening 2006A and the big winning opening 2005 are able to accept the game ball B, by making the second big winning opening 2006A and the big winning opening 2005 accept the game ball B, many game balls B Can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

In the guide passage group 2520 provided on the right side of the center accessory 2500, the first guide passage 2521 side is easier to drive than the second guide passage 2522 side, but the second guide passage 2522 is easier to drive. Since it is less likely to be accepted by the big prize opening 2005 than the side, it is possible to let the player choose which passage to perform the driving operation, and it is difficult for the player to get bored by various games. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest. In addition, only the game ball B driven into the first guide passage 2521 side can be accepted in the second prize opening 2006A.

In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 are between the start of the special lottery and the suggestion of the result of the special lottery due to the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. When the game ball B is accepted at the start port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. To. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than that, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

By the way, the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time and then by combining the lit LEDs. In the following, blinking of the LED for a predetermined time for suggesting the result of the first special lottery to the player is referred to as "variable display of the first special symbol", and for suggesting the result of the second special lottery to the player. The blinking of the LED for a predetermined time may be referred to as "variable display of the second special symbol", and the LED lighting combination pattern that suggests the result of the first special lottery to the player is the "stop symbol of the first special symbol". The LED lighting combination pattern that suggests the result of the second special lottery to the player may be referred to as a "stop symbol of the second special symbol".

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 indirectly controls the effect image to suggest the special lottery result. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the effect display device 1600 is a pattern sequence in which three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and each pattern sequence is varied to display the pattern. Are stopped and displayed in sequence, and each of the three picture rows is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three picture rows that are stopped and displayed are combined with the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than "missing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is performed. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a "small hit" game, a "big hit" game, etc.) occurs according to the result of the special lottery.

In addition, the time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern sequence fluctuates and the confirmed image is displayed. It is different from the time until it is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 is performed according to the lottery special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect of operating the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301. In the player participation type production, the pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by the operation button elevating drive motor 367 to make it stand out, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and the back It is possible to perform light emission effect, display effect, etc. by appropriately using the pre-effect unit 3200, etc., and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. It can be suppressed.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type production in which the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated, the correct operation is performed when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation to be operated. Notify the player to that effect.

Further, when the game ball B is received in the ordinary winning opening 2003, a lottery of the ordinary lottery result as to whether or not the second starting opening door 2411 is opened in a predetermined pattern is performed on the main control board 1310. Then, the drawn ordinary lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 s to 6000 s, also referred to as an ordinary fluctuation time) on the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol for suggesting the result of the normal lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the normal winning opening 2003 to the player is set to "6000s" in the normal state, while the probability change state. And in the time saving state, it is set to "0.1s".

In addition, the probability of hitting a normal figure (the probability that the normal lottery result will be a "normal hit") is set to "10/11", and when the game ball B is accepted in the normal winning opening 2003, it is "normal" in most cases. It becomes a "hit" and the second starting door 2411 is opened. Further, when the normal lottery result is "normal hit", the period for opening the second start door 2411 is set to "0.1 s" in the normal state, while "2" in the probability change state and the time saving state. It is set to "0.0s". Therefore, in the normal state, the second start opening door 2411 is opened only at intervals of 6000 s at the shortest, and the opening period is extremely short, so that the game ball B is not accepted into the second start opening 2004 very much. It is said to be difficult. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts aimed at accepting the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 in the normal state. On the other hand, in the probabilistic state, not only the second start opening door 2411 is frequently opened, but also the open state is long, so that the game ball B can be easily accepted into the second start opening 2004. .. It should be noted that the probability of hitting a normal figure may be different between the normal state (low probability non-time saving state), the time saving state (low probability time saving state), and the probability variation state (high probability time saving state). For example, in the normal state. The probability of hitting the normal figure is set to "1/11", the probability of hitting the normal figure is set to "10/11" in the time saving state or the probability change state, and the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 is extremely high in the normal state. On the other hand, by facilitating the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004 in the time saving state or the probability change state, the game ball B to the second start port 2004 in the time saving state or the probability change state. It is also possible to suppress fraudulent acts aimed at accepting the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 in the normal state while allowing the acceptance to occur frequently. In addition, while the probability of hitting a normal figure is set to zero (0/11) in the normal state (low probability non-time saving state), the probability of hitting a normal figure is set to "10/11" in the time saving state or the probability change state. Or "11/11", and the fraudulent activity aimed at accepting the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 in the normal state may be further suppressed.

As described above, in the normal state, the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 hardly occurs, and the suggestion of the first special lottery result mainly based on the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 (first). (Variation display of special symbols) is performed. On the other hand, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state, since the game ball B is driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500, the game ball B is frequently accepted into the second starting port 2004, mainly the second. The suggestion of the result of the second special lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball B to the starting port 2004 (variation display of the second special symbol) is performed.

Further, if the game ball B is accepted in the ordinary winning opening 2003 between the start of the ordinary lottery and the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result due to the acceptance of the game ball B in the ordinary winning opening 2003, the ordinary lottery result is suggested. Since the above cannot be started, the start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the normal lottery result previously drawn is completed. The number of reserved ordinary lottery results is limited to four for the ordinary winning opening 2003, and for more than that, the ordinary lottery result can be reserved even if the game ball B is accepted in the ordinary winning opening 2003. I try to discard it instead. Instead of this example, the game ball B was accepted into the ordinary winning opening 2003 between the start of the ordinary lottery and the suggestion of the result of the ordinary lottery due to the acceptance of the game ball B into the ordinary winning opening 2003. In that case, the ordinary lottery result may be discarded without being reserved. As a result, it is further prevented that the game ball B is driven into the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening 2004 in the normal state, and the second special lottery is performed in the normal state to win a small hit. It can be prevented from occurring, and fraudulent acts aimed at accepting the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 in the normal state can be further suppressed.

Further, the suggestion of the normal lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2003 is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 in the same manner as the special lottery result. In the function display unit 1400, the result of the normal lottery is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the normal lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is that an LED different from the LED suggesting the special lottery result is repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined time, and then the normal lottery is performed by the combination of the lit LEDs. Suggest results.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in the normal state, the game ball B is driven into the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the first special based on the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting port 2002. The lottery result is suggested (variation display of the first special symbol). In addition, when the first special lottery result becomes "15R normal jackpot" in the normal state, the game ball B is driven aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 by controlling the transition to the time saving state after the jackpot game is completed. The suggestion of the result of the second special lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 (variation display of the second special symbol) is performed. When the predetermined number of fluctuations (the total number of suggestions of the first special lottery and the second special lottery is 100) is reached without a big hit in the time saving state, the time saving state is terminated and the normal state is reached. The first special lottery result is suggested based on the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 by driving the game ball B aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500 again. Change display of the symbol) is performed.

In addition, when the first special lottery result becomes "15R probability variation jackpot" or "2R probability variation jackpot" in the normal state or the time saving state, the transition to the probability variation state (high probability state) is controlled after the jackpot game ends, and the center accessory The game ball B aimed at the right side of 2500 is driven, and the suggestion of the second special lottery result (variation display of the second special symbol) based on the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 is performed. The probability change state is continuously executed until the next big hit, and when the second special lottery result becomes "15R normal big hit" in the probability change state, the transition to the time reduction state is controlled after the end of the big hit game, and the big hit occurs in the time reduction state. When the predetermined number of fluctuations (the total number of suggestions of the first special lottery and the second special lottery is 100) is reached, the time saving state is terminated and the transition to the normal state is controlled.

Further, when the second special lottery result becomes "15R probability variation jackpot" or "2R probability variation jackpot" in the probability variation state, the transition to the probability variation state (high probability state) is controlled again after the jackpot game ends. In this way, the probabilistic state continues until the "15R normal jackpot" is reached, and when the "15R normal jackpot" is reached, the shift control is performed to the time saving state after the jackpot game is completed.

In addition, when only the first special lottery result is held without the held second special lottery result, or when there is no held second special lottery result, the game ball B goes to the first starting port 2002. If is accepted, the suggestion of the result of the first special lottery (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed even in the time saving state or the probability change state. Then, when the first special lottery result becomes "15R normal jackpot" in the time saving state or the probability change state, the transition control is performed to the time saving state after the end of the big hit game, and the first special lottery result becomes "15R" in the time saving state or the probability change state. When it becomes "probability change big hit" or "2R probability change big hit", the transition control to the probability change state is performed after the end of the big hit game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the probability of becoming a "small hit" as a result of the second special lottery (small hit probability) is set to be much higher than the big hit probability (for example, the big hit probability of 10 in the probability change state). About twice). In addition, during the time saving state or the probability change state, the game ball B is frequently accepted into the second starting port 2004 and the second special lottery is held, so that small hits frequently occur and the second big prize is won. The mouth 2006A is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.88 s).

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, small hits frequently occur in the second special lottery in the time saving state or the probability change state, and even if it does not become a big hit, the prize balls that exceed the firing amount are obtained little by little. It is possible, and the longer the time saving state or the probabilistic state continues, the more prize balls can be won. Therefore, not only the game ball B does not decrease in the time saving state or the probability change state, but also the player's ball can be increased by the prize ball acquired by the generated small hit. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the game in the normal state in which the consumption of the game ball B is large, and the ball held by the player even if the ball is not a big hit due to the occurrence of a small hit as well as the consumption of the game ball B is small. It is possible to control the game to a completely different state from the game executed in the increasing time saving state and the probabilistic state.

[27-2. Change of settings such as winning probability of the second embodiment]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the second embodiment, the probability of a big hit, a small hit, or the like that is changed according to the set value will be described.

In the second embodiment as well, as in the above-described example, a table according to the set value is selected as the table (hit determination table, big hit symbol determination table, small hit symbol determination table, etc.) used in the special lottery or the like. The table used in the special lottery or the like is provided for each set value, and each table is set so that at least a part of the values is different.

As shown in FIG. 245 (A), in the present embodiment, the "big hit probability" and the "small hit probability" are set corresponding to each of the set values 1 to 6.

In addition, the jackpot probability (the ratio of the jackpot judgment value indicating that the jackpot has been won in the hit judgment table), which is common to the first special lottery and the second special lottery, is set to a different value for each set value, and is usually set. The jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the state and the time saving state (low probability state) is "1/319" at the set value 1, "1/309" at the set value 2, and the set value 3 Is "1 / 299", the set value 4 is "1/289", the set value 5 is "1/279", and the set value 6 is "1/269". In addition, the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the probability change state (high probability state) is "1/30" for the set value 1, "1/40" for the set value 2, and the set value 3 Is "1/50", the set value 4 is "1/60", the set value 5 is "1/70", and the set value 6 is "1/80".

In this way, in the normal state and the time saving state (low probability state), the higher the set value, the higher the jackpot probability, but in the probabilistic state, the set value becomes higher as opposed to the normal state and the time saving state. The jackpot probability is getting lower. That is, the jackpot probability of the set value 6 is the highest in the normal state and the time saving state, while the jackpot probability of the set value 1 is the lowest in the probability variation state. The jackpot probability is not limited to being proportional to or inversely proportional to the set value, and for some cases, the jackpot probability set to a set value lower than the set value is higher than the jackpot probability set to an arbitrary set value. It may be set to be high.

As shown in FIG. 245 (A), the small hit probability (the ratio of the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit was won in the hit judgment table) in the first special lottery is "0" in all the set values. In the normal state and the time saving state (there is no chance of winning a small hit), it is difficult to obtain a prize ball by a small hit, while the small hit probability in the second special lottery (small hit in the hit judgment table). The ratio of the small hit judgment value indicating that the player has won the prize is set to "one-third" common to all the set values, which is a very high probability compared to the big hit probability, so it is small in the probability variation state and the time saving state. Hits occur frequently, making it easier to win prize balls.

In the probabilistic state, the jackpot probability is the lowest at the set value 6, so the jackpot is less likely to occur (delay) than the low set value, which causes the probabilistic state to continue for a long period of time, so the set value is high. Indeed, the number of small hits that occur before a big hit will increase. That is, the higher the set value, the more prize balls can be obtained by the small hit, and the next big hit is promised, and the higher the set value, the higher the degree of advantage. In other words, in the probabilistic state, the next big hit is promised regardless of the set value, but the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained other than the big hit is different for each set value, and the higher the set value, the bigger the hit. The expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in other places is increasing.

In addition, the duration of the probability change state is not set to the next big hit, and the predetermined number of fluctuations is the same as in the normal state and the time saving state (the number of suggestions of the first special lottery and the suggestion of the second special lottery is 100 times). By making the configuration that ends when the value is reached, the higher the set value, the higher the jackpot probability, and the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of jackpot occurrence, thereby increasing the degree of advantage. It is also good (so-called number-cut probability change). In this case, although the next big hit is not promised, the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained other than the big hit is different for each set value, and the higher the set value, the more the number of prize balls that can be obtained other than the big hit. Although the expected value increases, it is possible to realize a game-like property in which a big hit is expected to occur by the time the end condition of the probability change state is satisfied, and it is possible to improve the interest. In order to realize such game characteristics, the jackpot probabilities in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the normal state and the time saving state are set so as not to have a setting difference (uniform at 1/319), and the probability changes. As described above, the setting difference may be provided only for the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the state.

Further, in realizing the playability of the second embodiment, in the case of a set value lower than the specific set value, the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is made higher than the small hit probability in the second special lottery, while In the case of a set value higher than a specific set value, the jackpot probability in the probability variation state may be made lower than the small hit probability in the second special lottery. Specifically, for example, the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the normal state and the time saving state (low probability state) is set to "1/250" with the set value 1 and "240" with the set value 2. "1/1", set value 3 is "1/230", set value 4 is "1/180", set value 5 is "1/170", and set value 6 is "1/160". The jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the probability change state (high probability state) is "1/25" for the set value 1, "1/24" for the set value 2, and "1/24" for the set value 3. "1/23", setting value 4 is "1/18", setting value 5 is "1/17", setting value 6 is "1/16", while small in the second special lottery It can be exemplified that the hit probability (the ratio of the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit is won in the hit judgment table) is set to "1/20" which is common to all the set values.

In the case of such a configuration, since the small hit probability in the second special lottery is lower than the big hit probability in the probabilistic state at the set values 1 to 3, the prize ball that can be obtained by the small hit in the probable change state. While the number is relatively small, with the set values 4 to 6, the probability of a small hit in the second special lottery is higher than the probability of a big hit in the probability change state, so the prize that can be obtained by the small hit in the probability change state. The number of balls will be relatively large. In particular, when the set value is 4 or more, the jackpot probability becomes lower than the small hit probability in the probability variation state, making it difficult for the jackpot to occur, and many prizes are given due to the expectation that the probability variation state will continue for a long time and the small hit. It is possible to create a game that gives a sense of expectation that a ball can be acquired. Further, the history information of the probability of the big hit generated in the probable change state after the power is turned on and the probability of the small hit generated in the probable change state is stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM or the like) of the peripheral control unit 1511. If various hit probability information based on the history information is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the player can be made aware that the probability of a small hit is higher than the probability of a big hit in the probabilistic state. It is possible to give a person a feeling of expectation that "the set value may be 4 or more", and to give new enjoyment and fun that have never existed before while the game is continued in the probabilistic state. In addition, the player feels that the probabilistic state continues for a long period of time and that a large number of prize balls can be obtained by a small hit in the probable change state, so that the player feels that the set value may be 4 or more. It can also be recognized, and in this respect as well, it can add new enjoyment and fun that has never existed before. As described above, with a specific set value (setting value 4 in this embodiment) as a boundary, and with a set value higher than that, the game is transformed into a game in which many prize balls can be obtained by a small hit. Can be further improved.

Further, as another embodiment, the higher the set value in the probabilistic state, the higher the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery, and the higher the set value, the higher the second special lottery. You may try to increase the probability of a small hit at. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 245 (B), the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the normal state and the time saving state (low probability state) is set to the set value 1. "1/319", setting value 2 is "1/309", setting value 3 is "1/299", setting value 4 is "1/289", setting value 5 is "1/279" , The set value of 6 is "1/269". The small hit probability in the probability variation state (high probability state) is "1 / 31.9" at the set value 1, "1/30.9" at the set value 2, and "29.9 minutes" at the set value 3. 1 ”, the setting value 4 is“ 1 / 28.9 ”, the setting value 5 is“ 1 / 27.9 ”, and the setting value 6 is“ 1 / 26.9 ”. As described above, in the probabilistic state, the jackpot probability of all the set values is increased 10 times as compared with the normal state and the time saving state.

In addition, the small hit probability in the second special lottery is "1/7" for the set value 1, "1/6" for the set value 2, "1/5" for the set value 3, and "1/5" for the set value 4. "1/4", the set value 5 is "1/3", and the set value 6 is "1/2". Therefore, with the set value 1, a small hit is generated once every 7 times the second special lottery is performed, whereas with the set value 6, a small hit is generated every time the second special lottery is performed twice. It will occur only once, and the frequency of small hits will increase. That is, at the set value 6, small hits occur more frequently than at the set value 1, and it is easier to obtain a prize ball by the small hit. The higher the set value, the more the prize can be obtained in the probabilistic state or the time saving state. The expected value of the number of balls is increasing.

In addition to changing the settings of the jackpot probability and the small hit probability described above, or without changing the settings of the jackpot probability and the small hit probability, the degree of advantage can be increased by changing the determination ratio of the jackpot type for each set value. It may be changed. As described above, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state, the second special lottery is mainly executed and a small hit can be generated, while in the normal state, the first special lottery is mainly executed and a small hit cannot be generated. Therefore, the degree of advantage changes according to the duration of the probability change state or the time saving state.

Also, in the probabilistic state, as in the normal state and the time saving state, the higher the set value, the higher the jackpot probability, and the higher the set value, the higher the small hit probability. May perform a so-called fall lottery in which a lottery is made as to whether or not to end the probability change state when the special lottery result becomes "missing" during the probability change state. Further, in this case, the fall probability (probability of ending the probability change state) may be common for each set value without being different, or the fall probability may be different for each set value.

For example, as shown in FIG. 245 (C), the fall probability in the high probability state may be set to "1/100" common to all the set values. In this case, the fall lottery result ends the probability change state. Although the probability of showing is not different for each set value, as shown in FIG. 245 (B), the jackpot probability improves as the set value is higher, so the frequency and number of jackpot occurrences are different for each set value. The degree of advantage is changed, and the higher the set value, the higher the degree of advantage.

Further, the fall probability in the high probability state may be changed for each set value. For example, as shown in FIG. 245 (D), the fall probabilities are "1/80" for the set value 1 and the set value 2, "1/90" for the set value 3 and the set value 4, the set value 5 and the setting. A value of 6 may be set to "1/100".

In this case, with the set value 1, the jackpot probability is "1 / 31.9", whereas the fall probability is "1/80", and the jackpot probability is about 2.5 times higher than the fall probability. On the other hand, with the set value 6, the jackpot probability is "1 / 26.9", while the fall probability is "1/100", and the jackpot probability is about 3.7 of the fall probability. It has been doubled. That is, by increasing the jackpot probability as the set value increases and increasing the rate of winning the jackpot before the fall lottery result is obtained, the higher the set value, the higher the degree of advantage. There is.

If the result of the fall lottery to end the probability change state is obtained during the probability change state, the jackpot probability is returned from the probability of the probability change state (high probability) to the probability of the normal state (low probability), while the second special lottery. The control to make the fluctuation time of the special symbol shorter than usual for suggesting the result to the player may be continued, and in this case, the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game is a predetermined number (for example, the first special). The control may be terminated and the control may be performed to shift to the normal state based on the fact that the number of suggestions of the lottery suggestion and the suggestion of the second special lottery is 100). That is, when a fall lottery result for ending the probability change state is obtained during the probability change state, the probability change state may be ended and the shift to the time saving state may be controlled. In addition, when the fall lottery result that ends the probabilistic state is obtained, the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game is already a predetermined number of times (for example, the suggestion number of the first special lottery suggestion and the second special lottery suggestion is totaled 100 times. ) Is reached, the transition control to the normal state may be performed without the transition control to the time saving state after the probability change state is terminated.

In addition, when a fall lottery result that ends the probability change state is obtained during the probability change state, the jackpot probability is returned from the probability of the probability change state (high probability) to the probability of the normal state (low probability), and the second special lottery result is changed. The fluctuation time of the special symbol for suggesting to the player may be returned to the normal fluctuation time. That is, when a fall lottery result for ending the probability change state is obtained during the probability change state, the probability change state may be ended and the transition to the normal state may be controlled. In this case, the fall lottery may be performed even during the time saving state, and when the fall lottery result for ending the time saving state is obtained during the time saving state, the time saving state is ended and the normal state is entered. It may be controlled.

In the example shown in FIG. 245 (E), after the transition to the probable change state is controlled after the end of the big hit game, the occurrence ratio of the big hit type in which the probable change state ends when the special lottery result becomes "big hit" is determined. The degree of advantage is changed by changing it. Specifically, when the first special lottery result mainly executed in the normal state (low probability non-time saving state) becomes "big hit", the occurrence ratio of the big hit type is the same for all the set values. "15R probability variation jackpot" which is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game and "2R probability variation" which is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game but the number of prize balls acquired is less than "15R probability variation jackpot" The occurrence ratio of "big hit" is set to "40/100" respectively, and the predetermined number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game (for example, the number of suggestions of the first special lottery and the suggestion of the second special lottery is 100 times). The rate of occurrence of "15R normal jackpot", which is controlled to shift to a shorter time state until it reaches, is set to "20/100".

On the other hand, when the result of the second special lottery, which is mainly executed in the probability change state and the time saving state, is "big hit", the generation ratio of the big hit type is different for each set value. The rate of occurrence of "15R probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to shift to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game is "45/100", and the number of prize balls acquired although the transition to the high probability state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game The rate of occurrence of "2R probability variation jackpot", which is less than "15R probability variation jackpot", is set to "15/100", and after the end of the jackpot game, the time is reduced until a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) is reached. The rate of occurrence of the "15R normal jackpot" is set to "40/100".

With the set value 2, the occurrence ratio of "15R probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to shift to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game is set to "46/100", and the prize is that the transition to the high probability state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game. The rate of occurrence of "2R probability variation jackpot", in which the number of balls acquired is less than "15R probability variation jackpot", is set to "19/100", and the predetermined number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game (for example, suggestion of the first special lottery and The rate of occurrence of "15R normal jackpot", which is controlled to shift to a shorter time state until the total number of suggestions of the second special lottery is 100), is set to "35/100".

With the set value 3, the occurrence ratio of "15R probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to shift to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game is set to "47/100", and the prize is that the transition to the high probability state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game. The rate of occurrence of "2R probability variation jackpot", which is less than "15R probability variation jackpot", is set to "23/100", and the predetermined number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game (for example, suggestion of the first special lottery and The rate of occurrence of "15R normal jackpot", which is controlled to shift to a shorter time state until the total number of suggestions of the second special lottery is 100), is set to "30/100".

With the set value 4, the occurrence ratio of "15R probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to shift to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game is set to "48/100", and the prize is that the transition to the high probability state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game. The rate of occurrence of "2R probability variation jackpot", which is less than "15R probability variation jackpot", is set to "27/100", and the predetermined number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game (for example, suggestion of the first special lottery and The rate of occurrence of "15R normal jackpot", which is controlled to shift to a shorter time state until the total number of suggestions of the second special lottery is 100), is set to "25/100".

With the set value 5, the occurrence ratio of "15R probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to shift to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game is "49/100", and the prize is that the transition to the high probability state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game. The rate of occurrence of "2R probability variation jackpot", in which the number of balls acquired is less than "15R probability variation jackpot", is set to "31/100", and the predetermined number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game (for example, suggestion of the first special lottery and The rate of occurrence of "15R normal jackpot", which is controlled to shift to a shorter time state until the total number of suggestions of the second special lottery is 100), is set to "20/100".

With the set value 6, the occurrence ratio of "15R probability variation jackpot", which is controlled to shift to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game, is set to "50/100", and the prize is controlled to shift to the high probability state after the jackpot game ends. The rate of occurrence of "2R probability variation jackpot", in which the number of balls acquired is less than "15R probability variation jackpot", is set to "35/100", and the predetermined number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game (for example, suggestion of the first special lottery and The rate of occurrence of "15R normal jackpot", which is controlled to shift to a shorter time state until the total number of suggestions of the second special lottery is 100), is set to "15/100".

In this way, when the result of the second special lottery executed mainly in the probabilistic state and the time saving state becomes "big hit", the predetermined number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game (for example, the suggestion of the first special lottery and the second) The rate of occurrence of "15R normal jackpot", which is controlled to shift to a shorter time state until the total number of suggestions of the special lottery is 100), is changed for each set value, and the higher the set value, the more "15R normal jackpot" occurs. By reducing the ratio, it becomes difficult to end the probabilistic state. As a result, the higher the set value, the more difficult it is to end the probabilistic state once the transition to the probabilistic state is controlled, the number of large hits can be increased, and the prize ball based on the small hits generated during the probabilistic state can be increased. It will be possible to acquire. That is, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the probabilistic state.

The higher the set value, the lower the rate of occurrence of "15R normal jackpot", while the rate of occurrence of "2R probability variation jackpot" is higher than that of "15R probability variation jackpot" to suppress the number of prize balls acquired. It is possible to suppress an excessive advantage to the person.

[27-3. Setting value suggestion effect of the second embodiment]
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is configured so that the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained in the probabilistic state and the expected value of the number of small hits that can be won differ for each set value. Specifically, in FIG. 245 (A), the jackpot probability in the probability variation state of the set value 1 is set to "1/30" and the small hit probability is set to "1/3", so that after the jackpot game is completed. The expected value of the number of small hits that can be won from the control to the probability change state to the next big hit is "9 times". In addition, since about one game ball B can enter the second prize opening 2006A in one small hit game, the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained in one small hit game. Is "15 balls". That is, when the set value is 1, the expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained by a small hit in the probabilistic state is "135 balls" of "9 times x 15 balls". Similarly, when the set value is 2, the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by a small hit in the probable state is "195 balls" of "13 times x 15 balls", and when the set value is 3, the expected value is obtained by a small hit in the probable state. The expected value of the possible prize balls is "240 balls" of "16 times x 15 balls", and the expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained by a small hit in the probable state when the set value is 4 is "19 times x 15 balls". "285 balls", the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by a small hit in the probabilistic state when the set value is 5, "345 balls" of "23 times x 15 balls", and the small hit in the probable state when the setting value is 6. The expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained is "390 balls" of "26 times x 15 balls".

Further, in FIG. 245 (B), the expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained by a small hit in the probabilistic state when the set value is 1 is "60 balls" of "4 times x 15 balls", and the probable change state when the set value is 2. The expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by a small hit is "75 balls" of "5 times x 15 balls", and when the set value is 3, the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by a small hit is "5 times". "75 balls" of "x15 balls", the expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained by a small hit in the probabilistic state when the set value is 4, "105 balls" of "7 times x 15 balls", when the set value is 5 The expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by a small hit in the probabilistic state is "135 balls" of "9 times x 15 balls", and the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by a small hit in the probabilistic state is " It is "195 balls" of "13 times x 15 balls".

In this way, the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by the small hit and the expected value of the number of small hits that can be won differ depending on the set value (in FIG. 245 (B), some of them are the same). Therefore, when controlling to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game, it is possible to estimate the set value according to the number of prize balls acquired in the small hit game and the number of winning small hits before the next big hit. it can. It should be noted that the effect of suggesting the set value (set value suggestion effect) may be executed according to the number of prize balls acquired in the small hit game, the number of times the small hit is won, and the like.

For example, as shown in FIG. 246, the peripheral control unit 1511 displays a gauge unit having 6 scales 1600d of 1 to 6 on the effect display device 1600 as a set value suggestion effect so as to correspond to the set value of 6 steps. The scales of the gauge section are colored according to the number of prize balls acquired (number of payouts) by winning the second prize opening 2006A, and the gauge section is staged from the initial display mode as the number of prize balls acquired in small hits increases. It may be made to be colored (increase the coloring display between the scales), and it may be suggested that the high set value is obtained by coloring all the scales of the gauge portion. Specifically, when controlling to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 246 (A), the scale 1600d of the initial display mode, the character 1600b, and the blowout 1600c on which the character's dialogue is displayed are displayed. It is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this initial display mode, assuming that the number of prize balls acquired is "0", only one scale on the leftmost side of the six scales is colored and displayed as a setting value corresponding to the "setting". It suggests that the value is 1 or more, and displays "What is the set value ...?" On the blowout 1600c to suggest to the player through the character 1600b that the gauge unit suggests the set value. ..

Then, when the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the big hit game exceeds the expected value at the set value 1 and is within the range of the expected value at the set value 2. , Of the 6 scales in the gauge section, the 2nd scale from the left side is further colored and displayed (the 1st and 2nd scales from the left side are colored and displayed), so that the setting value is 2 or more. In addition to suggesting, "maybe 2 or more?" Is displayed on the blowout 1600c as a line of the character 1600b to more clearly suggest that the set value is 2 or more (FIG. 246 (B)).

Further, when it is determined by the peripheral control unit 1511 that the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the big hit game exceeds the expected value at the set value 2 and is within the range of the expected value at the set value 3. , The 3rd scale from the left side of the 6 scales in the gauge section is further colored and displayed (the 1st to 3rd scales from the left side are colored and displayed) to indicate that the set value is 3 or more. In addition to suggesting, "Is it 3 or more?" Is displayed on the blowout 1600c as a line of the character 1600b to more clearly suggest that the set value is 3 or more (FIG. 246 (C)).

Further, when the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the big hit game exceeds the expected value at the set value 3 and is within the range of the expected value at the set value 4. , Of the 6 scales in the gauge section, the 4th scale from the left side is further colored and displayed (the 1st to 4th scales from the left side are colored and displayed), so that the setting value is 4 or more. In addition to suggesting, "4 or more !?" is displayed on the blowout 1600c as a line of the character 1600b to more clearly suggest that the set value is 4 or more (FIG. 246 (D)).

Further, when the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the big hit game exceeds the expected value at the set value 4 and is within the range of the expected value at the set value 5. , The 5th scale from the left side of the 6 scales in the gauge section is further colored and displayed (the 1st to 5th scales from the left side are colored and displayed) to indicate that the set value is 5 or more. In addition to suggesting, "more than 5 ??" is displayed on the blowout 1600c as a line of the character 1600b to more clearly suggest that the set value is 5 or more (FIG. 246 (E)).

Further, when the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the big hit game exceeds the expected value at the set value 5 and is within the range of the expected value at the set value 6. , The 6th scale from the left side of the 6 scales in the gauge section is further colored and displayed (all scales are colored and displayed) to suggest that the setting value is 6, and the character 1600b As a line, "You did it! 6 may be !!!!" is displayed on the blowout 1600c to more clearly suggest that the set value is 6 (Fig. 246 (F)).

After the 6th scale from the left side of the 6 scales in the gauge section is colored and displayed (all the scales are colored and displayed), the final stage display has already been reached, so a big hit. The display of the gauge part is not changed according to the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the game, and the next big hit game is started, or if there is an end condition of the probability change state, the end condition is satisfied. Until then, all the scales are colored and displayed.

In addition, it is possible to separately suggest further settings in a state where all six scales in the gauge section are colored and displayed. For example, a big hit game in a state where all six scales in the gauge section are colored and displayed. When paying out the prize ball in the later small hit game, the maximum setting is confirmed to inform the player that the maximum setting (set value 6) is confirmed based on the ball entry detection at the second large winning opening 2006A. A special production lottery for performing the production may be performed. Specifically, with all six scales in the gauge section displayed in color, a special production lottery to win at 1/1000 is performed each time a ball is detected at the second major winning opening 2006A. By winning, the voice output in a special mode (message voice of congratulations on setting 6), various lamps of the door frame 3 in the special mode (lamps in rainbow colors using 7 colors), and the effect display device 1600 It can be illustrated that the highest setting confirmation effect consisting of the special display (message display of congratulations on setting 6) is performed at the same time. By executing the highest setting confirmation effect with all the scales displayed in color in this way, the effect related to the setting suggestion performed earlier gives a sense of satisfaction, and the player is not bored. A feeling of satisfaction can be given to the player, and the game entertainment can be further improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, if a big hit occurs before all the scales are colored and displayed, the display mode of the gauge portion is cleared after the big hit, so that a big hit occurs and a big hit game Since the set value suggestion effect is executed every time the transition to the probabilistic state is controlled later to suggest the set value of the pachinko machine 1, the actual set value is estimated by statistic of the set value suggested by the set value suggestion effect. You will be able to. That is, if the probability change state is executed only once, the number of prize balls acquired by the small hit during this probability change state and the expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained according to the set value may differ from the set value. Although it is difficult to determine, if the number of prize balls acquired by small hits is counted for each probability change state between big hits, the ratio near the specific number of prize balls will increase, so the specific number of prize balls is set as the expected value. By comparing, the set value can be inferred. In this example, it can be inferred that the setting value having the highest suggested ratio in the setting value suggestion effect executed a plurality of times is the actual setting value.

In the case of a big hit, the display mode of the gauge unit may be taken over until the probability change state is completed without clearing the display mode of the gauge unit. Further, in this case, the six scales in the gauge section are set to 1 as equal to or more than the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained in one probability change state or the number of small hits that can occur in one probability change state according to the set value. All the scales may not be colored in the probability change state of the times. As a result, the set value can be suggested based on the number of prize balls, the number of small hits, and the like acquired in the probable change state over a long period of time, so that the reliability of the suggested set value can be improved.

Further, the various set value suggestion effects described above are executed by the peripheral control unit 1511, and the prize ball acquired by the small hit game executed in the probable state of the period from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit Since it is based on numbers and not on actual settings, the suggested and actual settings may differ. Information about the set value (set value information) may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, the prize obtained in the small hit game after the big hit game as a setting value suggestion effect. In addition to the number of balls, the set value may be suggested based on the set value information. Specifically, when the number of prize balls acquired in the small hit game after the big hit game exceeds the expected value of the set value indicated by the set value information, the suggestion mode of the set value suggestion effect is not changed. Alternatively, if the number of prize balls acquired in the small hit game after the big hit game is less than the expected value of the set value indicated by the set value information, the set value or the set value information indicated by the set value information by lottery or the like. The setting value suggestion effect may be changed according to the setting value below the setting value indicated by. With this configuration, the reliability of the set value suggestion effect can be increased, and the set value suggested by the set value suggestion effect can be focused on.

Further, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 grasps the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the big hit game, and the peripheral control unit 1511 says that the total number of the prize balls exceeds the expected value in each set value. However, the setting suggestion in the probabilistic state is not limited to this form, and the setting suggestion in the probabilistic state may be made as follows, although the display of the gauge unit is changed to suggest the setting in the probable change state.

For example, when there is a 6-step gauge unit as described above, each time the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the prize ball paid out by a small hit has reached a certain value, one scale 1600d is colored. , The player may be suggested that the setting is high by achieving the final stage of coloring of the scale 1600d. In this case, it is preferable to achieve the final stage coloring of the scale 1600d by using the expected value of the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the hit game at the set value 6 as a guide, for example, setting. If the expected value of the number of prize balls to be paid out in the small hit game after the hit game with a value of 6 is "195 balls", the payout of "195 balls + α balls (α <195)" is colored with a scale of 1600d at the final stage. The achievement timing can be exemplified.

Further, it is not based on the prize ball paid out by the small hit, but based on the peripheral control unit 1511 determining that the number of times the result of the second special lottery has become the small hit result has reached a certain value. By coloring one scale 1600d and achieving the final stage coloring of the scale 1600d (for example, the number of times the result of the second special lottery became a small hit result reaches 80 times), it is set high. It may be suggested to the player that there is. In this case, the difficulty of achievement changes depending on the relationship between the big hit probability and the small hit probability in the probability variation state in the set value actually set. Then, depending on the display status of the gauge section (for example, the situation where the final stage is reached by coloring one more scale), the result of the second special lottery may be a small hit rather than a big hit in anticipation of the setting value suggestion. It is also possible to provide a new game feature of paying attention to.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when controlled to a probabilistic state, a new game in which the set value is estimated according to the number of prize balls acquired in the small hit game after the big hit game and the number of winnings in the small hit game. Can provide sex.

[28. Relationship between the present invention and embodiments]
The contact detection sensor body 392 of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is the sensor body of the present invention, and the contact detection body 393, the first contact detection body 393a, and the second contact detection body 393b in the present embodiment are the main body. In the detector of the present invention, the switching unit 394 in the present embodiment is used as the switching means of the present invention, and the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1512, etc. in the present embodiment are the present invention. Each of them corresponds to the control means of.

[29. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is provided at a desired portion for detecting the approach or contact of a player with respect to a plurality of contact detectors 393 provided at different positions. By switching by the switching unit 394 so that the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected, when the player approaches or comes into contact with the contact detection body 393 at a desired portion, the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 is electrostatic. Since the capacitance changes, the change in capacitance can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 connected to the contact detector 393, so that the player's approach or contact with the desired portion is detected. Therefore, predetermined control can be executed by control means such as the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, and the effect display control unit 1512 in response to the detection of the contact detection sensor main body 392. On the other hand, in a state where the contact detection body 393 of the desired portion and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching unit 394, the contact detection body 393 provided in the other portion and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected. Is cut off, so even if the capacitance of the contact detector 393 provided in the other portion changes due to the player approaching or contacting the other portion, the contact detector 393 Since the connection is disconnected by the switching unit 394, the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 393 is not detected, and only the capacitance of the contact detector 393 at the desired portion is reliably detected. It is possible to prevent false detection. In this way, for the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at different positions, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is appropriately selected and switched by the switching unit 394. Capacitance can be detected by one contact detection sensor main body 392 for a plurality of contact detectors 393, and the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1512, etc. In the control means of the above, the number of channels for detecting the approach or contact of the player can be reduced, and the number of channels that can be used for the production can be relatively increased. Therefore, more production means (for example, movable decorations, light emitting decorations, effect display devices, etc.) can be controlled by the control means, and the number of production means can be increased to give the player a wider variety of effects. It can be presented, the player can be less likely to get bored, the player can be sufficiently entertained, and the decline in interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, the contact detector 393 is provided in each of the plurality of parts of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to be touched, and the contact detector 393 provided in the desired part by the switching unit 394 according to the game state. By connecting to the contact detection sensor main body 392 and detecting the approach or contact of the player to a desired part, control of the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1512, etc. Since it is possible to leave a predetermined caution or alarm by means, one contact detection sensor main body 392 monitors a wide range of the pachinko machine 1, and the number of channels that can be used for the production is relatively large. The number can be increased, and the same effects as described above can be obtained.

Further, since the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are configured to detect the capacitance by one contact detection sensor main body 392, each contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are provided apart from each other. Therefore, the sensor body having electronic parts such as a sensor IC and an output circuit can be provided in a part that is difficult for the player to see, which improves the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and enhances the appeal to the player. Can be enhanced.

Further, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided with a connection terminal for electrically connecting a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 in advance, the wiring from the contact detection body 393 is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. Since the capacitance of the contact detector 393 can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 simply by connecting to the connection terminal of the pachinko machine 1, the labor required for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the machine 1.

Further, the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided with a connection terminal in advance, and the contact detection sensor main body 392 and the contact detection body 393 can be obtained by simply connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminal of the contact detection sensor main body 392. In comparison with the case where the conductive member is brought into contact with the sensor electrode of the contact detection sensor main body 392 and connected to the contact detector 393 via the conductive member, the number of parts is increased. It can be reduced, the cost required for the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced, and the design of the wiring of the conductive member for connecting to the contact detector 393 can be eliminated, so that the contact detector 393 and the contact detection sensor main body can be eliminated. The degree of freedom of arrangement of the 392 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned effects can be easily realized.

Further, a switching unit 394 for switching the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact sensor main body 392 is provided, and the contact detection body 393 to be detected can be selected by the switching unit 394. Therefore, for example, a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 can be selected. When a player participation type effect is executed in which the distributed contact detectors 393 are touched in a predetermined order, the switching unit 394 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are arranged at the timing when the player touches the contact detectors 393 in order. By switching the connected contact detector 393, it is possible to detect whether or not the player has touched the contact detector 393 in order, and a player-participatory effect with high game characteristics can be achieved as one contact. This can be realized by the detection sensor main body 392, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that is more entertaining to the player.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, the player's fingers or the like are attached to the button body 351 in the effect operation unit 350 that the player can press and operate. When they approach or come into contact with each other, the player approaches the contact detector 352 made of the pachinko metal of the metal plate whose player side is covered by the button body 351, and the capacitance of the contact detector 352 changes. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is detected by the contact detection sensor body 358, it is possible to detect a change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352. Therefore, the button body via the contact detection body 352. It is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player with the 351 (effect operation unit 350). When the player's approach or contact with the effect operation unit unit 350 is detected by using the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358 in this way, the button outer decorative substrate 355, the vibration motor 356, and the effect operation unit are raised and lowered. A predetermined effect is output to the player side through the contact detector 352 and the button body 351 by the effect means such as the mechanism 360, the decorative substrate 364 in the button, and the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, so that the player is entertained by the effect. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. At this time, when the player approaches or comes into contact with the effect operation unit 350, a predetermined effect is output. Therefore, the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358 use the effect operation unit 350 as a non-contact operation unit. It can function as a contact operation unit. Then, since the player can press the effect operation unit 350 that functions as the non-contact operation unit or the contact operation unit when it is projected, the effect operation unit 350 can perform the non-contact operation, the contact operation, and the pressing operation. Since various production operations such as operations can be performed, it is possible to easily embody a pachinko machine 1 having an appearance different from that of a conventional pachinko machine equipped with operation buttons capable of only pressing operations, and other pachinko machines. By differentiating it from the machine, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player.

Further, a predetermined effect is output to the player side in response to the detection of the capacitance of the contact detector 352 by the contact detection sensor body 358, and the capacitance is the contact detector 352 (button body 351). Since it differs depending on the distance between the player and the player, it is possible to set a plurality of capacitance thresholds and output different effects for each threshold. Therefore, it is possible to detect the period (distance) from the approach of the player to the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) in multiple stages, and output the effect according to each stage. By doing so, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player, make it difficult for the player to get bored, and suppress a decline in interest.

Further, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is provided apart from the contact detection body 352, contact detection having an electronic component such as a sensor IC or an output circuit is provided. The sensor main body 358 can be provided in a portion of the effect operation unit 350 that is difficult for the player to see, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved to enhance the appeal to the player.

Further, as described above, since the operation unit can perform various production operations such as non-contact operation, contact operation, and pressing operation, a player participation type production that enables the player's production operation is executed. By doing so, it is possible to entertain a variety of production operations, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, it is possible to entertain the player in the player-participation-type production, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the contact detector 352 whose capacitance is detected by the contact detection sensor body 358 is made of punching metal made of a metal plate having a plurality of holes formed therein, the player can use the plurality of holes to form the button body 351. The capacitance of the contact detector 352 in the approaching or non-contacting state can be reduced, and the occurrence of false detection by the contact detection sensor main body 358 can be avoided. Therefore, by appropriately selecting the number, size, arrangement, etc. of the plurality of holes, it is possible to increase the area of the contact detector 352 while suppressing the increase in capacitance. Therefore, the button by the contact detector 352 The range for detecting the approach or contact of the player with the main body 351 (effect operation unit 350) can be widened. As a result, the contact detector 352 can be enlarged to widen the detection range. Therefore, as in the above embodiment, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) that can be pressed by the player can be enlarged. When the contact detector 352 is made to have the same size as the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, the player can approach or contact the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) by executing the player participation type effect. When requested, since the contact detector 352 covered by the button body 351 is as large as the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, the player's fingers or the like are brought close to or in contact with the effect operation unit 350. The movement distance is shortened, the production operation unit 350 can be operated quickly, the operation timing can be made difficult to be missed in the player participation type production, and the player participation type production can be surely participated. The effect can entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, a button as an effect means provided on the contact detection body 352 on the side opposite to the player side through a plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352. It is possible to output the light emitting effect from the LED 364a of the intermediate decorative substrate 364 to the player side, and it is possible to surely entertain the player with the light emitting effect and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the contact detector 352 is provided on the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) capable of the pressing operation, the contact detector made of punching metal, which is a metal plate having a certain degree of strength and rigidity. The effect operation unit 350 can be reinforced by the 352, and even if the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) is strongly pressed or hit when the player performs a pressing operation, the effect operation unit unit The 350 can be made difficult to be deformed or damaged. Therefore, since the contact detection body 352 can make the effect operation unit 350 less likely to be damaged, the player can press the effect operation unit 350 without hesitation and operate the effect operation unit 350. It is possible to make the player participation type production more enjoyable and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the contact detector 352 is made of punching metal, and the thickness of the contact detector 352 can be reduced as compared with the case where the contact detector 352 is made of expanded metal processed from a metal plate having the same thickness. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space for providing the contact detection body 352, it is possible to easily provide the contact detection body 352, and it is possible to increase the degree of design freedom, which is more appealing to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily designed.

Further, since the contact detector 352 is made of punching metal, the plate thickness is constant as compared with the expanded metal, so that the contact detector 352 can be easily processed into a desired three-dimensional shape by press working. This makes it possible to facilitate the formation of an optimum shape for detecting the approach or contact of the player with the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350), and the above-mentioned effects can be surely realized.

Further, in the effect operation unit 350, since the player side of the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351, the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed by the button body 351 is provided. It is possible to prevent the player from directly touching the contact detector 352 having a plurality of holes, and it is possible to prevent the player from touching the contact detector 352, which causes discomfort, and the button body 351. In the player participation type production using the above as an operation unit, the button body 351 can be operated without discomfort, and the production can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the player side of the contact detector 352 made of punching metal is covered with the button body 351, dirt such as dust and food and drink adheres to the plurality of holes formed in the contact detector 352. This does not mean that the time and effort required for cleaning can be facilitated, and the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed as the pachinko machine 1 that is easy to clean can be reduced.

Further, the effect means such as the button outer decorative substrate 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the button inner decorative substrate 364, and the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 are placed on the side opposite to the player side of the contact detector 352. It is provided so that a predetermined effect can be output to the player side through the contact detection body 352 and the button body 351. The contact detection sensor body 358 detects the approach or contact of the player with the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350). Then, since the predetermined effect is output through the plurality of holes formed in the contact detector 352 and the transparent button body 351, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the effect operation unit 350, and the effect can be produced. It is possible to surely entertain the effect output through (via) the operation unit 350 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the effect means such as the button outer decorative substrate 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the button inner decorative substrate 364, and the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 are placed on the side opposite to the player side of the contact detector 352. Since it is provided, the contact detection body 352 is in a state of covering the effect means, and the contact detector 352 (effect operation unit 350) and the effect means can be compactly integrated. Provided is a pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power, which can be easily provided at a desired portion of the pachinko machine 1 and can be differentiated from other pachinko machines. It can be made easier.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, the player approaches or comes into contact with the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) provided so as to be able to move forward and backward in the vertical direction. As a result, the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 of the effect operation unit 350 changes. Therefore, by detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor main body 358, the effect operation unit 350 can be reached. It is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player. Then, when the contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the approach or contact of the player with the effect operation unit 350, the effect operation unit 350 protrudes upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Therefore, if the effect operation unit 350 protrudes while the player is not in contact with the effect operation unit 350, it abuts (collides) with the player, and the player is in contact with the effect operation unit 350. When the effect operation unit 350 protrudes, it is possible to present the player with an effect by a physical force that pushes the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player by the effect that has not been seen in the conventional pachinko machines, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest to the effect operation unit 350 and to the player. It is possible to surely notice the protrusion of the effect operation unit 350.

When the elevating spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is moved toward the upper end side (upward) of the elevating spring 365 when the effect operation unit 350 is projected, the elevating spring 365 is strongly compressed. Therefore, the urging force can be increased, and when the elevating spring 365 is moved away from the upper end side (downward), the compression of the elevating spring 365 is weakened and the urging force can be reduced. By moving the holding member 385 to an appropriate position, the urging force of the effect operating unit 350 by the elevating spring 365 can be changed. In this way, since the effect operation unit 350 can be projected with various sudden outputs, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect by physical force, and it is possible to make the player less bored and to operate the effect. It is possible to entertain the effect of the protrusion of the unit 350, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the sudden output of the effect operation unit 350 is changed according to the game state, when the player approaches or contacts the effect operation unit 350 with his or her fingers or the like, the effect operation unit unit has a strong force. When the 350 comes into contact with each other, a strong impact is given to the player, which makes it strongly think that there is something good (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage). It is possible to raise the expectation for the hobby and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit 350 is a press operation unit 303 capable of a press operation, when a player participation type effect is executed, the player is made to press the effect operation unit 350 to perform a game. A player can participate in the person-participation type production, and the pressing operation of the production operation unit 350 can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the effect operation unit 350 can be pressed, the player who puts his / her fingers or the like on the effect operation unit 350 (upper surface of the button body 351) can perform the press operation at any time. When a player-participation type effect of pressing the effect operation unit 350 is executed, the effect operation unit 350 is projected by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, so that the player-participation type is produced by the effect image, sound, or the like. It is possible to promptly make the player recognize the start of execution of the player participation type production without informing the start of the execution of the production, and to increase the motivation for the pressing operation of the production operation unit 350 to perform the player participation type production. It can be even more entertaining.

Further, since the effect operating unit 350 is projected by the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, it is compared with the case where the effect operation unit 350 is projected by using the drive motor. Therefore, the effect operation unit 350 can be easily and vigorously projected, and the above-described effects can be more easily achieved.

Further, by detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor main body 358, the approach or contact of the player to the effect operation unit unit 350 is detected, and the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 352 is detected. Since the capacity differs depending on the distance between the effect operation unit 350 and the player, it is possible to set a plurality of capacitance thresholds and project the effect operation unit 350 with a different sudden output for each threshold. It becomes. Therefore, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the period (distance) from the approach of the player's fingers or the like to the effect operation unit 350 to the contact in multiple stages, depending on each stage. By projecting with a sudden output, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decline in interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 is provided with the effect operation unit unit 350 so that the player can advance and retreat by popping up by executing the player participation type effect. When a player approaches or touches the button body 351, the capacitance of the contact detector 352 provided on the back side of the button body 351 that the player of the effect operating unit 350 comes into contact with changes. On the other hand, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided separately from the contact detection body 352 in the effect operation unit 350 detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, the player approaches or contacts. Since the change in the capacitance of the detector 352 can be detected, it is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player with the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350, and the contact detection sensor body 358 is based on the capacitance. The player can be detected. Then, by detecting the contact detection sensor main body 358 and advancing (pressing) the effect operation unit unit 350 by the player, the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, the button outer decorative board 355, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, and the button inner decorative board A predetermined effect is executed by the effect means such as 364, the sudden output adjusting mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600. That is, when the player moves the effect operation unit 350 forward and backward or approaches or comes into contact with the effect operation unit 350, a predetermined effect is executed, so that the player can be entertained by the effect. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

At this time, when the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350, the effect is executed. Therefore, the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) is used as the effect operation unit (non-contact operation unit, contact operation unit). Can work like this. On the other hand, when the player advances (presses) the effect operation unit 350, the effect is executed, so that the effect operation unit 350 can function like the effect operation unit (press operation unit). For this reason, the player can perform various production operations. Therefore, by executing the player participation type production that enables the player's production operation, the various production operations can be enjoyed. This makes it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, the player can enjoy the player-participatory production, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

Further, the player is detected by the capacitance of the contact detector 352 provided near the portion of the button main body 351 in the effect operation unit 350 where the player contacts (the lower side of the upper surface portion 351a). Since the capacitance of the contact detector 352 differs depending on the distance between the contact detector 352 (button body 351) and the player, a plurality of capacitance thresholds for executing a predetermined effect are set for each. It is possible to execute different effects for each threshold value. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the period (distance) from the approach of the player's fingers or the like to the effect operation unit 350 to the contact in multiple stages, the effect is presented according to each stage. Therefore, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decline in interest.

Further, since a predetermined effect is executed by the detection of the player by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358, the effect operation using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358 (non-contact operation, It is possible to give a feeling of operation to the contact operation), and it is possible to make the effect operation more enjoyable for the player.

Further, it is provided with an effect operation unit 350 capable of allowing the player to move forward and backward (pressable), a contact detector 352 capable of detecting the approach or contact of the player with the effect operation unit 350, and a contact detection sensor body 358. Therefore, in the player participation type production, an operation of moving the effect operation unit 350 forward and backward (pressing operation) and an operation of approaching or contacting the effect operation unit 350 with fingers or the like (non-contact operation, contact operation). ), Etc. can be requested, and the various operations can increase the motivation of the player to participate in the player participation type production, and make it easier to participate in the player participation type production. Can be done. Then, when the player participates in the player participation type production, various operations using the production operation unit 350, the contact detection body 352, and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can make the player less likely to get bored. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the player-participatory production, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 of the effect operation unit 350 is locked to the locking portion 371c of the elevating cam member 371 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 to lock the effect operation unit 350 so as not to advance or retreat. Therefore, until the effect of advancing / retreating the effect operation unit 350 is executed, the effect operation unit 350 is made incapable of advancing / retreating by the guide pin 354c and the elevating cam member 371. It is possible to prevent the 350 from moving or shaking without permission. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or anxiety due to the production operation unit 350 moving or shaking without permission, which makes the production by the production operation unit 350 more enjoyable. Can be done.

Further, in the effect operation unit 350, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided at a position away from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection sensor having electronic parts such as a sensor IC and an output circuit is provided. The main body 358 can be provided in a portion that is difficult for the player to see, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 for detecting the capacitance and the contact detection sensor main body 358 having a sensor IC, an output circuit, etc. for detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 are separate bodies. Since the shape, material, etc. of the contact detection body 352 can be appropriately selected regardless of the contact detection sensor body 358, the contact detection body 352 can be used as the shape, form, specifications, etc. of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350. It is possible to optimally correspond to the above, and it is possible to surely embody the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-described effects.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the button main body 351 or the surface member covering the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 395. When the player approaches or contacts the 396 with fingers or the like, the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 352 provided between the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button outer decorative substrate 355 or the button inner decorative substrate 364 or the decorative body 395. The capacitance of the contact detector 397 changes, and the decorative substrate 355 inside the button, the decorative substrate 364 inside the button, or the decorative body 395 executes a predetermined effect of irradiating the player with light according to the change. The light emitted to the player side can strongly attract the player's attention to the decorative substrate 355 outside the button, the decorative substrate 364 inside the button, or the decorative body 395, and entertain the player with the executed effect. Can be done. At this time, the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 provided between the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button outer decorative substrate 355 or the button inner decorative substrate 364 or the decorative body 395 is the button body 351 or the contact detector 397. Since it is formed along the decorative portion provided on the surface member 396, the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 can be made to appear as a part of the decorative portion to the player, and the game can be played. It is possible to make it unrecognizable to the person that the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 is for detecting the player. In this way, since the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 cannot be recognized from the player side, the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 is likened to the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, or the decoration. Even if a part of the body 395 (directing) is blocked, the player does not care about the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397, and the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decorative body 395. Even if the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is provided in front of the above, the presence of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 does not give the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, the effect of the decorative substrate 355 outside the button, the decorative substrate 364 inside the button, or the decorative body 395 can be shown to the player in a good state, and the player can be entertained and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, by detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like with the button body 351 or the surface member 396 by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, the outside of the button covered with the button body 351 or the surface member 396 Since the effect of irradiating the player side with light is executed on the decorative substrate 355, the decorative substrate 364 in the button, or the decorative body 395, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is moved to the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit). In addition to being able to function as in 302), it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation by light. Therefore, for example, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player's fingers or the like are brought close to or brought into contact with the button body 351 or the surface member 396, and the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 approaches or contacts the fingers or the like. By detecting the contact, the effect is executed by the decorative substrate 355 outside the button, the decorative substrate 364 inside the button, or the decorative body 395, so that the player can participate in the player participation type effect, and the player participates in the player. You can entertain the pattern production.

Further, since the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 detects the approach or contact of the player with the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the player's fingers or the like are detected. Since it is possible to make the effect of the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decorative body 395 different according to the distance to and from, the button outer decorative board 355 depends on the movement (position) of the player's fingers or the like. The effect of the decorative substrate 364 or the decorative body 395 can be changed, and a wider variety of effects can be shown to the player, and the various effects can make the player less likely to get bored. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the.

Further, the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 is detected, and when the player approaches or contacts the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button Since the capacitance of the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 provided between the outer decorative substrate 355, the inner decorative substrate 364 of the button, or the decorative body 395 changes, the game on the button body 351 or the surface member 396 The approach or contact of a person's fingers or the like can be easily detected, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned effects can be surely embodied.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is used to detect the change in capacitance, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 can be a conductive member, for example. When the contact detector 397 is a metal vapor deposition film, it can be made transparent by thinning the vapor deposition film, and it can be made to look like a part of decoration by thickening the vapor deposition film to have metallic luster. Can be done. Alternatively, when the contact detector 352 and the contact detector 395 are made of punching metal having an outer shape having a design such as a star shape or a heart shape, the contact detector 352 and the contact detector 395 appear to be part of the decoration. be able to. Therefore, the contact detection body 352, the contact detection body 395, and the contact detection body 397, which cannot be recognized from the player side, can be used, and the above-mentioned effects can be surely achieved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the player's fingers or the like approach or come into contact with the transparent button body 351 covering the upper surface side (front surface side). The capacitance changes, and due to the change, the effect presentation means such as the button outer decorative substrate 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the button inner decorative substrate 364, the protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600. A design of a contact detector 395 and the like (including a contact detector 352, a contact detector left 390L, a contact detector right 390R, a contact detector 393, and a contact detector 397, etc.) for presenting a predetermined effect. Since the pachinko machine 1 is formed in a predetermined outer peripheral shape having a property, the pachinko machine 1 can be decorated by the contact detector 395 itself, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with a good appearance and a high appeal to the player. it can. Further, the surface side of the contact detector 395 or the like is covered with a transparent button body 351 and the effect is presented according to the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 395 or the like due to the approach of the player's fingers or the like to the contact detector 395. Since the predetermined effect is presented via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 by means, the predetermined effect is presented in response to the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like with the button body 351. Therefore, the button body 351 can function as the effect operation unit 301. Since the contact detector 395 and the like that can be seen through the button body 351 have a design, the effect operation unit 301 seems to have a design, which is not found in conventional pachinko machines. The pachinko machine 1 provided with the operation unit 301 can give a strong impact to the player, and can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of differentiating from other pachinko machines. Further, as described above, since the contact detector 395 and the like having a design can give a strong impact to the player, it is possible to strongly have an interest in the contact detector 395 and the like (button body 351). It is possible to raise expectations for the operation of the button body 351 (effect operation unit 301), and to entertain the operation of the button body 351 when the player participation type effect of operating the button body 351 is executed. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since the decorative detector 395 or the like that detects the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like with the button body 351 is formed in an outer peripheral shape having a design, some players may present the effect at first glance. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) for presenting the effect by means. Therefore, when the player participation type effect for operating the effect operation unit 301 is executed, the button body 351 is produced by the contact detector 395 or the like for the first time by urging the player to approach or contact the button body 351. It is possible to make the player aware that the operation unit 301 is used, and it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and further enjoy the player participation type production. Alternatively, when the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301 is executed, when the player approaches or touches the button body 351 without knowing the effect operation unit 301, the contact detector 359 or the like is static. Since the electric capacity is changed and the effect is presented by the effect presenting means, the player can be surprised, and the presented effect can entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the effect is presented by the effect presenting means according to the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 395 or the like, the player's fingers or the like on the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 or the like The approach and contact can be easily detected, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned effects can be easily realized. Further, since the effect is presented according to the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 395 and the like, the player's fingers and the like approach the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 and the like to make contact. Since it is possible to detect the distance (distance) in multiple stages, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player by presenting the effects according to each stage. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by making it difficult to get bored.

Further, since the outer periphery of the contact detector 395 or the like is formed in a predetermined shape, even if an inorganic material such as a punching metal, an expanded metal, or a wire mesh is used as the conductive contact detector 395 or the like. It is possible to impart design to the contact detector 395 and the like, prevent deterioration of the appearance due to the contact detector 395 and the like, and make the contact detector 395 and the like stand out, thereby exhibiting the above-mentioned effects. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily embodied.

Further, since the outer peripheral shape of the contact detector 395 or the like is formed into a predetermined shape, it is possible to construct a product having a design without forming the contact detector 395 or the like in a three-dimensional shape. it can. Therefore, the contact detector 395 and the like can be made into a planar shape or a simple three-dimensional shape, and the cost for manufacturing the contact detector 395 and the like can be reduced.

Further, since the surface side of the contact detector 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button body 351, dust and dirt such as food and drink do not adhere to the contact detector 395 and the like, and the labor required for cleaning is easy. Can be. More specifically, since the contact detector 395 or the like uses a material having irregularities such as punching metal, dirt such as dust and food and drink easily adheres to the irregularities, and it is troublesome to clean the stains. However, since the surface side of the contact detector 395 or the like is covered with the button body 351 even if the contact detector 395 or the like has irregularities such as punching metal, the button body 351 is used. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the adhesion of dirt, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed as an easy-to-clean one.

Further, since the surface side of the contact detector 395 or the like is covered with a transparent button body 351 to prevent the player from touching the contact detector 359 or the like, a metal vapor deposition film or the like can be used as the contact detector 395 or the like. When a material that can enhance the design such as foil stamping is used, it is possible to prevent the player from being worn early by touching it, and it is possible to enhance the durability of the contact detector 395 and the like.

Further, the surface side of the contact detector 395 or the like is covered with the transparent button body 351. As described above, the transparent button body 351 does not allow the player to directly touch the contact detector 395 or the like. Since it is possible to use a detector 395 or the like that is uncomfortable to the touch or that causes discomfort to the player, the degree of freedom of the material used for the contact detector 395 or the like can be increased, and the needs can be met. A contact detector 395 or the like can be formed by a suitable material.

Further, when the capacitance of the contact detector 395 or the like is changed by bringing the player's fingers or the like close to or in contact with the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 or the like, the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 are changed. Since a predetermined effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the like, the player brings the fingers and the like close to or comes into contact with the button body 351 by the effect presented via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 and the like. Can be intuitively recognized, and the player can enjoy the movements of the fingers and the like.

In addition, the effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395, and the player's fingers or the like approach or touch the button body 351 that covers the contact detector 395 or the like. Since the effect presented to the player is executed via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395, the button body 351 can function like a contact operation unit, and the presented effect gives a feeling of operation. Can be added, and the operation using the button body 351 (player participation type production) can be enjoyed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to operate the button main body 351 of the effect operation unit 350 capable of a plurality of operations, the player brings his or her fingers or the like close to or comes into contact with the button main body 351. When the contact detector 352 (contact detection sensor body 358) detects the entry into the detection area such as a finger, the button is emitted by the light emission of the plurality of LEDs 355a of the decorative substrate 355 outside the button and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the decorative substrate 364 inside the button. Light emission effect that the player is irradiated with light through the main body 351, effect that vibrates the player's fingers etc. that are in contact (via) through the button body 351 by the vibration motor 356, button body 351 by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 The button body 351 can function as the contact operation unit 302 because the effect of applying impact, push-up, wind pressure, etc. to the player is executed through (via) the button body 351 by projecting upward. It can entertain the player. Further, at this time, since the player is given effects such as light, vibration, impact, push-up, and wind pressure through the button body 351, the effects can surprise the player and entertain the player. This can increase the motivation for operating the button body 351. Then, while the player's fingers or the like are in contact with the button body 351 and the button body 351 is pressed downward by appropriately moving the fingers or the like, the button body 351 functions as the pressing operation unit 303, so that the contact detector The contact operation by detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc. by 352 and the pressing operation of the button body 351 can entertain the player with various production operations, making it difficult for the player to get bored. It is possible to suppress the decrease of.

Further, the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like is composed of the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and the contact detection body 352 is provided near the back surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351. Therefore, even if the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit is arranged on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351, the contact detection body 352 causes the button main body 351. It is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like on the upper surface portion 351a of the above, and it is possible to obtain the same effect as described above.

Further, since the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like is composed of the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit is provided. Can be arranged on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the upper surface portion 351a (contact detection body 352) of the button body 351. Therefore, the contact detection sensor body 358 can be arranged in an inconspicuous portion, and the pachinko machine The appearance of 1 can be improved.

Further, since the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, and the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 are provided on the back side (lower side) of the button main body 351, the player can see the light through the button main body 351. It is possible to easily impart effects such as vibration, impact, push-up, and wind pressure, and it is possible to achieve the same effects as described above.

[30-1. Main control unit (2)]
The other main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 247, 248, 249, 250 to 268 and 269.
The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control unit 1310 having a main control MPU 1310a that controls the progress of the game, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control unit 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. ing.

[30-1-1. Main control board box]
As shown in FIG. 252, the main control board box 1320 is generally composed of a cover body 1301 and a base body 1302. The cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are made of polycarbonate and are molded of a transparent synthetic resin. The main control unit 1310 can be accommodated in the internal space 1320s formed by superimposing the cover body 1301 on the base body 1302. Since the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are transparently molded from the synthetic resin (polycarbonate), the state of the front surface side and the back surface side of the main control unit 1310 (whether or not they have been tampered with, or illicit Whether or not the IC chip is mounted) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320.
Further, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms 1320z so as to correspond to the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302, respectively, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism 1320z, Next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy one of the sealing mechanisms 1320z, and it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by observing the traces of opening and closing remaining in the sealing mechanism 1320z, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against illegal acts on the main control unit 1310 is enhanced.

[30-1-2. Main control unit]
The main control unit 1310 connects the main control board 1310X (see FIGS. 252 and 269) that controls the progress of the game and the payout of the game ball B, and the winning probability of the lottery described later and the area that is advantageous to the player. It is roughly composed of a setting change board 1310Y (see FIGS. 252 and 269) capable of setting a game setting related to a distribution rate or the like to any one of a plurality of levels of setting values.

[30-1-2-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310X of the main control unit 1310 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting change board 1310Y. Further, the main control board 1310X includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second starting port sensor 2402, a large winning opening sensor 2403, a first receiving / receiving sensor 2406, a starting port solenoid 2404, an attacker solenoid 2405, and a general winning opening sensor. It is connected to 3001, the first start port sensor 3002, the magnetic sensor 3003, the out port left sensor 1008a, and the out port right sensor 1008b.

[30-1-2-2. Setting change board]
The setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1310 has a setting switch 1311a capable of switching the set value of the pachinko machine 1 and confirming the set value, and a setting switching button 1311b capable of selecting and switching the set value. It is provided with a setting change permission lamp 1311c indicating a state in which switching of the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is permitted.
The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X by a connector (connection between boards) (a harness between the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X). May be electrically connected via). By this connector connection (connection between boards), the signal from the setting switch 1311a and the signal from the setting switching button 1311b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310X.
The vertical distance dimension of the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1310Y is almost the same as the vertical distance dimension of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310X, and the horizontal distance dimension thereof is the left and right of the main control board 1310X. It is shorter than the distance dimension in the direction, and the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310X and the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1310Y are It matches.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y is arranged along the right side of the setting change board 1310Y at the center of the vertical distance dimension on the center line, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X is the main. Along the left side of the control board 1310X, a position at the center of the vertical distance dimension is arranged on the center line.
On the setting change board 1310Y, a setting switch 1311a having an operation unit 1311j in which the setting key K1 is inserted and rotated is arranged below the center line, and a pressing operation unit is arranged above the center line of the setting change board 1310Y. A setting switching button 1311b having 1311p is arranged, and a setting capable of emitting a single color (for example, red) on the center line of the setting changing board 1310Y and on the upper left side of the setting switch 1311a (lower left of the setting switching button 1311b). The change permission lamp 1311c is arranged.
A setting indicator 1310g consisting of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dots) is placed above the center line of the main control board 1310X and near the connector MSCN, and the center line of the main control board 1310X. The base monitor 1310h, which is lower than the center and is composed of six 7-segment LED displays with a decimal point (so-called dots) arranged in a row from the center to the right side, is arranged near the center of the lower side of the main control board 1310X. A RAM clear switch 1310f having a pressing operation unit similar to the pressing operation unit 1311p of the setting switching button 1311b is arranged therein.

In the present embodiment, the position where the setting key K1 is ready to be inserted into the insertion port formed in the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a (for example, the position where the longitudinal direction of the insertion port having a rectangular shape is along the vertical direction) In the initial position, the setting switch 1311a is turned off. When the operation unit 1311j is in the initial position, the setting key K1 can be inserted into the insertion port, and the setting key K1 can be removed from the insertion port.

The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the operation unit 1311j 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation, and the setting key ON signal changes the setting. Input is input from the board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Further, the setting switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the operation unit 1311j 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position and performing the second ON operation, and the signal of the decision key ON can be turned on. It is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X.
Further, the operation unit 1311j counterclockwise so as to return the setting switch 1311a from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting switch 1311a 60 degrees in the direction and turning it off, and the initial position which is the original position from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on. (That is, the setting switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the operation unit 1311j 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j that turns off the setting switch 1311a). it can. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X.
In the present embodiment, two completely different functions, a setting key ON and a decision key ON, can be realized by a single setting switch 1311a depending on the direction in which the operation unit 1311j is rotated, and only the setting switch 1311a alone. Therefore, the operation of turning on the setting key and turning on the enter key can be performed collectively.

The front surface of the base of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, the pressing operation unit 1311p of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f are openings formed in the cover body 1301 of the corresponding main control board box 1320. Although exposed to the outside via 1301h, the front surface of the base of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, the pressing operation unit 1311p of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the corresponding openings 1301h, respectively. The portion and the setting corresponding to these openings 1301h of the cover body 1301 so that the setting change board 1310Y and the main control board 1310X cannot be modified by invading foreign matter such as a wire through the "gap" formed in and. A foreign matter intrusion prevention unit 1301v (for example, fitting of the cylinders 1301c shown in FIG. 264) for preventing the intrusion of foreign matter such as a wire is molded between the switch 1311a, the setting changeover button 1311b, and the RAM clear switch 1310f. ing.
Although the setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are housed in the internal space 1320s formed by the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 and cannot be touched at all, the cover body 1301 is transparently molded as described above. Therefore, the set value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be visually recognized through the cover body 1301.

In order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern in which the determination key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, and the setting switch 1311a are OFF. The wiring pattern in which the signal of the above is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are arranged so as not to approach each other (separate from each other) on the setting change board 1310Y. At the same time, the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X) is also formed separately, and various signals from the setting switch 1311a are also transmitted on the main control board 1310X. Wiring pattern (that is, the wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern in which the determination key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring in which the OFF signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted. The pattern) and the wiring pattern in which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are also formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other), and the signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted. The routing with the wiring pattern is also formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other).

[30-1-2-3. Setting switch, setting switching button, setting indicator]
The setting switch 1311a, the setting changeover button 1311b, and the setting display 1310g will be briefly described. Here, first, a case of changing the set value of the game setting will be briefly described, and a case of confirming and displaying the current set value will be briefly described. In addition to changing the set value, the setting key K1 is important for checking the current set value, etc., so it is important for 2 to 3 people including the manager of the game hall. Only a limited number of people have it.

When changing the setting of the set value, the main body frame is relative to the outer frame 2 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). 4 is opened, and the setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, and the operation unit 1311j is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. It is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the setting switch 1311a is turned on.
That is, the person who actually changes the setting value first performs the work of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, then turns off the power of the pachinko machine 1 with the power switch 630a, and then turns off the setting switch 1311a. The setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the operation unit 1311j, and the setting key K1 is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation to turn on the setting switch 1311a, and then again. The power switch 630a turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1.

As a result, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a is among the current set values 1 to the set value 6 at the time when the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a is first turned on, which is stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM. The set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1311c is switched from the off state to the on state.

Next, when the pressing operation unit 1311p of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting changing board 1310Y is input from the setting changing board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Each time a person who changes the setting of the set value presses the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a starts from the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y. When the value is increased by 1 and the maximum value of the set value of 6 is reached, the value returns to the initial value of the set value of 1, the value is increased by 1 again, and the set value is displayed on the setting display 1310 g.

Next, when determining the set value, the operation unit 1311j is rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, the original position from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on. Second, rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it off and then rotate it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a is turned on by the ON operation of. This determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set value determined by changing the setting in the specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

Next, set the setting switch 1311a to return from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j that turned on the enter key to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j that turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a is turned off by rotating and turning it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g to the non-display state and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1311c.

Next, the setting key K1 is pulled out from the insertion port of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the work of changing the setting of the set value is completed.

In addition, when confirming and displaying the currently set value, the outside is used when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the frame 2, the setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, and the operation unit 1311j is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first operation. It is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined setting value display permission condition" that the setting switch 1311a is turned on by the ON operation of.
That is, the person who actually confirms and displays the currently set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (a state in which power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). , The work of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and then the setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a and rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn the first ON. By operating the setting switch 1311a, the setting key is turned on.
The setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X.

The main control MPU 1310a has the current set value stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (out of the set value 1 to the set value 6 at the time when the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a is first turned on. The set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310 g. At this time, the state in which the setting change permission lamp 1311c is turned off is maintained, and even if a person who confirms the set value presses the pressing operation unit 1311p of the setting switching button 1311b, the set value is set in response to this pressing operation. It is not changed at all, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310g is not changed.

Then, when the confirmation of the currently set setting value is completed, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return and turn it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the state of the set value by the setting display 1310g disappears.

Finally, the setting key K1 is pulled out from the insertion port of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the confirmation display work of the currently set setting value is completed. To do.

As described above, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is the outer frame when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to 2, and the setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, and the operation unit 1311j is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. It is necessary that the setting key is turned on by the operation, whereas the predetermined setting value display permission condition is, as described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or a power failure (momentary power failure). The main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 and the setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a after the power is restored after the power is restored. It is necessary that the setting key is turned on by the operation unit 1311j being rotated 60 degrees clockwise and the first ON operation.
In this way, the predetermined set value change permission condition and the predetermined set value display permission condition are such that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting switch 1311a is inserted into the operation unit 1311j. There is a common requirement that the setting key K1 is inserted, the operation unit 1311j is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and the first ON operation is performed, so that the setting key is turned ON. The difference is that the value change permission condition requires "at the time of power recovery", whereas the predetermined set value display permission condition requires "after power recovery".

Here, the set value of the game setting will be described. The "set value" is the probability for determining whether or not it is a big hit by lottery, the probability for determining whether or not it is a small hit, and the probability from the time of probability change. Probability for determining lottery when shifting to normal time (the above are also collectively referred to as "probability of winning the lottery"), distribution rate to areas that are advantageous to the player, etc. can be changed. Therefore, the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player (that is, the number of game balls that the player can acquire can be increased) is set in advance. In the present embodiment, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5 and setting value 6 are prepared in advance as setting values of a plurality of stages, and from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X is a big hit judgment table in which the ratio of the big hit judgment values indicating that the big hit is won is defined, and various tables used in various lottery judgments associated with the set values. The jackpot symbol determination table that defines the ratio of the judgment value of the decision, the small hit judgment table that defines the percentage of the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit was won, and the percentage of the judgment value of the determination of the small hit symbol are specified. It is used to select the small hit symbol determination table, the normal transition determination table that defines the ratio of the determination value of the transition decision from the probability change to the normal time, etc.), or to use various distribution rates associated with the set value. Various tables (for example, a distribution table in which the distribution time is specified, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) are selected. The various tables used in the various lottery determinations associated with the set values are assigned to the various determination values at a predetermined ratio. The various tables used in the various lottery determinations are set so that at least a part of the values are different from each other, and the various tables used in the various distribution rates are set so that at least a part of the values are different from each other. Some have different values based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of one electrical drive source and the table that corresponds to the block that manages the drive of another electrical drive source. Some are set to. Further, as the above-mentioned setting values, six setting values (integers) in the range from the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 are set, but the setting values may be smaller than this and may be in the larger range. It may be a thing. For example, it may be four setting values (integers) in the range of setting values 1 to 4, or eight setting values (integers) in the range of setting values 1 to 8.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays the set value, but also checks the contents of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a at the time of power recovery to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an error, and if the main control side power off processing is not completed normally when the power is turned off, there is an error (or trust) in the contents stored in the RAM built in the unit. An error message is displayed to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

Next, the base monitor 1310h will be briefly described. The base monitor 1310h is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 among the game balls launched in the game area 5a. The number of game balls is displayed. Of the game balls launched into the game area 5a, the game ball collected by the out port 1008 is detected by either the out port left sensor 1008a or the out port right sensor 1008b, and this detection signal is detected on the panel. It is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the relay board 1710.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. It has become.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise) to turn the decision key ON. The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a was turned on from the initial position of the setting switch 1311a. The setting switch 1311a'which can be rotated only in the range up to is used. In this case, the setting switch 1311a'is counterclockwise so as to return from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a'can be turned on by rotating the setting switch 1311a'by 60 degrees and turning it off so that the signal of turning the decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. (The mode of the setting switch 1311a'may be described as "a modification of the decision key (1)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise) to turn the decision key ON. The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, although not shown, a decision key button having a pressing operation unit on the setting change board 1310Y. May be provided. In this case, the pressing operation unit of the determination key button is exposed to the outside through the opening formed in the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the determination key button, and the pressing operation unit of the determination key button and the pressing operation unit of the determination key button are exposed. Preventing foreign matter from entering the setting switching button 1311b so that foreign matter such as wire cannot enter through the opening corresponding to this and the "gap" formed in the setting change board 1310Y and the main control board 1310X. A foreign matter intrusion prevention unit similar to the unit 1301v is provided.
When the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed. It can be determined that the enter key is not ON when the pressing operation is not performed.

The position where the decision key button is arranged on the setting change board 1310Y may be near the setting switch 1311a or near the setting switching button 1311b. On the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, a sticker on which the name of each button is printed is affixed to the enter key button and the setting changeover button 1311b so that the enter key button and the setting changeover button 1311b are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this sticker). Further, so that the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b are not confused, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation portion of either the enter key button or the setting switching button 1311b (to press the pressing operation portion). It is necessary to open the cover.), The color of the pressing operation unit may be different, or the outer shape of the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b or the pressing operation may be adopted. A switch having a different shape of the portion may be adopted, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation portion may be adopted as the enter key button. Other types of switches that do not have a push operation unit as a decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. The switch can be mentioned. Further, when the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b are provided on the setting change board 1310Y, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the setting switching button 1311b are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The setting change board 1310Y is formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other), and the connection to the connector SMCN terminal of the setting change board 1310Y (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X) is also separated. Also in the main control board 1310X, the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the enter key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted should not be brought close to each other ( It is formed (separated from each other). Further, when the setting change board 1310Y is provided with the enter key button, the setting switch 1311a can be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key 1311a is turned on. The switch 1311a'may be used (the mode of the decision key button (the mode of the setting switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (2)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle 182 in the handle unit 180. The detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects the above, and the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will are the payout control board 633. It may be branched in the above and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via the payout control board 633, and whether or not the determination key is ON may be determined based on these detection signals. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the palm or finger is touching the handle 182 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, while the palm or finger is on the handle 182. When not touching, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON, and / or when the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194, the decision key is ON. On the other hand, when the launch of the game ball B is not forcibly stopped, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON (even if the mode of the handle touch sensor (including the mode of the single-shot button operation sensor) is included. Good) may be described as "a modified example of the enter key (3)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, the firing timing control circuit provided in the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 described later. The firing reference pulse is branched from the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via the payout control board 633, and the presence or absence of the determination key ON is determined based on these firing reference pulses. May be good. The firing reference pulse is a reference pulse in which 100 game balls B can be launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and is generated based on a clock signal from the oscillation circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the emission reference pulse from the payout control board 633 is input, while it is determined that the determination key is not ON when the emission reference pulse is not input. (The mode of the emission reference pulse may be described as "variation example (4) of the determination key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but a distance measuring sensor capable of detecting the movement of the player sitting on the opposite side of the pachinko machine 1 When the detection signal from the distance measuring sensor is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the relay board, the detection signal from the distance measuring sensor is branched and relayed on the relay board. It may be input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via the board, and the presence or absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on this detection signal. In the distance measuring sensor, the light emitted by the light emitting unit passes through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and is reflected on the player's arm or hand within a predetermined distance dimension. The reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by the light receiving unit, so that the movement of the player can be detected. In this case, when the detection signal from the distance measuring sensor is input via the relay board, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is an operation based on the detection signal, and when it is determined that there is an operation, the enter key is turned on. While it can be determined that there is, when it is determined that there is no operation, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON (the mode of the distance measuring sensor may be described as "a modification of the determination key (5)"). ..

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the operation unit 1311j 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation, and the setting key can be turned ON. The ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the operation unit 1311j is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. The switch 1311a can be turned on, and the signal for turning on the decision key is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the operation unit 1311j that turns on the setting switch 1311a. By rotating the operation unit 1311j 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotation position to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j that turns off the setting switch 1311a), the setting switch 1311a is turned off. The setting switch 1311a can be turned off, and the initial position is the original position from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off so that it returns to, and this OFF signal is sent from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control board 1310X. Although it was supposed to be input to the control MPU 1310a, the setting switch 1311a is provided with a serial output circuit capable of serially outputting the information for transmitting the setting key ON, the enter key ON, and OFF as serial information to the outside. You may. Thereby, the security for the signal from the setting switch 1311a can be improved. The setting switch 1311a provided with this serial output circuit is provided in the setting change board 1310Y, but may be provided in the main control board 1310X or in the payout control board 633 instead. When the serial information serially output from the serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, the main control MPU 1310a uses the received serial information to set key ON, enter key ON, and It is possible to determine which of the OFFs is to be transmitted (the mode of the setting switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be described as "a modification of the determination key (6)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the operation unit 1311j 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. The ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the operation unit 1311j is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. The switch 1311a can be turned on, and the signal of turning on the decision key is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the operation unit 1311j that turns on the setting key 1311a By rotating the operation unit 1311j 60 degrees counterclockwise to return from the rotation position to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a), the setting switch 1311a is turned off. The setting switch 1311a can be turned off, and the initial position is the original position from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the operation unit 1311j clockwise by 60 degrees and turning it off so as to return to, and this OFF signal is sent from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control board 1310X. Although it was supposed to be input to the control MPU 1310a, the setting switch 1311a is provided with a pulse output circuit capable of outputting information for transmitting the setting key ON, the enter key ON, and OFF as a pulse signal to the outside. May be good. Thereby, the security for the signal from the setting switch 1311a can be improved. The setting switch 1311a provided with this pulse output circuit is provided in the setting change board 1310Y, but may be provided in the main control board 1310X or in the payout control board 633 instead. For the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit, for example, the pulse width is set to 1 ms when the information conveys the setting key ON, and the pulse width is set to 3 ms when the information conveys the enter key ON. If the information conveys OFF, the pulse width is set to 5 ms. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, the main control MPU 1310a sets key ON, enter key ON, from the input pulse signal. It is possible to determine which of the above and OFF is the information to be transmitted (the mode of the setting switch 1311a having the pulse output circuit may be described as "a modification of the determination key (7)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the operation unit 1311j 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. The ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the operation unit 1311j is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. The switch 1311a can be turned on, and the signal for turning on the decision key is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the operation unit 1311j that turns on the setting key 1311a By rotating the operation unit 1311j 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotation position to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j that turns off the setting switch 1311a), the setting switch 1311a is turned off. The setting switch 1311a can be turned off, and the initial position is the original position from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the operation unit 1311j clockwise by 60 degrees and turning it off so as to return to, and this OFF signal is sent from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control board 1310X. Although it was supposed to be input to the control MPU 1310a, the voltage level of the setting key ON signal, the voltage level of the enter key ON signal, and the voltage level of the OFF signal can be changed from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control board 1310X. An intermediate potential (for example, a potential of 2V to 3V out of 0V to 5V) is used between the substrates, a comparator circuit is provided on the main control board 1310X, and the comparison result by the comparator circuit is sent to the main control MPU 1310a. Upon input, the main control MPU 1310a may determine ON / OFF of the setting key ON signal, ON / OFF of the determination key ON signal, and ON / OFF of the OFF signal. Thereby, the security for the signal from the setting switch 1311a can be improved (the mode of the setting switch using the intermediate potential may be described as "variation example (8) of the determination key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise) to turn the decision key ON. The ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, the payout control board 633 may be provided with a decision key button having a pressing operation unit. Good. In this case, the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the enter key button, and corresponds to the press operation portion of the enter key button. A structure in which a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body with respect to the opening so that the payout control board 633 cannot be modified by invading the wire or the like through the "gap" formed in the opening. Become. When the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed. It can be determined that the enter key is not ON when the pressing operation is not performed.

The position where the decision key button is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be near the error release switch 633d having the pressing operation unit described later. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, there is a sticker on which the name of each button is printed at the position corresponding to the enter key button and the error release switch 633d so that the enter key button and the error release switch 633d are not confused. It is affixed (the name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this sticker). Further, so that the enter key button and the error release switch 633d are not confused, a button with a cover covering one of the enter key button and the error release switch 633d (to press the push operation unit). It is necessary to open the cover), or a different color of the pressing operation unit may be adopted, or the outer shape of the enter key button and the error release switch 633d or the pressing operation. A switch having a different shape of the portion may be adopted, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation portion may be adopted as the enter key button. Other types of switches that do not have a push operation unit as a decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. The switch can be mentioned. Further, when the decision key button and the error release switch 633d are provided on the payout control board 633, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the error release switch 633d are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The payout control board 633 is formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other), and the connection to the connector terminal of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310X) is also formed separately. Also in the main control board 1310X, the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the enter key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the error release switch 633d is transmitted should not be close to each other (mutually). It is formed (separately). Further, when the decision key button is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting switch 1311a can be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key 1311a is turned on. The switch 1311a'may be used (the mode of the decision key button (the mode of the setting switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (9)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise) to turn the decision key ON. The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, a signal from the error release switch 633d having a pressing operation unit on the payout control board 633. Is branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via the payout control board 633, and the presence or absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on this signal. As described above, the error release switch 633d is for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display 633c, and the system of the pachinko machine 1 is started up after the power is restored (power supply of various control boards). When the time-on processing is completed and the interrupt processing is being performed) and no error has occurred in the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation unit of the error release switch 633d is not operated at all. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation unit of the error release switch 633d is operated based on the signal from the error release switch 633d, while the error release switch 633d is used. When the pressing operation unit of the error release switch 633d is not operated based on the signal, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the decision key ON (the mode of the error release switch may be described as "a modification of the decision key (10)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead, a signal from the error release switch 633d having a pressing operation unit on the payout control board 633. The payout control MPU633aa of the payout control board 633 monitors and creates a command in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later, and creates a command in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later. A command may be transmitted to the main control board 1310X, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X that has received this command may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. As described above, the error release switch 633d is for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display 633c, and the system of the pachinko machine 1 is started up after the power is restored (power supply of various control boards). When the time-on processing is completed and the interrupt processing is being performed) and no error has occurred in the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation unit of the error release switch 633d is not operated at all. Therefore, in the main control MPU 1310a, the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the pressing operation unit is operated based on the signal from the error release switch 633d in the frame command reception processing in the main control timer interrupt processing described later, and determines that fact. When the command to be transmitted is received, it can be determined that the enter key is ON, while the payout control MPU633aa determines that the pressing operation unit is not operated based on the signal from the error release switch 633d and conveys that fact. Is received, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the decision key ON (Aspect 2 of the error release switch may be described as "a modification of the decision key (11)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310X, and the initial position (that is, the setting switch 1311a) which is the original position from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on is set. The setting switch 1311a is operated by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j to be turned off, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise) to perform the second ON operation. The decision key can be turned ON, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead of this, the RAM clear switch 1310f Is provided on the payout control board 633, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633, and is branched at the payout control board 633 and mainly via the payout control board 633. The presence or absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on the operation signal input to the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310X and input to the main control MPU 1310a. As will be described later, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated at the time of power recovery (to be exact, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), When the setting is changed so that the setting value can be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Be sure to clear the area excluding the specific area out of all the areas of.). Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in the RAM clear switch 1310f. Can be diverted as the determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a turns on the determination key when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. On the other hand, it is determined that the determination key is not ON when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. Can be done. As a result, security can be improved with respect to whether or not the decision key is ON.

The pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the pressing operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f is performed. Foreign matter intrusion prevention similar to the foreign matter intrusion prevention portion 1301v so that the payout control board 633 cannot be modified by invading a wire or the like through the "gap" formed in the portion and the opening corresponding thereto. The part is formed.

The position where the RAM clear switch 1310f is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be near the error release switch 633d having the pressing operation unit described later. The name of each button is printed on the cover body of the payout control board 633 at the position corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch 633d so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch 633d are not confused. A sticker is affixed (the name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this sticker). Further, in order not to confuse the RAM clear switch 1310f with the error release switch 633d, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation portion of either the RAM clear switch 1310f or the error canceling switch 633d (pressing operation of the pressing operation unit). It is necessary to open the cover in order to do so.), The color of the pressing operation unit may be different, and the outer shape of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch 633d may be adopted. Alternatively, a switch having a different shape of the pressing operation unit may be adopted, or another type of switch that does not have the pressing operation unit may be adopted as the RAM clear switch 1310f. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as the RAM clear switch 1310f include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. Various switches can be mentioned. Further, when the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch 633d are provided on the payout control board 633, the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern to the error release switch 633d are used in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The payout control board 633 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other), and the connection to the connector terminal of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310X) is also separated. In the main control board 1310X as well, the wiring pattern in which the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the error release switch 633d is transmitted should not be brought close to each other. It is formed (separated from each other). Further, when the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting switch 1311a can be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key 1311a is turned on. The setting switch 1311a'may be used (the mode of the RAM clear switch (the mode of the setting switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (12)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310X, and the initial position (that is, the setting switch 1311a) which is the original position from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on is set. The setting switch 1311a is operated by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the setting key cylinder rotation position) to be turned off, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise) to the second ON operation. The decision key can be turned ON, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead of this, the RAM clear switch 1310f Is provided on the payout control board 633, and the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is monitored by the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on processing described later, and a command is issued. The command created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on processing, which will be described later, is transmitted to the main control board 1310X, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X that receives this command determines whether or not the decision key is ON. You may. As will be described later, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated at the time of power recovery (to be exact, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), When the setting is changed so that the setting value can be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Be sure to clear the area excluding the specific area out of all the areas of.). Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in the RAM clear switch 1310f. Can be diverted as a decision key, and the main control MPU 1310a is a RAM clear switch 1310f based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process described later. When the payout control MPU633aa determines that the pressing operation unit of is being operated and receives a command to that effect, it can be determined that the decision key is ON, while the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 can be used. When the payout control MPU633aa determines that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated based on the operation signal of the above and receives a command to convey that fact, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. Thereby, the security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the decision key ON (the aspect 2 of the RAM clear switch (the aspect of the setting switch 1311a' may be included)) is referred to as "a modification of the decision key (13)". May be described as).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the out-port left sensor 1008a and the out-port right sensor 1008b are input to the main control board 1310X via the panel relay board 1710, and the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on. Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a), and then rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise. The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. However, instead of this, the out-port left sensor 1008a and the out-port right sensor 1008b are input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via (via) the payout control board 633, and are mainly used. Whether or not the determination key is ON may be determined based on the detection signals from the out-port left sensor 1008a and the out-port right sensor 1008b to which the control MPU 1310a is input. As described above, the game balls launched into the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 are collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a. As described above, the game ball collected by the out port 1008 is detected by either one of the out port left sensor 1008a and the out port right sensor 1008b. Therefore, in the main control MPU 1310a, the door frame 3 is open to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a, and the out port left sensor 1008a and the out port are out. Based on the detection signal from any one of the right sensors 1008b, it can be determined that the decision key is ON when the out port 1008 collects the game ball, while the door frame 3 has a door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. When it is not open (that is, it is closed) and / or when the out port 1008 is not collecting the game ball based on the detection signals of the out port left sensor 1008a and the out port right sensor 1008b. It can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be set as the setting switch 1311a'in which the setting switch 1311a can be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on. The mode of the setting switch 1311a'may be included)) may be described as “a modification of the decision key (14)”). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B to the out port 1008 in order to turn on the determination key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the out-port left sensor 1008a and the out-port right sensor 1008b are input to the main control board 1310X via the panel relay board 1710, and the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on. Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j that turns off the setting switch 1311a), and then rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise. The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (by operating), and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. However, instead of this, the payout control MPU633aa of the payout control board 633 transfers the logic of the detection signal from the out port left sensor 1008a and the out port right sensor 1008b to the port for processing when the power of the payout control unit is turned on, which will be described later. A command is created by monitoring in the input process, a command created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on processing described later is transmitted to the main control board 1310X, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X that receives this command is transmitted. May determine whether or not the enter key is ON. As described above, the game balls launched into the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 are collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a. As described above, the game ball collected by the out port 1008 is detected by either one of the out port left sensor 1008a and the out port right sensor 1008b. Therefore, in the main control MPU 1310a, the game ball is collected by the out port 1008 based on the detection signals from the out port left sensor 1008a and the out port right sensor 1008b in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process described later. When the payout control MPU633aa determines and receives a command to convey that fact, it can be determined that the decision key is ON, while the payout control MPU633aa determines that the game ball has not been collected by the out port 1008. When a command to that effect is received, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be set as the setting switch 1311a'that can be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on (aspect 2 of the out port switch). (The mode of the setting switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (15)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B to the out port 1008 in order to turn on the determination key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball cut detection sensor 574, or the payout detection sensor 591 Is input to the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633, and is branched at the payout control board 633 and is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via the payout control board 633, and these detection signals are input. The main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the decision key is ON based on the above, or the logic of the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball cutout detection sensor 574, or the payout detection sensor 591 is distributed to the payout control board 633. The control MPU633aa monitors and creates a command in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later, and transmits the command created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later to the main control board 1310X. , The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X that has received this command may determine whether or not the decision key is ON. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be set as the setting switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on (the mode (setting) of the payout unit. The aspect of the switch 1311a'may be included)) may be described as “a modification of the decision key (16)”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise) to turn the decision key ON. The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a is based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b. , When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, it can be determined that the decision key is ON, while when the main body frame 4 is maintained in the open state with respect to the outer frame 2. It can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be set as the setting switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on (aspect of the main body frame opening switch). (The mode of the setting switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (17)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to turn on the decision key, and after turning on the decision key, the outer frame 2 is closed. It is necessary to open the main body frame 4 again, pull out the setting key K1 from the insertion port of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 again with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise) to turn the decision key ON. The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a is based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, it can be determined that the determination key is ON, while when the door frame 3 is maintained in the closed state with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be set as the setting switch 1311a'that can be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on (aspect of the door frame opening switch). (The mode of the setting switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (17)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the decision key. It is necessary to close the door frame 3 again, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the rotation of the operation unit 1311j that is the original position from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key 1311a provided on the setting change board 1310Y is turned on (that is, the rotation of the operation unit 1311j that turns off the setting switch 1311a). Rotate the setting switch 1311a 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it back to the position) to turn it off, and then rotate it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it back to the position) to turn the setting switch 1311a ON by the second ON operation. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but this setting switch 1311a may be provided on the main control board 1310X. (The mode of the setting switch may be described as "a modification of the enter key (18)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the rotation of the operation unit 1311j which is the original position from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1310Y is turned on (that is, the rotation of the operation unit 1311j which turns off the setting switch 1311a) Rotate the setting switch 1311a 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it back to the position) to turn it off, and then rotate it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it back to the position). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. However, this setting switch 1311a is provided in the main control board 1310X and the setting switch 1311a is provided. The setting switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the operation unit 1311j from the rotation position to the initial position and turning it off, and the OFF signal is the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the OFF signal is input, while it determines that the determination key is not ON when the OFF signal is not input. Can be done. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be set to the setting switch 1311a'in which the setting switch 1311a can be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on. The mode of the setting switch 1311a'may be included)) may be described as “a modification of the decision key (19)”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise) to turn the decision key ON. The ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, the main control board 1310X may be provided with a decision key button having a pressing operation unit. Good. In this case, the pressing operation unit of the decision key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the decision key button, and the pressing operation unit of the decision key button and the pressing operation unit thereof. Between the portion corresponding to the opening of the cover body 1301 and the pressing operation portion so that the main control board 1310X cannot be modified by invading a wire or the like through the corresponding opening and the "gap" formed in the cover body 1301. A foreign matter intrusion prevention unit similar to the foreign matter intrusion prevention unit 1301v (see FIG. 264) is formed in the above. When the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed. It can be determined that the enter key is not ON when the pressing operation is not performed.

The position where the decision key button is arranged on the main control board 1310X may be near the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, a sticker on which the name of each button is printed at the position corresponding to the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so that the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this sticker). Further, so that the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused, a button with a cover covering one of the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f (to press the push operation unit). It is necessary to open the cover), or a different color of the pressing operation unit may be adopted, or the outer shape of the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f or the pressing operation. A switch having a different shape of the portion may be adopted, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation portion may be adopted as the enter key button. Other types of switches that do not have a push operation unit as a decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. The switch can be mentioned. Further, when the decision key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are provided on the main control board 1310X, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The main control board 1310X is formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other). Further, when the decision key button is provided on the main control board 1310X, the setting switch 1311a can be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key 1311a is turned on. The switch 1311a'may be used (aspect 2 of the decision key button (aspect of the setting switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as a "modification example (20) of the decision key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise) to turn the decision key ON. The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead, based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f to which the main control MPU 1310a is input. You may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. As will be described later, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated at the time of power recovery (to be exact, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), When the setting is changed so that the setting value can be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Be sure to clear the area excluding the specific area out of all the areas of.). Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in the RAM clear switch 1310f. Can be diverted as the decision key, and the main control MPU 1310a determines that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the other hand, based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed. As a result, security can be improved with respect to whether or not the decision key is ON. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be set as the setting switch 1311a'that can be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on (aspect 3 of the RAM clear switch). (The mode of the setting switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (21)"). The period during which the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed is limited to the time when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is a payout control board 633, as will be described later. Since it is input to the payout control MPU 633aa, when the RAM clear switch 1310f is configured to also have the function of the error canceling switch 633d described later, the payout control board 633 does not need the error canceling switch 633d.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, the gate sensor 2401 of the gate unit 2003 provided on the game board 5 and various prizes Various mouth sensors (for example, second start port sensor 2402, large winning port sensor 2403, first entrance sensor 2406, general winning port sensor 3001, first starting port sensor 3002), out port left sensor 1008a And the main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the out port right sensor 1008b is input may determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be set to the setting switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on (aspects of various sensors and the like (modes such as various sensors). The mode of the setting switch 1311a'may be included)). In this case, the person who changes the setting value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 to send the game ball B to the gate portion 2003 in order to turn on the decision key, and various prizes are awarded. It is necessary to send the game ball B to the mouth or to send the game ball B to the out door 1008.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead, the main control MPU 1310a is an electrical drive source for stepping motors, DC motors, solenoids, etc. The drive control of the movable body (accessory) is controlled, and the original position and operating position of the movable body (accessory) are determined based on the detection signal from the optical sensor (photo sensor, ranging sensor, etc.). In the case of determination, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on the detection signal from the optical sensor. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be set as the setting switch 1311a'that can be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on (of the optical accessory sensor). A mode (a mode of the setting switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (23)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the decision key, and the optical sensor is in the original position of the movable body (accessory). It is necessary to move the movable body (accessory) so as to detect the operating position and the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, detection from the magnetic sensor 3003 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a to which the signal is input may determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be set to the setting switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on (the mode (setting) of the magnetic sensor). The aspect of the switch 1311a'may be included)) may be described as “a modification of the decision key (24)”). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to bring the magnet closer from the front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front of the game board 5 in order to turn on the determination key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, the pachinko machine 1 vibrates by shaking or hitting it. Is added to change the course of the game ball flowing down the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5, and vibration is detected to detect fraudulent acts of entering the ball into various winning openings and gates provided in the game board 5. When the sensor 3006 (see FIGS. 241 and 242 and 245) is provided on the gaming board 5, the main control MPU 1310a determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor 3006, and also from the vibration sensor 3006. The presence or absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on the detection signal of. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be set as the setting switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on (the mode (setting) of the vibration sensor. The aspect of the switch 1311a'may be included)) may be described as “a modification of the decision key (25)”). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn on the determination key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, the pachinko machine 1 was irradiated with radio waves to provide various prizes to the game board 5. When the game board 5 or the payout device 580 is provided with a radio wave sensor for detecting a fraudulent act of illegally acquiring the game ball B by malfunctioning the various sensors of the mouth or the various sensors provided in the payout device 580, the main control MPU1310a May determine the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor, and may determine the presence or absence of the determination key ON based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be set to the setting switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on (a mode (setting) of the radio wave sensor. The aspect of the switch 1311a'may be included)) may be described as “a modification of the decision key (26)”). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to irradiate the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves in order to turn on the determination key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, the pressing to detect the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360. The detection signal from the detection sensor 381 and the detection signals from the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 that detect the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation button unit 360 are input to the peripheral control board 1510. At the same time, the peripheral control board 1510 may be branched and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be set to the setting switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j in which the setting key 1311a is turned on (aspect of the effect operation button unit). (Aspects of the setting switch 1311a'may be included.) May be described as "a modification of the decision key (27)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y are housed in the internal space 1320s of the main control board box 1320 composed of the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302. The 1310Y may be housed in a separate setting change board box and arranged around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. In the main control board box 1320, the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are crimped by a one-way screw or the like of the caulking portion 1303. The caulking portion 1303 is a sealing mechanism 1320z, and is provided with a plurality of the caulking portions 1303. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 with a one-way screw or the like of the caulking portion 1303 using one sealing mechanism 1320z, and then the main control board box 1320 is opened. Therefore, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism 1320z. That is, the cover body 1301 cannot be removed from the base body 1302 unless the sealing mechanism 1320z is destroyed. Such a structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, the front surface of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a and the pressing operation unit of the enter key button are exposed through the openings formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to each. The setting change board 1310Y cannot be modified by invading a wire or the like from the "gap" formed in the front surface of the operation unit 1311j of the setting switch 1311a and the opening corresponding to the pressing operation unit of the enter key button. In addition, a foreign matter intrusion prevention portion similar to the foreign matter intrusion prevention portion 1301v (see FIG. 265) is formed between the portion corresponding to the opening of the cover body and the pressing operation portion. When the structure of the setting change board box is different from the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above and is configured so that the cover body can be opened or closed from the base body, the structure of the base body is changed. A setting change board cover body open / close switch capable of detecting the opening of the cover body may be provided. In this case, the detection signal from the open / close switch for the setting change board cover may be directly input to the main control board 1310X, or (indirectly) input to the main control board 1310X via the setting change board 1310Y. It may be configured to be. It is possible to include that the cover body is released from the base body based on the detection signal from the open / close switch for the setting change board cover body in the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition (setting change board box). The embodiment may be described as "a modified example of the determination key (28)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y and the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X are configured to be connected, and in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the setting key of the setting switch 1311a is formed. The wiring pattern in which the ON signal is transmitted, the wiring pattern in which the decision key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern in which the OFF signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, and the signal from the setting switching button 1311b. Is formed on the setting change board 1310Y so as not to approach each other (separate from each other) as a routing with and to the wiring pattern to be transmitted, and the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y (main control board 1310X). The connection to the connector MSCN terminal) is also formed separately, and the main control board 1310X also transmits the wiring pattern in which various signals from the setting switch 1311a are transmitted (that is, the setting key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted). Wiring pattern, the wiring pattern in which the OK signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern in which the OFF signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted) and the wiring pattern in which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted. Although they were formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other), the wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted and the decision key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a are transmitted. One of the wiring patterns is connected to the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X via another connector provided on the setting change board 1310Y separately. It may be separately connected to another connector provided on the main control board 1310X (connection between boards), or another connector provided on the setting change board 1310Y and another connector provided on the main control board 1310X. May be electrically connected via a harness (the mode of routing the wiring pattern may be described as "a modification of the determination key (29)").

Further, the mode in which the determination key is appropriately selected and combined from the above-described modification keys (1) to (29) may be adopted. May be described).

[30-2. Other form of main control unit]
The above [30-1-2. In the main control unit 1310 described in [Main control unit], the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y are separate bodies (hereinafter, referred to as “divided board structure”), but both control boards 1310X and 1310Y are one. It may be formed of a single substrate (hereinafter referred to as “single substrate structure”).
The main control unit 1300 shown in FIGS. 253 to 256 accommodates a main control unit 1310 having a single board structure having a main control MPU 1310a for controlling the progress of a game, and the main control unit 1310, and is attached to a board holder 1200. It includes a main control board box 1320 as an accommodating body.
Each element such as a component and a member provided in the main control unit 1310 of the single board structure is provided in the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y of the divided board structure except for the structural features described below. The function and operation method are the same as. Therefore, regarding the function and operation method of each element, mainly [30-1. Main control unit (2)] to [30-1-2-3. Setting switch, setting change button, setting indicator] is used.
On the contrary, the structural features of each element described below can also be applied to the main control unit 1310 having a split board structure including the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y described above.

[30-2-1. Main control board box]
As shown in FIGS. 253 and 254, the main control board box 1320 is generally composed of the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302, and is formed in the internal space 1320s formed by superimposing the cover body 1301 on the base body 1302. The main control unit 1310 is housed.
The cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are molded of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, polycarbonate), whereby the state of the front surface side and the back surface side of the main control unit 1310 (whether or not they have been tampered with) or Whether or not an illegal IC chip is mounted) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320.

[30-2-2. Main control unit]
In the divided board structure, the main control unit 1310 sets the main control board 1310X that controls the progress of the game and the payout of the game ball B, and the game setting regarding the winning probability of the lottery and the distribution rate to the area that is advantageous to the player. For example, electronic components (main control MPU 1310a, setting display 1310g, resistor 1310r, etc.) and setting switch 1311a provided on each of the setting change boards 1310Y that can be set to any of the setting values of a plurality of stages. , The circuit component including the setting switching button 1311b and the like is appropriately arranged on one board (hereinafter, also referred to as “printed board”) 1310t.
The main control unit 1310 is attached to the base body 1302 side of the main control board box 1320 in FIG. 254 for convenience of explanation, but is actually a female provided at an intermediate position between the four corners and the longitudinal side of the cover body 1301. The screw cylinder 1301n is screwed with a screw (not shown).

[30-2-2-1. Placement of circuit components]
Here, the arrangement of the circuit components on the printed circuit board 1310t will be described.
As shown in FIG. 254, the printed circuit board 1310t has a substantially rectangular shape, and the main control MPU 1310a, which is an electronic component, is attached to the substantially central portion thereof, and the setting switch 1311a is attached to the corner portion (details of attachment of the setting switch 1311a). Will be described later), and other electronic components such as the IC 1310i, the resistor 1310t, and the capacitor and other circuit components are arranged in the entire area. The setting switch 1311a attached to the printed circuit board 1310t has a top portion fitted in the opening 1301h formed in the cover body 1301 as described later, and faces the outside from the opening 1301a in that state.

As is well known, the main control MPU 1310a includes a plate-shaped resin package 1310ab and a plurality of pins 1310ap provided in rows on both front and rear surfaces of the lower edge of the package 1310ab (hereinafter, a plurality of pins 1310ap arranged in a row). Is also collectively referred to as a "pin group"). The main control MPU 1310a is arranged in the substantially center of the printed circuit board 1310t with the rows of the pin groups oriented substantially parallel to the longitudinal side of the printed circuit board 1310t, and the front and rear pin groups are arranged at that position on the printed circuit board 1310t. It is soldered to.

It should be noted that [30-1-2-3. Setting switch, setting changeover button, setting indicator], the ON / OFF signal of the setting switch 1311a and the detection signal from the setting changeover button 1311b are input to the main control MPU1310a, and further, the main control MPU1310a Control is performed to change the set value of the game setting inside the game. Therefore, by accessing the specific pin 1310aq connected to the setting switch 1311a and the setting changeover button 1311b in the pin group of the main control MPU 1310a, it is possible to change the setting value of the game setting from the outside. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is a specific electronic component that can be the target of tampering, and the specific pin 1310ap of the pin group is the specific pin 1310aq that can be the target of tampering.

[30-2-3. Setting switch]
As shown in FIGS. 254, 255, and 256, the setting switch 1311a has a substantially cubic mounting portion 1311d mounted on the substrate of the main control unit 1310 and a circle that can be inscribed in the square top of the mounting portion 1311d. It is roughly composed of a cylinder-shaped setting key cylinder 1311e having a smaller diameter and smaller than the height of the mounting portion 1311d, and is a step in which the upper stage portion (setting key cylinder 1311e) is superposed on the lower stage portion (mounting portion 1311d) in appearance. It is in a stacking form.

[30-2-3-1. Mounting part]
The mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a is roughly composed of a resin main body portion 1311f having an electrical functional portion inside and a mounting bracket 1311g that covers the upper surface and the side surface of the resin main body portion 1311f. The insertion piece 1311h protruding from the bottom of 1311g is inserted into the substrate of the main control unit 1310 and fixedly mounted on the circuit.
The mounting bracket 1311g is provided with a notch 1311i at substantially the center of the four sides of the top. Therefore, the top of the mounting portion 1311d is flat around the setting key cylinder 1311e and the center of each side is uneven due to the notch 1311i. It has become.

[30-2-3-2. Setting key cylinder]
The top of the setting key cylinder 1311e of the setting switch 1311a is an operation unit 1311j, and an insertion port for inserting the setting key K1 is provided in the operation unit 1311j. By inserting the key body K10 of the appropriate setting key K1 into the insertion port of the operation unit 1311j and twisting the key knob K11 in a predetermined direction, the set value can be changed and the set value can be confirmed as described above.

[30-2-4. Main control board box cover and setting switch]
As shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 255, the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 is provided with an opening 1301h for allowing the operation unit 1311j of the setting key cylinder 1311e of the setting switch 1311a to face the outside. The receiving cylinder portion 1301i is projected toward the internal space 1320s side so as to surround the opening 1301h.
The inner diameter of the receiving cylinder portion 1301i is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the mounting portion 1311e in order to facilitate the insertion and removal of the setting key cylinder 1311e when attaching and detaching the main control unit 1310 to and from the cover body 1301 (for example). (Approximately 7 to 8% in design dimensions), therefore, the gap t1 shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 255 loosely fits the set key cylinder 1311e.
The setting switch 1311a is shaped so that the position of the operation portion 1311j at the top is deeper than the outer surface of the cover body 1301 in the state of FIGS. 255 and 256 in which the setting key cylinder 1311e is fitted in the receiving cylinder portion 1301i. A concave recess 1301k is formed by the operation portion 1311j and the opening 1301h of the cover body 1301.

Note that FIG. 259 shows another form of the recess 1301k, in which the recess 1301k is formed with an inclined tapered surface 1301p that descends toward the center. The reflection of the room lighting by the tapered surface 1301p of the recess 1301k makes a part around the setting switch 1311a conspicuous, which makes it easy to understand intuitively. Therefore, the setting switch 1311a of the main control board box 1320 can be arranged on the hinge side of the door frame or the like, which is difficult to see in common sense and is easily avoided. By doing so, the door frame or the like can be widened. Without it, it is possible to improve the crime prevention performance by preventing fraud. In this case, if the main control unit 1310 has a divided board structure in which the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y are separated, the setting change board 1310Y is arranged at the above-mentioned advantageous position for crime prevention, and the tapered surface of the recess 1301k. It is also possible to make the effect of 1301p more exerted.
The radial size and inclination angle of the tapered surface 1301p are arbitrary, but in general, in a transparent synthetic resin molded product, the visibility of the bent portion is reduced and it becomes difficult to find illegal work on the circuit components under the tapered surface 1301p. Therefore, for example, another circuit component (electronic component) itself or a circuit component (electronic component) that needs to be checked (part number) is arranged near the setting switch 1311a and under the tapered surface 1301p. It is conceivable to make the tapered surface 1301p larger than the size of the display unit) to ensure the necessary visibility. Further, the size of the tapered surface 1301p may be associated with the degree of inclination, such that the inclination angle is made gentle in order to increase the tapered surface 1301p.
Further, FIG. 260 shows another form of the recess 1301k, in which an inner flange piece 1301q is provided in the opening 1301h so that the entry path of the foreign matter is further bent. As a result, the difficulty of inserting the foreign matter and the subsequent operation can be remarkably increased, so that the crime prevention performance against the foreign matter can be further improved. Although the tapered surface 1301p is formed together with the inner flange piece 1301q in the recess 1301k of FIG. 260, the inner flange piece 1301q may be provided in the recess 1301k without the tapered surface 1301p as shown in FIGS. 255 and 256. Good.

As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 255, the distance t2 between the cylinder end portion 1301z of the cylinder receiving portion 1301i of the cover body 1301 and the top of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a is the distance t2 between the receiving cylinder portion 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e. The length of the receiving cylinder portion 1301i is set so as to be equal to or less than the gap t1. In this way, the axial gap t1 between the receiving cylinder portion 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e and the axial distance t2 between the cylinder end portion 1301z of the receiving cylinder portion 1301i and the top of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a are t1 ≧ t2. By doing so, it is possible to effectively prevent fraudulent insertion of foreign matter such as a wire through the gap t1 between the receiving cylinder portion 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e.
This is because the radial gap t1 between the receiving cylinder portion 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e is usually set to the minimum width (clearance) required for passing the setting key cylinder 1311e through the receiving cylinder portion 1301i. Since the foreign matter passing through here is limited to an extremely thin one, even if such a thin foreign matter passes through the gap t1, the direction is changed after hitting the top of the mounting portion, and in that state, a portion having an interval t2 equal to or less than the gap t1. It is not easy to break through, and even if it breaks through, it is extremely difficult to control the foreign matter toward the target point (for example, the specific pin 1310aq of the main control MPU 1310a which is the specific electronic component described above). Is.

In particular, in the embodiment, the lower mounting portion 1311d is higher in the internal space 1320s than the upper setting key cylinder 1311e, so that the cylinder end 1301z of the receiving cylinder 1301i and the mounting switch 1311a are mounted. The position of the axial distance t2 from the top of 1311d is a relatively high place in the internal space 1320s. Therefore, as shown in the imaginary line of FIG. 258, for example, the fraudster draws out the foreign matter W that has penetrated the narrow gap t1 and the narrow gap t2 into the internal space 1320s, and causes the tip of the foreign matter W to come into contact with the printed circuit board 1310t by bending due to its own weight. , It is necessary to perform the operation of switching the direction of the tip in the contact state to the target direction, but it is so with a foreign substance W that is bent and hangs down due to its own weight and the force is not transmitted well to the tip. It is difficult to perform such operations.
Further, since it is difficult for the foreign matter W that hangs down from a high place on the side surface of the setting switch 1311a to wrap around toward the vicinity (foot) of the setting switch 1311a, FIGS. 257 and 258 are located in the vicinity of the setting switch 1311a. The specific pin 1310aq of the main control MPU 1310a (specific electronic component) may be arranged as in the above. By setting the unauthorized intrusion warning port of the foreign matter W at a high place in the internal space 1320s in this way, an important part of the main control MPU can be arranged in the vicinity of the unauthorized intrusion warning port. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom in the arrangement of.

By the way, the main control unit 1310, which is the support base of the setting switch 1311a, is a plate-shaped printed circuit board, and can be bent when the setting switch 1311a is pushed. Therefore, by strongly pushing the setting switch 1311a to bend the main control unit 1310, the distance t2 between the cylinder end portion 1301z of the receiving cylinder portion 1301i and the top of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a is forcibly widened. In such a case, as shown by the imaginary line in FIG. 258, there is a possibility that the linear foreign matter W may break through.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, by attaching the setting switch 1311a to the vicinity (corner corner portion) of the screw fixing portion (joint portion) of the main control unit 1310, the deflection of the main control unit 1310 is suppressed and the interval t2 is set. It is not possible to perform fraud that is forced to expand. Further, suppressing the bending of the main control unit 1310 when the setting switch 1311a is operated is also effective in preventing cracks and the like of the main control unit 1310 when used for a long period of time.

Further, as described above, each side of the top of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a is uneven due to the notch 1311i due to the work of the mounting bracket 1311g, but the receiving cylinder is to mesh with the unevenness of the mounting portion 1311d. The cylinder end portion 1301z of the portion 1301i is also uneven. Specifically, by projecting the convex portion 1301m into the cylinder end portion 1301z corresponding to the notch 1311i of the mounting portion 1311d, the relationship of t1 ≧ t2 as a whole. Is to be maintained.

As described above, the distance t1 between the gap t1 between the receiving cylinder portion 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e, the cylinder end portion 1301z of the receiving cylinder portion 1301i, and the top of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a is set to t1 ≧ t2. Alternatively, the configuration in which the interval t2 is located at a high place in the internal space 1320s and the configuration in which the tapered surface 1301p is provided in the recess 1301k of the opening 1301h are one of the foreign matter intrusion prevention portions 1301v that prevent the intrusion of foreign matter such as wires. Corresponding to the embodiment, therefore, the foreign matter intrusion prevention unit 1301v has a stepped portion such as the setting switching button 1311b and the RAM clear switch 1310f, in which the pressing operation unit 1311p as the upper stage is projected from the mounting portion as the lower stage. It can be applied to a push button type switch member or a slide type switch member in a stacked form at low cost without separately adding a cylinder body 1301c such as a foreign matter intrusion prevention unit 1301v shown in FIG. 264.

Further, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 255, the thickness of the convex portion 1301 m of the tubular end portion 1301z of the receiving cylinder portion 1301i is made thinner than the thickness of the receiving cylinder portion 1301i, and the distance between the opposing convex portions 1301 m is large. It is formed so as to be larger than the inner diameter of the receiving cylinder portion 1301i. Further, a taper 1301j is provided at the boundary between the inner surface of the convex portion 1301m and the inner peripheral surface of the receiving cylinder portion 1301i, and the top of the setting key cylinder 1311e is captured and guided by the convex portion 1301m and the taper 1301j. , Can be smoothly fitted to the receiving cylinder portion 1301i. As described above, the clearance between the setting key cylinder 1311e and the receiving cylinder portion 1301i is set to the minimum necessary for crime prevention. Therefore, it is difficult to insert the setting key cylinder 1311e directly into the receiving cylinder portion 1301i, but the convex portions 1301m are connected to each other. Workability can be significantly improved by setting the interval between the two to be wider than the inner diameter of the receiving cylinder portion 1301i. Moreover, in the configuration in which the convex portion 1301 m is used as the introduction guide for the setting key cylinder 1311e, the receiving cylinder portion 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e are fitted as compared with the case where the inner circumference of the cylinder end of the receiving cylinder portion 1301i is chamfered in a tapered shape. Since the length can be increased, the security performance against the insertion of foreign matter can be improved.
In the embodiment, the shape of the receiving cylinder portion 1301i is made cylindrical according to the setting key cylinder 1311e, but it may be made into a square cylinder shape matching the top shape of the square mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a. In that case, the inner dimension of the square cylinder is made smaller than the contour shape of the top of the mounting portion 1311d, and a gap t2 is formed between the cylinder end 1301z of the receiving cylinder 1301i and the top of the mounting 1311d of the setting switch 1311a. You should do it.

[30-2-5. Main control unit and back cover of main body frame]
The main control unit 1300 configured as described above is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 of the main body frame 4 as described above, and the rear surface of the main body frame 4 is as shown in FIG. The back cover 640 is covered together with the game board 5. In the embodiment, the back cover 640 of the main body 4 covers the opening 1301h of the main control unit 1300, so that the opening 1301h is set to the setting key cylinder 1311e by a key or the like without intentionally providing a cover for crime prevention. Unauthorized access can be prevented. This eliminates the need for an extra cover to protrude from the opening 1301h, making it easier to keep the depth dimension of the gaming machine within the specified range without pressing other elements.
Further, as shown in the enlarged view of the imaginary line enclosure of FIG. 255, a bulging portion 640b that can be fitted (free-fitted) to the recess 1301k of the cover body 1301 may be provided on the inner surface of the back cover 640. .. By doing so, when the recess 1301k of the cover body 1301 and the bulging portion 640b of the back cover 640 do not match, the bulging portion 640b of the back cover 640 interferes and does not close normally. , It is possible to prevent defects in the installation of the main control unit 1300.
In the embodiment, the rotation center of the back cover 640 is provided on the side opposite to the rotation center of the main body frame 4, but the rotation center is the rotation center of the back cover 640 with respect to the main body frame 4. It may be provided on the same side as. Then, the back cover 640 can be opened without rotating the main body frame 4 significantly, and the game setting value of the control unit 1300 can be changed in that state. Therefore, the efficiency of the game setting value changing work can be improved. Can be up.

[30-3. Security structure]
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present invention includes game settings related to the interests of the player as setting values of a plurality of stages, and the setting values are set by the setting switch 1311a, the setting switching button 1311b, the setting display 1310g, and the like. It can be changed by the changing operation means, and a security structure is provided to prevent such an unauthorized change of the set value of the game setting. A specific example of the security structure will be described below.

[30-3-1. Security structure of main control unit (1)]
As described above, in the main control unit 1300 of the embodiment, the arrangement of the opening 1301h through which the setting switch 1311a is passed and the main control MPU 1310a as the specific electronic component T is arranged in the row direction of the pin group including the specific pin 1310aq (one-dot chain line in FIG. 254). L2), the virtual straight line L1 connecting the specific pin 1310aq of the main control MPU 1310a and the opening 1301h intersects diagonally.
The main control unit 1300 is not provided with a foreign matter countermeasure such as the foreign matter intrusion prevention portion 1301v of the embodiment between the opening 1301h and the setting switch 1311a which is a circuit component, and as a result, the opening 1301h Even if a wire-like foreign matter is inserted into the internal space 1320s of the main control board box 1320 through the gap of the setting switch 1311a and it can reach the specific pin 1310aq of the main control MPU 1310a, the foreign matter and the specific pin 1310aq are electrically connected. Since it is difficult to apply the contact load required for stable connection, it is not possible to electrically access the main control MPU 1310a after all. Therefore, fraud due to foreign matter can be prevented.
Further, if the opening 1301h is on an extension line in the row direction of the pin group including the specific pin 1310aq (see the alternate long and short dash line L2 in FIG. 254), that is, the alternate long and short dash line L2 is connected to the specific pin 1310aq and the opening 1301h. When the straight line L1 overlaps with the straight line L1, it is possible to protect the specific pin 1310aq by using another pin 1310ap as a shield, and therefore, fraud due to a foreign substance can be prevented.
Further, the main control MPU 1310a is arranged at the substantially center of the rectangle so that the longitudinal side of the substantially rectangular printed substrate 1310t and the row direction of the pin group are substantially parallel as in the embodiment, and the opening 1301h, That is, if the setting switch 1311a is arranged on the short side side of the printed substrate 1310t, more preferably at the corner portion, the distance between the specific pin 1310aq and the opening 1301h is increased and the angle of the straight line L1 connecting the two is sharpened. It is possible to effectively prevent fraud caused by foreign matter.
Further, the main control MPU 1310a may arrange the specific pin 1310aq on the opposite side of the opening 1301h with the package 1310ab in between. In this case, since the specific pin 1310aq is located behind the package 1310ab of the main control MPU 1310a when viewed from the opening 1310h, even if a foreign matter is inserted through the gap between the opening 1301h and the circuit component, the foreign matter is identified. It is practically difficult to bring it into contact with the pin 1310aq, and thus fraud due to foreign matter can be prevented.

[30-3-2. Security structure of main control unit (2)]
The main control unit 1300 of the embodiment is a specific electronic component T in which the main control MPU 1310a can be a target of illicit work, but in reality, an input circuit is formed between the main control MPU 1310a and the setting switch 1311a by an electronic component such as a resistor. In that case, the electronic component constituting this input circuit also corresponds to the specific electronic component T that may be subject to illicit work.
Therefore, in the embodiment, as the security structure (2) of the main control unit 1300, the setting switching button 1311b, the setting display 1310g, the resistor 1310r, etc. are specified between the circuit component corresponding to the opening 1301h and the specific electronic component T. Circuit components other than electronic components are arranged in a barricade shape as obstacles 1310s, whereby foreign matter can be prevented from reaching the specific electronic component T. Therefore, fraud due to foreign matter targeting the specific electronic component T can be prevented.
When this security structure (2) is used in combination with the security structure (1), a higher security effect can be obtained.
Specifically, fraud due to foreign matter is more effectively prevented by arranging circuit components in a barricade shape between the main control MPU 1310a of the crime prevention structure (1) and the opening 1301h to form an obstacle portion 1310s. Can be done.
For example, like the setting switch 1311a and the main control MPU 1310a shown by the solid line in FIG. 250, the connectors SMCN and MSCN (electronic components) that connect the setting change board 1310Y of the divided board structure and the main control board 1310X are sandwiched between them. Deploy. In this case, the connectors SMCN and MSCN can be made to function as the faulty portion 1310s against the foreign matter inserted from the setting switch 1311a side toward the main control MPU 1310a, and even if the faulty portion 1310s is breached, the fault is broken. The instability of overcoming the unit 1310s and the instability of oblique contact with the main control MPU 1310a make fraud due to foreign matter extremely difficult. This effect is the same when the main control MPU 1310a is arranged at the position shown by the imaginary line in FIG. 250.
Further, the setting switch 1311a is drawn at the position of the imaginary line in FIG. 250 (in the figure, the setting switch 1311a is drawn in a sideways state, but the explanation here is that the setting switch 1311a is in the same direction as the solid line setting switch 1311a. When the main control MPU 1310a is provided at the position of the imaginary line, the setting display 1310g is sandwiched between the setting switch 1311a and the main control MPU 1310a. In this case, the setting display 1310 g can be made to function as an obstacle portion 1310s against a foreign matter inserted from the imaginary line setting switch 1311a toward the main control MPU 1310a of the imaginary line, and the obstacle portion 1310s is tentatively used. Even if it is breached, the instability of overcoming the obstacle portion 1310s and the instability of oblique contact with the main control MPU 1310a make fraud by foreign matter extremely difficult.

The obstacle portion 1310s of the security structure (2) does not necessarily have to be a circuit component. For example, the main control portion 1310 has a split substrate structure described above in which the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y are separated. A partition wall (a structure in which the partition wall 1302b of FIG. 266 is integrally molded on the cover body 1301 side) for partitioning the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y is provided inside the cover body 1301, and the partition wall is used as an obstacle portion 1310s. May be good. In this case, the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y may be connected by the connectors SMCN and MSCN as described above, but both connectors are provided with connectors having a connecting structure to be inserted and removed in the direction orthogonal to the board surface. It is better to connect with a harness. Foreign matter moving along the printed circuit board 1310t cannot enter the connector having such a coupling structure due to the difference in the traveling direction. Therefore, even if the connector is a specific electronic component connected to the specific pin 1310aq of the main control MPU 1310a, fraud cannot be performed. ..

The security structures (1) and (2) of the main control unit 1300 have been described above. Of course, in these security structures (1) and (2), the gap t1 between the receiving cylinder portion 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e described above The distance t2 between the cylinder end portion 1301z of the cylinder receiving portion 1301i and the top of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a is t1 ≧ t2, or the distance t2 is positioned at a high place in the internal space 1320s. Further, a high crime prevention effect can be obtained by combining a configuration in which the tapered surface 1301p is provided in the recess 1301k of the opening 1301h.

[30-3-3. Security structure of change operation means (A)]
The first security structure (A) for preventing unauthorized operation of the change operation means is a specific specification for controlling the start of setting change of the change operation means, as described above for the embodiments of FIGS. 250 to 256. It is composed of a setting switch 1311a (having a key insertion portion on the front surface portion) for turning on the operation portion by the setting key K1. As a result, the set value of the game setting by the change operation means can be changed only by a specific person including the manager of the game hall having the setting key K1.

The change operation means is for changing the set value, and in the embodiment, it is composed of a power switch 630a, a setting switch 1311a, a setting changeover button 1311b, and a setting display 1310g, of which the setting switch 1311a is the main. It is a specific operation unit provided in the control unit 1310 to control the start of setting change, and another operation unit provided in the main control unit 1310 to perform a setting operation other than the start of setting change. .. No security measures have been taken for this separate operation unit other than the foreign matter intrusion prevention unit 1301v that prevents the intrusion of foreign matter such as wires. Therefore, an external input operation (pressing operation of the setting switching button 1311b) The pressing operation of the unit 1311p) can be performed by anyone other than a specific person, but the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the setting switch 1311a, which is the specific operation unit, is turned on by the setting key K1 is satisfied. Since the input in the non-existing state is invalid in terms of control, there is almost no problem in crime prevention.

As shown in the figure, the setting switch 1311a, which is the specific operation unit of the change operation means, has its axis oriented in a direction orthogonal to the substrate surface of the main control unit 1310, and in the form of FIGS. The tip portion protrudes from the outer surface of the cover body 1301, but the protrusion may interfere with the depth of the island equipment of the game hall, and may also interfere with storage.

In such a case, as shown by an imaginary line in FIGS. 250 and B, the axis of the change operation means (for example, the setting switch 1311a having the key insertion unit) operated by the setting key K1 is the substrate of the main control unit 1310. For example, the orientation is set so as to be substantially parallel to the surface, and the tip surface (key insertion surface) thereof faces the side surface side of the main control board box 1320. Specifically, the key insertion portion is changed so as to protrude from the front left end (hinge portion side) of the board surface of the main control unit 1310 (so as to protrude from the board end). The operating means is changed to the board surface of the main control unit 1310. A semi-circular notch formed in the base body 1302 of the main control board box 1320, which is an accommodating body, and a main control board so as to be arranged so as to be substantially parallel to the setting switch 1311a. It can be exemplified that the protruding portion of the changing operation means is accommodated in a state where the key insertion portion is exposed to the outside by both the notch portion formed in the cover body 1301 of the box 1320. In order to project the key insertion portion from the left end of the board surface of the main control unit 1310 in front view, the operation unit provided with the key insertion portion may be substantially the same surface as the side surface portion of the main control board box 1320. The surface portion on which the key insertion portion is provided may be projected from the side surface portion of the main control board box 1320, but it is preferable to form the recess 1301k as described above.

As a result, the protrusion of the changing operation means toward the rear side (back side of the pachinko machine 1) of the main control board box 1320 can be almost eliminated or reduced. Further, when arranging the substrate of the main control unit 1310 in the base body 1302 or the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, the key insertion portion protruding from the end of the substrate is accommodated in the notch portion to form a main body. It is also possible to facilitate the positioning (alignment) of the substrate of the control unit 1310 and reduce the burden of the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1.

[30-3-4. Security structure of change operation means (B)]
The second security structure (B) for preventing unauthorized operation of the change operation means includes the change suppressing means 1312 that covers at least a part of the change operation means and the change suppressing means 1312, as shown in FIGS. 261 to 266. It is composed of a first state holding means (hereinafter, also referred to as a lock portion) 1313 that locks (holds) the change suppressing means 1312.

The changing operation means of the security structure (B) is composed of a power switch 630a, a setting switch 1311a, a setting switching button 1311b, and a setting display 1310g, as in the security structure (A), and is provided in the main control unit 1310. The changing operation means are the setting switch 1311a (hereinafter, also referred to as "specific operation unit 1311a") and the setting switching button 1311b (hereinafter, "separate operation"), excluding the power switch 630a provided in the power supply unit 620c. Part 1311b ”) and a setting display 1310g for displaying a set value. In this crime prevention structure (B), the setting switch 1311a, which is a specific operation unit, and the setting changeover button 1311b, which is a separate operation unit, are both small push button switches that can be turned on and off by pressing the pressing operation unit 1311p. It does not have a security structure other than the foreign matter intrusion prevention unit 1301v that prevents the intrusion of foreign matter such as a wire.

The change suppressing means 1312 of the crime prevention structure (B) covers at least a part of the changing operation means in order to make the changing operation of the game setting difficult, and the specific configuration will be described later, but at least one of the changing operating means. It changes into a first state that covers the part and makes it difficult to change the game setting, and a second state that exposes the changing operation means covered in the first state and enables the changing operation of the game setting. obtain.
Here, at least a part of the change operation means means that not only the whole case where the change operation means consists of a plurality of elements, but also one element related to the change operation which is indispensable for the game setting in the plurality of elements may be used. To do. It also means that even if one element of the changing operation means is not completely covered, there may be some gap if it is difficult to change the game setting. That is, the concept of covering at least a part of the change operation means includes both the above-mentioned numerical ones and the above-mentioned qualitative ones.

The lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 of the crime prevention structure (B) locks (holds) the change suppressing means 1312 in the first state and specifies the lock (holding), although the specific configuration will be described later. It is released by the release operation of the change suppressing means 1312, and the change from the first state to the second state and the change from the second state to the first state are switched.

[30-3-4-1. Change suppression means and lock unit (first state holding means)]
The change suppressing means 1312 and the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 of the specific crime prevention structure (B) will be described with reference to FIGS. 261 to 266.
First, the change suppressing means 1312 (D) of FIG. 261 has a flat plate shape that covers substantially one half of the outer surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 (that is, a part of the housing body), and is formed on the main control unit 1310. The specific operation unit 1311a (setting switch 1311a) and another operation unit 1311b (setting changeover button 1311b) of the provided change operation means, and the RAM clear switch 1310f can be collectively covered. The change suppressing means 1312 can rotate like a single door by axially attaching one end side to the bearing portion 1301a of the cover body 1301, and as shown by the solid line in FIG. 261, the specific operation portion 1311a The first state that makes it difficult to change the game setting by covering the above, and the second state that exposes the specific operation unit 1311a and the like to enable the change operation of the game setting, as shown by the imaginary line in the figure. Can change (rotate) to.

On the other hand, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (D) of FIG. 261 is a cylinder lock 1313a integrally provided on the free end side of the change suppressing means 1312 (D), and the rotary lock of the cylinder lock 1313a. By engaging the lock member 1313c provided at the tip of the shaft 1313b with the lock receiving member 1301b projecting from the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, the change suppressing means 1312 (D) in the first state and the cover body 1301 And lock the change suppressing means 1312 (D) to the first state.
Further, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (D) uses the unlock key K2 to rotate the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a, and thus the lock member 1301b from the lock member 1301 of the cover body 1301 to the lock member. A specific release operation of removing the 1313c unlocks (holds) the first state of the change suppressing means 1312 (D) to enable a change to the second state, and further changes from the second state to the first state. The change suppressing means 1312 (D) that has been made can be locked (held) by the unlocking key K2.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 provided with the security structure (B) of the change suppressing means 1312 (D) and the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (D) of FIG. 261 has the set value of the game setting by the change operating means. Since the change can only be made by a specific person who has the unlock key K2, there is almost no problem in crime prevention as in the security structure (A) even if the change operation means itself does not have a security structure for changing the game setting. ..

The change suppressing means 1312 (D) is made of a transparent (for example, transparent) synthetic resin, and even if the change operating means is covered in the first state, the visibility of the changing operating means is not hindered. Further, when the change suppressing means 1312 (D) is in the first state and covers the cover body 1301, the cover body 1301 and the change suppressing means 1312 (D) are placed at positions where they do not overlap with each other. It is provided with an information display unit 1314 in which a sentence is described. As a result, it is possible to easily find the replacement of the cover body 1301 and the change suppressing means 1312 (D) (collection of parts in good condition) performed for the purpose of concealing fraud, and further, the change operation means, particularly the specific operation unit. It is easy to visually confirm the illegal work of 1311a.

Further, the change suppressing means 1312 (D) has a size and shape that covers a part of the cover body 1301, but for example, the change suppressing means 1312 (D) has a size and shape that can completely cover the main control unit 1300. At the same time, the bearing portion 1301a and the lock portion 1301b of the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (D) may be provided on the fixing member (for example, the substrate holder 1200) on the main body frame 4 side. By doing so, the safety of the main control unit 1300 as a whole can be enhanced.

Further, the security performance of the change suppressing means 1312 (D) is tentatively obtained by providing the rotation center (bearing portion 1301a) on the free end side of the main body frame 4 as shown in FIG. 261 to temporarily lock the lock portion (first state). Even if the holding means) 1313 (D) is destroyed, further crime prevention is possible. That is, as shown by an imaginary line in the figure, the change suppressing means 1312 (D) becomes a tsuitate in an open state, and a wall near the left side of the change operation means (specific operation unit 1311a, another operation unit 1311b). The change suppressing means 1312 (D), which is configured to play a role of guarding in a shape, is in an open state when the act of illegally performing a change operation on the change operation means from the free end side of the main body frame 4 is opened. It can be blocked by itself. That is, by providing the rotation center of the change suppressing means 1312 (D) on the free end side of the main body frame 4 in this way, it is possible to protect the change operating means in the first state, and of course, the tsuitate in the second state. It is possible to prevent an illegal change operation for the change operation means. Further, in order to enjoy such an effect to the maximum extent, the change suppressing means 1312 (D) of FIG. 261 has a length (distance) protruding from the bearing portion 1301a toward the rear of the pachinko machine 1 when it is opened. ) Is larger than the length (distance) from the bearing unit 1301a to the location where the change operation means (specific operation unit 1311a, separate operation unit 1311b) is arranged, and the change suppression means 1312 in the open state ( The change operation means (specific operation unit 1311a, another operation unit 1311b) is located closest to the right side of D). Further, the place where the change operation means (specific operation unit 1311a, another operation unit 1311b) is arranged is set to a position close to the center of the vertical length of the change suppression means 1312 (D), and the change operation means (specific operation unit 1311a, another operation) is set. Access from above and below the portion 1311b) is made difficult, and the rotation of the change suppressing means 1312 (D) is stopped (fixed) in a state of standing upright. Although it is possible to improve the crime prevention performance by having a part of each of these configurations, it is most preferable to satisfy all of them.

On the contrary, the change suppressing means 1312 (D) may be reduced so that only the specific operation unit 1311a is covered, and the separate operation unit 1311b may not be covered in either the first state or the second state. In this way, by narrowing down the protection target of the change operation means consisting of multiple elements (specific operation unit and separate operation unit) to those with high security importance, those with low security importance are opened to the outside. By keeping it, the workability of changing the settings can be improved.

The axis of the changing operation means described in the crime prevention structure (A) is set so as to be substantially parallel to the substrate surface of the main control unit 1310, and the tip of the changing operating means faces the side surface of the housing. The technical idea to be removed can also be applied to the cylinder lock 1313a of the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (D).

Next, the change suppressing means 1312 (E) of FIG. 262 is substantially the same as the change suppressing means 1312 (D) of FIG. 261, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.
On the other hand, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (E) of FIG. 262 is on the cover body 1301 side and the perforated lock receiving member 1315 integrally provided on the free end side of the change suppressing means 1312 (E). It is a padlock 1313d in which the projecting perforated lock receiving member 1316 is connected by an inverted U-shaped lock member 1313c, and by engaging the both perforated lock receiving members 1315 and 1316 with the lock member 1313c, the first The change suppressing means 1312 (E) in one state and the cover body 1301 are coupled to lock (hold) the change suppressing means 1312 (E) in the first state.
Further, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (E) uses the unlock key K2 to change the lock member 1313c of the padlock 1313d in the unlocking direction, thereby making a hole in the change suppressing means 1312 (E). The lock (holding) in the first state of the change suppressing means 1312 (E) is released by a specific release operation of removing the lock member 1313c from the perforated lock receiving member 1315 of the lock receiving member 1315 and the cover body 1301. It is possible to change to two states, and the change suppressing means 1312 (E) changed from the second state to the first state can be locked (held) by the padlock 1313d.

The lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (E) uses a well-known padlock 1313d. Therefore, in the unlocked state, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (E) is separated from both the change suppressing means 1312 (E) and the cover body 1301. .. Therefore, the lock portion (first state holding means) (E) is separated from the cover body 1301 (accommodating body) in the unlocked state by connecting to the cover body 1301 with, for example, a wire-shaped or chain-shaped support portion 1317. It is designed not to be done. As a result, there is no risk of the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (E) being dropped into the island facility in the unlocked state, and the removed lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (E). You can eliminate the waste of time of forgetting where you put it and looking for it at the lock stage.

Next, the change suppressing means 1312 (F) of FIGS. 257 to 263 can swing freely by axially attaching a portion corresponding to the main part of the fan in a substantially horizontal fan shape to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320. As shown in FIG. 263, the first state of covering the specific operation unit 1311a of the change operation means and the second state of exposing the specific operation unit 1311a to the outside as shown in FIG. 265 can be changed. Further, the change suppressing means 1312 (F) does not cover the separate operation unit 1311b when it is in the first state with respect to the specific operation unit 1311a, while it is different when it changes to the second state with respect to the specific operation unit 1311a. It is designed to cover the operation unit 1311b. By selectively covering the specific operation unit 1311a and the separate operation unit 1311b with the change suppressing means 1312 (F) in this way, an erroneous operation of simultaneously operating the specific operation unit 1311a and the separate operation unit 1311b is unlikely to occur.

The change suppressing means 1312 (F) is always urged in a direction of covering the separate operation portion 1311b by a winding spring (not shown) provided at the center of the swing, and the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (described later) When the lock (holding) of the first state by F) is released, the state changes to the second state due to the elasticity of the winding spring. By urging the change suppressing means 1312 (F) toward the second state in this way, there is no possibility that the change suppressing means 1312 (F) will stop at a halfway position, and the operability is improved. The urging direction of the change suppressing means 1312 (F) may be either the first state or the second state, but preferably, if the change suppressing means 1312 (F) is urged toward the second state, the change suppressing means 1312 (F) When the lock (holding) of the above is released, the special operation unit 1311a is automatically exposed to the outside, so that the procedure of the change operation is easy to understand.

The lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (F) of FIGS. 263 to 265 includes a mounting base portion 1301d projecting from the cover body 1301, a cylinder lock 1313a fixed to the mounting base portion 1301d, and a cylinder lock 1313a thereof. The cam 1313e is attached to the tip of the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a, and the change suppressing means is formed by sliding the peripheral surface (cam surface) of the cam 1313e with the upper side surface of the change suppressing means 1312 (F). The 1312 is pushed down against the urging of the winding spring to lock (hold) the 1312 in the first state covering the specific operation unit 1311a.
Further, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (F) uses the unlocking key K2 to rotate the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a, and the change suppressing means is caused by the change in the peripheral surface shape of the cam 1313e. By a specific release operation of unlocking the lock (holding) of the 1312 (F), the lock (holding) of the first state of the change suppressing means 1312 (F) is released to enable the change to the second state (embodiment). Since the change suppressing means 1312 (F) is urged in the direction toward the second state by a winding spring (not shown), when the lock (holding) of the first state is released, it slides on the peripheral surface of the cam 1313e. The change suppressing means 1312 (F), which has been changed from the second state to the first state, can be locked (held) by the unlocking key K2.

In the change operation of the set value, when the change suppressing means 1312 (F) is in the second state and covers the other operation unit 1311b, if it is necessary to operate the other operation unit 1311b, the change suppression means The operation projectile piece 1312 m projecting from the 1312 (F) may be manually pushed down by a finger or the like to expose another operation unit 1311b.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 provided with the security structure (B) of the change suppressing means 1312 (F) and the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (F) of FIGS. 263 and 265 depends on the change operating means. Since the setting value of the game setting can be changed only by a specific person having the unlock key K2, even if the changing operation means itself does not have a security structure for changing the game setting, the security structure is the same as the security structure (A). There is almost no above problem.

Next, the change suppressing means 1312 (I) of FIG. 266 has a form in which the portion corresponding to the setting change board 1310X of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 is separated and made independent, and the main control board box 1320 is separated. By engaging its own key-type hinge portion 1312b with the key-type hinge portion 1302a formed on one side of the base body 1302, it is rotatable with respect to the base body 1302 and is provided on the setting change substrate 1310Y. It can be changed into a first state in which the specific operation unit 1311a and the separate operation unit 1311b are collectively covered, and a second state in which the specific operation unit 1311a and the separate operation unit 1311b are exposed to enable the change operation. The cover body 1301 corresponding to the main control board 1310X is rotatably attached to the partition wall 1302b raised from the base body 1302 between the setting change board 1310Y and the main control board 1310X.

The lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (I) of FIG. 266 is a dial lock 1313f provided on the edge of the change suppressing means 1312 (I) on the cover body 1301 side, and the advancing / retreating shaft of the dial lock 1313f. By engaging the tip of 1313 g with the lock shaft thread 1301f provided on the edge of the cover body 1301, the change suppressing means 1312 (I) in the first state and the cover body 1301 are combined to form the change suppressing means 1312 ( I) is locked (held) in the first state.
Further, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (I) rotates a plurality of dials of the dial lock 1313f according to the unlocking number to retract the advance / retreat lock shaft 1313 g, thereby retracting the lock shaft of the cover body 1301. The lock (holding) of the first state of the change suppressing means 1312 (I) is released by a specific release operation of removing the advance / retreat lock shaft 1313 g from the through 1301f to enable the change to the second state, and further, the second state. The change suppressing means 1312 (I) changed from the first state to the first state can be locked (held) by the dial lock 1313f.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 provided with the change suppressing means 1312 (I) of FIG. 266 and the security structure (B) of the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (I) has the set value of the game setting by the change operating means. Since the change can only be made by a specific person who knows the unlocking number of the dial lock 1313f, even if the change operation means itself does not have a security structure for changing the game setting, there is a security problem as in the security structure (A). Is almost nonexistent. The first state holding means 1313 exemplified in the crime prevention structure (B) employs relatively high crime prevention performance such as a cylinder lock 1313a, a padlock 1313d, and a dial lock 1313f, but the crime prevention performance is tentatively lower than these. Anything may be used as long as it has a configuration in which the change suppressing means 1312 held in the first state can be released by a specific release operation.
Further, since the change suppressing means 1312 (I) of FIG. 266 is independent of the cover body 1301, the change suppressing means 1312 (I) can be reused as it is even if it becomes necessary to replace the cover body 1301. is there. Further, when the change suppressing means 1312 (I) is connected to the hinge portion side of the cover body 1301, the cover body 1301 can be rotated only in the second state in which the change suppressing means 1312 (I) is rotated. Therefore, even if an unauthorized person destroys the sealing mechanism 1320z of the cover body 1301, the unauthorized operation cannot be performed unless the specific operation of the change suppressing means 1312 (I), that is, the unlocking number of the dial lock 1313f is known. Therefore, the change suppressing means 1312 (I) can improve the fraud prevention function of the cover body 1301.

[30-3-5. Security structure of change operation means (C)]
In the third security structure (C) for preventing unauthorized operation of the change operation means, the security structure (B) puts the change suppression means 1312 in the second state to expose the change operation means to the outside, and that state. In contrast to the case where the change operation means is directly operated in, the change suppressing means 1312 is provided at a position covering the change operation means on the accommodating body (main control board box 1320) side, and the change operation means can be changed by itself. While making it difficult, the change suppressing means 1312 is made to act for the operation of the change operation means.
That is, as shown in FIG. 267, the change suppressing means 1312 (J) of the crime prevention structure (C) is on the cover body 1301 side which is the accommodating body and is attached to the specific operation unit 1311a (may be another operation unit 1311b). It is provided with a cylinder lock 1313a fixedly provided at a position to cover, that is, a position in a first state covering the opening 1301h for exposing the specific operation unit 1311a, and is directly attached to the specific operation unit 1311a from the outside. Make the change operation difficult.
Further, the change suppressing means 1312 (J) presses the rotation of the end face cam 1313i fixed to the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a so that the switch input can be mediated by a specific operation from the outside. It is provided with a motion conversion mechanism for linear motion of the mover 1313h, that is, a motion capable of operating for switch input.
Then, when a specific operation of inserting the unlocking key K2 into the change suppressing means 1312 (J) to rotate the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a is performed, the specific operation unit 1311a is operated by the above-mentioned action of the motion conversion mechanism. The direct change operation from the outside to the specific operation unit 1311a is replaced by the pressing operation slider 1313h of the change suppression means 1312 (J), in other words, the direct change operation from the outside to the specific operation unit 1311a is the change suppression means. It is executed via the pressing operation slider 1313h of 1312 (J).

According to the change suppressing means 1312 (J), the change operation of the game setting from the outside by the change operation means is fixedly provided at a position of the cover body 1301 side so as to cover the change operation means. Since it is in a difficult state, there is almost no possibility that the game settings will be changed illegally.
On the other hand, when the game setting is changed normally by the change operation means, as a specific operation from the outside to the change suppression means 1312 (J), for example, an operation of inserting the unlock key K2 from the outside and twisting is performed. Then, the direct change operation for the change operation means is performed on behalf of (intermediary execution) by the operation for the change suppression means 1312 (J), and the game setting can be changed.
Then, after the change of the game setting is completed, by ending the specific operation on the change suppressing means 1312 (J), it is possible to return to a state in which it is difficult to directly change the change operation means from the outside.

The change suppressing means 1312 (J) is not limited to the case where the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a is rotated by the unlock key K2, for example, the dial lock 1313f of the change suppressing means 1312 (I) is used to advance / retreat the lock shaft 1313g. The axis of the specific operation unit 1311a and the axis of the pressing operation unit 1311p of the specific operation unit 1311a are arranged so as to coincide with each other, and in a state where each dial of the dial lock 1313f is matched with the unlocking number, the specific operation unit 1311a The pressing operation unit 1311p may be able to press.
Further, when the shutter plate 1319 covering the separate operation unit 1311b is integrally projected from the end face cam 1313i of the change suppressing means 1312 (J) as shown in FIG. 268, and the end face cam 1313i is rotated by a specific operation. The shutter plate 1319 may also be rotated to expose another operation unit 1311b. As a result, not only the unauthorized operation of the separate operation unit 1311b can be prevented, but also the intrusion of dust into the internal space 1320s of the main control board box 1320 can be prevented.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 provided with the security structure (C) of the change suppressing means 1312 (J) shown in FIGS. 267 and 268, the change of the game setting set value by the change operation means has the unlock key K2. Or, since it can be performed only by a specific person who knows the unlocking number, even if the changing operation means itself does not have a security structure for changing the game setting, the same security problem as the security structure (A) Almost none.

The axis of the changing operation means described in the crime prevention structure (A) is set so as to be substantially parallel to the substrate surface of the main control unit 1310, and the tip of the changing operating means faces the side surface of the housing. The technical idea to be removed can also be applied to the cylinder lock 1313a of the change suppressing means 1312 (J).

[30-4. About technical ideas]
As is clear from the explanation so far, the above [30-2. Other forms of main control unit] to [30-3-2. The pachinko machine 1 provided with the main control unit 1300 described in [Security structure of main control unit (2)] corresponds to an embodiment of the following technical idea.
"A game machine in which a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a predetermined profit is given to the player when the result of the lottery is a win.
A main control unit having a main control MPU that controls the progress of the game,
A main control board box that houses the main control unit,
A setting switch provided in the main control board box and capable of changing the game setting regarding the winning probability of the lottery to any one of a plurality of stages is provided.
The main control board box includes a base body and a transparent cover body that covers the base body, and houses the main control unit in an internal space between the cover body and the base body.
On the other hand, the setting switch has a setting key cylinder that is rotated by a setting key, and is formed so that the operation portion of the setting key cylinder faces the outside from an opening opened in the cover body.
Further, in the setting key cylinder of the setting switch, the position of the operation portion is recessed from the outer surface of the cover body, and a concave recess is formed by the operation portion and the opening. ,
Further, the recess is a gaming machine characterized by having a tapered surface that is inclined downward toward the center. "
According to such a game machine, since the setting value of the game setting can be changed only by a specific person having a setting key, it is difficult for an illegal operation to be performed.
On the other hand, when changing the set value with the setting key, it is necessary to open the front door frame etc. and work quickly, but first, open the door frame etc. and then change the position of the setting switch of the main control board box. It will take some time to find it. Also, if you rush to work and fail to insert the setting key, the setting key may slip on the operation part and stick out to the resin part of the cover body, and the hard setting key may cause a streak on the surface of the cover body. There is a risk of scratching.
On the other hand, in the main control board box of the game machine of the above technical idea, a concave recess is formed by the operation portion at the top of the setting key cylinder and the opening of the cover body, and the taper is inclined downward toward the center of the recess. Since it has a surface, it is easy to understand intuitively because the part around the setting switch is conspicuous due to the reflection of the room lighting by the tapered surface of the recess. Therefore, the setting switch of the main control board box can also be placed on the hinge side of the door frame, etc., which is difficult to see in common sense and is easily avoided, and conversely, by doing so, the door frame, etc. must be opened wide. Security performance can be improved by preventing fraud.
Further, even if the setting key is missed, the setting key does not hit the tapered surface of the recess of the opening and does not protrude from the surface of the cover body, or it jumps up along the tapered surface so that it does not easily rub against the surface of the cover body. Therefore, the surface of the cover body is not likely to be scratched by the tip of the setting key, and the clean transparent state of the cover body can be maintained for a long period of time (see, for example, paragraphs 2557 to 2579, FIG. 259, FIG. 260, etc.). ).
The tapered surface of the recess can be a factor that reduces visibility due to refraction of light, but the size and inclination angle of the tapered surface are the circuit component itself or the check part of the circuit component arranged below it. The required visibility can be obtained by making it larger than the size of (display part such as product number) or setting the inclination angle to be slow or slow (for example, the inclination angle may be made gentle to widen the tapered surface). Can be secured.

In addition, the above [30-2. Other forms of main control unit] to [30-3-2. The pachinko machine 1 provided with the main control unit 1300 described in [Security structure of main control unit (2)] also includes the following technical ideas. In addition to the main control unit 1300, the control unit of the following technical concept includes a peripheral control unit 1500, a payout control unit 620d, and the like.
Further, the specific electronic component T includes a main control MPU 1310a in which two rows of pin groups are provided on both front and rear surfaces of a plate-shaped package 1310ab, for example, a square package in which four rows of pin groups are provided on four sides. Is also included.
[Claim A1]
A game machine equipped with a control unit in which a control board for games is housed in a control board box.
The control board
Printed circuit board and
A circuit component including an electronic component attached by connecting a plurality of pins arranged in a row to the printed circuit board is provided.
The control board box
With the base body
A cover body having an opening formed to fit the base body and form an internal space with the base body and to allow some of the circuit components to face the outside from the internal space is provided. ,
When a specific electronic component having a plurality of pins arranged in a row is designated as a specific electronic component and a specific pin of the specific electronic component is designated as a specific pin, the opening and the specific electronic component The game machine is arranged so that a straight line connecting the specific pin and the opening can substantially overlap or intersect diagonally in the row direction of a pin group including the specific pin.
According to such a game machine, even if a fraudster inserts a foreign object into the internal space of the control board box through the gap between the opening and the circuit component and aims at the specific pin of the specific electronic component from there. If the straight line connecting the specific pin and the opening (see Fig. 254 code L1) overlaps in the row direction of the pin group including the specific pin (see Fig. 254 code L2), use the other pin as a shield to use the specific pin. It is possible to protect from foreign matter, and when the straight line intersects the pin group at an angle, a sufficient contact load cannot be obtained even if the foreign matter touches the specific pin, so the contact resistance increases and the specific electron Electrical access to components becomes difficult. Therefore, fraud due to foreign matter can be prevented.

[Claim A2]
A game machine equipped with a control unit in which a control board for games is housed in a control board box.
The control board
Printed circuit board and
A circuit component including an electronic component attached by connecting a plurality of pins arranged in a row to the printed circuit board is provided.
The control board box
With the base body
A cover body having an opening formed to fit the base body and form an internal space with the base body and to allow some of the circuit components to face the outside from the internal space is provided. ,
When a specific electronic component having a plurality of pins arranged in a row is designated as a specific electronic component and a specific pin of the specific electronic component is designated as a specific pin, the package of the specific electronic component is sandwiched between them. A gaming machine characterized in that the specific pin is arranged on the opposite side of the opening.
According to such a game machine, since the specific pin is located on the rear side of the package of the specific electronic component when viewed from the opening, even if a foreign substance is inserted through the gap between the opening and the circuit component, the foreign substance is identified. It is practically difficult to bring it into contact with the pin, and thus fraud by foreign matter can be prevented.

[Claim A3]
The printed circuit board of the control board box is formed substantially rectangular, a row of pins of the specific electronic component is arranged substantially parallel to the longitudinal side of the printed circuit board, and the opening is further arranged on the short side side of the printed circuit board. The gaming machine according to claim A1, wherein the gaming machine is arranged in.
In such a game machine, the degree to which the straight line connecting the specific pin and the opening intersects diagonally with respect to the row direction of the pin group including the specific pin can be increased, and the distance from the opening to the specific pin is increased. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to control the foreign matter in the internal space.

[Claim A4]
A game machine equipped with a control unit in which a control board for games is housed in a control board box.
The control board includes circuit components including electronic components.
The control board box
With the base body
A cover body having an opening formed to fit the base body and form an internal space with the base body and to allow some of the circuit components to face the outside from the internal space is provided. ,
When a specific electronic component is used as a specific electronic component, the present invention provides a gaming machine in which the circuit component excluding the specific electronic component is arranged between the specific electronic component and the opening. Examples of the specific electronic component include electronic components that can be subject to fraudulent work.
According to such a gaming machine (pachinko machine 1), circuit components other than the specific electronic component are arranged in a barricade shape between the opening and the specific electronic component, so that the circuit component is inserted through the opening to form the specific electronic component. The foreign matter that is directed hits the circuit component in between. Therefore, since the arrival of foreign matter to the specific electronic component is hindered, fraud caused by the foreign matter targeting the specific electronic component can be prevented.

Further, the main control unit 1300 further includes the following technical ideas.
[Claim B1]
A game machine in which a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a predetermined profit is given to the player when the result of the lottery is a win.
A main control unit having a main control MPU that controls the progress of the game,
A main control board box that houses the main control unit,
A setting switch provided in the main control board box and capable of changing the game setting regarding the winning probability of the lottery to any one of a plurality of stages is provided.
The main control board box includes a base body and a transparent cover body that covers the base body, and houses the main control unit in an internal space between the cover body and the base body.
On the other hand, the setting switch has a setting key cylinder that is rotated by a setting key, and is formed so that the operation portion of the setting key cylinder faces the outside from an opening opened in the cover body.
Further, the setting key cylinder of the setting switch has a concave recess formed by the operation portion and the opening so that the position of the operation portion is recessed from the outer surface of the cover body. A game machine featuring.
According to such a game machine, since the setting value of the game setting can be changed only by a specific person having a setting key, it is difficult for an illegal operation to be performed.
On the other hand, when changing the setting value with the setting key, the setting key that failed to be inserted too quickly may slip on the operation part and stick out to the resin part of the cover body, and the cover body with the tip of the hard setting key There is a risk of streaky scratches on the surface of the plastic.
On the other hand, in the main control board box of the game machine of the present invention, a concave recess is formed by the operation portion at the top of the setting key cylinder and the opening of the cover body, so that the setting key cannot be inserted temporarily. However, the setting key does not hit the edge of the opening and protrude from the surface of the cover body. Therefore, there is no risk that the surface of the cover body will be scratched by the tip of the setting key, and the clean transparent state of the cover body can be maintained for a long period of time.
[Claim B2]
The gaming machine according to claim B1
A back cover that can be opened and closed and the main control board box are attached to the rear side of the main body frame having the game board, and the main control board box is not provided with the cover of the opening, and the opening is used as the main body frame. It is characterized by being able to be covered with a back cover.
In such a game machine, even if a security cover is not provided at the opening of the main control board box, the security performance of the setting key cylinder (prevention of unauthorized access to the setting key cylinder by a key or the like) is provided by the back cover of the main body frame. It can be increased, and since there is no protrusion of the setting key cylinder or extra protrusion of the cover from the opening of the main control board box, the depth dimension of the game machine can be kept within the regulation without pressing other elements. it can.
[Claim B3]
The gaming machine according to claim B2, wherein the inner surface of the back cover is provided with a bulging portion that can be fitted (freely fitted) into the recess of the cover body.
In such a game machine, if the recess of the cover body and the bulge of the back cover do not match, the bulge of the back cover interferes and does not close normally. Therefore, an illegally modified product is found and the main control unit is installed. The above deficiencies can be prevented.

[Claim C1]
A game machine in which a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a predetermined profit is given to the player when the result of the lottery is a win.
A main control unit having a main control MPU that controls the progress of the game,
A main control board box that houses the main control unit,
A setting switch provided in the main control board box and capable of changing the game setting regarding the winning probability of the lottery to any one of a plurality of stages is provided.
The main control board box includes a base body and a cover body that covers the base body, and houses the main control unit in an internal space between the cover body and the base body.
The setting switch has a mounting portion attached to the main control portion and a setting key cylinder which has a cylinder shape smaller than the top shape of the mounting portion and is rotated by a setting key, and is opened on the cover body. The top of the setting key cylinder is formed so as to face the outside from the opening.
Further, the setting key cylinder is fitted into a receiving cylinder portion projecting from the internal space side of the cover body.
On the other hand, by bringing the end of the cylinder on the side opposite to the opening of the receiving cylinder close to the top of the mounting portion that protrudes outside the setting key cylinder of the setting switch, the cylinder end is between the receiving cylinder and the setting key cylinder. A gaming machine characterized in that foreign matter inserted into a gap can be obstructed from passing into the internal space.
According to such a game machine, even if a wire-like foreign matter is inserted into the gap between the receiving cylinder and the setting key cylinder from the opening of the cover body, it hits the top of the mounting portion at the tip of the foreign matter in the traveling direction and ends up. Even if the direction of the tip of the foreign matter can be changed there, it is difficult to pass because the progress is blocked by the narrow gap between the cylinder end of the receiving cylinder and the top of the mounting portion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts caused by a wire-like foreign object aimed at the gap between the receiving cylinder and the setting key cylinder from the opening of the cover body.
Moreover, since the fraud prevention effect can be achieved by using the stepped shape of the setting switch itself, there is almost no special cost.

[Claim C2]
In the gaming machine according to claim C1, the distance between the cylinder end portion of the receiving cylinder portion and the top portion of the mounting portion of the setting switch is larger than the dimension of the gap between the receiving cylinder portion and the setting key cylinder. A gaming machine characterized by being formed in a cylinder.
The gap t1 between the receiving cylinder and the setting key cylinder is usually set to the minimum width (clearance) required for passing the setting key cylinder through the receiving cylinder, and the foreign matter passing therethrough is extremely thin. Even if such a thin foreign object passes through the gap t1, it is not easy to change the direction after hitting the top of the mounting portion and break through the portion of the interval t2 equal to or less than the gap t1 in that state. Moreover, even if it breaks through, it is extremely difficult to control the foreign matter toward the target point after that.

[Claim C3]
The gaming machine according to claim C1 or C2, wherein the setting switch is attached on the surface of the main control unit and in the vicinity of the joint with the main control board box.
Even if the main control unit is pressed in the plane direction, the vicinity of the joint portion of the main control unit with the main control board box is unlikely to bend due to the rigidity of the main control board box. Therefore, by providing the setting switch in that part, it is difficult to sink even if it is pressed from the outside. Therefore, by pressing the setting switch, the main control unit is forcibly pushed down and the interval t2 is forcibly expanded. It becomes hard to be broken. In addition, suppressing the bending of the main control unit when operating the setting switch is also effective in preventing cracks in the main control unit when used for a long period of time.

[Claim D]
A game machine equipped with a control unit in which a control board for games is housed in a control board box.
The control board
Printed circuit board and
A plurality of circuit components mounted on the printed circuit board.
The control board box
With the base body
A cover body having an opening formed to fit the base body and form an internal space with the base body and to allow some of the circuit components to face the outside from the internal space is provided. ,
At least one of the circuit components is a lower portion attached to the printed circuit board and an upper portion having a bottom shape smaller than the top shape of the lower stage portion and a height to the opening smaller than the height of the lower stage portion. , And the upper part is formed so as to face the outside from the opening formed in the cover body.
The opening of the cover body has a receiving cylinder portion that is projected from the internal space side of the cover body and surrounds the upper stage portion of the circuit component.
A gaming machine characterized in that the end of the cylinder on the anti-opening side of the receiving cylinder and the top of the lower portion of the circuit component are brought close to each other.
Here, the bottom of the upper part does not mean the absolute bottom of the upper part, and when the upper part penetrates into the lower part, the side surface of the upper part and the top of the lower part are The apparent part that intersects.
According to such a game machine, even if a linear foreign matter is inserted into the gap between the receiving cylinder portion and the upper stage portion of the circuit component from the opening of the cover body, the top portion of the lower stage portion located ahead in the traveling direction of the foreign matter. It hits a dead end. Even if the direction of the tip of the foreign matter is changed to the side from here and the narrow gap between the cylinder end of the receiving cylinder and the top of the lower stage is forcibly widened and breached, the location is high in the internal space. Because of the position, the fraudster, for example, sent out a foreign object that broke through a narrow space into the internal space, brought the tip into contact with the printed circuit board by bending due to its own weight, and aimed at the direction of the tip in the contact state. It is necessary to perform the operation of switching to the direction, but it is difficult to perform such an operation with a foreign substance that is bent and hangs down due to its own weight and the force is not transmitted well to the tip.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts caused by linear foreign matter aimed at the gap between the opening of the cover body and the receiving cylinder portion and the upper portion of the circuit component.
The circuit components include a setting switch consisting of a lower mounting part and an upper setting key cylinder, a setting switching button consisting of a lower mounting part and an upper pressing operation part, a RAM clear switch, and the like. Can be mentioned.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to suitable embodiments and other embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments and the like, and as shown below, the present invention does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. , Various improvements and design changes are possible.

That is, in the above-described embodiment and the like, those applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine are shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a pachislot machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. , And even in this case, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1100 Game panel 551a Top plate part of payout base 551 (tank unit mounting part)
551ah Mounting part Opening notch 551ar Stepped rib 552 Ball tank (tank unit)
553, 535A tank rail (tank unit)
553d Projection piece 3010 Back box 3010h Back box opening notch 3600 Movable production unit

Claims (1)

The main body frame that can be opened and closed on the outer frame,
A game board that is detachably attached to the main body frame, has a game area portion on the front side through which a game ball can flow down, and has a box-shaped back box portion on the back side.
A spherical tank for storing the game ball, a tank unit that having a, a tank rail portion for guiding downstream the game ball of the spherical tank,
A tank unit mounting member for attaching portion for attaching the tank unit a top of the body frame is formed,
In a game machine equipped with
The said tank unit mounting member, a first opening portion in which the tank unit faces are formed,
The upper part of the back box portion of the game board is characterized in that a second opening that does not overlap with the first opening in the vertical direction is formed in a state where the game board is mounted on the main body frame. A game machine to play.